JP2023144149A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving transmission of a load.SOLUTION: Since a transmission projection A463 is separated form a projection plate A456a during displacement and comes into contact with a plate to be detected A455e that is different from the projection plate A456a, even if an excessive displacement occurs in a gear A462 with a pin, it is possible to avoid an irregular shape slide member A455 being disposed at an unintended position. If the irregular shape slide member A455 is disposed at one end of a direction A416x, a load is applied from the transmission projection A463 to the irregular shape slide member A455 in a direction from the other side of the direction A416x to the one side. Therefore, the irregular shape slide member A455 can be pressed to the end of the one side of the direction A416x by the load.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 345

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-234152

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in load transmission. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve load transmission.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to be able to displace the first displacing means by being displaced in a predetermined direction. The second displacement means includes a load generator that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes: , a loaded part receiving a load from the load generating part, wherein the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and moves to a predetermined position different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. It is configured to be able to come into contact with the part.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, in which the load generating section is arranged in the predetermined direction with the first displacing means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. It is configured such that a load can be applied to the predetermined portion from the other side toward the one side.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and wherein the load generating section is larger than the loaded section. It abuts the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, load transmission can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the displacement mode of the first displacement means when an overload occurs.

According to the game machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, driving force transmission can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotating claw member. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a side view of the lower frame member in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device. (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of the left disk cam. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). It is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Fig. 78 (a), and (c) is a side view of the right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened to the outer frame and the back pack is opened to the inner frame (deployed). It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (expanded). It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member are illustrated side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic diagram schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c); FIG. (a) and (b) are top schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a movable binding member, and a harness, schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 3 is a front view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 3 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line in FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a top view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, the rear assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame, and upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball firing unit showing the ball sending situation by the ball sending device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit, inner rail, and outer rail after firing the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a flower petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage forming member in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and right front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a), (c) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). 229(a) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. (a) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illumination board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line in FIG. 241, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the electrical It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device. 241(a) is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guide unit. (a) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit along the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member, (b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member, and (d) is It is a right view of a transparent cylindrical member as seen in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3(e) is a right view of the optical transmission unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L; FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. FIG. (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. (a) is a front view of the base member and the illumination board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is 269(e) is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272(b). (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal direction device taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the base member taken along the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line in FIG. 272(b), 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate, and the light-receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of a base member, an illumination board, and a light receiving member schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a sectional view of the effect device taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the effect device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. 230 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit in the 20th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame, an operation device, and a lower tray unit in a 21st embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the covered cover member. 296(a) is a top view of the lower pan unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. 296(a) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a). (a) is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower pan unit schematically illustrating the lower pan unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower pan unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. (a) is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. FIG. 3 is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit, schematically illustrating the lower tray unit. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. 312(a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the direction of the rotation axis, and FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). c) is a sectional view of the engagement member taken along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member, the engagement member, and the drive device unit. (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along a line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operating unit, and (b) is a side view of the operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. 303 is a partial sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in FIG. 302. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover. (a) is a front view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331(a). (a) is a front view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line in FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a). be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of a gear with a pin and the same phase member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the left side, and a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the right side. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit. FIG. 356 is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the basis of an initial angle. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit and the rear case. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support part, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support part. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support part, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a top view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). FIG. 3 is a front view of the annular front cover and the rotating body. FIG. 7 is a schematic top view schematically showing a first rotating member in a twenty-third embodiment. It is a back view of the front side unit in 24th embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit along a line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300, which are operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13, are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second winning hole 640 by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing, a solenoid for driving electric accessories, etc., and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 300 is arranged at the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that can be tilted when pushed by a player, and is located in an area formed by a housing recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. will be placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, such that at least the fingers of a hand can comfortably fit therein. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by placing his fingertips on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Note that since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10. is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state (initial state in this embodiment) with the operation surface 312a1 facing in the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operating surface 312a1 is placed in a second state in which it faces upward and backward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of the player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Note that details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The tilting device 310 is operated by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display saying "Press the button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand forcefully downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 will move toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. This causes the palm of the hand to easily rub against the operating surface 312a1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation in a manner in which the hand is dropped forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the palm of the hand remains integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than forcing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, differences in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's perspective will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, but in the second state, the area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the area of the protective lens member 311i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the LED device 341f disposed inside the operating device 300 (see FIG. Since the amount of light (see 12) gradually increases in visibility, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) increases between the first state and the second state. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist as an axis), the user can comfortably press and operate the tilting device 310 while keeping the palm of the hand integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform an operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the outer side surface of the little finger as a fulcrum and not allowing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operating device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies an impact in a straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect a pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged on the outside of the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner area of the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting device 310 can be tilted. The device 310 can be housed in a lower frame member 320. Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end on the back side of the plane of the paper in FIG. 12), and A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing part 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed part arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. and an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering it from three sides, left and right and rearward.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member in which the left and right portions of the bottom slope downward toward the front, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 that slopes downward toward the front; A horizontal part 322 composed of a plate-shaped member arranged horizontally at the rear upper end of the tilting device 310 , and a semicircular receiving part opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal part 322 . A lower bearing part 323 that receives the shaft part 314 from below, a left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the bottom plate part 321, and a horizontal center position of the bottom plate part 321 in the left and right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening created by cutting a portion disposed below the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which a portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. Ru.

The bottom plate part 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central part on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and a left and right hole 321b drilled in the left and right sides of the opening 325. It mainly includes insertion holes 321c that are symmetrically bored.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the attitude of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted therethrough, and also allows the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distance from the bottom plate part 321 of the lower frame member 320 (the position of the detection groove) is the same on the left and right sides.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light emitting part that emits light and a light receiving part that receives the light from the light emitting part, and has a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the detection part can be inserted. This means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, etc. to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, its horizontal width is made larger than the horizontal width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the driving device 340 By pushing up the LED device 340, the LED device 341f can be placed above the opening 325. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face an opening 331 that is large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and a lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. The tilting device 310 mainly includes an upper bearing portion 332 that is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically divisible so that three directions except the front side are covered. A voice coil motor 352 supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side with its vibrating surface directed diagonally forward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; and a right side detection sensor 352. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially torn in order to make visible the right side detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 is disposed in such a manner that its vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320. Thereby, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 extends the protruding convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R. To detect whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and to detect that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR with different phases, the specific phases detectable by the detection sensors 353L, 353R are two. Become a type.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a front view of the tilting device 310. 14A is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along the line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 that is a box-like body with fan-shaped sides and openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging downward, and sandwiched between the case main body 311 and the rear end of the lid 312. a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314; and a ring-shaped spring 315 that fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. It mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side toward the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and a left and right side of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extends from a flange extending downward along the edge toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e that is a groove arranged in a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and that locks the center portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left-side detection pieces 311gL and a right-side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending below the bottom plate part 311a by a predetermined amount toward the front side. a protective lens member 311i arranged above the front end of the bottom plate part 311a and shaped along an arc centered on the shaft part 314 and made of a light-transmitting material; and a bottom plate part 311h. It mainly includes an overhanging protrusion 311j that protrudes downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that makes surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by a player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force between the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)). Equipped with

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are parts that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311gL is The overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft portion 314 is about 3 degrees (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311gL is jutted out compared to the right side detection piece 311gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to the rotation angle (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It consists of aspects.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 14(a)) and a curved shape when viewed from left and right (see FIG. 14(c)). The structure is such that it is easy to release the load when pushing the tilting device 310. Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding convex portion 311j protrudes from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a at right angles, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, so that the projecting portion 311j is configured to protrude from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a, and the tip is extended below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and a top plate member 312a that connects the intermediate plate member 312b to the top plate member 312a. It mainly includes a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size that is fixed to the LED device 341f and surrounds the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 due to its axial rigidity, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the cylindrical member 312c directs the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 through the cylinder. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is released and the LED device 341f is disposed in such a manner that light can be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end having a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and includes both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , is provided.

Next, the drive device 340 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18 is a front view of the drive device 340. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343 in a non-rotatable manner. 344R), an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 and the second A release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhang 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to it as the release member 346 rotates, and a rotating claw member 347 that is tilted downward. The first spring SP1 is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 to move away from each other. It mainly includes a second spring SP2 which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 has a motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right sides and is formed into a U-shape when viewed from above, and a disk portion which is bored at the same position in a plate portion disposed opposite to the motor accommodating portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position offset from the shaft support hole 341b toward the front in a manner that has an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , an extending portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a toward the front and upper direction, and the lighting support portion 341e. It mainly includes an LED device 341f that is disposed at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). Thereby, the light from the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a pivotally supports the rotating gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotating gear.

The arm member 345 has a shaft support hole 345a formed in a perfect circle shape at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape formed at the other end. It also mainly includes a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite to the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position where the disc cam 344 rotates for more than one rotation. formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342. , a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly equipped with

The cylindrical member 343a is provided with fixing parts 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing part 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center than the fixing part 343a1 on the left side. Ru. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the columnar member 343a is inserted and unevenness along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c. 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle rotation) relative to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section into which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the transmission gear 343b. and a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a chevron-shaped convex portion and a concave portion with a top angle of approximately 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c cannot be engaged with each other. Accordingly, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thereby, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

Note that the movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be explained with reference to FIG. 20. In addition, in the disc cam 344, the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirrored in shape, and only the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR differ, so only the left disc cam 344L is different. The explanation of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 18.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions that protrude from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a that protrudes inwardly in a cylindrical shape; a circular rib 344b that protrudes inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a; An engaging rib 344c is a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b and is provided inwardly to protrude and has a portion projecting outward in the radial direction at two places, and an engaging rib 344c has a lower height than the circular rib 344b. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d that has a cylindrical shape and is connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is bored near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other difference is that the right disc cam 344R has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section with an inner periphery that engages with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and an outer periphery that is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). configured. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the support hole 341b.

The circular diameter rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c has a first rib that extends outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. An overhanging portion 344c1, a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position offset from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50° in this embodiment), and a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 extends outward in the radial direction again, and from the second projecting portion 344c3 at an angle θ3 (in this embodiment, an angle θ2 = 150°). θ3=20°), and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

With reference to FIG. 21, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described. Note that the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. In contrast, a small angle state is shown in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

Note that the state in which the release member 346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A convex pin 346b that has an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is provided in the plate thickness direction, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting out at its maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion that can come into contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In this embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that it can smoothly come into contact with the engaging rib 344.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the locus of movement of the protruding pin 346b inside) is drilled to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346, and the end of the second spring SP2. The end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted through the insertion hole 347c into which the first spring is inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 347d that projects downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a. It mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e that is bored in the hole 347e.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the backward rotation direction as a unit, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion 346d When a load is applied in the upward direction to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 can be maintained until the angle reaches the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an example of the operation of the operating device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of the operation when the player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 placed in the first state will be described. Note that in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for ease of understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22, and FIG. Here, the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 by repeatedly hitting the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 degrees in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pressed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. The player may not be able to return in time and may have to perform a pushing operation at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be solved by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 causes the tilting device 310 to resist the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and there is a need to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there were problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed at a position facing the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is driven whenever the tilting device 310 is pressed, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player Since this imposes an unnecessary load, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil By driving the motor 352, it is possible to increase the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. This allows the player to operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down from the first state (a tilting operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the posture has changed is illustrated, and FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the rotation claw member 347 returns to its posture, and FIG. The state in which the tilting device 310 rotates back and forth is illustrated, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the final position, and FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 reaches a second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 by rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount. is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the irradiation intensity of the light from the LED device 341f when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26), and Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The attitude change of the release member 346 is maintained until the disc cam 344 is rotated to a state where the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 is not twisted during that time. It rises due to the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting part 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging part 346d of the release member 346, Due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction that increases the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be viewed from the player's viewpoint increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the up-and-down reciprocating movement can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, so the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed down by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c moves only through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 rotates with the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases his/her hand after the player presses down the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state. .

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 310 has been pushed to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force to assist the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and to produce a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. It can be used for.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 touches the bottom frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who presses the tilting device 310 can check whether vibrations are generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing operation when the tilting device 310 is pressed. Only people can be made to understand it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a jackpot does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means will be reduced.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can only feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when a jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the feeling of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can improve its value as a means of pre-reading. This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilting device 310, and increases the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (in the opposite direction in FIG. By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction, the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, similar to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engagement rib 344c.

Note that from the state shown in FIG. 29, after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes the engagement portion 346d, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25 by the method shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in the direction of pushing it up, and it is possible to rotate only the release member 346 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotating claw member 347. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be explained. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (tilting operation) after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31), and the release member 346 and rotating claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31). 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 34 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates and rotates, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the final position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated with an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 moves in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disc cam 345. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by approximately 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (a posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 increases rapidly and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 obstructs the state change ( This can prevent a situation in which the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 32, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D2 shown in FIG. Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, so the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, as modes of vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movement (tilting movement), the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after the restriction on movement of the device 310 in the upward direction is lifted. Therefore, two types of modes can be created in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared to the case where the operating member 310 makes the same action every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a jackpot), and the player's attention is drawn to the tilting device 310. can improve the degree of

As shown in FIG. 33, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into the state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. (clockwise direction in FIG. 34), and then by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook-shaped portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, if the player releases the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 33 after pressing down on the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 returns to the first state. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of bringing the disc cam 344 into the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the player performs a pushing operation will be described. do. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated forwards (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) beyond the state shown in FIG. (Counterclockwise in FIG. 35), and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes the release member 346 up; The rotating claw member 347 remains in the position shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, by further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and then rotating the rotary cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), The drive device 340 can be placed in a second initial state as shown in FIG.

Note that in this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the process goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it becomes possible to perform the vertical movement (swinging movement) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who presses the tilting device 310 may perform an action of leaving his hand on the tilting device 310 after pressing the tilting device 310, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, when the user forgets to release the hand that pressed the tilting device 310 because he was so focused on the performance, but in this case, even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 will continue to rise. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on While maintaining the state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the opposite direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is (See FIG. 14) is controlled in such a manner that the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340, which is in the ON state.

In the states shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward because the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 changes from the state shown in FIG. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, even when the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, the drive motor 342 is operated in a reciprocating manner (forward/reverse switching). The load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced and the life of the motor can be extended.

Note that when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, if the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) remains in the ON state, Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the opposite direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and there is no need to apply unnecessary load to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a method for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. In addition, in FIG. 38, the player's hand grasping and fixing the tilting device 310 with the tilting device 310 in the second state is illustrated with imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unchecked, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to freely rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction. Power is transmitted, and movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This can prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that if the player does not grip the tilting device 310, due to the configuration of the operating device 300, if the disc cam 344 is rotated once, the tilting device 310 will go through the first state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 does not turn on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) (when the tilting device 310 does not go into the first state) The system determines that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and notifies the player by, for example, displaying the information on the third symbol display device 81 to stop the gripping operation. At the same time, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

This makes it possible to select a case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only then to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and also to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent failure. be able to.

Note that when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c, are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state. By restarting control of the drive motor 352 with that state as the initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, Control can be performed with the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 matched again.

As a result, when performing a performance by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation that the tilting device 310 is caused to perform by controlling the rotation of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. occurrence is prevented. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform the performance.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that rotates idly relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity of this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up from the first state shown in FIG. 40 to the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but also because the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotating claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's perspective, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. 40 and 42 appear to be the same, and the movements after the first state are The operation is different from that shown in FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39); Due to the difference in changes, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be able to grasp the performance that will be executed from now on, which may reduce the player's interest. Furthermore, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is made different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is , only the direction is different, so the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.) can make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction. Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or whether the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is in operation toward the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the level of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and further rotates the drive motor 342, the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, the player can control the performance. Since changes in the level of expectation can be grasped, the player can be informed of the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 enters the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state. You can make them watch over you.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive may be damaged due to the player's erroneous operation when driving the drive motor 342. Overloading the device 340 can be prevented.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load on the drive motor 342 when stopping the drive motor 342 suddenly is eliminated. Therefore, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 25), and The external shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. .

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pressed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are connected to the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship in which the release member 346 does not pass through, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state where it is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 is rotated in the manner shown in FIG. When moving up and down, even if the player presses the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage, and when the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310 returns to the first state (rotation). When the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, it is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from a position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising and continues to move up and down.

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in effect between the operation modes of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can be given a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 does not move up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode until the player presses the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

The difference in performance is that when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 remains in the first state. ) is better than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if you release your hand after pressing the tilting device 310). If a difference is made in that the player has a high expectation of a jackpot, then the player recognizes the expectation of a jackpot or not not only when pushing the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the player's hand from the tilting device 310. Since this opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings in which the player pays attention to the operating device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346. FIG.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

46(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 347b). (see Figure 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation plate member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. A slide claw member 2348 is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , is mainly provided. In addition, in the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed of a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a at the upper end of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like manner toward the left side in FIG. Mainly, a reinforcing part 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved part 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing part 2348c. Be prepared.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state where it is fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , a portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is made of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, and a pull-down hole 347e, as well as a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide A support elongated hole 2347g into which a protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed from a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347, and the opposite side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are arranged so that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (Fig. 46 counterclockwise), it is formed into a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When sliding the slide claw member 2348 with the protruding pin 2348d inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes, in addition to a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, and an engaging portion 346d, a functional elongated hole 2346e that is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. .

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length that is curved along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second elongate hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongate hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. to move the slide.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the movement speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement speed of the protruding pin 2348d without any time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 will slide quickly, but if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the slide claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 may slide when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. There is no movement. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, it is possible to restrict the tilting device 2310 from rising.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 48 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is shown in a state in which it is returned to its original state by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material and fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hooked portion 2348b are disengaged from each other due to the attitude change of the tilting device 2310, so a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. There's no chance of it happening.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with this movement. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of looking ahead by associating the operation modes with the expected level of jackpot. Attention level can be improved.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the slide claw member 2348 rising, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 Since the tilting device 2310 will rise due to the magnetic attraction between the The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand will be lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in the same manner.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expectation level of a jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operating device 2300 as a means of looking ahead, so the degree of attention of the operating device 2300 to the player can be adjusted. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state in which it is pushed in by the player, or in a state in which it is pushed in by the player. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has a right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and a left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extends at a position on the opposite side of the right side detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and located at the center position in the direction of the rotation axis. The left side detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that in FIG. 51(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L, and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. No (the left side detection sensor 324L is OFF and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an OFF state).

By detecting changes in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to determine whether it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether the state is on the way back or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of a pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the push-in end, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is on the way from the push-in end to the first state. . In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state disposed at the push-in end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while , the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

Here, when transmitting the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is transferred to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Rather than causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving upward, it is possible to more effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and if the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and has not reached the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when the voice coil motor 352 is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the upward movement of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be moved up by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment This is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is detected while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of a tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded from the front side of the projecting protrusion 311j of the case body 4311 in a plate shape.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate part 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the push-down operations of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54(a), and the front detection piece 4311k is in the lower detection state. A state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. Note that in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at 20° intervals on a circular arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k is connected to the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e in order. By detecting the interval between the timings of the passage, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and based on this determination, it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when pressing the tilting device 4310 from the second position, since the pressing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), the tilting device The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes higher. Therefore, if the player does not have any means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure in case the player presses with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the end of the push-in, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for players with weak force or players who decide to press gently, the reaction force always increases near the pressing position, which puts a burden on the pressing operation, making it easy to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined based on the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, if the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are respectively switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. While the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, if the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and even a weak force can easily push the tilting device 4310. Can be operated by pushing.

Furthermore, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing is used as a reaction force against the tilting device 4310. can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. The movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed out in advance toward the side closer to the tilting device 4310.

Thereby, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed compared to the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is moved in the contraction direction. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the object. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but has a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to the members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 is already in contact with the voice coil motor 352, so the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 contacts the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 using the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 4310 has been pushed to the final end, an effect can be performed in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the vibration is transmitted to the player who presses the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment , is provided with a drive motor 5411 that rotates a weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is placed at an eccentric position, and is configured in such a manner that vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operating device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is replaced with a lower frame member 5320, and the drive device 340 is replaced with a drive device 5340, compared to the operating device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 houses a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. a flexible member 5420 that is formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, and that accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate sections and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose portion corresponding to the key point of the fan is supported on the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. The main preparation is as follows.

The drive motor 5411 includes fixing portions 5411a arranged in a pair on the left and right sides and formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 rotates, the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body part 5421 in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction, and a main body part 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side to the inserted side. A pair of rib-like leg portions 5422 protruding from the left and right in the radial direction and downwardly, respectively, and a rib-like leg portion 5422 protruding from the left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected. It mainly includes a posture maintaining part 5423 in which a fixing part 5411a is embedded, and a pair of protruding leg parts 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body part 5421 in the shape of a column.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth equal to the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface of the drive motor 5411 on the shaft side and the end surface of the main body portion 5421 on the opening side are formed on the same plane. Furthermore, in this state, the fixing part 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining part 5423.

The rib-like leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-like leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintaining portions 5423 are provided on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar manner, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point when it comes into contact with the tilting device 310, which will be described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, it is possible to finely resolve the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating part 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a second accommodating part adjacent to the first accommodating part 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is accommodated. 5432, and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating part 5431 and the second accommodating part 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is determined from the top surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state). This is the depth at which the protruding leg portion 5424 extends.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is such that it is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load released state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 and the flexible member The depth is such that it interferes with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (assembly loaded state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 59(c) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). Note that in FIG. 59(a), a portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59(a), a first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and a region S51 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player by three degrees from the first state, A terminal region S52, which is a region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the terminal position of pushing, is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding manner in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be maximized.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in an assembly load released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extending direction. Therefore, since the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right in the paper of FIG. 59(b)) when being pushed in. 59(b), and the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left and right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, the lower side of the tilting device 310 becomes convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) shows an assembly load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows that the protruding leg portion 5424 is in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembly load state after being pushed into the first housing part 5431 is illustrated. Note that the external shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and this force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. The impact when 310 collides with lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be alleviated. Furthermore, since the load is based on elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed is slowed down. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 310, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is moved upward compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its orientation. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in a state where the assembly load is released, vibrations due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 do not occur.

Further, vibrations of the drive motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations generated in the drive motor 5411 due to movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430. This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. configured in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 changes to a state where it is more compressed vertically, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 becomes slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be weakened, and the vibrations generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced at uniform intervals left and right from the central axis. Since they are arranged in a pair of left and right pairs, when the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like legs 5422 move outward from the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like legs 5422). (see FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg portions 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the load in the left and right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing part 5432 collide can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of the rib-like leg part 5422 on the lower side of the main body part 5421. can be absorbed. Thereby, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61(a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) illustrate the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be explained. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side under an assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated at a position where the distance from the bottom of the second housing part 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates under assembly load, its outer circumferential side surface contacts (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, compared to the assembly load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating part 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. ). This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force pushing back in the opposite direction).

In this way, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is generated separately from the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By configuring the combination of generated forces, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, from the time when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the convex leg portion 5424 until the tilting device 310 moves toward the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is a force pushing back the tilting device 310. After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased near the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made easier and the impact during the pushing operation can be better alleviated. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 continues to rotate. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and due to the difference in detection timing, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) ) is larger than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 applies the impact to the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to take a downward attitude (see FIG. 61(b)).

Thereby, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (the case where it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped in the upward direction (see FIG. 61(a)), a force pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the generation of force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

Here, the contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310, and to expand the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player presses the tilting device 310, vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pressing, or a part of the side of the hand, can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the player. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembled load state, the weight member 5412 When the housing member 5430 comes into contact with the housing member 5430, vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibrations are transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pressed, so that the player's pressing operation can be detected. The vibrations can be transmitted to the player more easily than when the vibrations are generated from the ground.

In other words, when the player presses the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pushing in a pulsed manner), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pressed. If so, there is a possibility that the vibrations cannot be generated before the player releases his/her hand (the vibrations may not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect caused by the vibrations. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and ready to generate vibrations before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that vibrations can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

Furthermore, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing part 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pressing the tilting device 310, it is possible to create a state in which vibrations are transmitted when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be explained. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. The rest is the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 consisting of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L have symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connection part with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape from the disc portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. Along the axis, an elongated hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetrical elongated hole shape and an axis of the support cylinder P1 recessed by the elongated recess C1 up to a position approximately half of the extension distance. It mainly includes a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the end of the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a because its inner diameter is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

The deformable portion P1a is a portion of a pair of connecting rods arranged with the elongated hole recessed portion C1 in between, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially tilted manner with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part that

The elongated hole recess C1 has a recessed cross section that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

Further, the opposing surfaces of the elongated hole recess C1 have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from a circular arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the cylindrical member 5343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The clamping arm A1 includes an engaging protrusion A1a that protrudes from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other arm in a direction approaching the other arm. . The engaging protrusion A1a engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off from the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engagement convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engagement groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlap length in the radial direction when the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 is greater than when the tip shape is flat or the center is a curved surface with a convexity (see Fig. 65). (b) horizontal length) can be ensured to be long.

In the axial direction, the engagement convex portion A1a has a side surface near the connecting pin 344d that is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 (elongated hole concave portion) recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is in plane with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)) reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared to the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a, the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

Additionally, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (the space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing part 5343a1 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fixing part 5343a1 that is the same as the fixing part 5343a1 with a fitting groove 5343a3 in between from the fixing part 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 which is a groove into which an e-ring is fitted, and which positions the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. The engagement groove 5343a4 is the groove in which the engagement protrusion A1a of the holding arm A1 engages when the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the e-ring 5343a3. Be prepared. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the left-right direction outer side of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 later, the columnar member 5343a is formed with a part where the diameter becomes partially large. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, insert a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then fit the e-ring into the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a relative to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing displacement along the axial direction, the e-ring can also prevent displacement of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

Due to the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder part P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side where the engagement convex part A1a is disposed. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 to a position where it fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a fits between the engagement protrusion A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be expanded. Thereafter, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and as the engagement convex portion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, Then, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing destruction in this embodiment. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 66(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the right disk cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support tube P1 at a position spaced apart from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be able to pivot around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arms A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the cylindrical member 5343a comes into contact with the cylindrical member 5343a, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a increases.

Therefore, if an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, etc. (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) (when a load is applied to restrict the deformation of the right disc cam 5344R with respect to the columnar member 5343a), it is possible to restrict the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R deforms in the direction of lower resistance, so when an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about the support shaft r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the position of the tip of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that in FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and when an overload is applied, the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 67(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which is trying to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which is trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axis tilting deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its shaft tilting deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer periphery of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd, the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d will be misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R will be deformed to tilt its axis.

Due to the axis tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d will fall with respect to the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R in the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other with their surfaces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed due to the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so the player cannot drive the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped from moving by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 counteracts this. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact and the release member 346 moves along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, so that the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line symmetrical to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (in the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point) Therefore, regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is misaligned with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the same way. The axis can be deformed by resistance.

68(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted in FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and the shaft collapses when an overload is applied. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 68(a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2 is illustrated, and the tilting device 310 is A player's hand is shown grasping a .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grasps the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the axis tilting, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the matters described for the right disc cam 5344R are also applicable to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in this axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disc cam 344R makes one revolution, the detection hole 344eR of the right disc cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass the right side detection sensor 353R, and the right side detection sensor Since the input to 353R does not change, an overload is detected.

In this case, a period of time is required to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs before detecting the occurrence of an overload, so there is a problem that overload detection is delayed. there were.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs on the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is detected. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is exemplified (as shown in imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input section, and is arranged as a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of clamping arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. At the same time, the input section is arranged in such a manner that it protrudes toward the support cylinder section P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload condition, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it can be determined at an early stage whether or not an overload has occurred in the disc cam 5344.

Next, an operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment 344c are constructed from separate members, and are configured to be able to rotate relative to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, ring member 6344L2, and second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R also has a different configuration from the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R has a shape that is a mirror copy of the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L will be The explanation of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a disc member 6344L1, which is provided with a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a detection hole 344eL, and is pivotally supported by the columnar member 343a, as in the first embodiment. A ring member 6344L2 is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft part 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc part, and an annular shaped shaft part 344a is arranged in the axial direction at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral part of the circular rib 344b in the radial direction. An annular rib 6344f is provided to protrude along the circumferential direction.

The ring member 6344L2 includes an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b; A cover plate part 6344h is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate part 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed in the thickened portion and are disposed radially outward.

The annular main body 6344g has an inner circumferential diameter larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so in the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 side in the axial direction comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. Thereby, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced compared to the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface contacts the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with a deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 6344L2 rotates. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the rotation speed of the disk member 6344L1 (in such a manner that the disk member 6344L1 rotates once while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , the number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported on a fixed member 6342a in parallel with the transmission shaft rod 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and the auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b is fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be explained that the tilting device 310 can be raised in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotary claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating for more than one rotation, the disc member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated in the opposite direction by the amount exceeded, and the disk member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has moved upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves upward instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the reached position is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c The relative relationship between the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the types of positions that the tilting device 310 can reach can be increased.

That is, when releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See Figure 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 instantly (disc cam 344 rotation) and the position reached can be changed.

As a result, for example, when configuring a gaming machine in such a manner that the level of expectation of the performance changes depending on the height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be adjusted. can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation as to whether the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to reach a lower ascending position.

However, by keeping the normal upward reach position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and making it reach the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation level reaches the maximum, the expectation level The magnitude of the tilting device 310 can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player presses the tilting device 310, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 will rise, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the timing for operating the tilting device 310. You can induce them to do so. Therefore, irrespective of the performance mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the characteristics of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). FIG. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R includes a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. A ring member 7344R2 is inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R2, and an engaging portion 7630 is made immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. It mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed into a cup shape with a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and includes a detection hole 344eR in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup, and an engagement rib. This is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (the part between the first projecting part 344c1 and the first retracting part 344c2 is omitted).

The disc member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on its surface in an assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, In the radial direction, a second circular concave portion 7420, which is a circular concave portion having a smaller diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular concave portion 7410, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are provided. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled, and a fixing member protruding radially outward from the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer circumferential side of the disc member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430. It mainly includes a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An elongated hole 7431 and a second elongated hole 7432 which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending from the bottom end of the disc member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431 along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1. and a return portion 7433 that extends toward the second elongated hole 7432 using the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

The width direction (short side direction) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) size of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable about the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 (the lower end in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed to be movable to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3, and has a height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner circumferential surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. It mainly includes a thick part 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate part 7510 and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, while the resistance to relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so that it approaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter. is made slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This allows the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state, while preventing the relative rotational resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has an irregularly shaped through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses in the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, divided into five equal parts). It mainly includes equally divided recessed portions 7522 provided therein.

The irregularly shaped through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward from the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. configured.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on one side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end (right end in FIG. 77(b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and An engaging portion 7630 extends from the extending tip of the portion 7620 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)), and an engaging portion 7630 is provided on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 opposite to the engaging portion 7630. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when pushed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extending tip thereof is The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that extends inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both the function of a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and the function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(e) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R. , and FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

Note that FIGS. 78(a), 78(b), 78(c), and 78(d) illustrate a state in which only the engagement member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. 78(e) ) and FIG. 78(f) illustrate a state in which a ring member 7344R2 and an engagement member 7344R3 are inserted into a disc member 7344R1. Furthermore, for ease of understanding, illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d), and 78(f).

To assemble the right disk cam 7344R, first insert the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, since the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being accidentally inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, slide the engaging member 7344R3 along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 match in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d). Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses displacement of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the barbed portion 7433 is released, and the barbed portion 7433 returns to the second position due to the elastic recovery force. It enters inside the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the barbed part 7433 contacts the extension part 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is in the longitudinal direction of the barbed part 7433 (where the deformation resistance is large). (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. This makes it possible to limit movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing displacement of the engagement member 7344R3 during operation.

After holding the engagement member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while pushing the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward into the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves along the radially outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disc cam 7344R can be easily assembled. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the convex pin 346b is configured to reach the end of its movement in the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper part of the main body portion (upper right corner in FIG. 80(a)) is shaved obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). are illustrated in chronological order.

79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R contacts the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. ), the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80(b) shows a state in which the disc member 7344R1 has further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80(a), and in FIG. 81, the right disc cam The state after 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engagement member 7344R3 is separated from the release member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 80(b) show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 ( (small angle state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly protruding state.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the angle is small, and the arcuate plate portion 7610 The disc cam 7344 is in a positional relationship in which the outer circumferential surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 while the inner circumferential surface is in contact with the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. (See FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any further (the small angle state), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state. 7346 applies a load to the engagement member 7344R3 to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement member 7344R3 extends outward in the radial direction, it is impossible to continue rotating in the backward rotation direction. , the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregularly shaped through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engagement portion 7630, so that the disc member 7344R1 can be rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80(a) as shown in FIG. 80(b). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in rotation amount, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one of the originally disposed equally divided concave portions 7522 to another different equally divided concave portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase of the recess is rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 are released from contact, so that the engagement member 7344R3 extends radially outward. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portions 7522 in which the engaging portions 7630 are accommodated are shifted by one.

That is, by going through the steps shown in FIG. 79(a) to FIG. can be relatively shifted by the distance between the recessed portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82(a), FIG. 82(b), FIG. 83(a), and FIG. 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically illustrate how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)). 82(a) shows a state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R come into contact with each other, and FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has started to descend by contacting the disk cam 7344 from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). (b) shows a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward direction (see FIG. 82(a) clockwise). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member to restrict the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. The only thing that can be done is

Therefore, a load that pushes the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward is not generated, and the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the time the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it is separated from the release member 7346. Maintain the extended position. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, relative rotation between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

With these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment, while In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the opposite direction to the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state in which the player does not draw attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 out of sight of the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be explained that according to this embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In addition, in FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 can be moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7(b) immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows for displacement is illustrated, and in FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process explained in FIG. , a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is relatively rotated by one equally divided concave portion 7522 is shown, and in both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second projecting portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d. A state in which they are in contact is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 is immediately activated (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the top end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state that is lower than state 2.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position that the tilting device 310 reaches from the first state by the upward movement can be changed immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344). Thereby, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that in the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the explanations referring to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 and the back pack 92 is opened to the inner frame 12 (deployed). 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded), and FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed into a fixed frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden planks as the top and bottom sides and aluminum plates as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component in the pachinko machine 8010, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the component is installed in a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the inner frame 12 rotatably supports the front frame 14, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing tip side) and can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end (opening/closing base end) when viewed from the front, and the right side is the rotation base end. It can be rotated rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010, as shown in FIG. As a result, each is canceled.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate (having holes) with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is large enough to fit. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape that projects upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12. It is pivotally supported by being externally fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed into a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate into a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). By covering the window portion 14c from the back side with the glass unit 16, almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a, 16b that have a larger outer diameter than the window portion 14c and are transparent, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a, 16b. It is equipped with. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into a ring shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, thereby forming the glass unit 16 into an integrated double-glazed glass. has been done.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glasses 16a and 16b to be colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination parts 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or blink in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when hitting a jackpot or reaching a predetermined reach. Further, the illumination section 8030 above the window section 14c includes a light emitting means that lights up in the event of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out, and a light emitting means that lights up while the prize balls are being put out.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punched metal) is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover a speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects depending on the game state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are disposed to bulge out toward the front side and are arranged vertically in parallel.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 and is open in the front-rear direction and allows the ball to be guided to the lower tray 50.

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide multiple locations for storing game balls; instead, it is possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and use only the upper tray 17, which has only one storage section. Also good.

An operating device 300 that is manually operated by players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operating device 300 is an operating device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operating device 300 may be provided at another location other than the upper tray 17, such as around the lower tray 50, or may be provided at multiple locations, and may be operated using a push button switch. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which information can be input using another operating method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage part 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage part 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage part 145 ( (see FIG. 92).

A put-out ball socket 143 that projects rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). 143 is partitioned left and right by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage part 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage part 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a and discharge them to the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage section 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and foul balls may be discharged to the upper tray 17.

The foul ball passage section 145 merges with a ball extraction passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unlaunched balls flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs a ball extraction operation. It is formed like this.

Attached to the back side of the front frame 14 are multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 made of resin that are fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side. On the front side of the multi-functional cover members 171 and 172, there are connectors for wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal board of the illumination sections 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 and one end thereof. An electronic board is provided to which the other end of the connector is connected, and the electronic board and connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there are wiring through grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illumination sections 8031, 8032, and through the wiring through grooves 14h, the illumination sections 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected (see Fig. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn out backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It will be done.

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring or a connector whose one end is connected to the internal board of the illumination parts 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is attached to a board support device 600 ( The upper device (see FIG. 126) is placed in a positional relationship that faces the upper device in the front and back, and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side, which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The elongated cover member 173 has a cross-sectional area that decreases as it moves from the rotating tip side to the rotating base side of the front frame 14, and the lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is The upper wall part 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged oppositely above the lower wall part 173a, and forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in a plane. Composed of shapes.

The elongated cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, and is connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided that extends upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end thereof connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b extends in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. , is constructed by securing a space that can be further curved into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (corresponding to one period of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall 173c. Extends toward the proximal end. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed (see FIG. 96), so it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be disconnected.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the elongated cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a that is part of the front frame. An inverted cup portion 178, which is formed of a resin material and has an inverted cup shape and opens downward, is disposed between the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the rotation base portion 14.

The inverted cup part 178 is a part that takes countermeasures against fraudulent acts, for example, where the front frame 14 is illegally pushed apart, a piano wire is inserted from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and the piano wire is entered into the gaming area. It is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from around the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. , since the progress of the piano wire can be obstructed, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the elongated cover member 173 are made of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is introduced and pressed against the inverted cup part 178, the elongated cover member melts the inverted cup part 178 with the heat and can pass through the inverted cup part 178. 173 can also be dissolved. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the elongated cover member 173, the wiring housed on the front side of the elongated cover member 173 is burnt out, so that by detecting that the wiring is disconnected, , it is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the inverted cup portion 178 on the elongated cover 173 side has a shape that matches the shape of the elongated cover member 173, and abuts (close to) each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178 in the wall part 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup part 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall part 178a. Furthermore, if the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that the elongated cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to discover fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. In other words, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip ends up in the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire will advance in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (progress in the left-right direction). can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the gaming area while preventing the reaction force exerted on the person who commits the fraud through the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act before the person committing the fraudulent act escapes, making it easier to secure the person committing the fraudulent act. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act will not be able to tell, and will therefore think that the piano wire is on its way to the gaming area. . Then, it is natural for the person committing the fraud to insert the piano wire deeper until the tip of the piano wire reaches the playing area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the window 14c). (without raising suspicions that the insertion was not successful). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to attempt to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the back side of the operating handle 51. When disposed on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball firing unit 112a includes an electromagnetic firing solenoid 701 provided as a firing device, and a game ball launched by the firing solenoid 701 between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It includes a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is emitted toward the area between them, and a ball sending device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) onto the firing rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is placed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is disposed. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage part 161 and a main body side lower dish passage part 162. The main body side upper plate passage part 161 and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 are opened toward the back side so that one end can communicate with a through hole penetrated through the inner frame 12 in the front and back direction, and the other end A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the groove is opened downward. In this configuration, the balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end. Ru.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the dispensing ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower part of the tray passage forming member 160. A front door side upper plate passage 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 161, and a front door lower plate passage 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the tray passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that restricts the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper tray passage section 161 and the main body side lower tray passage section 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the game balls from flowing out, and a permitting position where the game balls are allowed to flow out.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring, etc.) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the biasing member is The shutter 163 is configured to remain in the blocking position depending on the force. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out when the front frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage section 161 or the main body side lower tray passage section 162. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receptacle 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side and the upper tray passage section 141 on the front door side communicate with each other, and the lower tray passage section 162 on the main body side and the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side communicate with each other to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 is configured such that a location where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a location where the connector CN3 is provided are separate boards. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so the targets of transmission are different, so separate boards are used. This is intended to prevent malfunctions in advance.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the window of the front frame 14. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the area below the window 14c of the front frame 14 is on the front side of the main body frame 14c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, and on the diagonally upper right side of the lower plate 50. An operating device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operating device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side, and has a horizontal width comparable to the horizontal width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and has a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape with left and right center portions protruding toward the front side, and They extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portions and the left and right ends of the portion 371 toward sides that are close to each other in the width direction, and merge at the lower end of the extension when viewed from the front V It is a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the hanging part 372 formed in a letter-shaped shape, the main body curved part 371 and the hanging part 372, and is made of a light-transmitting resin material. A left side plane support part 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved part 371, and a left side plane support part 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371. A support groove 376, which is a groove formed in the right side plane support part 375 from the back side and whose width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side. Prepare for.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge formed in a rounded curved shape, and a rear side edge formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, so that the upper plate does not fit in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge 371a contacts the front side edge of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300. A back middle edge 371b that contacts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 371b that is connected to the back left edge 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation section 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball lending operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operating device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported, and is located between the right corner cover 380 and the right corner cover 380 disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14. This part prevents access to the operating device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 has a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, so that the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the formed bottom plate.

The light-transmitting portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side to create effects using light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are arranged close to each other.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that can be arbitrarily determined, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upwardly and downwardly. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (placed on the top surface of the lighting support part 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (placed on the bottom surface of the lighting support part 341e). , respectively.

Light emitted from the LED of the LED device 341f that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the transparent section 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then is transmitted through the lower frame member 320. 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be seen through the transparent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The force is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emit light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting control to change the amount of light), it is possible to It is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 is changed.

Furthermore, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emit light downward in accordance with changes in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is increased (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22). By controlling the amount of light to change weakly (in steps) as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 as the state of the tilting device 310 changes. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support section 374 toward the illumination section 8031. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8031 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right plane support portion 375 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination part 8032 and the illumination part 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support part 375 toward the illumination part 8032. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination parts 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination parts 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination section 8031, the illumination section 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove into which the lower end of the illumination part 8032 enters from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illumination part 8032 is in the deepest position in the support groove 376, and in this state, the lower front corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front end of the right plane support part 375 are The position matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 through the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be constructed by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or a separate member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. A sheet metal member 150 in the shape of a metal plate is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) across the main body frame 14a, and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is attached to the main body frame 14a or the plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a with the main body frame 14a in between).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a hot wire or piano wire is pressed against the tip and melted), the sheet metal member 150 will not be able to maintain the front frame. 14 functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side. That is, even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the upper, lower, left and right sides of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 in the left side when viewed from the front, and the open front side is connected to the passage forming unit. 140, and a planar plate-like part 152 that covers the back side of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball extraction passage 147.

The fitting box part 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the lower end part of the foul ball passage part 145 from top to bottom and left and right, so the fitting box part 151 covers the lower end part of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the foul ball passage part. The illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140 not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated at the lower end of the passage forming unit 145 in the front-rear direction, but also when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. This can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back side of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball extraction passage 147, when a wire such as the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is made. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent unauthorized members from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 may be removed and the exemplified wire may be pressed against a location where the thickness of the front and back becomes thinner (a location diagonally above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). An example is illustrated in which a through-hole is opened by being inserted, and the illustrated wire enters the hole.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 includes an operating section back member 155 that is fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the operating section back member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left and right long plate member. There is a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws that are formed above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the main body frame 14a are inserted. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connecting, which are vertically arranged in the part (left end) that overlaps the back side of the passage forming unit 140; It mainly includes an opening/closing regulating part 159 that protrudes toward the back side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connection portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction, and is provided protruding from the back side. a protruding portion 148a, and a threaded portion 148b that is formed as a hole into which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position that matches the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare for the Lord.

With this configuration, when the operating section back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the protruding portion 148a is passed through the upper coupling insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passed through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the threaded part 148b, the operation section back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

Note that the L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge of the left end portion of the operation unit back member 155, in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower side edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed into an L-shape that can make surface contact with the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left and right in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

Therefore, for positioning when assembling the operating section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved vertically relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By bringing the left and right surfaces into contact with each other, the position and posture of the operating section back member 155 relative to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing regulating portion 159 is a portion disposed front and back to face the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is a part that extends toward the back side of the operation part back member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and in order to ensure rigidity, the opening/closing regulating part 159 has a cross section when viewed in the extending direction. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same thickness, and the required amount of material is maintained while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is installed in a block shape that fills a U-shaped opening. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as that of other parts of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the part is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 with a thickness of 150 mm.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 may be any shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, compared to a flat cross section, the cross section may be curved (wavy), stepped, rectangular, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is not provided as a part of the operation part back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is provided from a separate member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a. It may also be constructed from a metal part that extends to. However, as in this embodiment, if the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the panel support device 600 will not move when it comes into contact with the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. It can prevent chipping or denting. This can reduce the risk that an operator who changes the state of the board support device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 will touch a chip or a dent made in the board support device 600 and be injured.

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation base end of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock that is arranged further to the rotation tip side It is possible to ensure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations. Therefore, when the opening/closing regulating section 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating tip side will be locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire may enter, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operating device 300 is assumed. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operating device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operating device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the configuration is such that it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if you follow the gap between the operating device 300.

Note that the harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is inserted into a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) that is bored in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the elongated cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, the wire or the like will not reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operating device 300. For example, a player who feels bad about a game result may pour drinking water or the like onto the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the operating device 300 located at a convenient location is likely to become a prey to being splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) may malfunction. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board, etc. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is placed on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since they are separably independent, liquid such as drinking water applied to the operating device 300 can be prevented from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a recessed portion 15a is recessed in the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operating device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a complete case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps). The recessed portion 15a plays the role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and furthermore, the drive motor 342 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) Since the section is disposed below the horizontal plate section disposed between the motor accommodating section 341e and the lighting support section 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquids such as drinking water can reach the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent damage.

In addition, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquid such as drinking water may come into contact with the voice coil motor 352. The liquid remains attached to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down toward the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player on his way home splashes a liquid such as drinking water on him, the next player can play the game normally as long as he wipes off the top surface of the operating device 300 that he touches. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operating device 300 from compressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a movable binding member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the movable binding member 180 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 similarly to FIG. 91.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are illustrated side by side. be. In addition, in FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in a released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in a fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The movable binding member 180 is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the movable binding member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the movable binding member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operating device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are connected to the relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the elongated cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads from the relay board to the movable binding member 180, and the extension harnesses HN3 are tied to the movable binding member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The movable binding member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotably supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extend from the opposite side surface of the movable arm section 182, and the other side surface of the movable arm section 182 in the rotational direction (the side opposite to the main body section 181 in FIG. 93(a)). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking parts 184, which are disposed in a U-shaped top view and can lock the binding arms 183, and the pair of binding arms 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing part 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm part 182 and having an opening.

In addition, in the binding movable member 180, while the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have high flexibility, the other portions are formed to have less flexibility (higher rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body part 181 has a fixed part 181a whose upper side has a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through hole in the center for passing a screw, and a fixed part 181a that protrudes from the left and right lower corners of the fixed part 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are provided, and an intermediate stop portion extends downward from the lower edge of the front side end of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curves close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96(a)), and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. It mainly includes a cylindrical fastening part 181e formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 at a position where the movable binding member 180 is fixed, which is made up of through holes arranged to match the arrangement of the fixed part 181a and the pair of rotation prevention parts 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. This makes it possible to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a during fastening, and to determine the attitude of the movable binding member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d during fixation.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between it and the plate member 14d. In this embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extended ends (lower ends) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward, and the center is placed on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is ensured for the region that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e fits into the proximal portion of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e allows the movable arm portion 182 to be rotated. Pivotally supported (see Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end portion that is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 that is offset from the pivot position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a, and a thin elongated thin plate portion 182b connected to the opposite side of the pivot position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is located at the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connected to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. side walls in the direction of rotation each extend from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature disposed on the same side, and the distance between them gradually becomes shorter as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a (high rigidity) design concept that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a (low rigidity) design concept with the intention of elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described, and a description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a narrow portion 183a formed near the tip with a width equivalent to the width of the base, and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a, which are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that in the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking part 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, by forming the thickened portion on the outer circumferential side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), a space can be secured on the inner circumferential side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking part 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the side of the movable arm 182, and is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with the large opening 184a in between, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly includes a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the narrow width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , the large width portion 183b is sized so that it cannot pass (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is desired to move relative to the locking part 184, it is placed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is smaller). When the binding arm 183 is to be locked to the locking part 184, by placing it on the small opening 184b side, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily controlled. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through hole in the center thereof through which a binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be tied together, you can still secure it by inserting a commercially available binding band into the through hole of the temporary fixing part 185. , the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the movable binding member 180 will be explained. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

Note that FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b) illustrate a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable approximately 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis directed in the vertical direction). This angle is suitable for normal use, considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in game parlors (pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machines 8010 are rotated more than 90 degrees, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm section 182 cannot rotate beyond the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body section 181 without being elastically deformed (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Therefore, the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates and breaks due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be explained. The arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the movable binding member 180, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

96(a) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

Note that FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b) illustrate one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) illustrate the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is disposed at a position moved toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14 from the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is the same, The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop part 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivot position of the movable arm part 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upwardly extending wall part 173c with the intermediate stop part 181c in between. ~HN3 can be shaped to match the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the movable binding member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Moreover, by arranging the locking part 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the area surrounded by the binding arm part 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm part 182 in between. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines in imaginary lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the movable binding member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57, similarly to the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the movable binding member 180 are attached to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed relative to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route that passes near a vertically elongated metal portion (the portion abutted by the base end 182a of the movable arm portion 182 in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly routing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in a detour manner, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from coming close to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. (See FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire may be heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. , it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178, melted and penetrated, and the wire is advanced to the gaming area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom part of the inverted cup part 178, it becomes high temperature. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out and electrical continuity is disabled.

Improper conduct can be quickly discovered by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes disconnected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from obtaining fraudulent profits.

Specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 burns out, the ball cannot be fired even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, the period from when a fraudulent act is committed to when the fraudulent act is discovered can be shortened (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after entering the wire into the gaming area and tampering with the gaming area (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize from being able to shoot a ball, it is possible to prevent a person from receiving illegal profits. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) can be operated and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that the person who commits the fraudulent act may not be able to collect the remaining amount of balls on the banknotes and cards inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her own fraudulent act. Therefore, it is possible to act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is used to carry out fraudulent acts without the risk of being unable to collect the banknotes or balls equivalent to the remaining balance of the card, the card unit (ball lending unit) Since the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving his/her seat even though the balance of the game machine (unit) is 0 yen, the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of harness HN2 is broken, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) is output.At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is checked. By doing so, it is possible to easily identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In addition, in FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145. In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 occupies an area of about ⅔ of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left side of the ball guide opening 53, and The lower end portion is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area approximately ⅓ of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages extending from the put-out ball receptacle section 143 and the foul ball receptacle section 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 are respectively provided whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once.

The S-shaped path SL1 makes it possible to increase the flow path length of the front door lower plate passage 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short. The number of possible balls can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). The large number of balls that can be secured and temporarily stored in the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of replenishing balls (when the lower tray 50 worth of balls runs out, players have to remove the balls from the senryo box). It is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress stress caused by being required to replenish the game.

The front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending areas NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as areas whose extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and these bend areas are common. Equipped with characteristics. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area provided upstream of the first bending area NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion reversed. A region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage section 145 includes a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEb2 provided on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic part reversed. , is provided. In addition, in the description of the characteristic parts, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be explained, and the description of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending area NEa1 includes a side wall Na that is disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door lower plate passage section 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na, and a ceiling wall Nb extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na toward the extension end. The passage forming unit 140 mainly includes a proximal wall Nc, and each of these walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed so that the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the direction of movement of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as wire or piano wire). The details will be explained later. Note that the gap Nin between the proximal wall Nc and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, a possible entry route for the illegally inserted wire HM is a route that uses the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance and proceeds to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage section 142; The person who commits the fraudulent act advances the wire HM while pressing it against the side wall of the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the person committing the fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even if the wire HM moves to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door lower tray passage section 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It turns out. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 in a horizontally reversed manner, the wire HM can completely enter the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling route of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. Note that the position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the direction of movement of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (caught) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from moving further, prevent the wire HM from being held, and quickly discover fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and advances further, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, it will overhang with the tip facing downward, so the wire HM cannot be advanced any further. Even if this happens, the tip of the wire HM will continue to move downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 located upstream of the payout ball socket 143 or the gaming area located upstream of the foul ball socket 146.

As a result, it is possible to make the wire HM reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or to cause the wire HM to reach the gaming area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person committing a fraudulent act from obtaining an illegal profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player, etc., and making it easier to illegally win a prize, such as obtaining an illegal payout ball.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage section 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the downstream portion from the confluence region CE where it merges with the ball extraction passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, more than twice the diameter). As a result, when the ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is placed in the merging area CE, the ball flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging passage CE (the balls enter the merging area CE at the same time). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage section 145 includes a passage section 145a that is formed between the first bending area NEb1 and the second bending area NEb2 and vertically connecting the bending areas NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set to have a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 protrudes toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the area upstream of the passage part 145a, the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end of the passage part 145a, and in the area downstream of the passage part 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a larger front-to-back width in an area on the upstream side of the passage part 145a than in an area on the downstream side of the passage part 145a. In this embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set so that the front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage section 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a longitudinal width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage section 145a. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage section 145, since a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted back and forth upstream of the passage section 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they will be slightly shifted horizontally and vertically), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted to one ball at a time. As a result, even if two or more foul balls enter the foul ball passage section 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the upper and lower walls being caught and interlocking.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end connected to the left side wall, and a downward flow surface of the ball faces rightward. From the inclined plate part 146a which slopes downward as much as possible, the closing part 146b which closes the foul ball socket part 146 vertically below the inclined plate part 146a, and the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate part 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction thereof is directed upward toward the back side.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage section 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate section 146c, the foul ball receiving section 146 is guided toward the front side by the action of the inclined plate section 146a and the blocking section 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate part 146a can be caused to flow to the right, and the blocking part 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving part 146. I can do it.

Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that passes through the foul ball socket 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage section in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of the ball 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to make the ball flow smoothly.

Since the foul ball passage section 145 has a narrow passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped route SL2 (for example, the passage section 145a), the foul ball passage section 145 has a narrower passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball). It is possible to prevent tools from passing through the foul ball passage section 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be explained. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be elongated from side to side, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500, which constitutes an illumination section 8031 and an illumination section 8032. In this support structure, a tapered support groove 417 is provided at the lower end of the right side end of the upper panel unit 400, and is recessed from the back side to the front side, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

Thereby, it is not necessary to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, they can be connected and fixed to each other. Note that, from the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Note that details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into left and right parts, are connected to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the structure in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted together, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other in the left and right directions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e, which is sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are connected to the main body frame 14a. The disassembled state from 14a is illustrated.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is inserted into the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIGS. 121 and 122). A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening part 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side, and by fastening the screw passed through the through hole to the second fastening part 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a, While illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

Note that, as an actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, the right side wall portion of the right panel unit 500 forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate section 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left and right direction, and these heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the main body frame. 14a (see FIG. 104) and a vertically elongated plate-shaped support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed to the support plate 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 by screws inserted into the support plate part 510 from the back side to the front side, and in this state, the support plate part 510 is inserted into the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) with screws inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-shaped extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and also has an L-shaped cross section. (See FIG. 86), there is a fixing plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a comes into contact with the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 which is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. , a plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and a portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a table-like shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b can come into contact with the heavy plate units 500L, 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). It is possible to suppress the collapse of That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L, 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension part 511a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 than the base part 511b, so that the front side of the extension part 511a While the outer cover member 560 comes into contact with the support plate part 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed as a surface almost flush with the side surface of the base part 511b up to the back side end. The back side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end of the support plate part 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is arranged in the plane position of the back side end of the support plate part 510. comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540, with a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) between adjacent LEDs. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light guide member 540 projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. irradiate (see Figure 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the width of the light emitting portion from side to side) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak through the light guide member. The light enters the light guide member 540 and exits from either surface of the light guide member 540, and the entry and exit of the light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 527 is inserted from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back surface fastening portion 527 .

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 556 is inserted from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back surface fastening portion 556 .

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate part 510 from the front side, if the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate part 510 (the protrusion 566 Even if the protrusion 566 is vertically misaligned by about the diameter of , the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation with respect to the support plate portion 510, positional deviation is eliminated and fastening is facilitated. Fixation can be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light. An inner lens member 530 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R has a light guiding member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L, and is in contact with the light guiding member 540 in the left and right direction, and the front end thereof is arranged opposite to each other in the front and back direction, and the light guide member 540 is disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. It mainly includes an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be explained. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, showing the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. , a lower fastening part 523 that is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate part 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate part 521, and inserted into the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening parts 525, which are cylindrical parts to which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525, and the inner lens member 530 A plurality of long fastening parts 526, which are cylindrical parts inserted into the body, into which screws are screwed to fix the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520; It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening parts 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate part 510 are screwed.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front side end portion 521a having a wave shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b at a short width portion of the wave shape (a portion closer to the back side). Equipped with

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact (shapes match) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that tilts to the left toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals vertically, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually become wider from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the aperture widths of the plurality of apertures 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each aperture 524.

The upper fastening part 522 is a cylindrical part into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is inserted, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening parts 522a arranged in parallel in the front-back direction. A fitting groove 522b is provided.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 through screws inserted at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four locations above and below, and function as windows through which the inner lens member 530 is visually recognized in the assembled state. Each external portion of the opening 524 is formed into a curved shape that extends to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design in this embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back side base portion 521b is concave and curved to the right in the design between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wave shape that waves from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion that projects toward the front side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, a depression is formed on the back surface of the design-shaped projecting portion, which tends to become a dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the inner lens member 530 side) Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, in the inner lens member 530, the front end 531a of the main body plate portion 531, which is formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, has a wave shape that almost matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. be done.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front and rear direction at a switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. and support holes 531b and 531c into which the protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in the wave-shaped front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear part of the front end 531a, and an inclined rib part 532 is provided on the back side of the support hole 531c to extend to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

Note that the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is bored in the left-right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted therethrough, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is connected to a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. , and a plurality of reinforcing plate parts 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate parts 532a in the vertical direction.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. That is, like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes toward the back side, so the left and right width becomes longer as it goes toward the back side (the front end when viewed from above). It has a triangular shape with the tip at the tip.

The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 extending leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524 . The projecting portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the projecting side, which is protruded in a wavy manner and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which concave portions are arranged in a lattice pattern to redirect the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right directions. This is a so-called light guide plate. That is, at least a portion of the light irradiated from the LED 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated onto the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width in the thickness direction is from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the end face on the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end surface.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for converting light from a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-like concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a, and causes it to exit from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is made of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at approximately 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing it against resin (hot pressing). Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially perpendicular direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably transparent, and includes acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, and amorphous olefin resin. Examples include resin, polystyrene resin, and AS resin (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among these, by using acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 with high average brightness and little reduction in brightness distribution.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after heat bending can be improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a front end shaped like a wave whose front end is slightly shifted toward the back side than the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the light guide member 540 has a wave shape that is slightly shifted toward the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530. It is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

In the present invention, the waveforms on the left and right sides are not strict. There is no particular restriction on the degree of wavyness, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after heat bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can provide three-dimensional degrees of freedom. .

The details of the horizontally undulating wave shape will be described later (see FIG. 114), but it is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate part 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate part 521c. The wavy shape is positioned to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material in which the concave portion is formed. The heat bending method of the present invention involves heating a thermoplastic resin having a curved concave surface (female shape) and a convex surface (male shape) at a heating temperature of 10 to 40 degrees Celsius above the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin serving as the base material. It is made by pressing the base material into a mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin has an acrylic resin as its main component, the heating temperature can be 110°C or higher and 150°C or lower. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130°C or higher and 150°C or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By keeping the temperature of the base material during heating below the load deflection temperature + 40°C and below the melting point, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light is fluctuations in the reflection angle can be suppressed. This can prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution on the light guide plate. Moreover, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a main body plate portion 541 in the shape of a curved plate constituting a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted. The fastening portion 542 is mainly provided.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recessed portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least on the inside of the projection surface on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the effect of the production by light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported within the body plate portion 551. The inner fitting part 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 protrudes to the right, and the outer cover A projecting portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a plurality of through holes 555 that protrude from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and are formed from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate part 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 has its front and rear ends shaped to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface, which almost matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape and is arranged slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front and back direction at any position in the up and down direction. Ru.

The front side end portion 551a has a plurality of protrusions that are protruded toward the front side at the switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front-rear direction, and that are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It includes a mounting portion 551b.

A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) bulging toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed on the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540 (see FIG. 115(a)). Formed in countless numbers. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recessed part of the projecting part 554 that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate part 551). As a result, the outer lens member 550 can be firmly fastened to the outer cover member 560, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back surface fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate part 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in surface contact (see FIG. 114(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from shifting in the direction in which it is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being misaligned with the light guide member 540, and to accurately input light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. can be done.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end of the main body plate portion 561. The fastening portion 522a has an elongated hole portion formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of holes through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastened part 562 having a screw receiving part 562a and the lower end of the main body plate part 561 are receiving surfaces capable of receiving the fastening part 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and has a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. is a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening part 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end thereof, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526, and a vertical width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 are formed in the shape of elongated holes with a long horizontal width, and screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the main body plate 561 toward the back side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 makes surface contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), so the cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to protrude toward the front side. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the protrusion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape that is equivalent to the outer shape of the protrusion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, and therefore, unauthorized acts of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

A method for assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIG. 113(a) and FIG. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled with the main body plate 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), this can be done by bringing the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R from the front side and inserting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b.

In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front end of the right panel unit (front side of the front side of the light guide member 540). The number of screws for fastening and fixing can be reduced, and the area where light is blocked by the screws can be reduced. It can be made easily visible in a band shape.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening locations) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, which may lead to incorrect guidance when fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged due to the load applied to the light member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

Note that when approaching the left heavy plate unit 500L from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitute surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship that allows the surfaces to come into contact with each other. That is, since the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide when moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction relative to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the right Panel unit 500 can be assembled easily.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures. .

The first procedure is to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R to each other, and then fasten and fix them to the support plate part 510. is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved to the right heavy plate unit 500L. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate part 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

As described above, it is possible to assemble and disassemble the right panel unit 500 in two different procedures, so the worker performing maintenance etc. can disassemble and assemble the right panel unit 500 in which procedure, depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced. It is possible to select one of the two methods, thereby reducing the work time.

In addition, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R must be slid relative to each other in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one of them from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted can be achieved by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and then This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that may occur through the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily committed. As in this embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate part 510, and the screws are inserted from the front side. By making it difficult to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be removed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity that involves passing through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect on presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c).

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right sides by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that waves in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is focused on the side forming the concave shape, and diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be focused and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, from the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side. It can diffuse the light emitted to the area and use it for production.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, there are differences in the manner of light production (whether the light is focused or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Note that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into different regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into different regions, the appearance of light on both the left and right sides can be made different. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes depending on the size of the opening 524. In other words, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also increases as the openings 524 move upward from the top. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R1. , is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524, so that the LEDs 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be made larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Furthermore, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the bottom opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line emanating from it is shaped slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light that is visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, making it possible to add sharpness to the light production, and directing the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom to the player's line of sight. It can be emitted upwards.

The vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114(c). The width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R3 is The width of the opening 524 disposed facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 disposed facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the lower openings 524 among the openings 524 are formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the radii of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the radii of curvature R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the aperture 524 is increased in areas where the degree of light convergence is weak (for example, the portion with the radius of curvature R1), so that the light is sufficiently incident on the aperture 524, and the light is condensed. At a location where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

Note that the center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. It is placed approximately in the middle of the

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary area KE of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is defined as a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper part, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower part of the region KE. coincides with the top of Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 512a to the area KE in the front-rear direction travels while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so even if the light condensing effect is lowered, it is visible to the player. There is little difference in the amount of light.

On the other hand, by making the region KE convex to the left instead of a flat surface, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed into a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented, so that the light guide member 540 can improve the durability of

Furthermore, by forming a convex shape toward the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. can be formed. Thereby, the effect of the light effect visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, depending on whether or not the light is incident on the area KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to suppress the change in the light visible through the opening 524 while causing a change in the light visible through the opening 565. .

For example, it is also possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gaps by turning off the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a. At this time, since the right side of the light guide member 540 has a concave shape in the upper and lower portions of the region KE, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized darkly in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visible to the player. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be varied.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (corresponding to the area KE) of the overhang part 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the amount of light is weak. Effects may be performed using the light that reaches this front end.

That is, a light effect that cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation level of the performance to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side farther away from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the notification is made using light that is not visible to the player sitting on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to issue an error notification that can be easily noticed by the clerk while the player committing the fraudulent act is not noticed, thereby preventing the fraudulent player from attempting to escape. It can be prevented.

Note that by reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers toward the front side from the end surface (about 5 mm thick) on the LED 512a side. The largest end of the light guide member 540 on the front side (the part farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to have a width of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the left and right width dimensions have a similar slope over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end surface becomes longer, it becomes more tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the vicinity of the support hole 531b and is arranged in a recessed position on the back side. Due to the shadow created by the support hole 531c, the area around the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the area around the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the part facing the support hole 531c is smaller than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the part facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the area near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visible in the area near the support hole 531b is increased. This can reduce the difference in distance between the front and back and the degree of darkness caused by shadows. This makes it easy to make the level of light emitted visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 uniform vertically (reducing the difference in intensity) with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the frontmost surface. )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (progressing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as a result of the curved light guide member 540, and as it passes through the inner lens member 530, the light is slightly It spreads and progresses to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curved shape of the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is kept constant, the light emission mode (concentration, brightness and darkness) can be made different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission manner different from the light emission manner expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Furthermore, since the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115(b), the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not directed directly to the side, but toward the player side. (See the imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b). The imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540.) Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 100 and 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. (see) and is supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front side of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and is sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , is mainly provided. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side is decorated to indicate the model name, etc., and includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to create a light effect.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body part 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall part 403 formed in a wavy shape on the rear outer wall of the main body part 402, and a wavy wall part 403 of the wavy wall part 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side, which is a cylindrical inner side. A cylindrical part 405 whose shape is formed by penetrating the wavy wall part 403, and a plurality of fastening parts 406 arranged on the back side of the main body part 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed into a box shape with front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping their open sides, and a space is formed inside. Note that the included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body part 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 meshes with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, thereby easily determining the mounting position in the left and right direction, thereby facilitating the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves sexuality.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. Note that the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 .

The cylindrical part 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body part 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws passing through the upper frame member 410 and fastening to the plurality of fastening parts 406 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), it forms a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 with the upper side plate member 14e, making it difficult to access the inside. Formed in such a way that it becomes difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , a left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a left corner support member 430L is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to a position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R to prevent it from falling off to the back side, and also constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a longitudinally elongated member in which openings are formed on both left and right sides through which vibration waves (audio) generated from the speaker assembly 450 pass, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 that is formed through the support hole 413 with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 that is formed through the support hole 414 in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thereby, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. This can prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached or detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed from the front. An LED 14e2 is disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the player can see the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has, on the back side, a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a fastening portion 419 arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and formed into which a screw can be screwed; and a second fastening portion 419 formed at a vertical position into which a screw can be screwed. It mainly includes a fastening part 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end of the lower edge). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the left and right claws to fit into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the supported groove 417 ), the load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can fit into the upper end of the illumination part 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 The illumination portion 8031 is configured to be able to apply a load (weight, etc.) applied from the illumination portion 8031 to the illumination portion 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided in a rib-like manner so as to protrude from the base to a position that does not reach the tip. It has an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a allows the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e to be connected to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (see FIG. 125(a)), details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are ribs of the same shape arranged at three locations around the fastening portion 419 at 120° intervals along the direction in which the screw is fastened to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at the lower position of the main body member 411. The recesses 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 are formed at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by a curved long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape when viewed from below at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and An L-shaped extension part 423 that extends from the upper edge of the wavy wall part 422 toward the front side and then extends upward from the extension end and has an L-shaped cross section, and a main body plate part 421. It mainly includes an opening 424 that is disposed equidistantly apart from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and is configured of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back side, A portion of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically, and it is possible to improve the strength.

In the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123), the opening 424 is an opening that allows vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 into the interior of the speaker assembly 450 to pass through (release to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front and back direction. The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, only the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the explanation of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an audio device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave so that it can be heard, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 that is inserted into a through hole 466. The front assembly 460 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460 is formed with an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and a space is formed between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). It mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits sound effects related to the game, and one end is connected to the speaker 451 and extends. The speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a covering part that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is not enclosed. High quality sound can be played back and output without any loss of performance. Moreover, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in the shape of a cup that is long on the left and right and open on the back side, and a plurality of semicircular distal ends recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. an extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed part 462 and the recessed part 463b having the same shape as the recessed part 462 toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body part 461; , a wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end of the main body 461 toward the front, a light passage through hole 465 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461 , and A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body part 461 to the back side, A plurality of fastening portions 468 into which screws inserted into the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and a connecting hole 469 into which screws are inserted to fasten the left and right speaker assemblies 450L, 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100). and a front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body part 461 is divided in the left-right direction, and includes a proximal main body part 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the proximal main body part 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body part 461M connected to the left side) and a distal end main body part 461T connected to the left-right center side of the intermediate main body part 461M (left side in FIG. 121). Note that a space is continuously formed between the proximal main body part 461B, the intermediate main body part 461M, and the distal main body part 461T with the rear assembly 480.

The main body part 461 includes a rear side wall part 461H formed as a wall part surrounding almost the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge without a barb on the inside (an edge without a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed part 462 is a recessed part in which the fastening part 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning between the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted into the through-holes 463a are inserted from the rear side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and are inserted into the through-holes 483a and 14e3 of the rear assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and into the through hole 463a, so that the extension plate 463 becomes larger as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e in between (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material in between). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The width of the wiring passage recess 464 is smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is degraded due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 contacts the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in front and back, and forms a bent passage that bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). These are the ribs that form the . This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body part 461. This prevents a gap from forming on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 481 formed in the shape of a cup that is long on the left and right sides and open on the front side, and a semicircular tip recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate that extends in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and a cup-shaped convex portion of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage-forming ribs 487 extend from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side in a rib shape, and through-holes into which screws are inserted are formed at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 488 , and a rear recess 491 recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding in the front-rear direction to the front recess 471 of the front assembly 460 .

The main body part 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall 481H is formed into a shape that fits inside the inner surface of the rear side wall 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H around the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing protrusion 484 at positions sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily secured to the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered to widen left and right toward the front side (distal end side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection wire 453 is routed from the wire passing recess 464. Even if it comes off and begins to shift left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

Thereby, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing protrusion 484. It can be easily accommodated in any opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and is inserted through the through-hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the through hole 483a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is extended as the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is provided in a convex manner along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481, and is formed with a width that is fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and has a width that is larger than the depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, by passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing protrusion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464 compress the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. It is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the opening surrounded by the speaker connection line 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 is passed.

The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. Note that the light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose cross section becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage-forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and abuts each other without any gaps in the front and rear. This is a rib that forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends around. This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H and is formed at the front and rear ends of the front side wall 481H. That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from forming on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage-forming rib 487 comes into contact with the passage-forming rib 467, and is designed to have dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force from the passage forming rib 467 toward the back side, and the compressive force causes the passage forming ribs 467, 487 to elastically deform in the front-back direction and close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has low rigidity in the left-right direction and may bend left and right, the compressive force may not work properly and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left and right direction is reduced to the strength of the front side wall 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H). The strength can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity of the passage-forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage-forming rib 487 can be prevented from flexing in the left-right direction, so that the gap between it and the passage-forming rib 467 can be effectively closed. I can do it.

The rear recessed portion 491 has a shape that is reversed from front to back than the front recessed portion 471, and together with the front recessed portion 471 forms an opening. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 is It is placed in a position surrounding the outline.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is shown as an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown on surfaces facing each other. It is shown in a state where it is unfolded toward the front of the page. That is, by folding FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper, the abutting positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-back direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the proximal body portion 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic path serving as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage-forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 467 are formed inside (on the left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are staggered vertically toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the left side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wire passes, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e , the wiring can be prevented from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, so that the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. I can do it.

Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 would travel linearly, but in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws moves toward the left side (arrow When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is located on the L side and is closest in the left-right direction is placed on the lower side, the direction of movement between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is generated after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is placed on the lower side, and then the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is placed on the left side (arrow L side) and closest in the left-right direction (for example, , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are vertically arranged alternately as in this embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a vertically curved path, The travel path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured to be longer than the left and right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed from the pair of recesses 471 and 491, and suppresses the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the same effect as that of the passage forming rib 467 can also be produced by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed part 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed part 471 and the recessed part 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the directions of arrows L and U.

Therefore, the recessed portions 462, 463b not only have an effect during assembly, but also have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 487 are formed on the inside (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side (main In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. I can do it.

Here, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and the assembled state (see FIG. (see) are arranged facing each other in the front-back direction.

Note that the actions of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to those of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the same effect as that of the passage forming rib 487 can also be produced by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted between the recessed part 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed part 491 and the recessed part 483b disposed above it and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b not only have the effect during assembly, but also have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration waves Ws.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R decreases as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are arranged vertically. , the vertical width is suddenly expanded at a position further away from the speaker 451 , and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the proximal main body portion 461B side where the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, so that the output is output from the rear side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) travels toward the distal end body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip main body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120). The sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside the Pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear surface of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recesses 471 and 491, and an opening 424 ( 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the machine, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high quality without being muffled. I can do it.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is in the same phase as the sound output from the recessed portions 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. In other words, in the bass reflex speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out the sound output from the front side due to the opposite phase, but can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is able to perform a performance full of realism, and can increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is placed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and the liquid is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (it is discharged downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide a game performance using the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is set as a path that avoids each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement and vertical extension length of each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e, vibration wave Ws (audio ) can be tuned.

In addition, in this embodiment, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480 are used for the purpose other than the above-mentioned purpose. It is disposed at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d can reinforce the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are inserted.

Further, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e and are pressed (see FIG. 125(a)). 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening part 468, the fastening part 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of the extension plates 463, 483. When screws are inserted into the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions to which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is aligned with the upper side plate member 14e. 14e, the concave portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 rest on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 are likely to be damaged, but in this embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the recessed portions 462, 482 are easily damaged. It is possible to reinforce against the load applied to the portions 462, 482, and the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, fraudulent acts such as trying to illegally infiltrate wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 are more difficult. It can be easily suppressed.

In addition, in such a fraudulent act, a wire, piano wire, etc. is illegally entered into the gaming area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is inserted into the front recessed portion 471 In addition to being formed in a sealed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear concave portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from where it entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires or piano wires can be passed through the through holes. It is possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 is allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, making it easier to prevent fraudulent profits from occurring.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R. is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). be. Note that in FIGS. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated as an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustration is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side, and a shape that fits into the inner surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that Thereby, the work efficiency of inserting the front side wall part 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall part 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship such that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter longitudinal dimension than the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration waves Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed down) in the intermediate body part 461M compared to the tip side body part 461T. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the distal main body part 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491 is inside the intermediate main body part 461M. A large amount of space is secured by bulging out in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end main body portion 461T, and can be emitted at a low speed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass sounds due to the vibration wave Ws.

125(a) is a partial sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a). b) is a partial sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening part 419 is formed by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening part 419. This is a portion where the upper side plate member 14e is sandwiched between the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from shifting in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening part 419b and the fastening part 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed parts 462, 482 (they do not come into contact with the recessed parts 462, 482 in the fastening direction, but pass through them), so that the front assembly 460 and the rear It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without using the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, in the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the back side is disposed inside). At a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the front side is disposed on the inside).

Note that in this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are respectively arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, so that the reproduction output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side. Conflict with the sound being played can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muddy.

In this embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in plane contact with each other (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e is provided to protrude toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) the entire surface of the speaker assembly 450 against the upper side plate member 14e, but has a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 makes a line contact, particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

Note that in this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin); however, it is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete, a soft resin material, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the metal member has a high specific gravity. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the material be a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. are applicable. By using these members, it is possible to improve the sound rise performance.

Regarding the shape, the protrusions may be in the form of a long plate, in the form of a spike, or in a dotted manner with rounded ends. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, the rear surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

For example, when disposing it on the back side of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is made into a cylindrical shape, and is disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted therethrough. You can also determine the position by doing this. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the other members.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 will not be connected to the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) or the same as the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a screw inserted into a through hole disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction in terms of shape, and a through hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is disposed. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, regarding the fixation of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted through the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screws inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, the structure is such that no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e can be applied to the relationship between the main body frame 14a and the speaker assembly 450 connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same way as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . Note that FIG. 127(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting parts 12a and 12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, there are a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b spaced apart in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end part of the game board 13. will be placed.

The left end front support part 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface that is formed on one surface so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape with an open center portion. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a state of natural length so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes leftward. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction toward the side where the game board 13 is arranged (to the right) together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. Thereby, work efficiency when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 2 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. FIG. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(a) shows the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. , FIG. 128(b) and FIG. 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after completing the assembly to the inner frame 12. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, some structures of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted for ease of understanding.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, temporarily place the game board 13 on the top surface of the plate passage forming member 160, align the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, and then attach the left end of the game board 13. slide between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a rotated position around the axis pointing in the vertical direction, so the left end front support on the near side Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere, in this embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b may interfere. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is rotated around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front side of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it approaches the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portion 12b1. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom part 12c is a plate-shaped part formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 are provided in the left and right direction to support from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. At the same time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so by making the game board 13 ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed smoothly. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Note that the angle of inclination of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is a larger angle than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor. This makes it possible to avoid the inclination of the sloped surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the Pachinko machine 8013 during installation, so that the game can be played without depending on the backward inclination of the Pachinko machine 8013 during installation. Work efficiency when assembling the panel 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slope angle of the slope of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same slope angle as the rear slope when the game parlor is installed. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and in a released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 is rotated. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 allows the front rotation claw member 620 and the front regulation claw member 630 (portions disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) to move toward the entrance of the game board 13. Since it is configured to be evacuated from the route, it is possible to improve the workability of assembling the game board 13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the states of the upper and lower board support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

Note that the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, by changing the state of the panel support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, the game board 13 is rotating using the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so the claw member 640 is rotated via the game board 13 due to the principle of leverage. The force required when applying a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two places, upper and lower (see FIG. 126). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12. Also, the degree to which the game board 13 tilts forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed in by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. It is possible to reduce the degree of tilting back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 toward the inner frame 12 to close it (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support parts 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is fixed to the support bottom 12c in the vertical position. is regulated.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and supported by the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the direction of the surface of the game board 13, and a control board that is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d, to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back side, is connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotational direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotational direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board support device 600 that is disposed near the right corner of the inner frame 12 with a pair of upper and lower sides facing each other. Note that since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are disposed facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be described, and a description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. Note that FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b) illustrate a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the board support device 600 in a fixed state. A released state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 600 is rotatably connected to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A front rotational claw member 620 that is pivotally supported, and a regulation front claw member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the front rotational claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the front rotational claw member 620. 630, and a post-rotation claw member 640 which is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate part 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a pair of main body plate parts 611 that are part of the main body plate part 611 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate part 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 bored in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , an arcuate recess 614 that is recessed from below in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed into the plate part 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulating rods 615 and a pair of screws that extend from the plate portion 611a in a flange shape from side to side and are inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)) are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12. It mainly includes a fixing plate 616.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the proximal end of the insertion, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the distal end of the insertion is pressed. , is fixed in the support hole 612. This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, so the explanation will be omitted. Note that when the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the front rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portion 621a arranged to face each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and a pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line in the upper corner of the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 are formed and into which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports which are formed in a straight line through the back side of the plate part 621a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. It mainly includes a hole 624.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at the same time, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged to face each other in the left and right directions, and includes an elongated portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate parts 621a formed in a T-shape in side view, a connecting plate part 621b that connects and fixes the upper edges of the plate parts 621a, and a surface from the rear side end of the connecting plate part 621b to the connecting plate part 621b. A rear side extension plate 621c extends at a downward slope of about 45 degrees with respect to the rear side, and a rear side extension plate 621c extends perpendicularly to the plate part 621a from the rear side end of the extension part 621a2 toward the opposite side plate part 621a. A hanging back plate part 621d is provided, and a front side extension plate 621e that extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate part 621d toward the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate part 621d. The main preparation is as follows.

The downward hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the drooping back plate portion 621d are formed at right angles to each other.

The rear side extension plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring By retracting above NBb, torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated toward the worker, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the end of the rotation, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the rotational momentum of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the lower end portion of the rotational claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 includes a main body plate portion 631 that is formed into a letter-shaped shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 are formed to pass through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined toward the front side from the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that extends in a horizontal direction, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free attitude change of the pre-restriction claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 641 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 are formed to penetrate through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63, and from the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that extends at an angle.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that comes into contact with the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle such that it touches the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. Note that in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), the process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. 134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b), a multifunctional cover member 171 and a multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 are fixed to the board support device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board support device 600. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the back side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third This can prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, since the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 The front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is raised in such a manner as to be separated from the hanging rear plate portion 621d.

To be more specific, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a, which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects with a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance part 634b, which is a part connected to the back side of the resistance part 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged opposite to the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135(a) to 135(b)).

In the angular range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (the range between FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 135(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630 Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the (posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the postural change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a downward load being applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, the positional relationship is such that when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630. , the shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c Rubbing friction occurs between 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board support device 600 may reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at a halfway angle. There may be cases where this occurs.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the space between the back of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front of the game board 13 This may shorten the distance between the two, which may impede the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, the store clerk who was working on closing the front frame 14 can be made aware that the board support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

Once the clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 will overlap when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), when the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation pawl Depending on the manner of abutment of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at a halfway angle (exclusively (The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the back side of the back side extension plate 621c is no longer in contact with the game board 13, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not regulated by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front claw member 630 in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 becomes the fixed state, the front end of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, if the game board 13 is placed in the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, if the clerk pushes the game board 13 with a little insufficient force, the game board 13 will be stabilized 90% of the time). In this case, when a load is applied to the panel support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14, In this case, the load can change the board support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG. 134(a). ), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600, which faces the game board 13, are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate part 621d. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed facing the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates as the game board 13 pushes the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d, the first shaft member P61 is the center. The non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Furthermore, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases.

As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves forcefully close to the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. After that, the board support device 600 can be placed in a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state where the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is in contact with the multifunctional cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a).) Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when replacing the board). , it is possible to improve the work efficiency of workers.

In addition, when changing the board surface support device 600 from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled toward the front upper side, and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation bar 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotational direction), so the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and continues to rotate. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

Note that when the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed toward the front side by the displacing post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 will be different from top to bottom. , there is a risk that the load applied to the game board 13 will become excessive.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 that is operated when the board support device 600 is released, and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640. do not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member that support the game board 13 are smaller than the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress displacement of the longitudinal position of the game board 13 at the portions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, a similar effect is produced. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and moves the pre-rotation claw member 620. and the rotated claw member 640 in a direction that widens the angle.

Therefore, compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so the game board at the locations supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be suppressed from shifting in the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the front frame 14 is illustrated in a closed state.

Further, FIG. 136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 138 shows the board support device 600 moved at a predetermined angle (approximately 25 ) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139, and the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed is shown in FIG. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the opening/closing regulating portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 shown in cross section in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated with imaginary lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating section back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating section 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is placed. is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the position when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating part 159 is reduced. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotational claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotational claw member 620 is affected by the action of the regulating rod 615. (clockwise direction in Fig. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 138) are opposite directions, and the reaction force becomes excessive, so this is difficult under normal loads. As described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c will come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

Further, in this state, when trying to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulating rod 615. As mentioned above, the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) of the pre-regulation claw member 630 are never opposite, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load. (See Figure 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be pushed in through the opening/closing regulating portion 159, and the board support device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball firing unit 112a and the cover member that closes the back side of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. . That is, in FIG. 143(b), only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-casting, and a base member 711 assembled to the base member 710, with the right side of the resin base member 711 as the center. The base member 710 is pivotably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) that partially covers the front surface of the base member 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. It mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, and is secured to the base member 710 with an elastically deformable hook or the like, and is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is made of synthetic resin or the like. and a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 launched by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 for regulating the posture. A plurality of fastening portions 716 are provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side at an intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a that bulges out in a straight line from the base member 710 toward the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. It mainly includes a mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 713 bored on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723. , a protruding portion 714 protruding from the front side adjacent to the right side of the locking portion 713, and a protruding portion 714 disposed opposite to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a protruding defect determination protrusion 715.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), and is located inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state. An opposing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is left and right opposite to the opposing plane 714a and is inclined toward the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( When the cover member 721 is floating above the cover member 721, the cover member 721 comes into contact with the cover member 721 and has a convex height that restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the store clerk can use the suction force. It can be noticed that the connection of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before a malfunction occurs in the ball firing unit 112a, it is possible to perform repair (fastening and fixing the attraction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening).

The ball feeding device 720 has a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by a shaft on a base member 711, a regulation state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a control state that controls the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly includes a switching device 740 that is controlled to change the state between a permissive state and a permissive state in which the flow to the launch rail 730 is allowed.

The cover member 721 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a cup shape with an open back side (the front side in the drawing in the orientation shown in FIG. 143(a)), and is a pair of covers that are loosely fitted into the receiving portions 712 of the base member 711. A ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through a rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the opposite left and right sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball passing opening 724 that is drilled in the front-rear direction as large as possible, and a cutting metal member 725 that is disposed in a position that extends slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end of the ball passing opening 724. It mainly includes a shaft portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 includes an attractive force generating solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726, and the attractive force generating solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 is rotated, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is secured to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, A guide slope part 744 that is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide slope part 744. It mainly includes a regulating protrusion 745 that extends at a distance of about 100 mm and has an extended end that protrudes toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft portion 726.

The ball passing opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and includes a falling plate portion 724a that slopes downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction; Rib portions 724b are disposed opposite to each other above the downstream plate portion 724a and extend downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extending end surface slopes downward as it goes toward the back side. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c that is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passing opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passing opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the ball P8 comes into contact with the sloped surface 714b, and the slope of the sloped surface 714b It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the . Therefore, the ball P8 flows downward in a manner that separates it from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so even though the cutting metal member 725 is arranged in a manner that extends inside the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 and the cutting metal Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends from an intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. The through hole 731a, which is formed as a long hole along the direction and through which the fastening screw passes, is in the form of a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), similarly to the bulging portion 716a. and a regulating groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging part 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging part 716a.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a should be fastened and fixed in alignment with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 should be fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It can be slid along the drawn straight line, and thereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Note that since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and includes a rolling plate portion 730a that is formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extends diagonally upward to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a, and is attached to the base using screws that are inserted into a plurality of mounting holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c, and prevents noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and contacts the front and rear two locations on the circumferential surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)) to move the ball P8 upward. configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball firing unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order. Note that in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When this is the case, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the open end on the back side of the ball passing opening 724, and comes into contact with the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, thereby preventing the ball from flowing down from the open end on the back side. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissible state (the state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745 is retracted above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide slope 744. In this state, the ball P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, thereby restricting further flow down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulating state again, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. Thereby, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the slope of the guide slope portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), so even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 The flow of water is regulated. Therefore, balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one ball at a time. Note that the balls P8 entering the ball passing opening 724 are balls supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86), and are balls stored in the upper tray 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. A lower blade part 725b having an upper side that almost runs along the upper surface, and a notch with an acute angle at the tip formed between the lower blade part 725b and the same plate as the proximal plate of the lower blade part 725b. It mainly includes an upper blade part 725c extending from the upper blade part 725c.

The upper blade part 725c is formed such that its tip is inclined more toward the back side than the lower blade part 725b, and its lower side projects upwardly more than the flow plate part 724a. Note that the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the base end (left side). That is, the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The cut between the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tassel thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, a description will be given of how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and enters the ball P8.

146(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a), and FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a. ) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 has been launched. Note that in FIGS. 146 and 147, illustration of some constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), from this state, a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, and the plunger 702 is pushed out vigorously, giving a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (Fig. 147(a) )reference).

Now, with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, launch the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the playing area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that was left at hand and pull the thread Y8. It is known that a fraudulent act is known in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole by loosening the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. To be more specific, when the ball P8 is placed in the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a in a posture that is pulled to the right as it goes toward the back side. (See Figure 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves as it is pulled by the ball P8 passing under the falling plate part 724a and rolling on the firing rail 730, and the middle part of the thread Y8 moves below the falling plate part 724a. Since the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface, it enters the lower side of the upper blade part 725c that projects above the falling plate part 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c. .

While the player is holding the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, a load is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 due to the firing of the ball P8, so that the thread Y8 is is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In addition, if the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that sufficient tensile force will not be applied to the thread Y8 and the thread Y8 will not be cut, but in that case, the ball P8 will not reach the play area and The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged into the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

Next, the presentation operation unit 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 is visible from the upper frame of the center frame 86, and other differences The configurations of are substantially the same.

A production operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed in the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The production operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward movement unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advancing/retracting operation unit 900 moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retracting operation, that is, the operation of advancing inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third The petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is connected to the petal operating device 800. A drive-side arm member 910 whose end portion is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and rotates by transmitting the driving force of a drive motor 921 via an arm gear 924, and the drive-side arm member 910 is driven. A transmission means 920 consisting of a drive motor 921 that generates a driving force, a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left and right direction, a thin plate-shaped second production member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding movement of the slide plate 930, and on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910, It mainly includes an elongated plate-shaped driven arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be explained. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. Note that in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petal 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden behind other members and is not shown in the figure, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. The device includes a plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position on the right side of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protruding portion.

An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the support base 801, and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes. A screw insertion part 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at its tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion part 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed part 801D (see FIG. 152) which is recessed from the front side to the back side so that a detecting arc plate 880d of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass therethrough. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the center motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the center motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically elongated, generally elliptical area at the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally elongated upper part that constitutes an upper end area and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes an area below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the support base material 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 It is possible to reduce the operating space by molding 801 into a vertically long shape rather than by molding it into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to a second gear 830G and a third gear 810G, which are arranged concentrically so as to overlap the opening 801P, respectively, as described later. Although it can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, in this embodiment, the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G are It is placed on the right side (see Figure 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by concentrating the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in an attitude slightly tilted toward the front, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from increasing, and The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin and are molded to imitate the shape of one of the five separate petals that make up a hibiscus flower in its blooming state. It is formed as a member and includes a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front face shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular depressions and depressions including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery also has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and there are slight differences in unevenness, etc., but they are formed into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer periphery has a specific color (red) that is darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner area. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a threaded hole inside, at two locations: near the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and at the center in the radial direction. There is.

The petals 802 are arranged from the rear side part 802a to the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b disposed on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side part 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side part 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side part 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side part 802b of the other adjacent petal 802. The petals 802 are arranged so that their tips on the inner circumferential side are concentrated toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b are shifted from each other in the front and back, so that the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b overlap in the front and back at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be made to match, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made noticeable.

In the arranged state, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate members 803 are long plate-shaped resin members that are separated from each other and are fixed to the five petals 802, respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front face shape extending from the center to the outer circumferential side in a generally rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer circumferential edge portion thereof extends forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of threaded portions 803S that extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes inside are provided in the circumferential direction (the flat plate They are integrally formed at positions separated from each other in the lateral direction of the member 803.

The threaded portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (lateral direction) of each flat plate member 803 in a substantially flush position, and furthermore, a pair of threaded portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear surface of the flat plate member 803 extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the circumferential surface of the threaded portion 803S. As such, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petal 802, and the front side of the petal 802 has screw insertion holes. A screw insertion part 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw part 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The threaded part 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the threaded part 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front, and the screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. A slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin and has a front face shape in which five similar shaped parts are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center part. As shown in FIG. 159, a generally cylindrical front circumferential wall portion 812 and rear circumferential wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend in both front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 156. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has cylindrical holes in the front and rear, at two adjacent locations out of five locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction and at one location in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. A threaded portion 813S that extends and has a threaded hole inside is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the five locations described above. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at five locations corresponding to the threaded portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

The slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815, as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction outward from the center of the circular opening 811, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 is oriented counterclockwise in a front view by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The both-side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight interval between them.

In this way, groups of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two-sided slits 815 on both sides thereof, are formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are the double-sided slits. It has a generally rectangular shape and extends slightly in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with a circular arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Furthermore, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, so that , five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 are arranged closer together inwardly, and this also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 more compact.

In other words, if the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11, In the case where the slit member 810 is arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the slit member 810 can be arranged more densely. The outer circumferential shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip has a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. An extended part to be molded, a central part that bulges out to be thicker than the production part at a position between the extended parts, a screw insertion hole 821 bored in the extended part, and a center of the slide member 820. a guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side and is inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side and pass through it back and forth. Equipped with

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction and the longitudinal direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 are fitted into the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

Thereby, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is inserted almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without any gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held in a position facing a certain outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. The sliding rib 803a restricts the sliding movement at .

160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. Note that in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall has a shape that extends in a closed loop shape that is elongated when viewed from the front along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The ridge corner at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends clockwise in front view from a position on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. , extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving in an arc further toward the clockwise side in front view from the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175(a)).

The circumferential wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, at the end on the center side, is formed to be integrally continuous with the circumferential wall at the circumferential edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof protrudes toward the front side from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and a total of five guide rails 832 are arranged at equal intervals around the pivot opening 831. It extends outward from the periphery in a spiral shape.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed, extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery. The second gear 830G is arranged to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer circumferential surface of the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not linear but linear relative to the inner circumferential surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted onto the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further, on the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically. , are arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S, and positioning holes 810c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned by a positioning boss with respect to the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the threaded portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G serves as a retainer to prevent the rotation plate 830 from coming off. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotation device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotation device 850 and the loose fit device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotation device 850 and the loose fit device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. The shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The center portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen part 856 on the front side of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 on the left and right sides with the lumen part 856 in between, and a front screw part 857 having a screw hole inside. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore in the displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that are cylindrical and extend slightly short toward the front are each integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen part 856 has a columnar shape extending along the axial direction of the shaft part 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extending further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, and extending into the interior. A rear screw portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Furthermore, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board with a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front threaded portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting and positioning the front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and screwing the screw into the front side threaded part 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. , an LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therein.

On the front side of the LED board 861, as shown in FIG. The LEDs 865 are each fixed in position and emit light toward the front.

Near the outer periphery of the front and rear sides of the LED board 861, horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to be done. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are arranged concentrically and alternately with the forward-facing LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the LED board 861 so as to face rearward.

A center decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED board 861. The center decorative member 868 is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends in a cylindrical shape from a long plate-shaped base to the back side, and can be screwed into the center. A pair of screw holes 869 are provided in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. A threaded part 869 passing through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is brought into contact with the holding part 858 of the flange 855 from the front side with the LED board 861 in between, and a screw is screwed into the threaded part 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the center decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thereby, the center decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861 to come off.

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape and having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side circumferential wall portion 812 of the slit member 810; It mainly includes a main body cylindrical member 883, which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and is rotatably fitted into the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has integrally threaded parts 883S extending in a cylindrical shape from front to back and having a screw hole inside at two places out of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. A positioning boss 883a is formed and extends from the tip edge of a location where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the four locations described above.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at four locations corresponding to the threaded portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 has a rib-like projection in the outer radial direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a circumferential intermediate position of the four corresponding locations, and a rib-shaped projection in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b extending over the entire length is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 includes a decorative member 884 that is formed with a larger outer shape than the LED board 861 and covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149); A back cover 886 is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and forms a bottomless cup shape with the outer circumferential side rising up toward the front side from the fastened portion, and also contacts the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed. , is arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, thereby giving the side surfaces a mirror finish. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light from the horizontal LEDs 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery, a light emission effect can be performed.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED board 861, and has the shape of a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion formed from a transparent resin material, and a rear side plate portion formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, the peripheral wall of which forms a disk shape on the back side thereof and which stands up on the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion with a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is allowed to rotate relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically. It meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are provided around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw insertion parts 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are bored at positions 880b and 880c corresponding to two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned over a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the threaded portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G acts as a retainer to prevent the slit from coming off. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection circular arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and has a photo sensor arranged to be able to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in this embodiment, no matter what attitude the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from, it is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72°) of the detection arc plate 880d (minimum angle Detection of 72° can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be explained. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED board 861 is fixedly arranged and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning. Furthermore, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screw-in part 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing it with a screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base 801, and as shown in FIG. The rear circumferential wall portion 813 is fitted externally, and the front circumferential wall portion 812 is attached to the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to fit externally.

At this time, since the outer circumferential surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 locally bulges out at eight locations along the circumferential direction due to the threaded portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, the rear circumferential wall of the slit member 810 The slit member 810 contacts the inner circumferential surface of the slit member 813 not in a planar manner but in a linear manner, and as a result, the rear side circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 Pivoted for smooth rotation.

164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving arm member 910, and the driven arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the up and down direction from the driving arm member 910. In addition, in the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner in front view. A support column 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a gear accommodating section 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a gear storage section 1120 that is aligned in the vertical direction at the left and right center position. a rail fixing part 1130 disposed in the rail fixing part 1130, and a support elongated hole 1140 that is bored as a long hole that slopes downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the opposite left and right sides of the support column 1110 across the rail fixing part 1130; Mainly equipped with

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910, and has a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery of the front end thereof, into which screws can be inserted. A screw-in portion 1111 is formed, and a pair of positioning bosses 1112 extending toward the front side are provided on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the rear, and is circularly bored in the front-rear direction at one end and has a support column. 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 protruding from the front side in a stepped cylindrical shape at a position near one end of the elongated main body member; The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support section 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 has an internal fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted into the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating part 1120 is a recessed part in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses arranged in a row while slightly intersecting each other, and is arranged on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating part 1121, a second accommodating part 1122 connected to the first accommodating part 1121, and a driving side arm member disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating part 1121 with the second accommodating part 1122 in between. It mainly includes a third accommodating section 1123 in which an arm gear 924 that is fitted with the arm gear 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing part 1130 is a part that supports the movement rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked one on top of the other and is supported so as to be able to slide up and down. It includes an insertion hole 1131 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the movement rail 1000R and positions the movement rail 1000R, and these are aligned vertically. placed on a line. Due to the rigidity of the motion rail 1000R, the posture of the petal motion device 800 is maintained constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is a elongated hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 is provided that extends to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported in the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951 while the collar is fitted into the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, side base material 1000S, and second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right through a plurality of supported long holes 931 (three in this embodiment) that are formed in the front and back direction in the form of long holes extending left and right, and It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 through a proximal elongated hole 932, which is provided on the left end and extends in the vertical direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and is provided on the right end. It is connected to a second presentation member 940 through a distal end side insertion hole 933 that is bored in the front-rear direction.

The proximal elongated hole 932 has a stop part 932a formed at the upper end along a locus in which the connecting convex part 912 rotates around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop part 932a. It mainly includes a displacement part 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical part arranged in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded part 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed. A fastening plate part 1001S, which is a plate-like member fastened and fixed to the support column part 1150, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column part 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement of the supported elongated hole 931, and a support protrusion 1002S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. Also, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second production member 940, an arcuate recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape co-centered with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. It mainly includes a convex strip 1005S that protrudes toward the front side along a circular arc shape having the same center as the convex strip 1005S.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar connects the support protrusion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931 from its tip. In this state, a retaining screw is screwed into the tip of the support protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second presentation member 940, and the arcuate recess 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second presentation member 940. This is the part that Note that the protruding portion 1005S is formed at a protruding height such that it does not come into contact with the second presentation member 940 when it is in the normal position, but can come into contact with it when it is displaced from the normal position or is bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support 941, and has a main body portion whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed into a circular shape centered on the shafted support portion 941. A shafted support portion 941 that is protruded in a cylindrical shape and is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar in between, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed close to the shaft supported support portion 941 and is provided in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. 942.

The shafted support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entry portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). With the shafted support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar in between, and with the disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the tip, the threaded portion 941a is inserted. By screwing the screw into the cover member 945, the cover member 945 acts as a retainer. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the distal end insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing it from coming off the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing the bending deformation.

This will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three threaded portions 1161 into which screws can be inserted when the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened, and a screw portion 1161 that extends in a radially outward direction from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. a detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 extending from the flange portion 926; a shaft support 1163 on which a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported; and a support elongated hole. A cover support part 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of the board cover 1140, and a wiring stop part 1165 arranged close to the cover support part 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in a front view. It mainly includes a threaded part 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is threaded.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are screwed. The screw part 1006S is arranged with a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex part 942 is broken due to long-term use and the part that restricts the rotation of the second effect member 940 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is chipped, the threaded part 1006S allows the auxiliary protrusion 942 to break. 2 displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are stacked in front and back and are fastened and fixed to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress vibrations and displacements of the board cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the heavy device called the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. I can do it.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevating and lowering operations of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing/retracting unit 900 will be explained. 1100, and FIGS. 169, 171, and 173 are rear views of the petal operating device 800 and the advancing/retracting operating unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the driving arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 illustrate the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 164 ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop part 932a and the displacement part 932b of the proximal elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end of the moving range. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is connected to the internal fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151) and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which it maintains its posture (a range in which it spins idly), which reduces the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 is maintained. That is, when the driving side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates before the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, it can be visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 being interlocked. can be done.

Here, by moving the second presentation member 940 in such a manner that it extends toward the position where the petal actuation device 800 was originally placed, it is as if the second presentation member 940 operates following the petal actuation device 800. It can be made to appear as if it is.

Next, the collection and distribution rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be explained. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 850. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the vertical movement and is at the lowest position, it changes from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expanded position shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After the middle position, an expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

In the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is at the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the concentrated position where they are most concentrated toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus is in a flowering state as a whole. It is in a state of concentration that makes up a flower.

When the petals 802 are at the initial position (gathering position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as shown by arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c) using the central motor 804, this The second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the rotation plate 830, so that the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall part 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, it can be easily moved around the front peripheral wall part 812 with a small torque. Can be rotated. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830 described above.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in the front view as shown by the arrow A11, as shown in FIG. 175(a). At the same time, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of pushing it outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. Move under the guidance of.

At this time, as the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but this torque is exceeded by the braking force of the oil damper 805. While the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 begin an expanding operation in which they expand radially outward from the gathered position. In this expansion operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively slow due to this slope. becomes faster.

That is, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, thereby making it possible to more efficiently expand the petals 802.

Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 will be relatively small compared to the above case, but the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. In both cases, the decline will be even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. , after that, it extends outward while curving in an arc further clockwise in front view from the direction D15, and has a shape that extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the more the guide rail 832 curves into an arc toward the clockwise side in front view from the direction D15, the more the load on the slide pin 823 and the movement speed decrease both become more significant.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 was relatively large and the moving speed was relatively fast by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotating plate 830 is formed into a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 passes through it, there is less risk of deviation.For this reason, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823 while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is composed of

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. The structure is such that roles are divided.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five pairs of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially to reach a fully open state, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to positions that are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible due to the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the flower can be seen integrally like a larger hibiscus flower (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the center slit 814. Therefore, due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any further in the same direction as before. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above expansion operation is completed, rotational power is transmitted from the central motor 804 in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view, as shown by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d), together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the expansion operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state, as shown by arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the center motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continued to be applied to the rotary plate 830, the expansion operation can be immediately continued from the rotation operation to the rotation operation without a pause. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in a fully open state as shown by arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Rotate to . Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the amount of movement (relative movement) of each petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger, so that The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the above rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the slit member 810 is rotated. While being braked and held in a stopped state by the oil damper 805, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. A gathering operation is performed in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. They gather toward the target, return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and complete the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the operation is restarted and the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b) in the rear view, the petals 802 are rotated as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b). It rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state.

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state as shown by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to . Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the amount of movement (relative movement) of each petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger, so that The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, this concentrated motion can be changed to a rotational motion, and the central motor 804 can be stopped once and then shifted, or it can be shifted immediately without a pause. It can also be done.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so there is no need to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 extends along the notch 9145b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has a different internal configuration of the foul ball passage part 9145, and a lower end and front part of the foul ball passage part 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage section 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 covers the cutout 9145b from above, and includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the top to the top of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that is protruded from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Constructed to withstand loads.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8, thereby preventing fraudulent manipulation of the balls inside the gaming area and obtaining fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage section 9145. Here, we will explain possible fraudulent acts.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 148. As described above, the cutting metal member 725 is disposed in the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment in order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the thread Y8 will be cut. Sometimes the ball was fired without any warning.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, if we consider, for example, the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball socket 146, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is struck at the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the firing solenoid 701 side). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is launched with force, the ball P9 will reach the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage section 145, is ejected to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8, a person committing fraud can pull or loosen the thread Y8, and thereby move the ball P9 into the winning slot. 63 (see Figure 2), etc., repeatedly, resulting in fraudulent profits being obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a fraudulent act is carried out using the thread Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade is provided in the foul ball passage section 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the person committing the fraudulent act pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled together when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be placed inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force against upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, thereby improving the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the discharged ball. In other words, the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, so after grasping the ball P8, he or she should keep the ball P8 close to his body (for example, in his pants pocket, etc.) in order to prevent the clerk from becoming suspicious. ), it is easy to commit fraud by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface) toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position approximately a diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, and the ball guides the ball. The lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on or hitting the thread Y8 located on the front side of the ball removal lever 53, and the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. flowing down through. That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray The possibility that the balls discharged from the passage section 9142 to the lower tray 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easy to impart rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

Thereby, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball discharged to the lower tray 50 weakens. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcefully impart a rightward velocity component (toward the foul ball passage section 9145 side) to the balls ejected to the lower tray 50 along the front-rear direction, so that among the ejected balls, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls stepping on or hitting the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left side of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53), and on the boundary thereof, there is a riding restriction step. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is formed between the right end (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the far end portion disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat part that connects the left end (left end side) of the lower bottom near the exit of the ball passage part 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the climbing restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 allows the front door side lower plate passage 9142 and the foul ball passage to be connected to each other. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 can be caused to flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the ball that has rolled through the foul ball passage section 9145 and has come into contact with the riding restriction step section 9053a from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is a part that allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 extends along the notch 10145c. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left. A state viewed diagonally from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage section 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side so as to cover the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately twice the radius (diameter) of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole that is bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate part 10145d below the rolling plate part 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage part 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an external shape in front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided to protrude from the side surface of the rear side toward the rear side. Note that the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted from illustration in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-back direction where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is the same as that of the sphere. The radius is approximately the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage section 10145 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (as it goes toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 (front-back width) becomes wider as it approaches the passage part 145a. This makes it easier to insert the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the back side edge of the notch 10145c toward the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153, and extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade 10153 in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 is formed between the first thin-plate blade part 10153 and the second thin-plate blade part 10154, with the deep part of the recess having an acute angle.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thereby, when the thread Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 can be caused to enter the acute angle recess 10155, thereby making it easier to damage the thread Y8.

In addition, since the second thin plate blade part 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged higher than the first thin plate blade part 10153, the thread Y8 that is pulled diagonally downward to the front side by the person who commits the fraud. can easily enter the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate part 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 are arranged to face opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage part 10145 bends in opposite directions. Ru. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in opposite left and right directions.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act may release the ball P8 that has come out of his hand and try to avoid the detection of his fraudulent act by allowing the ball P8 to flow backward through the foul ball passage section 10145 and be ejected through the playing area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 in opposite directions to the left and right at the lower end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball P8 flowing backward gets caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and remains there.

Thereby, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage section 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the gaming area is increased, thereby making it possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent activity.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, glue, etc.) may be placed in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has arrived at the hand of the cheater is cut, the thread will be glued to the adhesive member disposed in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 will be in the gaming area. Since the thread is not ejected from the thread and remains in place, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch strength is weak and does not reach the game area is ejected to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of resin material so that it has the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a tip member 2062a formed and disposed close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a gap V11 having a width that allows the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper tray passage section 161. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage part 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is disposed in the above embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is moved to the left. Formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown), which is disposed on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 and protruding inside the ball flow path, is turned on by the load of the balls, and the dispensing device 133 is configured to stop discharging the ball.

That is, in this embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, when considering the above-mentioned fraudulent act of gluing balls to both ends of the yarn Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c, the yarn Y8 enters the inside of the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. Furthermore, by applying the discharged balls to the thread Y8, the effect of damaging the thread Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of balls on the upper tray 17. Thereby, the thread Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with long metal screws B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is placed on the front side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity, which projects in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side, and has a threaded groove formed in the inner wall thereof into which the long screw B11 is threaded. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and with the base member 68b1 in contact with the front side of the closing plate 2062b4, the base member 68b1 is placed in advance. A long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as a mounting hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole, and in this state is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the upper surface and left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so that the shape matches the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (front side surface in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the increasing slope portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The increasing slope portion 2062d has a slope that slopes downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface of the guide member 2062b that constitutes the outer frame of the game area. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end of the surface (upper surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, , about 1/3 of the diameter of the sphere) intersects with the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the ball collides with the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves across the gap V11 from side to side. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball passes through the tip member 2062a and returns to the ball firing unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 with the closing plate 2062b4, which is smaller than the diameter of the ball and has a width that allows the thread to enter (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment). It is recessed toward the back side to a certain position. Note that the notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 that is screwed into the support cylindrical part 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cut 2062b1 is formed, so that, similarly to the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, When a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c in a fraudulent act, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, when the thread Y8 receives a load of being pulled at both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 located deep in the notch 2062b1 (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the shot ball contacts the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so the cut 2062b1 can be prevented from colliding with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

In addition, a person who commits a fraudulent act by passing the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c, must also pass the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c. Since the end on the player's side (see FIG. 182) is pulled toward the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 within the game area, the thread Y8 will be closer to the front side near the gap V11 closer to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c than when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in the cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with an extremely weaker load than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is arranged to be switchable between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190(a) shows a state where the weight portion 68a2 side of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2, and FIG. 190(b) shows A state is shown in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. Further, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is illustrated for reference, and it is illustrated that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button-type switch SW11 is illustrated as being ON. It is illustrated that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 provides only a slight resistance to the ball passing through, but provides enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not so. This is because the ball flows away due to its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. 190(b), the ball flows away immediately. Since the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is returned to the state shown in FIG. This is because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to objects that do not flow away, such as balls, such as objects that advance while filling the passage, such as endoscopes. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, You can bend the nails (not shown) installed on the game board 13, grasp the ball and put it into the winning hole, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emit a laser from the tip. (cutting nails, etc.) Possible fraud.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the external shape of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally invaded is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, it is advanced while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight part 68a2 is repelled by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2 and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening/closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end of the endoscope from advancing further into the interior.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent unauthorized use as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 will be maintained in the OFF state, so if the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined period of time, the alarm will sound. , fraud can be detected early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the button-type switch SW11 is turned OFF only at the timing when a foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned ON. (see FIG. 190(a)), it is possible to minimize the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be any other movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in this embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly prevented. can be exchanged. As a result, compared to simply purchasing a replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 as an option, it has the effect of being able to prevent fraudulent activities even before replacement, and it saves the trouble of forgetting and searching for the storage location. This effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Furthermore, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced, whether or not the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. From the perspective of those committing fraudulent acts, it is difficult to maintain deterrence against fraudulent acts because they do not know whether an exchange has taken place or not, and even if they have, they do not know the extent of the damage. can.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the assembled position or the fully open position, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. It consists of aspects. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 includes a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end; A regulating portion 2888 is provided that projects from the extending tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the back side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The regulating portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order, and FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), FIG. 193(b), and FIG. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture changes due to the action of the regulating portion 2888 is shown in outline (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S disposed inside the both-side slits 815 have a threaded portion on the opposite side centered on the threaded insertion portion 803H. It includes an inclined surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The effect that the regulating portion 2888 has on the petal 802 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front part 802b of the petal 802 ( The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 resists the load. Therefore, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 194(b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. The petal 802 undergoes a posture change to the extent possible.

By changing the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 in this manner, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is dissipated, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide ribs 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so frictional resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 is in contact with the slits 814, 815. can be moved smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the tilted position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a contacting the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T contacting the inner inner wall with respect to the both side slits 815. (being pressed), frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance increases significantly. Incidentally, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both sides in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the resistance to movement of the slide member 2820 in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814, 815 increases, so that the slide member 2820 does not reach the end of the slits 814, 815. The torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting for the slide member 2820 in its normal position. (The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined position).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b), rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating section 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating section 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the expanded position is maintained. In this state, the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196(a), FIG. 196(b), and FIG. 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. Note that in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 return to their normal postures, as shown in FIG. 196(b). be returned.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically rotate the petals 802 at the expanded position and then return them to the gathering position.

In addition, although the case where the front side part 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at the position where it comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view), ), it is possible to avoid contact between the front side part 802b and the regulating part 2888, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate at the fully open position.

Furthermore, the regulating portion 2888 may be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 in the assembled position or the fully open position, or even if it comes into contact with the rotating petals 802 in the fully open position, the position of the petals 802 changes slightly. By setting the restricting portion 2888 at a position where it can pass through and passing the load, it is possible to prevent the restricting portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the regulating section 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 when viewed from the front, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the presentation device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the distance, it is possible to make a difference whether the petal 802 is expanded to the maximum and performs a rotational operation, or whether the petal 802 is expanded halfway and performs a rotational operation.

For example, by performing a performance in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the production device.

Note that the regulating portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from a design perspective, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 contacts the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or are rotating (fluttering) while causing a slight change in posture due to contact with the regulating portion 2888. .

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the regulating part 2888 is the tip position, but if the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the position when the petal 802 changes its posture will be reduced. The degree of spread varies. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be varied in a plurality of ways.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830, but a petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of No. 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 chronologically illustrate an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a). 198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

Note that when the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. The fact that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together by exceeding the resistance caused by the rotation is similar to the twelfth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

That is, the slit member 3810 differs from the slit member 810 in that among the wall parts extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall part on the clockwise side when viewed from the front is recessed in a manner to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the walls extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portions on the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a is recessed to widen the width in the transverse direction, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in a clockwise wall portion in a front view so as to widen the width of both slits 815 in the transverse direction.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a extends continuously from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 toward the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). is formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a longer radial length than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b extends from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). formed continuously.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and has a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts rotating clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the lower right in FIG. (in the direction of entering the circumferential recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198(b)).

This releases the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the counterclockwise wall portions of the both-side slits 815 when viewed from the front, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the contact portion between the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the contact portion between the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the slit member). 3810, the first contact portion) is used as a fulcrum and rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, so that the guide pin 822 during the rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. Contact between the center recessed portion 3814a and contact between the threaded portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to such a depth that the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The circumferential recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 becomes lower than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other, when viewed from the front The sliding rib 803a on the radial center side accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side comes into contact with the walls of the both-side slits 815, so that the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)), by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

Thereby, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can perform operations that were impossible to realize in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194(b) ), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (rotate along with the slit member 3810). rotational motion) (see FIGS. 195, 196(a), and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. a), by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned to their original positions (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (the rotational movement of rotating along with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view from an arbitrary state (phase or attitude), the flat plate member 2803 and flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or attitude) are rotated. The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can start moving toward the gathering position from the position of the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 195) in the middle of expansion (see FIG. 198(a)), and then move to the gathering position. (See FIG. 197) The arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering motion can be varied, so the operation of the petal motion device 3800 can be varied.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening. However, the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment The wall portion 8326 is configured such that a plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a), and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment has an unexplained difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above. Most of the other configurations have already been explained in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above. Therefore, below, details of the lower frame member 8320 will be explained, and other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-back direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through hole 8326a on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400 has a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and corresponds to the slope of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b are drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connect the top surface and the bottom surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a plane position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b are drilled in the left and right corners with a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

The purpose of each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c is to facilitate the downward passage of liquid such as the drinking water described above, and to facilitate the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300, which will be described below. It is a through hole having. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may be caused by a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a nuisance and forcibly stops the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a player who is just curious, and the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330.

Here, since the operating device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, there is a high possibility that foreign objects will be inserted into the gaps V13 and V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) disposed at the rear end, that is, it is supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be displaced (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that takes advantage of looseness caused by adding up design errors that are incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation that occurs by slightly deforming each member. (transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so that it is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1 yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left), the gap V13 that is created in the other side (for example, to the right) is caused by the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two, and can be large enough to allow insertion of a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is shifted to either the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also fixed by using the backlash around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the back side and causing displacement (deformation), a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into this gap V14.

In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 operates to tilt with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into either the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that foreign objects such as

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that constricts inward from the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. On the other hand, the coin-shaped foreign object fitted into the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance will become excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem will occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign object rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate, which may impede the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it will be impossible to perform the intended performance with the operating device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. If it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign object has been removed, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible, but in a state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operating device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign object.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be explained below.

203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(c) is a front view of the operating device 8300. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 along the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a horizontal width larger than the horizontal width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid will be discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. Liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, if a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gap V14 is on the top surface of the extension part 311h, the slope of the top surface of the extension part 311h (left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) An inclination D81 that is curved toward the left and right and is inclined downward toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310, and an inclination D82 that is inclined downward toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is tilted. (see FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign objects can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while making it easier to remove coin-shaped foreign objects, so the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be ensured more easily than in the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. The size of the target object is larger than that of the target object. That is, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In this embodiment, except for the spherical shell part 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are successively arranged on the left, right, top, and bottom of the spherical shell part 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (mirror-finished members are is fixed), thereby reflecting the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a is used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light through the first through hole 8326a, the center portion in the left and right direction can be viewed brightly.

Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is smaller than the coin-shaped foreign object. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object becomes a shadow). In other words, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign object remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object as clues, so that the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed from the lower frame without being noticed. The possibility that it continues to remain in the member 8320 can be reduced. Note that this effect is not limited to when viewed through the first through hole 8326a, but also applies when viewed through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole through which a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 can be discharged in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a horizontal width of about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500 yen coin). The width in the normal direction is approximately 2 mm.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left and right center of the bottom plate part 321, even after a coin-shaped foreign object has slipped down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate part 321, it can be easily removed. can remove coin-shaped foreign objects.

The second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, so that, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used for discharging the liquid to the outside.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and removes a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the same upright state (posture).

That is, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be ejected when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is approximately 30 [mm] when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left and right direction is approximately 2 [mm].

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c by simply removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 from the front (see FIG. 92). In addition, the covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a fastening part 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved part 371 with a screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction, and a hanging part 372 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw that is inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is simply fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened toward the right and outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including each of the embodiments described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the screws connecting the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 can be removed, and the harness HN3 can be removed from the connector part 8353 to facilitate operation. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operating device 8300.

Thereby, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operating device 8300 and the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, it does not receive the load from the front frame 14, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, The front frame 14 is disposed in such a manner that it receives a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinal displacement member 2652 that is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14 . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, in FIG. 204(a), the front frame 14 is shown in a state open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are each simplified and illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be able to vertically displace the front side of a plate part (a plate part arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate part 611; A longitudinally displacing member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the vertically displacing member 2651 and supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction; a locking portion 2653 protruding downward from the longitudinally displacing member 2652; A support part 2654 that holds the member 2652 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two places in the front and back, and is fixed to the plate part 611a, and a front side that comes into contact with the support part 2654 and the locking part 2653 and is attached to the front and back displaceable member 2652. and a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and a state in which it is separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertically displacing member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap between it and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position. is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 can be placed at a front position where it is pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)), or placed at a rear position where it is pushed by the front frame 14. The rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) is configured to be movable.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclined surface 2652a slopes downward toward the tip. The slope 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the longitudinally displacing member 2652 is disposed at the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the longitudinally displacing member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. , is a continuous slope.

The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the lower position at the front position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. Set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is placed in the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes larger by the thickness in the front and back direction. be able to.

As a result, the load that the post-rotation claw member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the drooping back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. This makes it easier to define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the falling of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side with the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate part 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, a spring with a lower elastic modulus is adopted as the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. Since the force resulting in this can be reduced, it is possible to improve the operator's freedom of selection and work efficiency.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the inverted cup part 178 is melted with a heated piano wire, and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are stretched above the inverted cup part 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. Although the case has been described in which the fraud is detected early by detecting burnout caused by heated piano wire, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects burnout due to heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the contracted shape, and FIG. 205(c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to the tensile shape (memorized shape) by application of heat. be done. Further, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross section at a front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 has a main body box part 2281 which is configured in a box shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side and is stacked above the inverted cup part 2178, and a main body box part 2281 with a back side opening so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box part 2281. A space is formed between the main body box part 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box part 2281 is made of a metal material, and has an extending part 2283 extending from the lower right corner and abutting the left surface of the wall part 2178a of the inverted cup part 2178, and an opening narrowing upward from the lower corner. A narrow portion 2284 extends from the inner wall, a protruding portion 2285 protrudes upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the narrow portion 2284, and a protruding portion 2285 recessed from the back side of the left side wall of the main body box portion 2281. A first conductive part 2286 is housed in a recessed part, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281. It is accommodated in a recess formed from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conductive part 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can be contacted, a torsion spring SP15 that generates an urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protruding structure that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. A shape memory spring 2288 supported by the portion 2285 and disposed below the second conducting portion 2287 is provided.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when detecting heat. In the first conduction section 2286 and the second conduction section 2287, one end of separate wires is connected to the outside of the main body box section 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is connected to the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(b)). (See c)), the conduction is broken, and control is performed to output an error signal by inputting the fact that the conduction is broken.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120) outputs a loud warning, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops dispensing balls, etc., and other actions are continued. It is controlled in such a way that it is impossible to play games.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup part 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall part 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and the extending part 2283 is formed between the inverted cup part 2178 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Since the extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the elongated cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will remain intact and cover the elongated cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature approximately equal to the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and has a tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) stored in advance. .

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated above the transformation temperature by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, and the second conductive part 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part The conduction with 2287 is broken and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

The extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 toward the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in an elongated shape in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and extends toward the front side. overhang. After the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tensile state and returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and returns it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be returned again. In other words, even after a fraudulent act is discovered, it can be used repeatedly in order to detect the fraudulent act early.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) shows an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing a portion 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically representing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) is a diagram of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that in FIG. 206(a), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed into a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. Note that in this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, but in this embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is determined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a region CCVIc arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, although the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side, and is heated by heat press. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted by the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, although the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

Note that the concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (45° inclination angle with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of approximately 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is refracted vertically to a weak degree and travels substantially horizontally.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in a direction that collects the light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550 in a direction that spreads the light. can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed into a flat plate shape, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 can be made different, so that the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed while producing light emitting effects. The effect can be improved.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex shaped portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400. This improves the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operating device 10300, in which the swinging device member 10310 is shown in an upward position in FIG. A lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emitting effect, and a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the upper part of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emitting effect and It mainly includes an upper presentation device 6500 on which sound presentation is executed.

Note that the above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal presentation device 6700 and the upper presentation device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. This is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, the illustration of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is omitted in FIG. 208. This is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be seen from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 shows a view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operating device 10300 (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operating device 10300). Ru.

The operating device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, each of which is formed into a thin plate shape and has enough flexibility to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodation recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the extent of the depression toward the back side increases as it approaches the left and right center, and the operation device It is arranged so that the left and right centers of 10300 coincide.

The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operating device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the mating position can be suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the mating position. Therefore, displacement of the operating device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions left and right away from the center) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, operation is not possible even if the front and back position from the metal main body 10014a to the mating position is lengthened. There is no problem with the effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the device 10300, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body part 10014a. A wide area for arranging the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, etc. can be secured.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 being the center.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Each of the newly described configurations is disposed in the front frame 10014, so the description will be given below focusing on the front frame 10014.

211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a that is integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. It is fastened and fixed. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening part (female thread forming part) that opens to the metal main body part 10014a side (back side), and the metal main body part 10014a has a fastening part A through hole is drilled at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male thread) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body part 10014a, screwing it into the fastening part, and tightening it.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. That is, the upper tray 17 holds the operating device 10300 from the upper rear of the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the lower front of the operating device 10300. Below, a configuration in which the operating device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be explained in order.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. Note that illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted in FIGS. 213 and 214. In addition, in FIG. 213, the operating device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is illustrated as viewed from the rear side, and for easy understanding, the operating device 10300 is shown with the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L, and the like. An assembly direction line connecting the fastening locations is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When assembling the operating device 10300 so as to fit it into the front frame 10014 from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 has a plate-like shape that projects from the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of the convex portion T10.

A bottom member De is provided below the operating device 10300 and is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the opposite side (lower side) of the inner case member 10330 and on the back side. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in rear view with the lower part open, and is formed in a size that can fit into the plate-like protrusion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operating device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operating device 10300 can be maintained due to the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. It should be noted that the fitting here means that the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-like convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

The tip of the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed with a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions that protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed in at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical protrusions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall (front side wall) of the recess De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-like protrusion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw screwed into the female threaded hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rests on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215(a)) rests on the plate-shaped support. It is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is arranged to face the flat plate-like portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the resin member 6427.

Note that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be normally separated, but a load may be applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward by performing a vibration effect.

After the operating device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by tightening a fastening screw inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operating device 10300 has a plurality of fastening parts 10333 (in this embodiment, three places) formed into which fastening screws can be screwed, and one of the fastening parts 10333 is covered with the inner case member 10330. It mainly includes a metal plate portion 10334 that has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge of an insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body portion 10014a.

Here, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the through hole H10a corresponding to the fastening part 10333 where the metal plate part 10334 is arranged, compared to other through holes H10a. The shape of this through hole is designed to a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

Thereby, as the operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be made to have the same role as a so-called ground wire. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operating device 10300 can be ensured.

Moreover, by arranging the metal plate part 10334 between them, the metal plate part 10334 can have the function of a washer. Thereby, the operating device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

Note that the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various forms are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws that straddle the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, if the pawls are formed to be shifted back and forth, they can function as spring washers, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The locations where the operating device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side, except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts necessary for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in designing the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is problematic because the operating device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a sinking (downward) load is applied to the front side of the operating device 10300. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the fastening points are concentrated on the back side while suppressing the sinking displacement of the front side of the operating device 10300. This will be explained in order below.

First, the function of the fitting recess De1 will be explained. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits into the fitting part 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, vertical movement of the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the functions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include a plate-shaped protruding portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion disposed on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10321c that projects in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d that further project from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c. Mainly equipped with

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10322c projecting in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half. Note that the right front cover 10322 does not have a portion corresponding to the partial projecting portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging parts 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging part 10321d are configured as parts that are inserted and fitted into the accommodation recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge protrusion 10017b whose lower edge extends to the front side with approximately the same extension width on both sides of the accommodation recess 17a, and At a position slightly longer than the thickness of the plate-like projecting parts 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge projecting part 10017b on both sides, the plate-like projecting parts 10321c and 10322c are arranged opposite to the lower edge projecting part 10017b in a manner projecting toward the front side. A plurality of opposing overhangs 10017c forming grooves between the lower edge overhang 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d formed in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper sides face the lower edge overhang 10017b. and an escape hole 10017e that is bored in the front-rear direction at a position parallel to the opposing projecting portion 10017c on the right side.

When assembling the operating device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-shaped projecting parts 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge projecting part 10017b and the opposing projecting part 10017c, and the plurality of partial projecting parts 10321d are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-shaped projecting parts 10321c and 10322c into the grooves between the lower edge projecting part 10017b and the opposing projecting part 10017c. It is restrained from doing so.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting parts 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape with an open front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated inside the arch with their surfaces in contact with each other. can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or back side direction.

With this configuration, the swinging operation member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in an upward position, and the displacement of the operating device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load directed backward to the swinging operation member 10310. (return to original position early).

Here, when the player operates the swinging operation member 10310, he/she will mainly operate it with his/her left hand. When operating the disposed operating device 10300, the left hand is extended diagonally forward to the right, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a rearward load is applied to the swing operating member 10310 and a lateral load is simultaneously applied to the swing operating member 10310, there is a possibility that the operating device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left/right directions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operating device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped part of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them, so that if the operating device 10300 is displaced, The restoring force of the possible deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is generated in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operating device 10300 to its original position. Thereby, even if the operating device 10300 is misaligned, it can be quickly returned to its position.

Each of the above configurations can suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress displacement of the operating device 10300 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a.

Note that the relief hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which fixing assembly portions 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, are inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position that projects further outward than the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operating device 10300 will be explained. First, an outline of the internal structure of the operating device 10300 will be described. 215(a), FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a), and FIG. 216(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207.

In FIG. 215(a), the swinging operation member 10310 is shown in an upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and in FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a), and FIG. 216(b), , a state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in a downward position (a depressed position in this embodiment) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operating device 10300 has a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340, which pivotally supports the swing operating member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363, is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310, which can be operated by the player, is displaced by the movement of the shaft support rod 10363, which is arranged on an arcuate locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. It is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner in which displacement in the rotational direction is combined, and to cause the displacement by an operation by the player.

That is, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

In addition, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the front and downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of applying a load in the direction of moving the swinging operation member 10310 away from the wall member 10322b) allows the swinging operation to be performed. The member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (reversely rotated posture, a posture in which the member 10310 is rotated backwards by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, compared to the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, the angle of attitude change of the swing operation member 10310 is small, so it is possible to suppress changes in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Furthermore, when an operation (push operation) is performed on the lens member 10317 that is movably supported by the swing operation member 10310 while the swing operation member 10310 is placed in a downward position, the swing operation is caused by the load at the time of the operation. The operating member 10310 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support rod 10363, and is displaced in a manner such that it falls forward, thereby changing the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode differs, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 also changes. Can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thereby, even if the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that uses electromagnetic force to move a pair of members toward and away from each other in a linear direction. A disc-shaped plate in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner circumferential surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer circumferential surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member (a member disposed on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. Note that the inner cylinder of the pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction.

The vibration device 10366 is configured to be able to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. Additionally, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

Thereby, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making the most of the energy of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, and the performance effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operating device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are provided behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved at their outer ends (ends opposite to the swinging operation member 10310), and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swinging operation member 10310 side. Ru. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swinging operation member 10310 can be ensured, and it is also possible to secure a large space around the swinging operation member 10310. You can secure space for your fingers.

Further, since the curved end portion is formed in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the design can be improved, and the deformation of the curved portion can be caused separately as a whole. , it is possible to widen the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are bored in the front-rear direction so as to allow insertion of fastening screws fastened to both left and right ends of the accommodation recess 17a, A fixing assembly 6802 is provided for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 inseparably using fastening screws.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the parts farthest from the load applied to the operating device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left and right direction and perpendicular to the left and right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted, so the insertion holes are It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws inserted through 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed at the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. This position is shifted to the right from the position where the plate-like protruding parts 10321c and 10322c are located closest to the back side. That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that can be disassembled at the left and right center, but the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left and right center to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed to the right of the left and right center. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed over a wider area than the right front cover 10322.

In this embodiment, because the rear boundaries of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are shifted from the center in the left-right direction, one member (the main In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), making assembly easier than when aligning with both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operating device 10300. Here, the swinging operation member 10310, which is a part operated by the player, can be placed close to the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (particularly placed close to each other in the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Therefore, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may loosen due to load transmission during operation of the operating device 10300. In contrast, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is arranged to be shifted left and right from the center of the left and right where the load during operation is maximum, thereby reducing the transmitted load compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly part 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and also shifting the boundaries between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, assembly efficiency can be improved and the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws can be prevented. This can be made less likely to occur.

Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 at the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321 in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate of the inner case member 10330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the upper plate The fixing assembly 6802 holds it from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330, the number of fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening points, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 become difficult to bend due to the rigidity of the fastening screws, and there is a possibility that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 more flexible while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 can be made thinner, but in this case, it may lead to a decrease in durability or lead to fraudulent activities. There is a risk that

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening locations as in this embodiment, it becomes possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Thereby, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without making the plate thicknesses of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 excessively thin.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be integral with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, and can be disassembled to the left and right.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front-rear direction (adjustment slots 10323a, 10324a). be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is movable relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is movable relative to the right cover member 10324. , it is possible to easily adjust the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This will be explained below.

The operating device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape that follows the curved surface of the cover members 10344, 10345 (see FIG. 215), and hides the left and right edges of the cover members 10344, 10345. A left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 each include adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction, at their outer upper ends.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be bent due to molding variations etc. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction relative to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a that is recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that contacts the left front cover 10321, and is prevented from coming off in the front and rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. When the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall member 10322b is mounted in a manner that the left front cover 10321 is prevented from moving leftward by the end face of the left front cover 10321. Member 10322b is held within fitting recess 10322a.

With this configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced by simply removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is able to absorb the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). ). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, to explain the assembly procedure, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to the transition from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

Here, if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is necessary to take the trouble to It becomes necessary to make corrections by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

In addition, in anticipation of this, when determining the positions of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 by weakly fastening the left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 without fully tightening them, After the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure). However, since the work itself becomes complicated, this is not preferable in terms of simplifying the work.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are attached to the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 each include shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R whose front edges are arranged to face the guide part 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap created between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a is shifted due to the influence of load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide part 10344a and the shielding plate part will be separated when the operation device 10300 is operated. There is a risk that 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. Resin shavings have little effect when they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings gets stuck in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch, such as a photocoupler type switch, the shavings may block light and cause false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in selecting switches that can be employed may be limited.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802, which is the fastening point for the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, is located at the left and right center position (the location where the maximum load during operation or operation occurs). Since it is arranged at a position left and right away from the bolt, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw to loosen.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a, it is possible to prevent the generation of resin shavings, and it is possible to suppress false detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swinging operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward rotation direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so it is determined that the pushing operation has been carried out. be able to. In this embodiment, since no load is applied to either the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R, and fan-shaped in front view on the lower side of the curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R. It mainly includes lower plate parts 6805L and 6805R that are continuously formed as plate parts.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (i.e., lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215 It is formed as a circular arc-shaped surface with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered at (see).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the back surface to the back side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and is located on the front side surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to protrude further to the rear side.

As a result, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220), the protruding interference portion 6805a prevents the displacement toward the left and right outside from the inner edge. It is regulated to Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from displacing outward in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from disassembling in a manner that separates them from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are parts that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R, respectively, and are connections that expand outward in front view and curve toward the front side at the expanding tips. It includes curved parts 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 includes a plurality of fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L arranged at the top and bottom, which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed into them. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes a plurality of insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R arranged vertically at the left end portion, through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening parts and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operating direction of the operating device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operating device 10300 can be dispersed to each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress misalignment at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional deviation at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The performance of the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R (see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating. These fastening parts and insertion holes each have different roles. Below, they will be explained in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that they sandwich the insertion hole H23a formed in the left-right direction in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched therebetween by fastening screws. . Note that this is not a so-called "co-fastening" mode, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical section extending rightward from the fastening section 6802L comes into contact with the left side of the plate section where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, due to the fastening, no compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operating device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, when a minute displacement occurs in the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 can be prevented from being displaced in the same way.

Note that the extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, so loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly part 6802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that projects toward the front side. By screwing in this fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. Note that in this embodiment, the only locations where the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the locations where the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b are fastened.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole into which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction in a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is inserted. By screwing in this fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In addition, in this embodiment, the locations where only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening locations by the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are parts that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In addition, in this embodiment, the locations where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening locations by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in this embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at multiple locations along the forming direction of the opposing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but the combination of objects to be fastened at each location is are configured differently. Thereby, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembly work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be explained below.

First of all, if either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at even one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 will be prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When attaching the left front cover 10321 first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b, and the right front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330. When attaching the cover 10322 first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one place, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are each independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. can.

After this, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly part 6802 and fastening and fixing them, although the order is not specified. Further, by screwing in and fastening fastening screws into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by also forming a portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only in a fastening manner in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared to the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the fastening work can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operating device 10300, the operating direction of each operating section is along a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, so the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is This is the direction perpendicular to the direction of operation. That is, if a load or impact occurs along the operating direction during operation, a component in the direction in which the fastening screw is screwed in does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In this embodiment, the operating device 10300 includes a plurality of operating parts (including parts that operate by operation, such as a swing operating member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operating parts are levers. Since the lever member 10340 is designed to operate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to be the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if some operating parts do not move on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally left and right directions), each operating part The direction found as the balance (average) of the operating directions (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the fastening direction, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the tightening direction. You may also set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only does this).

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). 10322a and a portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces facing each other vertically contact each other.

In the contact portion, a plate-shaped portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate section 6803L includes a lower overlapping section 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the lower overlapping portion 6803La supports the shielding plate portion 6803R, downward displacement of the shielding plate portion 6803R with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side part is housed, and the lever member 10340 are driven. It is possible to prevent liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electrical system (board, etc.) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, while the cuts in the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swinging operation member 10310, the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the right side of the swinging operation member 10310. It is arranged in the same plane as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the cut between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed toward the left side with respect to the left-right center of the inner case member 10330 (the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 (Refer to FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. It is possible to avoid getting the drive motor wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapped portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate part 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping part 6805Lb, displacement of the lower plate part 6805R to the rear with respect to the lower plate part 6805L is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress passage of liquid between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support part 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a large amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 and the lower plate There is a possibility that the liquid passes between the body box parts 6421 of the forming member 6420 and flows toward the through hole 6412 or flows along the recessed part 6414. In particular, when liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid flows downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may splash on the player or wet the Senryobako.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, so it is easy to prevent liquid from passing through by sandwiching the hole without a gap. By suppressing liquid from passing between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the Senryobako, so the player can A pachinko machine 10010 that allows players to play comfortably can be constructed.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are shaped like stripes that are pushed out from the front side to the back side. It includes a striped portion D23 formed in. The striped portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The striped portion D23 serves as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shield plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. In other words, compared to the case where it is formed as a simple thin plate, the rigidity along the direction in which the striped portion D23 is formed is increased while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23. Improve (anisotropy). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as portions that fill the gap. Here, the operating device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a small amount due to the load or impact during the operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during the operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be immovable.

That is, when operating the operating device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be created between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a. In this embodiment, by extending the curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R in the vertical direction (elastically deforming or bending), it is possible to respond to changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and the gap can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the striped portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R deform (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since the size is increased (rigidity is increased), it is possible to prevent vibration from occurring when the shape is restored or from deforming more than necessary. In this way, the striped portion D23 in this embodiment is designed with one purpose as a countermeasure against problems that may occur when operating the operating device 10300.

The striped portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, so if a downward load is applied at the center, they will endure upward on both the left and right sides (a tensile force will be generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied to the operating device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly returned.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in a direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23, the deformation that is allowed based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R each include an end striped portion D24 formed in a striped manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The striped portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The end striped portion D24 mainly includes left and right striped portions D24a formed on the left and right sides, and a central striped portion D24b formed on the center side, each of which is formed as a countermeasure against loads in different directions.

The left and right striped portion D24a is a striped portion disposed above the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastening portions on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of a load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swinging operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operating load.

Note that the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a is such that those arranged on the left and right sides have a larger angle in a stepwise manner with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the striped portions extend in multiple directions. Thereby, irrespective of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 can be improved.

In addition, the width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter for those arranged on the left and right sides than for those arranged on the left and right center sides. In other words, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction is larger and corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R becomes smaller, increasing the resistance force. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to improve the resistance force against the load in the direction where the inclination is large with respect to the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the load during operation is likely to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central striped portion D24b is a striped portion disposed downward from the same position as the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastened portions on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from. This upward slope corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operating device 10300 falls forward.

That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central muscle portion D24b by the central muscle portion D24b, the load generated during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 can be applied to the inside of the operating device 10300. It is possible to improve the resistance against the case member 10330) falling forward and being displaced.

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed of a total of seven pieces, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center as they move toward the back side. As a result, when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if a horizontal displacement also occurs, the Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left and right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the degree of lateral flexure (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is greater than that in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the lateral direction). This results in a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R are pushed down on the V-shaped design member 6450 (the lower edge position When the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R deform in such a manner that the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward, the upper and lower intermediate parts and upper edges of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, causing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to deform. It is possible to release the load (stress) applied to the area (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge projecting portion is arranged so that the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c that are continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the opposing overhang 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c are longer in shape in the front-rear direction as they go outward to the left and right, so that the front left cover 10321 Also, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the right front cover 10322 and the housing recess 17a.

In addition, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300 are reduced to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration and load.

That is, while it is possible to easily transmit vertical vibrations and operation loads to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to easily transmit vibrations and operation loads in the horizontal direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swinging operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower tray 50. It can be made difficult. This prevents vibrations and loads from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower plate 50, causing discomfort to the player, even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swinging operation member 10310. can.

Further, connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c, 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated in the left and right directions. It is inserted between the lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the opposing projecting portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, when comparing the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging parts 10321c and 10322c with the shapes of the lower edge overhanging part 10017b and the opposing overhanging part 10017c, if the vicinity of the left and right ends are shifted in the front-back direction due to molding errors, etc. (For example, if the front side upper ends of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the curves of the plate-like protruding parts 10321c and 10322c are loosened (the left and right ends are displaced toward the back side). It is preferable that molding errors can be accommodated by deforming the material as shown in FIG.

In this regard, in this embodiment, since the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, the rigidity in the left and right direction of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R is higher than the rigidity in the vertical direction. and be lowered. Therefore, when deforming the plate-shaped protruding parts 10321c, 10322c to the side where the curve becomes gentler, the deformation of the plate-shaped protruding parts 10321c, 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R. , the deformation width of the plate-shaped protruding portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of molding error that can be accommodated can be increased.

In this way, by not improving (weakening) the rigidity of the striped portion D23 in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which it is formed (in the left-right direction), measures are taken against problems that may occur when the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

From these facts, it is clear that there are problems that may occur due to the striped portion D23 when the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213), and problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. It can correspond to both.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 212. In this embodiment, a flat plate portion along the metal body portion 10014a (a plate portion in which the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) is provided at the lower left front side of the metal body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. and a plate-shaped upper plate part extending toward the front side so as to be bent at the upper end part of the upper part of the flat plate part, which slopes downward toward the right. A rear covering portion 10014b made of a resin material is provided in this manner. That is, the rear covered portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (connected to) the flat plate part at its rear end, and brought into contact with (connected to) the upper plate part at its right end. Balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 or so-called foul balls are stored in the area (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower tray 50 and the rear covered part 10014b face each other. That will happen. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 that constitutes the lower plate 50 will be explained.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower pan unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a in a manner that covers the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). A base member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted from above to the covered base member 6410 to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device that is attached to the covered base member 6410 from below. A ball ejecting device 6430 is fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and a ball discharging device 6430 is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that prevents the lower plate forming member 6420 from coming off from the back side at the left end of the covering base member 6410. , an intermediate holding member 6440 that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a on the opposite side (back side), and a V that is disposed on the upper front side of the covered foundation member 6410 and is formed from a resin material into a V-shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a character design member 6450.

The covering foundation member 6410 has a main body part 6411 formed in a substantially box shape with a substantially planar lower bottom surface and an open back and top surface, and a slight frame part in the front and rear at the lower bottom part of the main body part 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the main body 6412, a protruding shaped portion 6413 protruding downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body 6411 with the through hole 6412 as a reference; On the back side of the shaped part 6413, a concave shaped part 6414 is mainly provided, which is recessed so that the thickness of the protruded shaped part 6413 is approximately the same as that of the other part of the main body part 6411.

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large near the protrusion shape portion 6413, thereby improving the yield of resin molding and causing stress concentration in the protrusion shape portion 6413. This can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a location where the operating device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the bottom opening 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the ball ejection speed from the lower tray 50 can be adjusted to match the playability achieved by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. It can be adjusted to correspond to the ejection speed of the balls.

That is, the speed at which the balls are ejected from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432. For example, if the through hole 6412 is the same size as the bottom port 6432, the speed at which the balls are ejected from the bottom tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432. It cannot be made larger. In contrast, in this embodiment, the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, so if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range that does not exceed the through hole 6412, ( By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, the ejection speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covered foundation member 6410. In other words, the ball ejection speed (ejection mode) can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 that the player visually recognizes (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the Pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game parlor, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires transferring the paid balls to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require transferring the paid balls to the senryo box (so-called "personal"). ).

When it is necessary to transfer the paid balls to the senryo box, if balls are ejected at a high speed, there is a risk that the balls will frequently overflow from the senryo box, so the design is such that the balls are ejected at a slower speed than the predetermined speed. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the spherical shape (spherical shape with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the number of balls that can be ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, if it is not necessary to transfer the balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes greatly in the direction of increase. In such an installation mode, the balls that are paid out will flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so as an example of the upper limit of the ejection speed, The operating speed of the ball flow device is illustrated.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in front view, but there is a risk that the strength of the main body part 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where there is a risk of receiving load (mainly downward load) when a player operates the operating device 10300, so the size and arrangement of the through-hole 6412 and However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to the extent that it can withstand.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are assembled to the covered foundation member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other in such a manner that they sandwich the covered foundation member 6410 from above and below, with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 being the fastening direction. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430. Thereby, the surrounding portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

Note that the design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 come into contact with each other before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened (in a state where they are placed in the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), although there is a gap between them before they are fastened, the design may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Furthermore, the portion to be pressed need not be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially near the operating device 10300 (the right side near the protruding shape part 6413) and the back side part (the long plate part placed behind the through hole 6412) where there is a risk of receiving a shock every time it is opened or closed. Since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode that suppresses the load.

In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, sufficient strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be ensured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be placed at any position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to this. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower tray forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate part 6423 protrudes from the back side of the bottom surface in an L-shape when viewed from below, and a ball discharge device 6430 protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape on the inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate part 6423. a plurality of fastening parts 6424 into which fastening screws are screwed together; a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the discharge port 6422 as the base end; and a main body box part 6421. It mainly includes a plate-shaped support part 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the plate-shaped support part 6426, and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support part 6426.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at the front end of the lower tray 50 and at the right end. The bottom upper surface of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the balls flowing into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the discharge port 6422, where they are discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-like support portion 6426 where the load from the operating device 10300 is likely to occur, and the structure of the through hole may have the effect of reducing the strength. We are taking countermeasures, but the details will be explained later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different protruding lengths depending on the left and right positions, but this corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially planar shape, the lower surface of the lower base of the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward toward the right. 6412), the protruding length of the L-shaped plate part 6423 needs to be made shorter toward the right, and this corresponds to this. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate part 6423 comes into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (not in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are formed at two locations at the front end where loads from the player are likely to occur, and at one location at the back end where loads are likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing fastening points in locations where loads are likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening locations and prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from becoming unfixed and shifting in position when a load occurs. .

Furthermore, since the fastening part 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate part 6423, although the fastening part 6424 is fastened inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body part 6411 is separated). (While fastening is performed without forming a ). Therefore, the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 can be improved while making it unnecessary to form through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 serves both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in this embodiment, the bottom part of the lower plate 50 is formed from a plate shape that is elongated in the left and right directions, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Since it slides along the left-right direction that coincides with the above, it is possible to appropriately guide the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower plate 50.

Note that, as described above, since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair, the applied load can be distributed. Further, even if one of the parts is damaged, there is no problem in using it as long as the other part remains, so the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible material with appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball ejecting device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball ejecting lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom opening 6432 formed vertically through the main body plate portion 6431, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 are disposed vertically overlapping with the fastening portion 6424 of the fastening portion 6420 and are tightened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame surrounding the fastening holes 6433, the frame. It mainly includes a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covered foundation member 6410.

The ball removal lever 52 includes a grip portion 52a that extends forward so that the player can operate it by sliding it left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a guided rib 52c that is guided by the guide rib 6425, which is a pair of rib-like parts that protrude upward from the upper surface of the closing plate part 52b and extend in the left-right direction. are integrally molded from hard resin material.

The bottom opening 6432 is vertically opposed to the discharge opening 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As mentioned above, when not in operation, the ball removal lever 52 is placed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432, so the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile, so as in this embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300). Even though the configuration in which the lower tray unit 6400 is arranged is adopted, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating.

The details of how the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened will be explained. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (plane side and both left and right sides) excluding the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covered foundation member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball ejecting device 6430 is inserted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar The portion 6431a abuts on the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate part 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted from the outside of the fitting frame part 6434 in the front, back, left and right directions, and the lower end of the L-shaped plate part 6423 is , as described above, contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

In this way, the ball ejecting device 6430 can be positioned on the covered foundation member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejecting device 6430, and after aligning the positions of each component, the components are fastened. Each structure can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 6410 are inserted, and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A plurality of fastening parts 6442 protruding from the back side, which are parts to which screws inserted into the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and parts that interfere with the upper left end of the covered foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference part 6443 formed in a dovetail plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. 226 and 227 show the V-shaped design member 6450 in an exploded state from FIGS. 224 and 225.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and whose opening width becomes narrower toward the center of the left and right, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center of the left and right; A plurality of insertion holes 6452 are formed at the lower edge of the main body part 6451 as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning part 6453 is formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body part 6451, and the left and right sides of the main body part 6451 A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 are formed near the end portions and are formed to be able to be screwed into the fastening screws, and a plate shape extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451, and a plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are formed in the left side of the main body part 6451 in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body part 6451 and are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451. It mainly includes a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the locations where a through hole is likely to be formed by a person who commits a fraudulent act in order to insert a fraudulent member into the interior of the pachinko machine 10010. In other words, it is less difficult to make a through hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 than to make a through hole in the V-shaped design member 6450. It is possible to direct the right front cover 10322 to be opened.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the areas that are periodically checked to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that the through hole will be formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, so it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. This can reduce the burden of checking compared to the case where it is necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed with a thin wall and can be bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width (it can be bent and deformed in a vertically collapsible manner). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operating device 10300, vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operating device 10300 is prevented via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. communicated. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexibly deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is caused by the flexure of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

That is, after at least a portion of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 is manipulated by deforming the V-shaped design member 6450, it can be transmitted downstream thereof (for example, to the covered foundation member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, so that the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. In addition, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning part 6453 includes a fastening part 6453L formed on the left side with respect to the left-right center so that a fastening screw can be screwed into it, and a plate-shaped protruding part that projects toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening part 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering foundation member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion of the covering foundation member 6410 from the front side into a recess formed on the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in such a manner that it approaches the covering foundation member 6410 from the back side (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least a portion of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is not visible in the assembled state when viewed from the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, in a state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering foundation member 6410, the fastening screws inserted into at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the V-shaped design member is removed from the covering foundation member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 before disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of man-hours required until the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is provided with a front longitudinal portion 6426c to be described later, through which a fastening screw is inserted, which is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L. The insertion portion 6426c1 is fixed to the insertion portion 6426c1. In addition, the operating device 10300 is arranged in such a manner that the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operating device 10300 and move it from the position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to remove the operating device 10300 and disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R contacts the upper surface of the front longitudinal portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R.

As a result, even if, for example, the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is subjected to a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operating device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d Since these are fitted, the front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction as the operating device 10300 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 6453R, upward displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening parts 6454 are parts into which fastening screws are inserted through a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body part 10014a of the front frame 10014, and the fastening positions thereof are as follows. , on the back side (closer to the metal main body part 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening part 6453L.

The right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and because they have a thin shape that can be bent and deformed themselves, they can transmit displacement downstream by deforming themselves. It also functions as a buffer means (displacement transmission suppressing means) to suppress As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Below, they will be explained in order.

228(a) is a schematic sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) illustrate a cross section in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction. In addition, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have the same thickness, but are designed to vary the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction in accordance with the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6455a, an upper facing part 6455b that is arranged to face the upper plate part of the main body part 6451 in parallel and forms a gap, and an aspect in which the separation width becomes larger toward the back side with respect to the lower plate part of the main body part 6451. The lower facing portions 6455c are arranged to face each other in an inclined manner.

The lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted to the upper facing portion 6455b. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. This can prevent the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6455b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower opposing portion 6455c has a longer distance from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to be larger), so that the right side reinforcement is performed. The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (abutment) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when the rib 6455 itself is displaced.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement and load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 are transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In this embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged downstream (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but since the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, the operation handle 51 is It is possible to reduce the rate at which loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with operating and driving the device 10300 are transmitted to the operating handle 51. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a gaming experience in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling any discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b that is arranged to face the upper plate of the main body 6451 in parallel and forms a gap, and an overhanging portion 6456c that protrudes toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate of the main body 6451. and a lower facing portion 6456d that is arranged parallel to and opposed to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.

The lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted to the upper facing part 6456b. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. This can prevent the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that slopes away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 (downward) toward the back side. As a result, the projecting portion 6456c is formed not as a portion that constantly contacts the lower edge of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that contacts the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 increases to a certain extent. That is, the projecting portion 6456c can function as a fail-safe portion for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the amount of displacement becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the projecting portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front and rear positions where the load transmitted via the left front cover 10321 can be distributed can be increased, so that the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456 come into contact with the rear covered portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covered portion 10014b can be reduced. .

This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the rear covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where the balls are stored and where the player may put his hands) is reduced. This can prevent narrowing.

That is, although the rear covered portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the rear covered portion 10014b. can be suppressed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where the surface constituting the lower tray 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball, causing abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the arrangement spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to handle a larger load. In this embodiment, the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged close together in areas where the weight of the player's hand that touches the balls stored in the upper tray 17 placed on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven between the left and right sides. By arranging them evenly, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in this embodiment, the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are made different, so that different types of loads can be handled. That is, the right side reinforcing rib 6455 forms a sufficient gap between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower opposing portion 6455c to block the transmission of load, thereby preventing the instantaneous load or impact via the operating device 10300. On the other hand, the left side reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, the back It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. In this way, in this embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to be able to cope with load conditions that are likely to cause problems.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. , FIG. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed portion 6414 of the covered foundation member 6410 from side to side. , the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being spaced apart from the recessed portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be explained below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are similar to the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 is pressed from above, and the portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as shapes whose scales have been changed by an amount that can ensure the thickness of the main body portion 6411. Ru. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the horizontal width of the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is disposed closer to the front side than the center of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction, so that the protrusion shape portion The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the recessed portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a downwardly sinking manner, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, but details will be described later.

Here, in the state where the game is possible, the operating device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support 6426, and as the player operates the operating device 10300, the plate-shaped support 6426 can be vertically displaced. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are made of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410. There is a possibility that shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

If shavings are generated around the operating device 10300, for example, the shavings may enter gaps and make it impossible to ensure clearance, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor, causing false detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, generation of shavings can be suppressed or the amount generated can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, when a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction and the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the main body portion 6411 It is possible to eliminate the need for displacement of other parts such as.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the operating device 10300 in the lifting direction and the plate-shaped support part 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member 6450, there is no need to displace other parts such as the main body 6411.

In this way, in this embodiment, the plate-like support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operating device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body part 6411. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that slopes upward as it goes toward. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When storing the front frame 10014 alone, it is generally considered that it is often placed on a concrete or wooden floor with the lower surface of the front frame 10014 in contact with the floor. At this time, it may be preferable for the entire lower surface to be in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoidance of concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt from the floor will adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid getting dirt on it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped part 6413 comes into contact with the floor, a gap will be created between the floor and the lower surface of the main body part 6411. Therefore, the area where the shaped part 6413 comes into contact with the floor and gets dirty is limited to the projected part 6413. can do. Therefore, when the game parlor side installs the front frame 10014 in a state where it can be played, it is only necessary to wipe the dirt on the protruding shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

Further, the protruding portion 6413 also functions as a finger rest portion on which the front frame 10014 is hung when carrying it. Conventionally, the lower plate part was placed at the left and right center of the front frame, so it was easy to hook the lower plate part, lift the front frame, and attach it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower plate 50 is placed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening/closing axis side), so it is difficult to hook the lower plate 50 to lift the front frame 10014 and assemble it. It is said that the structure is

On the other hand, if you hook your hand on the operating handle 51 and lift the front frame 10014, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the base of the operating handle 41, which may damage the operating handle 51, so this is not recommended. is not desirable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a protrusion-shaped portion 6413 that also functions as a finger rest is arranged at the left-right center position so that it is recommended to hook the hand on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 and lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking his/her hand on the protruding shaped portion 6413, lifting the front frame 10014, and pivoting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

By configuring the work procedure to include wiping off dirt before and after placing a finger on the device, it is possible to make the worker aware of the locations where dirt needs to be wiped off in relation to the carrying action. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off dirt can be prevented.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured to be just the right amount of gap depending on the amount of deformation expected in the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. To be more specific, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor becomes larger as it goes toward the front side. This corresponds to the fact that the amount of deformation (deflection) due to load increases.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, even if the protruding shaped portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, it is possible to easily secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. I can do it. On the other hand, if the protruding shaped portion 6413 is bent and deformed to its limit and there is no gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor, it is possible to make the entire lower surface of the main body 6411 more likely to come into contact with the floor. Therefore, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can support the weight of the front frame 10014.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Further, the deformable amount is made larger toward the front side of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging a senryo box, a clerk at a game store slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape part 6413, but at this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are There may be a collision. If the impact and load from this collision accumulates as fatigue in the structural members, the structural members may be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the deformable amount of the protruding shape portion 6413 increases as it goes toward the front side where it is more likely to collide with the senryo box. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box through deformation (bending deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protrusion shaped portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that it rises toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the senryo box and the main body part 6411 will collide on the left and right sides of the protruding shaped part 6413 when replacing the senryo box. This can reduce the possibility that the bottom surface of the main body section 6411 will be damaged, making it easier to maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. In addition, in FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the other operating device 10300 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are connected to the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b (FIGS. 228(a) and 228(a)) of the V-shaped design member 6450. See b)).

Since the body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape in rear view, and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the body portion 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is reduced. is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a direction component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is directed diagonally upward.

This makes it possible to accommodate not only vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also horizontal displacement. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swing operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component, the downward load applied by the player will be If such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and may also be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operating device 10300 by bending and deforming based on their own curved shapes (they can absorb the horizontal displacement or use their restoring force). Furthermore, since the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center of the left and right sides, the operating device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, the design of the front frame 10014 as seen from the front (see FIG. 207) can be easily maintained.

233(a) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 233(c) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). Note that in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is connected to the lower tray forming member 6420 (in the rear side portion, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed by the installed end (lower end) and the ball ejection device 6430 (flange 6431a). Thereby, the area around the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate part 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted from the outside of the fitting frame part 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front, back, left, and right directions, and is shaped like an L. As described above, the lower end of the plate portion 6423 abuts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). Thereby, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As mentioned above, since the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not in operation, the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile, so as in this embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300). Even though the configuration in which the lower tray unit 6400 is arranged is adopted, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, sufficient bending performance can be given to the recessed portion 6414 near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operating device 10300 is likely to be large, so that when the player operates the operating device 10300 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covered foundation member 6410 that supports the operating device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to a load. This will be explained in detail.

As described above, the operating device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operating modes. It has the role of notifying the operation timing and operation mode through a display device or the like, having the player operate the operating device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swinging operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player performs a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to respond to notifications prompting operations in display effects (notifications such as "Press the button!") or to switch stages. Ru. Therefore, most of the load that occurs due to the operation is the load that occurs when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is the load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215(a)). Since the frequency of occurrence of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load increases.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled to vertically displace the swinging operation member 10310, for example, the swinging operating member 10310 is placed in a downward position. In this state (see FIG. 215(b)), a notification prompting an operation is executed.

In this case, the operating direction is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) which is further inclined in the front-rear direction by an angle θ17y compared to the state in which the swing operating member 10310 is placed in an upward position. A load occurs along the line. Since the notification occurs only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases as it goes toward the front side. It is designed to have high compatibility performance.

In other words, compared to a case where the shape is the same in the front and back directions, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load occurrence in the appropriate place, and the applied load may cause too much deformation or insufficient deformation. This makes it easier to avoid damage.

As described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where loads are more frequently generated during operation are both the front side, so the concave shaped portion 6414 becomes wider as it goes toward the front side. , was formed at the deep bottom, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swinging operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, so in this case, the recessed shape becomes wider toward the back side. By forming it at a deep bottom, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load generation in the appropriate place, compared to a case where the shape is common in the front and rear directions. This makes it easier to avoid problems such as occurrence of deformation or insufficient deformation resulting in easy breakage.

As shown in FIG. 233(b), which corresponds to the center cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 6426b abuts the main body portion 6411 vertically at a position on the left and right sides of both ends of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the left and right widths. come into contact with

As a result, the rate at which the load from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the recessed portion 6414 can be lowered compared to the case where the hanging plate portion 6426b contacts the upper edge of the recessed portion 6414. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress damage to the recessed portion 6414 due to the load when operating the operating device 10300.

In addition, in response to the load, not only the deflection of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the deflection of the plate portion from the upper edge of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is utilized. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support part 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 extends downward from the flat plate-shaped part 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed and the left and right and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped part 6426a. A hanging plate-like part 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape, and a front longitudinal part that is connected to the front side edge of the plane plate-like part 6426a and is formed to be taller than the plane plate-like part 6426a, and is open at the bottom. 6426c, and a fitting part 6426d that extends from the front longitudinal part 6426c to the back side and is fitted with the operating device 10300. Note that in the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 will be referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the horizontal width of the recessed portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed portion 6414. A hanging plate-like part 6426b is formed between the plane plate-like part 6426a and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 (between the top and bottom). That is, the planar plate-like part 6426a does not come into contact with the main body part 6411, but the extending end of the hanging plate-like part 6426b, which is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (see FIG. 225), comes into contact with the main body part 6411. , the position of the planar plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covered foundation member 6410 is determined.

In this way, since the planar plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426b are formed not in a block shape but in a box-shape with an open bottom, the planar plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is considered to be a composition. Therefore, not only the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed in response to the load via the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexibly deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covered foundation member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the recessed shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 Damage can be further prevented.

Although the hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the bottom upper surface of the main body portion 6411, it does not extend into the recessed portion 6414. That is, a space is created between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protrusion shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Furthermore, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that has flowed along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid entering the back. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front longitudinal portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 due to the fitting portion 6426d extending toward the back side, and the lower portion of the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load applied by the player to the operating device 10300 can be distributed not only to the main body part 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be weakened. can.

Further, a space is also created between the front side longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protrusion shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Further, the space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a water drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that has flowed along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid entering the back. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed to be elongated in the lateral direction so as to be able to fit into the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operating device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to a lower surface and a front longitudinal portion 6426c formed on the extending proximal end side.

The reinforcing ribs 6426d1 can suppress vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting part 6426d, so even if a load that displaces the operating device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting part 6426d can withstand it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed above the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load accompanying the player's operation and vibration of the operating member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-shaped support part 6426 via the resin member, and then to the covered foundation member 6410 disposed downstream thereof. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the main body part 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The direction component can be directed to the front side (load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operating device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) may shake, which may affect the flow of the shot ball, or the load may be transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 or the electronic board, causing the board to crack. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the top effect device 6500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 235 and 236, illustration of the above-described lower tray unit 6400 and operation device 10300 is omitted, and a state in which the upper presentation device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body portion 10014a is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper presentation device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the audio devices 6610 arranged as a pair of left and right, and includes an illumination board 6570 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. , and each component member that acts as an intermediary to deliver the light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the direction of separation from the metal main body portion 10014a is disposed on the back side of the upper presentation device 6500. Thereby, it is possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the top presentation device 6500 to the metal main body portion 10014a (stable fastening and fixation).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500. Note that FIGS. 237 and 238 illustrate a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper presentation device 6500 is disassembled upward.

The upper presentation device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6560 disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion that is formed by dividing a horizontally long ellipse into front and rear parts. 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed vertically near the front edge of the main body plate 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of insertion holes 6512 extending downward from the back side of the main body plate 6511. It mainly includes a plurality of fastening parts 6513, each of which has a female threaded hole formed from the back surface of the extended tip and is configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body part 10014a into the female threaded hole.

The rear side portion of the upper lid member 6510 where the fastening portion 6513 extends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and other components of the top presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512. That is, by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper cover member 6510, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper presentation device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on its front side. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has a structure in which the acoustic device 6610 corresponds to the metal main body portion 10014a. It can be prevented from coming off.

The upper lid member 6510 has an uneven portion 6514 recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface and extending downward from the lower surface as a decoration over the entire surface. Due to the uneven portion 6514, the force for resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased compared to the case where the upper cover member 6510 of the same thickness is constructed of a plate-like member with a smooth surface. (can be made easier).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500. Note that in FIGS. 239 and 240, illustration of the upper lid member 6510 of the upper presentation device 6500 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are shown disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In this embodiment, the upper direction device 6500 is moved by moving the front units 6520 to 6550 diagonally downward in the front direction (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the surface follows) relative to the rear units 6560 to 6580. The details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED, and refracting or transmitting the light, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 have the role of receiving light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED. It has the role of a means and a role of supporting an illumination board on which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241(b) is a front view of the illumination board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 include a partitioning member 6560 that partitions the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate light to the partitioning member 6560. An illumination board 6570 is arranged, and a pair is stacked on the back side of the partition member 6560 and is disposed with a slight gap from the illumination board 6570 in the inner area of the outer shape, and is supported on the surface in the outer part. It mainly includes a back support member 6580.

Note that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illumination board 6570 can be maintained, and it can be supported so that it can be displaced back and forth by the gap between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580. It means that.

The partitioning member 6560 is disposed close to and opposite to the front side of the illumination board 6570, and is configured to divide the light emitted from each of the illumination parts 6574 to 6576 of the illumination board 6570 from the vicinity of the illumination board 6570. Ru. By dividing the area in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, even when the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 differs greatly. It is also possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 disposed to face the illumination board 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed at the left and right center portions of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a center light hole 6562 formed at the lower left and right portions of the opposing plate portion 6561. A plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. , a rectangular cylindrical part 6566 that surrounds the central light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the opposing plate part 6561, and a long cylindrical part that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563 and extends to the front side of the opposing plate part 6561. A plate-like connection that is formed from an extended left and right cylinder part 6567 and a T-shaped plate part when viewed from the front, and connects the opposing plate part 6561, the central cylinder part 6566, and the left and right cylinder parts 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate part 6561. 6568.

The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c projecting from its upper edge toward the rear side in a left and right elongated shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portions 6561b are formed as a left and right pair, and extend from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portions 6561c are formed as a left and right pair and extend from a position opposite to the end of the second flange portion 6561b with the fastening portion 6564 in between to near the left and right ends of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570, and at least the cut is provided on the illumination board 6570. It is constructed in a location where light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, even if light enters from the outside, this location is a location where the light is unlikely to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange part 6561a and the second flange part 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and is purposely designed to prevent the LED from being placed on the illumination board 6570. The locations where no placement is made are defined as cuts. Therefore, since there are no LEDs that cause light leakage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leakage from the cut.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at the location where the fastening portion 6564 is disposed, and the cut is intentionally set at the location where the alternative portion that blocks light is disposed. This is what I did. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light attempting to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking from the cut.

Here, the flange parts 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous part, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange parts 6561a to 6561c cannot be ensured sufficiently, and the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 (Assuming a downward load applied to a member placed in front of the partition member 6560, a load applied by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract it only with the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening part 6564. occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening parts 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illumination board 6570 decreases, which limits the locations where LEDs can be placed. This reduces the degree of freedom in designing the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths that ensure rigidity, the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 can be resisted by the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening parts 6564 can be limited, reducing the number of work steps and improving the degree of freedom in designing the illumination board 6570.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed depending on the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the shape of the upper presentation device 6500 is formed into a semi-elliptical shape whose width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). Generally, the load applied by the player (for example, a hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper presentation device 6500, so the load applied by the player at the left and right center of the upper presentation device 6500 is maximum. It gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

In contrast, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are intentionally made to have different lengths. To be more specific, compared to the horizontal length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the horizontal length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right sides thereof is longer, Furthermore, the third flange portions 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the horizontal length is the shortest at the left and right center portions, and gradually increases as it approaches the left and right ends. As a result, it is possible to generate a counterforce to the load applied to the top effect device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

Thereby, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 can be stably maintained. Note that maintaining the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to preventing the illumination board 6570 from being displaced due to a decrease in the force holding the illumination board 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the direction of separation, but also when deformation in the direction of approaching. This also includes the case where a compressive load is generated on the illumination board 6570 due to displacement or displacement to prevent the illumination board 6570 from being destroyed or deformed.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes bored corresponding to the pattern of LEDs arranged on the illumination board 6570. The center light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes that are slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes that are sized to surround a plurality of LEDs. .

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. As a result, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion having the same diameter and extending toward the front side, and includes an insertion hole 6565a formed at the bottom of the distal end thereof through which a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 from the back side is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540, which will be described later. With this configuration, the process of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed while the rear units 6560 to 6580 are assembled (see FIGS. 239 and 240). can.

The central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 extend until they reach the rear side ends of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 enters the front units 6520 to 6550.

The plate-like joint portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper presentation device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566 The top surface is placed at a slightly higher position than the top end of the. As a result, the plate-like joint portion 6568 takes over the load before the central cylindrical portion 6566, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566, and prevent the central cylindrical portion 6566 from deforming or displacing. This makes it easier to avoid situations where this happens.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylinder portions 6567. As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also counteracted by the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portions that reach the left and right cylinder portions 6567. can do. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-like part, a counter force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like part itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical parts 6567 can be suppressed.

The illumination board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board part 6571 and a fastening part that is bored or cut out in the board part 6571 and into which the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted. An insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 that is bored in the substrate portion 6571 and into which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs arranged at the left and right center portions of the substrate portion 6571 (Fig. It is formed from a first illumination part 6574 formed from a uniform rectangle (shown as a uniform rectangle in FIG. A second lighting section 6575 disposed near the substrate section 6571, a third lighting section 6576 disposed symmetrically along the lower end of the board section 6571, and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Prepare for the Lord.

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each illumination section 6574 to 6576 is formed from a plurality of LEDs that can emit light to the front side along the front-rear direction. They are arranged according to their physical position. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting section 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting section 6576 is located below the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. Thereby, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area divided by the division member 6560. Note that the first illumination section 6574 and the second illumination section 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560, whereas the third illumination section 6576 illuminates the area outside the partitioning member 6560.

Note that the third illumination section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As described later, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 travels diagonally downward by the light receiving member 6558, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 is blocked by the partitioning member 6560. As a result, the third illumination section 6576 and the partitioning member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is designed such that no fastening force is applied to the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illumination board 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed into a vertically elongated oval shape (or a half oval shape) when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve assembly efficiency, which will be described in detail later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that have substantially symmetrical shapes. A flange part 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate part 6581 toward the front side, an upper plate part 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange part 6582 and extending in a plate shape toward the back side, and a front plate. A rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape that is connected to the left and right edges (edges opposite to the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge of the portion 6581 and opens to the back side, and a pair of rear boxes. A lower box part 6585 which is a part of the part 6584 and is formed in a box shape that has a smooth upper surface and is opened downward on the side closer to the rear box part 6584 of the other side, and the lower box part 6585 and the front plate part. An opposing plate part 6586 which is a plate-shaped part connected to 6581 and is disposed opposite to the mating member (back support member 6580), and a cut that vertically penetrates between the opposing plate part 6586 and the lower box part 6585. It mainly includes a cutout portion 6587 which is a cutout.

The front plate part 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports that are made up of pairs of oval ribs capable of supporting the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 and insertion holes through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening part 6564 are inserted. portion 6581a and a through hole formed from a vertically elongated oval shape with a left and right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 front and back. A plurality of positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly drilled in the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584, through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; Similar to the screw insertion part 6581c, a plurality of long positioning holes 6581d are bored along the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box part 6584 and used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550, and It mainly includes a wiring hole 6581e that is bored at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decorative board 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass back and forth.

The inner width of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a in the left-right direction, which constitutes the short axis, is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560, while the outer width of the rib in the left-right direction is larger than that of the illumination board 6570. It is made longer than the left and right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening part 6564 is inserted into the inside of the elliptical rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the illumination board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they slope downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction in which the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the downwardly inclined direction. (See Figure 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illumination board 6570 compared to the case where the openings are made in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are brought closer to the illumination board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portions 6581 are formed in the same size, a wide area for disposing the illumination board 6570 can be secured, and when the illumination board 6570 is formed in the same size, The area in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (load in a hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 includes a plurality of fitting recesses 6583a arranged at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 6513 (see FIG. 238) and recessed so as to be able to fit into the fastening portions 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is open at the upper and rear sides and is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear box part 6584 includes a projecting part 6584a that projects further to the front side than the front plate part 6581, a sound transmitting part 6584b made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the projecting part 6584a, and a right side member. A light receiving section 6584c formed from a light-transmitting member is disposed at the right end of the overhanging section 6584a, and a light receiving section 6584c is disposed at a position closest to the center of the upper end (position close to the front plate section 6581). (See FIG. 207), a pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body portion 10014a are inserted into the insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510. It mainly includes a pair of fastening parts 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

The upper edge of the projecting portion 6584a is formed to follow the shape of the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and its upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission section 6584b is a section through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. This sound transmission section 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving portion 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from a lighting portion 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED disposed at the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and displays it to the player as a light emitting effect. It is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the illumination board 6570. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal variable effect, a reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emitting effect of the illumination unit 10014c is performed when the probability of occurrence is high. This is executed when a performance that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.

The notch 6587 is one side of a hole through which the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is vertically bored on the lower surface of the left and right center portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the vibrating membrane 6611). form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a hole surrounded by the support plate portion 10014d that supports the rear side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as sound directed towards the front side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates, whereas the sound is outputted as sound directed toward the back side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the audio device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612. By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different tones can be generated simultaneously.

244(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLIVb, and FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the audio device 6610 along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. 241. FIG. 246(a) is a partial sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(b) is a partial sectional view. is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb in FIG. 241.

Note that in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illumination board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Thereby, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibrations from the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from vibrating (width of vibration) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), a fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the illumination board 6570 in between. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illumination board 6570. That is, in the illumination board 6570, the fastening insertion portion 6572 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the fastening portion is not fixed to the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580.

Further, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a abut against the back surface of the illumination board 6570, the partitioning member 6560 is separated from the illumination board 6570 in its front and back positions. That is, in this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, so the illumination board 6570 can be displaced (for example, tilted) in the front and rear directions.

Furthermore, the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 is not supported by either the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that allows a gap to be formed below the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support part 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape that can form a gap below the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 244(a)). It will be explained that by forming in this way, the partitioning member 6560 can be easily assembled to the back support member 6580.

As in the past, for example, when the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a are formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening part 6564, the partitioning member 6560 is aligned vertically and horizontally with respect to the back support member 6580. It becomes necessary to assemble the

However, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is disposed in an unfixed state between the division member 6560 and the back support member 6580, when the division member 6560 is assembled, the back support member 6580 of the illumination board 6570 It is also necessary to align the position with respect to the target, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed with

As an example of the assembly order, first, the illumination board 6570 is attached to the division member 6560 so that the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the division member 6560 is inserted into the large diameter insertion part 6573 of the illumination board 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the illumination board 6570 with respect to the partitioning member 6560 does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be placed at any position.

In this embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illumination board 6570, so that when the illumination board 6570 is assembled to the division member 6560, the division member of the illumination board 6570 Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is significantly suppressed.

Next, the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted into the inside of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening part 6564 with respect to the fastening support part 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and may be placed at any position. In other words, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see Figure 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see Figure 242), positioning with a sufficiently long permissible width in the vertical direction), so the fastening part It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved relative to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the fastening part 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support part 6581a are aligned. and screw in the fastening screw (see Fig. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the illumination board 5670 is out of position, the partitioning member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large diameter insertion part 6573 is supported by the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 (see FIG. 244(b)). and the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, which generally makes it difficult to align the illumination board 6570. By forming the fastening insertion part 6572, the large-diameter insertion part 6573, the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), even though it is an assembled mode. , it is possible to improve assembly efficiency. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight, so that the illumination board 5670's misalignment will result in the effects of the light-emitting display during the game lasting for a long time. can be prevented from decreasing.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). The central light hole 6562 has an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in an inverted T-shape (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241) in the left and right center portions, and an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in a roughly gourd shape (approximately a pot shape) on the outside thereof. (arranged at eight locations, see FIG. 241) and direct entry holes 6562b. Note that the direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised toward the front side, and the inner wall is raised toward the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed in an inclined manner so that the opposing distance becomes wider as it goes toward the end.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 can be defined. That is, depending on the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (the angle of inclination of the inner wall, the raised height, etc.), the way the light is shown to the player can be changed.

In this embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised toward the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closing portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

In FIG. 246(a), a screw insertion portion 6581c is illustrated, and in FIG. 246(b), a positioning elongated hole 6581d is illustrated. As described above, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side, and along this inclination direction, the front units 6520 to 6550 are connected to the rear units 6560 to 6581d. 6580 and fastened and fixed.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the illumination board 6570 can be positioned to the extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion part 6581c, so the size of the illumination board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, the size of the rear box part 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged. (See FIGS. 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning elongated hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the cutting direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same extraction direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, and the like. In this embodiment, the shape of the screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d is distorted because the extraction direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the direction in which the fastening support part 6581a and the fitting recessed part 6583a are formed. (The shape changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion part 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening part 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a part that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion part 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the part where the load associated with fastening is applied is thinner toward the center of the hole, so there is no imbalance in the load between the upper edge and the other part. This tends to occur, and there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen depending on the usage conditions and years of use.

In order to prevent fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with larger head diameters may be used, but this will result in higher costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is disposed opposite to each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the shape of a depression ( A retaining plate part 6621 is provided, which is a part of the recessed part and is formed as an upper part of the plate parallel to the plate part in which the screw insertion part 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area between the back support member 6580 and the head of the fastening screw. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw becomes loose, it restricts the further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from falling out. It can be prevented.

The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight distance from the head of the fastening screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, if the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. If sound is to be output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back side of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 is formed to the extent that contact with the head of a fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a and screwed into the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 243) can be avoided (with a slight gap between the head and the fastening screw). (dimensions that allow for).

This can prevent the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through-hole of the fastening support part 6581a is the same front-back direction as the cutting direction of the resin mold, the wall thickness of the plate part to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a will become loose, but if the fastening screw becomes loose, the same function as the above-mentioned slip-off prevention plate part 6621 will be activated to avoid contact. A recess 6622 can be formed.

That is, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. If sound is to be output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, by being configured to be able to detect the transmission of vibrations caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw, It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loosened.

For example, an arrangement may be made in which an abnormal noise is generated by the transmission of vibrations, or a structure in which vibrations are detected.

As described in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, but is arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. be done. As a result, while the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 in between, the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination board 6570, and the illumination board 6570 is Breaking of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position excluding the presentation portions of the illumination board 6570 (that is, the illumination portions 6574 to 6576), and the proportion of the presentation portion on the surface of the illumination substrate 6570 is For the purpose of ensuring a large area, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

Therefore, there is a problem that the partitioning member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed, and without countermeasures, vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the back support member 6580, and the partitioning member When the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastened parts may become loose, and the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from a different direction. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening locations, fastening directions, and fastening directions of each component of the upper performance device 6500 are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is shown as a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper presentation device 6500 is configured in such a manner that front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of rear units 6560 to 6580, and an upper lid member 6510 supports the front units 6520 to 6550. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In this embodiment, since the top cover member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 are transmitted via the back support member 6580, the top cover member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed to curve with respect to the center of the front and back, the front-to-back distance between the insertion holes 6512 that are formed apart in the front and back is shortened. This generates a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the rear side, and can apply a compressive load to the partition member 6560 in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 can sandwich the partition member 6560 and apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. I can do it.

Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened, if the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced toward the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the force from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 is The applied load is likely to be insufficient, and there is a possibility that the effect of suppressing vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, so that the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 can be prevented from displacing toward the front side. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a sufficient load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 is connected to the rear support member 6580. The vibration transmission direction can be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550, and it is possible to suppress the front and rear fastening points from moving in the front-back direction. Therefore, even when vibrations are transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening points, the illumination board 6570 can be placed close to the acoustic device 6610, where vibration is likely to occur, in an unfixed state, thereby preventing damage to the illumination board 6570. It is possible to suppress vibrations of the partitioning member 6560 due to vibrations being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 that prevents the illumination board 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by more than an allowable amount.

That is, while improving the durability of the illumination board 6570 disposed close to the audio device 6610, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the upper presentation device 6500.

Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to correspond to the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the top cover member 6510 is configured such that the back side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and extends in a thin plate shape from front to back, it is easy to curve and displace in such a manner that the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the back side. It's about things.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is located below the upper lid member 6510, starting from the rear end due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. It can have a curved displacement. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to other members disposed below it.

The direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, so it is along the front-back direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (as it moves toward the front side), the direction of the compressive load is along the front-back direction. It follows a direction that slopes downward toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate part 6547 is a direction that is inclined downwardly toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer to each other.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate sufficient resistance force against compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw can be easily ruptured. can be suppressed.

A fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is used to fasten the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the bottom and back side of the illumination board 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c etc. in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed and is configured to be easily displaced, but the allowable displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be limited by the plate guide unit 6550. That is, even if the illumination board 6570 is displaced, if the amount of displacement becomes excessive, the illumination board 6570 can be prevented from being excessively displaced by being able to come into contact with the plate guide unit 6550.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illumination board 6570 (the side where the audio device 6610 is arranged), displacement of the illumination board 6570 toward the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from coming close to the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction are gathered at the left and right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening parts (screw insertion part 6581c, insertion plate part 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and are not arranged close to each other.

This makes it possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening part on the other fastening part. In other words, even if a fastening part along the front-rear direction becomes loose and displacement occurs in the front-back direction, the affected part can be limited to the fastening part along the front-rear direction, so the downward slope occurs. It can be avoided that a load is applied to the fastening portion along the direction in a direction that is inclined to the fastening direction (along the front-rear direction). Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing a portion that is elongated in the front-rear direction, such as the left-right center side, with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the upper direction device 6500 against a load in the push-down direction.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening part whose fastening direction is along a direction that slopes downward toward the front side is likely to have a lower resistance to a load in the downward direction compared to a fastening part whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance force against the load in the downward direction is reduced by arranging the fastening parts along the direction in which the fastening direction slopes downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction. The arrangement area for the illumination board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be secured while minimizing the influence of this.

FIG. 248 is a sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). Note that the specific location is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 248, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 abuts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, while the front and rear surfaces abut the left and right side parts of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side parts of the back support member 6580, the abutment positions are formed so as not to coincide on the front and rear sides.

With this configuration, the durability of the illumination board 6570 can be improved and the ease with which displacement occurs can be adjusted. These will be explained in order below. First, improvement in the durability of the illumination board 6570 will be explained.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 come into contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the same positions on the front and back, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partition When the distance between the abutting portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the thickness of the illumination board 6570, compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570, and if the applied load is large, the electric There is a possibility that the decorative board 6570 may be broken.

Furthermore, even if no compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, causing a load (for example, a load in the compressive direction). may be applied, and there is a risk that the illumination board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the positions where the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 abut on the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 do not match (there are places where they abut at shifted positions). Even if a load is applied to the illumination board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illumination board 6570, but a load that curves the illumination board 6570. Therefore, since the illumination board 6570 can be flexibly deformed, the possibility of cracking of the illumination board 6570 can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the likelihood of displacement of the illumination board 6570 will be described. The illumination board 6570 is inserted with the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 to prevent misalignment, but in this embodiment, they are concentrated near the left and right center. (See Figure 243).

In addition, since the illumination board 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illumination board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illumination board 6570 near the left and right center portions of the illumination board 6570. Therefore, even when surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the illumination board 6570, neither the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 nor the fastening part 6564 are arranged, and there is no compressive load from the front and back, so the illumination board Compared to the left and right center portions of 6570, displacement can occur more easily.

Therefore, when surrounding members vibrate due to vibrations of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged as a pair of left and right, the vibration mode of the illumination board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, there is a case where only the sound device 6610 on the right side outputs sound and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and a case where sound is output only from the sound device 6610 on the left side and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. The illumination board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes, including when the left and right audio devices 6610 output sound to vibrate both left and right sides of the illumination board 6570.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be explained. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520-6550. Note that in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustrations of detailed configuration symbols are omitted for easy understanding.

249 and 250 show a light transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the light transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The member 6530, a partitioning unit 6540 that comes into contact with the partitioning member 6560 in the front and back and similarly partitions the light, and a guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the overhanging part 6584a of the back support member 6580 are shown in an exploded state. Ru.

When producing light through the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives light from the first illumination section 6574, the division unit 6540 receives light from the second illumination section 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third illumination section 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be explained in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(a) is the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. 252(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253(b) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550. FIG. 6 is a rear view of unit 6550.

254(a) is a sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 254(b) is a sectional view taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 254(c) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254(c) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b).

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partitioning unit 6540 includes a milky white member 6541 made of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a light transmission unit 6520 that is formed through the milky white member 6541 in the front and back direction at the center thereof. A through hole 6542 formed to allow the rear portion to be inserted therethrough, a pair of fastening portions 6543 that protrude inward from the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A plurality of insertion holes 6544 are drilled through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed can be inserted, and a pair of post-guiding fastening portions into which fastening screws that extend cylindrical toward the back side and pass through insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546 that are opened toward the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and a pair of box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546 that extend downward from the lower edges of the box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions, are formed with insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are formed, and a colorless transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent covering member 6548 that is formed from a transparent resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541.

The front side edge of the compartment unit 6540 is formed into a curved shape that swells toward the front side when viewed from above, similar to the upper lid member 6510, and is formed into a substantially inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and the center is located on the back side when viewed from the side. It is formed from a substantially circular arc shape (see FIG. 254(a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. This fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side, corresponding to the inclination of a contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of an optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. Thereby, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate part 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into surface contact, and the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. Can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole facing toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 is a part of the illumination board 6570 that is disposed opposite to the second illumination section 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)), and has a front bottom back surface and a lower plate upper surface of the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546. , a jagged decoration with short left and right widths is formed. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

This shape allows light incident from the back side to be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a that is open at the top when viewed from the rear, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It mainly includes a protruding rib 6547c that has a semi-elliptic shape and protrudes toward the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated during fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is determined by the thickness of the upper edge of the portion where the load is applied during fastening depending on the direction in which the resin mold is removed (in this embodiment, the front-rear direction). It becomes thinner toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254(b)).

In this case, since load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the rest, there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen if small positional deviations occur repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. be.

In order to prevent fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with larger head diameters may be used, but this will result in higher costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to prevent displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, first, the threaded portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). (see (b)).

Second, the upper end of the front side of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage in the front-back direction with the lower end of the back side of the transparent covering member 6548, which is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b. (See Figure 254(b)). Thereby, displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into surface contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

These first to third contact structures can suppress the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540, thereby suppressing the loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a. I can do it.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed into a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a that extends in a plate-like manner toward the back side at the lower edge connection portion of the V-shape, and a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending from the upper edge to the back side. It includes a plurality of locking convex portions 6548b that protrude sideward in a plate shape. The left and right center portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate portion 6548a enters to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving section 6546, a jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-like section 6548a. As a result, even if the center portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be compensated for by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 6548 can be covered in the left and right direction. can be used to emit light uniformly.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the back side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a at a surface position with the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side, similarly to the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546, the cutting direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 will become complicated. In other words, the punching direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while it is tilted upward toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed of the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed of the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 constituting the slope, so that the transparent covering member 6548 The entire area can be visually recognized in a uniform color (white).

As a result, the cutting direction of the mold for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is tilted to the side that interferes in the front and rear drawing directions. While maintaining the shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering inside the partition unit 6540 when viewed from the front), the light emission of the transparent covering member 6548 can be played in a uniform light emitting manner. It can be made visible to the person.

In other words, while the partitioning unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the vertical interval narrows), the back side of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 are adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the light emitting device (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with a uniform light emitting pattern.

In this case, it becomes difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the molding die to be in the front-back direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-back direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (direction of upward inclination) as the drawing direction of the mold, the manufacturing process in which resin molding is performed using a mold with the drawing direction in the front-rear direction (one direction) can be achieved. The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured using the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured easily, and the area visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be emitted uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulge toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is made of a colored opaque resin material and has a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a main body resin member 6551 that is guided along the upper surface of the overhang 6584a of the back support member 6580, and a main body resin member 6551 that is formed of a colored opaque resin material. An extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the rear side along the lower edge of the left and right center portions, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure holes 6553 bored at the rear side ends of the extension plate portion 6552. , a plurality of front-side fastening parts 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and facing the insertion plate part 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed; A plurality of back side fastening parts 6555 arranged along the lower edge and to which fastening screws passed through the screw insertion part 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back side support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, and the back side fastening parts 6555 A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 are provided in a rib-like shape and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580, and a plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 are provided in a rib-like manner and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580. It mainly includes through-holes 6557 and a pair of light-receiving members 6558 formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed into the plurality of through-holes 6557.

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclined direction that is upwardly inclined toward the back side, or along a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the area facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed as a plurality of small holes (the area is divided into small holes). ). Thereby, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

Further, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width becomes narrower as it approaches the end of the hole and as it goes toward the back side. As a result, the hole can be clogged with the thin wire material, so when the thin wire material is advanced further into the depths after entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking it on a specific member, The movement resistance of the thin wire material can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent acts can be extended, thereby making it possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

The front side fastening part 6554 includes a threaded part 6554a into which a fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of positioning wall parts 6554b formed in the shape of a pair of walls on the left and right sides of the threaded part 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are opposed to each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a part that is guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. a guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b which are formed in a box shape with a bulge on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and an open back side and can be fitted into the through hole 6557; It mainly includes an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the central end portion of the portion 6558a (the end portion on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other).

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the illumination board 6570. The above-described decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, the light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so even if the number of LEDs corresponding to the through hole 6557 is small (1 to 2 in FIG. However, the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (it is possible to reduce the sense of a point light source).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in an attitude that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a position in which the light receiving surface is inclined so that the light traveling direction is along the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is attached to the plate guide unit 6550). ), the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed in the third lighting section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 on the back side of the light-receiving member 6558 is received. When the light beam passes through the member 6558, it is refracted and can be allowed to proceed in a diagonally downward direction toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that the length of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b protruding toward the front side is shorter for those disposed on the left and right outer sides than those disposed on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below.

The upper edge extension portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is disposed opposite to the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape, especially at the extending plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and there is no partition, so alignment with the partition member 6560 is difficult. It's difficult to do. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the area above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 249. In the explanation so far, the portions that receive light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 arranged on the left and right sides have been explained. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. 258(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed from a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front; An opening 6532 that is approximately gourd-shaped (approximately pot-shaped) and is bored in the front-rear direction in the center, and a protruding rib 6533 that is shaped like a rib along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protrudes toward the back side. , a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed therein.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 does not allow light to pass through, the portion inside the outer shape through which light is transmitted is limited to the opening portion 6532. The shape of this opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination section 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed to have a similar shape (enlarged shape) to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination section 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed differently depending on the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is It is possible to make the player viewing the player see a pattern of light that is different from the arrangement pattern of the first illumination section 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visible from the front of the opening 6532 around the position that overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that is spread laterally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination part 6574.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to widen the range of light visible to the player while narrowing the arrangement range of the first illumination unit 6574 that emits light behind it. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first illumination section 6574 (or the illumination board 6570), it is possible to make the light visible over a wide range. Note that the details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is provided at a location where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). ).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed midway in the transparent cylindrical member 6521. a flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup-shape to cover the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless, light-transmitting resin. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) and non-light transmitting resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to be inserted through the side opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523; A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion that can make surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer surface extending toward the front side along the left and right edges and lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension part 6526.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape from front to back, has a curved shape in which the left and right walls are narrowed inward, and has a front and back side with the LED disposed in the first lighting section 6574. A rear contour portion 6521a formed from overlapping contours, a plurality of light-receiving protrusions 6521b protruding from the rear contour portion 6521a toward the rear side at positions facing the LEDs, and an area surrounded by the rear contour portion 6521a. A blocking part 6521c that blocks the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light passing holes 6521d formed in the blocking part 6521c at positions facing the LED, and at least the left and right width of the upper wall and the interval between the left and right walls are toward the front side. It mainly includes a main body cylindrical portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by reducing the distance between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination portion can be attached to the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partitioning member 6560. Light can be input from 6574 LEDs. This makes it easier to cause total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recessed box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the rear box-shaped section 6558b, which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, and then passes through the air until the box-shaped light receiving section 6558b is recessed. 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are made to emit light. Therefore, compared to the light irradiated from the first illumination section 6574, the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 has a lower light intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light. can.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving part 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped part 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed in stages.

The frame-like extending portion 6521f is formed from a similar shape to the rear outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is smaller than that of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the relationship through the main body cylindrical portion 6521e. and become larger.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area in which the LEDs are arranged in the first illumination section 6574, the light illuminates a large area and can be visually recognized by the player.

The extending tip of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is shaped such that each location is spaced approximately the same distance from the bottom back side (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extending end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed. Thereby, the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light-emitting manner.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are large enough to allow insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a planar back side, and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support a fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-back direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted through the bottom. A pair of terminal fastening parts 6523a to which the part 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape part 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (a decorative shape consisting of a protrusion with a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape part 6523b. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shaped portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. This allows the player viewing the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front to see it as if it were surface-emitting light, thereby improving the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 when viewed from the front.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not diffusely reflected. It can be passed to the side. Thereby, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear end having the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and has a concave shape large enough to guide the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The abutting plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are large enough to allow insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The outer frame extension part 6526 is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the flange part 6522 so as to be able to accommodate the flange part 6522, and its extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange part 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or longer than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-like portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)), so that the optical transmission unit 6520 The assembly state of the can be maintained stably. Furthermore, the circular screw part of the fastening part 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 is inserted through the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening part 6523a in this order and fastened and fixed, so that the optical transmission unit The assembled state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end face of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical part 6521e and travels forward, and the light enters the front side end of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f. The cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated with the emitted light. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is set short, the player who sees the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can see the light in a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). It can be visually recognized in a light-emitting manner that lights up along the outline line shape. This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emission effect can be performed. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured laterally symmetrically, illustration of the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. 261(d) is a right view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. , FIG. 262(d) is a right view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. Note that in FIG. 262(e), illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the bottom part are inclined so that the left and right widths and the top and bottom widths gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the cutting direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the cutting direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when moving the resin mold on the back side in the drawing direction (backward), but the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a formed on the rear side If it were to have a similar slope, it would interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the back side, so the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-slanted surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when moving the resin mold on the front side in the drawing direction (forward); If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it will interfere with the resin mold when it is moved, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed as a surface along the front-rear direction (a non-inclined surface). (See Figure 263).

Here, in this embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold to be drawn forward and the rear-side resin mold to be drawn to the rear is constituted by the closing part 6521c and the flange part 6522, and one of the front and rear sides has the above-mentioned slope. In the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, the length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction is compared to the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress changes in plate thickness due to changes in the front and rear positions, so that light passing through the thick inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress changes in the forward and backward positions of the movement mode. Therefore, when light is incident inside the wall thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, it becomes easy to repeat the total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Since leakage of light can be suppressed, the player viewing the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from the front can see sufficient light.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when assembling the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 249 and 250), compared to the case where the vertical widths are the same in the front-rear direction, the fastening portion is formed in the guide recessed portion 6524a. 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 263 shows a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the audio device 6610 are arranged in an assembled position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed with a dimension that creates a slight gap when inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and its tip is connected to the opposing plate. It can be inserted up to the 6561 surface position. Thereby, the distance between the first illumination section 6574 and the light receiving protrusion 6521b can be set without being influenced by the thickness of the opposing plate section 6561.

The light-receiving protrusion 6521b is formed into a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the transversal direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be approximately equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination section 6574 disposed opposite to each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, only the light (light at a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling approximately straight from the first illumination part 6574 toward the front side is allowed to enter, and the other light is not allowed to enter. It can be prevented.

The light incident in this way tends to travel toward the front side through the thick interior of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle between the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the direction of the light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the light from weakening before reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

The lengthwise dimension of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the widthwise dimension. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, compared to the case described in the thickness direction of the surface, light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 and having a larger angle from the optical axis. The light can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear contour portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b does not come into contact with the opposing plate portion 6561, but is arranged with a slight interval therebetween. As a result, out of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, the light that enters from the end surface of the rear outer shape section 6521a (light that has a large angle between the optical axis and the direction of travel of the light) is reflected and directed toward the player. It is possible to avoid being seen.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to see only the light that passes through the light-receiving protrusion 6521b and continues within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and to cut out the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder part 6521e.

Light emitted from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 that is not disposed opposite the light receiving protrusion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 260). The light passes through and is irradiated onto a cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are brought into contact with each other from the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light passing through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. 264(a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) is a schematic front view illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that in the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases as it goes toward the front side, the transparent cylindrical member 6521 passes through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (by total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting sections 6574a on the left and right sides) is visually recognized in a shape that looks like an enlarged shape (approximately gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting sections 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, the arrangement of the edge light emitting section 6574a is also supported when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front. The position where the light is displayed emits strong light (lights up like a point light source).

Here, as for the distance between the light sources, the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so if the distance is as it is, the light will be converted into a point. However, the lighting effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the visually recognized strong light emitting units is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so it is necessary to increase the number of LEDs actually arranged. It is difficult to solve this problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting section 6574a is allowed to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light seen at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be made visible when viewed from the front of the optical transmission unit 6520 even in areas where the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs) (the imaginary line in FIG. 264(b) reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the situation in which light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first lighting section 6574 are arranged at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylindrical section 6521e (see FIG. 262(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, so that the light travels below the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. They overlap in the center left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), even though no LED is arranged at the left and right center of the lower end of the first lighting section 6574, as shown in FIG. 264(b), the optical transmission unit 6520 is When it is inserted, a line of light can be seen at the center of the lower left and right sides.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased while reducing the space in which the first illumination unit 6574 is arranged. It is possible to weaken the visibility and make a clear line-shaped light visible.

Note that when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the thick transparent cylindrical member 6521 is difficult to see. It is said to be difficult to determine where the two intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the lights intersect is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission performance from deteriorating.

Moreover, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was placed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting part 6574a. In other words, it is possible to create the illusion that there are more LED light sources than the actual number of LEDs, so even a small number of LEDs can emit as much light as a large number of LEDs. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance.

The light emitted from the surface light emitting parts 6574b (the four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first illumination part 6574) arranged inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 when viewed from the front is emitted from the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Proceed radially along the line.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting section 6574b is visually recognized as planar light that spreads out as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light emitting section 6574b when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the light is diffusely reflected by being irradiated onto the jagged decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, not only the area where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting part 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f in front view) can be made to shine brightly.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-shaped light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with the diffusely reflected light, it is possible to avoid the boundary from becoming dark. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as changes in the visually recognized impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting situation such as brightness or darkness, or it may be a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

As described above, the partition units 6540 that are visible from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 have a curved shape that swells toward the front when viewed from the front and from the side. Therefore, the light that is visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 left and right and up and down (a direction in which it is diffused with respect to a point on the back side).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving members 6558 disposed on the lower left and right sides of the partitioning unit 6540 have their front edges positioned closer to the back side as they go further left and right, and because of the attitude in which they are attached, the light passing through the light receiving members 6558 is , moves away from the cup-shaped member 6523 horizontally and vertically (in a direction of diffusion with respect to a point on the back side).

This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the light gets larger as it gets closer to the player, compared to the case where the light only travels in the front and back direction, and the light production effect can be improved. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700.

In addition, in FIG. 265, illustration of the upper presentation device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and a direction view from the diagonally right front in a state where the horizontal presentation device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a is shown. , FIG. 266 shows a direction view of the horizontal presentation device 6700 from diagonally forward to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a presentation device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body portion 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape into half in side view. It is formed from the shape.

Note that the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configurations are the same. Therefore, the right horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail, and the left side horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail. Explanation will be omitted.

In order to visually recognize the front and rear stacking relationship at the upper end portion of FIG. It is configured in such a manner that units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

The connection between the base member 6710 and the metal main body portion 10014a will be explained. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted through the through hole of the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

Note that among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700, there are no constituent members that are fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, except for the base member 6710.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where it is flush with the back end of the base member 6710) has been formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed close to and facing the glass unit 16 in the front and back, as shown in the left unit in FIG. 265 .

With this arrangement, it is easy to create an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be seen as one unit. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700. 267 and 268 illustrate a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710. Covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to base member 6710 in an overlapping manner.

That is, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. The game mainly includes a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710, and a light receiving side unit composed of cover units 6730 to 6760, which receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit and make it visible to the player. . First, the light emitting side unit will be explained.

269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720, FIG. 269(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a right side view of the base member 6710. 269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a top view of the base member 6710. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 taken along the line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf.

As shown in FIGS. 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710 includes a flat support plate portion 6711 disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720 and arranged on the back side of the illumination board 6720, and A frame-shaped protrusion 6712 that protrudes toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape that follows the outer shape of the decorative board 6720, and a positioning protrusion that protrudes from the frame-shaped protrusion 6712 toward the front side. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 formed outside the illumination board 6720 and close to the illumination board 6720 in front view so that fastening screws can be inserted thereinto, and two insertion holes 6736 at the top and bottom of the board 6713. A pair of fastening parts 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a part of the support plate part 6711 (stepped part of the outer frame plate part 6717) on the right side of the frame-like protruding part 6712 (surrounding the gaming area). A plurality of alignment holes 6716 are formed as elongated holes vertically in the area (on the opposite side of the window part and the opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a stepped plate shape is formed from the right edge of the support plate part 6711 to the back side. It mainly includes an outer frame plate part 6717 extending from the left edge of the support plate part 6711 to the rear side in a plate shape.

The protruding tip of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is disposed to face the back surface of the illumination board 6720 near the outer shape thereof, and is in surface contact with the illumination board 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the back side of the illumination board 6720 except for the vicinity of the external portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illumination board 6720.

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the illumination board 6720 is Since the temperature can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the illumination board 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

The positioning protrusion 6713 is a part for aligning the illumination board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into positioning holes 6722 formed at two locations on the illumination board 6720. That is, positioning holes 6722 are bored in the illumination board 6720 at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 6713 based on the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269(a)). will be established.

The insertion hole 6714 has a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portions 6744 of the flat plate members 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). This is a through hole formed to be able to be matched and into which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light-receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two fastening portions 6715, upper and lower.

The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the protruding portions 6743, 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 have a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged to face each other on the left and right sides, and are formed into a substantially cup shape that opens on the back side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side part (edge-like part).

Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located in a portion (external portion) that can be touched by the player, and is located in a portion that can be touched by the player (for example, when the player collides with it). (loads generated by this process). As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the thin-walled rear side end, when a load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction), deformation occurs. There is a possibility that the positional displacement with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing locations (fastening locations) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a risk that the number of assembly steps will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the protrusions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, since the inner surface (left side) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is placed close to and opposite to the outer surface (right side) of the frame-shaped protrusion 6712, the flat plate member 6740 is viewed from the player's left side. Even if a load is applied in this direction, the flat plate member 6740 contacts the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 with its surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the covering units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, the durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly steps. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can distribute the load by being provided with a concavo-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concave-convex shape is formed in the range of contact with the frame-shaped protrusion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

The outer frame plate part 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body part 10014a and is in surface contact with it, and covers the right side of the metal main body part 10014a. This can prevent the metal main body portion 10014a from being visible to the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed from some of the alignment holes 6716 along the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed with a size that fits with the protrusion 6743 or is arranged opposite to the protrusion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the protruding part 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area in which the protruding part 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), so that the flat plate member 6740 can be prevented from being misaligned with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is disposed opposite to the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a planar shape facing the gaming area side (inside).

The illumination board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 bored at two places in the main body plate portion 6721, and arbitrary holes in the main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted in a pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held on the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, by inserting the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) into the positioning hole 6722, movement in the left, right, up, and down directions is restricted, and forward and backward movement is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 280). (see), movement is restricted by being caught between them.

Although a similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, the relationship between the LED chip D1 and the area shown by imaginary lines in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge emitting part D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269(a), and a surface emitting part D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare for the Lord. The difference between these light emitting parts D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting part D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting part D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) disposed on the front side of the illumination board 6720 will be explained. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the exploded view of FIGS. 270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a light-transmitting resin inside and allow light to pass therethrough. The light receiving member 6730 is provided with a light receiving member 6730 that can be refracted and covers the illumination board 6720 from the front side, and is configured to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730 with other constituent members.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, 273(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272(a), and FIG. 273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272(b). be.

274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274(b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. be.

Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side, FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272(b), covering units 6730 to 6760 are shown together for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a light-receiving surface portion 6731 that is formed in a flat plate shape with the same outer shape as the illumination board 6720 and is disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720. An inner extending portion 6732 extending toward the back side so as to be bent from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state an outer extending portion 6733 that is bent from the right side edge in FIG. 274 and extends toward the back side; The long rib 6734 (5 locations) is extended in the shape of a long fin from the front of the position where the base end of the long rib 6734 (the side to be combined with the light receiving surface section 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface section 6731 match. A plurality of fins 6735 (five in this embodiment), a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) are inserted; It mainly includes a fitting part 6737 formed of a shape that can fit with the decorative protruding part 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed of elongated protrusions aligned along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters centered at a location facing the surface light emitting part D1b (see enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer circumferential surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light-emitting section D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731). (see FIG. 275(b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). (see FIG. 275(b)).

Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface emitting part D1b is refracted near the axis of the long protrusion, and after traveling toward the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b is further emitted from the large diameter side away from the axis of the long protrusion. By refracting at a certain point and proceeding toward the front side, a wide range of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 can be emitted.

Further, on the front side of the light-receiving surface section 6731, basic shapes that are triangular in front view and bulge toward the front side at the approximate center are formed in a manner that is regularly and densely arranged. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a makes it possible to vary the strength of the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be varied in stages). That is, since the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a causes light to be collected at the center of the recessed portion, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong light emitting manner compared to other parts.

The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending ends thereof come into contact with the illumination board 6720 at the front and rear, and the extending ends of the inner extending portion 6732 extend over the entire upper and lower sides. While it comes into contact with the illumination board 6720, a part of the extending end of the outer extending portion 6733 does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 has a spaced-apart end portion 6733a whose extension length is formed to be as short as the thickness of the illumination board 6720, so that it does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720 but separates from it. In this embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the area between the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat from being trapped.

In addition, when the inner extension portion 6732 comes into contact with the illumination board 6720 over the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension portion 6732. Therefore, the thicker the inner extension portion 6732 is, the more limited the area in which the LED chip D1 is placed is.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illumination board 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. can be placed in Therefore, while ensuring a sufficient plate thickness of the outer extending portion 6733, it is possible to secure the maximum area for disposing the LED chip D1.

The left and right walls of the outer extending portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left wall of the inner extending portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is densely packed with protrusions having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed in such a manner that the concave-convex shape is aligned. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 emits light from a surface (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to see uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 toward the front side passes through the inner extension portion 6732, and the intensity of the light changes from region to region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, light D1m is visible, which is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a and traveling along the long rib 6734, and the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is larger than the light D1p. is also visible as a strong light (the intensity of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each region arranged vertically. Note that the difference in the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the color of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 can be changed in the upper and lower directions. It can be visually recognized by changing the area for each area lined up.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) when the horizontal direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering at the front and back. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are formed in a substantially linear shape when viewed from the back, and a V-shaped rib 6734b that is bent and formed into a substantially V-shape when viewed from the back.

The side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are formed as smooth surfaces. That is, unlike the case where a line-like jagged process is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when light reaches the side surface of the long rib 6734 and passes through it, it does not spread (no surface emission), but only in one direction. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 from emitting light uniformly, so that when the horizontal direction device 6700 is viewed from the left and right, the light emitted from the edge light emitting section D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting section It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light irradiated from D1b is mixed with the visible light.

That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed as a part that is long vertically and can be seen in the left and right directions, the light passing through the long rib 6734 is suppressed from reaching the player's eyes in a surface emitting manner. Therefore, it is possible for a player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right to easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two pairs on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner that they extend in a direction that is inclined toward the vertical center position as they move toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, while the right end portion 6734a2 is spaced apart from the outer extending portion 6733.

Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension 6732, while light passing through the right end 6734a2 can enter the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened, while light emission through the left side end 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a is suppressed. The light that enters the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 is easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, near the left end 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge emitting section D1a is visible, and at a position away from the left end 6734a1 (position between), the light emitted from the surface emitting section D1b is visible. Since the light can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to allow the player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the vertical center position and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both end portions 6734b2 are spaced apart from the outer extending portion 6733. Note that the reason why the bending position and the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged opposite to the bending position.

That is, by shifting the position that receives the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a from the intermediate connecting part 6734b1, the light (main light) emitted linearly from the edge emitting part D1a in the front-rear direction is shifted to the connecting position. Since the incident can be suppressed, the loss of the light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can pass through the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 and directly enter the inner extending part 6732, while the light passing through both end parts 6734b2 can enter the outer extending part 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 can be easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, near the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge emitting portion D1a is visible, and at a position away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (a position in between), the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized. Since the light can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to allow the player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The fins 6735 are formed so that the thickness decreases from the extended base end toward the distal end side, and include a curved tip fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and a bent tip fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , is mainly provided.

The curved tip fin 6735a has upper and lower inner edges curved, and triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches are densely formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014), thereby forming a light diffusion section. , the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an extending tip that is inclined toward the back side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and has an inclined surface that intersects at the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the inner surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that their extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the curved tip fin 6735a, since the end on the left side is coupled to the light receiving surface section 6731, a large amount of light (main ) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extension portion 6732 side (back side, root side), making it easier to brighten the left side of the light receiving member 6730.

In addition, the elongated rib 6734 and the inner extension portion 6732 are coupled behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light-receiving surface portion 6731. The installation part 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the curved tip fin 6735a joins the light receiving surface portion 6731, light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and light passing through the curved tip fin 6735a can be combined to produce a light emission effect. , it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the formation of the left and right sides of the fins 6735, the manner in which light passes through the sides can be changed. In other words, due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, the light passing through the left side can be seen as uniform light, while the surface emitting effect does not affect the light passing through the right side. The light can be visually recognized as local light. Further, it goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed when the horizontal presentation device 6700 is assembled (FIG. 266), and only two holes are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, if the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is shifted (for example, due to vibration caused by the player's operation or vibration accompanying opening and closing of the front frame 10014), Since the maintenance work to return the horizontal presentation device 6700 to the position shown in FIG.

The fitting part 6737 has an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side and is recessed in the left-right direction, and is used to align and align the light-receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light-receiving member 6730. This is a portion that is formed by fitting, and further includes a single recessed portion 6737a.

In this way, in this embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged while limiting (reducing) the location of the recess 6737a (the location where the fastening portion 6753 is provided) on the inner extension portion 6732 side to one location. , attempts to suppress misalignment and misalignment with constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. This will be explained in detail below.

Here, in the case of fastening and fixing the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal presentation device 6700, since the fastening screws do not transmit light, the more fastening points there are, the more likely shadows will occur. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is formed to be large, the light will be divided at the fastening location, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect will be reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force will be reduced, and there is a possibility that the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be deformed from the base due to the load applied by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the supporting force is maintained by fitting the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a (see FIG. 276) while limiting the fastening location to the recess 6737a. ing.

As a result, the fastening point of the horizontal presentation device 6700 on the side of the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. It is possible to improve the durability of the lateral direction device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points (fastening points).

Further, in this embodiment, the recess 6737a is formed so that light can travel toward the back side. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 275.

FIG. 275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal direction device 6700 taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is disposed on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b that is disposed facing the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recessed portion 6737a. The main body curved portion 6751 is formed to allow light to travel to the back side of the main body curved portion 6751. That is, the illumination board 6720 is formed so that light can travel toward the back side (opposite side of the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening part 6753 is a part where the fastening screw is fastened, and since the fastening screw is likely to be in the shadow, it is considered unsuitable for light-emitting production. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screws up and down, thereby allowing the player to see the light while suppressing the influence of shadows created by the fastening screws. That is, by transmitting light from both sides above and below the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw that is visible to the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is illustrated in an enlarged manner. Of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface part 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed part 6731a. The light is then further refracted and focused. Thereby, the intensity of light emitted visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be increased.

In this way, the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface section 6731 is such that the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed part 6731a becomes longer, centered around the decorative recessed part 6731a where the intensity of light increases by condensing light. It is said to be a mode in which it becomes lower.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed part 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting section D1b is viewed individually. Compared to the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface section 6731, the intensity of the visible light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is emitted from a higher intensity light (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually lowered to a level lower than that of the light seen directly, and the player can visually recognize the light having different intensities through the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open back side is disposed on the front side of the light receiving member 6730. The flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be explained.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and joined together by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an elliptical shape. A mating plate part 6742, which is a flat plate part disposed on a plane parallel to the left side of the plane and connected to the front side edge of the main body plate part 6741 with a step, and a rear side end of the main body plate part 6741. a plurality of protrusions 6743 protruding toward the back side from the main body; a plurality of fastening parts 6744 arranged at positions apart from the protrusions 6743 into which fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side; The plate portion 6741 mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6745 formed in a size that allows fastening screws to be inserted therethrough.

The main body plate portion 6741 is recessed leftward from the left surface, and has a decorative shape that protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recessed surface. , coincides with the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

The unevenness forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper toward the left, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflecting plate. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the part that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that external force can be applied. This can prevent it from cracking or chipping. Furthermore, contact friction when the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760 is slid to be attached to the base member 6710 can be reduced.

Therefore, after the horizontal production device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 may be damaged if a shock is applied from a player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. By making it difficult, not only can durability be improved, but also the assembly of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be facilitated.

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side and a front-rear direction groove portion 6742a bored in the step between the main body plate portion 6741 in the direction along the groove portions 6742a. A hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the longitudinal hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, but details will be described later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. This is the part that is fastened and fixed by the fastening screw that passes through it.

Further, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 when viewed from the front. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is disposed so as to fit into the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269(a) and 274(b)), so that the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member relative to the flat plate member 6740 The positional shift of 6730 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws that are screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four locations above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, even if the number of fastening parts 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small, the fixing force will not be insufficient. This can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell to the left toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is colorless and transparent and transmits light. A main body curved part 6751 formed from a plastic resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface, and a curved plate part disposed parallel to the right side from the main body curved part 6751 on the front side of the main body curved part 6751. A mating plate portion 6752 connected with a step on the edge and disposed opposite the mating plate portion 6742, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 into which fastening screws can be screwed from the back side, and corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into them at positions where the fastening screws can be inserted; and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 formed at the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction; It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6756 formed at the front edge of the mating plate portion 6752 so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough in the front-rear direction.

The main body curved portion 6751 includes a decorative protrusion 6751a that has a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side and protrudes to the right from the right side in a region including the vertically central fastening portion 6753, and the decorative protrusion 6751a. A front-rear hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion of the main body, a flat division part 6751c dividing the striped shape by a flat surface, and a central flat part 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protrusion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits into the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the longitudinal hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

Thereby, the decorative protruding portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both the function of a decorative portion and the function of a portion for positioning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, even in a configuration in which the fastening portion 6753 is disposed at only one (few) location in the upper and lower center portions as in this embodiment, it is possible to suppress the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat section 6751c, so it can be viewed as a clear light. can be done.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the curved tip fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by a plurality of striped portions defined by the flat section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set to surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the bent tip fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat part 6751d, so it can be viewed as a clear light. can be done.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bent fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set as surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Similar to the mating plate part 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the mating plate part 6752 has a plurality of groove parts 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side, and a step between the main body curved part 6751. A front-rear hole 6752b is formed in the direction along the groove 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the longitudinal hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, but the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is disposed at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in such a manner that it enters the recess of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 269). a) and FIG. 274(b)), it is possible to suppress misalignment of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left and right direction.

On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, when the number of fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening parts 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so the number of places where light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced, and as a result, the light emitting effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a that guide the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. (See Figure 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a are formed such that inner surfaces having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 are arranged opposite to the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). be done. As a result, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal direction device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from moving inadvertently. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide walls 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 which is a flat plate portion shaped to cover the mating plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a main body plate portion 6761 which is bent at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 to cover the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate part 6762 which is a curved plate part shaped to cover the fitting plate part 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate part 6762 that extends to the left rear of the curved plate part 6762 from two positions spaced apart by approximately the same distance vertically from the vertical center position. A connecting extension part 6763 connected at the end, and a plurality of fastening screws arranged on the back surface of the curved plate part 6762 and formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 can be screwed into them. A fastening portion 6764 and a proximal fastening portion that is formed so that a fastening screw, which is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion hole 6714 near the upper end of the base member 6710, can be screwed therein. 6765 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of protruding portions 6766 that protrude from the back side end of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is provided in a rib shape that extends toward the left along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from shifting to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and is provided in a rib shape extending toward the right along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a are provided.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a extending rightward in a rib shape extending along a straight line in the longitudinal direction at a position corresponding to the longitudinal hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion that can restrict leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 when the lateral direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 from side to side. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the longitudinal holes 6751b, 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide walls 6755a, 6756a restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right. 6750's movement to the left is restricted. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The proximal fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710 can be screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765. is formed. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765, and the proximal fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the protruding portion 6766 and the proximal end fastening portion 6765 are connected to the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760, which is disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. Misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272(b), and FIG. 280(b) is the CCLXXXb in FIG. 272(b). 280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXXb, and FIG. 6730 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280(a), the longitudinal distance between the elongated rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light irradiated from the edge light emitting part D1a can be made to enter the long rib 6734 without omission, and can be totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281), making it easier to proceed toward the front side. .

In addition, in locations where the elongated ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-back distance between the surface light-emitting portion D1b and the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be greater than or equal to the longitudinal width (shape growth) of the elongated ribs 6734. Therefore, the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be increased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b are divided. It is possible to distinguish the light from the other light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as a clear line-shaped light that is totally reflected inside the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735, or can travel through the long ribs 6734. On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b is seen as a light that brightens a small scale area, but the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b becomes uniform light (pale light) through the light receiving surface part 6731 and the light refracting surface part of the inner extension part 6732. ) is visible.

As a result, compared to the conventional method in which a lens for condensing light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination board 6720 and a dazzling light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment According to the invention, it is possible to make visible light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the illumination board 6720 while making dazzling light (line-like light) visible in a small area. These different lights can easily be controlled to make only one or both visible. Therefore, the degree of freedom in light effects can be improved.

Therefore, for example, even if the same LED chip is used for the edge emitting part D1a and the surface emitting part D1b, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b will be different. By varying the color tone and brightness of the lights, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with a rich gradation (a luminescent effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surfaces of the fins 6735 in the plate thickness direction are such that the right side (outer side of the front frame 10014) is flush with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side (the outer side of the front frame 10014) (inner surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal line of the left side surface does not point directly sideways (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-back direction), but a direction that has a component pointing toward the front side. facing. Thereby, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only directly to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), the elongated rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, so the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the elongated rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. It can be proceeded with. The progression of this light will be explained using a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of a base member 6710, an illumination board 6720, and a light receiving member 6730, schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED becomes smaller as the angle between the surface of the illumination board 6720 and the axis X23 perpendicular to it becomes larger, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the direction in which the light travels, so it will be explained in order below.

Arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end of the long rib 6734, travels through total reflection inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. . The light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even if the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to easily make light of sufficient brightness visible to the player.

Arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (inner side of front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed into a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

The arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. This light is not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734, and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, so it can be seen brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

Arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the joining position of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the length of the fin 6735 in the thickness direction becomes shorter as it goes toward the front side compared to the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014) has Since the jagged recessed portion is formed, the elongated rib 6734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-back direction in the same way, it is not possible to enter the fins 6735 at all of the joining positions between the long ribs 6734 and the light-receiving surface portion 6731, but some (especially the long ribs) In the region (near the left side surface of the fin 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, the light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of arrow L23d includes light that travels toward the back side of the illumination board 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6720 equipped with the LED chip D1 on the front side that emits light to the front side can cause the back side portion of the illumination board 6720 to emit light (at least The light can be allowed to travel to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the back end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed into a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in rear view (see FIG. 276). Thereby, the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a vertically uniform manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect by combining the light emitted toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device disposed on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Note that according to this embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, when the light is incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, but the light indicated by the arrow L23 is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c. When the light is reflected by the light-receiving surface portion 6731, an energy loss corresponding to that of the transmitted light occurs, so when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having approximately the same brightness. In this way, differences in light brightness depending on the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extension portion 6732 can be easily made uniform across the front and rear.

Here, in this embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 disposed on the left side is formed in a shape that is almost bilaterally symmetrical (or similar shape) to the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 on the right side. As a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long ribs 6734 (protrusion on the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is to ensure visibility for players. That is, although it is desired to maintain the presentation effect caused by the light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, the intention is to suppress the light traveling toward the gaming area due to the light traveling to the long ribs 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area, where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the horizontal presentation device 6700 inward (towards the game area) is reduced. The aim is to Thereby, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, making it difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shooting of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the playing area, balls fired right-handed (the strongest firing strength) tend to flow down, and there is little need for players to visually check the ball in order to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls will flow down a narrow area in a short period of time, by shining light on that area and reflecting it on the game balls, the effect of the production using light can be improved. can be easily improved. Therefore, there is no need to weaken the intensity of light on the right side of the gaming area, and as in this embodiment, by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal presentation device 6700 to the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265). , it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Arrow L23e indicates light that is emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is irradiated in a direction with a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732, 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the elongated rib 6734 is very close to the edge emitting portion D1a. Since the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very low to begin with, it can be constructed as a light that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing the light presentation effect from deteriorating.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be explained. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to a recess 6737a formed inside the fitting part 6737 at the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to what was described above with respect to arrows L23c and L23d, a portion of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both walls of the recessed portion 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw is not exposed to light near the recess 6737a. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of the light emitting display may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, sufficient positioning (preventing misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting part 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 can be properly aligned. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing positional deviation, and it is possible to reduce the number of locations where the effect of light emitting performance is degraded.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is provided near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. This prevents the area from becoming too dark. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the production effect of the light emission production.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board 6570 is disposed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 on the upper part of the front frame 10014, but in the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, the By arranging the effect device 18800 having the illumination board 18830 below, it is possible to perform the light emitting effect also at the lower part of the front frame 18014. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 differs from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with a production device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and the other configurations are the same, so the production Only the device 18800 will be described, and descriptions of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the presentation device 18800 is a device for producing light emission in which the back side and the top surface side of the front side of the lower tray unit 6400 are connected to the covering base member 6410, It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This presentation device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting presentation changes depending on whether or not the user participates in the operation presentation using the operating device 10300 due to a structural contrivance. Next, the internal structure of the presentation device 18800 will be explained in order to explain the structural improvements.

284(a) is a sectional view of the production device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284(b) is a sectional view of the illumination board 18830 of the production device 18800 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. Note that FIG. 284(b) schematically shows how the illumination board 18830 is supported.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the presentation device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap between a combined base member 18810 connected to the lower plate unit 6400 and the front side of the combined base member 18810. An intermediate fixed member 18820 that is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the combined base member 18810, an illuminated board 18830 arranged in a gap between the combined base member 18810 and the intermediate fixed member 18820, and the illuminated board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 is formed to allow light emitted from the LED chip D1 to travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18850 is attached to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. The main preparation is as follows.

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the illumination board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface corresponds to the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 215) when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in the upward position and in the pre-operation posture. It is formed at an angle of inclination that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged parallel to the front wall surface of the joint base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illumination board 18830. The illumination board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 formed in an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length of the elongated hole 18831 in the vertical direction and the diameter of the fixing part 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) in which the illumination board 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the illumination board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the vertices of a pentagon) and emit light in the normal direction of the surface of the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (from the player's line of sight). It is possible to prevent the effect of the light production from deteriorating even if the direction is away from the light production.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and includes a plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be able to close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. It mainly includes a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending from one side to the other.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is formed into a container shape with an open front side, and has a plurality of fixing parts that protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the joint base member 18810 and are fastened and fixed to the joint base member 18810. 18821, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 bored at a position and size capable of receiving an extension plate part 18842 at the bottom of the rear side.

In this embodiment, since the direction in which the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is cut out is set in the left-right direction, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of a pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged on the left and right at the middle position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate part 18842. Thereby, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate portions each having a different width. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed in shapes with different widths at three upper and lower locations.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extending plate portion 18842 begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, but is formed into a curved plate shape that is gently curved. The radius of curvature can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the radius of curvature is set to such an extent that total reflection of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illumination board 18830 continues until it reaches the plate-like portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. Thereby, the light incident on the extending tip (end on the back side) of the extending plate portion 18842 can be made easier to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light production is desired, and can be implemented in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or it may be a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions for light passage.

Note that, as described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and may have a similar shape with a slightly different size. Considering the propagation mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the arrangement of the LED chip D1 when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851. Therefore, in this embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the root of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 when viewed from the front.

The operation of the production device 18800 will be explained. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed, within the permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is This coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

That is, when the operating device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the illumination board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 shifts, making it difficult for light emitted from the LED chip D1 to enter the extended plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extension plate portion 18842, so the through hole 18851 appears dark. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not. On the other hand, in the operating device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operating member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 on the illumination board 18830 is suppressed, and the illumination board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illumination board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the back side end of the extension plate 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate 18842, and then undergoes total reflection. It is formed so that it can move toward the front side.

That is, even when the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is dark and visible) while light is being emitted from the LED chip D1, pressing the swinging operating member 10310 , it becomes possible to make the through hole 18851 brightly visible.

Therefore, when a vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visible darkly, it is possible to determine whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swinging operation member 10310. I can do it. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light when a jackpot occurs or when a game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light.

As a result, the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, so when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's desire to participate can be increased, and the player's desire to actually operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. The user can be induced to operate the swinging operation member 10310.

Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is disposed outside the covered foundation member 6410, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illumination board 18830 may be disposed in such a manner that it penetrates the covering base member 6410 and enters the inside thereof, so that it can come into contact with the operating device 10300.

In this case, the vibration of the operating device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only due to the vibration but also due to the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which a push instruction as a notification effect is generated. If the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp from the front whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, the player can easily miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation on the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may fail early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily many times, causing noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operating device 10300 are formed so as to be divisible left and right, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so as to be divisible back and forth. There is. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 19322 are arranged to surround the swinging operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). Note that the main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 are substantially the same shape as the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and will mainly be described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed to be divisible at a dividing plane that coincides with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 is configured to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swinging operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to vibration impact can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction of vibration Y17a of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening direction is perpendicular to the fastening direction in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to an impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view, and the plate thickness is approximately constant in the inclined portion. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in this embodiment are formed with a slight inclination in the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the slopes of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. It is set closer to the top and bottom.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) ( (base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like part 6426b of the plate-like support part 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 comes into contact with the base end (the upper surface of the main body part 6411) of the recessed shape part 16414 and is supported, and the main body part Since a sufficient support thickness in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the main body 6411 can be ensured, deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during operation of the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the slopes of the left and right end portions are changed compared to the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be ensured.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 to be inclined in an inverted V-shape in cross section, the direction in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 deform when receiving an external force is directed toward the left and right center. It can be made easier to direct. As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be lowered compared to a case where the shape can be deformed in both left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 can be damaged at an early stage. This can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 is not required, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment is configured to vibrate due to electrical conduction. The device 21500 is provided, and it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. Note that in FIG. 287, illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and are illustrated as viewed from the back side. .

Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening points is illustrated as an imaginary line, and furthermore, the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The arrangement relationship with respect to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De, which is a redesigned version of the above-described bottom member De, is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operating device 10300. In addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, the bottom member 21De includes a projecting portion De3 extending to the right side.

The projecting portion De3 has both the function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and the function of regulating the displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhang De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The overhang De3 is formed so that the back side thereof is inclined so that the width becomes narrow toward the overhang end, while the front side forms a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gap between the rear surface side of the overhang portion De3 and the metal main body portion 10014a while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang portion De3.

This gap is used to connect the electrical wiring 21513 of the length required when removing the lower pan unit 21400 during maintenance (wire with a length to fill the length of the distance of the lower pan unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a). It is effectively used as an area to be left loose when not being removed (when fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a). This makes it possible to suppress the load that the electrical wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings to be smaller than when the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a cramped manner when the lower pan unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is fitted and supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower tray unit 21400 are overlapped from front to back, but the entire left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 is overlapped. A fastening portion is not formed, and the connection with the lower plate unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively movable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction compared to the case where the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Accordingly, displacement of the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted only from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibrations transmitted to the player who grips the operating handle 51 is not set as a route via the operating handle 51, but is instead a lower tray unit that is in contact with the finger or arm of the player who grips the operating handle 51. The route can be limited to the right side of 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, portions corresponding to the fixing locations of the covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 are shown in correspondence with imaginary lines.

In addition to the structure of the above-mentioned covering foundation member 6410, the covering foundation member 21410 has a plurality of fastening screws (in this embodiment, a pair) formed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411. ) is provided with a fastening portion 21415. Fastening screws that are inserted into insertion portions 21535 that are arranged as a pair of upper and lower parts on the right side of the vibration device 21500 are screwed into the fastening portion 21415 . That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 21410.

In addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, the lower plate forming member 21420 includes a support hole 21428 bored in the front-rear direction in a plate-shaped portion extending upward from the upper surface of the front longitudinal portion 6426c. A fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500, is inserted into the support hole 21428.

In addition to the configuration of the above-mentioned V-shaped design member 6450, the V-shaped design member 21450 is provided in a pillar-like manner to protrude toward the back side as a substitute for the plate-like protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 227), and allows a fastening screw to be screwed into the V-shaped design member 21450. A fastening portion 21457 is formed, and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a plate shape and connects the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, as described above, in the V-shaped design member 21450, the overhanging fastening parts 6454 disposed at the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a via an intermediate member. Therefore, it is structurally more rigid than the covered foundation member 21410, which is formed into a substantially bag-like shape that opens toward the rear side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a mainly at the rear side edge.

That is, the covering foundation member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end on the back side and the left end, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or there are no fastening positions). Even if there is one, it is limited to a small number), and because it is formed into a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the upper front edge of the covering foundation member 21410, the vertical direction (vertical direction) displacement of the covering foundation member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covered foundation member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which, for example, the lower tray 50 is displaced up and down and the balls stored in the lower tray 50 bounce due to the displacement of the covering foundation member 21410.

According to the present embodiment, the covered foundation member 21410, which is more flexible (has a higher degree of freedom of displacement) than the V-shaped design member 21450, is vibrated using the V-shaped design member 21450 that is rigidly configured as a base (reference). Therefore, the right side of the covered foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibration device 21500.

In addition, transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, so that the operation device 10300 may not vibrate due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 may not vibrate. It is possible to avoid vibration caused by the vibration of the device 21500, and from this fact, it can be said that the right side of the covered foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibrating device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed into a long plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting plate portion 21458 and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be ensured. Stress concentration (during pressing) can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship in which it abuts (is pressed) against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the abutment position between the shell-like projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the size is reduced. The deviation tends to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, making it difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission strength.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations occurring, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (no matter which dimension is within the size limit), the shell is By designing the dimension so that the shell-like protrusion 21541 comes into contact with the connecting plate-like part 21458 (if the interval is short, the shell-like protrusion 21541 is deformed to crush it while making contact), the shell-like protrusion 21541 can be stably formed. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact. Therefore, vibrations can be stably received.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact direction of the shell-like projecting part 21541 and the connecting plate-like part 21458 is set to the front-back direction similarly to the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward due to the operation of the operating device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide with respect to the shell-like projecting portion 21541. This makes it possible to avoid transmission of downward displacement. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration device 21500 from being pushed down due to the operation of the operating device 10300.

In addition, in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is installed at a flexible location of the covered foundation member 21410, so it breaks the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and invades the inside (for example, by inserting a thin metal wire into the pachinko machine A10). This is an area that is easily breached in the event of fraudulent activity (intrusion). That is, in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is disposed at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits a fraudulent act.

Therefore, when the covering foundation member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 is simultaneously destroyed or disconnected, and in this case, the conduction of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 is interrupted. By controlling the audio lamp control device 113 to detect this and output an error signal, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

Further, instead of the vibrating device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided, but in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is intentionally provided, so that if no fraudulent activity has occurred, the device will vibrate. It can be used for performances. That is, since the vibration device 21500 can be used for both vibration production and detection of fraudulent activities (it can be configured as a multi-functional device), the installation space for the device can be reduced.

FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device 21500. As illustrated in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 that can generate vibrations by controlling an eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a soft resin material (such as silicone resin). A covering member 21520 is formed from a material that is harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the back side. The cover member 21530 is provided with a cover member 21530 formed in a shape that allows the cover member 21520 to be covered, and a flat opposing plate member 21540 that is disposed opposite to the cover member 21530 with the cover member 21520 interposed therebetween.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the covering cover 21530 includes a plurality of (in this embodiment, two) insertion holes 21532 into which the threaded portions of fastening screws can be inserted, and the opposing plate member 21540 allows the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 21532 to be screwed therein. A plurality of fastening portions 21542 are provided. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 that are to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. be. FIG. 294 shows a perspective view of the covering member 21520 as viewed diagonally from above and in the front direction.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body part 21511 whose shaft part is rotationally controlled by energization, an eccentric weight 21512 which is fixed to the shaft part and whose center of gravity is arranged at a different position from the shaft part and has a fan-like shape when viewed from above, and a lower surface of the main body part 21511. The electrical wiring 21513 extends downward from the bottom surface (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the bottom surface).

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a protrusion extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body 21521. a pair of protrusions 21522 formed as a cylindrical main body 21521; a plate-like protrusion 21523 that protrudes in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21521; It includes a circular protruding portion 21524 that protrudes downward.

The projecting portion 21524 is formed in an oval shape large enough to surround the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electric wiring 21513 when viewed from below, and is recessed on the upper surface side so as to be able to receive the electric wiring 21513.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the projecting portion 21524 has a recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521, and a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a in the vertical direction. It includes a wiring through hole 21524b to be drilled and a pair of preliminary holes 21524c to be bored in the vertical direction at positions opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b with the recessed portion 21524a in between.

With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 can perform the functions of holding the electrical wiring 21513 while preventing it from sagging due to its own weight, bundling the electrical wiring 21513, and guiding the electrical wiring 21513. Thereby, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

Furthermore, since a gap is created between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is possible to prevent the person performing the assembly work from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. . Therefore, compared to the case where a binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble a member for holding the electric wiring 21513.

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228, and its vibration is controlled by a control signal transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even if the electrical wiring 21513 is about to come out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c and pushing the electrical wiring 21513. can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower pan unit 21400 is formed to be removable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker performing maintenance work accidentally removes the lower pan unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. There is a risk of wire breakage due to excessive load. Further, if an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration, there is also a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511, so that the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511 is excessively Displacement can be prevented.

Furthermore, in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, the length of the electrical wiring 21513 to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from breaking during this length. I can do it (I can give myself some leeway). Furthermore, even if a load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513, the electrical wiring 21513 is not applied in the direction of connection between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body 21511, but in the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed part 21524a (i.e., in the direction of the extension part 21524). Since the load is applied along the longitudinal direction), it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be easily reconnected to the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of maintenance work including the process of removing the lower tray unit 21400.

Note that in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed at the same time as the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the cover member 21530. Note that in the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covered cover member 21530 includes a main body 21531 forming a frame whose front side and bottom are open, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed in the front side of the main body 21531 and receives the vibration motor 21510. , a plurality of protrusions 21534 that protrude inwardly from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extend in the front-rear direction; , a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the covering foundation member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) can be inserted.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is located at the center position in the left-right direction. It includes a bearing receiving recess 21533c that connects the receiving recess 21533b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed with an extra length on the right side compared to the left side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. On the other hand, the protruding portion 21534 has an extra length on the right side compared to the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 is approximately left and right with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. placed in symmetrical positions.

As a result, the covering member 21520 is held by the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), while when the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state (vibrating state) Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be accommodated by the deep recess formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b (the recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged vertically in parallel). Thereby, it is possible to prevent overload from being applied to the covered cover member 21530, and the durability of the covered cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the protruding part 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520, which is supported by contacting the protruding part 21534 from side to side, is due to the effects of engagement with the protruding part 21534 and biting. It tends to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), but is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration where the main body 21511 tends to tilt around the lower end when vibration occurs, such as when the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body 21511, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protrusion portion 21534 is formed in a planar plate shape with a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions at the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the protrusion length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side). Since the covering member 21520 is formed in a manner that follows the outer shape of the member 21520, the covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right and from the back side.

In addition, the protruding portion 21534 includes a deep inclined portion 21534a that rises toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b from the nearest protruding portion 21534 below the intermediate lower surface 21531b that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protruding portion 21534 directly above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the rear inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the protrusion 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced toward the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged partially shifted vertically. This makes it easier to avoid loads being applied to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, compared to when the protrusions 21534 are arranged in completely symmetrical positions. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material for the covering member 21520 that is not fragile.

The formation of the lower half of the rear side wall portion of the main body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, as a manner of holding the covering member 21520, the displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the main body 21531, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the main body 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced toward the back side due to excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is regulated by the upper half of the main body 21531, and the lower half is allowed to be displaced. Both can be deformed so as to proceed (flow) to the open area in the lower half of the main body part 21531, and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibration device 21500, which will be described in detail later.

The right side of the plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from below by the protruding ridge 21534 of the covered cover member 21530. Further, while the left side portion is open to the covered cover member 21530, it is supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). As a result, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open portion that can be accessed from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side, so that the lower surface of the covering member 21520 is supported. The lower left rear part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. This open portion functions as a location that ensures contact between the overhang portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The opposing plate member 21540 is a plate-shaped member that is disposed to face the covered cover member 21530 from the open side of the covered cover member 21530, and includes a shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 that is formed to project toward the front side. It includes the above-mentioned fastening part 21542 and a support extension part 21543 extending from the lower left end toward the back side.

The shell-like projecting portion 21541 is thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the projecting tip and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is Even if a load is applied in the pushing direction (backward direction) and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to avoid transmitting a large load to the covering member 21520.

296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, FIG. 296(b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a), and FIG. 297 is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400. 298 is a rear view of the pan unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a).

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are configured in a dimension relationship such that they abut in the front and rear direction, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state). ), the protruding portion De3 slightly bites into the protruding portion 21522 (the protruding portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibrating device 21500 can be moved toward the front side. This can prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position closer to the back side.

FIG. 299(a) is a partial top view schematically showing the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 299(b) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). 300(a) is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 300(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 3 is a partial schematic side view of the lower plate unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb.

299(a) and 299(b), similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is placed at the front limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated, and FIGS. FIG. 300(b) shows a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state and the vibration device 21500 is placed at the limit position on the rear side of vibration displacement. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. 300. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body portion 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibrations are also directly transmitted.

With reference to FIGS. 299 and 300, the transmission mode of vibration of the vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, in the vibrating device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidities. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to occur in a specific part.

Specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibrations will be suppressed too much, while if it is too soft, the vibrations may be damped too much. is fixed to the hard side member, and the soft side member fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 is vibrated about the fixed position as an axis. Thereby, the portion fixed to other parts of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side), and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is brought into contact with the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the vibration An insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 (soft side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is generated by using the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration), and the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side being displaced (rotationally displaced) in the covered foundation member. 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position close to the player's finger holding the operating handle 51.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced toward the back side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the protruding portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protrusion portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the overhang portion De3, so the vibrating device 21500 has more force to return to the front side than when the overhang portion De3 is not formed. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner that rotates backward about the left end portion due to the vibration, the left plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De due to this displacement (Fig. 300 (see (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 receives a rightward load from the bottom member 21De, and the vibrating device 21500 can increase the force of returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is regulated by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between it and the overhang De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, thereby increasing the reaction force received from the overhang De3. I can do it. In addition, since the bottom member 21De including the overhanging portion De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the covering member 21520 is deformed due to displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

Thereby, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang De3 can be increased in a limited manner when the vibration motor 21510 is in the excited state. In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216) produces vibrations, when the vibration device 21500 is de-energized, the vibration device 21500 and the overhang De3 are While it is possible to suppress transmission of vibration to the vibration device 21500 side by keeping the load generated between the two small, in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the By increasing the load, the effect of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the sheathing member 21520 is configured to be sufficiently suppressed (the flexibility of the sheathing member 21520 is fully exhibited), while When the vibrating device 21500 is in an excited state, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the protruding portion 21522, so that the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased.

On the other hand, since the protruding part 21522 is a protruding part formed from a flexible resin material, it is possible to suppress displacement of the protruding part De3 due to the protruding part 21522 being pressed against it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress vibrations from being transmitted to the protruding portion De3, and therefore it is possible to avoid vibrations occurring in the operating device 10300 due to the vibrations of the vibration device 21500.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced toward the back side and then back toward the front side as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the back side compared to the case where the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is not formed. It can increase the momentum of returning to the side.

In this way, the present embodiment is configured to assist the displacement of the vibration device 21500 in both the front and rear directions, so that after the vibration device 21500 is in the excited state, until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player, period can be shortened.

Note that in the above description, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-energized when operating the operation device 10300 or when producing vibrations of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the operation of the operation device 10300 may be performed while the vibration device 21500 is vibrating.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhang De3 due to the operation of the operating device 10300 and the covering member 21520 Since the direction of the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang portion De3 intersects with each other, interaction between the load generated from the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operating device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 break down due to loads being generated by the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 at the same time.

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 301 shows a state in which the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covered cover member 21530, that is, a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right-hand limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

In this embodiment, the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, so that the vibration motor 21510 is configured to be able to be displaced with respect to the covering cover 21530 due to deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Furthermore, as described above, in the vibration device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotational displacement) with the insertion portion 21535 on the left side (see FIG. 290) as a reference (axis of vibration), so the centrifugal displacement The force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced rightward due to the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 (see FIG. 301). The protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of the covering cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape that moves toward the left at the end on the back side (see FIG. 295), so the more the vibration motor 21510 moves to the right, the more vibration When the motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side, the resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases. Thereby, displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-back direction). Since this effect occurs, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

Further, by configuring the vibration to be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting displacement due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment, and also to dissipate the heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 by passing the wiring through the vacant area by omitting the provision of the detection sensor. It can be effectively used as a space for doing things.

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame was mainly explained, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operating unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window 14c will be explained.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit A80, etc. 1)).

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 can be viewed by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board A13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board A13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 302.

On the front of the game board A13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inside position of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board A13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board A13 defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the outer edge member A73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

In addition, in this embodiment, the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened by incorporating a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308) into the outer edge member A73. However, the details will be explained later.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning a prize opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in a normal game, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the first prize opening 64 on a route passing on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning hole 64 without reaching the opening 64 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is to generate a winning number in the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal play.

On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changed, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning hole 640 without reaching the winning hole 640 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game when the probability is changing or when the time is being shortened. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in this general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the decrease in balls during probability change or time saving.

By suppressing the loss of balls, you can obtain the next jackpot before the balls held in the upper tray 17 run out, even if you do not play the game in a firing mode that stops the ball firing at the right time during the probability change (even if you keep hitting it). Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (feeling of fatigue) experienced by the player while playing the game. Therefore, even if the number of revolutions until the next jackpot frequently increases during probability fluctuations (for example, 100 revolutions or more), the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, A part of the ball flowing down the area flows not to the specific winning hole 65a side (left side) but to the general winning hole 63 side (right side) and enters the general winning hole 63a. The prize balls associated with the winning in the general winning hole 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls in the specific winning hole 65a, so the player can pay out the prize balls due to the winning in the special winning hole 63 by the end of the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the expected number of winning balls to the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on the number of winning balls to the general winning hole 63.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can acquire in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning hole 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning hole 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, depending on the location and number of general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel, the number of rounds and counts (specified number of winnings for each round) in the special gaming state are the same for control purposes. Also, the time required for the special game state to end (longer or shorter) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

It should be noted that the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the general winning hole 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole 63 may be displayed, or a combination of them may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 640, so it is difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 without the electric accessory. The player fires the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first winning slot 64, the player has many chances to win the jackpot lottery, and the player wins the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim to become the player.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and balls are required to be hit on the left and right sides depending on the game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be left-right symmetrical (see FIG. 302). In this case, you can aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming for the second winning hole 640 by "hitting left." Therefore, depending on the game status (whether the game is in fixed play, short time play, or regular play), the player can be told how to shoot the ball between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. You can eliminate the need to do so. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710, and the like.

FIG. 303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state where the front frame 14 is opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a diagram. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300. It is a diagram. Note that in FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is shown in an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 will be referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member made of a light-transmitting resin material, which is fitted from the front side into a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13 and fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge of the game board A13. A covering part 86h covered by the ball, a distribution extension part 86a extending from the covering part 86h to the front side so as to be able to distribute balls on the left side, and a distribution extension part 86a extending downward from the upper end to the left A left inclined part 86b extends from the covered part 86h toward the front side, and a right inclined part 86c extends from the covered part 86h to the front side, and has a downwardly inclined shape from the upper end to the right. and a right channel forming wall portion 86d connected to the lower end of the right inclined portion 86c and extending downward from the covering portion 86h to the front side from a position facing the return rubber 69. , a plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e that protrude toward the flow path side (right side) as protrusions spanning the front and rear width of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d, and positions that alternate with the horizontal protrusions 86e. In relation to this, a plurality of front protrusions 86f are provided that protrude from the covering part 86h toward the flow path side (front side) as protrusions spanning the width of the flow path in the area between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. , a separation wall part 86g that extends downward from the lower end of the right flow path forming wall part 86d and is configured to be able to separate the lower right corner of the through hole 13a from other parts.

307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 along the CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb line of FIG. 307(a). .

When the player strongly rotates the operating handle 51 to the right and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the distance between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is such that the ball can flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 mm, and the distance is approximately 16 mm). Since the ball is set to have a length (with a slight gap), the ball flows down while contacting the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

To explain in more detail, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced toward the left and right center of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right channel forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the right, the balls flowing down due to their own weight tend to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal protrusion 86e. In this embodiment, the protruding length of the horizontal protruding portions 86e is designed to be about 2 mm (a little less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere), and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the channel width). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a well-balanced deceleration of the falling balls and prevention of ball clogging.

In addition, in this embodiment, a front protrusion 86f is formed with the same protrusion length (2 mm) as the transverse protrusion 86e at an intermediate position between the plurality of transverse protrusions 86e. This makes it possible to improve the deceleration effect by setting the interval between the protrusions to be half the channel width, while also making it easier to prevent ball clogging.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is installed slightly (about 1 degree) tilted toward the back from a vertical position. Therefore, the covered part 86h is arranged as a sloped wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball flowing down due to its own weight tends to roll down the covered part 86h. With this configuration, the front protrusion 86f that protrudes from the covered portion 86h is smaller than the case where the protrusion is formed from the glass unit 16 side (front side) toward the flow path. A good collision with the ball can be caused. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), in order to make it easier to understand the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is illustrated to be larger than usual (approximately 5 degrees).

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion disposed facing the lottery unit A600, and has the role of closing and separating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is disposed within the area of the through hole 13a. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is disposed, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has a small recess 13b projecting to the right from a substantially circular part that receives the center frame A86, and a small recess 13b extending to the lower right below the small recess 13b. A large protruding recess 13c is formed. In this way, by forming the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c, which serve as the installation area of the lottery unit A600, as recesses connected to the open part that receives the center frame A86 of the through hole 13a, a plurality of independent through holes can be formed. Compared to the case where the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 are arranged in the center frame A86, a larger area can be secured than in the case where the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 are arranged. Note that details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a rear surface formed in a box shape with an open front side and a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

The back case A310 is formed into a rectangular frame shape in front view by forming a rectangular opening A311a in the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the back case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and a second operation unit A700 disposed on the lower side where the arrangement thereof is omitted, respectively, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit A400 is located above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operating unit A700 is located below the opening A311a on the bottom wall A311 of the back case A310. will be placed. Note that FIGS. 305 and 306 illustrate a state in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 are attached to the back case A310.

The back case A310 extends from the front end of the outer wall portion A312 as a flat plate along (for example, arranged parallel to) the back surface of the game board A13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. A support plate portion A313 for support is provided.

The support plate portion A313 is a cylindrical portion that protrudes from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is provided in a shape that allows positioning of the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. A positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and an insertion hole having a size that allows the insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d is provided at a substantially central position of the positioning convex portion A313a (a position that matches the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d). A hole A313b is bored.

That is, by positioning the fastening convex part 13d with the positioning convex part A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening convex part 13d, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed. The overall rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have a shape that follows an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening protrusion 13d, or the support plate portion A313 may be shaped in consideration of workability during assembly. The convex portion may have an oval shape along the direction in which it is formed. Further, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is also made into a shape corresponding to the rectangular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the back case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side. This is the result of a design that takes into account the balance between improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operating unit A300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in this embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for the effect to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in front view, so the movable member is The area where it can be installed will be narrowed. Therefore, if the strength problem can be maintained even if the support plate part A313 is omitted, the restriction on the arrangement range of the movable member can be avoided by omitting the support plate part A313. That's true.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions A313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the back case A310 is related to the range of the area such as the gaming area where the shot ball can be visually recognized by the player. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the fired ball is visually recognized.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the firing device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. introduced, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In a pinball game, the area that is thought to attract the most attention is the area where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61). ) usually receives less attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left, based on the arc convex to the left formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right, based on the arc convex upward, as ranges that the ball cannot reach. It is thought that players' attention to the game will be lower.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member A73 and the surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left of the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light, the back side of the game board A13 cannot be seen from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 or the block-shaped member 74. It is configured as follows.

In this embodiment, the support plate portions A313 are preferentially arranged in these locations where attention is low or in locations where visibility is not possible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate parts A313 are formed, the support plate parts A313 are formed near the corners of the back case A310, avoiding the central part as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole can be reduced by selecting the locations where space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from locations with low visibility (low performance performance). While achieving the effect of securing the ball, it is possible to still secure a wide area within the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a roll along the outer rail 62 and are introduced into the gaming area, the range where the balls do not fall is the lower left, upper left It is easy to ask for the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, which is a part that temporarily absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball and can adjust the manner in which the ball flows down thereafter, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the ball does not flow down.

That is, downstream of the return rubber 69, the falling path of the ball changes depending not only on the relationship with the members forming the outer edge of the gaming area but also on the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. , the placement location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13, which is related to the ball launching performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operating unit A300 can be designed freely, so the design of the operating unit A300 progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13. This is normal, and this allows the internal configuration of the operating unit A300 to be carefully designed. If a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be affected. This will result in design changes to other devices installed in the area, increasing the cost of design changes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the formation of the support plate portion A313 at a position corresponding to the downstream side of the return rubber 69 is omitted. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, the inner space of the back case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313 in the region downstream of the return rubber 69, and sufficient space is secured for arranging the first motion unit A400 for production. In addition, since the path along which the ball flows and the range in which the first movement unit A400 is arranged can be overlapped in front and back, the first movement unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball. can be set.

Further, in this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the rear position of the outer edge member A73 is formed inside (on the left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate part A313 formed on the left side of the back case A310 is formed on the outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest part of the outer wall part A312. That is, the form of the support plate portion A313 (the direction of formation with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is asymmetrical.

This makes it possible to shorten the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 compared to the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13.

The right side outer wall part A312 has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate part A313, and the front edge comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right side outer wall portion A312 comes into line contact with the game board A13.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a cutout A312a that is cut out (formed) toward the back side. This notch A312a is cut out below the upper edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be made to function as a wire through which the wires connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 pass to the outside of the back case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700, compared to the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Note that the necessary components of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a channel for flowing a ball, a board for a light-emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a ball, Examples include other structures. In this embodiment, the discharge path ER through which the winning balls are discharged from the second prize opening 640 of the lottery unit A600 is configured to pass through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (Fig. 317 reference).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily seen by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of the light seen through the game board A13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 depends on the shape of the back case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing light emission.

Note that the shape and length (vertical length) of the cutout portion A312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion A312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right side of the back case A310 is not fastened to the game board A13, so when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13, it is necessary to rely on the rigidity of the operation unit A300. I can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 is provided on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be explained below.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 308 and 309, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board A13 is shown alone, and illustrations of other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is made of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side and has an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from the lower end of the arcuate wall portion 73a. The vertical wall portion 73b includes a vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is made of a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction. The number of man-hours required for assembly to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b includes a plurality of plate-like protruding portions 73b1 that protrude in a plate-like manner toward the back side along the right side portion, and is bent from the front side edge of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction. A cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the joint between the plurality of bent parts 73b2, the arcuate wall part 73a and the inclined wall part 73c, and a cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that is attached to and fastened to the cylindrical protruding part 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4 formed into which a screw can be inserted is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arrangement intervals of the plate-like protruding portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where the plate-like protrusions 73b1 at three locations resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 prevent the metal plate-like member 75 from bending. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed. Excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a main body plate portion 75a which is folded back multiple times in the transverse direction and has no creases in the longitudinal direction, and is bent leftward at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the joint between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. A through hole 75d is provided along with the plate portion in which the through hole 75d is formed, and an insertion hole 75e is formed in a stepped plate portion toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way the main body plate portion 75a is creased. Therefore, by disposing it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a cylindrical protrusion is formed. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

With the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding part 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding part 73b3 of the vertical wall part 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed on the right edge of the front surface so as to be able to receive the plate-like protrusion portions 73b1, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 is received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are provided, which are formed as vertically elongated holes.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled into the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recessed part 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning objects can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily curved in the left-right direction when used alone.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity), so even when the game board A13 and the back case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated, the game board The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening convex portion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c can be placed at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position extremely close to the right end). Thereby, the right side limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c relative to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the opening shape thereof can be made larger.

In this case, when forming a gaming area by using the gaming board A13 with the same vertical and horizontal widths and the center frame A86 with the same opening size, the right end of the gaming area with respect to the gaming board A13 should be set to the right. Since the center frame A86 can be moved in the opposite direction, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows when the game ball is hit to the left (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage hole, etc.).

Furthermore, there is a distribution device (not shown) in which the balls flow down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path of the balls to flow down in the order in which they arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 305). Since a large installation area can be secured, the degree of freedom in designing the distribution device, lottery unit A600, and variable prize winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a and a second prize opening 640, which can be switched between a state where a ball can pass and a state where it cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state. It is an assembly that constitutes a

The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610, which has a second prize opening 640 formed through it, forms a flow path through which the balls flow down to the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. An engaging member A620 that is rotatably supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a, a drive device unit A630 that generates a driving force to operate the engaging member A620, and a drive device unit A630 that is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610. A covering member A650 that defines the falling path of the ball, a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates a region corresponding to the falling path of the ball, and a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610. It is provided with an auxiliary irradiation device A670 that irradiates light to an area where visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and which is different from the falling path of the ball.

The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extending wall portion extending in the form of a wall from the left edge of the main body plate portion A611 toward the front side. A612, a right extending obstacle wall part A613 that extends in a wall shape from a position including the right edge of the main body plate part A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the second prize opening 640 in a rear view on the back side. An extended rectangular frame A614 that extends to A614, a protruding receiving part A615 that protrudes toward the back side above the second prize opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614. The main light emitting holding frame A616 has a frame shape and extends to the back side, and an auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 has a frame shape and extends to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the balls attempting to enter the lottery unit A600 pass through the through gate 67 and flow downstream.

The left-extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion disposed opposite to the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 engage (abut) to ensure rigidity. Thereby, while forming the through hole 13a in a shape large enough to accommodate both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600, it is possible to stably hold the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 in a manner that suppresses positional displacement.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball. That is, the ball flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 is provided with a shaft support hole A614a bored as a part for rotatably supporting the engagement member A620, and the extended end edge thereof can receive the front side end of the drive device unit A630. formed from shapes. That is, the driving device unit A630 is fixed to the extending rectangular frame A614 by fastening the front end of the driving device unit A630 assembled to the extending end of the extending rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the end position of its movement. will be described later.

The main light emitting holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame for the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and has an insertion hole A616a drilled inside thereof into which a fastening screw is inserted. The fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed into the fastening part A652a of the covering member A650, but as described later, the fastening part A652a overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front. formed in position. Thereby, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be seen when viewed from the front, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole A614a of an extended rectangular frame A614, and is configured such that a claw-like portion A622 disposed at a rotating tip engages with an electric accessory 640a. . Thereby, the electric accessory 640a is configured to change its state (open state or closed state) as the posture of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engagement member A620 will be described with reference to FIG. 312.

312(a) is a side view of the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and FIG. 312(b) is a side view of the engaging member A620 as viewed from the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). FIG. 312(c) is a front view of the engaging member A620, and FIG. 312(c) is a sectional view of the engaging member A620 taken along the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b).

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arm portions A621 each consisting of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal to) the rotational axis J1, and a rotating tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 protruding from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis J1, and a rotating base of the rotating arm portion A621. A proximal connecting rod portion A624, which is a rod-shaped portion extending in the radial direction from the end side, and is formed into a U-shape in front view in such a manner that the extended end is curved toward the other side and then joined. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal connecting rod portion A624 from the rotating tip side of the rotating arm portion A621, and are connected after being curved toward the other side at the extending end. A distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front.

The pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged opposite to each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, a flow path for the ball can be formed so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the flow path for the ball formed by the lottery unit A600. be able to.

The proximal connecting rod portion A624 has a main rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a proximal connecting rod portion A624 that protrudes toward the distal connecting rod portion A625 at an intermediate position between the main rod portion A624a. and a protruding restriction portion A624b provided therein. The protruding restriction portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engagement member A620, and the details will be described later.

The distal end connecting rod portion A625 is formed to have a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal connecting rod portion A624 in a rod-like portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1. That is, the surface of the rod-shaped portion A625a facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed into a planar shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface opposite to the rotating arm portion A621 is formed as a rotating tip. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that is inclined in a direction away from the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes to the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotating tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined toward the surface on the side opposite to the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes toward the center in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

This recessed surface A625c is recessed along the slope of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed from the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c is the same, with only the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) being different. Visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed to correspond to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A632 of the drive device unit A630, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive device unit A630. FIG. 313 shows a state in which the engagement member A620 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

The engagement member A620 is assembled to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engagement member A620, deforming it, and then fitting it inside the extending rectangular frame A614 so that the shaft support hole A614a and the protrusion of the engagement member A620 are aligned. This is executed by removing the load and canceling the deformation while aligning with the shaft installation part A623.

That is, after gripping the engaging member A620 with fingers from the rotation axis J1 direction and applying compressive force to deform it to the extent that the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 is shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614, The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by entering the engaging member A620 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In this embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed to be connected by a proximal connecting rod portion A624 and a distal connecting rod portion A625 that are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly can be caused in the proximal connecting rod portion A624 and the distal connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotary arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm parts A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped part but by a pair of rod-shaped parts (the proximal connecting rod part A624 and the distal connecting rod part A625), the load can be released. It is possible to easily avoid misalignment of the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 after the rotation.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped part wider than the rotational base-end side on the rotating tip side, where the load during operation tends to be large among the pair of rod-shaped parts (see Fig. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL When the rotary arm portions A621 are operated by the driving force of the rotary arm portions A621, it is possible to suppress the postures of the rotary arm portions A621 from shifting from each other.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see Figure 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required during assembly can be reduced near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base side. It can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engagement member A620 comes into contact with the lower end of the protruding receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second prize opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that entered the second prize opening 640 is a surface that forms an extended rectangular frame A614 with the engaging member A620, and is arranged opposite to the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The water flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as a slanted surface A614b, and flows into the drive device unit A630.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the balls, the balls can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the downward flow path of the ball from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the downward flow path of the ball can be arranged compactly.

The drive device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box part A631 with an open front side that is connected and fixed to the rear side end of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper part of the main body box part A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction when excited by the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a coil spring A633 that is held on the lower side of the main body box part A631. A detection sensor A634 that detects passage of the ball is provided.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized, the operating member A632 is placed in the front position (see FIG. 314(a)) due to the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized, the biasing force of the coil spring A633 The operating member A632 is driven against the biasing force and placed at the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described with reference to FIG. 314.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), in order to facilitate understanding, only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated, and other structures for holding these members are illustrated. Illustration is omitted.

Further, FIG. 314(a) shows the de-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (the closed state of the electric accessory 640a), and FIG. 314(b) shows the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (the opened state of the electric accessory 640a). state) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is placed at the front side position, the engagement member A620 is placed in a downwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized. When the operating member A632 is placed at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is placed in an upwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support A653 of the covering member A650, and includes an eccentric protrusion 640b that protrudes toward the back side from a position eccentric to the rotation axis. This eccentric protruding portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut vertically with the claw-like portion A622 of the engagement member A620, and as the eccentric protruding portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-like portion A622, The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-like member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-like parts A622 of the engagement member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. It may be constructed from a pair of blade-like members facing each other. In this case, the engagement member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 310 and 311. The covering member A650 is a member that is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a in between, and is a member that is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate part A651 that forms a downward flow path for the ball between the main body plate part A651, a regulating wall part A652 that protrudes in a wall shape toward the back side of the main body plate part A651 and regulates the downward flow of the ball, and a rear surface of the main body plate part A651. It includes a shaft support portion A653 that projects sideward in a columnar manner and rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmittance range A651a in which the back side is easily visible when viewed from the front, and a low transmittance range A651b which has lower light transmittance than the high transmittance range A651a and in which the back side is difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, a seal whose printed surface is designed in such a manner that it constitutes a high transparency range and a low transparency range is pasted on the front side of the main body plate part A651, so that the high transparency range A651a and the low transparency range are affixed. Although the low transmission range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding, or the main body plate portion A651 may be milled to roughen the surface to form a region with low transparency.

In this embodiment, the high-transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly on the right side) of the ball's downward flow path, and the low-transmission range A651b is formed with a regulating wall A652 that restricts the downward flow of the ball. It is formed on the side that faces (mainly the left side). Thereby, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's falling path, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure within the range where the ball does not fall.

The regulating wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which, for example, a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a is screwed for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610. The fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transparent, so it tends to create a shadow when viewed from the front. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A652a is placed outside of the ball's falling path, so that the shadow caused by the fastening screw can be prevented from entering the ball's falling path and giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from detracting from the player's concentration when visually checking the falling state of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffuser plate A661 housed inside the main light emitting holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illumination board A662 on which a light emitting means A663 such as an LED is disposed on the side of the diffuser plate A661, and an illumination board A662. It includes a rear lid part A664 which is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662 and is fastened and fixed to the back end of the main light emitting support frame A616.

The diffuser plate A661 is a plate-like member that has an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both front and rear surfaces, and is a plate-like member that has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both the front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. This extended portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffuser plate A661 from tilting when the diffuser plate A661 is accommodated in the main light emitting holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extended portions A661a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, creating resistance in the direction of returning the tilt, so that the posture of the diffuser plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front side of the illumination board A662 comes into contact with the extended end of the extended portion A661a, thereby preventing the diffusion plate A661 from coming off to the back side. .

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and the outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662. . That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A662 is held between the main light emitting holding frame A616 and the rear lid part A664 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

This makes it possible to stably hold the illumination board A662 by utilizing the rigidity of the main light emitting holding frame A616, even if the rear lid part A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A664 alone is low. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to pull out the diffuser plate A661 from the main light emitting holding frame A616, so mischief can be suppressed by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screws.

Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and tends to cause shadows, but according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 are provided on the back side of the fastening screw, and light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is provided. A diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing is arranged. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made less noticeable.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap with the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the external shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less noticeable can be made more noticeable.

As mentioned above, the main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the downward flow path of the sphere, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated onto the downward flow path of the sphere.In this embodiment, the diffuser plate A661 is The light reaches the downstream path. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without going through the diffuser plate, the light can be made lighter and more expansive. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue in the eyes of the player who is paying attention to the falling path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 includes an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. A rear lid part A673 formed from an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape is provided.

The illumination board A671 is fixed in a holding manner similar to that of the illumination board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A671 is held between the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and the rear lid part A673 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid part A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A673 alone is low, it is possible to stably hold the illumination board A671 using the rigidity of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, the auxiliary irradiation device A670 does not include a diffusion plate on the front side of the illumination board A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Although light is emitted in this manner, in this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is placed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b when viewed from the front, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 has a low transmittance. It passes through the transmission range A651b and is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, so that it is possible to avoid causing excessive fatigue to the eyes of the player who sees the light.

In addition, by maintaining the emitted light intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character is brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

315(a) and 315(b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 along a line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 315(a) shows the de-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(a)), and FIG. 315(b) shows the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-energized state, the lower end of the disc at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the concave surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, in addition to the fact that the disc portion of the operating member A632 has advanced to the front side to the extent that it is placed opposite to the vicinity of the widthwise intermediate position of the concave surface A625c, the concave surface A625c is By making the surface substantially parallel to the surface, the load applied from the engagement member A620 to the operating member A632 becomes a load mainly having a component in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 with the load from the engaging member A620, so that the piano wire can be removed from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire rod such as the like is inserted to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a to change it to the open state.

Here, pachinko machines have traditionally been equipped with a function to output an error notification when fraudulent activity is detected, but by illegally applying a load to the movable accessory 640a that can be seen from the front side, the electromagnetic solenoid If the movable accessory 640 could be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraudulent acts would not be sufficient.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a is connected to the movable accessory 640a via the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged with the engaging member A620 (see FIG. 314(a)), in the configuration of this embodiment where it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, it is difficult to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a. It may also be difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent act that places a load on the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the recessed surface A625c is arranged so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotating tip side of the engagement member A620. Since it is tilted, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. The abutment position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotation tip side), and the tip side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engagement member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the load required to further displace the engagement member A620 can be increased. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to open the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315(a), when the rod-shaped portion A625a is bent and deformed in the thickness direction due to the load received from the operating member A632, the reaction force applied to the operating member A632 is applied in a direction that is tilted upward toward the front side. can be directed to.

Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a load toward the front side, and the operating member A632 can be prevented from retreating rearward due to the load from the bar-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably restrict the rising displacement of the engagement member A620.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disk portion of the operating member A632 and the protruding restriction portion A624b of the engaging member A620 come into contact with each other, so that the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL Before the engagement member A620 collides with the part, further backward rotation movement (movement in the rising direction) of the engagement member A620 is restricted. That is, since the rotation of the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be controlled by the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with other parts.

316(a) is a top view of the operating unit A300, FIG. 316(b) is a side view of the operating unit A300 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 is a top view of the operating unit A300 and the operating unit It is a back view of A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged so as to protrude further to the front side than the front end of the back case A310. When forming the game board A13 from a plywood board while disposing the first operating unit A400 in this way, it is necessary to form depressions and holes on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the base plate A60 of the game board A13 is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and upper surfaces (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operating unit A400 can be easily avoided while configuring the back case A310 to protrude further to the front side than the front end thereof. This allows the first operating unit A400 to be placed closer to the player, thereby improving the effect of the production that makes the first operating unit A400 visible.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate part A313 arranged at the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged inside (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall part A312. As a result, the arrangement of the outer wall part A312 at the left and right center where the support plate part A313 is not arranged is shifted further to the outside (upper side), compared to the case where the support plate part A313 is arranged outside of the outer wall part A312. This allows the upper end position of the back case A310 to be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit A400 (or the second operating unit A700) with respect to the back case A310.

In addition, since the left and right positions where the support plate part A313 on the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged are located outside the gaming area in front view, as described above, the support plate part A313 is located below the outer wall part A312. The influence (disadvantage) on the game can be suppressed by being placed in the area.

As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is not provided on the right side of the back case A310 except at the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied by the support plate part A313 below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall part A312 of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. I can do it.

FIG. 318 is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 taken along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. As shown in FIG. 318, compared to the outer edge extending portion 60a extending along the outer edge toward the back side, the base plate A60 is an area inside the outer edge extending portion 60a and is at least connected to the gaming area. The central projecting portion 60b that projects toward the back side in a region where the front and back partially overlap is formed to have a shorter front-to-back width.

Since the front end surfaces of the base plate A60 are formed on substantially the same plane, the rear end of the central projecting portion 60b is located closer to the front than the rear end of the outer edge extension portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first operating unit A400.

A recessed portion 60c that is recessed toward the front side is formed between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central extension portion 60b, and in the area in which this recessed portion 60c is formed, the base plate A60 is It is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c than in the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central protrusion portion 60b.

A center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap maintained between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained even on the front side of the base plate A60.

The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is used to illuminate the sphere by being irradiated onto the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the degree of energy reduction when the light used for the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13, so it is possible to effectively use weaker light. You can perform an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outward from the inner surface of the outer edge extension portion 60a of the base plate A60 in front view, so that the falling path of the ball is concave. It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping the installation part 60c in the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thereby, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate-like member 75 can be configured integrally and so as to support each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

Further, by utilizing the fact that when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, the light is reflected on the metal, the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased. This light emission with locally increased intensity occurs at a location where the inner end (left end) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b is visible through the outer edge member A73. 73b (see FIG. 308) (the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate-like member 75, the area where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. As a result, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed opposite the vertical wall portion 73b and the area where the flow path is formed above the lottery unit A600.

319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operating unit A300. In addition, in the description of FIG. 319, FIG. 320, FIG. 321, and FIG. It means A400C and A400D. Furthermore, the first operating unit A400 may be used as a representative example of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and second operation units A700 are shown maintaining a retracted state in which they do not protrude to the third symbol display device 81 side, and in FIG. 320, all the first operation units It is illustrated that the operating unit A400 is excited and placed in an extended state protruding toward the third symbol display device 81, while the second operating unit A700 maintains a retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all the first operating units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operating unit A700 is shown in the overhanging state extending toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and in FIG. 322, one The figure shows how the first operating units A400B and A400C of the section are in the retracted state, the other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are formed in a color that stands out to the player in a range defined by a colored (ultramarine in this embodiment) cover member A591. The front cover A410 (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold-plated) and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visible, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side The first operating unit A400 is located closest to the adjacent first operating unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation that spreads from the inside (center) to the outside of the third symbol display device 81, the center of this radiation The player's line of sight can be focused inward on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side is closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. (including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440) is chamfered so as to taper toward the tip side (third symbol display device 81 side). This avoids interference with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

Although there is no limitation on the starting point of chamfering, in this embodiment, a straight line extending along the lateral side of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. The chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where it intersects with the straight line, and the chamfering is started from just before the intersection. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a wide range in which the first displacement members A440 are visible while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440.

As shown in FIG. 319, when the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front and rear so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged in the following position. Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to a posture in which the light-emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 when viewed from the front. In addition, it is possible to increase the visual change while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1; Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, when the first operation unit A400 is in the extended state, the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (the third symbol display device 81 located at a distance from

To explain in detail, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a wide posture in the front and rear so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second displacement member In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490 from the state where it interferes with the movement locus of A490 (the retracted state of the first operating unit A400), it is moved closer to the game board A13 side and placed closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490. (the extended state of the first operating unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 emits light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490, regardless of whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or in the extended state. It is possible to perform a light emission effect. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 is made switchable. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the production unit A710 can move up and down to the center side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the second operation unit A700 includes a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the production unit A710, and executes a light emission production in which light travels in multiple directions by rotating the rotating body A720. This is possible, but details will be discussed later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual drive device, so that each first operation unit A400 can change and maintain the state independently. That is, the combination of the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one first operating unit A400, or it is also possible to execute the state change in different first operating units A400 in order. For example, the state can be changed sequentially from the first operating unit A400 at the lower left in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, or the state can be changed sequentially in both directions from the third first operating unit A400B clockwise from the lower left. It can also be executed. In this way, various effects can be performed using the first operation unit A400.

Further, for example, when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C which is in the retracted state in FIG. 322 is arranged in the extended position and is configured to interfere with the second operation unit A700, In this case, the first operating units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operating unit A700 can be set in a retracted state, and the other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D can be set in an extended state. This makes it possible to increase variations in the combinations of operations (states) between the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700, compared to the case where all the first operating units A400 operate synchronously using the same drive device. can.

FIG. 323 is a front view of operating unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 are illustrated with imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400 is arranged to be able to effectively decorate the gaming area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the area where the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged facing each other and guides the ball (ball launching unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the gaming area, and the outer frame of the gaming area in this section is the inner rail 61. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operating units A400, A400A (second from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (It is not necessary to extend it to the outer rail 62.)

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly the area where the ball hit right flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is located near the outer rail 62 (outer side). will be placed in

Furthermore, the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer frame of the gaming area in the area where the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400D (first one on the lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is possible because in this embodiment, the support plate part A313 is not provided at the right midsection of the back case A310, and the right end of the back case A310 is brought close to the right end of the game board A13. It is what it is.

That is, by forming the internal area of the back case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 when viewed from the front, the first operating unit A400D can be arranged closer to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path is arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for a right-hit ball to flow down (flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302). The first operating unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer end of the front cover A410 is arranged outward (on the right side).

In other words, like in a typical right-handed game machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical), the right-handed channel is made extremely narrower than the left-handed channel, and is placed closer to the right end of the game board A13. In the case where a movable device such as the first operating unit A400 can be arranged right-aligned in the internal area of the back case A310, as in this embodiment, the back side of the gaming area can be It becomes possible to place movable devices on the entire side.

On the other hand, on the left side of the back case A310, a guide section is formed that is sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 when viewed from the front, and the player's line of sight is not concentrated on this guide section. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310 as in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid reducing the degree of decoration of the gaming area. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is optimal to arrange the support plate part A313 on the left side of the back case A310 and omit the support plate part A313 on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the gaming area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in multiple ways in FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged within the gaming area, the patterns and figures that are visible to the player who is paying attention to the gaming area can be visually recognized through the gaming board A13. The front cover A410 can be configured with a plurality of front covers A410.

This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by pasting stickers or the like on which characters or the like are printed on the surface of the game board A13. Furthermore, the area in which the front cover A410 is disposed is configured so that its appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400. Compared to the case where stickers or the like are pasted on the game board A13, variations in the manner in which the game area is decorated can be increased. Note that the details of the change in appearance will be described later.

Furthermore, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see Fig. 305), even if the structure is exposed here or the drive device is placed, it is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly. can.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operating units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between them connects the adjacent first operating units A400. 1 is fastened and fixed to the operation unit A400. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integral structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operating unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operating unit A400. , it is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore, the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-like member 75 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-like member 75 can be improved.

As a result, it is possible to easily design the metal plate member 75 into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIGS. 303 and 304), which is the original function of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of operating unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operating units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 to the front side, and a second operating unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation units A400 are each configured to be operable in a generally common operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are arranged so as to surround a part of the periphery of the internal space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in a direction toward the center of the internal space of the back case A310 (a direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the back case A310). Configured to move with.

Therefore, for example, since the influence exerted by gravity may change in each first movement unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that movement can be realized without relying on gravity, but details will be described later. do. As described above, each of the first operating units A400 has a generally common configuration, so the first operating unit A400 disposed at the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operating units A400 will be explained in detail. Omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operating unit A400 is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front covered by the front cover A410, and includes a main body area A400b where light emitting effects are mainly performed, and the main body area A400b. It is composed of an annexed area A400v that is attached to the end of the area A400b.

The annex area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be visible to the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is placed over the center side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

This annexed area A400v is not intended to be visible to players, but includes configurations that inevitably occur along with the performance performed in the main body area A400b (for example, the drive motor AMT1, the detection sensor A426 that detects the position, wiring and connectors, etc.). By arranging the main body area A400b, it is possible to make maximum use of the main body area A400b for arranging members intended to be visually recognized by the player. That is, since it is possible to avoid encroaching on the main body area A400b by structures that are not intended to be visible to the player, it is possible to arrange large members by making full use of the width of the main body area A400b.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. Note that FIGS. 327 and 328 illustrate a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front unit FU that includes a front cover A410 and a first displacement member A440 that can be displaced in a manner to enter between the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440. It mainly includes a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is formed by a thin plate bent into a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU, and the main body part A411 is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide part A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

With the above-described configuration, the front cover A410 has a function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU from the player while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412, and a function of hiding the first displacement member of the front unit FU. The main function is to guide the displacement of A440.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is stacked on the back side of the central effect part A411a of the main body part A411, and is arranged opposite to the central effect part A411a, and has the shape of the central effect part A411a. A diffuser plate A415 formed of a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape with a corresponding outer shape, and an LED (approximately square chip shape in FIG. An illumination board A416 on which a light emitting means A416a such as (shown in figure) is disposed, and a board fixing plate that is placed opposite to the illumination board A416, fixes the illumination board A416, and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. Mainly equipped with A417.

Hereinafter, the configurations of the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, and how positional shift is suppressed by the configurations will be described.

The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened with fastening screws or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body part A411 and the board fixing plate A417 from the front and back directions, and has an axis corresponding position A415a arranged on the back side facing the light emitting means A416a. A wave pattern is formed by protrusions concentrically spread around the center, and a recessed part A415b is formed inward from the outer edge, and a through hole with a smaller diameter than the light emitting means is formed. It mainly includes a plurality of small diameter holes A415c, and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends toward the back side.

The protrusions forming a wave pattern on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 refract the light irradiated toward the axis-corresponding position A415a, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered on the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed in a shape that advances toward the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (radially outward), but the opposite is not the case. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members, and in this embodiment, the purpose of the recessed portion A415b is to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. is formed.

The narrow diameter portion 415c is located at a position not facing the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 (a position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411) in order to make it difficult to see when viewed from the front, and is located in a columnar shape through which the board fixing plate A417 is inserted. This is a through hole formed at a position corresponding to part A417f, and is used for aligning the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 to enable positioning of the diffusion plate A415 with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d has a protruding length of approximately 4 mm and a width of approximately 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so it can withstand loads that occur during assembly or maintenance (for example, due to interference with other members). The protruding plate portion A415d can be prevented from being bent or broken due to loads caused by collisions, friction, etc., and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusion plate A415 has a wave pattern formed over the entire area on the back side and can perform a light diffusion function over the entire area, but it can be clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 in terms of performance. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416 passes through the first area AC1, so that it can be visually recognized by the player in a strong light emitting manner as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 corresponds to an area formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the board fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the board fixing plate A417, and is a region of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416. The optical axis does not pass through the light emitting means A416a, and the light from the light emitting means A416a reaches the light in a weakened state.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the light emission produced by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, but the details will be described later.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-mentioned light emitting means A416a, a recessed part A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c bored with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter through hole A416c. A plurality of assembly fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which the ends of the wiring are connected, and an electrical wiring FC (main connector) that supplies electricity to the first displacement member A440. The embodiment mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat cable is connected.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visible to the player is likely to be maximum, and in this embodiment, it is preferentially arranged at a position that matches the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front and back direction. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to easily ensure the intensity of the light that is visible to the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar part A417f of the board fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the illumination board A416 can be aligned with the board fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper one of the pair of through holes.

For example, as a maintenance response, remove the main unit A411 and the diffuser plate A415 while the first operating unit A400 is fixed to the back case A310, remove the malfunctioning illumination board A416 from the board fixing plate A417, and restore the normal illumination board. When the work of attaching A416 to the board fixing plate A417 is assumed, the illumination board A416 falls forward due to its own weight before being fastened and fixed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper through hole (the side that is more displaced toward the front due to forward tilting) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed with a fastening screw, so that the front It is possible to successfully return the fallen position to the backward direction by tightening the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the illumination board A416 from being erroneously fixed during fastening and fixing during maintenance.

Note that the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c protruding from the front side of the board fixing plate A417 is inserted into the lower through hole of the assembly fastening part A416d for positioning the illumination board A416 and for positioning the illumination board A416. Equipped with a temporary fastening function. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-hole is hooked on the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c, so that it is possible to suppress the illumination board A416 from falling under its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side and has a first connector A416e1 connected to wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting unit A416a, and a wiring connected to a detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring is connected to a second displacement member A490 disposed in the rear unit BU.

In these connectors A416e, the positions of the mating members to which the wiring is connected are fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating members are movable ( Because of the third connector A416e3), it can be placed at any position. In this embodiment, a position corresponding to the lower end of the illumination board A416 and included in the annex area A400v is set so that interference with other members is unlikely to occur and there is no risk of the player seeing it. It is located.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440, which is a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring, is located in an area on the opposite side of the illumination board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 in between (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate part A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (refer to 335) is shortened, so if the connectors are placed incorrectly, excessive load may be placed on the wiring. There is a risk of giving.

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e in which the wiring direction can be any direction (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the posture of the intermediate connector A416f is changed to the first position in the front unit FU. The direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the displacement member A440, is aligned with the direction in which the electric wiring FC is expandable (the flat cable band extends, can be easily bent, and there is little possibility of disconnection). It is set.

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body part A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the illumination board A416, and a protrusion part on the back side of the main body part A417a to receive the fastening part of the front unit FU. and a plurality of through-holes A417b configured to allow insertion of fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion, a fastening portion into which the fastening screws are screwed, and a plane common to the front end surface of the fastening portion toward the front side. A plurality of board fastening portions A417c are provided, each of which is a set of protruding narrow-diameter columnar portions.

Further, the main body part A417a of the board fixing plate A417 has a plate-shaped deep bottom plate part A417a1 connected to the rear end part of the board fastening part A417c, and is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1, and the front surface thereof is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1. A shallow plate-like portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the distal end surface of the fastening portion.

That is, the back surface of the illumination board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening parts of the plurality of board fastening parts A417c and the shallow plate-like part A417a2.

The board fixing plate A417 has a sharp protruding part A417d extending from the deep bottom plate-like part A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp protruding part A417d at the lower left of the sharp protruding part A417d. The insertion hole A417e is formed in a rectangular shape with the same width.

The sharp protruding part A417d is arranged at the lower left of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross section in such a manner that it leaves an interval approximately equal to the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable, between it and the electrical board A416. It is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (perpendicularly intersects) the direction A416x when viewed from the front. The wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, so the electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is connected to the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d. caught between.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electrical wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d, the portion of the electrical wiring FC that receives displacement due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is transferred to the intermediate connector A416f. It can be shifted from the end position of the electrical wiring FC to be connected to a position sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding part A417d. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC falls off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The board fixing plate A417 includes a plurality of insertion columnar parts A417f that project from the shallow plate part A417a2 in a columnar manner toward the front side at positions corresponding to the large diameter holes A416c, and the shallow plate part A417a2 and the shallow plate part A417a2. A protruding plate portion A415d of the diffuser plate A415 can be received in a plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between A417a2 and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, and a side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side. A plurality of notches A417h formed with a width and a plurality of protruding pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front side edge of the side wall A417a3 formed diagonally on the right side in front view. and.

The insertion columnar part A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416c, and is a large diameter base that extends beyond the thickness of the illumination board A416 and protrudes from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. and a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffuser plate A415.

Thereby, the large-diameter base can align the illumination board A416 and the surface support of the diffuser plate A415 can be performed, and the small-diameter tip can align the diffuser plate A415. That is, the diffuser plate A415 is aligned with its small diameter tip and is supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large diameter base of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With this configuration, even though the diffusion plate A415 is not directly fastened and fixed, it is possible to suppress the posture of the diffusion plate A415 from shifting.

The through hole A417g forms an air passage and has a function of suppressing heat generation of the illumination board A416. In this embodiment, the diffusion plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416, and since the configuration is such that it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g is formed on the back side. is formed. Thereby, heat generation of the illumination board A416 can be suppressed without reducing the production effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages with it in the direction along the side wall A417a3. This allows the diffusion plate A415 to protrude from the board fixing plate A417 even if the small diameter tip of the insertion columnar part A417f breaks due to aging or falls off due to manufacturing defects. It is possible to prevent the plate portion A415d from shifting in the longitudinal direction (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction). Therefore, in the support mode in which the diffuser plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffuser plate A415 from shifting its position.

The protruding piece A417i is formed into a thin plate shape into which the illumination board A416 can be inserted between the protruding piece A417i and the shallow plate-like part A417a2. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the illumination board A416 in a front view, and the protruding piece A417i is arranged downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), even if the illumination board A416 is subjected to a load in the direction of falling forward due to gravity, etc., this protrusion piece A417i will keep the illumination board A416 on the tilted tip side (upper right side). Since it is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and restricts displacement of the illumination board A416 toward the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, the illumination board A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the provision of fastening screws inside the internal space of the operation unit A300. This avoids reducing the light emitting effect (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws) caused by arranging the fastening screws inside the internal space of the movement unit A300, where the player's attention tends to be high. The illumination board A416 can be stably fixed to the board fixing plate A417.

When assembling the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, insert the right side edge of the illumination board A416 diagonally between the shallow plate-like part A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i as far as it will go, and then press the insertion tip. It can be assembled smoothly by pushing the illumination board A416 backwards from the starting point. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

331(a) is a front view of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 331(b) is a front view of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line in FIG. 332(a). It is a sectional view of substrate fixing plate A417.

331(a) and 331(b) illustrate a state in which the illuminated board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the illuminated board A416 inserted into the board fixing plate A417. is shown assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

The illumination board A416 includes chamfered portions A416g and A416h chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body. The manner in which the chamfered portions A416g and A416h are formed corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. In other words, since the length up to the notch A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417, the length of the illumination board A416 Compared to the first chamfered part A416g at the upper end, the second chamfered part A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the illumination board A416.

FIG. 331 shows a state in which the illumination board A416 is displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the board fixing plate A417, compared to the state shown in FIG. 332. The upper limit of the degree of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered part A416g and the upper surface of the board fixing plate A417, and in the state shown in FIG. The edge of the cutout A417h fits into the gap formed by the cutout A417h.

Contrary to the state illustrated in FIG. 331, when displacing the illumination board A416 downward, the length of the space formed between the second chamfer A416h and the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 is set to an upper limit. As shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 can be shifted downward from the state shown in FIG. 332, and in the downwardly shifted state, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the illumination board A416 in this manner, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in positioning the illumination board A416 when inserting the illumination board A416 into the board fixing plate A417. In other words, even if the right side of the illumination board A416 and the right side of the board fixing plate A417 are not in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 can be fixed to the board by allowing slight vertical displacement It can be inserted into plate A417. Thereby, the illumination board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

To change the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 may be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, as can be seen from the fact that the insertion columnar section A417f of the board fixing plate A417 is visible through the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416, the insertion columnar section A417f of the tapered shape (see FIG. 329 By guiding the large-diameter hole 417c by the large-diameter hole 417c, the vertical positional deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected, and the illumination board A416 is brought into the state shown in FIG. 332. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416, so the illumination board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

Note that the protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h in the assembled state (see FIG. 325), and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, the notch A417h has the function of widening the gap when the illumination board A416 is assembled, and after the assembly is completed, the arrangement of the illumination board A416 is maintained by filling the gap. It can have a function.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes to the front side of the illumination board A416 to prevent the illumination board A416 from coming off. Because of the interference, it is possible to prevent the right side of the illumination board A416 from falling off the board fixing plate A417.

By using such a retaining structure to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling off, this embodiment is configured so that the board fastening portion A417c is not disposed near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417. (The installation of fastening screws is omitted). Thereby, it is possible to secure a region for disposing the light emitting means A416a near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is also possible to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of light emission near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When the illumination board A416 becomes defective and during maintenance work to replace the illumination board A416, the illumination board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331(b). You need to tilt it. At this time, since the illumination board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the illumination board A416. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 toward you, the illumination board A416 can be easily connected. It can be tilted with respect to the board fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end disposed opposite to the side wall A417a3) which is the starting point of the attitude change of the illumination board A416, the first connector The illumination board A416 can be efficiently rotated and displaced by the load applied to the wiring connected to A416e1. In other words, the moment of force applied to the illumination board A416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying unnecessary (excessive) load to the illumination board A416 and wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed into a box shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side with a lid. That is, the second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to move forward and backward through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, thereby performing the movable performance of the first movement unit A400.

In this embodiment, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are simply called the front unit FU and the rear unit BU as units that can be disassembled. They do not work independently, but work in conjunction with each other. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400. be. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operating unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. Note that in FIGS. 335 and 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an overview of the configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 includes a support plate formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material as a component of the front unit FU. A first displacement member A440 is formed from a transparent and colorless resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the support plate A420 with a gap in which it can move forward and backward, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate A420. a first displacement member A440 that moves back and forth (sliding displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344) guided by a gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420; A slide link A450, which is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 and is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and the drive motor AMT1 and its It mainly includes a drive gear AMG1 that is fastened and fixed to a drive motor AMT1.

The first operating unit A400 also includes a transmission gear group A460, which constitutes the rear unit BU, and a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and whose constituent members rotate as the drive gear AMG1 rotates. A support box part A470 rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material in the shape of a box with an open front side; A rear plate portion A480 is formed from a resin material, is arranged with a gap on the back side of the support box portion A470, and is fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap (support plate portion) formed on the front side of the support box portion A470. A second displacement member A490 that moves forward and backward (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) in the gap between the plate part A420 and the support box part A470, and a drive motor AMT1 connected to the second displacement member A490. It mainly includes a rack and pinion A510, which is a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits driving force and is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box part A470.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the back side with the plate-like part (the support plate part A420, the bottom of the support box part A470) arranged on the back side sandwiched therebetween. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are disposed, and both the slide link A450 and the second displacement member A490 are disposed in the gap between the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470. will be placed.

That is, the first displacement member A440 on the front side has a configuration in which the displacement members A440, A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are disposed front and rear with the plate-shaped portion sandwiched therebetween, which tends to be bulky in the front and rear. Compared to the case where the slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in independent gaps in the front and rear, the arrangement of the plate member for forming the independent gaps is omitted. Therefore, the longitudinal width occupied by the displacement mechanism portions of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, other performance mechanisms can be placed in the front-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-rear width, thereby improving the performance effect of the first operating unit A400.

Next, each configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes a first displacement member A440 and a second displacement member A490 that have different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different. The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and the remaining configuration required for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be explained later.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first operation unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed through the guide holes as long holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a punch hole A423 provided as a similar long hole to one of the guide holes A422, and a hole A423 extending parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide protrusions A424 protrude toward the front side as protrusions, and a plurality of guide protrusions A424 are recessed along the direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421, and as the recessed end goes toward the front side, the main body plate portion A421 A recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that slopes away from the right side edge of the slide link A425, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position, and a cover of the slide link A450. A shaft support A427 with a circular cross section that can support the shaft support hole A452 and protrudes from the main body plate portion A421 toward the rear side, and a cylindrical shaft support A427 extending from the main body plate portion A421 toward the rear side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 that protrude in a shape.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b that guides the displacement of the guided protrusion A455c of the slide link A450.

The pull-out hole A423 is a through-hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d extends from the front side of the main body plate portion A421 to the coil spring ASP1. to lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is latched (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the direction of contraction (lower left direction).

The guide protrusion A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and details will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor arranged to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but rather detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already placed in the extended position. It is also conceivable that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping may occur despite the fact that the drive motor AMT1 is not stopped. In contrast, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken to avoid overloading the parts related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and to maintain the arrangement of the first displacement member A440. However, the details will be explained later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and is protruded from the transmission gear with a slight gap between its tip. It is arranged opposite to group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 functions to suppress the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the direction of falling off on the shaft side.

Note that in this embodiment, a locking screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, unless the screw loosens or falls off, the screw can prevent the transmission gear A461 from displacing in the direction of falling off on the shaft side. In this way, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical part A428 are configured to prevent the transmission gear A461 from coming off in two stages, so it is possible to ensure that the transmission gear A461 does not come off from the shaft. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The guide plate part A430 has a right side edge parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate part A421, and a plate-shaped main body plate part A431 which is disposed facing each other in a posture along a plane parallel to the plane formed by the main body plate part A421. , a plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 are provided in the back side of the main body plate part A431 in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x; The inclined surface A433 is formed to be inclined toward the front side and is configured to be able to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear cover portion 443), and corresponds to the width of the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420. The guide plate portion A434 is formed in the shape of a long plate along the direction A416x with a width of .

The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion holes A431a on the peripheral edge thereof, into which fastening screws are inserted. The left side edge of the main body plate part A431 is supported by the side wall part A421a raised toward the front side from the left side edge of the main body plate part A421 of the support plate part A420, so the left side of the main body plate part A431 Even though there is only one insertion hole A431a provided at the edge, the guide plate A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate A420.

In addition, in the right edge of the main body plate A431, which is the position through which the first displacement member A440 moves forward and backward, the insertion hole A431a is located at only one location approximately at the center of the vertical width. Compared to the case where the insertion hole A431a is disposed at a biased position, the deviation in the distance between the right edge of the main body plate A431 and the support plate A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge. At the same time, the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 can be improved compared to the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged.

The elongated recess A432 is a recess that guides the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 can be displaced. It is recessed with approximately the same length. That is, the first displacement member A440 is not only guided on the back side by the guide hole A422 of the support plate part A420, but also guided on the front side by the elongated recessed part A432.

The guide plate portion A434 is provided with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged on the right edge side at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable, and between the claw portions A434a. An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap and temporarily fixed. Due to this. One end of the electrical wiring FC that is deflected and displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be set at the position of the claw part A434a, and the position of the electrical wiring FC on the left side of the claw part A434a can be stabilized. .

Therefore, the electric wiring FC made of a flat cable can be maintained close enough to touch the guide plate part A434, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced to the front side of the guide plate part A434. However, when the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 338 is illustrated in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 includes a guided plate portion A441, which is a plate-shaped portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430, and a colored guided plate portion A441. (Gold plated in this embodiment) is formed from a light-opaque resin material, is pivotally supported by the guided plate part A441, and is displaced in conjunction with the guided plate part A441. The interlocking plate part A442, the rear cover part 443 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate part A442 and forms a gap between the interlocking plate part A442, and the rear cover part 443 is formed into a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material. A diffuser plate A444 is disposed opposite to the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and a diffuser plate A444 is disposed opposite to the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442 and has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the diffuser plate A444, and is disposed opposite to the rear lid portion 443. It mainly includes an illuminated board A445.

Here, the interlocking plate part A442, the rear cover part 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the illumination board A445 are fixed as a unit, so these will be explained first. That is, by inserting a plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the interlocking plate part A442 into a plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffusion plate A444, the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned with respect to each other, and the diffusion plate A444 The diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are positioned with respect to each other by inserting a plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the illumination board A445 into a plurality of insertion holes A445a of the illumination board A445.

Then, the fastening screws passing through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid part 443 are fastened and fixed to the plurality of threaded parts A442b of the interlocking plate part A442, thereby creating a diffusion plate between the interlocking plate part A442 and the rear lid part 443. A444 and the illumination board A445 are held in a manner that allows displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pins) to the extent that the positioning pins A442a and A444b do not fall off. Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting fastening screws into the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid part 443 come into contact with the illumination board A445 and press it against the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship where loads occur. This pressing force allows the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 to be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (shown as approximately square chip shapes in FIG. 337) with optical axes directed toward the diffuser plate A444 on the front side.

The diffuser plate A444 has a wave pattern formed from protrusions concentrically spread around an axis-corresponding position A444c arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed on the interlocking plate part. It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

A fitting part A444d is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A444 and projects toward the front side and has a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442.In the assembled state, the fitting part A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. It will be done.

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through the diffuser plate A444 and is emitted from the light emitting means A445b.

The illumination board A445 is provided with a connector A445c disposed on the back side and to which an electric wiring FC made of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442. Thereby, the curved position of the electric wiring FC can be configured on the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the curve can be made gentle.

The rear lid part 443 has a ventilation opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to a connector A445c and a circuit component (not shown, such as a capacitor or a resistor), and a ventilation opening 443c that is provided in a direction A416x with respect to the ventilation opening 416c. A through hole A443d formed therethrough is provided.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c will be placed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed to the back side of the rear lid part 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the illumination board A445 and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d, so that the electric wiring FC can be inserted between the connector A445c and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e It is possible to prevent the wiring FC from being displaced. Note that the through hole A443d also has the role of forming a space for arranging the electric wiring FC, and compared to the case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wiring FC It is possible to reduce the load applied to the

In addition, in this embodiment, the small diameter rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the illumination board A445 side similarly to the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the distance between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e and the illumination board A445 is narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid part 443 to the illumination board A445. In other words, only the protruding rib 443b and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the illumination board A445.

Thereby, even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from coming off from the connector A445c.

Next, the manner of connection between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and the details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 includes a support shaft portion A442d that projects with a circular outer shape, a supported shaft hole A442e that is a circular opening coaxial with the center axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and a center axis of the support shaft portion A442d. The roller member A442f is a resin member rotatably supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 about parallel axes and has a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in a circular shape from the upper end of the main body plate portion A441a, and A shaft support hole A441c is formed in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft part A441b and is bored at the lower end of the main body plate part A441a, and a long straight line extends from the front side of the main body plate part A441a to the front side. A plurality of protruding guide protrusions A441d, a plurality of displacement stopper protrusions A441e protruding toward the front side in an elongated shape extending in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the guide protrusions A441d, An inclined surface A441f that slopes outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position facing the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, and a direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as small diameter grooves along the direction A441h and a recessed part A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate part A441a are fastened to the back side of the main body plate part A441a. A fastening portion A441i that protrudes in a manner in which a screw can be fastened is provided.

The support shaft portion A441b and the supported shaft hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for how to assemble it, after arranging the interlocking plate part A442 so that the pivoted support hole A442e of the interlocking plate part A442 is arranged in the shape of an axis of the support shaft part A441b, the interlocking plate part A442 is fitted along the axis. By moving it relative to the guide plate part A441, the support shaft part A441b can be inserted into the supported hole A442e, and the support shaft part A442d can be inserted into the supported hole A441c, thereby forming a supported state. Note that the supported support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, as well as the supported support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d, are configured with dimensions that allow a slight gap to be formed between them so as to be rotatable.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the interlocking plate part A442 and the guided plate part A441 are configured to be pivoted in the above-described manner, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b, and the screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b. By configuring the diameter of the head portion to be larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off from the guided plate portion A441.

The guide protrusion portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the area of contact with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement stopping protrusion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters into the elongated recess A432 when the first operating unit A400 is assembled (see FIG. 324). Formed with a protruding length.

The formation position of the displacement stop protrusion A441e is designed so that when the guided plate part A441 is placed at the end of displacement, the displacement stop protrusion A441e is placed at the end of the elongated recess A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate part A441 does not stop normally at the end of displacement, the displacement of the guided plate part A441 is regulated by locking the displacement stopping protrusion A441e with the elongated recess A432. be able to.

The inclined surface A441f is a flat surface for receiving and guiding the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the illumination board A445. By forming it at an angle, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. Note that the manner in which the electric wiring FC made of a flat cable is bent will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide protrusion A424 of the support plate part A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424, and has a cross-sectional half-shaped groove from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It has an overhang that extends in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the projecting portions is slightly longer than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A424 can be reduced while suppressing the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends from being deviated from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion provided in order to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the right-hand insertion hole A431a of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, in this embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 is configured to be disposed on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), and is connected to the displacement side elongated hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, by transmitting the driving force to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The slide link A450 includes a long link A451 that is rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420, and an irregularly shaped slide member that is connected to the long link A451 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x. A455.

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and includes a shaft support hole A452 bored with a diameter that allows the shaft support A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a shaft support hole A452 on the long side with respect to the shaft support hole A452. A displacement-side elongated hole A453 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at an end, and a elongated hole-like shape along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side where the displacement-side elongated hole A453 is provided. A transmission-side elongated hole A454 is provided.

The irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed in a concave portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 that is recessed toward the front side of the proximal end surface from which the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420 is protruded, and is connected to the main body plate portion A421 and the elongated link A451. a plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a, and a transmission protrusion portion A455b which is provided in a circular shape and protrudes toward the back side of the main body plate portion A455a and is inserted into the transmission side elongated hole A454 of the long link A451. , a plurality of guided protrusions A455c that protrude in a circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and are inserted into the second guide hole A422b of the support plate portion A420; A spring hanging part A455d that protrudes in a hook shape and is inserted into a hole A423 of the support plate part A420, and the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked) thereon, and is thin enough to enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426. The detection target plate portion A455e is formed in a plate shape, and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 to which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460 is provided.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears that are rotatably supported by the support box part A470, one of which is meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and a pair of transmission gears A461 with which the other gear meshes with the drive gear AMG1. On the other hand, it includes a pin gear A462 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 on the opposite side, and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pin gear A462 in phase.

The pin-equipped gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A463 that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in a circular outer shape, and an arc-shaped transmission protrusion A463 that is centered around the rotation axis of the pin-equipped gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end. It includes an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as a wall portion.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and its growth toward the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, although both the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are portions that similarly transmit load to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456, the locations where the load is generated are different in the front-rear direction. In other words, the location where the load is generated via the transmission protrusion A463 (if the load occurs at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the location where the load is generated via the arcuate wall portion A464. becomes. With the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be explained, so the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be explained below.

339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 339(a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339(b), the illustration of the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC is omitted, and the gear with a pin is shown. Regarding A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are illustrated, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless specifically explained. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c) illustrate a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the retracted position before excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed furthest outward (to the left) and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is made the shortest, so the biasing force is applied from the coil spring ASP1 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pin gear A462, and is located on the extended position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463 from the main body plate portion A455a to the rear surface. A protruding plate portion A456a that protrudes to the side in a plate shape and is arranged opposite to the protruding plate portion A456a with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a. and an insertion gap A456c formed between the protruding plate portion A456a and the opposing placement portion A456b.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the facing portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see Fig. 324), the protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than that of the opposing portion A456b. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b is able to abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction, but does not abut (does not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A464 in the moving direction. That is, the facing portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and a relief part A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed on the open end side. This relief portion A456d allows the transmission protrusion A463 to move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c smoothly (with low resistance).

Although the illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), in the actual assembled state (see FIG. 324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are connected to the drive gear AMG1 and the pin gear A462. and transmits the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 to the pin gear A462.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A440 guided to the first guide hole A422a and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 guided to the second guide hole A422b are connected by a long link A451. . That is, the first displacement member A440 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are respectively displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 which is rotationally displaced around the shaft support A427.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e has entered the detection gap of the detection sensor A426.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 includes a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. Since the arrangement of A442f is restricted between the guide wall part A471b of the support box part A470 and the guide part A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate part A442 moves into the supported hole as the guided plate part A441 slides. It is configured to rotate from A442e as a starting point. An action diagram for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be described.

340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

340(a) to FIG. 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the roller member A442f is at the same position as seen in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339(c), and the guide wall of the support box portion A470 The state in which it is in contact with the bent corner of A471b is illustrated.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 340, it has rotated by the first angle d1 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 340(b)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is tilted by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (by 10 degrees in the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the pin gear A462). It may also be formed as a straight line (tilted). In this case, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the protruding plate part A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive drive resistance is prevented from occurring immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

That is, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate part A456a can be pushed forward vigorously after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0, so that the driving resistance can be reduced. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a 10 degree section can be used as a deceleration section.

341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

341(a) to 341(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 341, it has rotated by the second angle d2 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 341(b)).

342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

342(a) to 342(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 342, it has rotated by the third angle d3 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 342(b)).

Note that in this embodiment, in a state in which the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (A direction parallel to the direction A416x) is configured to be substantially orthogonal, so that the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side elongated hole A453 to the fastening part A441i is set to one side (in this embodiment, the lower side) with respect to the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 It is possible to suppress the rattling of the slide displacement.

343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

343(a) to FIG. 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f changes from the state of FIG. 342(c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 344(c)). ) is shown in a state in which it is disposed approximately at an intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 343, it has rotated by the fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 343(b)).

344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is placed in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state).

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 344, it has rotated by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 344(b)).

When the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction to the direction A416x. Here, since the circular arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimension relationship in which they abut in the direction A416x, even after the transmission protrusion portion A463 is separated from the protruding plate portion A456a, the circular arc wall portion A464 Displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is regulated in a state where it is in contact with the protruding plate portion A456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A456a to the arcuate wall part A464 passes through the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462, the gear with pin A462 can be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A456a. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be regulated with only the driving force required to rotate the gear with pin A462.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a increases over time. It is thought that the frictional force generated will increase. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, so that the transmission This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the state of contact with the protrusion A463 to the state of contact with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456.

By the time the pin-equipped gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 345, the pin-equipped gear A462 has rotated by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) from the initial angle d0 (see FIG. 360). After the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate part A456a and is displaced without contacting other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is regulated from displacement by coming into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464, and is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 344(b) (displacement in the return direction is regulated). ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission target portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission receiving part A456 is a position on the extended position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) is different from the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345. This prevents the shape of the insertion gap A456c from changing even if the pin gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and overloads the transmission protrusion A463 or the irregularly shaped transmission part A456. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 will be affected after an overload occurs.

In the state shown in FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction). Since the odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 due to the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 is avoided.

In this way, the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 can be alleviated by elastic deformation (bending and expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement part A456b while avoiding displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455.

As shown in FIG. 345, the location where the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact is the side wall of the facing arrangement part A456b on the detection plate part A455e side, and the transmission protrusion A463 applies a load to the detection plate part A455e by contacting it. ing. In this embodiment, when an overload occurs on the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to overrotation of the pin gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to break preferentially. In other words, the detected plate portion A455e is more fragile than the transmission protrusion A463.

This makes it possible to avoid destruction of the structure of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 that is related to the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 due to the load caused by overrotation of the pin gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be improved.

If the detected plate part A455e breaks, the detected plate part A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. , it is possible to assume the possibility that over-rotation of the pin gear A462 has occurred, and timely maintenance can be performed.

Note that the design aspect of the detection target plate portion A455e is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, for each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be energized until a slight load is applied, causing fatigue damage due to long-term use. The detection plate portion A455e may be designed to break when a load is accumulated for the same number of contact times as the number of durable operations of a portion where this is likely to occur (for example, the transmission protrusion A463). In this case, in addition to being able to predict the possibility of over-rotation of the gear with pin A462, it is also possible to notify when it is time to replace the transmission protrusion A463, so that maintenance can be performed in a timely manner.

FIG. 346(a) is a sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is a sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a). It is a sectional view of unit A400. 346(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in a retracted position (also referred to as a retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state). ) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), an electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate part A441 and the rear cover part 443.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to come into contact with the electric wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is located at a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440) (drawn toward the side away from the first displacement member A440). It is possible to ensure a distance between the inclined surface A441f and the electric wiring FC.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490, while when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, the electric wiring FC is placed into the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490. Ru. Thereby, the space VE to be described later can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electrical wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means for blocking the view to the electrical wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from being visually recognized when viewed from the front, back, right, and left. Space VE will be explained.

The space VE is in an inclined posture in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, with the side surface visible to the player (the surface where the opening A442c on the interlocking plate part A442 side is formed) facing the third symbol display device 81 side. This is the space behind the building that is created in conjunction with the structure. In this way, the space VE is configured such that the first displacement member A440 is formed into a plate shape, and the first displacement member A440 has an inclined posture that is easy to see to the player in the retracted state where the first displacement member A440 has a wide posture in the front and back direction. It is easily formed by

On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters by displacement, so if the visibility of the second displacement member A490 is considered, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view when viewed from the front. Since the field of view when viewed from the front expands at an angle centering on the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer contour of the space VE be formed so as to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacturing, the outer contour of the space VE (boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed as a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created to improve the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region where the wiring is loosened and arranged. As a result, when the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is placed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the area required for loosening the wiring (in other words, , the area between the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 and the first displacement member A440) can be made unnecessary.

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the electrical wiring FC is placed inward of the rear case A310. While being accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (close to) the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 has the front side of the interlocking plate portion A442 located on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)). In the displacement process up to (see), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly the side portion at the protruding position) protrudes further to the front side than the front limit line FL. This overhang means that during the process of the first displacement member A440 being displaced from the retracted position, the attitude change of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 339(c)). 342(c)), the first displacement member A440 may extend beyond the front limit line FL to the front side, especially on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (left side in FIG. 346).

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440, so the arrangement of the illumination board A416 is made further away from the first displacement member A440 (front side However, in this embodiment, by not forming the illumination board A416 on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (on the left side in FIG. 346), a space for the first displacement member A440 to protrude is created. is formed. In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416 is visually recognized is the area on the illumination board A416. This avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 so as to protrude from the outer edge of the illumination board A416, the distance between the front and back of the arrangement of the illumination board A416 and the first displacement member A440 can be reduced. Although it is narrowed, it is possible to secure a sufficient range in which the light emitting effect by the illumination board A416 can be visually recognized.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operating unit A400 that occur due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effects. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when it is placed in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

347(a), FIG. 347(b), and FIG. 348 are front views of the first operating unit A400. FIG. 347(a) shows a retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 347(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed in the middle of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342). The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the extended state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 347(b) and 348, the shape of the portion of the first displacement member A440 that is hidden by the front cover A410 is illustrated with hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 is disposed on the back side of the front cover A410 to diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416. and a second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is disposed on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 at least in the extended position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffuser plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first area AC1 in front view, since the illumination board A416 is disposed in the first area AC1, The light is blocked by the illumination board A416.

Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffuser plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the illumination board A416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (See FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state with the light irradiated from.

To explain in detail, the modes of the second area AC2 include a mode in which the light emitting device A416a is turned on and a mode in which the light emitting device A445b is turned off, a mode in which the light emitting device A416a is turned off and a mode in which the light emitting device A445b is turned on, and a mode in which the light emitting device A416a and the light emitting device are turned on. The light emitting device A445b is configured to be switchable in at least four modes: a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned on, and a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is made visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 has an edge on the third symbol display device 81 side of the front cover A410 as the through hole A412. A plurality of elongated holes A412a are formed at three locations in a straight line along the section.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged outside the opening A442c. (Do not place them facing each other). Thereby, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be made higher when it is visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a than when it is visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a on both sides.

For example, when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is made visible through the central elongated hole A412a, but is not visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b is visible in a mixed state through the central elongated hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a is visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the mode (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the light emission mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) while the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 is off. . Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 348), as long as the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect on the light emitting performance by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the aspect of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state where it is placed at the overhanging position 440, the elongated hole A412a, which is commonly formed in each of the first operation units A400 at a position closer to the third symbol display device 81, is illuminated. Since the light emission mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

Note that the effect of changing the aspect visually recognized through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, with the first displacement members A440 of the first movement units A400 disposed in a set of five units placed in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is turned on, and at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off. The light emitting means A445b of the displacement member A440 may be turned on in order to emit light in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In this case, by leaving the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained while only the mode of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a is changed sequentially in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. can be executed.

Here, the light emission mode of the other first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be explained. The first operating unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the lower left in front view, the first operating unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left in front view, and the first operating unit A400C is , is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front, and the first operating unit A400D is the fifth unit from the lower left when viewed from the front clockwise. The main differences between the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operating unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the openings corresponding to the openings A442c of the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are illustrated as openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first operating unit A400 for convenience. Attach the sign.

FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400A. Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400A is configured such that the opening WA overlaps the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (it is longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the extended position, the width of the opening WA and both ends change. The area overlapping with the elongated hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a can be changed in conjunction with each other.

FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400B. Note that FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows a state where the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400B is configured such that the opening WB may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WB is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the area where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WB overlap is set to the maximum in the state shown in FIG. 350(a), and the first displacement member It can be configured so that it decreases at one end as A440 is displaced, and then increases again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a can be changed in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction).

FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400C. Note that FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400C is configured such that the opening WC may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WC is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is tapered and widened in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a and the opening WC overlap is temporarily decreased and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It can be configured as follows. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a at both ends can be changed in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction).

352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400D. Note that FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operating unit A400D, unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WD has a branching shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD has a shape that branches near the lower end in such a manner that it widens toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440.

Thereby, the range where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position can be divided. In other words, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from a mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), to a state in which the central long hole A412a divides the light into a plurality of ranges. It is possible to change the mode to emit light (see FIG. 352(b)).

Note that in the first operation unit A400D, a case has been described in which the central elongated hole A412a is divided by the edge of the opening WD, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the entire three elongated holes A412a are targeted and the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided. That is, when the three elongated holes A412a and the opening WD overlap so that uniform light can be seen through the three elongated holes A412a, and when the opening WD overlaps with the central elongated hole A412a of the three elongated holes A412a. By not overlapping with the long holes A412a at both ends but only with the long holes A412a at both ends, the range in which the light can be seen is divided into the central long hole A412a and is configured to be switchable between cases where it is limited to the long holes A412a on both sides. Also good.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The support box portion A470 includes a main body box portion A471 formed in a box shape with an open front and upper right side, and a shaft hole bored in the main body box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472, a shaft support hole A473 drilled to be able to pivotally support the second displacement member A490, a notch A474 formed in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and the notch. A fastening part A475 that is protruded in a columnar shape near the notch part A474 and has a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate part A480 can be screwed therein, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. The pinion supporting section A477 supports a pinion A517 that meshes with a slide rack A511 supported by the rack supporting section A476.

The main body box part A471 has a protruding wall part A471a that protrudes like a wall from the back bottom edge to the back side, and a protruding wall part A471a that protrudes like a wall from the front upper edge to the front side. The guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f in the state (see FIG. 324), and the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the protruding wall portion A471a on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 in between. A wiring guide part A471c is provided.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f comes into contact with the edge of the guide wall portion A471b, and the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in a sliding or rolling manner (Fig. 339 (See Figure 344).

The shape of the wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, can be appropriately corrected, and the details will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, but the details will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions that protrude toward the back side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510, and a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and extending toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Be prepared.

The pinion support part A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate-like) wall-like (plate 477b.

The pin-equipped gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the same-phase member A465 are connected through the shaft hole A472. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the manner in which the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are connected will be described.

FIG. 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465, and FIG. 353(b) is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 on the left side, and the right side is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465. It is a rear perspective view of gear A462 with a pin and phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are shown in a posture in which the sides connected to each other are in the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pin-equipped gear A462 has a plurality of phasing circumferential protrusions A462a that protrude toward the same-phase member A465 from the side facing the same-phase member A465. Be prepared.

The in-phase member A465 has a phase matching diameter protrusion A465a that protrudes from the surface facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and a phasing diameter protrusion A465a that extends from the eccentric position toward the rear side in a circular shape. It includes a protruding transmission protrusion A466, and an arcuate wall part A467 formed as an arcuate wall part with the transmission protrusion A466 as the base end and the axis of rotation of the in-phase member A465 as the center. Compared to the transmission protrusion A466, the arcuate wall portion A467 has a shorter shape growth toward the back side.

The phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be explained. The phase-aligning circumferential protrusion A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by cutting along the axial direction in a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

Further, the phasing radial protrusion A465a is provided with a protrusion that protrudes radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, and the protrusion is It is formed to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By inserting the protrusion into the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected while the same-phase member A465 is in phase with the pin-equipped gear A462, The pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting a fastening gear along the central axis of the pin gear A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a.

Here, in this embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a are not made equal (120 degree intervals in the case of three divisions as in this embodiment), but are made uneven. The pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 are configured to be connected only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b)).

That is, by combining the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a at 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them unequal), the angle at which the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected is determined. Relationships can be limited to one type.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the notch (phase matching diameter protrusion A465a) of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a is formed in three places is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number may be one or two locations, or a plurality of four or more locations, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The rear plate part A480 includes a main body plate part A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening part that is bored in the main body plate part A481 and screwed into a fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer periphery of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for positioning by coming into contact with the outer periphery. and a plurality of protruding plate parts A484 that protrude from the main body plate part A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape that follows the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in plane contact with the rear side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and the protrusion is used for positioning in the left-right direction. Only the mounting plate part A484 functions.

On the other hand, at the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336), the alignment protrusion A483 and the arcuate wall portion A477b abut against each other in multiple directions (up, down, left and right directions). can be aligned. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a large space can be secured near the outer edge by eliminating the positioning portion from near the outer edge. In this embodiment, this secured space is utilized as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), but the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 has its protruding tip disposed close to and facing the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents the wiring from passing through), and the rack pinion A510 The movement range of the slide rack A511 and the outer area are divided. This can prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, but details will be described later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 includes a supported plate A491 formed of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and supported in a supported hole A473 of the support box part A470, and A cover made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, which is formed to have the same internal shape as the external shape of the supported plate A491, is fitted to the supported plate A491 from the front side, and covers the supported plate A491 from the front side. It includes an installation member A492, and an illumination board A493 on which a light emitting part A493a composed of an LED or the like is arranged and accommodated in a pivoted support plate A491 and a covering member A492.

The supported support plate A491 includes a supported protrusion A491a that has a circular outer shape and is inserted into the support hole A473, and a protruding length that is shorter than that of the supported protrusion A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c drilled through which fastening screws can be inserted, and an elongated hole A491d drilled in an elongated rectangular shape along the radial direction of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a. , a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on the insertion hole A491c, and a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side in a slender projecting shape along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. A plurality of narrow protrusions A491f are provided.

When the second displacement member A490 is assembled (see FIGS. 335 and 336), the circular support portion A491e and the narrow protrusion A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A493, and push the illumination board A493 toward the back side. Support from.

In particular, the narrow protrusion A491f is formed at a location where the shape of the housed illumination board A493 is constricted, that is, at a location where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted support plate A491 is recessed inward. It is possible to selectively support the portion where the shape of A493 is constricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress deformation of the illumination board A493 at the constricted portion where the rigidity is likely to decrease due to the shortening of the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the illumination board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported part A493b of the illumination board A493, and includes a plurality of fastening parts A492a into which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes A491c are screwed, and a radial direction on the base side of the fastening parts A492a. A plurality of protruding support portions A492b protruding from and coupled to the plate-shaped portion of the covering member A492, and a thin protrusion A491f of the pivoted support plate A491 are attached to the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. It is provided with a plurality of narrow protrusions A492c projecting toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape.

With the above configuration, the illumination board A493 has its outer peripheral edge supported by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported around the fastening screw by the circular support part A491e and the protruding support part A492b. Thereby, the illumination board A493 can be well fixed to the shaft supported plate A491 and the covering member A492.

Note that the manner in which the illumination board A493 is supported is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed by applying a load to the illumination board A493 along the fastening direction, or there may be a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load (for example, the front and rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c may be fixed to the illumination board A493). It may also be possible to maintain the arrangement of the illumination board A493 without creating a load by forming it with the same dimensional relationship as the thickness of the A493.

The illumination board A493 has a plurality of light emitting parts A493a described above, a plurality of supported parts A493b which are bored or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening part A492a in front and rear view, and are arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which the end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board side connector A493 is fixed in such a position that the wiring extends along the long direction of the elongated hole A491d of the shafted support plate A491. A section extension part A491d1 that extends in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extension part A491d1. A wide protrusion portion A491d2 is formed that protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side with reference to the protrusion portion A491d2.

Based on the section extension part A491d1, a board-side connector A493c is arranged on the visible area side of the third symbol display device 81 (left side in FIG. 355), and on the opposite side, a long wiring is connected to the board-side connector A493c. Passes through hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the section extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493.

Thereby, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring between the board side connector A493c and the compartment extension part A491d1, so that when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the wiring on the circuit board side It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to stand up toward the back side of the shaft-supported plate A491 (in the direction in which the protrusion portion A491d2 is provided). The wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch A474, compared to the case where the wiring HC is arranged close to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the protruding portion A491d2 protrudes at right angles to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, thereby avoiding contact with the wiring HC. The width of the notch A474 can be suppressed. As a result, a large area (area) of the main body box part A471 on the fastening part A475 side can be secured, so that the rigidity of the main body box part A471 can be ensured, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the fastening part A475 can be improved. be able to.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The rack pinion A510 is meshed with a slide rack A511 that is supported so as to be slidable along the direction A416x, and a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is pivotally supported by a pinion shaft A477a of a support box portion A470. The pinion A517 rotates in synchronization with the sliding movement of the pinion A517, and the reinforcing arm part A518 meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, so that the second displacement member A490 is irremovably supported by the support box portion A470. That is, the reinforcing arm A518 is fastened to the pivoted protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotational center position, and is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the side of the rotational tip of the reinforcing arm A518 (see FIG. 355). . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the direction A416x and large enough to allow the support columnar part A476a of the support box part A470 to be inserted therethrough, and a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of a plate along the gear part. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 that protrudes in a plate shape toward the front side at a position apart from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction; It includes an irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 to which the driving force is transmitted from the member A465.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small diameter end portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed to have a larger diameter than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, that displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, in the slide rack A511, the plate-like parts are arranged opposite to the back bottom part of the main body box part A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large diameter part of the support columnar part A476a. It is configured to be able to slide along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap therebetween, and the protruding plate portion A514 is placed opposite to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a slight gap. They are placed facing each other with a gap between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent this displacement from occurring.

Note that there are various reasons why the slide rack A511 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Examples include a case where a player applies an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called knock), a case where a gap is clogged with fine particles, and the meshing resistance becomes excessive, causing an excessive load at the meshing position. Ru.

356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. Note that in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted for ease of understanding, and the irregularly shaped cover is The plate portion of the slide rack A511 is shown broken so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged for easy understanding.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 358) is illustrated in chronological order.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. In this way, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pin gear A462, as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, The pin gear A462 will rotate, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the same-phase member A465, and the transmission protrusion A466 can enter into the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 so that it can move independently (applying a load to the slide rack A511). A non-transmission recess A515a that is recessed in the non-transmission recess A515a and a connection recess A515b having the same depth that is connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a. There is an insertion gap A515c which is a recess of the same depth connected to the connection recess A515b on the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a front side from the slide rack A511 on the retracted position (lower left) side than the transmission protrusion A466. A protruding plate portion A515d that protrudes to the side in a plate shape and constitutes the left side of the insertion gap A515c, and an interval larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466 at the protruding position (upper right) side of the protruding plate portion A515d. A facing portion A515e is provided, which is spaced apart from the protruding plate portion A515d and forms the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the facing portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than that of the opposing portion A515e. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e is able to abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the moving direction, but does not abut (does not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A467 in the moving direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The side surfaces of the protruding plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connection recess A515b has the same function as the relief part A456d of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. Thereby, the transmission protrusion A466 can be smoothly moved forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A515c (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465 is similar to the gear with pin A462 and is connected to the drive motor. The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by drive gear AMG1 and a pair of transmission gears A461, thereby rotating (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, a displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited, the drive gear AMG1 rotates, and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356(a), the drive gear AMG1 is in a state before it rotates, and the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side, and the second displacement member A490 is accordingly placed at the retracted position. The state in which the image is displayed is illustrated.

In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is not in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x), while the arcuate wall part A467 is in contact with the protruding plate part A515d. At A467a, it comes into contact with the protruding plate part A515d from the upper right (extended position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As a result, the displacement of the protruding plate part A515d can be restricted by the arcuate wall part A467, so that the slide rack A511 may be unintentionally displaced by an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state. This can be prevented.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A515d to the arcuate wall part A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, the in-phase member A465 cannot be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the in-phase member A465.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d increases over time. It is thought that the frictional force generated will increase. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by vibration during an earthquake, and a force caused when a player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the coupling recess A515b. By the time the in-phase member A465 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. There is no contact with the portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the projecting plate portion A515d from the upper right (projection position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x) at the contact portion A467a. As shown in FIGS. 356(a) and 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is in the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). There is no displacement. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 356(b), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side, similar to the state shown in FIG. 356(a).

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the insertion gap A515c. By the time it is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 357(a), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protruding plate part A515d. come into contact with

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the part of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate part A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357(a), The restriction by the phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced toward the extended position (upper right side).

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has entered the insertion gap A515c. The in-phase member A465 rotates by the third angle d13 from the initial angle d10 until it is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 357(b). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, thereby slidingly displacing the slide rack A511, and the sliding displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 is extended. The state in which it is placed in the extended position is illustrated.

Before being displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by a fourth angle d14 (rotates one or more revolutions). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, thereby slidingly displacing the slide rack A511, and the sliding displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the part of the transmission protrusion A466 that is farthest from the center of rotation of the same-phase member A465 comes into contact with the opposing arrangement part A515e, so when the same-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 358, the slide rack There is a possibility that A511 may be displaced toward the retracted position (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, in a state where the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, the angle d14 (see FIG. 358) is The configuration is such that rotation of the in-phase member A465 is allowed up to the angle dd1.

That is, since the configuration is such that the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion plate part A515d come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion do not contact each other until the rotation by the allowable angle dd1. Since the installation plate portion A515d is not in contact with the slide rack A515d and no load is transmitted, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the moving range on the extended position side.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control to stop the rotation of the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14, when the in-phase member A465 actually rotates beyond the fourth angle d14; Even if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. can.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not exact (even if there is an error of less than the allowable angle dd1), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. With a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the in-phase member A465 and achieve highly accurate displacement of the second displacement member A490 (the second displacement can be achieved without rapidly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465). member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position).

In addition, by deliberately causing a rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, the excess amount is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the phase member A465 is arranged at the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement part A515e are aligned in the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). By making contact in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be defined in the state shown in FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented), so that the reinforcing arm A518 meshed with the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A518 are fastened and fixed. The second displacement member A490 can be prevented from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 is a sectional view of the rear unit BU taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). In addition, in FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the positioning protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. 359. Note that in the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate. The wiring HC is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables with a round cross section connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. will be placed in

As shown in FIG. 359, the part of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493, and runs along the protrusion part A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, since the protrusion portion A491d2 is formed with a protrusion length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided away from the notch portion A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the wiring HC due to rubbing against the notch A474.

On the other hand, since the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2, it will be guided close to the rear plate part A480, and if no measures are taken, there is a risk that the wiring HC will rub against the rear plate part A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC is suitably inserted between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, thereby suppressing the friction between the wire and the rear plate portion A480. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. To be more specific, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the illumination board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around a winding part A471a1 that is formed so that a cable tie KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the protruding wall part A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening part A475 once, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475 so that even in the slack state (see FIG. 356(a)), the wiring HC is separated from the fastening part A475 in the upper direction (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound with the binding band KB extends). The amount of displacement can be suppressed. Thereby, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is used as the portion around which the wiring HC is wound, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate part A480 to the support box part A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening part A475 through the rear plate part A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is being screwed in.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side where the fastening part A475 protrudes) is facing upward, and after wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475, the rear plate part A480 is attached to the support box part A470. By placing the HC and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening part A475, assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from hanging in the direction of gravity in the main body box part A471, so the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening part A475 is designed to be forced to be assembled in a downward position, it is easier to assemble the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480 by wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475. It can be done.

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the binding band KB is guided (pushed) toward the rear plate portion A480 side. Thereby, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate part A480 at the upper part of the fastening part A475 which is closest to the fastening part A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that no tensile load is applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wiring HC intersects with each other. At this position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that it slides between the already placed wiring HC and the support box part A470.

As a result, a state can be created in which the intermediate portion HCa contacts the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side from the rear plate portion A480 side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate by the protrusion portion A491d2. The degree of proximity to the portion A480 side can be suppressed.

The manner in which the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described. The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box part A470 or the rear plate part A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the entire length of the wiring HC between the cable tie KB and the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 is used to generate a displacement (bending) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) caused by this can be made uniform, it is possible to avoid a large local load on the wiring HC.

The board-side connector A493c is at the retracted position compared to the supported protrusion 491a that functions as the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the extended position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the retracted position, the substrate side is located inside the support plate portion 420 (see FIG. 346(a), right side) that blocks the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490. A connector A493 is provided.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outside the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. In other words, by arranging the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the extended position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring can be maintained while ensuring a large amount of overhang of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to prevent the HC from being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported protrusion A491a. When the board-side connector A493c is placed on one side (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)) with respect to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c between the outward and return trips of the second displacement member A490. This makes it possible to suppress variations in the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, the displacement of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. Therefore, the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and rotated approximately 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c extends is approximately parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is set at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (the amount of deflection) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

To explain the local displacement of the wiring HC in comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the part that was in contact with the upper part of the fastening part A475 and the part that was placed below the fastening part A475 are It is rising slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of penetrating the wires HC cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wiring HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the extended position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load to maintain the posture along the left-right direction is generated, compared to the case where the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357(a)). Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protruding portion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa is not inserted between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment, only when there is a possibility that excessive frictional force will be generated between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the rear plate part A480 and the board side connector A493c, the intermediate part HCa is inserted between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c. The wiring HC is inserted into the rear plate portion A480 so as to have the effect of separating the wiring HC from the rear plate portion A480.

On the other hand, if the possibility of excessive frictional force occurring is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b), by eliminating the front and back overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c, It is possible to prevent unnecessary resistance from occurring in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the extended state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357(b), the local displacement of the wiring HC is as follows: The part has gone down a little, and the part that was located below the fastening part A475 has gone up a little. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is such that it approaches the straight line side connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the extended position (that is, rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide part A471c, thereby changing its position. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed with one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

Specifically, in the extended state of the second displacement member A490, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and touching the lower end of the wiring guide part A471c connects the fastening part A475, which is the path of the wiring HC, and the protruding wall part A471a. It is configured to pass between. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 based on the initial angles d0 and d10. Note that in the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is continuously displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5, and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5. While stopping from d10 to the second angle d12, the displacement continues from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440, and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are determined. An angular range in which no driving force is generated is inserted between the rotation angle range of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 for generating the driving force. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner in which the angle range is set is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, at the same time as the first displacement member A440 is switched from a state in which it continues to be displaced to a stopped state, the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from its stopped state. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the timing of simultaneously displacing the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 does not occur, a single drive motor AMT1 can displace a plurality of members (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490), the load applied to the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load applied from a single member can be kept).

Further, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced, a section in which it is necessary to generate the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is defined. The angle can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, since the member that is displaced is switched at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, the pin-equipped gear A462 By reversing and rotating the same phase member A465, one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490) is stopped while the other member (second displacement member A490 or first displacement member A490) is stopped. A440) can be operated in reverse.

Note that, as described above, the configuration is such that there is no need to add a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the abutting position for regulating the displacement of one member, the members abut (rub) in line contact with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small-sized drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

In addition, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. It is also possible to drive in this manner.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the rotation is mechanically restricted when the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 rotate through the sixth angle d6, before they rotate by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). . Therefore, since it does not rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, even if the second displacement member A490 has a configuration (control mode) in which the accuracy of stopping the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low and is likely to over-rotate. can be maintained in the extended position (see Figure 358).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, while allowing the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 to rotate by the allowable angle dd1 beyond the fourth angle d14, they continue to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 and reach the sixth angle d6. When it reaches, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be immediately stopped by mechanical regulation.

This ensures that the second displacement means A490 does not reach the extended position by controlling the stop at an angle (tolerable amount) that slightly exceeds the fourth angle d14 (tolerable amount) for the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being accidentally stopped when the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 becomes large unintentionally. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

Since the arc wall portion A464 is formed with a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position where the first displacement member A440 is restricted (the position of the fifth angle d5) Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where it abuts the first displacement member A440), it is possible to maintain displacement regulation of the first displacement member A440 at the extended position.

Note that the state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to a state in which the detected plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. There is little possibility that the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 will become large unintentionally near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arcuate wall portion A467 has an angle smaller than that of the arcuate wall portion A464 (this embodiment In this case, it is formed at an angle of about 210 degrees). Thereby, the cost of materials necessary for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81, and is located below the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. will be placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operating unit A700 includes an elevating unit A701 that is held by a rectangular plate-like member that is elongated on the left and right sides, and includes an elevating portion A702 configured to be able to move up and down; It is provided with a production unit A710 which can be displaced between a retracted position and an extended position by the raising and lowering operation of A702, and is configured to be operable (capable of production) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports an elongated elevating portion A702 on the left and right sides, and includes a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported around the left and right end portions, and a pair of arm members A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit driving force to the drive motor A704.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, gear teeth are formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotating shaft side, and the gear teeth are fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. A gear transmission mechanism in which gears mesh with each other is exemplified.

In addition, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided that protrudes in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted into the long hole is eccentric, and gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery. A gear link transmission mechanism may also be used in which gear teeth of the body mesh with a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the rotational outer diameter direction end of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to the fact that the shape of the back side of the game board A13, which is disposed opposite to the front side of the second operating unit A700, is left-right asymmetric (see FIG. 306), the drive motor A704 is arranged horizontally. It is considered asymmetrical. That is, by inserting the drive motor A704 into a gap (space) on the back side of the game board A13, the front-back width required for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operating unit A700 is suppressed.

In this way, since it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 to match the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferable.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that demarcates the production range of the production unit A710, a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 arranged below the annular front cover A711 and fastened and fixed to an upper lid part A740 to be described later, In addition, a skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is disposed under the cover A712 and overlapped with the rear side and is fastened and fixed to the elevating part of the elevating unit A701, is shown disassembled and separated to the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed into an annular shape that is substantially the same as the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid part A740, A rotating body A720 is shown rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front, and is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. It is possible to receive light emitted from light emitting means A715a such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of illumination boards A715. Three light emitting units A715a are arranged on each side of the pentagon formed by the illumination board A715 at equal intervals in the side direction.

In addition, in this embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of three LEDs arranged on each side of a pentagon at equal intervals in the side direction, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting unit A715b causes the annular front cover A711 to emit light by irradiating light onto the back side of the annular front cover A711. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, each of the five flat illumination substrates A715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, and the illumination substrate A715 above the rotary body A720 is in a horizontal position, and the illumination substrates on the lower left and right sides The light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the lower end of the illumination board A715 faces the rotation axis, and its optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each illumination board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer part of the rotating body A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotating body A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body A720, so it is possible to perform a dazzling performance. .

In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the rotating body A720 to reflect light, the outer surface of the rotating body A720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, etc.). The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and various other aspects may be used. For example, a reflective colored tape may be attached.

As described above, since the rotating body A720 rotates around the rotating axis that extends in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotating axis is transmitted along the rotating axis of the rotating body A720, regardless of whether or not the rotating body A720 rotates. The same area of the body is irradiated. In this embodiment, the upper part of the rotating body A720 is opened by forming a light passing recess A722a at that location so that light can pass therethrough, but the details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have concave portions A711a and A714a, which constitute a window through which light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes, on opposing edges, and a recessed portion A714a for enclosing the rotation axis of the rotating body A720. It includes semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b that are recessed to have a semicircular cross section.

The inner circumferential surface of the ring, excluding the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a, and the other outer surfaces are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714, so that the light emitted from the same light emitting means A715a can be It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a while performing a dazzling performance.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can be done. In this embodiment, the shape of the window formed by the concave portions A711a and A714a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a, so that the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reduced. It is possible to secure a wide area for reflecting light without damaging it.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712, and lower cover A713 of the production unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members each supported by a plurality of supporting parts A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and includes a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotating member A721, and a second rotating member configured to be rotatable on the outside of the first rotating body 721 and made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material and composed of a pair of members. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and has a pair of shell parts A722 which are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 at the lower part. and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recess formed on the back side of the front shell part A722, and has gear teeth carved on the back side. , is disposed on the back side of the annular gear member A723, is rotatably supported between the pair of shell parts A722, and the gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft part are in contact with the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 that is fitted together.

The pair of shell portions A722 are provided with light passage recesses A722a recessed in the direction away from each other in their upper portions. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passing recess A722a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side than the concave end of the light passing recess A722a. It is arranged in such a manner that

That is, even if you look into the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a when viewed from above, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible when viewed in that direction, so the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723 can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A723 can avoid blocking the light, and the light is directed to the central rotating member A724. can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, illustration of the shell part A722 on the back side is omitted, and for convenience of explanation, the fixed gear SG disposed non-rotatably above the support part A730 is an annular gear. It is shown in mesh with member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be explained. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 disposed inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG changes. Displacement (tooth alignment changes).

In this embodiment, the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, so that relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is ensured by rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotating member A724 meshed with the annular gear member A723 rotates as the annular gear member A723 rotates. The rotational axis of the central rotational member A724 extends in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the vertically extending axis (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotational axis of the first rotational member A721. As the shell portion A722 of the one-rotation member A721 rotates (horizontal rotation on the vertical axis), the central rotation member A724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation on the horizontal axis). Note that the relationship in the rotation direction will be described later.

Since the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 continues to change within the same plane as the shell portion A722 rotates (in synchronization with the rotation angle), the player can rotate the central rotation member A724 at multiple rotation axes in the up, down, left, and right directions. You can make it appear as if it is rotating. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear tooth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the number of teeth of the central rotating member A724 are The absolute value of the rotation angle is synchronized. As a result, during the rotation of the shell portion A722, each time the shell portion A722 assumes a posture in which the ring shape is visible in front view as shown in FIG. 368 (every half rotation), the central rotating member A724 As shown in the figure at 368, the posture is such that the disk portion side faces the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation performance can be maintained.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 366 and 367. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members that are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 below the first rotating member A721. The rod-shaped extension part A728a is formed in a rod-shape and extends upward so as to pass through the outside of the rotary member A721 and reach a position overlying the first rotating member A721 from above.

The rod-shaped extension part A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721, and depending on the arrangement, it may hide a part of the first rotating member A721, or it may hide a part of the first rotating member A721. Although it is possible to configure a case in which it is visible (a case in which it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721), details will be described later.

Note that the outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are configured to be slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the annular rear cover A714, so that the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are prevented from coming off while the annular rear cover A714 is installed. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembling) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) that are fastened and fixed to the supporting part A730, and these rotate as the supporting part A730 rotates. do. Next, this support portion A730 will be explained.

FIG. 369(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support part A730 includes a first support part A731 whose main body is formed into a cylindrical shape from a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and a first support part A731 which is colorless and light-transmissive. A second support part A735 whose main body is formed from a transparent resin material into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support part A731, and configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction. A shaft part A751 fixed to a box-shaped part A750, which will be described later, is inserted into the inside of the first support part A731 and second support part A735, and an irregularly shaped shaft is inserted at the tip side of the shaft part A751. It is supported in a non-removable manner by a metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and a fixed gear SG, which are fixed in a non-rotatable manner by fitting with the metal ring C1.

The first support portion A731 includes a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and through which the shaft portion A751 can be inserted, and the main body. A plurality of support plate parts A732 extend in a straight line in both directions from the upper end of the main body part and have through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted. A pair of protruding portions A733.

The protruding portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed to have different widths from each other. Ru. This makes it easier to match the angle between the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support part A731 during fitting, compared to the case where the pair of protruding parts A733 are formed with the same width. can do.

As shown in FIG. 369(b) and FIG. 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a half-cylindrical portion A736 forming the cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the half-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical divided bodies including a plurality of half-support plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The half-cylindrical part A736 includes a recessed fitting part A736a that is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the circular arc at the lower end side part, and a recessed fitting part A736a that is provided in a rectangular shape that projects radially outward from the end of the circular arc. A protruding fitting portion A736b is provided.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is a recess that fits into an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760, which will be described later, and the protrusion fitting portion A736b fits into a notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. It is a protrusion that fits.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b, and the inner wall has a radially outer wall portion of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. By restricting the displacement and fitting the protruding fitting part A736b into the notch part A762c, it is possible to support the divided body constituting the second support part A735 inseparably.

Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they abut in the circumferential direction of rotation with the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft portion A751 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission section for transmitting the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 to the second support section A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from being split and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the half-cylindrical portion in which the half-support plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a can reduce the contact area between the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer surface of the first support portion A731, thereby reducing the generated frictional force.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be generated when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at the location disposed between the half-support plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be tightened compared to the design dimensions. . In contrast, in this embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at a position between the half-support plate portions A737, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 come into contact at a location where sliding friction is likely to occur. The area can be reduced. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the second support part A735 and the first support part A731 can be effectively reduced while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove part A735a.

The half support plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude from one of the divided members. Fastening of the alignment protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c bored in the other divided body as a through hole large enough to allow the alignment protrusion A737b to pass through, and the second rotating member A728, which is bored in the thickness direction. A pair of fastening holes A737d are formed in a size that allows the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) to be inserted therethrough.

The half-support plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which is assembled from the outside in the dividing direction, is fastened to the fastening portion A728b with screws. They are connected to each other by screwing in and fastening and fixing. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the half-support plate part A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is equal to the distance between the pair of divided bodies constituting the second support part A735. They differ from each other. That is, the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a disposed on the divided body disposed on the front side is wider than the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a disposed on the divided body disposed on the rear side.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support part A735. That is, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together only when assembled from the correct direction, and when assembled from the wrong direction, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together. Since the position of the two-rotation member A728 is not aligned with the recessed portion and the assembly cannot be performed, it is possible to notice the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are approximately the same. There is a possibility that a mistake may be made in attempting to assemble two members of one of the sets. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common), both members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support part A735 are one member (of the combination). This makes it possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble the parts (on one side) before inserting the fastening screws.

Before disassembly, the second support part A735 is limited in its radial separation by the cylindrical protrusion part A762b of the upper transmission mechanism A760 (see FIG. 366), so the assembly of the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 is difficult. , is carried out exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction, and as a result of the parallel movement, the protruding part A733 becomes the notch part A772a, the recessed fitting part A736a becomes the inner protruding part A762d (see FIG. 373), and the protruding fitting part The joint portion A736b is fitted into the notch portion A762c, respectively. Here, due to its shape, the second support part A735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support part A731 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape of the mating member to be assembled, the posture when the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 are assembled together is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the second support part A735 may block the view, making it difficult to assemble the first support part A731.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the second support part A735 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the first support part A731 is formed from a light-impermeable resin material. After assembly, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, since the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support part A731 is assembled is arranged to protrude long above the upper lid part A740, the protrusion part A733 of the first support part A731 is fitted. The position to be used is not hidden by the upper lid part A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the posture can be easily adjusted to a suitable position, so that the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, a through hole A741 surrounding the central axis of the support part A730 is bored in the upper lid part A740 which arranges (accommodates) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, between it and the box-shaped part A750. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper lid part A740 and modify the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770, the upper lid part A740 must be removed in order to remove the shaft part A751 fixed to the box-shaped part A750 from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace part A740 upwards with respect to box-shaped part A750.

At this time, if the support part A730 remains assembled, the support plate part A732 and the half-support plate part A737 will interfere and the upper cover part A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support section A730 before disassembling the upper lid section A740. As mentioned above, in order to disassemble the support part A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and since the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, by having a configuration that requires disassembling multiple members in order in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to illegally access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. This makes it easier to prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid part A740 and the box-shaped part A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a direction view looking down from diagonally above, and FIG. 372 shows a direction view looking up from diagonally below (a direction view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid part A740 is provided with a through hole A741 that is vertically bored at the left and right center position, and supports each transmission member of the upper transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped part A750. A shape (a shape such as an uneven shape) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is disposed below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-shape with at least the top side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed in the open position. A shaft part A751 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) fixed to the bottom plate part A750a and extending vertically coaxially with the center axis of the through hole A741 of the upper lid part A740, and the upper surface side of the box-shaped part A750. a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured with a photocoupler system disposed on the box-shaped portion A750; and a second detection sensor consisting of a detection device configured with a photocoupler system disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A753, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body extends to the lower side and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 that rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and various sensors A752, A753 and the drive motor arranged below the bottom plate part A750a. It includes a relay board A754 to which wiring connected to AMT2 etc. is relayed.

373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760, and the lower transmission mechanism A770. 373 and 374, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is vertically separated from the lower transmission mechanism A770. In FIG. 373, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is shown looking down from diagonally above, and in FIG. 374, it is shown diagonally from below. Illustrated in a directional view looking up.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types (sizes) of gears. That is, the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and the small diameter gear PG2. The drive gear AMG2 is meshed with the drive gear AMG2 and a large diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 also includes a large diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large diameter gear LG11, and a small diameter gear meshing with the large diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as drive gear AMG2.

Detection target pieces A763 and A773, which are detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, respectively, are formed in the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1, which are arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side being upstream.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a small-diameter gear is used, but since a large-diameter gear is arranged again on the downstream side, both large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in this case is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. Detection pieces A773 extending in the axial direction from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four locations (90 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. , when the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees from the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor The state returns to the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both A752 and the second detection sensor A753. In this way, in this embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors such as the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is that there is a timing when only one of the detection sensors functions, but the details will be described later. .

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at multiple locations, so for easy understanding, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first. . The lower transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism disposed below the box-shaped portion A750, and is composed of four mutually meshed gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 as described above.

A plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770, and a protrusion A771a that protrudes radially inward is formed in one of the recesses A771. be done. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed to be different from the internal shape of the other recess A771.

The small diameter gear PG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends upward from the upper surface in a cylindrical shape so as to surround the shaft portion A751. A pair of rectangular notches A772a are formed at the upper end of the cylindrical extension portion A772 at symmetrical positions across the shaft portion A751. This notch A772a is a part that fits into the protruding part A733 of the support part, and is formed as notches having mutually different widths in accordance with the manner in which the protruding part A733 is formed.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is disposed below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being pulled out upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes in the vertical direction, so the number of steps required to extract the large-diameter gear LG1 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid inadvertent removal of the large diameter gear LG1.

Further, by partitioning the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper transmission mechanism A760 can be easily avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid transmitting the driving force between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

Next, details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be explained. The upper transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism disposed on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and is composed of four gears LG11, LG12, PG11, and LG13 that mesh with each other as described above.

Driving force is transmitted to the large diameter gear LG11 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by a one-way clutch housed inside, and when it rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the top). It is configured to idle when rotating, and includes a plurality of protrusions A761 that protrude downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a protrusion in the shape of a curved wall that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. It has a straight line shape with minimal overhang. As a result, it is possible to assemble the drive gear AMG2 only in an attitude in which the protruding portion A771a and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 has a through-hole A762a in the center thereof having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical extension part A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2, and a large-diameter cylindrical shape protruding from the upper surface side. a pair of rectangular notches A762c formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft portion A751 at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b; A pair of inner protrusions protrude along a straight line passing through the central axis of the shaft portion A751 and perpendicular to the notch portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft portion A751 in a top view. A762d.

The cylindrical protrusion part A762b is a part that receives the lower end of the second support part A735 (see FIG. 366) and restricts displacement of the second support part A735 in the dividing direction, and includes the notch part A762c and the inner protrusion part A762d. are parts that are configured to fit with the protruding fitting part A736b and the recessed fitting part A736a of the second support part A735, respectively, and to be able to transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 is formed with the pair of detected pieces A763 described above, and the formation of the umbrella part is omitted at the position where the same angle deviation in the same direction from the detected piece A763 is formed, and the umbrella part is formed in the axial direction. and a cylindrical functional part A765 that is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large diameter gear LG13 and configured to be rotatable relative to the large diameter gear LG13.

The cylindrical functional part A765 includes a pair of rotation regulating protrusions A765a that are disposed at symmetrical positions across the rotation axis and supported by a support groove part A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped part A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the large-diameter gear LG13 is housed inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is smaller (slightly) than the standard, torque transmission is maintained and the load between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is maintained. If the load generated between the two is excessive, the torque transmission is cut off.

In this embodiment, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 idles to cut off the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to generate resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions similarly to a resistance member that constantly produces resistance or a member that produces viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760, the torque limiter As a result, the transmission of torque is cut off and the resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation continues for a certain amount of time (after rotating by a certain degree of angle), the state switches to a state where torque transmission is released. Therefore, before the switching occurs, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise when viewed from above is limited to the posture in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap between the first detection sensor A752 (see FIG. 373). By controlling in this manner, the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in top view can be limited to specific gear teeth.

By forming the specific gear tooth to be elongated in the axial direction as the elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the large diameter gear LG13 can be improved.

Note that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detection target piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 rotates to transmit driving force and then stops, it is possible to detect that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idle and the drive force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 is canceled (when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above) ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. In other words, for example, if the one-way clutch's internal structure is damaged and the driving force transmission is not sufficiently cut off (idling), or if the torque limiter's torque generation function is insufficient due to a malfunction, a major When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 will rotate.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detection target piece A763 has been displaced, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. You can use this to discover problems with the one-way clutch or torque limiter.

Note that the above-mentioned mechanism that uses the torque limiter function to compensate for the release of driving force transmission using a one-way clutch is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction, as in this embodiment. be. That is, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members rotating around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

If the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, a structure may be adopted in which the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted is used to suppress movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released. In the embodiment, it is not possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight, and there is a possibility that the driving force may be transmitted even due to a weak load generated when the one-way clutch idles in the releasing direction.

It is also possible to create friction with other members as a structure to suppress displacement due to idle rotation, but in this case, it would be necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the member, which causes another problem. There is a possibility that this may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed to ensure that driving force transmission is canceled upon switching of the driving direction.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750, and the upper layer transmission mechanism It is a front view of A760 and lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

Transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 also rotates.

When the rotation direction of drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch housed inside large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion portion A761 and large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. By doing so, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 remains in the same state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 that is transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 that is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension part A772 rotates, and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b remains in the same state. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see Fig. 362), the first support part A731 (see Fig. 369) that fits into the cylindrical extension part A772 of the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 ) only rotates, and the second support part A735 maintains the same state, so of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728, the first rotation member A721 ( (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 remains as it is.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11, and the protrusion portion A761 and the large-diameter The gear LG11 rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, when drive gear AMG2 rotates, large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, both the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support section A731 and the second support section A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support section A731 and the second support section A735 rotate. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to each other, rotate.

Here, the rotational directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be explained. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, large diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise in top view, and large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise in top view in the opposite direction. Since the second rotating member A728 rotates, the direction of rotation of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view, the small diameter gear PG1 that meshes with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in a top view, and the small diameter gear PG2 that meshes with the small diameter gear PG1 (Fig. 373 (see) rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is clockwise when viewed from the top.

That is, the rotational directions of the first rotational member A721 and the second rotational member A728 are opposite directions with the shaft portion A751 as the rotational axis. As a result, the player can visually perceive that the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change) compared to a case where the rotation directions of the second rotating member A721 and A728 are the same direction. In addition, it is possible to easily perform effects such as making it appear as if the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating independently.

376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c).

In FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is shown in the initial state. The state (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is illustrated.

377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c).

377(a) and 377(b), a state (second state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the first state is illustrated. 377(c) and 377(d), a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the second state is illustrated.

378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c).

378(a) and 378(b), a state (fourth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the third state is illustrated. 378(c) and 378(d), a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the fourth state is illustrated.

379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c).

379(a) and 379(b), a state (sixth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the fifth state is illustrated. 379(c) and 379(d), a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the sixth state is illustrated.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A721 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIGS. 376 to 379, one section (one period) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

In addition, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the side of the shell portion A722 that is visible when viewed from the front will be described as the front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side thereof as the rear shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side of the central rotating member A724 that is viewed from the front will be described as a member front side A724F, and the opposite side will be described as a member rear side A724B.

Note that in FIGS. 376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), 378(a), 378(c), 379(a), and 379(c), , the optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 (see FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIG. 376(b), FIG. 376(d), FIG. d), FIG. 378(b), FIG. 378(d), FIG. 379(b), and FIG. 379(d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes on this virtual plane VS.

Moreover, in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL that schematically indicate the direction of light reflection are illustrated. The arrow HL represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell portion A722 and travels, and the arrow VL represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 travels. It represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels.

As shown in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), in response to the first rotating member A721 making one rotation counterclockwise when viewed from above, The direction of arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from above. That is, in this embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is directed in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 via the central rotating member A724. The rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 can be changed in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

This is difficult to achieve, for example, with a configuration in which the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721.

For example, since the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, when the light emitting means is arranged on the member front A724F or the member back A724B, the normal of the surface The change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the direction is not a change centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (it is a change in the rotation direction having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, compared to the case where a configuration is adopted in which a light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform a light emitting effect, it is possible to perform a more unexpected light emitting effect. For example, because the rotational direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721 are opposite, the player may feel as if the rotational speed is high compared to the actual rotational speed. It can make you feel.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, as the first rotating member A721 rotates, the central rotating member A724 also rotates, but the surface visible to the player is limited to the front surface A724F of the member. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area visible to the player but as an area intended for another purpose, regardless of its appearance (in this embodiment, light A configuration that can more easily achieve the purpose of reflection can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by deliberately exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause light reflection using the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

Note that the aspect of the member surface of the fastening screw can be arbitrarily set. For example, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted black to make it easier to create shadows, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted with a color to reflect that color, or the fastening screw may be equipped with an LED. A light emitting means such as the like may also be attached.

The effect of light irradiated onto the first rotating member A721 will be explained. Note that in the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. As described above, the illumination board A715 including the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light to the first rotating member A721 is arranged to form each side of a pentagon, and is arranged in a direction perpendicular to each side (in a direction that is tilted to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of The illumination board A715 (see FIG. 364) disposed above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the illumination board A715 disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 can be constantly irradiated with light.

Note that the light emitting means A715a has three LEDs arranged horizontally in parallel, and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light passing recess A722a is formed in a long length in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so that the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also It is easy to reach the central rotating member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recess. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the light emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state or fourth state where the front side A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible when viewed from the front, the illumination from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 reaches the central rotating member A724. In the second and sixth states in which the intensity of the light is maximized and the front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is difficult to see when viewed from the front, the center The intensity of light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 when viewed from the front and the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 includes a light emitting means A715a whose optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell part A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721, but the location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.

That is, the shell portion A722 is placed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 376(b)). In FIG. 378(b)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell portion A722 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

The shell portion A722 is curved at the outer peripheral edge in such a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the outside in the radial direction, and includes a connecting portion A722b that connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with an irregularly shaped arch-shaped bridge. Be prepared. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a to the shell part A722 is transmitted through the curve of the outer peripheral edge of the shell part A722 and the arch of the connecting part A722b. By reflecting it on the curvature of the ball, it can be made to advance towards the player.

In addition, when the shell portion A722 is in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected toward the player (reflected along the arrow HL). Since the player is in a tilted position, it is possible to highlight the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visible darkly, and in the state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is made to appear dark. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect of switching to a bright and visible state.

On the other hand, in a state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell part A722, so at least a portion The light reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, a state in which the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724, and a state in which the light does not reach the central rotating member A724 are as follows. It can be switched depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. Thereby, without controlling the light emission mode (for example, blinking mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that makes the light reaching the central rotating member A724 visually appear to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make it appear as if the light is blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times ( (It can be visually recognized as a light emitting effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), Regardless of the magnitude of the speed, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it were stationary, but depending on the speed, the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724 can be varied.

That is, the faster the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 is, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the shell portion A722 allows the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724.

In this embodiment, as illustrated as the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is , when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a), the longitudinal direction is configured to overlap the shell portion A722. In this embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the front side A724F of the member and the back side A724B (for example, in the direction of arrow LR, direction of arrow UD, or direction of arrow FB in FIG. 376(a)). The short direction is defined as the direction connecting the front side A724F of the member and the back side A724B of the member (direction perpendicular to the arrow FB in FIG. 376(b)).

In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has a longitudinal direction that is equal to the thickness of the shell portion A722 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a). It becomes a posture that goes inside (fits in). Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by blocking the light with the shell part A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. It is possible to easily configure a situation in which the central rotating member A724 is not illuminated while the central rotating member A724 is illuminated.

In addition, when rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is determined by its rotational speed. It's the same regardless. Thereby, the brightness of the first rotating member A721 that is visually recognized by the player can be prevented from changing due to a change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to avoid the first rotating member A721 from being visually recognized darkly.

In addition, in this embodiment, by rotating the first rotating member A721 with the light emitting means A715a turned on, the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 can be changed. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the light emitting means A715a to blink while producing the same effect as when the light emitting means A715a itself is blinked. Therefore, the size of the illumination board A715 can be reduced.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a that emits light from above the central rotating member A724, and the light emitting means A715a that emits light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, The rotating member A721 is configured to be illuminated differently. Therefore, by controlling them separately, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect illustrated below.

For example, in the initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)) of the first rotating member A721, the upper part of the central rotating member A724 By controlling the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to turn on or blink, the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are controlled to turn on or blink. It is possible to perform a lighting effect.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are turned off. By controlling it, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the central rotating member A724 is brightly illuminated and the shell portion A722 is darkly visible.

Also, for example, light is emitted from both directions in the left and right directions, but light is emitted from only one direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side). It is possible to perform complex light-emitting effects by utilizing the difference between the light emitted from the light and the case where the light is reflected to the back side. For example, by configuring the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to emit blue light, and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 to emit red light, For a player viewing from the front, a situation in which the player is visible with blue light and a situation in which a mixture of blue light and red light is visible is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. I can do it.

In this case, the period at which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while controlling the light to turn on continuously without blinking the light. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)), and is transmitted to the large diameter gear LG1 disposed on the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90 degree intervals, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) detects the detected pieces A773 (see FIG. 374) every time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and separately determining the accumulated results.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, each time the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753. While adding 1 to the value of the cumulative counter, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor. Each time A753 is detected, the cumulative counter value is decremented by 1.

If the cumulative counter value is 0 or a multiple of 4, it is the initial state, if (0 or a multiple of 4) +1, it is the second state, and if (0 or a multiple of 4) +2, it is the second state. There are 4 states, and if (0 or a multiple of 4) +3, it can be determined that the state is the 6th state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if it is not possible to specify the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2, by determining the value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state and the The first rotating member A721 can be stopped in any of the second state, the fourth state, or the sixth state.

Therefore, it is possible to perform effects such that the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as a presentation means to notify differences in jackpot expectations or to notify time information (for example, the stopping position changes every two hours).

In addition, although this embodiment has described the case where the detection target pieces A773 are formed at four locations at equal intervals, the detection target pieces A773 are not necessarily limited to this. The detection target pieces A773 may be arranged at non-uniform intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

380(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, FIG. 380(b) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and FIG. 380(c) is a front view of the production unit A710. It is a front view of production unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is a top view of production unit A710 as seen in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c).

381(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, FIG. 381(b) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and FIG. 381(c) is a front view of the production unit A710. It is a front view of production unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is a top view of production unit A710 as seen in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c).

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and in FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is as shown in FIG. 380(c) and FIG. 380(d) shows the first state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) show the second state of the first rotating member A721. ), the third state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise in a top view, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, so that the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It rotates in the opposite direction at the same rotation angle as member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) illustrate the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380(c) 380(d) shows the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the initial state, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) 381(c) and 381(d) show a second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the first state. A third state of the second rotating member A728 is illustrated in which the portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.

Note that since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 380(b), FIG. 380(d), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are shown in schematic diagrams (simplified shape diagrams) for ease of understanding. ) is illustrated in imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a), and 381(c), the outline of the illumination board A715 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b), 380(d) ), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, as the second rotating member A728 rotates, the illumination boards A715 (two boards arranged on the left and right sides) are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721. It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

Here, unlike the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721, which is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a light transmitting resin material, so that it is light-transmissive. Rather than blocking the light as it passes through the optical axis, it acts to change the way the light is refracted and the color of the light. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color. (color mixed with blue).

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed into a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotational axis and is bent along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a are arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is configured so that it does not overlap with any of the optical axes of the

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 does not overlap with the second rotating member A728, on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination substrate A715 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the other illumination substrate A715 overlaps with the second rotating member A728. It doesn't overlap. Note that in the states shown in FIGS. 380(b) and 381(b), the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not, the central rotating member A724 It is possible to increase the number of types of light that reaches the target. That is, the manner in which the light that has passed through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724 is divided into the manner in which only the light that reaches from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728, and the manner in which only the light that reaches from the lower left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. The second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. The appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed depending on whether the light emitting unit A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off and the light emitting unit A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned on. That is, it is possible to switch between causing the central rotating member A724 to emit light in a manner in which the color of the second rotating member A728 is mixed or emitting light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps with the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728. The portion of the central rotating member A724 that is caused to emit light in a mixed manner can be switched.

Note that, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the light passage recess A722a when viewed from above. Thereby, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is independent of the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head to A722a.

Therefore, for example, by configuring so that only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are turned off, It can be avoided that the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect with the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 Control is required to turn off the light emitting means A715a at the timing when the light emitting means A715a intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728), but in this embodiment, the light emitting means A715a is placed above the central rotating member A724. Due to the function of the light emitting means A715a, such control can be made unnecessary.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's view in a posture where the front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the presentation function of the central rotating member A724 is reduced. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel toward the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 while the rotating body A720 continues to rotate.

Here, since the rod-shaped extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view is switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) in a state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). .

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state shown in FIG. 381(a) (see FIG. 377(a)), it becomes the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, in a posture in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged before and after the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381(a)), the second rotating member A728 Since A721 is partially hidden, it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is in the direction facing the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). 379 (d ), and the central rotating member A724 is darkly visible to the player.

In other words, while keeping the visible external shape of the second rotating member A728 the same during displacement, the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (the brightness of the central rotating member A724) is changed, and the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a is changed. It can be generated without any change. In this case, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with the level of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the second rotating member A724 in the state shown in FIG. 381(a) When the rotating body A720 stops, it is possible to increase expectations for the subsequent operation mode, and it is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381(a), , the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward attitude to a front-rear attitude. Along with this, the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees. (changes in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the front surface A724F of the member changes in the front-rear direction. Since the central rotary member A724 is oriented toward the center (because there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the front-rear component of the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 becomes close to 0, and the direction of light reflection returns to the vertical direction. .

In this way, in synchronization with rotating the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is transmitted to the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the front-to-back component of light when reflected. As a result, as the rotation time of the first rotating member A721 increases, it becomes easier to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state, so that the first rotating member A721 rotates. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the first rotating member A721 not only at the moment when the first rotating member A721 starts rotating, but also after the rotating member A721 rotates.

Note that in this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 as it is. In this case, since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is colored and easily visible. .

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. The first rotation member A721 can be rotated by rotating the first rotation member A721, and the second rotation member A728 can maintain its posture from the state shown in FIG. 381(a) and only the first rotation member A721 can be rotated. A total of four ways of presenting the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

Note that the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 377(d)), the left channel (game When the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, there is a right side flow path (a flow path configured in the right side area with respect to the center of the left and right width of the game area, mainly the right side flow path). It can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the channel through which the ball is shot.

For example, when the light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 378(d)), the first It can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the operating units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., and when the light is reflected to the right rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379(d)), the third It can be used as light to brightly illuminate the first operating units A400C, A400D, etc. arranged on the right side of the front side of the symbol display device 81. In this way, the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 can be switched in the direction of facing different members, so by switching the direction of the light, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (locations). I can do it.

Further, the second rotating member A728 has a vertical length that can partition the inner area of the annular front cover A711 into left and right sides when viewed from the front (see FIG. 381(a)). As a result, when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, when the production unit A710 is placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inner side of the annular front cover A711 The display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is visible through the area, can be partitioned into left and right parts. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that performs effects through rotational motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , it is possible to perform an effect in which the first rotating member A721 is rotated while the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from above, and the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate in the opposite direction (when the first rotating member A721 In the driving mode (clockwise rotation direction), the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one rotational direction, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides. In the other rotational direction, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the light emitting mode (color, width, etc.).

In this way, by changing the direction of the rotational drive, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 are It depends on the resolution (switchable number) of the rotational speed of the two-rotation member A728.

Naturally, there is a permissible limit to the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the rotation direction. Since the second rotating member A728 is switched between operating and stopping, even if the rotational speed is the same, changing the rotational direction will change the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724. can be made different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 rotate only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotation direction is different (for example, when there is no second rotating member A728, (e.g., when only the rotational direction of the first rotational member A721 changes and the second rotational member A728 maintains its rotation), doubling the change in the visibility of light that reaches the central rotational member A724. Therefore, variations in the appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be explained. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of vertically inverting the member front A724F while maintaining the attitude in which the member front A724F faces the front side.

Therefore, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upper and lower sides of the front side of the member A724F have been reversed and combined. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724, which is formed into a star shape with five corners, is visually recognized as having a star shape with ten corners.

Note that in this embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed to have a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the shape is not limited to this. For example, the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed to have a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape that is a combination of vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front A724F, it appears as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

Also, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either the upper or lower side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and by reversing the shape or figure vertically and combining them, it is configured to evoke a different concept. You may do so.

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangle shape on the front side of the member A724F in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotational axis when viewed from the front above the rotational axis of the central rotational member A724, when the central rotational member A724 is rotated, it becomes an equilateral triangle. By combining the upper and lower parts, a diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized, and above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724, the lower end overlaps the rotation axis when viewed from the front, and the hiragana ``tsu'' is placed on the front of the member A724F. By drawing a character (figure) in advance, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes are combined at the top and bottom, making it possible to visually recognize the character (figure) of the number "3". With this, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

Referring to FIG. 382, an example of production using the second action unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. FIG. 382 shows a state where the production unit A710 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state where the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Ru.

In FIG. 382, the second state (see FIG. 381(a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is illustrated, and the annular front is located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. In the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening), an image displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Thereby, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize it as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

Note that the means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transparent liquid crystal may be disposed on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the rotating state of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed using the transparent liquid crystal, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. An illumination plate may be disposed on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image on the third symbol display device 81 to be visually recognized as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the display means.

When emitting light from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 in this state, the player expects the mode of light production to occur when the second rotating member A728 is in a rotating state, but when the second rotating member A728 is in a stopped state. Since the light effect can be performed in the manner shown in , it is possible to perform a highly unexpected effect.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, but also applies while the production unit A710 moves up and down. For example, the production unit A710 is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be seen through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 in the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while in the extended position, the third symbol display device 81 cannot be seen through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions of (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the upward movement of the production unit A710 toward the extended position, the inner side of the annular front cover A711 (the inner side of the circular opening) on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 ) The display area of the third symbol display device 81 that is visible through the area becomes gradually wider. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display mentioned above in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually recognized, the production unit A710 can be moved upward while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player feel that the second rotating member A728 has started rotating before he or she knows it (the effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

In this case, during the upward movement of the production unit A710, the external shape of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be kept the same, while when emitting light from the light emitting means A715a, the difference between when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player. This makes it possible to perform highly unexpected performances.

Next, the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 383. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, but in the 23rd embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 383 is a top view schematically showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is placed at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be canceled by moving it to the front side position, and the second The way the light reaches the one-rotation member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-back direction, it can be made difficult for the player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to understand that the slide member A2729 is moving.

In other words, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED etc. constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (while leaving) the shape (external shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. (how it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising performance without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

Note that the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, a light-opaque resin material, or a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, but in the 24th embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is provided with a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 that protrude radially outward from the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and have a semicircular cross section. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the arcuate wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In the 24th embodiment, the elongated holes (first elongated hole A422a, second elongated hole A422b, displacement side elongated hole A453, and transmission side elongated hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are By being formed longer than the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is configured to be able to be displaced beyond the displacement end on the extended position side in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed toward the upper right from the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, the elongated link A451 rotates, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the left from the extended position.

Thereby, the configuration can be such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

Note that in FIG. 384, the sizes of the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are shown randomly, but the size is not limited to this. For example, all the protrusions may have the same size, or the external protrusions A3464 may have different sizes. In this case, it is not necessary that they all have different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are formed larger than the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, when the gear with pin A3462 is continuously rotated after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is the same as that of the previous two times. Compared to , the latter two times are smaller. That is, it is possible to produce an effect in which the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the extended position gradually subsides.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so that it becomes smaller as it moves away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arcuate wall portion A464, or vice versa. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

Further, a recessed portion recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the recessed portion is disposed to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 moves downwardly to the left to attach the coil spring SP1 from the state shown in FIG. 384. It can be configured such that the elongated link A451 rotates as the elongated link A451 is pulled back by force, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (toward the retracted position) from the extended position.

Further, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be made different (shifted) in the first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319). As a result, when synchronizing the operation timing of each drive motor AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing), case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied depending on the relationship with the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in a control mode in which each drive motor AMT1 is excited all at once, the displacement (microscopic displacement) timing can be shifted.

For example, the timing when each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and the timing when each second displacement member A490 of each first displacement member A490 is extended While the timing of reaching the extended position (see FIG. 320) is the same, the displacement (micro displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position ) can be adjusted so that they occur sequentially in a clockwise direction starting from the first operating unit A400 located at the lower left in front view.

Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player who is paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Furthermore, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 320), so that the player who visually recognizes the light can It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, an effect suggesting a right-handed hit performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game) can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 displaces the back side of the illumination board A416, but in the 25th embodiment, a decorative member A4550 that is displaced toward the front side of the illumination board A416 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 385(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 disposed so that the front side of the front cover A410 can be displaced, and a side surface of the main body portion A411. A pair of guided parts A4552 are guided to a long hole A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, and these parts are integrated with a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed on the outside of the front cover A410. The connection is fixed.

Since the pair of guided parts A4552 are both inserted through the long hole A4411b, the guided parts A4552 are only allowed to be displaced along the long hole A4411b. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the decorative plate portion A4551. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the elongated hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of protruding portions A4442g that protrude from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can come into contact with the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. Thereby, the decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 come into contact while the first displacement member A4440 is being displaced.

The interlocking plate part A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in attitude during the displacement of the guided plate part A441, and the protruding part A4442g between the guided part A4552 due to this change in attitude. The arrangement of the protruding portion A4442g is set such that it can enter the protruding portion A4442g. Thereby, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both the forward and backward directions, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both the forward and backward directions (both right and left directions in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure the timing to hide the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551. Thereby, light traveling through the through hole A412 can be physically blocked.

Further, unlike the first displacement member A4440 which is hidden behind the front cover A410 in the extended position, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so that it can be seen by the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured to have different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. This can be used as a means to solve the problem that in a hidden overhang position, the player cannot see it in a series of senses, but it is also difficult to create a sense of unity in the light emitting mode.

That is, by configuring the shapes and drawn figures of the decorative plate portions A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 in the same manner, the state in which the first displacement member A4440 is placed in the extended position and hidden by the front cover A410 (Fig. 385 The sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 in (see (b)) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is placed in advance at a similar position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400, and at a position that can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 with the first displacement member A4440 disposed in the extended position. A445b is arranged, and the light emitting means A445b is lit all at once by a plurality of first operation units A4400, with the first displacement member A4440 being hidden as described above, to create a light emission effect with a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the elongated hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the illumination board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging the structure for realizing the displacement of the decorative member A4550.

The movable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the range in which the elongated hole A4411b is formed. That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decorative member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, the number of displaced members can be increased in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front).

Moreover, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a posture change (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front), a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be ensured.

Note that the aspect of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmitting properties, and an LED or the like or an illumination board may be arranged inside. Further, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the light emitted from the illumination board A416 through the through hole can be made visible.

Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 386. In the 22nd embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 rotationally displaces along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, thereby regulating the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the irregularly shaped slide member A455. However, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

386(a) and 386(b) are front views of a displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the end of displacement.

The displacement device A5000 includes a displacement member A5001 that is configured to be slidable along a straight line and biased to the left by a biasing member (such as a coil spring) not shown, and a displacement member A5001 that is displaced along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001. A transmission member A5002 to which driving force is transmitted, a shafted support member A5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and a shaft member A5003 that is rotatably supported from both ends of the shaft support member A5003 to one side in the rotational direction. A thin wall portion A5004 that extends and is connected to each other, a roller member A5005 that is disposed at the end opposite to the end that is supported by the shaft of the supported member A5003, and a guide groove in which the roller member A5005 is guided. A5006 and A5007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 have a first region A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and a second region A5007 that deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first region A5006. configured. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is configured in an arc shape, but the second region A5007 may have any shape that deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and is not limited to the arc shape.

The operation of displacement device 5000 will be explained. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided through the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the part where it contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin part A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 The leftward displacement of can be regulated.

Further, the outer shape of the thin wall portion A5004 is such that the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is By configuring the displacement member A5001 to remain unchanged in the displacement direction of the transmission member A5003, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-mentioned one section.

In addition, when the thin wall portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, a position where the repulsive force of the thin wall portion A5004 subjected to deformation and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the contact between the supported support member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening part A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening part A475, but in the 27th embodiment, the wiring HC is displaceably supported by the support box part A470. A case will be described in which the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A6560 so as to be relatively displaceable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

387(a), FIG. 387(b), and FIG. 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 387(a) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is placed in the retracted position, FIG. 388 shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is placed in the extended position, and FIG. A state in which the two-displacement member A490 is placed at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position (approximately 45 degree rotation position) is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 or the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate part A480 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end of the wiring guide member A6560, with the support protrusion A6471d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side of the support box part A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so that it cannot fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and includes a main body plate part A6561 that is arranged to face the back surface of the support box part A6470 with a gap between them, and a front view from the lower end of the main body plate part A6561 and the middle part of the body plate part A6560. It includes a plurality of protruding portions A6562 that protrude toward the side (support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, so that a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary load on the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, where the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (rear plate part A480 side) by the protrusion part A491d2 and the binding band KB, the position between them (the position sandwiched in the left-right direction) Since the main body plate part A6561 is arranged in the rear plate part A480, the main body plate part A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate part A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate part A480. Rubbing with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by setting the part where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate part A480 side to a position that overlaps with the main body plate part A6561, the main body plate part A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to make it easier for situations to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be explained. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is placed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the left-right direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large, so that the displacement of the wiring HC is mainly caused. Occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the attitude shown in FIG. 387(a).

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper protrusion A6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the displacement of the board-side connector A493c occurs mainly in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the attitude of the wiring guide member A6560 changes as it is pushed by the wiring HC. In this case, although the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A6560 with a margin, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the lower protrusion A6562. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering (dripping down) into the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 with excessive force.

In this way, by configuring the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound (projection part A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate part A6561) to be changeable, when the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed ( The designed length of the wiring HC can be shortened compared to the part A475 (see FIG. 356(a)).

To explain the policy of changing the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound (protruding part A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate part A6561) from a different perspective, in the displacement from Fig. 387(a) to Fig. 387(b), By displacing the board-side connector A493c in a manner approaching the protruding part A6552 (wiring HC displacing toward the protruding part A6552), the portion of the wiring HC that is wound around the protruding part A6552 is displaced to the side where it becomes loose. On the other hand, in the case of displacement from FIG. 387(b) to FIG. The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be able to be displaced when the state changes between FIG. 387(b) and FIG. 388.

Therefore, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (to the side where the wiring HC is widened). It can be said that the structure is configured such that it can be displaced to the side (to which it is to be displaced). This can prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and can prevent excessive deformation (such as bending or chipping) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560, which is not connected to the second displacement member A490, is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged so that the player can see it in any of the states shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), or 388 (for example, the third By disposing a decorative member that can be extended on the side of the symbol display device 81 (right side in FIG. 387(a)), it is possible to perform an effect using the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 do not completely interlock, and the wiring guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates more than that (the timing of the displacement is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are being displaced independently.

Note that, for convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated in a manner in which it is wound once (a manner in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of protrusions A6562), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the wiring HC may be configured to pass (not be wound) only once between the plurality of protrusions A6562.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the tilting device 310 is pressed downward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial position may be a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the end of pushing, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, it is possible to perform the effect of a "button that cannot be pushed"). can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its operation (the end of the extending operation), due to the dimensions that create a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320, the voice coil motor 352 It is preferable to arrange the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. Thereby, it is possible to suppress generation of impact noise due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the button is in the "button that cannot be pushed" state until after the player presses the tilting device 310. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed from a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, so that the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by driving the disc cam 344 continuously rotating in the forward rotation direction, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched). Thereby, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, while a complicated operation mode in which the raised position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched can be performed.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the terminal end and starting to move upward. In this case, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be made smaller while the tilting device 310 is pressed down repeatedly, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When fixing the housing member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side opposite to the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the convex leg portion 5424 is fixed to the tilting device 310. If the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed by making the portion 5424 pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, it is possible to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 A state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be created by increasing the amount of deformation. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, but also when operating the tilting device 310 at high speed. It is possible to increase the variety of performances.

For example, when a player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying a message such as "Big chance!", it is possible to perform an effect that instructs the player how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner as a condition for transmitting vibrations to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed in a specified manner. It is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the button (tilting device 310) and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed in magnitude with the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with force, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with force.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibrations generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member 5412 is placed in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 can transmit vibrations to the player in a state where it is not operated to make the performance more lively, it also allows the player to see changes in the performance mode (expected This makes it possible to create a premium feeling in which only the player playing the machine can feel the changes in the production mode, excluding other players around him. can.

In addition, as a variation of the effect, there is a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other when the player presses the tilting device 310, and a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other. Although it is desirable to have both a position where the weight member 5412 can be brought into contact with the weight member 5412, this can be achieved by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can occur depending on the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which a frictional force is generated due to the abutment between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 due to the shaft tilting deformation of the disc cam 5344, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344, and is configured in such a manner that it comes into contact when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis. It's okay. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable part, the frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 is ensured to be larger than when the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the board support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as a slope that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front end portion of the support bottom portion 12c supports the lower end surface of the game board 13. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be made lower. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the foul ball passage section 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of back and forth and left and right bends. In this case, it is preferable that a long path be formed in the front and rear directions directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be ejected smoothly. Furthermore, by creating a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage section 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the firing path and the foul ball passage section 145. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface, but the light guide member 540 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 appears dim. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, curved portions and straight extending portions may coexist at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a vertically curved path is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi may be spaced apart from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, the resistance of the sandwiching allows the speaker connection wire 453 to be pulled out in the direction outward of the speaker assembly 450. Even when a load is applied, the speaker connection line 453 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha contacts the inner surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, but the protrusion length beyond that is abutted in the thickness direction. In terms of length, a step may be provided in the middle so that the inner surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, a sufficient area is secured to form a double wall between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be held between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate body part 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate body part 461M in the front-rear direction to the same width as the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T, the width of the intermediate body part 461M, the intermediate body part 461M, and the distal body part 461T can be Alternatively, a large speaker room may be configured.

Further, although the proximal body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or the volumes may be the same. The arrangement of the speakers 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be at the center in the left and right direction, or between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment described above, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, adjacent rib portions Although a case has been described in which they do not overlap in view (the connecting direction and the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491), the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire can be inserted through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts by making it difficult to carry out fraudulent acts in which the tip of the tip enters the gaming area, and by prolonging the time required for such fraudulent acts. Note that examples of suppressing fraudulent acts include suppressing fraudulent acts themselves, and suppressing obtaining fraudulent profits through fraudulent acts (succeeding in fraudulent acts).

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fit device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. can be done. Thereby, the radial sliding movement of the petals 802 and the rotational movement of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or it may be configured to rotate around an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates due to the driving force being transmitted via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the drive side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip of the second presentation member 940, the second presentation member 940 can be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. It's okay. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening/closing regulating part 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulating part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the part of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board support device 600 arranged above the inner frame 12 600 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13, which are arranged opposite to the lower board surface support device 600, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the panel support device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600. In this case, since the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin can reduce the risk of damage due to collision with the metal panel support device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500, from which the light irradiated onto the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540, is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one side of the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between being placed on the front side and the other side being placed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around an axis, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory that projects inward of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one side is placed on the front side and the other side is placed on the front side. Consider switching between when it is placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the movable accessory, the movable accessory disposed opposite to the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory, the moving accessory placed oppositely emits light over a wide area of the opening 565 (wider than the top opening 524). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without changing the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting location of the moving accessory can be changed.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by moving the moving accessory in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light emitting location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes in size and changes so as to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory. At the timing when the right panel unit 500 faces, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, switching to change the location where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is high, the amount of light is large, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is focused. It is diffused (the brightness becomes lower, the amount of light becomes smaller, and the light emitted becomes fainter). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting mode of the light emitting object (liquid crystal or moving accessory) can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal) , by changing the posture so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the back side of the support plate 510), beam-shaped (narrow width) light is directed to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving accessory or liquid crystal. Thereby, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal, while causing only the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal to emit light.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150, 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage sections 9145, 10145, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet metal member may partially break due to the load from the thread Y8 and be so fragile that the broken part will fall, and a detection sensor may be placed at a position where the broken part passes through when it falls. Also good. In this case, due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, a warning is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped in order to detect the cheating at an early stage. The profits gained by those who commit fraudulent acts (losses suffered by gaming machine halls) can be minimized.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by pasting a rubber sheet on the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The motion resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portions of the both side slits 815 that are arranged opposite to the inclined surface 2803T. A recessed portion may be formed. In this case, since the inclined surface 2803T penetrates into the recessed portion, it is possible to improve the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the concave portions 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set as the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is an upwardly sloping direction in all the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is an upwardly sloping direction, so that it is at the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play. It is possible to make it easier for light to travel towards the target. Thereby, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId that are the regions that emit light to the outer lens member 550. may be formed. In this case, the light travels in the direction opposite to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is slanted upward. On the other hand, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is tilted downward. Therefore, for example, by illuminating the balls stored in the upper tray 17 with light, it is possible to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed depending on the arrangement of the operating device 10300.

Moreover, both one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operating device 10300 and one formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, a protruding shape portion 6413 and a recessed shape portion 6414 are provided to accommodate the operating load of the operating device 10300, and a protrusion shape portion is provided to address issues (ease of holding, durability, etc.) with the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so that it can be assembled (replaced). It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player and that produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that produces a light emission effect, or a board box. It may also be something that is not intended to be directly visible to the player, such as.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the shape of a groove extending in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operational load of the operating device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. It's okay.

Moreover, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while reducing the width of the groove, the same effect as when one wide groove is formed in terms of reducing the contact area with the operating device 10300 can be achieved. I can do it. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily need to be along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, when viewed from above.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shaped portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker who carries the front frame 10014. In this case, it becomes possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support part 6426 and the recessed part 6414 (it can be used as a finger rest part), so that the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operating device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load on the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member that generates an elastic urging force (such as a coil spring or a torsion spring), or it may be a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibrations.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor pliability and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor, but various modes are exemplified as the mode of the drive motor. For example, a load may be transmitted from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor to the lever member 10340 by a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that does not rely on the gear mechanism may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the lever member 10340 can idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which a load is applied during operation of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if there are operating parts that do not move on that plane (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally to the left or right), the balance (average) of the operating directions of each operating part The direction that is found (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening. You may also set the direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are joined together by fastening, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be combined using an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting by matching shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be set to the left-right direction. In this case, the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be made easier to change due to the generation of vibration of the vibration device 10366, so it is possible to perform an effect that dynamically changes the design around the operating device 10300 when vibration occurs. can. Moreover, the aspect of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct-acting type such as a voice coil motor, a rotary type such as a vibrator, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed from a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover are It is possible to change the appearance of the light seen through the cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that deflection can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity can be changed between the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a increase their rigidity and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened relative to that direction. The difference can be increased.

In this case, for example, by setting the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed along the direction Y17a, the vibrations generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the upward position can cause the left front cover 10321 and the right front While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operating member 10310, the degree of deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

Note that, conversely, the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed may be along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operating member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the swing operating member It is possible to increase the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the vibration device 10310 is placed in the upward position. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operating member 10310, the degree of deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled thereto. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily assembled due to the flexure, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the flexure of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the effect of suppressing displacement due to interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge Rm1 can be exerted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 contacts the plate-shaped support portion 6426 at the top and bottom, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening part into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like protruding part 6453R, and the fastening screw is attached to a plate extending above the plate-like support part 6426 in correspondence with the fastening part. It may be configured to be inserted into an insertion hole formed in the section. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, but also when it is displaced downward, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b that is not fitted with respect to the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although a case has been described in which the film is formed with a possible thickness (dimensional relationship with almost no gaps), it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the gap (the size may be such that a gap is formed between the members during assembly). In this case, if the displacement of the covers 10321, 10322 (displacement of the operating device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, contact (collision) between the covers 10321, 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the flange portion 6582 is formed into a flat plate shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 is formed with a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed with a shape that meshes with that shape, so that they fit into each other when assembled. You can also do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partitioning member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side while the partitioning member 6560 is positioned in the assembled state.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in cross-sectional view. It's not something you can do. For example, only one of the two side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed into a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, when the player visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, the milky-white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind it Although a case has been described in which the lower edge plate portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of areas by making the color tone of the area visible, this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed in advance to have a milky white color.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that slopes downward toward the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening may be performed using a fastening screw whose fastening direction slopes downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set depending on the arrangement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side where displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 as the upper lid member 6510 deforms, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partitioning member 6560 may be configured to be driven so that its longitudinal width can be changed, thereby changing the degree of compressive force that may be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms.

In other words, if the partitioning member 6560 is driven to shorten the front and rear width in such a manner that the back side edge of the partitioning member 6560 is displaced toward the front side, even if the top cover member 6510 is deformed, the separation between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is maintained. A gap can still be generated between them, and compressive force can be made less likely to occur. Since compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the illumination board 6570 is held can be lowered, and therefore, the degree of displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 similarly deforms.

In other words, by controlling the longitudinal width of the partition member 6560, it is possible to change the behavior of the illumination board 6570 in a situation where the top cover member 6510 may deform. It is possible to change the appearance of the irradiated light.

Note that the front-to-back width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (leave a space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580), and the front-to-back width is increased by drive control, so that the partition member 6560 and the back support member The configuration may be such that the situation is changed so that a compressive force may be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the illumination board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the illumination board 6570 may be disposed below the back support member 6580, the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partitioning member 6560 (a member that is apart from the audio device 6610), The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 that is inserted into the partitioning member 6560. In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illumination board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, while the back support member 6580 (and the audio device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 which is arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can also do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, it is possible to separate the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560. It is possible to easily replace the illumination board 6570 that has been removed or to correct the positional deviation.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, vibrations are transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the information has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually recognized from the front side. In this case, it is possible to identify the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws by checking for the presence or absence of shadows, so in a noisy environment, it is easier to detect loosening of fastening screws than when detecting abnormal noises. It can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening direction of the fastening screw is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, but the fastening direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be a mixture of locations that are tilted vertically and horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed in a shape that extends linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curved line, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are made smooth to suppress light from being diffused from the side surfaces, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surfaces. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of light traveling toward the fins 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, you can emphasize the light on the front edge by covering the entire side, or by covering part of the side (for example, using light-shielding tape with holes in a polka dot pattern). Since the light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape can be visually recognized by the player, the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the left horizontal presentation device 6700 of the pachinko machine 10010, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elongated rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light production effect when the fin 6735 is viewed from the front. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (such as a cut) for emitting at least a portion of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 may be formed in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces of the fins 6735 are inclined such that the thickness gradually becomes thinner as the fins 6735 move toward the front side. By configuring the fins 6735 so that they can be repeatedly reached, light may be configured to easily exit from the fins 6735.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is small, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixing may be performed by fitting claws based on the shape relationship or by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be omitted, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being degraded due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 slides due to the vibration of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the audio device 6610 may be placed close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be slid by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operating device 10300 (direction along direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illumination board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the player can cause the illumination board 18830 to slide while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring so that the vibrations of the illumination board 18830 are transmitted to the operating device 10300, the player who touches the operating device 10300 can grasp the vibrations derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in situation advantageous to the player occurs, interest in touching the operating device 10300 can be increased.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is supported in a floating (slidable) manner near the operation device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper presentation device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, it may be floatingly supported by a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending toward the front side from the gap between the left and right pair of audio devices 6610, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the audio device 6610. It may be supported in a floating manner. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, but may be horizontal or diagonal.

In the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line The reference line X19 may be configured to run along the direction of the angle .

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. For example, if multiple vibration directions Y17a or operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibration or operation in the first direction is extremely high, and the frequency of vibrations in the other directions is extremely high. When the frequency of occurrence of operations is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws that fasten and fix the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured to be difficult to transmit to the operating device 10300 side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that vibrations are transmitted to the operating device 10300 to the same extent as vibrations are transmitted to the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 21410. In this case, the vibration device 21500 can vibrate a plurality of objects.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front surface of the projecting portion De3 against which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the front portion of the projecting portion De3 may be formed with a plane that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied to the vibrating device 21500 from the protruding portion De3 (the normal direction of the front surface of the protruding portion De3) is a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, so that the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is A component in a direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, so that in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covered cover member 21530 collide in the front and rear direction, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction 21534 (non-guiding direction that intersects with the guiding direction), the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protruding portion 21534 of the covered cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening portions 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 are fastened together through the support holes 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be made slightly longer so that no fastening force is applied to the support hole 21428. This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate. Since this can be avoided, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the formation of the support plate part A313 is omitted on the side where the notch part A312a is formed in the back case A310, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, it is possible to maintain the rigidity of the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the back case A310 while maintaining the effect of blurring the boundaries of the light that is visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the back case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the back case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be composed of a columnar part extending from the bottom of the back side to the front side (no wall is formed). ) may be configured as follows. In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A700).

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the portion of the right side adjacent to the game board A13 is formed not in a plane but in a line shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) on one side may be lower than that on the other side.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be arranged on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, by forming the metal plate along the inward curved shape of the outer edge member A73, the metal plate has the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300, and the game area. A function of guiding the falling ball can be added. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be disposed in the gap.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front protrusion part A86f that can come into contact with the game ball is provided to protrude from the back side of the game area toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end of the right channel forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 toward the gaming area side may be provided, and a protrusion portion may be provided protruding from the back side of the flange portion to the back side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protruding portion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the speed of the game ball can be efficiently caused.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other, leaving a gap. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the illumination board A416 may be in contact with the protruding piece A417i, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be placed between the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i ) may be interposed so that the load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the illumination board A416. Thereby, the illumination board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operating unit A400 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second area AC2 of the plurality of first operating units A400 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side. Although a case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 is surrounded from above in AC2, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches before and after the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs that emit light to the front side are arranged may be arranged on the guide plate section A430 and the support plate section A420. Thereby, by arranging the first displacement member A440, it is possible to configure the light emitting means to be hidden from the player.

Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this configuration, similar effects can be achieved. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the illumination board A445 is not disposed thereon. For example, one or more through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may be able to pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes depending on the arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position from which the light irradiated to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 (does not cut through the illumination board A416 in front view), but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary that the entire first displacement member A440 enters the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front. It's okay.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board A445 may not be disposed on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging the illumination board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light to the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 can be used. It is possible to make the light passing through the player visible to the player.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case will be described in which the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is regulated by the circular arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the odd-shaped slide member A455. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a case where the arcuate wall portion A464 is not formed, as the transmission protrusion A463 is placed at a position away from the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the gear with pin A462 moves to the position where the arcuate wall portion A464 was supposed to be placed. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to protrude, and the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 may be restricted by coming into contact with the shutter member.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protrusions A455c arranged on the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the plurality of guided protrusions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line that is parallel to the direction A416x, or may be arranged so as to be shifted in a direction intersecting the direction A416x back and forth. In either case, the posture of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the protruding plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with contact with the arcuate wall portion A464), By reducing the angular width of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 regulated by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 can be stretched in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arcuate wall part A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, does it come into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 or with the end of the arcuate wall part A464 on the opposite side from the transmission protrusion A463? depends on the operating mode of the pin gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed (a constant speed or a variable speed) and the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 differently, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position can be adjusted to The case where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the circular arc wall part A464 and the case where it abuts against the transmission protrusion A463 can be made different.

Note that although here it is assumed that the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with at least one of the arcuate wall part A464 or the transmission protrusion A463, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are arranged in a predetermined manner, a fixed wall portion is formed that protrudes from either of them toward the odd-shaped slide member A455 (the odd-shaped transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x. You can leave it there. In this case, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position is determined by two positions: one where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the arcuate wall part A464, and the other where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the transmission protrusion A463. It can be made different depending on the case of contacting the fixed wall part and the case of contacting the fixed wall part.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is disposed outside the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating shaft of the reinforcing arm portion A518 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may be configured to pass through the inside of the tube and reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, it is possible to prevent the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) due to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 via the cylinder.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member made of a flexible material and having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not need to be one, and may be more than one. In this case, even if the wiring HC is pulled excessively and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load on the wiring HC can be alleviated by deforming the flexible member.

Moreover, what supports the wiring HC may be not the fastening part A475 but a mere columnar part (a part not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar part and the rear plate part A480. Alternatively, it may be a binding band that is loosely wrapped around a fixing part separately formed on the main body box part A471, the rear plate part A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed by the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed, but may be configured to be movable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified.

Furthermore, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the extended position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the player's eyes.

In addition, the method of displacing the fastening part A475 may be such that the fastening part A475 is movably supported in a long hole, or the fastening part A475 may be configured to be tiltable using the main body box part A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking part be formed in the rear plate part A480 so as to allow the displacement of the fastening part A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening part A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support walls formed in the shape of walls on both sides of the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is disposed closer to the front than the board-side connector A493c. Although a case has been described in which the third connector A416e3 is connected from the back side, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed facing inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the board by extending it to the side surface of the rear case A310, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480, which is located on the back side of the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the detected plate part A455e is configured to be recessed from the end face of the detected plate part A455e that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing arrangement part A456b, and the rotation angle of the pin gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and then returned to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the driving (excitation) length of the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed between a mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and the arrangement is maintained, and a mode in which the arrangement is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position. After being displaced to the extended position, it can be switched further back to the retracted position.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A715 that irradiates light onto the rotating body A720 is formed from a flat member, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sheet-like substrate made of a flexible material. In this case, it is possible to easily arrange a substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating light onto the rotating body A720 on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotary body A720 is placed at a position where it can be seen by the player at all times, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player cannot see it. In this case, with the rotating body A720 placed in an invisible position, the first rotating member A721 is horizontally rotated about the vertical axis with respect to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped). By starting synchronous rotation in this state and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing rotation, it is possible to draw attention to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 while they are rotating. . This allows the rotation of the rotating body A720 to continue while the rotating body A720 is performing an effect that associates information useful for the player (for example, jackpot expectation level) with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 when stopped. It is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 operate independently, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tiltable forward from the lower end, and the production unit A710 is moved up and down when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the extended position, so that they touch each other. The production unit A710 may be configured to change to a tilted posture by receiving a contact load. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance that changes the attitude of the performance unit A710 by arranging the second displacement member A490. Note that the configuration that allows the presentation unit A710 to be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the elevating section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevating section.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shell portion A722 is made of an opaque material and blocks light irradiated toward the central rotating member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may be configured to have a light-transmissive portion. Thereby, the relationship between the attitude of the first rotating member A721 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the gear member to be meshed may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . Combining a first presentation member in which the rotational axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, and a second presentation member in which the rotational axis of the gear member to be meshed is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. It is possible to perform complex performances.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed closer to the outside of the operating unit A300, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the illumination board A416 into a C-shape concave from the outside to the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operating unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed closer to the inner side of the operating unit A300. It may be formed at a position closer to the outside of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operating unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board is disposed below the rotating body A720, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the illumination board is conducted to the second support part A735. The second rotating member A728 supported by the second rotating member A735 may be reached and the player may visually recognize the second rotating member A728 after the second rotating member A728 is electrically connected. In this case, unlike the second support part A735, the first support part A731 that supports the first rotation member A721 is difficult to transmit light, so the effect is to make the second rotation member A728 shine without making the first rotation member A721 shine. can be executed.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728, which can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a, transmits the light. Therefore, it is difficult to control the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a so that it reaches only the second rotating member A728 and not the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by making the second support part A735 conductive and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform effects that are difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first support part A731 disposed inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting part A735 disposed outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first support part A731 extended to the outside of the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. The extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be performed.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the area of the central rotating member A724 as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a changes due to the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the area of the central rotating member A724 as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a is configured to change when the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture or when a moving body protrudes from inside. Good too.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shell portion A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to move forward and backward between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear movement (sliding movement). Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged in the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotating member A724, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same drive source, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same drive source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be formed of a plate-like member formed to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured to overlap with the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence on the central rotating member A724 due to the attitude of the second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in front view is different, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape that remains the same when viewed from the front when the posture changes by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ directed on the virtual plane VS, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. Moreover, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not need to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-back direction, or the light-emitting unit A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light-emitting unit A715 (not limited to the front-back direction, but also a mixed displacement of front, rear, left, right, top, and The virtual plane VS may also be configured to change depending on the location of the virtual plane VS. In either case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on is changed while suppressing changes in the external shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of contact positions of the pin gear A3462 with respect to the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are arranged in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 with a large diameter, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455, and the position where the external protrusion A3464 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455. It may be configured such that it is shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pin gear A3462 abut against the irregularly shaped slide member A455 at the same position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner end (the opposite side of the detected plate portion A455e) in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction A416x when viewed from the rear). A wall portion perpendicular to the side surface of the portion may extend toward the pin gear A3462 side.

In this case, by arranging the orthogonal wall portions so as not to contact the circular arc wall portion A464 but to contact the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the orthogonal wall portions and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may When in contact, it is possible to generate a load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) on the pin gear A3462 while suppressing displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the transverse direction at the longitudinal end (into an L-shape), the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement The configuration may be such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced in conjunction with. That is, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion extending in the transverse direction of the second guide hole A422b, so that the transmission protrusion A455b moves in a direction intersecting with the direction A416x. , and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451.

In this case, when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion part A455c are engaged in the direction A416x. Displacement of the slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted. Thereby, even after the contact between the protruding plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted.

Note that the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to cause displacement along direction A416x, or may be configured to cause displacement in a direction intersecting direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be rectangular, triangular, semi-elliptical, or any arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured so that it becomes tapered toward the radially outer side (the width does not increase).

Note that this also applies to the case where a recess is formed in place of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it is preferable that the shape tapers toward the radially inward side (the width does not increase).

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetrical. In this case, if the first displacement member A440 is configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed in each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extending tip side of the arcuate wall portion A464 (the side opposite to the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall portion A464) is closer to the extending proximal end side. It may be configured such that the angle with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 is smaller than the side surface (on the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circumference of the arcuate wall portion A464).

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin gear A3462 at a constant speed is from the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position (beyond the extended position). The speed when displacing toward the retracted position side can be increased compared to the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side). That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

Note that when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced beyond the extended position to the side opposite to the retracted position. In the case where a recessed portion is formed in place of the external protrusion A3464, as the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the dimension of the recessed portion, the first displacement member A440 moves toward the retracted position. An example is a case where, after the displacement, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed out from the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and slides, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position.

In addition, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the protrusion dimension. After the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the side opposite to the retracted position, the contact between the outer diameter protrusion A3464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is released, and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides, resulting in a first displacement. For example, when the member A440 is displaced to the extended position (toward the retracted position), and when a recessed portion is formed in place of the external protrusion A3464, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is moved by the dimension of the recessed portion. An example is a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side as the first displacement member A440 is displaced.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be arranged at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may be provided to protrude toward the rear plate portion A480 side. . Further, the main body plate portion A6561 may be configured to have a thin wall (for example, a sheet shape). In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Furthermore, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is formed in an elongated shape, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed into a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be placed between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC over a wide range, increasing the possibility that rubbing can be suppressed by synchronously displacing the wiring HC and the main body plate part A6561. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held movably in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A is configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the projecting portion A6562 due to the load received from the wiring HC. It's okay. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the elongated hole (groove) allows the protruding portion A6562 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that allows rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed depending on the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so that the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 can be changed appropriately. can be moderately reduced.

Further, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path that combines rotation and sliding.

Although a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is reciprocated and rotationally displaced, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one rotation or more.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate part A6561 is disposed on the front side of the support box part A6470, and the support box part A6470 has a long through hole (an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate part A6561) that guides the protruding part A6562. It is also possible to form a configuration in which an elongated hole (along the elongated hole) is bored and the protruding portion A6562 protrudes toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 through the elongated through hole. In this case, compared to the case where the main body plate part A6561 is arranged between the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate part A6561 can be made available. This makes it easier to secure a space for the wiring HC to displace, and also improves the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate part A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480 (can also be constructed as a thick member).

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point for setting the player's pushing direction from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means that is pressed and operated by a player, the operating device has two states: a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is placed in a position where the operating means is more protruding from the player than in the first state. 2 states, and includes an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the near side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being oriented toward the side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the effect is performed in a manner that increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player at the advance position, it becomes easier for the player to operate the operating means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operation means to be highly strong. In this case, there are problems in that the operating means becomes heavier as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the push direction of the operating means is from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can easily perform vertical linear motion. By creating a slippage between the player's hand and the operating means that cannot be fully operated, the force of the push can be released.

Furthermore, given the player's playing posture, when pressing and operating the operating means centering on the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, so the force that the player applies to the operating means is naturally weakened. I can do it.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft located at a back side relative to the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is arranged in a rotary manner, and the operating means is arranged to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state. It is possible to prevent the person from performing an operation of slamming the operating means.

In addition, by placing your hand near the shaft and tilting your hand using that position as a fulcrum, you can easily push the operating means, so you can provide a new method of push-in operation that is less prone to acceleration. , it is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operating means with the palm facing up and down, and then pointing the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating the device by tilting it down, and a method of operating the device by placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft with the palm of the hand facing the operating device, then dropping the palm toward the operating device. be done.

A gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, characterized in that in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is an up-down direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the second state is maintained while ensuring operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent damage caused by a pushing operation in such a state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is capable of automatic operation, and includes a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is generated when the player performs a push operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine acts in a direction in which the game occurs, but does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is generated in the direction opposite to the player's operating direction. can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operations.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when retracting the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, and the drive means operates the operation device through the eccentric portion. It has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means can change the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state, In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to cancel the maintained state is rotated. By using the biasing means, the movement width of the operating device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operating modes by the urging means.

In gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , A gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force was caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since the operating means can be added with a movement mode in which it moves by following the maintenance means, the types of movement modes of the operating means can be increased. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and emits light toward the player, and the second state is better than the first state. However, from a player's viewpoint, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits more light from the player's viewpoint in the second state than in the first state. The irradiation range of the light is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the light, improving the performance effect, and making it difficult to press the operating means without aiming. By adopting this aspect, it is possible to reduce the force required by the player during operation.

In gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Features gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves towards and away from the display means, thereby creating a light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The key point is to keep the repulsion force small during normal use while being able to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the operating device has a first state and a second state in which the range of movement of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state. A game comprising: a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1, characterized in that the game machine B1 is equipped with a second drive means that generates a drive force that moves the operation means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation by a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the force to return the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means will be delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means will not be able to follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated hitting operations. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the biasing force weakly, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. By pushing back the operating means using the second driving means, the return can be made faster, allowing the player to enjoy repeated hitting operations.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous stroke determination means for determining whether or not a continuous stroke operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is activated based on the detection value of the continuous stroke determination means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive means based on the detection value of the repeated hit determination means, so that the player is not performing a repeated hitting operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press). The second driving means operates even when the player is performing an operation, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

The gaming machine B2 includes an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is placed at the end position, and an end detecting means for detecting whether the operating means is placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A moving direction determining means, comprising a positional difference detecting means for detecting a positional difference, and a moving direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the terminal end detecting means and the detected value of the positional difference detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of pushing back to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing when the player moves in the away direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being applied to the player's hand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operating means, and the second drive means includes a drive motor that rotates the eccentric weight, and the drive motor is elastically supported by the support frame. and a supporting means, the supporting means having a driving force that increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the terminal position. A gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts the support frame when the operating means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating the drive force separately from the drive force, it is possible to adjust the drive force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. Game machine B6 is characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is utilized. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means supporting the drive motor is moved in a direction away from the support frame (in a direction toward the operating means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near a terminal position of the operating means, the detection sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means a threshold value determination means for determining whether a measured value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, the threshold value determination means The driving force generated by the repulsive means increases when the measured threshold is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold than when the threshold determined by the threshold determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold. Characteristic game machine C1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on the ability of the player to operate the device lightly, the operating resistance will be low and there is a risk that the operating device will be damaged by the player's operation, while if it is supported firmly, the movement of the operating device itself will be reduced. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility of damage to the operating means, there is a problem in that the force required for operation by the player increases, making operating the operating means a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than the threshold value can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repelling means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, , characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

A gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, wherein after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means using spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation using spring elasticity, so even when the operating speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is generated without time delay. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means determines that when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the value measured by the threshold value determination means is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a movable region of an end of the repulsion means opposite to the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means that is opposite to the side that contacts the operating means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Damage to the drive means is prevented by cutting off the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the release means is configured to release the driving force when a load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being placed on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected) and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and while driving in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether it is being driven in the second direction.

Here, if it is determined whether transmission of the driving force can be canceled or not depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. This may cause a large load on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance when operating the operating means to create a performance is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction, or the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

An example of a method for releasing the transmission is to move the clutch in a direction that intersects the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. and engagement teeth that transmit driving force when they are in mesh with each other. A game machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that tapers with respect to the abutment surface in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force on the pressed contact surface in the engaged state. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engagement teeth that taper in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface, the engagement between the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to be separated from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the biasing force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear by separation, but is periodically restored. Thereby, when the player releases his/her hand, the button can begin to operate within a short period of time.

That is, when a button is activated "as an effect" and the player holds the button, one phase of the button's operation will pass. If the button moves from the end of the first phase when the player releases his/her hand in the middle, the period during which the button is stopped will be longer, and the feeling of ``starting to move because the player's load has been relieved'' will be reduced. I can escape.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to create the feeling that the player's load has been lifted and the player has started to move.

A game machine D4, which is any one of the game machines D1 to D3, wherein the engaging surfaces of the transmission means and the release means are formed into sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the distal end of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on that plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means It is possible to suppress movement in the direction toward and away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means is different depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are provided, and the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is as follows. Similarly, gaming machine D6 is characterized in that its operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is the same. Since the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the level of jackpot expectation, the player can be told how to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be watched over.

In addition, this difference in operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the driving means, so if the operating direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation level etc. without having to watch the operation of the operating means. I can do it. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., so it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance. can be made to monitor the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; , a biasing device that biases the operating device in a direction from the first position toward the second position, and an operating device that moves from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing device. terminating means for changeably forming a movement end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; a release load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the operation means, the release load means releasing the engagement, and the termination means at the end of the movement of the operation means; A game machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation means. There is a gaming machine in which the amount of displacement of the extending operation can be changed by a terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of displacement of the extending operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when the lock is released, so the phase of the cam when the lock is released is varied. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation were operated by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. Thereby, the terminating means can serve both as a driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means and as a driving means for moving the release load means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means can be caused to change based on the operation of the transmission means, so by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means, the release load means can be changed by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there are two methods: a method of shifting the rotation period of the cam and the protrusion; Examples include a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are de-synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the load release means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the operation of the load release means causes the load release means and the transmission means to be operated. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is possible to switch whether or not to operate synchronously.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronous operation of the load release means and the transmission means is performed, the synchronous state of the load release means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any members.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotational axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is provided with a rotating second rotating member. A game machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation periods are different, so that the second rotating member is operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means at a phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position. , you can expand the range of your production. For example, it is possible to realize an effect in which the end position is gradually moved away from the first position or an effect in which the end position is gradually brought closer to the first position using the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position that the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. In the gaming machine, the operating means is disposed at the first position, and the gaming machine includes: a vibrating means having a vibrating part that is configured to be movable between When the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, whereas when the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a state where it can come into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is in a contact state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, (See Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, so if the vibration is transmitted immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to detect the operation of the operating means before operating the vibration means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means. In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases his or her hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player and placed in the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating section is made to vibrate continuously, the player can only feel the vibration when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating part is generated before the player presses the button, the vibrating part can be vibrated even before the player releases his/her hand, regardless of the manner of the player's operation. vibrations can be transmitted to people.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is disposed in the separated state so as to overhang an area occupied by the operating means when it is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means changes to the abutting state by being moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The strength of contact between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration in response to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same way without any particular change in the driving mode.

A gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, positioning with respect to the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, thereby preventing the transmission of vibrations, and also suppressing the displacement that occurs in the vibrating means during vibration.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means come into contact. That is, by expanding and contracting the support means, momentum can be gained when the vibrating section moves in a direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a lower deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means than a deforming resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. .

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to finely set the direction in which the supporting means deforms when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating section and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, methods for varying the deformation resistance include a method in which rubber legs are extended along the operating direction of the operating means when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, and a method in which the supporting means surrounds the vibrating means. In the case of a rubber member, the rubber member is manufactured by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and the supporting means is a rail that guides the operating means to move along the operating direction. , a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

A gaming machine F6 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the portion that the vibrating section comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibrations are not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but through a receiving means that is a separate means from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore it is possible to suppress a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Furthermore, since vibrations can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation due to being surprised by the vibrations during the operation.

The receiving means may be, for example, the part of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the game balls are supplied, or the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples include parts that may be touched by hands, and housing parts that partially enclose operating means.

<One-touch installation between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the attachment part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; It is characterized by comprising: a driving means that generates a driving force for driving; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the transmission means includes a deformation part that elastically deforms due to overload. Game machine G1.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There are gaming machines equipped with the above (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player and the driving means generates a driving force to drive the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, the transmitting means There is a problem in that a load is accumulated at the connecting portion between the drive means and the drive means, and there is a risk that these connecting portions will be damaged.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, and the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the driving means and the transmission means, etc. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting part.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a rotatably supported cam member, the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member to the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion allows the transmission device to rotate to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of .

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation section has the roles of a part that elastically deforms the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a part that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified due to the dual use of the function. For example, separate fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion that is protruded parallel to the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a possibility that the number of members will increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is attached to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is higher than that of the rotational shaft in comparison with a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational shaft and the convex portion. A game machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which the rotation is made about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformable part different for each direction, the state after the deformable part is elastically deformed is better when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. This allows the protruding part of the cam member to be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is intended to move, thereby alleviating the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable part. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion, A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Since they come into contact with each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A game machine G6, which is any one of the game machines G3 to G5, and includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating even though the driving means is in operation, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the two, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the interval between the detection means for detecting the displacement becomes smaller, but the smaller the interval between the detection means, the more complicated and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft. In this way, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a portion of the cam member, without requiring the drive means to be driven for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Ball with thread anti-rattle structure. Game machine H>
In a game machine equipped with a foul ball passageway through which foul balls flowing back toward the firing device among the game balls fired into the gaming area can pass, the foul ball passageway not only allows passing of the falling game balls, but also allows the foul balls to pass through. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is equipped with a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutting blade is installed inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the firing device, and the game ball connected with the thread is driven into the gaming area. There is a gaming machine that has a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the thread is fired, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth, and the tension generated at that time cuts the thread. However, if the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball may not cut the thread completely. The ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of a string is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the string is fired at low firing strength, causing it to flow into the foul ball path and being returned to the player. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the playing area while grasping the one game ball that has been played, the string can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball path to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball and the other game ball are connected by a thread, an external load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the gaming area is connected to the other game ball. There was a problem that there was a risk that the government could manipulate the government and obtain fraudulent profits.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball path, the one-way obstruction means However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backward direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein the foul ball passage includes a bending part that bends a falling path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can rub against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending section is provided with a loading means on the inner corner side of the bend, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down, but applies a load to the object flowing backward.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the load means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. This can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5, which is the gaming machine H3 or H4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the outward movement of the foul ball path of the loading means, so that the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball path is prevented. When a load is applied, the load applied to the member on the thread can be prevented from weakening due to the load means being deformed outward of the foul ball path.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 is equipped with a receiving tray which is a tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door, and a payout which is a part that discharges game balls paid out from a payout device to the receiving tray. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge section is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which the thread guided into the gaming area is used to apply a load to the other game ball, the player intentionally hits the game ball that is being paid out, applies a load, and reduces the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball ejection part, which is the part that ejects the game balls paid out from the pay-out device, is placed in the receiving tray, which is the tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door. , a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the foul ball passage is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act was carried out in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball path was used to apply a load to the other gaming ball. In this case, the threads can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of holding the board surface. Game machine I>
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to accept the gaming means from the one side. The state changing means is capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state to an usable state, the state changing means changing the gaming means from an unusable state to an usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it comprises an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the game board can rotate in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine that is equipped with a fixing means to do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the operating position, so if the game board is not pushed in halfway, it is necessary to push it in again. There is a problem in that it is necessary to perform this repetitive work, which may reduce work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the proximity means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is brought into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is only half-hearted, the effect is that the approaching means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force to push the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side in response to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, since the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, it is difficult to remove the gaming means. This has the effect of improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means in response to setting the gaming means in an unusable state. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and it is possible to Since this is carried out in conjunction with making the means unusable, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 is provided with abutting means that receives a load from the gaming device when the state changing means changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so the operation of pressing the gaming means against the state changing means changes the state to the usable state as a series of steps. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means when the other side is approached, and the state changing means is A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the abutting means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 is provided with a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is such that the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is provided with a closing regulating part that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means changes the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains in an unusable state.

<An inverted cup and harness band prevents piano wire from rattling. Game machine J＞
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is connected to the gaming means. A gaming machine J1 comprising a placement means disposed on a path communicating with the outside, the placement means being configured to be able to suppress entry of objects from the outside at a plurality of locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention section to prevent fraudulent activities such as inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the fraud prevention section is located only at one location, and the effectiveness of fraud prevention is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path where there is a possibility that the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at multiple locations, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effectiveness of

In gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in that the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first location and the second means for suppressing the entry of the member from the outside at the second location. A game machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means has a different method for suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Compared to the case where the number of members is increased, entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

Note that the method of suppressing intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used to prevent entry by blocking a route, or a method may be used to prevent fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

A gaming machine J3 in the gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion regulating part formed in the shape of a cup that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the intruding member from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restriction part in the path from the outside to the gaming means. Features of gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, when an unauthorized person penetrates the access control part due to high heat, it is possible to detect changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (such as disconnection due to heat), thereby preventing external damage. The effect of suppressing the entry of members can be easily produced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the arrangement means includes a dissolving means that guides a member that has entered from the outside to a dissolving area that is far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means guides the member entering from the outside to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree of damage increases, it is possible to prevent members entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a 5-layer decorative board. It also involves fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means that are arranged opposite to each other along a first direction and connected at least one side; and a first means and a second means arranged along the first direction between the first means and the second means. A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means are arranged opposite to each other and connected by at least one side, and the first means and the second means are disposed along the first direction between the first means and the second means. There is a gaming machine that includes a third means (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by existing methods such as adhesion or screw fixing, but when the first means and second means are connected, the load along the first direction is There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged because it is applied to three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set in the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the third means is set in the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in an adjacent third direction and connected by fitting into each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means that are connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to disassembly of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside in the gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed to the outside, it is easy to check the state of the mating parts. be able to. As a result, even if a fraudulent act occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the fraudulent act can be discovered more quickly.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fastening The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any of gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it is provided with a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from being misaligned.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with abutting means that makes surface contact with the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means in a region where they face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, a distance equal to the dimension of the abutting means can be maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. I can do it. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by a load in the opposite direction. I can do it.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction when an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L of utilizing the curved light guiding means. As for points, not achieved>
comprising a light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed from the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means disposed opposite to the light guiding means and onto which the light passing through the light guiding means is projected; A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed facing the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a light guide plate that uniformly emits light entering from an end face (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, so in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the projection target means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion. The light emission intensity of the projection target means can be changed by changing the projection area.

In the game machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is more difficult to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light that passes through the convex opposing part, the light emitted from the light guiding means is focused on the concave opposing part. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light production.

The gaming machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection means with the light-guiding means in between and projects the light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means Since they are made of materials with substantially the same transparency, by allowing the same light to enter the light guiding means, it is possible to produce a light effect that is visually recognized through the projection means and a light effect that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. can be made different.

<Bass reflex speaker arrangement structure. Game machine M>
a first means and a second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to each other and forming an internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means arranged so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and effects are performed using sounds output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-16088). In such gaming machines, the vibration waves that advance toward the back side of the speaker body are propagated to the left-right center position of the gaming machine, and then are sent out to the outside of the gaming machine, where it is easy to create an effect that allows you to hear bass sounds. However, there was a problem in that the path length of the vibration wave was determined by the horizontal width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the playing machine By canceling the left and right width restrictions, the vibration waves can travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape extending from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, comprising a protruding portion that protrudes from the top, and a tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the interior space to the outside, and the opening is a passage member that is passed between the interior space and the exterior through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, and, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

A gaming machine M4 in the gaming machine M3, wherein the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protrusion and disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, there is a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means arranged below the support fastening means and performing a performance accompanying the game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the presentation means supports the support and fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that the support and fastening means can be supported by weight without compressing the space used for presentation. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop midway. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; In a gaming machine comprising a second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state and a non-following state in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, when at least the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means is displaced in the direction of the expansion and contraction movement of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so the performance is slow and the performance effect is insufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is reduced. , can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-follow-up state. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is a following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means due to the action of the resistance means, and a non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means can also be used. be able to.

A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player as having the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, When the attitude of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means changes accordingly, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and punch holes. As for points, not achieved>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and an accommodating means configured to be able to accommodate the first means, the accommodating means is an opening that receives the first means when accommodating the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause malfunction. .

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 is provided with a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. Means can be easily removed to the outside. This can prevent foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support section that supports the first means, and the second opening section is arranged on the opposite side of the support section with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support section.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the accommodation means includes a low water resistant part having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant part.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance part. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings have a shape based on a shape projected in a different direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured with shapes based on the shapes of solid objects in different directions. solid objects can be easily removed through the section.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the solid object partially blocks the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player. can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that a solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object continues to remain. .

<Points regarding devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shaped part protruding from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the glass frame (front frame) in which the operating handle is disposed is removable from the outer frame in which the gaming board is disposed (for example, (See Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the bottom of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, so there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom with your fingers, so there is room for improvement from the perspective of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shaped portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slips from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

Note that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and may be any arrangement that protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be provided so as to protrude in the vertical direction, or it may be provided so as to protrude toward the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that removably supports the first support means, and the protruding shaped portion is arranged so that the first support means is separated from a support position where the second support means is supported. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged as follows.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shaped portion is provided to protrude downward from the lower bottom surface at a supporting position away from a position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied. This makes it easier to hold the first support means. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to the second support means can be facilitated.

Note that the position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, when the first support means is supported at the front side of the second support means, the position may be closer to the front side, or when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end, the position may be closer to the front side. It may be located near the end, or it may be located on the opposite side of the pivot position with respect to the tray that stores the game balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed part recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means supports the recessed part with a gap between it and the recessed part. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is disposed facing the recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first supporting means is a gap formed by the recessed shape, so that the first means It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaving powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to positional displacement. That is, it is possible to prevent powder from accumulating and clogging the movable parts, causing malfunctions, and from accumulating powder at the detection location of the detection device, causing erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed portion is useful not only when not in operation (for example, when opening the glass frame to clear an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). This is effective even when the player is in the middle of the game or in a game waiting state (demonstration screen display state).

A gaming machine P4 in the gaming machine P3, wherein the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the part where the recessed shape part is formed from becoming extremely thin compared to other parts and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, by forming the recessed portion on the back side of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent and deformed in the inner and outer directions, so even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

Note that the load applied to the protruding shaped portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary storage, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when moving the first support means. An example is a load that is applied when something moved by a player or store clerk (such as a senryo box) collides with the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner that it abuts an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inner and outer directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contact means; and an operating section positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P4, it is possible to maintain the effect of the recessed portion while ensuring sufficient support thickness at the overlapping position that supports the abutment means, so that the operation portion can be It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means includes an impact damping means that is formed continuously between the contact means and the operating section and is configured to be able to damp an impact, and the impact damping means is arranged in the recessed shape section. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation section to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping part is increased. In this way, the impact can also be attenuated by deformation (bending) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a block member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the recessed portion includes a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed with a greater degree of recess than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, sufficient space is provided in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared to the first part. By forming the space of the second portion where the load applied by the recess is expected to be small to be small, the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion can be improved while maintaining high durability.

In addition, examples of the degree of recess include the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper the recess) and the width of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider the recess).

In addition, if the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of other parts, the concave shape corresponding to the other parts is The portion may be formed with a large degree of recess.

Further, the concave shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a gaming state such as a predetermined performance state or a specific gaming state). It is also possible to use the size of .

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shaped part is formed below the bottom part of the first supporting means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider as it goes forward. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front part where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is stood alone. Even in a storage method in which the first support means is placed alone on the floor, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without falling down.

Note that what is considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, a gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily independent on its own, and furthermore, the contact portion with the floor is limited to a protruding shaped portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid soiling of parts other than the protruding shaped part.

<Points regarding deformation based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first support means that supports the operation means, and a second support means that supports at least one of the first support means or the operation means, A gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as performance buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, countermeasures against positional deviations occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load when operating the operating means are insufficient. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from this point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in the descending distance, a gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means at the front side portion.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means is lowered excessively, the first support means is deformed, thereby suppressing the generation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (sink) excessively, the manner in which the operating means is supported can be simplified.

Note that the operating direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a downward direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front or back, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Moreover, as the mode of contact from the operating direction, various modes are illustrated in addition to the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operating direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that expands in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operating direction. In this case, the operating direction can be moved closer to the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force becomes larger as it moves closer to the center of the bottom, making it possible to effectively support the operating means. This can be done in a specific manner.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material and is configured to be able to hold a support part that supports the operation means and a game ball, and the first support means is configured to support the operation means through the first support means. A game machine Q2 characterized in that it comprises a game ball holding section connected to the game ball holding section.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding section.

In addition, if the first support means is made of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding part in a floating structure, the vibrations generated when the operating means is operated will directly hold the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls held in the game ball holding part from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, it is possible to prevent abnormal sounds from being generated.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, it may be configured such that vibration transmission is prevented in the first direction, while vibration transmission is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to perform a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, and the first supporting means is arranged so that the farther from the operating section the connection position with the gaming ball holding section is, the closer the first supporting section is to the front surface. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the gaming machine Q3 has the ability to reduce the absolute amount of positional deviation by moving the connection position closer to the back side around the operation unit, which is a position that is prone to misalignment due to operation. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, by arranging the connection position at the front side (closer to the player) at the far end of the operation part, which is a position where the position is difficult to shift due to operation. , it is possible to improve the design.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, a main body supported by the first supporting means, and an operating section and the main body. a connecting portion that connects, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the game machine is configured in such a manner that the connecting portion is surrounded by the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while ensuring a sufficient size of the operating section.

Note that various methods of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may each be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, this may be done by fitting or by fastening.

In addition, in the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at multiple positions along the operating direction of the operating section, the impact generated when the operating section is operated can be distributed and received at multiple fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided bodies can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional shift of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction in a direction that intersects (for example, perpendicularly) with the operating direction of the operating section, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating section and the direction of tightening of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A gaming machine Q5 in the gaming machine Q4, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersects with the operating direction of the operating section.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when operating the operation section, so that the fastening by the fastening means loosens during the operation, and the split body is fixed. can be prevented from being released.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the direction intersecting the operating direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is the direction that intersects a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (e.g. (direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

Also, for example, if the operating direction is along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction that intersects with the operating direction is along a plane that intersects with the predetermined straight line. The direction shown is an example.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in a direction intersecting a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the split body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being dislocated at the same time at both fastening locations, it is possible to prevent the fastening from loosening.

Note that the fastening locations of the divided bodies may be arranged at locations where the load is concentrated when the operating section is operated. In this case as well, another fastening point will be placed on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, so it is possible to prevent the division body from shifting its position or the fastening from loosening due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating section, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the dividing position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient in the divided position, and when the operating part moves in accordance with the operation of the operating part in the divided position, the operating part Where there is a risk of dust (dust, etc.) being generated due to friction between the dividing body and the dividing body, the detection means is placed away from the division position, which prevents powder (dust, etc.) from being detected by the detection means. can do. Thereby, the occurrence of false detection can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means that interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction when the game is possible, on the side of the divided body that is moving away from the divided body in the dividing direction (proximity and separation direction). A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the positional shift of the operating means with respect to the dividing body in the dividing direction.

The interference means may be formed so that it interferes with the operating means in the assembled state, but does not interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the divided body is made of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during assembly, making it easier to avoid interference with the interference means and maintaining ease of assembly. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be configured so that it does not interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere with each other when viewed in the direction of assembly before fastening (for example, when viewed in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly). In this case, while ensuring ease of assembly, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the divided body when play is possible.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed part that is recessed so as to be able to receive the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first supporting means is received in the receiving recessed part, the first supporting means is Even if the operating means and the first supporting means are displaced, the repulsive force from the receiving recess allows the operating means and the first supporting means to quickly return to their original positions.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle with a center of a radius of curvature disposed on the operating section side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be placed, and in addition, when the player grasps the operating section, it does not feel cramped. It can prevent you from feeling like. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and the operability of the operating section.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a striped portion processed into a striped shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the striped portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the striped portion is different for each region, the first support means has anisotropy in rigidity. can be configured.

Note that the design criteria for the extending direction of the striped portions are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be used to design an extension direction with a high yield, or when the load generated when operating the operating means acts in a different manner in each area, the best way to deal with the load may be determined. The direction may be the direction in which the striped portion extends.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
A game machine comprising a vibrating means and a light emitting means disposed at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be able to emit light, characterized in that the light emitting means has a width capable of being displaced with respect to the vibrating means. Game machine R1.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emitting effects.

To be more specific, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is placed behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving vibrations from the speaker. In the areas where the light is displayed, the light emitting effect cannot be produced and it becomes dark. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the gorgeous presentation can be performed becomes narrower. In the first place, the size of gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, is generally determined by standards, so securing a light emitting area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a range in which it can be displaced with respect to the vibration means, the light emitting means can receive the vibrations of the vibration device, and the light emitting means can be arranged at the vibration generation point of the vibration means. can be approached. As a result, the front area can be brightly viewed regardless of the location where the vibration of the vibration means is generated, so it is possible to improve the light emission performance.

Note that the form of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the device is not limited to a means that can vibrate actively, but may be a means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) in response to an external force load.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. Examples include a diaphragm included in a speaker, an exhaust port from which the back pressure of speaker vibrations found in a bass reflex speaker is discharged, and a path connected from a vibrating part to the exhaust port.

The vibration device may be a vibration device driven by rotation (for example, a vibrator) or a vibration device that generates vibration by linear drive (for example, a voice coil motor).

Note that the mode of close arrangement is not limited in any way, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means, and in that case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or the direction in which the light emitting means is stacked from the left and right ends. It may also be in a direction in which it is inclined.

A gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, and the light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R1, the light emitting board tends to be displaced (vibration, positional shift, etc.) due to the influence of vibrations generated when the vibration means outputs sound. While it is possible to change the display mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibration means that outputs sound. ) can be increased.

Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of a light-emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibrations generated by the vibration means and a light-emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the display mode of the light-emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes a holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the lamination direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means holds the light emitting substrate in the lamination direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of a gaming board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the holding means from being displaced along with the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if no fastening force is applied (for example, the holding means is simply prevented from coming off), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

Furthermore, the expression "non-fixed" does not mean that large displacements are allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting board to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting board can be determined (stable front and back position, allowing small vibrations), and the shape of the light emitting board can be By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and back with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in directions other than the front and rear directions (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of vibrations generated from the vibration means on the light emitting board compared to when the light emitting board is fixed to the holding means in the same way as the vibration means, thereby improving the positional stability of the light emitting board. can be increased.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means; regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, the fixing means moving toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction; Gaming machine R4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the advancing direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the advancing direction is restricted, even if the fixation by the fixing means becomes loose (even if some of the fixing means become loose), the displacement of the fixing means will be less than the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of progress. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R2 to R4, a change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting board is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting board. can be done.

Thereby, by designing the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in different ways, it is possible to produce an excellent effect. For example, a surface emitting means that produces uniform light emission by surface emitting is arranged as the first refracting means that receives and refracts the light irradiated from the first displacement region, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show high brightness light to the player by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). By doing so, it is possible to perform an innovative light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) differs from region to region.

Note that the manner in which displacement is suppressed is not limited at all. For example, the mode of suppression may be determined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or the mode of suppression may be determined by the manner in which the light emitting substrate is held.

For example, in terms of the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the areas located at the same position from each vibration means are such that the influence from one vibration means is canceled out by the influence from the other vibration means. , displacement may be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5 includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing part arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the opposing portion are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing part, the fastening relationship deteriorates further when the fastening screw becomes loose. This can be prevented.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as to what to do after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, if a tightening screw becomes loose, it may be configured to be able to detect the loosening electrically, or an opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibrating device to detect the loosening of the tightening screw. It may be configured so that if the device is vibrated when the device is loosened, an abnormal noise is generated and the user notices the loosening, or the device may be configured so that the loosened portion is repaired through regular maintenance without providing any special notification.

Any one of the game machines R1 to R6 includes a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting board, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deforming in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. A gaming machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is configured in such a manner that it is easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as expanding and contracting, and the favorable and unfavorable effects will change periodically. This is not desirable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that is reduced. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in situations where the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the direction in which the member and the second member face each other is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to vibration by the vibration means, and the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed together can be increased. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the printed circuit board.

Note that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed such that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load generated on the connecting means may be configured to vary in each direction.

Further, the manner in which the load is switched in the direction of pressing against each other is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Features gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical philosophy of the side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the component>
A light emitting means configured to be able to emit light; and a light guiding means configured to be able to guide light; A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide means; and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that LED light enters from the end of a plate-shaped member and exits from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 (see official bulletin). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, wherein the light guide means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, even if the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. It is possible to perform an effect that causes the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine S1 or S2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, the accommodating means supporting the light emitting board and the light guiding means. a supporting means fixed at least at a first position, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is located at a position outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming machine S3 can loosen the fixation at the first position while the shielding means is assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guide means, and maintenance efficiency can be improved.

Note that the mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guiding means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch it but still be able to see it, or it may be constructed so that the player cannot touch or see the light guiding means. You may do so.

In addition, when the first positions are formed at multiple locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the multiple first positions may be located outside the outer shape of the shielding means. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting board is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means is in the shape of a long plate, and the first position is located at the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3, the light guide means is shaped like a long plate and the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, so that the fixation of the first position can be loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guiding means, the positional deviation of the light guiding means can be easily corrected.

Specifically, by compensating for the positional deviation of the light guiding means by deforming the light guiding means in the lateral direction, or by compensating for the slippage caused by applying a strong load, Even if only one end is loosened and the other end remains fixed, the positional shift of the light guiding means can be easily corrected.

Furthermore, in the case of a support mode in which the light-emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light-guiding means, the degree to which the light-emitting substrate is supported by the support means can be weakened as the light-guiding means bends and deforms. Therefore, even without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means, by loosening the fixation at the first position and flexing the light guiding means, the degree of support for the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and in this state, a load is applied to the light emitting substrate. By giving , it is possible to correct the positional shift of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, there is a design basis in which the external shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not shift to the extent that it completely deviates from the irradiation direction. The adjustment range may be just enough to correct the positional deviation in the area (small adjustment range), or based on a design that secures a large adjustment range in advance, the part to be irradiated by the light guide means can be adjusted in the irradiation direction based on the external shape of the light emitting means. The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect that is visually recognized during the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when preparing gaming machines with the same configuration to be able to play games with different playability (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications), it is possible to do so without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part. Since the aspect of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guiding means, the burden (for example, cost) associated with manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited at all. For example, any aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Moreover, the term "edge" is an expression of the intention to avoid being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be placed at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is reduced. A gaming machine S5, characterized in that the displacement prevention part includes a fixing part to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, and misalignment or chipping of the wiring will directly affect the malfunction of the light emitting means. Preferably, the structure is such that misalignment between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

Considering the performance effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means should be able to be easily aligned in case of misalignment with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that misalignment with the light emitting substrate should not occur easily. , it may be better to hold it on the supporting means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, there is a risk that the light guiding means and the shielding means will collide with each other, resulting in poor appearance, so it may be better to hold the light guide means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a part that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the support means serving as the base in consideration of strength. As described above, various support modes were expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the positional shift prevention section, the mutual positioning of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily performed during assembly without directly fixing them. Not only this, but also the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily maintained during the game.

Note that the form of the positional displacement prevention section is not limited at all. For example, the recesses and recesses may have the same shape and can be fitted, the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a shape that remains unchanged along the assembly direction, or the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a convexity that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guiding means includes a main body, a separating extending portion extending from the main body toward a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extending portion. an opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means and having a cross-sectional shape of A game machine S6 characterized in that it is provided with a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total internal reflection light emitting section from entering the parts other than the opposing extension part, so that the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part can be suppressed from entering the part other than the opposing extension part and the part other than the separating extension part and the opposing extension part. It is possible to make a clear boundary between the two and to make it possible to perform an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) with a short boundary.

Note that the manner in which total reflection is performed is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, a combination thereof, etc.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guiding means is formed from a frame shape that forms a covering part covered by the light emitting board and an outer shape of the covering part, and has a similar shape to the outer shape of the light emitting board. A gaming machine S7 comprising: a frame portion provided with a frame portion, wherein the opposing extending portion extends from the covered portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S6, since light can be made to enter the frame from the connection point, the effect of the light emitting production of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension part is By functioning as reinforcing ribs, it is possible to improve the strength of the light guiding means.

According to this, if the frame extends to the rear of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the light emitting direction is illuminated.

In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized in that it is spaced apart.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension part, an end part where light can enter the frame part in the longitudinal direction and an end part where light incidence is restricted are provided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light emitting effect using the frame can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at a projected position of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separation extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is reduced. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving a sense of discomfort to a player while keeping the values uniform. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical philosophy of top light emitting means. Points for changing the way the light is emitted depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting means configured to be able to emit light; and a light-receiving means configured to be able to receive light, the light-receiving means having a first light-receiving means that receives light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first manner; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured such that LED light enters from the edge of a planar member and exits from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in response to a difference in distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, even if the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that causes the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodation means for accommodating the light emitting means, and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodation means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting board. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the gaming machine T3 comprises a dividing means for dividing an area into which the light receiving means is divided, and the light receiving means is configured so that the way the light is illuminated changes depending on the area divided by the dividing means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is placed at the boundary where the way the light receiving means illuminates changes, so the way the light receiving means illuminates can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the game is played. Thereby, even if the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light-emitting production using the light-emitting substrates.

A game machine T4, in the game machine T3, wherein the light emitting board is aligned by the partitioning means supporting the light emitting board from a direction opposing the biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, assembly work can be facilitated by making it easier to align the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light-emitting substrate can be easily aligned during use. It is possible to suppress misalignment between the partitioning means and the partitioning means.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed in correspondence with the shape of the light emitting section disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means includes a through hole that is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partitioning means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion part can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting part disposed on the light emitting board and does not receive the insertion part, and the non-insertion through hole is A gaming machine T6, characterized in that an opening is formed in such a manner that the further away from the light emitting board it is, the opening becomes larger, and the surface thereof is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is made larger compared to the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface that intersects with the light-conducting portion, and the cut-out boundary surface is a part of the light-conducting portion. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the gaming machine T8 is arranged at a position where the front-rear surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it moves forward, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting section extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting section is formed in a line shape including the base end of the insertion section. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means is made easier to see as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from point light sources). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means that generates a fixing force in a first direction, and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by comprising: second fixing means that generates a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the second direction.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is constructed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front and rear directions (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the shape of the structure is determined by the arrangement of the fixing means, resulting in a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when inserting a fastening screw that is inserted into the fixing means in the front-rear direction, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be placed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. In other words, the area where the fixing means can be placed actually coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, so the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be placed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting board from the back side needs to be made larger than the light emitting board to accommodate the fixing means. This limits the size of the light emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw that fixes the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are inserted along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the player is inserted, it is possible to secure a wider performance area on the side that is visible to the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that its outer surface includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, since the external surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the external surface is about to deform due to external force, there is sufficient resistance. A force can be generated, and deformation of the external surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force is provided at at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are composed of resin molded products and the cutting direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the cutting direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

Note that the structure of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the fixing from loosening, or a loosening regulating means that restricts further loosening when the fixing becomes loose.

The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means includes a reporting means capable of reporting a fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that loosening of the fastening screw can be detected at an early stage.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically reporting such as a detection means such as a sensor, or it may be a structural means that causes a change in appearance. Structural means include, for example, a transmission change means that changes the transmission intensity of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light production change means that blocks light emission from the inside and generates a shadow that can be seen from the outside, An example of this is a vibration notification means that makes contact with a vibrating part of a vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or intensify the vibration to alert the player.

Any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4 includes a third means disposed between the first means and the second means, and the third means is arranged between the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means can generate resistance force in a plurality of directions as component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may have a configuration in which the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, by setting the side where the gap between the first surface and the second surface is wider as the first means side and the side where the distance is narrower as the second means side, while ensuring a wide area that the player can see, the side that is not visible can be The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can interfere with each other when viewed from the front, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the images can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, in any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, wherein the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in pairs with predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, since the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged as a pair with a predetermined interval, the effect of one of the fixing means Deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, loosening of the fixing means can be avoided.

<The rigidity of the game board compensates for the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and a facing means whose edges are arranged opposite to the game board, the facing means has proximity parts arranged close to the game board on the left and right edges. , a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area, and a back case in which a movable unit and the like are disposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, making it difficult to secure enough space for the arrangement of movable units, etc. The problem was that it was difficult.

In particular, in right-handed machines where the game is played with the right hand in a variable probability state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the gaming area, so It was required to secure an internal space in the back case on the back side of the flow path (flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, since the formation of the proximal portion is asymmetrical, the arrangement of the left and right edges of the means facing the game board can be made asymmetrical, so that either the left or right Instead of sacrificing the internal area of the opposing means, it is possible to easily secure the internal area of either the left or the right opposing means. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the means facing the game board can be improved, and sufficient space can be secured for the arrangement of movable units, etc., and the degree of freedom in presentation that can be seen by players through the game board can be improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed play channel) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a moving character, or by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

Note that the manner in which the proximal portion is formed is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, it may be placed away from the game board, or it may be a combination thereof.

Note that the form of the proximal portion is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the connection part (contact part) used for connection with the game board is not formed, or to suppress the area occupied by the connection part (contact part) and then (contact portion) may be arranged.

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction in which the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, or the functional part (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened) disposed in the proximal part may be asymmetrical. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or other direction), or the number of formed fastening parts may be left-right asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement part in which the proximal part is formed at an end on the game board side and is disposed opposite to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximal part is formed in a direction in which the proximal part is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement part. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by having an asymmetrical configuration.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement parts can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. Note that the form in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction on both the left and right sides), or may be formed in a direction that intersects the left and right sides (for example, a perpendicular direction).

Examples of the forming direction include the extending direction (installing direction) in which the plate-like portion is extended, the recessing direction (shaving direction) in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximal portion includes an opposing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board, and an opposing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared to a portion on the left side of the gaming board. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the right side of the gaming board has a larger proportion of the opposing sides than the opposing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the horizontal width occupied by the adjacent portion can be made narrower on the right side of the game board than on the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4, which is any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, and includes a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. Note that the arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts the opposing means), or it may be arranged at a position away from the opposing means (including a position where it abuts the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it comes into contact with at least one of the game board or the facing means).

In gaming machine ZA4, gaming machine ZA5 is characterized in that the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (secure rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member to the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping part that overlaps the outermost surface of the opposing means in front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in designing the interior of the gaming board, so while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength (ensuring rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the opposing means may include a non-contacting portion that does not contact the gaming board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the gaming board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contacting part is used as the location for the drive device of the variable winning opening, and the drive device It can be effectively used as a path for wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or as a location for a light emitting device.

In any of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is formed of a resin material, the opposing means includes a presentation means disposed between the game board, and the front end of the presentation means is arranged between the game board and the game board. A gaming machine ZA8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be placed in front of the front end of the opposing means.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the presentation means can also be expanded to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
A game comprising: a light emitting means that irradiates light to a predetermined light emitting area; and a displacement means configured such that a first position that at least partially overlaps with the light emitting area when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of a displacement section. A gaming machine ZB1, wherein the light emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that a light emitting device and a displacement device overlap when viewed from the front (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem in that the light emitting means and the displacement means were only visible individually, and the presentation effect using the overlapping was insufficient. That is, since the displacement means is disposed in front of the light emitting means, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means, resulting in a problem that the presentation effect is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, so that it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (attitude) of the displacement means, the light emission mode of the light emitting means disposed on the displacement means, etc. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and the like. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means, and the like. Examples of the orientation (attitude) of the displacement means include cases where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, cases where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and cases where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

Examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means include a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the side away from the displacement means, lights up, blinks, or turns off. is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case in which the light emission mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player can be improved while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting section is disposed, and a refracting means arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting section, and the substrate A gaming machine ZB3, characterized in that the refraction means includes a first refraction section that is arranged outside the possible area when viewed from the direction, and the refraction means overlaps the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light that is visually recognized through the first refracting section is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting section and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. It can be expressed by

In addition, by narrowing the area in which the substrate is formed, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components, such as a drive device that generates a driving force for the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the light emitting means occupies a small space. Therefore, the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacing means can be suppressed, and the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacing means can be secured to the maximum extent.

Note that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be compared. The comparison may include the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and that are displaced.

In any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. A gaming machine ZB5, characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means that is visually recognized through the possible area is determined by determining at which position in the displacement section the displacement means is arranged. It can be changed by

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the gaming machine ZB6 is characterized in that the possible area is arranged at the center of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be viewed.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner in which the possible areas are arranged is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, they may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is in one place), or they may be circular (arc) surrounding the window.

Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the board is not provided with a fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side. ZB7.

According to the game machine ZB7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and also to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from appearing in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, in the gaming machine ZB7, further comprising a covering means that is covered in such a manner as to cover the space between the possible area and the board when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the possible area and the board is hidden by the covering means, there is no possibility that the visibility of light may deteriorate near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 is provided with a board holding means for holding the board, the board holding means is provided with a gap forming part that forms a gap to facilitate assembly of the board, and the gap forming part is A game machine ZB9 characterized in that it is closed in an assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part facilitates the assembly of the board, and it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and for positioning the other members.

In any of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment can be generated starting from the end on the possible area side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the board cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and cutoff>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means in a predetermined state. A gaming machine comprising a transmission means, wherein the transmission means includes a transmission part that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the drive means, the transmission part transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means. A game machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement means can be suppressed from being displaced when the displacement means is not brought into contact with the portion.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar section, it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar section while maintaining the posture of the displacement member. There was a problem with that.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission section is not in contact with the transmission section, so the transmission section can be used for other effects while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

Note that the mode of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

Note that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or the elastic force of a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) with a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member that functions as a stopper. It may also be in a form where it is done. Furthermore, examples of the suppression possible include a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (regulating) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmitting means includes a forming part formed along a movement locus of the transmitting part, and the forming part is configured such that the transmitting part is non-aligned with respect to the displacing means in the moving direction of the displacing means. A game machine ZC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of contact.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming part and the displacing means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacing means against external forces is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming part extends from the transmitting part along the displacement direction of the transmitting means, and the distance between the forming part and the displacing means is longer than the distance between the transmitting part and the displacing means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, in the opposing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means, a part where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a part where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially separated. You can shift the target.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional section formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and a function part formed on the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. the other side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the formation part, and the other side functional part is formed on the outside of the movement locus of the formation part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC3, the movement direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming part can be set to one side.

In any of gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to move the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. An embodiment may also be adopted in which the ratio of the applied driving force is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

A gaming machine ZC6, characterized in that the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Note that the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced, or it may be configured such that the transmission or cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed. It is also possible to use one that does not displace.

Furthermore, in the case where the timing includes synchronized displacement, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7 characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set to be opposite to each other in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually visible in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means Even if the performance area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective performance can be performed.

Note that the form of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of displacement means laminated in the front and rear may be extended to a common area at different times, or the initial arrangement may be such that the displacement means are laminated in the front and back, but the plurality of movable members pass through a common area during movement. It may be configured.

<The load generating part catches up and makes contact, preventing the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine comprising a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to displace the first displacing means by displacing in a predetermined direction, the second displacing means comprises: The first displacement means includes a load generation section that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the part is configured to be able to separate from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and come into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. ZD1.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the cylinder part moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may deviate from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. Even if the first displacement means is disposed at an unintended position, this can prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction to the predetermined portion with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to give money to players.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generation part moves toward the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the one end in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a drive means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating section is arranged in contact with the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction than the loaded section. A gaming machine ZD3 is characterized by a close contact.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generation section and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if timing accuracy is low, it is possible to easily maintain the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from their terminal positions while abruptly setting the first displacement means and the second displacement means to stop.

In addition, by providing a part that takes measures against the rare occurrence of excessive movement of the second displacement means at a location different from the loaded part that receives the load in each drive force transmission, the loaded part Even if it is deformed, the fail-safe function can be performed without any problem.

A gaming machine ZD4, which is one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, further comprising a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in a predetermined direction by the restriction means, the second displacement means is It can be independently displaced with respect to one displacement means.

Note that the mode of the regulating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that moves in and out and engages in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement means, it may be restricted by gravity or an urging force of an elastic member, or it may be a part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

Any one of gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means is configured to detect that the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZD5, comprising a detected part whose position is detected by a means, and wherein the load generating part comes into contact with the detected part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load upon contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life span that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, detection failure based on damage to the detection piece can be determined. It is possible to know when to replace the displacement means (maintenance time).

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the loaded section. The gaming machine ZD6 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine ZD6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first displacement means can be operated in a plurality of directions.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the gaming machine ZD7 is characterized in that the loaded section and the predetermined section are arranged at a predetermined distance apart in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, so that the loaded part The area required for arranging the and predetermined portions can be narrowed.

<Technical idea to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of tracking means>
In a game machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area, and a follow-up means that follows the displacement of the displacement means, a prevention that prevents a predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side. A gaming machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of a displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the length of the wiring is set in comparison with the displacement means, which has the advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form temporary fixing parts in various parts of the displacement means to temporarily fix the wiring to prevent relative displacement, and in addition, it is necessary to place the displacement means in a predetermined position while running the wiring through the temporary fixation parts. It usually takes a long time to assemble because it has to be assembled one by one. This poses a problem in that it may lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in design and a decrease in assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZE1, the following means, such as wiring, is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, so that the following means is not damaged by rubbing against the displacement means. Can be suppressed. This eliminates the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing parts on the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the game machine ZE1, the game machine ZE2 is characterized in that the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs as the displacement means is displaced.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in such a manner that it can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacing means changes as the displacing means is displaced. Compared to the case where the position of the following means is fixed with a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the following means can be reduced.

Note that the form of the prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the following means can be wrapped, or a claw-like part which can hold the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar part, for example, the columnar part may be formed as a fastening part used for fastening and fixing members together, or used for positioning when assembling members. It may also be formed as a positioning part.

Further, the form of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it may be a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-shaped performance member that assists in the performance, or it may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates a biasing force to assist the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be supplied to the displacement means in a good manner.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means largely protrudes to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be placed on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is not necessary to construct an escape portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 is characterized in that it includes a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visible to the player. Note that the term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is the edge in a front view.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the gaming machine ZE6 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at the outer edge of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the external shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides a rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is disposed on a straight line passing through the first axis. The gaming machine ZE7 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the gaming machine ZE8 is characterized in that the displacement means includes a guide section that guides the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent friction with the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

Gaming machine ZE9 is characterized in that the guide section extends in a direction perpendicular to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following means is directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in a pulling direction from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the following means. Thereby, the entire following means can balance the load applied from the guide section.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a direction in which it loosens when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, excessive load on the following means is suppressed by absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the following means. can do.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11 is provided with a positioning means in which the following means is arranged between the displacement means and a positioning section for positioning the positioning means, the positioning section being A gaming machine ZE12 characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, it is possible to avoid the positioning section from encroaching on the displacement space of the following means, so that the displacement of the following means is reduced due to the displacement of the displacing means. It is possible to minimize the load caused by

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement part (weak displacement part) and a displacement set larger than that of the first displacement part. a second displacement part (strong displacement part), and the first displacement part is arranged between the second displacement part and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, since it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

Note that the manner of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in multiple directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

A gaming machine ZE14 in the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, wherein the preventing means includes a protruding part that protrudes from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled from above to the arranging means while the arranging means supports the following means which sag due to its own weight, so that the following means and the arranging means can be assembled from above to the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical philosophy that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) with forward and reverse rotation>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the drive means, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means, The driving means is configured to be operable in a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the first direction, and the displacement means A game machine ZF1 is configured to be able to be displaced in a first displacement mode driven by the first drive mode and a second displacement mode driven by the second drive mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as follows (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means only changes depending on the length of driving the drive device in the forward direction, and the drive direction of the drive device can be switched between forward and reverse. Even if the first displacement means and the second displacement means were to be displaced together. Therefore, there has been a problem in that the degree of improvement in performance effect achieved by employing a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as a drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. It is possible to sufficiently improve the performance effect used.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it includes a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects with the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. It is possible to create a glittering performance that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmitting means, and the transmitting means is configured to suppress the displacement of the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode or the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppressing means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the transmission means is unintentionally displaced when the transmission of driving force is suppressed by the displacement suppressing means, so that the transmission means is displaced in an unintended manner. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Moreover, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained at a high level compared to the case where the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means with an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easily visible to the player.

Note that the form of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, an engagement device that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper device, or a resistance device that generates resistance due to its own weight may be used, or in cases where the resistance due to its own weight is likely to be insufficient (for example, when the displacement of the displacement means In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), it is not possible to suppress the idling motion by the force of gravity. Therefore, for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance is variable depending on the displacement mode may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppressing area is lower than a predetermined speed. , the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 is arranged such that it can be detected.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means. It can be used for both detection.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotationally displaces the first displacement means centering on the first axis, and a second displacement means rotationally displaces the outside of the first displacement means centering on the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, and configured to be able to suppress displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode, so that this suppression is possible. In a state where the second displacement means is placed between the player and the first displacement means and blocks the field of view, there is a case where the second displacement means is placed between the player and the first displacement means and blocks the field of view. It is possible to configure two performance modes in which the second displacement means does not block the second displacement means, and in addition, displacement is also possible in a drive mode in which the displacement of the second displacement means is not suppressed, so the performance by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three displacement modes. be able to.

A gaming machine ZF6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmission means includes a light transmission means formed from a light-transmitting material on a side connected to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmission means facilitates the assembly of the displacement means, and the light emission effect is achieved by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of making it possible.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotates and displaces about a first axis, and a transmission means of the first displacement means that rotates and displaces about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outward from a connection position of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characteristic game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means. This makes it unnecessary to provide a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
a first operating means configured to be operable by a player; a second operating means disposed at a different position from the first operating means and configured to be operable by a player; A gaming machine ZG1 comprising: a load generating means disposed on the second operating means side and configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a plurality of operating devices and a drive device for performing an effect to drive the operating devices (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, which increases the space required to arrange each operating device and tends to limit the number of operating devices that can be arranged. In addition, there are problems in that the cost increases due to the increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, so the load generating means is connected to the first operating means and the second operating means (i.e. , a plurality of operating means). Thereby, the space necessary for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operating means that can be arranged can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the form of the load generation means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that is capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means that generates a load at a predetermined period like a pump, or a means that is composed of an arm member whose posture changes according to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the aspect of the load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or the load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be transmitted in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine ZG2 characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means in the gaming machine ZG1.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG1, it is possible to transmit the load to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a game ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means includes a cover that at least partially covers the first operating means from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3 characterized in that it is disposed in an installation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the hand and fingers of the player who operates the first operating means are sandwiched between the first operating means and the first operating means. In this way, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, the covering means may be placed in a position where the player's fingers can easily pass during the process of movement of the player's fingers, such as bringing the player's finger close to the first operating means and then removing the finger from the first operating means after the operation is completed. (By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from a direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers), it is possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player while the fingers are moving.

Further, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the player's fingers come into contact with a high probability when operating the first operating means, the load on the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

Note that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generation means in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a different position from the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means is interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and is configured to be able to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means. A gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the intensity of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the intensity of vibration transmission to the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG3, it is possible to concentrate load transmission to the first operating means side.

A gaming machine ZG5 in the gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured to be able to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means operate (vibrate) in conjunction with each other due to the load applied to the pachinko machine by a player, etc., when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means It is possible to perform an effect in which the operating means and the second operating means are strongly moved (vibrated).

A gaming machine ZG6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, and is equipped with a holding means that holds the load generating means so as to be displaceable, and the holding means is equipped with a guide section that guides the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by specifying the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent problems such as the displaced member being displaced by the vibration of the load generating means unintentionally colliding with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generation means itself, if the load generation means is guided in the desired direction, the load generation means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

A gaming machine ZG7, characterized in that the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction crossing the direction in which it is guided by the guide section.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. It is possible to displace the load generating means in different manners. Thereby, the performance effect of the load generation means can be improved.

Note that various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may be configured to intersect with the guiding direction of the guide section, or the load generating means may be provided between the holding means and the second holding means. It may also be configured such that a flexible member is interposed therebetween, and the displacement occurs due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means as covering means (P9 policy 2)>
The covering device comprises a frame means having a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be able to vibrate, A game machine ZH1 characterized in that the means includes a permissible part that is allowed to be displaced, and is configured to be able to transmit vibrations of the vibrating means via the permissible part.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a front frame and a vibration means disposed in front of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that vibrations exceeding a predetermined intensity are not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the perspective of vibration production. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed on the covering means and displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibrations can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing vibrations by displacement of the covering means, transmission of vibrations to the frame means side can be suppressed. This makes it possible to increase the permissible vibration intensity of the vibration means.

Note that the form of the permissive portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode that assumes displacement of slides, links, gears, etc., and displacement occurs due to the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or it may be made of a material or structure that is different from other parts. It may be of a flexible configuration and may be displaced when overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the permissible amount of displacement in the horizontal direction. .

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing part is maintained by horizontal displacement, while the player places a hand on the covering means, etc. in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being excessively displaced and causing the player's posture to be disturbed. That is, by keeping the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

A gaming machine ZH3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is constructed in the shape of a bag with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in the shape of an open bag, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite to each other. It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means, which contact each other and transmit vibrations. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the main board, ball passage, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement section disposed on the frame means side, the frame means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section, and the vibration means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section; The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the support portion has a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing vibration transmission to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement part is Compared to a case where the vibration means is hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibration means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to largely displace the covering means on which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering part and a second covering part having lower deformation resistance than the first covering part, and the vibrating means A gaming machine ZH5, characterized in that the game machine ZH5 includes an abutting part that is connected to the first covering part and the second covering part and can locally come into contact with the first covering part.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally abutting the first covered part with high deformation resistance and the abutting part, the abutting position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covered part with respect to the contact position.

Any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5 is provided with a ball firing operating means operated to fire a game ball toward a gaming area, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball firing operating means and the ball firing operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by using a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacing objects>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a light emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and configured to be able to perform a light emitting effect (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no disposed member that can be displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emitting effect because the data capacity was compressed and the board became large for the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement of the displacement means prevents interference with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring this to be possible, the mode of the light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the mode of light emission can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and the size of the board can be reduced by eliminating the need for data for control and the need for a circuit for control. can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

Note that the mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, rotation, linear sliding, or displacement along a predetermined curve may be used. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide coincides with a predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide crosses the predetermined direction. The outer shape can be easily maintained.

Note that the form of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects with the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, or it may be configured such that the member protrudes from the inside and is scaled up or down even if the posture does not change. The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

The form of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around the irradiation target means, or it may be configured to slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiation target means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the manner in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may also be the form.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed in position or may be configured to be movable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacing means, or the light emitting means and the displacing means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that it slides toward and away from the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means, or it moves around the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means. It may also be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or it may be one that can be switched between lighting and extinguishing.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the gaming machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . Note that, according to this, the irradiation target means may be a displaceable means or a non-displaceable means.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve attention to the irradiated means.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be a slow displacement (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4, which is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, wherein the irradiation means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make different parts illuminated and highlighted by light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the external shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, a gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that, while the direction in which the irradiated means reflects light is the same, at least one of the amount of light or the color of the light is different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, a non-radiator configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated means with light in an irradiation manner such that the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized unnecessarily darkly.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiation means can be placed in a shielding position where it can shield the first irradiation means and the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means. and a second irradiated means configured such that the first irradiated means has an area of the light emitting means when viewed in the optical axis direction compared to a case where the second irradiated means is not disposed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7, characterized in that the second irradiation target means is configured to be smaller when it is placed at the shielding position.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of blocking light can be improved. Note that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light onto the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect with the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8 is provided with a driving means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiation target means and a displacement means disposed around the irradiation target means, and the irradiation target means A game machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface thereof faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position. .

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means ( For example, the switching timing between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

Note that the displacement mode of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis perpendicular to the display surface of the display area.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiation means or the irradiation means has a surface facing the light emitting means, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed toward the player.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light depending on whether the displacement means is placed in the first position or the second position. The difference in the extent to which light travels toward the player can be increased.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A game characterized in that in any of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 Game board (gaming means)
14 Front frame (closure means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of the receiving plate)
50 Lower tray (part of the receiving tray, part of the game ball holding part)
51 Operation handle (part of the first operation means, ball firing operation means)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage section (foul ball passage)
159 Opening/closing regulation section (occlusion regulation section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion restriction part, part of elimination means)
180 Movable binding member (part of placement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of the second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of the continuous hit determination means, part of the position difference detection means, part of the movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous stroke determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous stroke discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 Opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connecting pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 Front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
500 Right panel unit (direction means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate part (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib portion (contact means)
540 Light guiding member (third means, light guiding means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Panel support device (state change means)
620 Front rotation claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotation post-claw member (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 Petal (part of second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 Loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulation part (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (support means, part of repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right inclined surface (part of the ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal main body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of the operation means, part of the operation section)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of the connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of game ball holding part)
6411 Main body (permissible part)
6413 Projected portion 6414 Recessed portion 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcement rib (part of the receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of the connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light passing hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylindrical part (part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange part (pull boundary surface part)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Post-guide fastening part (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Projecting rib (part of suppressing means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppressing means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate part (part of external surface)
6554a Threaded part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Division member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodation means, part of division means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulating means)
6570 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodation means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of the opposing part, part of the suppressing means, part of the notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of opposing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guiding means)
6731 Light receiving surface section (part of second light guiding means, part of main body part, covering part)
6732 Inner extension part (part of frame)
6733 External extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of first light guide means, opposing extension part)
6735 Fin (part of first light guide means, separation extension part)
6736 Through hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of displacement prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illumination board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting section (part of total internal reflection light emitting section)
D23 Striped portion D24 End striped portion (part of the striped portion)
E1 Notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 Inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bending part)
V13, V14 Gap 21051 Handle support plate (prescribed member)
21410 Covering foundation member (part of covering means, second covering part)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering part)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generation means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Projection part (part of the arrangement part)
21530 Covering cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 Projection part (part of guide part)
21540 Opposing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 Shell-like overhang (contact part)
De3 Overhang part (support part)
A310 Rear case (opposing means)
A312 External wall part (part of adjacent part, arrangement part, opposite side)
A312a Notch part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposing surface)
A73 Outer edge member (part of suppressing means)
75 Metal plate member (part of suppressing means)
A86 Center frame (part of the window)
A400 1st operation unit (part of production means)
A411 Main body (part of covering means)
A415 Diffusion plate (refraction means)
A416 Illumination board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting part)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 Board fixing plate (board holding means)
A417h Notch part (gap forming part)
A426 Detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 Slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission protrusion (part of prescribed part)
A455e Detection plate part (part of the detection part)
A456a Projection plate part (one side functional part, loaded part)
A456b Opposing arrangement part (other side functional part, part of prescribed part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Gear with pin (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A464 Arc wall part (forming part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box part (part of shielding means)
A475 Fastening part (part of prevention means, protruding part)
A480 Rear lid part (part of arrangement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (positioning part)
A490 Second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Shaft supported protrusion (1st shaft)
A491d2 Projection part (part of guide part)
A511 Slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (non-shielding light emitting means)
A720 Rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell part (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 Second support part (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 Slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A4550 Decorative member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin wall part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 Projection (part of prevention means)
AC1 1st area (part of light emitting area)
AC2 second region (part of light emitting region, first region, first refraction section)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa intermediate part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ Optical axis UL1 upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 Lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-234152

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in load transmission. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve load transmission.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to be able to displace the first displacing means by being displaced in a predetermined direction. The second displacement means includes a load generator that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes: , a loaded part receiving a load from the load generating part, wherein the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and moves to a predetermined position different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. It is configured to be able to come into contact with the part.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, load transmission can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotating claw member. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a side view of the lower frame member in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device. (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of the left disk cam. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). It is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Fig. 78 (a), and (c) is a side view of the right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened to the outer frame and the back pack is opened to the inner frame (deployed). It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (expanded). It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member are illustrated side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic diagram schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c); FIG. (a) and (b) are top schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a movable binding member, and a harness, schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 3 is a front view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 3 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line in FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a top view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, the rear assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame, and upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball firing unit showing the ball sending situation by the ball sending device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit, inner rail, and outer rail after firing the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a flower petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal actuating device, (b) is a front view of the petal actuating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal actuating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal actuating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage forming member in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and right front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a), (c) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). 229(a) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. (a) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illumination board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line in FIG. 241, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the electrical It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device. 241(a) is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guide unit. (a) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit along the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member, (b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member, and (d) is It is a right view of a transparent cylindrical member as seen in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3(e) is a right view of the optical transmission unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L; FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. FIG. (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. (a) is a front view of the base member and the illumination board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is 269(e) is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272(b). (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal direction device taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the base member taken along the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line in FIG. 272(b), 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate, and the light-receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of a base member, an illumination board, and a light receiving member schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a sectional view of the effect device taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the effect device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. 230 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit in the 20th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame, an operation device, and a lower tray unit in a 21st embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the covered cover member. 296(a) is a top view of the lower pan unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. 296(a) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a). (a) is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower pan unit schematically illustrating the lower pan unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower pan unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. (a) is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. FIG. 3 is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit, schematically illustrating the lower tray unit. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. 312(a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the direction of the rotation axis, and FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). c) is a sectional view of the engagement member taken along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member, the engagement member, and the drive device unit. (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along a line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operating unit, and (b) is a side view of the operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. 303 is a partial sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in FIG. 302. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover. (a) is a front view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331(a). (a) is a front view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line in FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a). be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of a gear with a pin and the same phase member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the left side, and a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the right side. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit. FIG. 356 is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the basis of an initial angle. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit and the rear case. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support part, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support part. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support part, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a top view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). FIG. 3 is a front view of the annular front cover and the rotating body. FIG. 7 is a schematic top view schematically showing a first rotating member in a twenty-third embodiment. It is a back view of the front side unit in 24th embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit along a line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300, which are operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13, are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second winning hole 640 by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing, a solenoid for driving electric accessories, etc., and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 300 is arranged at the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that can be tilted when pushed by a player, and is located in an area formed by a housing recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. will be placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, such that at least the fingers of a hand can comfortably fit therein. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by placing his fingertips on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Note that since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10. is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state (initial state in this embodiment) with the operation surface 312a1 facing in the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operating surface 312a1 is placed in a second state in which it faces upward and backward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of the player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Note that details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The tilting device 310 is operated by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display saying "Press the button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand forcefully downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 will move toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. This causes the palm of the hand to easily rub against the operating surface 312a1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation in a manner in which the hand is dropped forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the palm of the hand remains integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than forcing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, differences in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's perspective will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, but in the second state, the area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the area of the protective lens member 311i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the LED device 341f disposed inside the operating device 300 (see FIG. Since the amount of light (see 12) gradually increases in visibility, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) increases between the first state and the second state. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist as an axis), the user can comfortably press and operate the tilting device 310 while keeping the palm of the hand integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform an operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the outer side surface of the little finger as a fulcrum and not allowing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operating device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies an impact in a straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect a pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged on the outside of the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner area of the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting device 310 can be tilted. The device 310 can be housed in a lower frame member 320. Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end on the back side of the plane of the paper in FIG. 12), and A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing part 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed part arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. and an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering it from three sides, left and right and rearward.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member in which the left and right portions of the bottom slope downward toward the front, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 that slopes downward toward the front; A horizontal part 322 composed of a plate-shaped member arranged horizontally at the rear upper end of the tilting device 310 , and a semicircular receiving part opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal part 322 . A lower bearing part 323 that receives the shaft part 314 from below, a left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the bottom plate part 321, and a horizontal center position of the bottom plate part 321 in the left and right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening created by cutting a portion disposed below the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which a portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. Ru.

The bottom plate part 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central part on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and a left and right hole 321b drilled in the left and right sides of the opening 325. It mainly includes insertion holes 321c that are symmetrically bored.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the attitude of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted therethrough, and also allows the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distance from the bottom plate part 321 of the lower frame member 320 (the position of the detection groove) is the same on the left and right sides.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light emitting part that emits light and a light receiving part that receives the light from the light emitting part, and has a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the detection part can be inserted. This means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, etc. to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, its horizontal width is made larger than the horizontal width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the driving device 340 By pushing up the LED device 340, the LED device 341f can be placed above the opening 325. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face an opening 331 that is large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and a lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. The tilting device 310 mainly includes an upper bearing portion 332 that is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically divisible so that three directions except the front side are covered. A voice coil motor 352 supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side with its vibrating surface directed diagonally forward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; and a right side detection sensor 352. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially torn in order to make visible the right side detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 is disposed in such a manner that its vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320. Thereby, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 extends the protruding convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R. To detect whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and to detect that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in a specific phase. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR with different phases, the specific phases detectable by the detection sensors 353L, 353R are two. Become a type.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a front view of the tilting device 310. 14A is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along the line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 that is a box-like body with fan-shaped sides and openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging downward, and sandwiched between the case main body 311 and the rear end of the lid 312. a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314; and a ring-shaped spring 315 that fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. It mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side toward the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and a left and right side of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extends from a flange extending downward along the edge toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e that is a groove arranged in a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and that locks the center portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left-side detection pieces 311gL and a right-side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending below the bottom plate part 311a by a predetermined amount toward the front side. a protective lens member 311i arranged above the front end of the bottom plate part 311a and shaped along an arc centered on the shaft part 314 and made of a light-transmitting material; and a bottom plate part 311h. It mainly includes an overhanging protrusion 311j that protrudes downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that makes surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by a player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force between the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)). Equipped with

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are parts that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311gL is The overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft portion 314 is about 3 degrees (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311gL is jutted out compared to the right side detection piece 311gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to the rotation angle (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It consists of aspects.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 14(a)) and a curved shape when viewed from left and right (see FIG. 14(c)). The structure is such that it is easy to release the load when pushing the tilting device 310. Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding convex portion 311j protrudes from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a at right angles, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, so that the projecting portion 311j is configured to protrude from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a, and the tip is extended below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and a top plate member 312a that connects the intermediate plate member 312b to the top plate member 312a. It mainly includes a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size that is fixed to the LED device 341f and surrounds the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 due to its axial rigidity, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the cylindrical member 312c directs the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 through the cylinder. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is released and the LED device 341f is disposed in such a manner that light can be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end having a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and includes both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , is provided.

Next, the drive device 340 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18 is a front view of the drive device 340. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343 in a non-rotatable manner. 344R), an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 and the second A release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhang 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to it as the release member 346 rotates, and a rotating claw member 347 that is tilted downward. The first spring SP1 is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 to move away from each other. It mainly includes a second spring SP2 which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 has a motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right sides and is formed into a U-shape when viewed from above, and a disk portion which is bored at the same position in a plate portion disposed opposite to the motor accommodating portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position offset from the shaft support hole 341b toward the front in a manner that has an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , an extending portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a toward the front and upper direction, and the lighting support portion 341e. It mainly includes an LED device 341f that is disposed at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). Thereby, the light from the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a pivotally supports the rotating gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotating gear.

The arm member 345 has a shaft support hole 345a formed in a perfect circle shape at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape formed at the other end. It also mainly includes a guide hole 345b into which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite to the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position where the disc cam 344 rotates for more than one rotation. formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342. , a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly equipped with

The cylindrical member 343a is provided with fixing parts 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing part 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center than the fixing part 343a1 on the left side. Ru. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the columnar member 343a is inserted and unevenness along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c. 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle rotation) relative to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section into which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the transmission gear 343b. and a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a chevron-shaped convex portion and a concave portion with a top angle of approximately 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c cannot be engaged with each other. Accordingly, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thereby, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

Note that the movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be explained with reference to FIG. 20. In addition, in the disc cam 344, the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirrored in shape, and only the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR differ, so only the left disc cam 344L is different. The explanation of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 18.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions that protrude from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a that protrudes inwardly in a cylindrical shape; a circular rib 344b that protrudes inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a; An engaging rib 344c is a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b and is provided inwardly to protrude and has a portion projecting outward in the radial direction at two places, and an engaging rib 344c has a lower height than the circular rib 344b. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d that has a cylindrical shape and is connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is bored near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other difference is that the right disc cam 344R has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section with an inner periphery that engages with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and an outer periphery that is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). configured. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the support hole 341b.

The circular diameter rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c has a first rib that extends outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. An overhanging portion 344c1, a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position offset from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50° in this embodiment), and a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 extends outward in the radial direction again, and from the second projecting portion 344c3 at an angle θ3 (in this embodiment, an angle θ2 = 150°). θ3=20°), and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

With reference to FIG. 21, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described. Note that the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. In contrast, a small angle state is shown in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

Note that the state in which the release member 346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A convex pin 346b that has an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is provided in the plate thickness direction, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting out at its maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion that can come into contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In this embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that it can smoothly come into contact with the engaging rib 344.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the locus of movement of the protruding pin 346b inside) is drilled to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346, and the end of the second spring SP2. The end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted through the insertion hole 347c into which the first spring is inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 347d that projects downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a. It mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e that is bored in the hole 347e.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the backward rotation direction as a unit, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion 346d When a load is applied in the upward direction to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 can be maintained until the angle reaches the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an example of the operation of the operating device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of the operation when the player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 placed in the first state will be described. Note that in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for ease of understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22, and FIG. Here, the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 by repeatedly hitting the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 degrees in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pressed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. The player may not be able to return in time and may have to perform a pushing operation at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be solved by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 causes the tilting device 310 to resist the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and there is a need to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there were problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed at a position facing the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is driven whenever the tilting device 310 is pressed, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player Since this imposes an unnecessary load, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil By driving the motor 352, it is possible to increase the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. This allows the player to operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down from the first state (a tilting operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the posture has changed is illustrated, and FIG. 27 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the rotation claw member 347 returns to its posture, and FIG. The state in which the tilting device 310 rotates back and forth is illustrated, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the final position, and FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 reaches a second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 by rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount. is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the irradiation intensity of the light from the LED device 341f when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26), and Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The attitude change of the release member 346 is maintained until the disc cam 344 is rotated to a state where the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 is not twisted during that time. It rises due to the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting part 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging part 346d of the release member 346, Due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction that increases the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be viewed from the player's viewpoint increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the up-and-down reciprocating movement can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, so the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed down by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c moves only through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 rotates with the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases his/her hand after the player presses down the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state. .

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 310 has been pushed to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force to assist the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and to produce a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. It can be used for.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 touches the bottom frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who presses the tilting device 310 can check whether vibrations are generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing operation when the tilting device 310 is pressed. can be made to understand only.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a jackpot does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means will be reduced.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can only feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when a jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the feeling of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can improve its value as a means of pre-reading. This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilting device 310, and increases the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (in the opposite direction in FIG. By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction, the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, similar to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engagement rib 344c.

Note that from the state shown in FIG. 29, after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes the engagement portion 346d, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25 by the method shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in the direction of pushing it up, and it is possible to rotate only the release member 346 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotating claw member 347. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be explained. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (tilting operation) after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31), and the release member 346 and rotating claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31). 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 34 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates and rotates, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the final position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated with an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 moves in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disc cam 345. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by approximately 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (a posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 increases rapidly and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 obstructs the state change ( This can prevent a situation in which the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 32, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D2 shown in FIG. Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, so the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, as modes of vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movement (tilting movement), the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after the restriction on movement of the device 310 in the upward direction is lifted. Therefore, two types of modes can be created in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared to the case where the operating member 310 makes the same action every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a jackpot), and the player's attention is drawn to the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the degree of

As shown in FIG. 33, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into the state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. (clockwise direction in FIG. 34), and then by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook-shaped portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, if the player releases the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 33 after pressing down on the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 returns to the first state. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of bringing the disc cam 344 into the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the player performs a pushing operation will be described. do. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated forwards (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) beyond the state shown in FIG. (Counterclockwise in FIG. 35), and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes the release member 346 up; The rotating claw member 347 remains in the position shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, by further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and then rotating the rotary cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), The drive device 340 can be placed in a second initial state as shown in FIG.

Note that in this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the process goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it becomes possible to perform the vertical movement (swinging movement) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who presses the tilting device 310 may perform an action of leaving his hand on the tilting device 310 after pressing the tilting device 310, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, when the user forgets to release the hand that pressed the tilting device 310 because he was so focused on the performance, but in this case, even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 will continue to rise. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on While maintaining the state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the opposite direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is (See FIG. 14) is controlled in such a manner that the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340, which is in the ON state.

In the states shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward because the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 changes from the state shown in FIG. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, even when the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, the drive motor 342 is operated in a reciprocating manner (forward/reverse switching). The load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced and the life of the motor can be extended.

Note that when the disk cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, if the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) remains in the ON state, Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate it in the opposite direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and there is no need to apply unnecessary load to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a method for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. In addition, in FIG. 38, the player's hand grasping and fixing the tilting device 310 with the tilting device 310 in the second state is illustrated with imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unchecked, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to freely rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction. Power is transmitted, and movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This can prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that if the player does not grip the tilting device 310, due to the configuration of the operating device 300, if the disc cam 344 is rotated once, the tilting device 310 will go through the first state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 does not turn on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) (when the tilting device 310 does not go into the first state) The system determines that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and notifies the player by, for example, displaying the information on the third symbol display device 81 to stop the gripping operation. At the same time, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

This makes it possible to select a case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only then to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and also to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent failure. be able to.

Note that when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c, are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state. By restarting control of the drive motor 352 with that state as the initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, Control can be performed with the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 matched again.

As a result, when performing a performance by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation that the tilting device 310 is caused to perform by controlling the rotation of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. occurrence is prevented. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform the performance.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that rotates idly relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity of this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up from the first state shown in FIG. 40 to the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but also because the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotating claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's perspective, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. 40 and 42 appear to be the same, and the movements after the first state are The operation is different from that shown in FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39); Due to the difference in changes, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be able to grasp the performance that will be executed from now on, which may reduce the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is made different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is , only the direction is different, so the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.) can make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction. Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or whether the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is in operation toward the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the level of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and further rotates the drive motor 342, the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, the player can control the performance. Since changes in the level of expectation can be grasped, the player can be informed of the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 enters the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state. You can make them watch over you.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive may be damaged due to the player's erroneous operation when driving the drive motor 342. Overloading the device 340 can be prevented.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load on the drive motor 342 when stopping the drive motor 342 suddenly is eliminated. Therefore, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 25), and The external shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. .

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pressed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are connected to the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship in which the release member 346 does not pass through, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state where it is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 is rotated in the manner shown in FIG. When moving up and down, even if the player presses the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage, and when the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310 returns to the first state (rotation). When the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, it is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from a position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising and continues to move up and down.

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in effect between the operation modes of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can be given a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 does not move up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode until the player presses the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

The difference in performance is that when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 remains in the first state. ) is better than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if you release your hand after pressing the tilting device 310). If a difference is made in that the player has a high expectation of a jackpot, then the player recognizes the expectation of a jackpot or not not only when pushing the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the player's hand from the tilting device 310. Since this opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings in which the player pays attention to the operating device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346. FIG.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

46(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 347b). (see Figure 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation plate member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. A slide claw member 2348 is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , is mainly provided. In addition, in the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed of a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a at the upper end of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like manner toward the left side in FIG. Mainly, a reinforcing part 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved part 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing part 2348c. Be prepared.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state where it is fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , a portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is made of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, and a pull-down hole 347e, as well as a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide A support elongated hole 2347g into which a protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed from a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347, and the opposite side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are arranged so that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (Fig. 46 counterclockwise), it is formed into a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When sliding the slide claw member 2348 with the protruding pin 2348d inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes, in addition to a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, and an engaging portion 346d, a functional elongated hole 2346e that is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. .

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length that is curved along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second elongate hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongate hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. to move the slide.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the movement speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement speed of the protruding pin 2348d without any time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 will slide quickly, but if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the slide claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 may slide when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. There is no movement. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, it is possible to restrict the tilting device 2310 from rising.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 48 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is shown in a state in which it is returned to its original state by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material and fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hooked portion 2348b are disengaged from each other due to the attitude change of the tilting device 2310, so a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. There's no chance of it happening.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with this movement. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of looking ahead by associating the operation modes with the expected level of jackpot. Attention level can be improved.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the slide claw member 2348 rising, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 Since the tilting device 2310 will rise due to the magnetic attraction between the The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand will be lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in the same manner.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expectation level of a jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operating device 2300 as a means of looking ahead, so the degree of attention of the operating device 2300 to the player can be adjusted. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state in which it is pushed in by the player, or in a state in which it is pushed in by the player. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has a right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and a left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extends at a position on the opposite side of the right side detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and located at the center position in the direction of the rotation axis. The left side detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that in FIG. 51(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L, and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. No (the left side detection sensor 324L is OFF and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an OFF state).

By detecting changes in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to determine whether it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether the state is on the way back or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of a pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the push-in end, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is on the way from the push-in end to the first state. . In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state disposed at the push-in end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while , the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

Here, when transmitting the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is transferred to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Rather than causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving upward, it is possible to more effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and if the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and has not reached the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when the voice coil motor 352 is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the upward movement of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be moved up by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment This is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is detected while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of a tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded from the front side of the projecting protrusion 311j of the case body 4311 in a plate shape.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate part 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the push-down operations of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54(a), and the front detection piece 4311k is in the lower detection state. A state in which the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. Note that in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at 20° intervals on a circular arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k is connected to the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e in order. By detecting the interval between the timings of the passage, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and based on this determination, it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when pressing the tilting device 4310 from the second position, since the pressing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), the tilting device The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes higher. Therefore, if the player does not have any means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure in case the player presses with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the end of the push-in, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for players with weak force or players who decide to press gently, the reaction force always increases near the pressing position, which puts a burden on the pressing operation, making it easy to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined based on the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, if the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are respectively switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. While the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, if the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and even a weak force can easily push the tilting device 4310. Can be operated by pushing.

Furthermore, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing is used as a reaction force against the tilting device 4310. can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. The movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed out in advance toward the side closer to the tilting device 4310.

Thereby, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed compared to the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is moved in the contraction direction. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the object. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but has a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to the members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 is already in contact with the voice coil motor 352, so the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 contacts the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 using the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 4310 has been pushed to the final end, an effect can be performed in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the vibration is transmitted to the player who presses the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment , is provided with a drive motor 5411 that rotates a weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is placed at an eccentric position, and is configured in such a manner that vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operating device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is replaced with a lower frame member 5320, and the drive device 340 is replaced with a drive device 5340, compared to the operating device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 houses a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. a flexible member 5420 that is formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, and that accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate sections and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose portion corresponding to the key point of the fan is supported on the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. The main preparation is as follows.

The drive motor 5411 includes fixing portions 5411a arranged in a pair on the left and right sides and formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 rotates, the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body part 5421 in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction, and a main body part 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side to the inserted side. A pair of rib-like leg portions 5422 protruding from the left and right in the radial direction and downwardly, respectively, and a rib-like leg portion 5422 protruding from the left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected. It mainly includes a posture maintaining part 5423 in which a fixing part 5411a is embedded, and a pair of protruding leg parts 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body part 5421 in the shape of a column.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth equal to the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface of the drive motor 5411 on the shaft side and the end surface of the main body portion 5421 on the opening side are formed on the same plane. Furthermore, in this state, the fixing part 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining part 5423.

The rib-like leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-like leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintaining portions 5423 are provided on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar manner, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point when it comes into contact with the tilting device 310, which will be described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, it is possible to finely resolve the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating part 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a second accommodating part adjacent to the first accommodating part 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is accommodated. 5432, and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating part 5431 and the second accommodating part 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is determined from the top surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state). This is the depth at which the protruding leg portion 5424 extends.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is such that it is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load released state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 and the flexible member The depth is such that it interferes with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (assembly loaded state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 59(c) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). Note that in FIG. 59(a), a portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59(a), a first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and a region S51 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player by three degrees from the first state, A terminal region S52, which is a region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the terminal position of pushing, is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding manner in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be maximized.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in an assembly load released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extending direction. Therefore, since the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right in the paper of FIG. 59(b)) when being pushed in. 59(b), and the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left and right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, the lower side of the tilting device 310 becomes convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) shows an assembly load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows that the protruding leg portion 5424 is in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembly load state after being pushed into the first housing part 5431 is illustrated. Note that the external shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and this force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. The impact when 310 collides with lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be alleviated. Furthermore, since the load is based on elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed is slowed down. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 310, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is moved upward compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its orientation. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in a state where the assembly load is released, vibrations due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 do not occur.

Further, vibrations of the drive motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations generated in the drive motor 5411 due to movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430. This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. configured in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 changes to a state where it is more compressed vertically, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 becomes slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be weakened, and the vibrations generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced at uniform intervals left and right from the central axis. Since they are arranged in a pair of left and right pairs, when the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like legs 5422 move outward from the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like legs 5422). (see FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg portions 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the load in the left and right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing part 5432 collide can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of the rib-like leg part 5422 on the lower side of the main body part 5421. can be absorbed. Thereby, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61(a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) illustrate the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be explained. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side under an assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated at a position where the distance from the bottom of the second housing part 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates under assembly load, its outer circumferential side surface contacts (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, compared to the assembly load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating part 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. ). This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force pushing back in the opposite direction).

In this way, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is generated separately from the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By configuring the combination of generated forces, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, from the time when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the convex leg portion 5424 until the tilting device 310 moves toward the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is a force pushing back the tilting device 310. After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased near the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made easier and the impact during the pushing operation can be better alleviated. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 continues to rotate. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and due to the difference in detection timing, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) ) is larger than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 applies the impact to the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to take a downward attitude (see FIG. 61(b)).

Thereby, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (the case where it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped in the upward direction (see FIG. 61(a)), a force pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the generation of force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

Here, the contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310, and to expand the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player presses the tilting device 310, vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pressing, or a part of the side of the hand, can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the player. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembled load state, the weight member 5412 When the housing member 5430 comes into contact with the housing member 5430, vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibrations are transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pressed, so that the player's pressing operation can be detected. The vibrations can be transmitted to the player more easily than when the vibrations are generated from the ground.

In other words, when the player presses the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pushing in a pulsed manner), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pressed. If so, there is a possibility that the vibrations cannot be generated before the player releases his/her hand (the vibrations may not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect caused by the vibrations. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and ready to generate vibrations before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that vibrations can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

Furthermore, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing part 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pressing the tilting device 310, it is possible to create a state in which vibrations are transmitted when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be explained. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. The rest is the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 consisting of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L have symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connection part with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape from the disc portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. Along the axis, an elongated hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetrical elongated hole shape and an axis of the support cylinder P1 recessed by the elongated recess C1 up to a position approximately half of the extension distance. It mainly includes a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the end of the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a because its inner diameter is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

The deformable portion P1a is a portion of a pair of connecting rods arranged with the elongated hole recessed portion C1 in between, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially tilted manner with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part that

The elongated hole recess C1 has a recessed cross section that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

Further, the opposing surfaces of the elongated hole recess C1 have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from a circular arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the cylindrical member 5343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The clamping arm A1 includes an engaging protrusion A1a that protrudes from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other arm in a direction approaching the other arm. . The engaging protrusion A1a engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off from the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engagement convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engagement groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlap length in the radial direction when the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 is greater than when the tip shape is flat or the center is a curved surface with a convexity (see Fig. 65). (b) horizontal length) can be ensured to be long.

In the axial direction, the engagement convex portion A1a has a side surface near the connecting pin 344d that is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 (elongated hole concave portion) recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is in plane with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)) reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared to the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a, the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

Additionally, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (the space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing part 5343a1 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fixing part 5343a1 that is the same as the fixing part 5343a1 with a fitting groove 5343a3 in between from the fixing part 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 which is a groove into which an e-ring is fitted, and which positions the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. The engagement groove 5343a4 is the groove in which the engagement protrusion A1a of the holding arm A1 engages when the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the e-ring 5343a3. Be prepared. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the left-right direction outer side of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 later, the columnar member 5343a is formed with a part where the diameter becomes partially large. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, insert a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then fit the e-ring into the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a relative to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing displacement along the axial direction, the e-ring can also prevent displacement of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

Due to the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder part P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side where the engagement convex part A1a is disposed. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 to a position where it fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a fits between the engagement protrusion A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them can be expanded. Thereafter, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and as the engagement convex portion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, Then, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing destruction in this embodiment. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 66(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the right disk cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support tube P1 at a position spaced apart from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be able to pivot around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arms A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the cylindrical member 5343a comes into contact with the cylindrical member 5343a, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a increases.

Therefore, if an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, etc. (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) (when a load is applied to restrict the deformation of the right disc cam 5344R with respect to the columnar member 5343a), it is possible to restrict the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R deforms in the direction of lower resistance, so when an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about the support shaft r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the position of the tip of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that in FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and when an overload is applied, the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 67(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which is trying to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which is trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axis tilting deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its shaft tilting deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer periphery of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd, the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d will be misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R will be deformed to tilt its axis.

Due to the axis tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d will fall with respect to the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R in the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other with their surfaces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed due to the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so the player cannot drive the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped from moving by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 counteracts this. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact and the release member 346 moves along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, so that the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line symmetrical to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (in the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point) Therefore, regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is misaligned with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the same way. The axis can be deformed by resistance.

68(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted in FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and the shaft collapses when an overload is applied. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 68(a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2 is illustrated, and the tilting device 310 is A player's hand is shown grasping a .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grasps the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the axis tilting, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the matters described for the right disc cam 5344R are also applicable to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in this axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disc cam 344R makes one revolution, the detection hole 344eR of the right disc cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass the right side detection sensor 353R, and the right side detection sensor Since the input to 353R does not change, an overload is detected.

In this case, a period of time is required to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs before detecting the occurrence of an overload, so there is a problem that overload detection is delayed. there were.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs on the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is detected. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is exemplified (as shown in imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input section, and is arranged as a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of clamping arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. At the same time, the input section is arranged in such a manner that it protrudes toward the support cylinder section P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload condition, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it can be determined at an early stage whether or not an overload has occurred in the disc cam 5344.

Next, the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment 344c are constructed from separate members, and are configured to be able to rotate relative to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, ring member 6344L2, and second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R also has a different configuration from the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R has a shape that is a mirror copy of the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L will be The explanation of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a disc member 6344L1, which is provided with a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a detection hole 344eL, and is pivotally supported by the columnar member 343a, as in the first embodiment. A ring member 6344L2 is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft part 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc part, and an annular shaped shaft part 344a is arranged in the axial direction at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral part of the circular rib 344b in the radial direction. An annular rib 6344f is provided to protrude along the circumferential direction.

The ring member 6344L2 includes an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b; A cover plate part 6344h is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate part 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed in the thickened portion and are disposed radially outward.

The annular main body 6344g has an inner circumferential diameter larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so in the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 side in the axial direction comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. Thereby, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced compared to the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface contacts the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with a deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 6344L2 rotates. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the rotation speed of the disk member 6344L1 (in such a manner that the disk member 6344L1 rotates once while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , the number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported on a fixed member 6342a in parallel with the transmission shaft rod 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and the auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b is fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be explained that the tilting device 310 can be raised in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotary claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating for more than one rotation, the disc member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated in the opposite direction by the amount exceeded, and the disk member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has moved upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves upward instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the reached position is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c The relative relationship between the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the types of positions that the tilting device 310 can reach can be increased.

That is, when releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See Figure 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 instantly (disc cam 344 rotation) and the position reached can be changed.

As a result, for example, when configuring a gaming machine in such a manner that the level of expectation of the performance changes depending on the height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be adjusted. can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation as to whether the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to reach a lower ascending position.

However, by keeping the normal upward reach position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and making it reach the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation level reaches the maximum, the expectation level The magnitude of the tilting device 310 can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player presses the tilting device 310, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 will rise, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the timing for operating the tilting device 310. You can induce them to do so. Therefore, irrespective of the performance mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the characteristics of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). FIG. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R includes a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. A ring member 7344R2 is inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R2, and an engaging portion 7630 is made immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. It mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed into a cup shape with a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and includes a detection hole 344eR in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup, and an engagement rib. This is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (the part between the first projecting part 344c1 and the first retracting part 344c2 is omitted).

The disc member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on its surface in an assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, In the radial direction, a second circular concave portion 7420, which is a circular concave portion having a smaller diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular concave portion 7410, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are provided. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled, and a fixing member protruding radially outward from the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer circumferential side of the disc member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430. It mainly includes a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An elongated hole 7431 and a second elongated hole 7432 which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending from the bottom end of the disc member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431 along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1. and a return portion 7433 that extends toward the second elongated hole 7432 using the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

The width direction (short side direction) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) size of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable about the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 (the lower end in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed to be movable to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3, and has a height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner circumferential surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. It mainly includes a thick part 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate part 7510 and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, while the resistance to relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so that it approaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter. is made slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This allows the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state, while preventing the relative rotational resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has an irregularly shaped through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses in the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, divided into five equal parts). It mainly includes equally divided recessed portions 7522 provided therein.

The irregularly shaped through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward from the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. configured.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on one side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end (right end in FIG. 77(b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and An engaging portion 7630 extends from the extending tip of the portion 7620 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)), and an engaging portion 7630 is provided on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 opposite to the engaging portion 7630. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when pushed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extending tip thereof is The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that extends inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both the function of a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and the function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(e) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R. , and FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

Note that FIGS. 78(a), 78(b), 78(c), and 78(d) illustrate a state in which only the engagement member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. 78(e) ) and FIG. 78(f) illustrate a state in which a ring member 7344R2 and an engagement member 7344R3 are inserted into a disc member 7344R1. Furthermore, for ease of understanding, illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d), and 78(f).

To assemble the right disk cam 7344R, first insert the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, since the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being accidentally inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, slide the engaging member 7344R3 along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 match in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d). Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses displacement of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the barbed portion 7433 is released, and the barbed portion 7433 returns to the second position due to the elastic recovery force. It enters inside the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the barbed part 7433 contacts the extension part 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is in the longitudinal direction of the barbed part 7433 (where the deformation resistance is large). (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. This makes it possible to limit movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing displacement of the engagement member 7344R3 during operation.

After holding the engagement member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while pushing the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward into the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves along the radially outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disc cam 7344R can be easily assembled. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the convex pin 346b is configured to reach the end of its movement in the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper part of the main body portion (upper right corner in FIG. 80(a)) is shaved obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). are illustrated in chronological order.

79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R contacts the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. ), the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80(b) shows a state in which the disc member 7344R1 has further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80(a), and in FIG. 81, the right disc cam The state after 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engagement member 7344R3 is separated from the release member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 80(b) show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 ( (small angle state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly protruding state.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the angle is small, and the arcuate plate portion 7610 The disc cam 7344 is in a positional relationship in which the outer circumferential surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 while the inner circumferential surface is in contact with the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. (See FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any further (the small angle state), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state. 7346 applies a load to the engagement member 7344R3 to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement member 7344R3 extends outward in the radial direction, it is impossible to continue rotating in the backward rotation direction. , the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregularly shaped through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engagement portion 7630, so that the disc member 7344R1 can be rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80(a) as shown in FIG. 80(b). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in rotation amount, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one of the originally disposed equally divided concave portions 7522 to another different equally divided concave portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase of the recess is rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 are released from contact, so that the engagement member 7344R3 extends radially outward. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portions 7522 in which the engaging portions 7630 are accommodated are shifted by one.

That is, by going through the steps shown in FIG. 79(a) to FIG. can be relatively shifted by the distance between the recessed portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82(a), FIG. 82(b), FIG. 83(a), and FIG. 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically illustrate how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)). 82(a) shows a state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R come into contact with each other, and FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has started to descend by contacting the disk cam 7344 from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). (b) shows a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward direction (see FIG. 82(a) clockwise). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member to restrict the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. The only thing that can be done is

Therefore, a load that pushes the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward is not generated, and the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the time the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 until it is separated from the release member 7346. Maintain the extended position. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, relative rotation between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

With these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment, while In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the opposite direction to the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state in which the player does not draw attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 out of sight of the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be explained that according to this embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In addition, in FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 can be moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7(b) immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows for displacement is illustrated, and in FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process explained in FIG. , a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is relatively rotated by one equally divided concave portion 7522 is shown, and in both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second projecting portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d. A state in which they are in contact is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 is immediately activated (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the top end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state that is lower than state 2.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position that the tilting device 310 reaches from the first state by the upward movement can be changed immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344). Thereby, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that in the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the explanations referring to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 and the back pack 92 is opened to the inner frame 12 (deployed). 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded), and FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed into a fixed frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden planks as the top and bottom sides and aluminum plates as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component in the pachinko machine 8010, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the component is installed in a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the inner frame 12 rotatably supports the front frame 14, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing tip side) and can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end (opening/closing base end) when viewed from the front, and the right side is the rotation base end. It can be rotated rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010, as shown in FIG. As a result, each is canceled.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate (having holes) with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is large enough to fit. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape that projects upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12. It is pivotally supported by being externally fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed into a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate into a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). By covering the window portion 14c from the back side with the glass unit 16, almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a, 16b that have a larger outer diameter than the window portion 14c and are transparent, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a, 16b. It is equipped with. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into a ring shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, thereby forming the glass unit 16 into an integrated double-glazed glass. has been done.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glasses 16a and 16b to be colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination parts 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or blink in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when hitting a jackpot or reaching a predetermined reach. Further, the illumination section 8030 above the window section 14c includes a light emitting means that lights up in the event of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out, and a light emitting means that lights up while the prize balls are being put out.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punched metal) is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover a speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects depending on the game state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are disposed to bulge out toward the front side and are arranged vertically in parallel.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 and is open in the front-rear direction and allows the ball to be guided to the lower tray 50.

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide multiple locations for storing game balls; instead, it is possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and use only the upper tray 17, which has only one storage section. Also good.

An operating device 300 that is manually operated by players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operating device 300 is an operating device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operating device 300 may be provided at another location other than the upper tray 17, such as around the lower tray 50, or may be provided at multiple locations, and may be operated using a push button switch. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which information can be input using another operating method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage part 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage part 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage part 145 ( (see FIG. 92).

A put-out ball socket 143 that projects rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). 143 is partitioned left and right by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage part 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage part 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a and discharge them to the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage section 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and foul balls may be discharged to the upper tray 17.

The foul ball passage section 145 merges with a ball extraction passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unlaunched balls flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs a ball extraction operation. It is formed like this.

Attached to the back side of the front frame 14 are multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 made of resin that are fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side. On the front side of the multi-functional cover members 171 and 172, there are connectors for wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal board of the illumination sections 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 and one end thereof. An electronic board is provided to which the other end of the connector is connected, and the electronic board and connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there are wiring through grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illumination sections 8031, 8032, and through the wiring through grooves 14h, the illumination sections 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected (see Fig. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn out backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It will be done.

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring or a connector whose one end is connected to the internal board of the illumination parts 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is attached to a board support device 600 ( The upper device (see FIG. 126) is placed in a positional relationship that faces the upper device in the front and back, and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side, which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The elongated cover member 173 has a cross-sectional area that decreases as it moves from the rotating tip side to the rotating base side of the front frame 14, and the lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is The upper wall part 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged oppositely above the lower wall part 173a, and forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in a plane. Composed of shapes.

The elongated cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, and is connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided that extends upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end thereof connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b extends in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. , is constructed by securing a space that can be further curved into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (corresponding to one period of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall 173c. Extends toward the proximal end. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed (see FIG. 96), so it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be disconnected.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the elongated cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a that is part of the front frame. An inverted cup portion 178, which is formed of a resin material and has an inverted cup shape and opens downward, is disposed between the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the rotation base portion 14.

The inverted cup part 178 is a part that takes countermeasures against fraudulent acts, for example, where the front frame 14 is illegally pushed apart, a piano wire is inserted from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and the piano wire is entered into the gaming area. It is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from around the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. , since the progress of the piano wire can be obstructed, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the elongated cover member 173 are made of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is introduced and pressed against the inverted cup part 178, the elongated cover member melts the inverted cup part 178 with the heat and can pass through the inverted cup part 178. 173 can also be dissolved. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the elongated cover member 173, the wiring housed on the front side of the elongated cover member 173 is burnt out, so that by detecting that the wiring is disconnected, , it is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent acts.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the inverted cup portion 178 on the elongated cover 173 side has a shape that matches the shape of the elongated cover member 173, and abuts (close to) each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178 in the wall part 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup part 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall part 178a. Furthermore, if the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that the elongated cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to discover fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. In other words, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip ends up in the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire will advance in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (progress in the left-right direction). can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the gaming area while preventing the reaction force exerted on the person who commits the fraud through the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act before the person committing the fraudulent act escapes, making it easier to secure the person committing the fraudulent act. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act will not be able to tell, and will therefore think that the piano wire is on its way to the gaming area. . Then, it is natural for the person committing the fraud to insert the piano wire deeper until the tip of the piano wire reaches the playing area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the window 14c). (without raising suspicions that the insertion was not successful). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to attempt to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the back side of the operating handle 51. When disposed on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball firing unit 112a includes an electromagnetic firing solenoid 701 provided as a firing device, and a game ball launched by the firing solenoid 701 between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It includes a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is ejected toward the area between them, and a ball sending device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) onto the firing rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is placed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is disposed. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage part 161 and a main body side lower dish passage part 162. The main body side upper plate passage part 161 and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 are opened toward the back side so that one end can communicate with a through hole penetrated through the inner frame 12 in the front and back direction, and the other end A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the groove is opened downward. In this configuration, the balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end. Ru.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the dispensing ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower part of the tray passage forming member 160. A front door side upper plate passage 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 161, and a front door lower plate passage 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the tray passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that restricts the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper tray passage section 161 and the main body side lower tray passage section 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the game balls from flowing out, and a permitting position where the game balls are allowed to flow out.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring, etc.) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the biasing member is The shutter 163 is configured to remain in the blocking position depending on the force. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out when the front frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage section 161 or the main body side lower tray passage section 162. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receptacle 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side and the upper tray passage section 141 on the front door side communicate with each other, and the lower tray passage section 162 on the main body side and the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side communicate with each other to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 is configured such that a location where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a location where the connector CN3 is provided are separate boards. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so the targets of transmission are different, so separate boards are used. This is intended to prevent malfunctions in advance.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the window of the front frame 14. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the area below the window 14c of the front frame 14 is on the front side of the main body frame 14c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, and on the diagonally upper right side of the lower plate 50. An operating device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operating device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side, and has a horizontal width comparable to the horizontal width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and has a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape with left and right center portions protruding toward the front side, and They extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portions and the left and right ends of the portion 371 toward sides that are close to each other in the width direction, and merge at the lower end of the extension when viewed from the front V It is a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the hanging part 372 formed in a letter-shaped shape, the main body curved part 371 and the hanging part 372, and is made of a light-transmitting resin material. A left side plane support part 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved part 371, and a left side plane support part 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371. A support groove 376, which is a groove formed in the right side plane support part 375 from the back side and whose width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side. Prepare for.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge formed in a rounded curved shape, and a rear side edge formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, so that the upper plate does not fit in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge 371a contacts the front side edge of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300. A back middle edge 371b that contacts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 371b that is connected to the back left edge 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation section 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball lending operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operating device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported, and is located between the right corner cover 380 and the right corner cover 380 disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14. This part prevents access to the operating device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 has a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, so that the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the formed bottom plate.

The light-transmitting portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side to create effects using light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are arranged close to each other.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that can be arbitrarily determined, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upwardly and downwardly. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (placed on the top surface of the lighting support part 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (placed on the bottom surface of the lighting support part 341e). , respectively.

Of the LED devices 341f, light emitted from the LED that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the transparent section 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then is transmitted through the lower frame member 320. 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be seen through the transparent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The force is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emit light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting control to change the amount of light), it is possible to It is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 is changed.

Furthermore, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emit light downward in accordance with changes in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is increased (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22). By controlling the amount of light to change weakly (in steps) as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 as the state of the tilting device 310 changes. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support section 374 toward the illumination section 8031. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8031 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right plane support portion 375 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination part 8032 and the illumination part 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support part 375 toward the illumination part 8032. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination parts 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination parts 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination section 8031, the illumination section 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove into which the lower end of the illumination part 8032 enters from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illumination part 8032 is in the deepest position in the support groove 376, and in this state, the lower front corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front end of the right plane support part 375 are The position matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 through the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be constructed by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or a separate member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. A sheet metal member 150 in the shape of a metal plate is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) across the main body frame 14a, and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is attached to the main body frame 14a or the plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a with the main body frame 14a in between).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a hot wire or piano wire is pressed against the tip and melted), the sheet metal member 150 will not be able to maintain the front frame. 14 functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side. That is, even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the upper, lower, left and right sides of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 in the left side when viewed from the front, and the open front side is connected to the passage forming unit. 140, and a planar plate-like part 152 that covers the back side of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball extraction passage 147.

The fitting box part 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the lower end part of the foul ball passage part 145 from top to bottom and left and right, so the fitting box part 151 covers the lower end part of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the foul ball passage part. The illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140 not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated at the lower end of the passage forming unit 145 in the front-rear direction, but also when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. This can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back side of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball extraction passage 147, when a wire such as the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is made. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent unauthorized members from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 may be removed and the exemplified wire may be pressed against a location where the thickness of the front and back becomes thinner (a location diagonally above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). An example is illustrated in which a through-hole is opened by being inserted, and the illustrated wire enters the hole.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 includes an operating section back member 155 that is fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the operating section back member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left and right long plate member. There is a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws that are formed above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the main body frame 14a are inserted. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connecting, which are vertically arranged in the part (left end) that overlaps the back side of the passage forming unit 140; It mainly includes an opening/closing regulating part 159 that protrudes toward the back side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connection portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction, and is provided protruding from the back side. a protruding portion 148a, and a threaded portion 148b that is formed as a hole into which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position that matches the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare for the Lord.

With this configuration, when the operating section back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the protruding portion 148a is passed through the upper coupling insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passed through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the threaded part 148b, the operation section back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

Note that the L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge of the left end portion of the operation unit back member 155, in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower side edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed into an L-shape that can make surface contact with the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left and right in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

Therefore, for positioning when assembling the operating section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved vertically relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By bringing the left and right surfaces into contact with each other, the position and posture of the operating section back member 155 relative to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing regulating portion 159 is a portion disposed front and back to face the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is a part that extends toward the back side of the operation part back member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and in order to ensure rigidity, the opening/closing regulating part 159 has a cross section when viewed in the extending direction. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same thickness, and the required amount of material is maintained while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is installed in a block shape that fills a U-shaped opening. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as that of other parts of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the part is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 with a thickness of 150 mm.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 may be any shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, compared to a flat cross section, the cross section may be curved (wavy), stepped, rectangular, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is not provided as a part of the operation part back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is provided from a separate member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a. It may also be constructed from a metal part that extends to. However, as in this embodiment, if the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the panel support device 600 will not move when it comes into contact with the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. It can prevent chipping or denting. This can reduce the risk that an operator who changes the state of the board support device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 will touch a chip or a dent made in the board support device 600 and be injured.

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation base end of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock that is arranged further to the rotation tip side It is possible to ensure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations. Therefore, when the opening/closing regulating section 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating tip side will be locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire may enter, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operating device 300 is assumed. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operating device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operating device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the configuration is such that it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if you follow the gap between the operating device 300.

Note that the harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is inserted into a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) that is bored in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the elongated cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, the wire or the like will not reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operating device 300. For example, a player who feels bad about a game result may pour drinking water or the like onto the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the operating device 300 located at a convenient location is likely to become a prey to being splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) may malfunction. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board, etc. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is placed on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since they are separably independent, liquid such as drinking water applied to the operating device 300 can be prevented from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a recessed portion 15a is recessed in the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operating device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a complete case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps). The recessed portion 15a plays the role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and furthermore, the drive motor 342 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) Since the section is disposed below the horizontal plate section disposed between the motor accommodating section 341e and the lighting support section 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquids such as drinking water can reach the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent damage.

In addition, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquid such as drinking water may come into contact with the voice coil motor 352. The liquid remains attached to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down toward the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player on his way home splashes a liquid such as drinking water on him, the next player can play the game normally as long as he wipes off the top surface of the operating device 300 that he touches. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operating device 300 from compressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a movable binding member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the movable binding member 180 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 similarly to FIG. 91.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are illustrated side by side. be. In addition, in FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in a released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in a fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The movable binding member 180 is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the movable binding member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the movable binding member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operating device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are connected to the relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the elongated cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads from the relay board to the movable binding member 180, and the extension harnesses HN3 are tied to the movable binding member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The movable binding member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotably supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extend from the opposite side surface of the movable arm section 182, and the other side surface of the movable arm section 182 in the rotational direction (the side opposite to the main body section 181 in FIG. 93(a)). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking parts 184, which are disposed in a U-shaped top view and can lock the binding arms 183, and the pair of binding arms 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing part 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm part 182 and having an opening.

In addition, in the binding movable member 180, while the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have high flexibility, the other portions are formed to have less flexibility (higher rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body part 181 has a fixed part 181a whose upper side has a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through hole in the center for passing a screw, and a fixed part 181a that protrudes from the left and right lower corners of the fixed part 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are provided, and an intermediate stop portion extends downward from the lower edge of the front side end of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curves close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96(a)), and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. It mainly includes a cylindrical fastening part 181e formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 at a position where the movable binding member 180 is fixed, which is made up of through holes arranged to match the arrangement of the fixed part 181a and the pair of rotation prevention parts 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. This makes it possible to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a during fastening, and to determine the attitude of the movable binding member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d during fixation.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between it and the plate member 14d. In this embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extended ends (lower ends) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward, and the center is placed on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is ensured for the region that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e fits into the proximal portion of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e allows the movable arm portion 182 to be rotated. Pivotally supported (see Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end portion that is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 that is offset from the pivot position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a, and a thin elongated thin plate portion 182b connected to the opposite side of the pivot position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is located at the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connected to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. side walls in the direction of rotation each extend from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature disposed on the same side, and the distance between them gradually becomes shorter as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a (high rigidity) design concept that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a (low rigidity) design concept with the intention of elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described, and a description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a narrow portion 183a formed near the tip with a width equivalent to the width of the base, and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a, which are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that in the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking part 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, by forming the thickened portion on the outer circumferential side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), a space can be secured on the inner circumferential side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking part 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the side of the movable arm 182, and is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with the large opening 184a in between, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly includes a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the narrow width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , the large width portion 183b is sized so that it cannot pass (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is desired to move relative to the locking part 184, it is placed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is smaller). When the binding arm 183 is to be locked to the locking part 184, by placing it on the small opening 184b side, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily controlled. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through hole in the center thereof through which a binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be tied together, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing part 185 and fixed. , the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the movable binding member 180 will be explained. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

Note that FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b) illustrate a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable approximately 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis directed in the vertical direction). This angle is suitable for normal use, considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in game parlors (pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machines 8010 are rotated more than 90 degrees, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm section 182 cannot rotate beyond the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body section 181 without being elastically deformed (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Therefore, the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates and breaks due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be explained. The arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the movable binding member 180, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

96(a) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

Note that FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b) illustrate one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) illustrate the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is disposed at a position moved toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14 from the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is the same, The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop part 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivot position of the movable arm part 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upwardly extending wall part 173c with the intermediate stop part 181c in between. ~HN3 can be shaped to match the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the movable binding member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Moreover, by arranging the locking part 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the area surrounded by the binding arm part 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm part 182 in between. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines in imaginary lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the movable binding member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57, similarly to the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 96 ( b), see also Figure 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the movable binding member 180 are attached to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed relative to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route that passes near a vertically elongated metal portion (the portion abutted by the base end 182a of the movable arm portion 182 in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly routing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in a detour manner, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from coming close to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. (See FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire may be heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. , it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178, melted and penetrated, and the wire is advanced to the gaming area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom part of the inverted cup part 178, it becomes high temperature. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out and electrical continuity is disabled.

Improper conduct can be quickly discovered by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes disconnected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from obtaining fraudulent profits.

In detail, the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, so if the harness HN1 burns out, the ball cannot be fired even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, the period from when a fraudulent act is committed until the fraudulent act is discovered can be shortened (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after entering the wire into the gaming area and tampering with the gaming area (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize from being able to shoot a ball, it is possible to prevent a person from receiving fraudulent profits. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) can be operated and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that the person who commits the fraudulent act may not be able to collect the remaining amount of balls on the banknotes and cards inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her own fraudulent act. Therefore, it is possible to act as a deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is used to carry out fraudulent acts without the risk of being unable to collect the banknotes or balls equivalent to the remaining balance of the card, the card unit (ball lending unit) Since the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving his/her seat even though the balance of the game machine (unit) is 0 yen, the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of harness HN2 is broken, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) is output.At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is checked. By doing so, it is possible to easily identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In addition, in FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145. In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 occupies an area of about ⅔ of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left side of the ball guide opening 53, and The lower end portion is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area approximately ⅓ of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages extending from the put-out ball receptacle section 143 and the foul ball receptacle section 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 are respectively provided whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once.

The S-shaped path SL1 makes it possible to increase the flow path length of the front door lower plate passage 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short. The number of possible balls can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). The large number of balls that can be secured and temporarily stored in the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of replenishing balls (when the lower tray 50 worth of balls runs out, players have to remove the balls from the senryo box). It is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress stress caused by being required to replenish the game.

The front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending areas NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as areas whose extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and these bend areas are common. Equipped with characteristics. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area provided upstream of the first bending area NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion reversed. A region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage section 145 includes a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEb2 provided on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic part reversed. , is provided. In addition, in the description of the characteristic parts, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be explained, and the description of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending area NEa1 includes a side wall Na that is disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door lower plate passage section 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na, and a ceiling wall Nb extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na toward the extension end. The passage forming unit 140 mainly includes a proximal wall Nc, and each of these walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed so that the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the direction of movement of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as wire or piano wire). The details will be explained later. Note that the gap Nin between the proximal wall Nc and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, a possible entry route for the illegally inserted wire HM is a route that uses the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance and proceeds to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage section 142; The person who commits the fraudulent act advances the wire HM while pressing it against the side wall of the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the person committing the fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even if the wire HM moves to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door lower tray passage section 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It turns out. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 in a horizontally reversed manner, the wire HM can completely enter the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling route of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. Note that the position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the direction of movement of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (caught) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from moving further, prevent the wire HM from being held, and quickly discover fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and advances further, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, it will overhang with the tip facing downward, so the wire HM cannot be advanced any further. Even if this happens, the tip of the wire HM will continue to move downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 located upstream of the payout ball socket 143 or the gaming area located upstream of the foul ball socket 146.

As a result, it is possible to make the wire HM reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or to cause the wire HM to reach the gaming area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person committing a fraudulent act from obtaining an illegal profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player, etc., and making it easier to illegally win a prize, such as obtaining an illegal payout ball.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage section 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the downstream portion from the confluence region CE where it merges with the ball extraction passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, more than twice the diameter). As a result, when the ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is placed in the merging area CE, the ball flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging passage CE (the balls enter the merging area CE at the same time). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage section 145 includes a passage section 145a that is formed between the first bending area NEb1 and the second bending area NEb2 and vertically connecting the bending areas NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set to have a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 protrudes toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the area upstream of the passage part 145a, the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end of the passage part 145a, and in the area downstream of the passage part 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a larger front-to-back width in an area on the upstream side of the passage part 145a than in an area on the downstream side of the passage part 145a. In this embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set so that the front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage section 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a longitudinal width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage section 145a. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage section 145, since a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted back and forth upstream of the passage section 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they will be slightly shifted horizontally and vertically), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted to one ball at a time. As a result, even if two or more foul balls enter the foul ball passage section 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the upper and lower walls being caught and interlocking.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end connected to the left side wall, and a downward flow surface of the ball faces rightward. From the inclined plate part 146a which slopes downward as much as possible, the closing part 146b which closes the foul ball socket part 146 vertically below the inclined plate part 146a, and the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate part 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction thereof is directed upward toward the back side.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage section 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate section 146c, the foul ball receiving section 146 is guided toward the front side by the action of the inclined plate section 146a and the blocking section 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate part 146a can be caused to flow to the right, and the blocking part 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving part 146. I can do it.

Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that passes through the foul ball socket 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage section in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of the ball 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to make the ball flow smoothly.

Since the foul ball passage section 145 has a narrow passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped route SL2 (for example, the passage section 145a), the foul ball passage section 145 has a narrower passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball). It is possible to prevent tools from passing through the foul ball passage section 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be explained. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be elongated from side to side, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500, which constitutes an illumination section 8031 and an illumination section 8032. In this support structure, a tapered support groove 417 is provided at the lower end of the right side end of the upper panel unit 400, and is recessed from the back side to the front side, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

Thereby, it is not necessary to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, they can be connected and fixed to each other. Note that, from the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Note that details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into left and right parts, are connected to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the structure in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted together, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other in the left and right directions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e, which is sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are connected to the main body frame 14a. The disassembled state from 14a is illustrated.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is inserted into the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIGS. 121 and 122). A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening part 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side, and by fastening the screw passed through the through hole to the second fastening part 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a, While illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

Note that, as an actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, the right side wall portion of the right panel unit 500 forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate section 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left and right direction, and these heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the main body frame. 14a (see FIG. 104) and a vertically elongated plate-shaped support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed to the support plate 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 by screws inserted into the support plate part 510 from the back side to the front side, and in this state, the support plate part 510 is inserted into the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) with screws inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-shaped extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and also has an L-shaped cross section. (See FIG. 86), there is a fixing plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a comes into contact with the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 which is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. , a plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and a portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a table-like shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b can come into contact with the heavy plate units 500L, 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). It is possible to suppress the collapse of That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L, 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension part 511a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 than the base part 511b, so that the front side of the extension part 511a While the outer cover member 560 comes into contact with the support plate part 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed as a surface almost flush with the side surface of the base part 511b up to the back side end. The back side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end of the support plate part 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is arranged in the plane position of the back side end of the support plate part 510. comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540, with a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) between adjacent LEDs. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light guide member 540 projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. irradiate (see Figure 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the width of the light emitting portion from side to side) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak through the light guide member. The light enters the light guide member 540 and exits from either surface of the light guide member 540, and the entry and exit of the light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 527 is inserted from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back surface fastening portion 527 .

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 556 is inserted from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back surface fastening portion 556 .

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate part 510 from the front side, if the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate part 510 (the protrusion 566 Even if the protrusion 566 is vertically misaligned by about the diameter of , the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation with respect to the support plate portion 510, positional deviation is eliminated and fastening is facilitated. Fixation can be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light. An inner lens member 530 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R has a light guiding member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L, and is in contact with the light guiding member 540 in the left and right direction, and the front end thereof is arranged opposite to each other in the front and back direction, and the light guide member 540 is disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. It mainly includes an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be explained. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, showing the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. , a lower fastening part 523 that is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate part 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate part 521, and inserted into the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening parts 525, which are cylindrical parts to which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525, and the inner lens member 530 A plurality of long fastening parts 526, which are cylindrical parts inserted into the body, into which screws are screwed to fix the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520; It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening parts 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate part 510 are screwed.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front side end portion 521a having a wave shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b at a short width portion of the wave shape (a portion closer to the back side). Equipped with

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact (shapes match) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that tilts to the left toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals vertically, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually become wider from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the aperture widths of the plurality of apertures 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each aperture 524.

The upper fastening part 522 is a cylindrical part into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is inserted, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening parts 522a arranged in parallel in the front-back direction. A fitting groove 522b is provided.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 through screws inserted at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four locations above and below, and function as windows through which the inner lens member 530 is visually recognized in the assembled state. Each external portion of the opening 524 is formed into a curved shape that extends to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design in this embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back side base portion 521b is concave and curved to the right in the design between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wave shape that waves from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion that projects toward the front side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, a depression is formed on the back surface of the design-shaped projecting portion, which tends to become a dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the inner lens member 530 side) Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, in the inner lens member 530, the front end 531a of the main body plate 531, which is formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, has a wave shape that almost matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. be done.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front and rear direction at a switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. and support holes 531b and 531c into which the protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in the wave-shaped front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear part of the front end 531a, and an inclined rib part 532 is provided on the back side of the support hole 531c to extend to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

Note that the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is bored in the left-right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted therethrough, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is connected to a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. , and a plurality of reinforcing plate parts 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate parts 532a in the vertical direction.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. That is, like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes toward the back side, so the left and right width becomes longer as it goes toward the back side (the front end when viewed from above). It has a triangular shape with the tip at the tip.

The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 extending leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524 . The projecting portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the projecting side, which is protruded in a wavy manner and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which concave portions are arranged in a lattice pattern to redirect the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right directions. This is a so-called light guide plate. That is, at least a portion of the light irradiated from the LED 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated onto the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width in the thickness direction is from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the end face on the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end surface.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for converting light from a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-like concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a, and causes it to exit from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is made of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at approximately 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing it against resin (hot pressing). Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially perpendicular direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably transparent, and includes acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, and amorphous olefin resin. Examples include resin, polystyrene resin, and AS resin (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among these, by using acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 with high average brightness and little reduction in brightness distribution.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after heat bending can be improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a front end shaped like a wave whose front end is slightly shifted toward the back side than the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the light guide member 540 has a wave shape that is slightly shifted toward the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530. It is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

In the present invention, the waveforms on the left and right sides are not strict. There is no particular restriction on the degree of wavyness, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after heat bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can provide three-dimensional degrees of freedom. .

The details of the horizontally undulating wave shape will be described later (see FIG. 114), but it is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate part 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate part 521c. The wavy shape is positioned to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material in which the concave portion is formed. The heat bending method of the present invention involves heating a thermoplastic resin having a curved concave surface (female shape) and a convex surface (male shape) at a heating temperature of 10 to 40 degrees Celsius above the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin serving as the base material. It is made by pressing the base material into a mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin has an acrylic resin as its main component, the heating temperature can be 110°C or higher and 150°C or lower. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130°C or higher and 150°C or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By keeping the temperature of the base material during heating below the load deflection temperature + 40°C and below the melting point, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light is fluctuations in the reflection angle can be suppressed. This can prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution on the light guide plate. Moreover, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a main body plate portion 541 in the shape of a curved plate constituting a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted. The fastening portion 542 is mainly provided.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recessed portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least on the inside of the projection surface on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the effect of the production by light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported within the body plate portion 551. The inner fitting part 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 protrudes to the right, and the outer cover A projecting portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a plurality of through holes 555 that protrude from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and are formed from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate part 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 has its front and rear ends shaped to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface, which almost matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape and is arranged slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front and back direction at any position in the up and down direction. Ru.

The front side end portion 551a has a plurality of protrusions that are protruded toward the front side at the switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front-rear direction, and that are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It includes a mounting portion 551b.

A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) bulging toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed on the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540 (see FIG. 115(a)). Formed in countless numbers. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recessed part of the projecting part 554 that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate part 551). As a result, the outer lens member 550 can be firmly fastened to the outer cover member 560, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back surface fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate part 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in surface contact (see FIG. 114(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from shifting in the direction in which it is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being misaligned with the light guide member 540, and to accurately input light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. can be done.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end of the main body plate portion 561. The fastening portion 522a has an elongated hole portion formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of holes through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastened part 562 having a screw receiving part 562a and the lower end of the main body plate part 561 are receiving surfaces capable of receiving the fastening part 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and has a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. is a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening part 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end thereof, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526, and a vertical width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 are formed in the shape of elongated holes with a long horizontal width, and screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the main body plate 561 toward the back side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 makes surface contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), so the cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to protrude toward the front side. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the protrusion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape that is equivalent to the outer shape of the protrusion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, and therefore, unauthorized acts of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

A method for assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIG. 113(a) and FIG. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled with the main body plate 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), this can be done by bringing the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R from the front side and inserting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b.

In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front end of the right panel unit (front side of the front side of the light guide member 540). The number of screws for fastening and fixing can be reduced, and the area where light is blocked by the screws can be reduced. It can be made easily visible in a band shape.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening locations) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, which may lead to incorrect guidance when fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged due to the load applied to the light member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

Note that when approaching the left heavy plate unit 500L from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitute surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship that allows the surfaces to come into contact with each other. That is, since the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide when moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction relative to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the right Panel unit 500 can be assembled easily.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures. .

The first procedure is to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R to each other, and then fasten and fix them to the support plate part 510. is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved to the right heavy plate unit 500L. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate part 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

As described above, it is possible to assemble and disassemble the right panel unit 500 in two different procedures, so the worker performing maintenance etc. can disassemble and assemble the right panel unit 500 in which procedure, depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced. It is possible to select one of the two methods, thereby reducing the work time.

In addition, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R must be slid relative to each other in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one of them from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted can be achieved by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and then This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that may occur through the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily committed. As in this embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate part 510, and the screws are inserted from the front side. By making it difficult to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be removed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity that involves passing through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect on presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c).

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right sides by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that waves in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is focused on the side forming the concave shape, and diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be focused and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, from the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side. It can diffuse the light emitted to the area and use it for production.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, there are differences in the manner of light production (whether the light is focused or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Note that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into different regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into different regions, the appearance of light on both the left and right sides can be made different. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes depending on the size of the opening 524. In other words, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also increases as the openings 524 move upward from the top. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R1. , is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524, so that the LEDs 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be made larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Furthermore, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the bottom opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line emanating from it is shaped slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light that is visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, making it possible to add sharpness to the light production, and directing the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom to the player's line of sight. It can be emitted upwards.

The vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114(c). The width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R3 is The width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the lower openings 524 among the openings 524 are formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the aperture 524 is increased in areas where the degree of light convergence is weak (for example, the portion with the radius of curvature R1), so that the light is sufficiently incident on the aperture 524, and the light is condensed. At a location where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

Note that the center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. It is placed approximately in the middle of the

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary area KE of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is defined as a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper part, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower part of the region KE. coincides with the top of Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 512a to the area KE in the front-rear direction travels while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so even if the light condensing effect is lowered, it is visible to the player. There is little difference in the amount of light.

On the other hand, by making the region KE convex to the left instead of a flat surface, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed into a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented, so that the light guide member 540 can improve the durability of

Furthermore, by forming a convex shape toward the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. can be formed. Thereby, the effect of the light effect visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, depending on whether or not the light is incident on the area KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to suppress the change in the light visible through the opening 524 while causing a change in the light visible through the opening 565. .

For example, it is also possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gap by turning off the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a. At this time, since the right side of the light guide member 540 has a concave shape in the upper and lower portions of the region KE, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized darkly in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visible to the player. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be varied.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (corresponding to the area KE) of the overhang part 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the amount of light is weak. Effects may be performed using the light that reaches this front end.

That is, a light effect that cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation level of the performance to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side farther away from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the notification is made using light that is not visible to the player sitting on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to issue an error notification that can be easily noticed by the clerk while the player committing the fraudulent act is not noticed, thereby preventing the fraudulent player from attempting to escape. It can be prevented.

Note that by reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers toward the front side from the end surface (about 5 mm thick) on the LED 512a side. The largest end of the light guide member 540 on the front side (the part farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to have a width of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the left and right width dimensions have a similar slope over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end surface becomes longer, it becomes more tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the vicinity of the support hole 531b and is arranged in a recessed position on the back side. Due to the shadow created by the support hole 531c, the area around the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the area around the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the part facing the support hole 531c is smaller than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the part facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the area near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visible in the area near the support hole 531b is increased. This can reduce the difference in distance between the front and back and the degree of darkness caused by shadows. This makes it easy to make the level of light emitted visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 uniform vertically (reducing the difference in intensity) with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the frontmost surface. )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (progressing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as a result of the curved light guide member 540, and as it passes through the inner lens member 530, the light is slightly It spreads and progresses to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curved shape of the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is kept constant, the light emission mode (concentration, brightness and darkness) can be made different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission manner different from the light emission manner expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Furthermore, since the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115(b), the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not directed directly to the side, but toward the player side. (See the imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b). The imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540.) Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 100 and 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. (see) and is supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front side of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and is sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , is mainly provided. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side is decorated to indicate the model name, etc., and includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to create a light effect.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body part 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall part 403 formed in a wavy shape on the rear outer wall of the main body part 402, and a wavy wall part 403 of the wavy wall part 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side, which is a cylindrical inner side. A cylindrical part 405 whose shape is formed by penetrating the wavy wall part 403, and a plurality of fastening parts 406 arranged on the back side of the main body part 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed into a box shape with front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping their open sides, and a space is formed inside. Note that the included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body part 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 meshes with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, thereby easily determining the mounting position in the left and right direction, thereby facilitating the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves sexuality.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. Note that the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 .

The cylindrical part 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body part 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws passing through the upper frame member 410 and fastening to the plurality of fastening parts 406 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), it forms a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 with the upper side plate member 14e, making it difficult to access the inside. Formed in such a way that it becomes difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , a left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a left corner support member 430L is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to a position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R to prevent it from falling off to the back side, and also constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a longitudinally elongated member in which openings are formed on both left and right sides through which vibration waves (audio) generated from the speaker assembly 450 pass, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 that is formed through the support hole 413 with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 that is formed through the support hole 414 in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thereby, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. This can prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached or detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed from the front. An LED 14e2 is disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the player can see the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has, on the back side, a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a fastening portion 419 arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and formed into which a screw can be screwed; and a second fastening portion 419 formed at a vertical position into which a screw can be screwed. It mainly includes a fastening part 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end of the lower edge). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the left and right claws to fit into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the supported groove 417 ), the load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can fit into the upper end of the illumination part 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 The illumination portion 8031 is configured to be able to apply a load (weight, etc.) applied from the illumination portion 8031 to the illumination portion 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided in a rib-like manner so as to protrude from the base to a position that does not reach the tip. It has an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a allows the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e to be connected to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (see FIG. 125(a)), details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are ribs of the same shape arranged at three locations around the fastening portion 419 at 120° intervals along the direction in which the screw is fastened to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at the lower position of the main body member 411. The recesses 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 are formed at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by a curved long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape when viewed from below at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and An L-shaped extension part 423 that extends from the upper edge of the wavy wall part 422 toward the front side and then extends upward from the extension end and has an L-shaped cross section, and a main body plate part 421. It mainly includes an opening 424 that is disposed equidistantly apart from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and is configured of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back side, A portion of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically, and it is possible to improve the strength.

In the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123), the opening 424 is an opening that allows vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 into the interior of the speaker assembly 450 to pass through (release to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front and back direction. The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, only the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the explanation of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an audio device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave so that it can be heard, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 that is inserted into a through hole 466. The front assembly 460 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460 is formed with an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and a space is formed between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). It mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits sound effects related to the game, and one end is connected to the speaker 451 and extends. The speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a covering part that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is not enclosed. High quality sound can be played back and output without any loss of performance. Moreover, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in the shape of a cup that is long on the left and right and open on the back side, and a plurality of semicircular distal ends recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. an extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed part 462 and the recessed part 463b having the same shape as the recessed part 462 toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body part 461; , a wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end of the main body 461 toward the front, a light passage through hole 465 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461 , and A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and the rear A plurality of fastening portions 468 into which screws inserted into the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and a connecting hole 469 into which screws are inserted to fasten the left and right speaker assemblies 450L, 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100). and a front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body part 461 is divided in the left-right direction, and includes a proximal main body part 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the proximal main body part 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body part 461M connected to the left side) and a distal end main body part 461T connected to the left-right center side of the intermediate main body part 461M (left side in FIG. 121). Note that a space is continuously formed between the proximal main body part 461B, the intermediate main body part 461M, and the distal main body part 461T with the rear assembly 480.

The main body part 461 includes a rear side wall part 461H formed as a wall part surrounding almost the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge without a barb on the inside (an edge without a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed part 462 is a recessed part in which the fastening part 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning between the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screws inserted into the through-holes 463a are inserted from the rear side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the co-tightening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and are inserted into the through-holes 483a and 14e3 of the rear assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and into the through hole 463a, so that the extension plate 463 becomes larger as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e in between (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material in between). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The width of the wiring passage recess 464 is smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is degraded due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 contacts the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in front and back, and forms a bent passage that bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). These are the ribs that form the . This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body part 461. This prevents a gap from forming on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 481 formed in the shape of a cup that is long on the left and right sides and open on the front side, and a semicircular tip recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate that extends in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and a cup-shaped convex portion of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage-forming ribs 487 extend from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side in a rib shape, and through-holes into which screws are inserted are formed at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 488 , and a rear recess 491 recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding in the front-rear direction to the front recess 471 of the front assembly 460 .

The main body part 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall 481H is formed into a shape that fits inside the inner surface of the rear side wall 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H around the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing protrusion 484 at positions sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily secured to the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered to widen left and right toward the front side (distal end side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection wire 453 is routed from the wire passing recess 464. Even if it comes off and begins to shift left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

Thereby, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing protrusion 484. It can be easily accommodated in any opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and is inserted through the through-hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the through hole 483a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is extended as the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is provided in a convex manner along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481, and is formed with a width that is fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and has a width that is larger than the depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, by passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing protrusion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464 compress the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. It is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the opening surrounded by the speaker connection line 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 is passed.

The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. Note that the light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose cross section becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage-forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and abuts each other without any gaps in the front and rear. This is a rib that forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends around. This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H and is formed at the front and rear ends of the front side wall 481H. That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from forming on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage-forming rib 487 comes into contact with the passage-forming rib 467, and is designed to have dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force from the passage forming rib 467 toward the back side, and the compressive force causes the passage forming ribs 467, 487 to elastically deform in the front-back direction and close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has low rigidity in the left-right direction and may bend left and right, the compressive force may not work properly and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left and right direction is reduced to the strength of the front side wall 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H). The strength can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity of the passage-forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage-forming rib 487 can be prevented from flexing in the left-right direction, so that the gap between it and the passage-forming rib 467 can be effectively closed. I can do it.

The rear recessed portion 491 has a shape that is reversed from front to back than the front recessed portion 471, and together with the front recessed portion 471 forms an opening. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 is It is placed in a position surrounding the outline.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is shown as an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown on surfaces facing each other. It is shown in a state where it is unfolded toward the front of the page. That is, by folding FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper, the abutting positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-back direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the proximal body portion 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic path serving as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage-forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 467 are formed inside (on the left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are staggered vertically toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the left side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wire passes, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e , the wiring can be prevented from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, so that the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. I can do it.

Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 would travel linearly, but in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws moves toward the left side (arrow When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is located on the L side and is closest in the left-right direction is placed on the lower side, the direction of movement between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is generated after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is placed on the lower side, and then the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is placed on the left side (arrow L side) and closest in the left-right direction (for example, , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are vertically arranged alternately as in this embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a vertically curved path, The travel path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured to be longer than the left and right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed from the pair of recesses 471 and 491, and suppresses the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the same effect as that of the passage forming rib 467 can also be produced by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed part 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed part 471 and the recessed part 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the directions of arrows L and U.

Therefore, the recessed portions 462, 463b not only have an effect during assembly, but also have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 487 are formed on the inside (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side (main In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. I can do it.

Here, each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and the assembled state (see FIG. (see) are arranged facing each other in the front-back direction.

Note that the actions of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to those of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the same effect as that of the passage forming rib 487 can also be produced by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted between the recessed part 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed part 491 and the recessed part 483b disposed above it and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b not only have the effect during assembly, but also have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration waves Ws.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R decreases as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are arranged vertically. , the vertical width is suddenly expanded at a position further away from the speaker 451 , and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the proximal main body portion 461B side where the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, so that the output is output from the rear side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) travels toward the distal end body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip main body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120). The sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside the Pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear surface of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recesses 471 and 491, and an opening 424 ( 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the machine, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high quality without being muffled. I can do it.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is in the same phase as the sound output from the recessed portions 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. In other words, in the bass reflex speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out the sound output from the front side due to the opposite phase, but can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is able to perform a performance full of realism, and can increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is placed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and the liquid is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (it is discharged downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide a game performance using the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is set as a path that avoids each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement and vertical extension length of each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e, vibration wave Ws (audio ) can be tuned.

In addition, in this embodiment, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480 are used for the purpose other than the above-mentioned purpose. It is disposed at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d can reinforce the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are inserted.

Further, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e and are pressed (see FIG. 125(a)). 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening part 468, the fastening part 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of the extension plates 463, 483. When screws are inserted into the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions on which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is aligned with the upper side plate member 14e. 14e, the concave portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450 rest on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 are likely to be damaged, but in this embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the recessed portions 462, 482 are easily damaged. It is possible to reinforce against the load applied to the portions 462, 482, and the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, fraudulent acts such as trying to illegally infiltrate wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 are more difficult. It can be easily suppressed.

In addition, in such a fraudulent act, a wire, piano wire, etc. is illegally entered into the gaming area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is inserted into the front recessed portion 471 In addition to being formed in a sealed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear concave portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from where it entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires or piano wires can be passed through the through holes. It is possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 is allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, making it easier to prevent fraudulent profits from occurring.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R. is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). be. Note that in FIGS. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated as an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustration is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side, and a shape that fits into the inner surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that Thereby, the work efficiency of inserting the front side wall part 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall part 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship such that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter longitudinal dimension than the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration waves Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed down) in the intermediate body part 461M compared to the tip side body part 461T. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the distal main body part 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491 is inside the intermediate main body part 461M. A large amount of space is secured by bulging out in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end main body portion 461T, and can be emitted at a low speed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass sounds due to the vibration wave Ws.

125(a) is a partial sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a). b) is a partial sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening part 419 is formed by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening part 419. This is a portion where the upper side plate member 14e is sandwiched between the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from shifting in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening part 419b and the fastening part 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed parts 462, 482 (they do not come into contact with the recessed parts 462, 482 in the fastening direction, but pass through them), so that the front assembly 460 and the rear It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without using the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, in the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the back side is disposed inside). At a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the front side is disposed on the inside).

Note that in this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are respectively arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, so that the reproduction output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side. Conflict with the sound being played can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muddy.

In this embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in plane contact with each other (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e is provided to protrude toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) the entire surface of the speaker assembly 450 against the upper side plate member 14e, but has a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 makes a line contact, particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

Note that in this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin); however, it is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete, a soft resin material, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the metal member has a high specific gravity. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the material be a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. are applicable. By using these members, it is possible to improve the sound rise performance.

Regarding the shape, the protrusions may be in the form of a long plate, in the form of a spike, or in a dotted manner with rounded ends. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, the rear surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

For example, when disposing it on the back side of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is made into a cylindrical shape, and is disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted therethrough. You can also determine the position by doing this. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the other members.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 will not be connected to the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) or the same as the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a screw inserted into a through hole disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction in terms of shape, and a through hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is disposed. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, regarding the fixation of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted through the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screws inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, the structure is such that no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e can be applied to the relationship between the main body frame 14a and the speaker assembly 450 connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same way as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . Note that FIG. 127(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting parts 12a and 12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, there are a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b spaced apart in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end part of the game board 13. will be placed.

The left end front support part 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface that is formed on one surface so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape with an open center portion. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a state of natural length so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes leftward. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction toward the side where the game board 13 is arranged (to the right) together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. Thereby, work efficiency when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 2 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. FIG. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(a) shows the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. , FIG. 128(b) and FIG. 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after completing the assembly to the inner frame 12. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, some structures of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted for ease of understanding.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, temporarily place the game board 13 on the top surface of the plate passage forming member 160, align the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, and then attach the left end of the game board 13. slide between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a rotated position around the axis pointing in the vertical direction, so the left end front support on the near side Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere, in this embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b may interfere. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is rotated around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front side of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it approaches the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portion 12b1. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom part 12c is a plate-shaped part formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 are provided in the left and right direction to support from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. At the same time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so by making the game board 13 ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed smoothly. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Note that the angle of inclination of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is a larger angle than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor. This makes it possible to avoid the inclination of the sloped surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the Pachinko machine 8013 during installation, so that the game can be played without depending on the backward inclination of the Pachinko machine 8013 during installation. Work efficiency when assembling the panel 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slope angle of the slope of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same slope angle as the rear slope when the game parlor is installed. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and in a released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 is rotated. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 allows the front rotation claw member 620 and the front regulation claw member 630 (portions disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) to move toward the entrance of the game board 13. Since it is configured to be evacuated from the route, it is possible to improve the workability of assembling the game board 13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the states of the upper and lower board support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

Note that the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, by changing the state of the panel support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, the game board 13 is rotating using the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so the claw member 640 is rotated via the game board 13 due to the principle of leverage. The force required when applying a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two places, upper and lower (see FIG. 126). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12. Also, the degree to which the game board 13 tilts forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed in by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. It is possible to reduce the degree of tilting back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 toward the inner frame 12 to close it (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support parts 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is fixed to the support bottom 12c in the vertical position. is regulated.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and supported by the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the direction of the surface of the game board 13, and a control board that is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d, to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back side, is connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotational direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotational direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board support device 600 that is disposed near the right corner of the inner frame 12 with a pair of upper and lower sides facing each other. Note that since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are disposed facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be described, and a description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. Note that FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b) illustrate a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the board support device 600 in a fixed state. A released state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 600 is rotatably connected to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A front rotational claw member 620 that is pivotally supported, and a regulation front claw member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the front rotational claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the front rotational claw member 620. 630, and a post-rotation claw member 640 which is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate part 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a pair of main body plate parts 611 that are part of the main body plate part 611 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate part 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 bored in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , an arcuate recess 614 that is recessed from below in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed into the plate part 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulating rods 615 and a pair of screws that extend from the plate portion 611a in a flange shape from side to side and are inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)) are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12. It mainly includes a fixing plate 616.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the proximal end of the insertion, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the distal end of the insertion is pressed. , is fixed in the support hole 612. This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, so the explanation will be omitted. Note that when the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the front rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portion 621a arranged to face each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and a pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line in the upper corner of the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 are formed and into which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports which are formed in a straight line through the back side of the plate part 621a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. It mainly includes a hole 624.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at the same time, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged to face each other in the left and right directions, and includes an elongated portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate parts 621a formed in a T-shape in side view, a connecting plate part 621b that connects and fixes the upper edges of the plate parts 621a, and a surface from the rear side end of the connecting plate part 621b to the connecting plate part 621b. A rear side extension plate 621c extends at a downward slope of about 45 degrees with respect to the rear side, and a rear side extension plate 621c extends perpendicularly to the plate part 621a from the rear side end of the extension part 621a2 toward the opposite side plate part 621a. A hanging back plate part 621d is provided, and a front side extension plate 621e that extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate part 621d toward the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate part 621d. The main preparation is as follows.

The downward hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the drooping back plate portion 621d are formed at right angles to each other.

The rear side extension plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring By retracting above NBb, torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated toward the worker, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the end of the rotation, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the rotational momentum of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the lower end portion of the rotational claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 includes a main body plate portion 631 that is formed into a letter-shaped shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 are formed to pass through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined toward the front side from the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that extends in a horizontal direction, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free attitude change of the pre-restriction claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 641 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 are formed to penetrate through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63, and from the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that extends at an angle.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that comes into contact with the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle such that it touches the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. Note that in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), the process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. 134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b), a multifunctional cover member 171 and a multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 are fixed to the board support device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board support device 600. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the back side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third This can prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, since the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 The front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is raised in such a manner as to be separated from the hanging rear plate portion 621d.

To be more specific, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a, which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects with a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance part 634b, which is a part connected to the back side of the resistance part 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged opposite to the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135(a) to 135(b)).

In the angular range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (the range between FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 135(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630 Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the (posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the postural change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a downward load being applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, the positional relationship is such that when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630. , the shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c Rubbing friction occurs between 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board support device 600 may reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at a halfway angle. There may be cases where this occurs.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the space between the back of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front of the game board 13 This may shorten the distance between the two, which may impede the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, the store clerk who was working on closing the front frame 14 can be made aware that the board support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

Once the clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 will overlap when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), when the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation pawl Depending on the manner of abutment of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at a halfway angle (exclusively (The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the back side of the back side extension plate 621c is no longer in contact with the game board 13, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not regulated by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front claw member 630 in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 becomes the fixed state, the front end of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, if the game board 13 is placed in the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, if the clerk pushes the game board 13 with a little insufficient force, the game board 13 will be stabilized 90% of the time). In this case, when a load is applied to the panel support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14, In this case, the load can change the board support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG. 134(a). ), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600, which faces the game board 13, are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate part 621d. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed facing the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates as the game board 13 pushes the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d, the first shaft member P61 is the center. The non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Furthermore, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases.

As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves forcefully close to the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. After that, the board support device 600 can be placed in a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state where the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is in contact with the multifunctional cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a).) Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when replacing the board). , it is possible to improve the work efficiency of workers.

In addition, when changing the board surface support device 600 from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled toward the front upper side, and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation bar 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotational direction), so the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and continues to rotate. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

Note that when the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed toward the front side by the displacing post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 will be different from top to bottom. , there is a risk that the load applied to the game board 13 will become excessive.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 that is operated when the board support device 600 is released, and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640. do not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member that support the game board 13 are smaller than the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress displacement of the longitudinal position of the game board 13 at the portions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, a similar effect is produced. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and moves the pre-rotation claw member 620. and the rotated claw member 640 in a direction that widens the angle.

Therefore, compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so the game board at the locations supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be suppressed from shifting in the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the front frame 14 is illustrated in a closed state.

Further, FIG. 136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 138 shows the board support device 600 moved at a predetermined angle (approximately 25 ) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139, and the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed is shown in FIG. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the opening/closing regulating portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 shown in cross section in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated with imaginary lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating section back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating section 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is placed. is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the position when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating part 159 is reduced. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotational claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotational claw member 620 is affected by the action of the regulating rod 615. (clockwise direction in Fig. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 138) are opposite directions, and the reaction force becomes excessive, so this is difficult under normal loads. As described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c will come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

Further, in this state, when trying to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulating rod 615. As mentioned above, the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) of the pre-regulation claw member 630 are never opposite, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load. (See Figure 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be pushed in through the opening/closing regulating portion 159, and the board support device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball firing unit 112a and the cover member that closes the back side of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. . That is, in FIG. 143(b), only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-casting, and a base member 711 assembled to the base member 710, with the right side of the resin base member 711 as the center. The base member 710 is pivotably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) that partially covers the front surface of the base member 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. It mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, and is secured to the base member 710 with an elastically deformable hook or the like, and is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is made of synthetic resin or the like. and a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 launched by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 for regulating the posture. A plurality of fastening portions 716 are provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side at an intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a that bulges out in a straight line from the base member 710 toward the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. It mainly includes a mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 713 bored on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723. , a protruding portion 714 protruding from the front side adjacent to the right side of the locking portion 713, and a protruding portion 714 disposed opposite to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a protruding defect determination protrusion 715.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), and is located inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state. An opposing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is left and right opposite to the opposing plane 714a and is inclined toward the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( When the cover member 721 is floating above the cover member 721, the cover member 721 comes into contact with the cover member 721 and has a convex height that restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the store clerk can use the suction force. It can be noticed that the connection of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before a malfunction occurs in the ball firing unit 112a, it is possible to perform repair (fastening and fixing the attraction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening).

The ball feeding device 720 has a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by a shaft on a base member 711, a regulation state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a control state that controls the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly includes a switching device 740 that is controlled to change the state between a permissive state and a permissive state in which the flow to the launch rail 730 is allowed.

The cover member 721 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a cup shape with an open back side (the front side in the drawing in the orientation shown in FIG. 143(a)), and is a pair of covers that are loosely fitted into the receiving portions 712 of the base member 711. A ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through a rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the opposite left and right sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball passing opening 724 that is drilled in the front-rear direction as large as possible, and a cutting metal member 725 that is disposed in a position that extends slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end of the ball passing opening 724. It mainly includes a shaft portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 includes an attractive force generating solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726, and the attractive force generating solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 is rotated, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is secured to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, A guide slope part 744 that is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide slope part 744. It mainly includes a regulating protrusion 745 that extends at a distance of about 100 mm and has an extended end that protrudes toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft portion 726.

The ball passing opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and includes a falling plate portion 724a that slopes downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction; Rib portions 724b are disposed opposite to each other above the downstream plate portion 724a and extend downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extending end surface slopes downward as it goes toward the back side. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c that is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passing opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passing opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the ball P8 comes into contact with the sloped surface 714b, and the slope of the sloped surface 714b It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the . Therefore, the ball P8 flows downward in a manner that separates it from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so even though the cutting metal member 725 is arranged in a manner that extends inside the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 and the cutting metal Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends from an intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. The through hole 731a, which is formed as a long hole along the direction and through which the fastening screw passes, is in the form of a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), similarly to the bulging portion 716a. and a regulating groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging part 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging part 716a.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a should be fastened and fixed in alignment with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 should be fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It can be slid along the drawn straight line, and thereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Note that since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and includes a rolling plate portion 730a that is formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extends diagonally upward to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a, and is attached to the base using screws that are inserted into a plurality of mounting holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c, and prevents noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and contacts the front and rear two locations on the circumferential surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)) to move the ball P8 upward. configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball firing unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order. Note that in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When this is the case, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the open end on the back side of the ball passing opening 724, and comes into contact with the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, thereby preventing the ball from flowing down from the open end on the back side. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissible state (the state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745 is retracted above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide slope 744. In this state, the ball P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, thereby restricting further flow down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulating state again, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. Thereby, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the slope of the guide slope portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), so even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 The flow of water is regulated. Therefore, balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one ball at a time. Note that the balls P8 entering the ball passing opening 724 are balls supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86), and are balls stored in the upper tray 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. A lower blade part 725b having an upper side that almost runs along the upper surface, and a notch with an acute angle at the tip formed between the lower blade part 725b and the same plate as the proximal plate of the lower blade part 725b. It mainly includes an upper blade part 725c extending from the upper blade part 725c.

The upper blade part 725c is formed such that its tip is inclined more toward the back side than the lower blade part 725b, and its lower side projects upwardly more than the flow plate part 724a. Note that the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the base end (left side). That is, the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The cut between the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tassel thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, a description will be given of how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and enters the ball P8.

146(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a), and FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a. ) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 has been launched. Note that in FIGS. 146 and 147, illustration of some constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), from this state, a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, and the plunger 702 is pushed out vigorously, giving a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (Fig. 147(a) )reference).

Now, with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, launch the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the playing area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that was left at hand and pull the thread Y8. It is known that a fraudulent act is known in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole by loosening the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. To be more specific, when the ball P8 is placed in the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a in a posture that is pulled to the right as it goes toward the back side. (See Figure 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves as it is pulled by the ball P8 passing under the falling plate part 724a and rolling on the firing rail 730, and the middle part of the thread Y8 moves below the falling plate part 724a. Since the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface, it enters the lower side of the upper blade part 725c that projects above the falling plate part 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c. .

While the player is holding the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, a load is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 due to the firing of the ball P8, so that the thread Y8 is is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In addition, if the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that sufficient tensile force will not be applied to the thread Y8 and the thread Y8 will not be cut, but in that case, the ball P8 will not reach the play area and The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged into the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

Next, the presentation operation unit 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 is visible from the upper frame of the center frame 86, and other differences The configurations of are substantially the same.

A production operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed in the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The production operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward movement unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advancing/retracting operation unit 900 moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retracting operation, that is, the operation of advancing inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third The petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is connected to the petal operating device 800. A drive-side arm member 910 whose end portion is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and rotates by transmitting the driving force of a drive motor 921 via an arm gear 924, and the drive-side arm member 910 is driven. A transmission means 920 consisting of a drive motor 921 that generates a driving force, a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left and right direction, a thin plate-shaped second production member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding movement of the slide plate 930, and on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910, It mainly includes an elongated plate-shaped driven arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be explained. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. Note that in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petal 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden behind other members and is not shown in the figure, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. The device includes a plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position on the right side of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protruding portion.

An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the support base 801, and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes. A screw insertion part 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at its tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion part 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed part 801D (see FIG. 152) which is recessed from the front side to the back side so that a detecting arc plate 880d of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass therethrough. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the center motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the center motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically elongated, generally elliptical area at the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally elongated upper part that constitutes an upper end area and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes an area below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the support base material 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 It is possible to reduce the operating space by molding 801 into a vertically long shape rather than by molding it into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to a second gear 830G and a third gear 810G, which are arranged concentrically so as to overlap the opening 801P, respectively, as described later. Although it can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, in this embodiment, the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G are It is placed on the right side (see Figure 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by concentrating the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in an attitude slightly tilted toward the front, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from increasing, and The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin and are molded to imitate the shape of one of the five separate petals that make up a hibiscus flower in its blooming state. It is formed as a member and includes a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front face shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular depressions and depressions including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery also has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and there are slight differences in unevenness, etc., but they are formed into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer periphery has a specific color (red) that is darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner area. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a threaded hole inside, at two locations: near the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and at the center in the radial direction. There is.

The petals 802 are arranged from the rear side part 802a to the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b disposed on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side part 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side part 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side part 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side part 802b of the other adjacent petal 802. The petals 802 are arranged so that their tips on the inner circumferential side are concentrated toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b are shifted from each other in the front and back, so that the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b overlap in the front and back at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be made to match, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made noticeable.

In the arranged state, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate members 803 are long plate-shaped resin members that are separated from each other and are fixed to the five petals 802, respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front face shape extending from the center to the outer circumferential side in a generally rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer circumferential edge portion thereof extends forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of threaded portions 803S that extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes inside are provided in the circumferential direction (the flat plate They are integrally formed at positions separated from each other in the lateral direction of the member 803.

The threaded portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (lateral direction) of each flat plate member 803 in a substantially flush position, and furthermore, a pair of threaded portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear surface of the flat plate member 803 extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the circumferential surface of the threaded portion 803S. As such, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petal 802, and the front side of the petal 802 has screw insertion holes. A screw insertion part 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw part 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The threaded part 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the threaded part 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front, and the screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. A slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin and has a front face shape in which five similar shaped parts are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center part. As shown in FIG. 159, a generally cylindrical front circumferential wall portion 812 and rear circumferential wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend in both front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 156. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has cylindrical holes in the front and rear, at two adjacent locations out of five locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction and at one location in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. A threaded portion 813S that extends and has a threaded hole inside is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the five locations described above. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at five locations corresponding to the threaded portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

The slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815, as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction outward from the center of the circular opening 811, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 is oriented counterclockwise in a front view by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The both-side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight interval between them.

In this way, groups of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two-sided slits 815 on both sides thereof, are formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are the double-sided slits. It has a generally rectangular shape and extends slightly in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with a circular arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Furthermore, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, so that , five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 are arranged closer together inwardly, and this also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 more compact.

In other words, if the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11, In the case where the slit member 810 is arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the slit member 810 can be arranged more densely. The outer circumferential shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip has a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. An extended part to be molded, a central part that bulges out to be thicker than the production part at a position between the extended parts, a screw insertion hole 821 bored in the extended part, and a center of the slide member 820. a guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side and is inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side and pass through it back and forth. Equipped with.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction and the longitudinal direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 are fitted into the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

Thereby, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is inserted almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without any gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held in a position facing a certain outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. The sliding rib 803a restricts the sliding movement at .

160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. Note that in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall has a shape that extends in a closed loop shape that is elongated when viewed from the front along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The ridge corner at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends clockwise in front view from a position on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. , extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving in an arc further toward the clockwise side in front view from the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175(a)).

The circumferential wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, at the end on the center side, is formed to be integrally continuous with the circumferential wall at the circumferential edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof protrudes toward the front side from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and a total of five guide rails 832 are arranged at equal intervals around the pivot opening 831. It extends outward from the periphery in a spiral shape.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed, extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery. The second gear 830G is arranged to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer circumferential surface of the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not linear but linear relative to the inner circumferential surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted onto the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further, on the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically. , are arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S, and positioning holes 810c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned by a positioning boss with respect to the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the threaded portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G serves as a retainer to prevent the rotation plate 830 from coming off. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotation device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotation device 850 and the loose fit device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotation device 850 and the loose fit device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. The shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The center portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen part 856 on the front side of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 on the left and right sides with the lumen part 856 in between, and a front screw part 857 having a screw hole inside. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore in the displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that are cylindrical and extend slightly short toward the front are each integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen part 856 has a columnar shape extending along the axial direction of the shaft part 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extending further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, and extending into the interior. A rear screw portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Furthermore, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board with a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front threaded portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting and positioning the front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and screwing the screw into the front side threaded part 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. , an LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therein.

On the front side of the LED board 861, as shown in FIG. The LEDs 865 are each fixed in position and emit light toward the front.

Near the outer periphery of the front and rear sides of the LED board 861, horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to be done. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are arranged concentrically and alternately with the forward-facing LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the LED board 861 so as to face rearward.

A center decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED board 861. The center decorative member 868 is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends in a cylindrical shape from a long plate-shaped base to the back side, and can be screwed into the center. A pair of screw holes 869 are provided in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. A threaded part 869 passing through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is brought into contact with the holding part 858 of the flange 855 from the front side with the LED board 861 in between, and a screw is screwed into the threaded part 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the center decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thereby, the center decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861 to come off.

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape and having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side circumferential wall portion 812 of the slit member 810; It mainly includes a main body cylindrical member 883, which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and is rotatably fitted into the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has integrally threaded parts 883S extending in a cylindrical shape from front to back and having a screw hole inside at two places out of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. A positioning boss 883a is formed and extends from the tip edge of a location where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the four locations described above.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at four locations corresponding to the threaded portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 has a rib-like projection in the outer radial direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a circumferential intermediate position of the four corresponding locations, and a rib-shaped projection in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b extending over the entire length is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 includes a decorative member 884 that is formed with a larger outer shape than the LED board 861 and covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149); A back cover 886 is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and forms a bottomless cup shape with the outer circumferential side rising up toward the front side from the fastened portion, and also contacts the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed. , is arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, thereby giving the side surfaces a mirror finish. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light from the horizontal LEDs 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery, a light emission effect can be performed.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED board 861, and has the shape of a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion formed from a transparent resin material, and a rear side plate portion formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, the peripheral wall of which forms a disk shape on the back side thereof and which stands up on the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion with a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is allowed to rotate relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically. It meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are provided around the pivot opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw insertion parts 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are bored at positions 880b and 880c corresponding to two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned over a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the threaded portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G acts as a retainer to prevent the slit from coming off. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection circular arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and has a photo sensor arranged to be able to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in this embodiment, no matter what attitude the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from, it is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72°) of the detection arc plate 880d (minimum angle Detection of 72° can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be explained. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED board 861 is fixedly arranged and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning. Furthermore, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screw-in part 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing it with a screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base 801, and as shown in FIG. The rear circumferential wall portion 813 is fitted externally, and the front circumferential wall portion 812 is attached to the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to fit externally.

At this time, since the outer circumferential surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 locally bulges out at eight locations along the circumferential direction due to the threaded portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, the rear circumferential wall of the slit member 810 The slit member 810 contacts the inner circumferential surface of the slit member 813 not in a planar manner but in a linear manner, and as a result, the rear side circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 Pivoted for smooth rotation.

164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving arm member 910, and the driven arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the up and down direction from the driving arm member 910. In addition, in the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner in front view. A support column 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a gear accommodating section 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a gear storage section 1120 that is aligned in the vertical direction at the left and right center position. a rail fixing part 1130 disposed in the rail fixing part 1130, and a support elongated hole 1140 that is bored as a long hole that slopes downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the opposite left and right sides of the support column 1110 across the rail fixing part 1130; Mainly equipped with

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910, and has a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery of the front end thereof, into which screws can be inserted. A screw-in portion 1111 is formed, and a pair of positioning bosses 1112 extending toward the front side are provided on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the rear, and is circularly bored in the front-rear direction at one end and has a support column. 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 protruding from the front side in a stepped cylindrical shape at a position near one end of the elongated main body member; The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support section 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 has an internal fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted into the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating part 1120 is a recessed part in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses arranged in a row while slightly intersecting each other, and is arranged on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating part 1121, a second accommodating part 1122 connected to the first accommodating part 1121, and a driving side arm member disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating part 1121 with the second accommodating part 1122 in between. It mainly includes a third accommodating section 1123 in which an arm gear 924 that is fitted with the arm gear 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing part 1130 is a part that supports the movement rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked one on top of the other and is supported so as to be able to slide up and down. It includes an insertion hole 1131 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the movement rail 1000R and positions the movement rail 1000R, and these are aligned vertically. placed on a line. Due to the rigidity of the motion rail 1000R, the posture of the petal motion device 800 is maintained constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is a elongated hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 is provided that extends to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported in the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951 while the collar is fitted into the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, side base material 1000S, and second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right through a plurality of supported long holes 931 (three in this embodiment) that are formed in the front and back direction in the form of long holes extending left and right, and It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 through a proximal elongated hole 932, which is provided on the left end and extends in the vertical direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and is provided on the right end. It is connected to a second presentation member 940 through a distal end side insertion hole 933 that is bored in the front-rear direction.

The proximal elongated hole 932 has a stop part 932a formed at the upper end along a locus in which the connecting convex part 912 rotates around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop part 932a. It mainly includes a displacement part 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical part arranged in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded part 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed. A fastening plate part 1001S, which is a plate-like member fastened and fixed to the support column part 1150, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column part 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement of the supported elongated hole 931, and a support protrusion 1002S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. Also, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second production member 940, an arcuate recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape co-centered with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. It mainly includes a convex strip 1005S that protrudes toward the front side along a circular arc shape having the same center as the convex strip 1005S.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar connects the support protrusion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931 from its tip. In this state, a retaining screw is screwed into the tip of the support protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second presentation member 940, and the arcuate recess 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second presentation member 940. This is the part that Note that the protruding portion 1005S is formed at a protruding height such that it does not come into contact with the second presentation member 940 when it is in the normal position, but can come into contact with it when it is displaced from the normal position or is bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support 941, and has a main body portion whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed into a circular shape centered on the shafted support portion 941. A shafted support portion 941 that is protruded in a cylindrical shape and is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar in between, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed close to the shaft supported support portion 941 and is provided in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. 942.

The shafted support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entry portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). With the shafted support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar in between, and with the disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the tip, the threaded portion 941a is inserted. By screwing the screw into the cover member 945, the cover member 945 acts as a retainer. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the distal end insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing it from coming off the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing the bending deformation.

This will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three threaded portions 1161 into which screws can be inserted when the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened, and a screw portion 1161 that extends in a radially outward direction from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. a detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 extending from the flange portion 926; a shaft support 1163 on which a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported; and a support elongated hole. A cover support part 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of the board cover 1140, and a wiring stop part 1165 arranged close to the cover support part 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in a front view. It mainly includes a threaded part 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is threaded.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are screwed. The screw part 1006S is arranged with a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex part 942 is broken due to long-term use and the part that restricts the rotation of the second effect member 940 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is chipped, the threaded part 1006S allows the auxiliary protrusion 942 to break. 2 displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are stacked in front and back and are fastened and fixed to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress vibrations and displacements of the board cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the heavy device called the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. I can do it.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevating and lowering operations of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing/retracting unit 900 will be explained. 1100, and FIGS. 169, 171, and 173 are rear views of the petal operating device 800 and the advancing/retracting operating unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the driving arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 illustrate the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 164 ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop part 932a and the displacement part 932b of the proximal elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end of the moving range. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is connected to the internal fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151) and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which it maintains its posture (a range in which it spins idly), which reduces the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 is maintained. That is, when the driving side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates before the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, it can be visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 being interlocked. can be done.

Here, by moving the second presentation member 940 in such a manner that it extends toward the position where the petal actuation device 800 was originally placed, it is as if the second presentation member 940 operates following the petal actuation device 800. It can be made to appear as if it is.

Next, the collection and distribution rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be explained. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 850. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and flat plate member 803. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the vertical movement and is at the lowest position, it changes from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expanded position shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After the middle position, an expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

In the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is at the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the concentrated position where they are most concentrated toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus is in a flowering state as a whole. It is in a state of concentration that makes up a flower.

When the petals 802 are at the initial position (gathering position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as shown by arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c) using the central motor 804, this The second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the rotation plate 830, so that the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall part 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, it can be easily moved around the front peripheral wall part 812 with a small torque. Can be rotated. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830 described above.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in the front view as shown by the arrow A11, as shown in FIG. 175(a). At the same time, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of pushing it outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. Move under the guidance of.

At this time, as the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but this torque is exceeded by the braking force of the oil damper 805. While the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 begin an expanding operation in which they expand radially outward from the gathered position. In this expansion operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively slow due to this slope. becomes faster.

That is, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, thereby making it possible to more efficiently expand the petals 802.

Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 will be relatively small compared to the above case, but the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. In both cases, the decline will be even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. , after that, it extends outward while curving in an arc further clockwise in front view from the direction D15, and has a shape that extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the more the guide rail 832 curves into an arc toward the clockwise side in front view from the direction D15, the more the load on the slide pin 823 and the movement speed decrease both become more significant.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 was relatively large and the moving speed was relatively fast by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotating plate 830 is formed into a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 passes through it, there is less risk of deviation.For this reason, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823 while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is composed of

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. The structure is such that roles are divided.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five pairs of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially to reach a fully open state, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to positions that are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible due to the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the flower can be seen integrally like a larger hibiscus flower (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the center slit 814. Therefore, due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any further in the same direction as before. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above expansion operation is completed, rotational power is transmitted from the central motor 804 in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view, as shown by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d), together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the expansion operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state, as shown by arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the center motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continued to be applied to the rotary plate 830, the expansion operation can be immediately continued from the rotation operation to the rotation operation without a pause. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in a fully open state as shown by arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Rotate to . Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the amount of movement (relative movement) of each petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger, so that The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the above rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction in the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the slit member 810 is rotated. While being braked and held in a stopped state by the oil damper 805, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. A gathering operation is performed in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. They gather toward the target, return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and complete the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the operation is restarted and the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b) in the rear view, the petals 802 are rotated as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b). It rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state.

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state as shown by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to . Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the amount of movement (relative movement) of each petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger, so that The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, this concentrated motion can be changed to a rotational motion, and the central motor 804 can be stopped once and then shifted, or it can be shifted immediately without a pause. It can also be done.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so there is no need to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 extends along the notch 9145b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has a different internal configuration of the foul ball passage part 9145, and a lower end and front part of the foul ball passage part 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage section 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 covers the cutout 9145b from above, and includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the top to the top of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that is protruded from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Constructed to withstand loads.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8, thereby preventing fraudulent manipulation of the balls inside the gaming area and obtaining fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage section 9145. Here, we will explain possible fraudulent acts.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 148. As described above, the cutting metal member 725 is disposed in the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment in order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the thread Y8 will be cut. Sometimes the ball was fired without any warning.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, if we consider, for example, the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball socket 146, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is struck at the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the firing solenoid 701 side). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is launched with force, the ball P9 will reach the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage section 145, is ejected to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8, a person committing fraud can pull or loosen the thread Y8, and thereby move the ball P9 into the winning slot. 63 (see Figure 2), etc., repeatedly, resulting in fraudulent profits being obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a fraudulent act is carried out using the thread Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade is provided in the foul ball passage section 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the person committing the fraudulent act pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled together when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be placed inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force against upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, thereby improving the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the discharged ball. In other words, the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, so after grasping the ball P8, he or she should keep the ball P8 close to his body (for example, in his pants pocket, etc.) in order to prevent the clerk from becoming suspicious. ), it is easy to commit fraud by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface) toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position approximately a diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, and the ball guides the ball. The lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on or hitting the thread Y8 located on the front side of the ball removal lever 53, and the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. flowing down through. That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray The possibility that the balls discharged from the passage section 9142 to the lower tray 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easy to impart rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

Thereby, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball discharged to the lower tray 50 weakens. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcefully impart a rightward velocity component (toward the foul ball passage section 9145 side) to the balls ejected to the lower tray 50 along the front-rear direction, so that among the ejected balls, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls stepping on or hitting the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left side of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53), and on the boundary thereof, there is a riding restriction step. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is formed between the right end (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the far end portion disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat part that connects the left end (left end side) of the lower bottom near the exit of the ball passage part 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the climbing restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 allows the front door side lower plate passage 9142 and the foul ball passage to be connected to each other. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 can be caused to flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the ball that has rolled through the foul ball passage section 9145 and has come into contact with the riding restriction step section 9053a from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a has a part that allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 extends along the notch 10145c. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left. A state viewed diagonally from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage section 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side so as to cover the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately twice the radius (diameter) of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole that is bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate part 10145d below the rolling plate part 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage part 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an external shape in front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided to protrude from the side surface of the rear side toward the rear side. Note that the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted from illustration in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-back direction where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is the same as that of the sphere. The radius is approximately the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage section 10145 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (as it goes toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 (front-back width) becomes wider as it approaches the passage part 145a. This makes it easier to insert the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the back side edge of the notch 10145c toward the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153, and extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade 10153 in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 is formed between the first thin-plate blade part 10153 and the second thin-plate blade part 10154, with the deep part of the recess having an acute angle.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thereby, when the thread Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 can be caused to enter the acute angle recess 10155, thereby making it easier to damage the thread Y8.

In addition, since the second thin plate blade part 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged higher than the first thin plate blade part 10153, the thread Y8 that is pulled diagonally downward to the front side by the person who commits the fraud. can easily enter the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate part 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 are arranged to face opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage part 10145 bends in opposite directions. Ru. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in opposite left and right directions.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act may release the ball P8 that has come out of his hand and try to avoid the detection of his fraudulent act by allowing the ball P8 to flow backward through the foul ball passage section 10145 and be ejected through the playing area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 in opposite directions to the left and right at the lower end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball P8 flowing backward gets caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and remains there.

Thereby, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage section 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the gaming area is increased, thereby making it possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent activity.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, glue, etc.) may be placed in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has arrived at the hand of the cheater is cut, the thread will be glued to the adhesive member disposed in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 will be in the gaming area. Since the thread is not ejected from the thread and remains in place, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch strength is weak and does not reach the game area is ejected to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of resin material so that it has the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a tip member 2062a formed and disposed close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a gap V11 having a width that allows the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper tray passage section 161. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage part 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is disposed in the above embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is moved to the left. Formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown), which is disposed on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 and protruding inside the ball flow path, is turned on by the load of the balls, and the dispensing device 133 is configured to stop discharging the ball.

That is, in this embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, when considering the above-mentioned fraudulent act of gluing balls to both ends of the yarn Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c, the yarn Y8 enters the inside of the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. Furthermore, by applying the discharged balls to the thread Y8, the effect of damaging the thread Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of balls on the upper tray 17. Thereby, the thread Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with long metal screws B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is placed on the front side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity, which projects in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side, and has a threaded groove formed in the inner wall thereof into which the long screw B11 is threaded. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and with the base member 68b1 in contact with the front side of the closing plate 2062b4, the base member 68b1 is placed in advance. A long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as a mounting hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole, and in this state is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the upper surface and left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so that the shape matches the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (front side surface in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the increasing slope portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The increasing slope portion 2062d has a slope that slopes downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface of the guide member 2062b that constitutes the outer frame of the game area. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end of the surface (upper surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, , about 1/3 of the diameter of the sphere) intersects with the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the ball collides with the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves across the gap V11 from side to side. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball passes through the tip member 2062a and returns to the ball firing unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 with the closing plate 2062b4, which is smaller than the diameter of the ball and has a width that allows the thread to enter (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment). It is recessed toward the back side to a certain position. Note that the notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 that is screwed into the support cylindrical part 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cut 2062b1 is formed, so that, similarly to the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, When a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c in a fraudulent act, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, when the thread Y8 receives a load of being pulled at both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 located deep in the notch 2062b1 (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the shot ball contacts the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so the cut 2062b1 can be prevented from colliding with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

In addition, a person who commits a fraudulent act by passing the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c, must also pass the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c. Since the end on the player's side (see FIG. 182) is pulled toward the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 within the game area, the thread Y8 will be closer to the front side near the gap V11 closer to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c than when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in the cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with an extremely weaker load than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is arranged to be switchable between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190(a) shows a state where the weight portion 68a2 side of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2, and FIG. 190(b) shows A state is shown in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. Further, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is illustrated for reference, and it is illustrated that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button-type switch SW11 is illustrated as being ON. It is illustrated that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 provides only a slight resistance to the ball passing through, but provides enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not so. This is because the ball flows away due to its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. 190(b), the ball flows away immediately. Since the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is returned to the state shown in FIG. This is because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to objects that do not flow away, such as balls, such as objects that advance while filling the passage, such as endoscopes. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, You can bend the nails (not shown) installed on the game board 13, grasp the ball and put it into the winning hole, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emit a laser from the tip. (cutting nails, etc.) Possible fraud.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the external shape of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally invaded is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, it is advanced while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight part 68a2 is repelled by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2 and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening/closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end of the endoscope from advancing further into the interior.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent unauthorized use as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 will be maintained in the OFF state, so if the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined period of time, the alarm will sound. , fraud can be detected early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the button-type switch SW11 is turned OFF only at the timing when a foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned ON. (see FIG. 190(a)), it is possible to minimize the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be any other movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in this embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly prevented. can be exchanged. As a result, compared to simply purchasing a replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 as an option, it has the effect of being able to prevent fraudulent activities even before replacement, and it saves the trouble of forgetting and searching for the storage location. This effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Furthermore, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced, whether or not the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. From the perspective of those committing fraudulent acts, it is difficult to maintain deterrence against fraudulent acts because they do not know whether an exchange has taken place or not, and even if they have, they do not know the extent of the damage. can.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the assembled position or the fully open position, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. It consists of aspects. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 includes a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end; A regulating portion 2888 is provided that projects from the extending tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the back side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The regulating portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order, and FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), FIG. 193(b), and FIG. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture changes due to the action of the regulating portion 2888 is shown in outline (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S disposed inside the both-side slits 815 have a threaded portion on the opposite side centered on the threaded insertion portion 803H. It includes an inclined surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The effect that the regulating portion 2888 has on the petal 802 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front part 802b of the petal 802 ( The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 resists the load. Therefore, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 194(b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. The petal 802 undergoes a posture change to the extent possible.

By changing the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 in this manner, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is dissipated, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide ribs 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so frictional resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 is in contact with the slits 814, 815. can be moved smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the tilted position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a contacting the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T contacting the inner inner wall with respect to the both side slits 815. (being pressed), frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance increases significantly. Incidentally, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both sides in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the resistance to movement of the slide member 2820 in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814, 815 increases, so that the slide member 2820 does not reach the end of the slits 814, 815. The torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting for the slide member 2820 in its normal position. (The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined position).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b), rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating section 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating section 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the expanded position is maintained. In this state, the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196(a), FIG. 196(b), and FIG. 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. Note that in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 return to their normal postures, as shown in FIG. 196(b). be returned.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically rotate the petals 802 at the expanded position and then return them to the gathering position.

In addition, although the case where the front side part 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at the position where it comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view), ), it is possible to avoid contact between the front side part 802b and the regulating part 2888, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate at the fully open position.

Furthermore, the regulating portion 2888 may be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 in the assembled position or the fully open position, or even if it comes into contact with the rotating petals 802 in the fully open position, the position of the petals 802 changes slightly. By setting the restricting portion 2888 at a position where it can pass through and passing the load, it is possible to prevent the restricting portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the regulating section 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 when viewed from the front, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the presentation device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the distance, it is possible to make a difference whether the petal 802 is expanded to the maximum and performs a rotational operation, or whether the petal 802 is expanded halfway and performs a rotational operation.

For example, by performing a performance in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the production device.

Note that the regulating portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from a design perspective, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 contacts the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or are rotating (fluttering) while causing a slight change in posture due to contact with the regulating portion 2888. .

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the regulating part 2888 is the tip position, but if the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the position when the petal 802 changes its posture will be reduced. The degree of spread varies. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be varied in a plurality of ways.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830, but a petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of No. 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 chronologically illustrate an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a). 198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

Note that when the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. The fact that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together by exceeding the resistance caused by the rotation is similar to the twelfth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

That is, the slit member 3810 differs from the slit member 810 in that among the wall parts extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall part on the clockwise side when viewed from the front is recessed in a manner to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the walls extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portions on the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a is recessed to widen the width in the transverse direction, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in a clockwise wall portion in a front view so as to widen the width of both slits 815 in the transverse direction.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a extends continuously from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 toward the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). is formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a longer radial length than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b extends from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). formed continuously.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and has a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts rotating clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the lower right in FIG. (in the direction of entering the circumferential recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198(b)).

This releases the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the counterclockwise wall portions of the both-side slits 815 when viewed from the front, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the contact portion between the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the contact portion between the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the slit member). 3810, the first contact portion) is used as a fulcrum and rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, so that the guide pin 822 during the rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. Contact between the center recessed portion 3814a and contact between the threaded portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to such a depth that the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The circumferential recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 becomes lower than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other, when viewed from the front The sliding rib 803a on the radial center side accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side comes into contact with the walls of the both-side slits 815, so that the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)), by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

Thereby, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can perform operations that were impossible to realize in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194(b) ), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (rotate along with the slit member 3810). rotational motion) (see FIGS. 195, 196(a), and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. a), by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned to their original positions (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (the rotational movement of rotating along with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view from an arbitrary state (phase or attitude), the flat plate member 2803 and flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or attitude) are rotated. The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can start moving toward the gathering position from the position of the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 195) in the middle of expansion (see FIG. 198(a)), and then move to the gathering position. (See FIG. 197) The arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering motion can be varied, so the operation of the petal motion device 3800 can be varied.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening. However, the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment The wall portion 8326 is configured such that a plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a), and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment has an unexplained difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above. Most of the other configurations have already been explained in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above. Therefore, below, details of the lower frame member 8320 will be explained, and other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-back direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through hole 8326a on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400 has a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and corresponds to the slope of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b are drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connect the top surface and the bottom surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a plane position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b are drilled in the left and right corners with a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

The purpose of each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c is to facilitate the downward passage of liquid such as the drinking water described above, and to facilitate the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300, which will be described below. It is a through hole having. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may be caused by a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a nuisance and forcibly stops the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a player who is just curious, and the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330.

Here, since the operating device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, there is a high possibility that foreign objects will be inserted into the gaps V13 and V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) disposed at the rear end, that is, it is supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be displaced (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that takes advantage of looseness caused by adding up design errors that are incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation that occurs by slightly deforming each member. (transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so that it is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1 yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left), the gap V13 that is created in the other side (for example, to the right) is caused by the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two, and can be large enough to allow insertion of a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is shifted to either the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also fixed by using the backlash around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the back side and causing displacement (deformation), a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into this gap V14.

In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 operates to tilt with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into either the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that foreign objects such as

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that constricts inward from the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. On the other hand, the coin-shaped foreign object fitted into the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance will become excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem will occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign object rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate, which may impede the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it will be impossible to perform the intended performance with the operating device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. If it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign object has been removed, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible, but in a state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operating device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign object.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be explained below.

203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(c) is a front view of the operating device 8300. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 along the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a horizontal width larger than the horizontal width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid will be discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. Liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, if a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gap V14 is on the top surface of the extension part 311h, the slope of the top surface of the extension part 311h (left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) An inclination D81 that is curved toward the left and right and is inclined downward toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310, and an inclination D82 that is inclined downward toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is tilted. (see FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign objects can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while making it easier to remove coin-shaped foreign objects, so the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be ensured more easily than in the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. The size of the target object is larger than that of the target object. That is, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In this embodiment, except for the spherical shell part 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are successively arranged on the left, right, top, and bottom of the spherical shell part 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (mirror-finished members are is fixed), thereby reflecting the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a is used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light through the first through hole 8326a, the center portion in the left and right direction can be viewed brightly.

Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is smaller than the coin-shaped foreign object. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object becomes a shadow). In other words, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign object remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object as clues, so that the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed from the lower frame without being noticed. The possibility that it continues to remain in the member 8320 can be reduced. Note that this effect is not limited to when viewed through the first through hole 8326a, but also applies when viewed through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole through which a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 can be discharged in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a horizontal width of about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500 yen coin). The width in the normal direction is approximately 2 mm.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left and right center of the bottom plate part 321, even after a coin-shaped foreign object has slipped down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate part 321, it can be easily removed. can remove coin-shaped foreign objects.

The second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, so that, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used for discharging the liquid to the outside.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and removes a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the same upright state (posture).

That is, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be ejected when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is approximately 30 [mm] when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left and right direction is approximately 2 [mm].

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c by simply removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 from the front (see FIG. 92). In addition, the covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a fastening part 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved part 371 with a screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction, and a hanging part 372 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw that is inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is simply fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened toward the right and outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including each of the embodiments described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the screws connecting the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 can be removed, and the harness HN3 can be removed from the connector part 8353 to facilitate operation. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operating device 8300.

Thereby, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operating device 8300 and the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, it does not receive the load from the front frame 14, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, The front frame 14 is disposed in such a manner that it receives a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinal displacement member 2652 that is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14 . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, in FIG. 204(a), the front frame 14 is shown in a state open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are each simplified and illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be able to vertically displace the front side of a plate part (a plate part arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate part 611; A longitudinally displacing member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the vertically displacing member 2651 and supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction; a locking portion 2653 protruding downward from the longitudinally displacing member 2652; A support part 2654 that holds the member 2652 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two places in the front and back, and is fixed to the plate part 611a, and a front side that comes into contact with the support part 2654 and the locking part 2653 and is attached to the front and back displaceable member 2652. and a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and a state in which it is separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertically displacing member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap between it and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position. is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 can be placed at a front position where it is pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)), or placed at a rear position where it is pushed by the front frame 14. The rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) is configured to be movable.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclined surface 2652a slopes downward toward the tip. The slope 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the longitudinally displacing member 2652 is disposed at the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the longitudinally displacing member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. , is a continuous slope.

The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the lower position at the front position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. Set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is placed in the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes larger by the thickness in the front and back direction. be able to.

As a result, the load that the post-rotation claw member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the drooping back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. This makes it easier to define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the falling of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side with the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate part 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, a spring with a lower elastic modulus is adopted as the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. Since the force resulting in this can be reduced, it is possible to improve the operator's freedom of selection and work efficiency.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the inverted cup part 178 is melted with a heated piano wire, and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are stretched above the inverted cup part 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. Although the case has been described in which the fraud is detected early by detecting burnout caused by heated piano wire, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects burnout due to heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the contracted shape, and FIG. 205(c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to the tensile shape (memorized shape) by application of heat. be done. Further, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross section at a front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 has a main body box part 2281 which is configured in a box shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side and is stacked above the inverted cup part 2178, and a main body box part 2281 with a back side opening so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box part 2281. A space is formed between the main body box part 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box part 2281 is made of a metal material, and has an extending part 2283 extending from the lower right corner and abutting the left surface of the wall part 2178a of the inverted cup part 2178, and an opening narrowing upward from the lower corner. A narrow portion 2284 extends from the inner wall, a protruding portion 2285 protrudes upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the narrow portion 2284, and a protruding portion 2285 recessed from the back side of the left side wall of the main body box portion 2281. A first conductive part 2286 is housed in a recessed part, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281. It is accommodated in a recess formed from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conductive part 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can be contacted, a torsion spring SP15 that generates an urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protruding structure that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. A shape memory spring 2288 supported by the portion 2285 and disposed below the second conducting portion 2287 is provided.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when detecting heat. In the first conduction section 2286 and the second conduction section 2287, one end of separate wires is connected to the outside of the main body box section 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is connected to the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(b)). (See c)), the conduction is broken, and control is performed to output an error signal by inputting the fact that the conduction is broken.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120) outputs a loud warning, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops dispensing balls, etc., and other actions are continued. It is controlled in such a way that it is impossible to play games.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup part 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall part 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and the extending part 2283 is formed between the inverted cup part 2178 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Since the extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the elongated cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will remain intact and cover the elongated cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature approximately equal to the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and has a tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) stored in advance. .

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated above the transformation temperature by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, and the second conductive part 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part The conduction with 2287 is broken and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

The extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 toward the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in an elongated shape in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and extends toward the front side. overhang. After the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tensile state and returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and returns it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be returned again. In other words, even after a fraudulent act is discovered, it can be used repeatedly in order to detect the fraudulent act early.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) shows an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing a portion 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically representing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) is a diagram of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that in FIG. 206(a), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed into a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. Note that in this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, but in this embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is determined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a region CCVIc arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, although the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side, and is heated by heat press. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted by the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, so the light entering the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. , it is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, although the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

Note that the concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (45° inclination angle with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of approximately 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is refracted vertically to a weak degree and travels substantially horizontally.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in a direction that collects the light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550 in a direction that spreads the light. can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed into a flat plate shape, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 can be made different, so that the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed while producing light emitting effects. The effect can be improved.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex shaped portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400. This improves the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operating device 10300, in which the swinging device member 10310 is shown in an upward position in FIG. A lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emitting effect, and a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the upper part of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the light emitting effect and It mainly includes an upper presentation device 6500 on which sound presentation is executed.

Note that the above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal presentation device 6700 and the upper presentation device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. This is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, the illustration of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is omitted in FIG. 208. This is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be seen from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 shows a view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operating device 10300 (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operating device 10300). Ru.

The operating device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, each of which is formed into a thin plate shape and has enough flexibility to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodation recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the extent of the depression toward the back side increases as it approaches the left and right center, and the operation device It is arranged so that the left and right centers of 10300 coincide.

The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operating device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the mating position can be suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the mating position. Therefore, displacement of the operating device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions left and right away from the center) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, operation is not possible even if the front and back position from the metal main body 10014a to the mating position is lengthened. There is no problem with the effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the device 10300, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body part 10014a. A wide area for arranging the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, etc. can be secured.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 being the center.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Each of the newly described configurations is disposed in the front frame 10014, so the description will be given below focusing on the front frame 10014.

211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a that is integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. It is fastened and fixed. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening part (female thread forming part) that opens to the metal main body part 10014a side (back side), and the metal main body part 10014a has a fastening part A through hole is drilled at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male thread) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body part 10014a, screwing it into the fastening part, and tightening it.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. That is, the upper tray 17 holds the operating device 10300 from the upper rear of the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the lower front of the operating device 10300. Below, a configuration in which the operating device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be explained in order.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. Note that illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted in FIGS. 213 and 214. In addition, in FIG. 213, the operating device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is illustrated as viewed from the rear side, and for easy understanding, the operating device 10300 is shown with the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L, and the like. An assembly direction line connecting the fastening locations is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When assembling the operating device 10300 so as to fit it into the front frame 10014 from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 has a plate-like shape that projects from the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of the convex portion T10.

A bottom member De is provided below the operating device 10300 and is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the opposite side (lower side) of the inner case member 10330 and on the back side. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in rear view with the lower part open, and is formed in a size that can fit into the plate-like protrusion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operating device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operating device 10300 can be maintained due to the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. It should be noted that the fitting here means that the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-like convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

The tip of the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed with a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions that protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed in at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical protrusions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall (front side wall) of the recess De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-like protrusion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw screwed into the female threaded hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rests on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215(a)) rests on the plate-shaped support. It is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is arranged to face the flat plate-like portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the resin member 6427.

Note that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be normally separated, but a load may be applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward by performing a vibration effect.

After the operating device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by tightening a fastening screw inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operating device 10300 has a plurality of fastening parts 10333 (in this embodiment, three places) formed into which fastening screws can be screwed, and one of the fastening parts 10333 is covered with the inner case member 10330. It mainly includes a metal plate portion 10334 that has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge of an insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body portion 10014a.

Here, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the through hole H10a corresponding to the fastening part 10333 where the metal plate part 10334 is arranged, compared to other through holes H10a. The shape of this through hole is designed to a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

Thereby, as the operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be made to have the same role as a so-called ground wire. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operating device 10300 can be ensured.

Moreover, by arranging the metal plate part 10334 between them, the metal plate part 10334 can have the function of a washer. Thereby, the operating device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.

Note that the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various forms are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws that straddle the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, if the pawls are formed to be shifted back and forth, they can function as spring washers, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The locations where the operating device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side, except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts necessary for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in designing the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is problematic because the operating device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a sinking (downward) load is applied to the front side of the operating device 10300. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the fastening points are concentrated on the back side while suppressing the sinking displacement of the front side of the operating device 10300. This will be explained in order below.

First, the function of the fitting recess De1 will be explained. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits into the fitting part 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, vertical movement of the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the functions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include a plate-shaped protruding portion on the back side edge of the upper half portion disposed on the back side of the swing operation member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10321c that projects in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d that further project from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c. Mainly equipped with

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10322c projecting in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half. Note that the right front cover 10322 does not have a portion corresponding to the partial projecting portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging parts 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging part 10321d are configured as parts that are inserted and fitted into the accommodation recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge protrusion 10017b whose lower edge extends to the front side with approximately the same extension width on both sides of the accommodation recess 17a, and At a position slightly longer than the thickness of the plate-like projecting parts 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge projecting part 10017b on both sides, the plate-like projecting parts 10321c and 10322c are arranged opposite to the lower edge projecting part 10017b in a manner projecting toward the front side. A plurality of opposing overhangs 10017c forming grooves between the lower edge overhang 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d formed in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper sides face the lower edge overhang 10017b. and an escape hole 10017e that is bored in the front-rear direction at a position parallel to the opposing projecting portion 10017c on the right side.

When assembling the operating device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-shaped projecting parts 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge projecting part 10017b and the opposing projecting part 10017c, and the plurality of partial projecting parts 10321d are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-shaped projecting parts 10321c and 10322c into the grooves between the lower edge projecting part 10017b and the opposing projecting part 10017c. It is restrained from doing so.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting parts 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape with an open front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated inside the arch with their surfaces in contact with each other. can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or back side direction.

With this configuration, the swinging operation member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in an upward position, and the displacement of the operating device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load directed backward to the swinging operation member 10310. (return to original position early).

Here, when the player operates the swinging operation member 10310, he/she will mainly operate it with his/her left hand. When operating the disposed operating device 10300, the left hand is extended diagonally forward to the right, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a rearward load is applied to the swing operating member 10310 and a lateral load is simultaneously applied to the swing operating member 10310, there is a possibility that the operating device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left/right directions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operating device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped part of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them, so that if the operating device 10300 is displaced, The restoring force of the possible deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is generated in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operating device 10300 to its original position. Thereby, even if the operating device 10300 is misaligned, it can be quickly returned to its position.

Each of the above configurations can suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress displacement of the operating device 10300 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a.

Note that the relief hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which fixing assembly portions 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, are inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position that projects further outward than the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operating device 10300 will be explained. First, an outline of the internal structure of the operating device 10300 will be explained. 215(a), FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a), and FIG. 216(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207.

In FIG. 215(a), the swinging operation member 10310 is shown in an upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and in FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a), and FIG. 216(b), , a state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in a downward position (a depressed position in this embodiment) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operating device 10300 has a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340, which pivotally supports the swing operating member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363, is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310, which can be operated by the player, is displaced by the movement of the shaft support rod 10363, which is arranged on an arcuate locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. It is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner in which displacement in the rotational direction is combined, and to cause the displacement by an operation by the player.

That is, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

In addition, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the front and downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of applying a load in the direction of moving the swinging operation member 10310 away from the wall member 10322b) allows the swinging operation to be performed. The member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (reversely rotated posture, a posture in which the member 10310 is rotated backwards by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, compared to the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, the angle of attitude change of the swing operation member 10310 is small, so it is possible to suppress changes in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Furthermore, when an operation (push operation) is performed on the lens member 10317 that is movably supported by the swing operation member 10310 while the swing operation member 10310 is placed in a downward position, the swing operation is caused by the load at the time of the operation. The operating member 10310 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support rod 10363, and is displaced in a manner such that it falls forward, thereby changing the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode differs, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 also changes. Can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thereby, even if the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that uses electromagnetic force to move a pair of members toward and away from each other in a linear direction. A disc-shaped plate in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner circumferential surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer circumferential surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member (a member disposed on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. Note that the inner cylinder of the pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction.

The vibration device 10366 is configured to be able to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. Additionally, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

Thereby, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making the most of the energy of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, and the performance effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operating device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are provided behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved at their outer ends (ends opposite to the swinging operation member 10310), and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swinging operation member 10310 side. Ru. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swinging operation member 10310 can be ensured, and it is also possible to secure a large space around the swinging operation member 10310. You can secure space for your fingers.

Further, since the curved end portion is formed in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the design can be improved, and the deformation of the curved portion can be caused separately as a whole. , it is possible to widen the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are bored in the front-rear direction so as to allow insertion of fastening screws fastened to both left and right ends of the accommodation recess 17a, A fixing assembly 6802 is provided for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330 inseparably using fastening screws.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the parts farthest from the load applied to the operating device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left and right direction and perpendicular to the left and right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted, so the insertion holes are It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws inserted through 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed at the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. This position is shifted to the right from the position where the plate-like protruding parts 10321c and 10322c are located closest to the back side. That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that can be disassembled at the left and right center, but the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left and right center to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed to the right of the left and right center. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed over a wider area than the right front cover 10322.

In this embodiment, because the rear boundaries of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are shifted from the center in the left-right direction, one member (the main In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), making assembly easier than when aligning with both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operating device 10300. Here, the swinging operation member 10310, which is a part operated by the player, can be placed close to the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (particularly placed close to each other in the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Therefore, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may loosen due to load transmission during operation of the operating device 10300. In contrast, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is arranged to be shifted left and right from the center of the left and right where the load during operation is maximum, thereby reducing the transmitted load compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly part 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and also shifting the boundaries between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, assembly efficiency can be improved and the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws can be prevented. This can be made less likely to occur.

Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 at the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321 in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate of the inner case member 10330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the upper plate The fixing assembly 6802 holds it from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330, the number of fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening points, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 become difficult to bend due to the rigidity of the fastening screws, and there is a possibility that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 more flexible while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 can be made thinner, but in this case, it may lead to a decrease in durability or lead to fraudulent activities. There is a risk that

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening locations as in this embodiment, it becomes possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Thereby, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without making the plate thicknesses of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 excessively thin.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be integral with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, and can be disassembled to the left and right.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front-rear direction (adjustment slots 10323a, 10324a). be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is movable relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is movable relative to the right cover member 10324. , it is possible to easily adjust the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This will be explained below.

The operating device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape that follows the curved surface of the cover members 10344, 10345 (see FIG. 215), and hides the left and right edges of the cover members 10344, 10345. A left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 each include adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction, at their outer upper ends.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be bent due to molding variations etc. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction relative to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a that is recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that contacts the left front cover 10321, and is prevented from coming off in the front and rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. When the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall member 10322b is mounted in a manner that the left front cover 10321 is prevented from moving leftward by the end face of the left front cover 10321. Member 10322b is held within fitting recess 10322a.

With this configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced by simply removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is able to absorb the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). ). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, to explain the assembly procedure, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to the transition from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

Here, if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is necessary to take the trouble to It becomes necessary to make corrections by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

In addition, in anticipation of this, when determining the positions of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 by weakly fastening the left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 without fully tightening them, After the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure). However, since the work itself becomes complicated, this is not preferable in terms of simplifying the work.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are attached to the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 each include shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R whose front edges are arranged to face the guide part 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap created between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a is shifted due to the influence of load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide part 10344a and the shielding plate part will be separated when the operation device 10300 is operated. There is a risk that 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. Resin shavings have little effect when they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings gets stuck in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch, such as a photocoupler type switch, the shavings may block light and cause false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in selecting switches that can be employed may be limited.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802, which is the fastening point for the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, is located at the left and right center position (the location where the maximum load during operation or operation occurs). Since it is arranged at a position left and right away from the bolt, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw to loosen.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a, it is possible to prevent the generation of resin shavings, and it is possible to suppress false detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swinging operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward rotation direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so it is determined that the pushing operation has been carried out. be able to. In this embodiment, since no load is applied to either the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R, and fan-shaped in front view on the lower side of the curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R. It mainly includes lower plate parts 6805L and 6805R that are continuously formed as plate parts.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (i.e., lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215 It is formed as a circular arc-shaped surface with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered at (see).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R include a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the back surface to the back side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and is located on the front side surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to protrude further to the rear side.

As a result, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220), the protruding interference portion 6805a prevents the displacement toward the left and right outside from the inner edge. It is regulated to Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from displacing outward in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from disassembling in a manner that separates them from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are parts that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R, respectively, and are connections that expand outward in front view and curve toward the front side at the expanding tips. It includes curved parts 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 includes a plurality of fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L arranged at the top and bottom, which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed into them. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes a plurality of insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R arranged vertically at the left end portion, through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening parts and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operating direction of the operating device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operating device 10300 can be dispersed to each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress misalignment at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional deviation at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The performance of the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R (see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating. These fastening parts and insertion holes each have different roles. Below, they will be explained in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that they sandwich the insertion hole H23a formed in the left-right direction in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched therebetween by fastening screws. . Note that this is not a so-called "co-fastening" mode, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical section extending rightward from the fastening section 6802L comes into contact with the left side of the plate section where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, due to the fastening, no compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operating device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, when a minute displacement occurs in the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 can be prevented from being displaced in the same way.

Note that the extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, so loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly part 6802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that projects toward the front side. By screwing in this fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. Note that in this embodiment, the only locations where the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the locations where the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b are fastened.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole into which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction in a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is inserted. By screwing in this fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In addition, in this embodiment, the locations where only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening locations by the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are parts that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In addition, in this embodiment, the locations where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening locations by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in this embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at multiple locations along the forming direction of the opposing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but the combination of objects to be fastened at each location is are configured differently. Thereby, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembly work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be explained below.

First of all, if either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at even one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 will be prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When attaching the left front cover 10321 first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b, and the right front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330. When attaching the cover 10322 first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one place, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are each independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. can.

After this, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly part 6802 and fastening and fixing them, although the order is not specified. Further, by screwing in and fastening fastening screws into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by also forming a portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only in a fastening manner in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared to the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the fastening work can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operating device 10300, the operating direction of each operating section is along a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, so the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is This is the direction perpendicular to the direction of operation. That is, if a load or impact occurs along the operating direction during operation, a component in the direction in which the fastening screw is screwed in does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In this embodiment, the operating device 10300 includes a plurality of operating parts (including parts that operate by operation, such as a swing operating member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operating parts are levers. Since the lever member 10340 is designed to operate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to be the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if some operating parts do not move on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally left and right directions), each operating part The direction found as the balance (average) of the operating directions (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the fastening direction, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the tightening direction. You may also set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only does this).

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). 10322a and a portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces facing each other vertically contact each other.

In the contact portion, a plate-shaped portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate section 6803L includes a lower overlapping section 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the lower overlapping portion 6803La supports the shielding plate portion 6803R, downward displacement of the shielding plate portion 6803R with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the back side part is housed, and the lever member 10340 are driven. It is possible to prevent liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electrical system (board, etc.) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, while the cuts in the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swinging operation member 10310, the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the right side of the swinging operation member 10310. It is arranged in the same plane as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the cut between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed toward the left side with respect to the left-right center of the inner case member 10330 (the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 (Refer to FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. It is possible to avoid getting the drive motor wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapped portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate part 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping part 6805Lb, displacement of the lower plate part 6805R to the rear with respect to the lower plate part 6805L is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress passage of liquid between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support part 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a large amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 and the lower plate There is a possibility that the liquid passes between the body box parts 6421 of the forming member 6420 and flows toward the through hole 6412 or flows along the recessed part 6414. In particular, when liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid flows downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may splash on the player or wet the Senryobako.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, so it is easy to prevent liquid from passing through by sandwiching the hole without a gap. By suppressing liquid from passing between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the Senryobako, so the player can A pachinko machine 10010 that allows players to play comfortably can be constructed.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are shaped like stripes that are pushed out from the front side to the back side. It includes a striped portion D23 formed in. The striped portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The striped portion D23 serves as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shield plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. In other words, compared to the case where it is formed as a simple thin plate, the rigidity along the direction in which the striped portion D23 is formed is increased while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23. Improve (anisotropy). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as portions that fill the gap. Here, the operating device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a small amount due to the load or impact during the operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during the operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be immovable.

That is, when operating the operating device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be created between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a. In this embodiment, by extending the curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R in the vertical direction (elastically deforming or bending), it is possible to respond to changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and the gap can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the striped portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R deform (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since the size is increased (rigidity is increased), it is possible to prevent vibration from occurring when the shape is restored or from deforming more than necessary. In this way, the striped portion D23 in this embodiment is designed with one purpose as a countermeasure against problems that may occur when operating the operating device 10300.

The striped portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, so if a downward load is applied at the center, they will endure upward on both the left and right sides (a tensile force will be generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied to the operating device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly returned.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in a direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23, the deformation that is allowed based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R each include an end striped portion D24 formed in a striped manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The striped portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The end striped portion D24 mainly includes left and right striped portions D24a formed on the left and right sides, and a central striped portion D24b formed on the center side, each of which is formed as a countermeasure against loads in different directions.

The left and right striped portion D24a is a striped portion disposed above the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastening portions on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of a load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swinging operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operating load.

Note that the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a is such that those arranged on the left and right sides have a larger angle in a stepwise manner with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the striped portions extend in multiple directions. Thereby, irrespective of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 can be improved.

In addition, the width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter for those arranged on the left and right sides than for those arranged on the left and right center sides. In other words, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction is larger and corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R becomes smaller, increasing the resistance force. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to improve the resistance force against the load in the direction where the inclination is large with respect to the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the load during operation is likely to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central striped portion D24b is a striped portion disposed downward from the same position as the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastened portions on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from. This upward slope corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operating device 10300 falls forward.

That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central muscle portion D24b by the central muscle portion D24b, the load generated during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 can be applied to the inside of the operating device 10300. It is possible to improve the resistance against the case member 10330) falling forward and being displaced.

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed of a total of seven pieces, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center as they move toward the back side. As a result, when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if a horizontal displacement also occurs, the Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left and right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the degree of lateral flexure (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is greater than that in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the lateral direction). This results in a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R are pushed down on the V-shaped design member 6450 (the lower edge position When the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R deform in such a manner that the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward, the upper and lower intermediate parts and upper edges of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, causing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to deform. It is possible to release the load (stress) applied to the area (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge projecting portion is arranged so that the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c that are continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the opposing overhang 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c are longer in shape in the front-rear direction as they go outward to the left and right, so that the front left cover 10321 Also, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the right front cover 10322 and the housing recess 17a.

In addition, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300 are reduced to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration and load.

That is, while it is possible to easily transmit vertical vibrations and operation loads to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to easily transmit vibrations and operation loads in the horizontal direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swinging operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower tray 50. It can be made difficult. This prevents vibrations and loads from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower plate 50, causing discomfort to the player, even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swinging operation member 10310. can.

Further, connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c, 10322c formed on the upper edges thereof are elongated in the left and right directions. It is inserted between the lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the opposing projecting portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, when comparing the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging parts 10321c and 10322c with the shapes of the lower edge overhanging part 10017b and the opposing overhanging part 10017c, if the vicinity of the left and right ends are shifted in the front-back direction due to molding errors, etc. (For example, if the front side upper ends of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the curves of the plate-like protruding parts 10321c and 10322c are loosened (the left and right ends are displaced toward the back side). It is preferable that molding errors can be accommodated by deforming the material as shown in FIG.

In this regard, in this embodiment, since the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, the rigidity in the left and right direction of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R is higher than the rigidity in the vertical direction. and be lowered. Therefore, when deforming the plate-shaped protruding parts 10321c, 10322c to the side where the curve becomes gentler, the deformation of the plate-shaped protruding parts 10321c, 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate parts 6804L, 6804R. , the deformation width of the plate-shaped protruding portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of molding error that can be accommodated can be increased.

In this way, by not improving (weakening) the rigidity of the striped portion D23 in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which it is formed (in the left-right direction), measures are taken against problems that may occur when the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

From these facts, it is clear that there are problems that may occur due to the striped portion D23 when the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213), and problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. It can correspond to both.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 212. In this embodiment, a flat plate portion along the metal body portion 10014a (a plate portion in which the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) is provided at the lower left front side of the metal body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. and a plate-shaped upper plate part extending toward the front side so as to be bent at the upper end part of the upper part of the flat plate part, which slopes downward toward the right. A rear covering portion 10014b made of a resin material is provided in this manner. That is, the rear covered portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (connected to) the flat plate part at its rear end, and brought into contact with (connected to) the upper plate part at its right end. Balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 or so-called foul balls are stored in the area (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower tray 50 and the rear covered part 10014b face each other. That will happen. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 that constitutes the lower plate 50 will be explained.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower pan unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a in a manner that covers the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). A base member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted from above to the covered base member 6410 to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device that is attached to the covered base member 6410 from below. A ball ejecting device 6430 is fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and a ball discharging device 6430 is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that prevents the lower plate forming member 6420 from coming off from the back side at the left end of the covering base member 6410. , an intermediate holding member 6440 that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a on the opposite side (back side), and a V that is disposed on the upper front side of the covered foundation member 6410 and is formed from a resin material into a V-shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a character design member 6450.

The covering foundation member 6410 has a main body part 6411 formed in a substantially box shape with a substantially planar lower bottom surface and an open back and top surface, and a slight frame part in the front and rear at the lower bottom part of the main body part 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the main body 6412, a protruding shaped portion 6413 protruding downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body 6411 with the through hole 6412 as a reference; On the back side of the shaped part 6413, a concave shaped part 6414 is mainly provided, which is recessed so that the thickness of the protruded shaped part 6413 is approximately the same as that of the other part of the main body part 6411.

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large near the protrusion shape portion 6413, thereby improving the yield of resin molding and causing stress concentration in the protrusion shape portion 6413. This can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a location where the operating device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the bottom opening 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the ball ejection speed from the lower tray 50 can be adjusted to match the playability achieved by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. It can be adjusted to correspond to the ejection speed of the balls.

That is, the speed at which the balls are ejected from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432. For example, if the through hole 6412 is the same size as the bottom port 6432, the speed at which the balls are ejected from the bottom tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432. It cannot be made larger. In contrast, in this embodiment, the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, so if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range that does not exceed the through hole 6412, ( By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, the ejection speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covered foundation member 6410. In other words, the ball ejection speed (ejection mode) can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 that the player visually recognizes (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the Pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game parlor, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires transferring the paid balls to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require transferring the paid balls to the senryo box (so-called "personal"). ).

When it is necessary to transfer the paid balls to the senryo box, if balls are ejected at a high speed, there is a risk that the balls will frequently overflow from the senryo box, so the design is such that the balls are ejected at a slower speed than the predetermined speed. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the spherical shape (spherical shape with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the number of balls that can be ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, if it is not necessary to transfer the balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes greatly in the direction of increase. In such an installation mode, the balls that are paid out will flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so as an example of the upper limit of the ejection speed, The operating speed of the ball flow device is illustrated.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in front view, but there is a risk that the strength of the main body part 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where there is a risk of receiving load (mainly downward load) when a player operates the operating device 10300, so the size and arrangement of the through-hole 6412 and However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to the extent that it can withstand.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are assembled to the covered foundation member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other in such a manner that they sandwich the covered foundation member 6410 from above and below, with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 being the fastening direction. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430. Thereby, the surrounding portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

Note that the design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 come into contact with each other before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened (in a state where they are placed in the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), although there is a gap between them before they are fastened, the design may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Furthermore, the portion to be pressed need not be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially near the operating device 10300 (the right side near the protruding shape part 6413) and the back side part (the long plate part placed behind the through hole 6412) where there is a risk of receiving a shock every time it is opened or closed. Since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode that suppresses the load.

In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, sufficient strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be ensured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be placed at any position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to this. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower tray forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate part 6423 protrudes from the back side of the bottom surface in an L-shape when viewed from below, and a ball discharge device 6430 protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape on the inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate part 6423. a plurality of fastening parts 6424 into which fastening screws are screwed together; a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the discharge port 6422 as the base end; and a main body box part 6421. It mainly includes a plate-shaped support part 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the plate-shaped support part 6426, and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support part 6426.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at the front end of the lower tray 50 and at the right end. The bottom upper surface of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the balls flowing into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the discharge port 6422, where they are discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-like support portion 6426 where the load from the operating device 10300 is likely to occur, and the structure of the through hole may have the effect of reducing the strength. We are taking countermeasures, but the details will be explained later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different protruding lengths depending on the left and right positions, but this corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially planar shape, the lower surface of the lower base of the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward toward the right. 6412), the protruding length of the L-shaped plate part 6423 needs to be made shorter toward the right, and this corresponds to this. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate part 6423 comes into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (not in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are formed at two locations at the front end where loads from the player are likely to occur, and at one location at the back end where loads are likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing fastening points in locations where loads are likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening locations and prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from becoming unfixed and shifting in position when a load occurs. .

Furthermore, since the fastening part 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate part 6423, although the fastening part 6424 is fastened inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body part 6411 is separated). (While fastening is performed without forming a ). Therefore, the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 can be improved while making it unnecessary to form through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 serves both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in this embodiment, the bottom part of the lower plate 50 is formed from a plate shape that is elongated in the left and right directions, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Since it slides along the left-right direction that coincides with the above, it is possible to appropriately guide the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower plate 50.

Note that, as described above, since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair, the applied load can be distributed. Further, even if one of the parts is damaged, there is no problem in using it as long as the other part remains, so the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible material with appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball ejecting device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball ejecting lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom opening 6432 formed vertically through the main body plate portion 6431, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 are disposed vertically overlapping with the fastening portion 6424 of the fastening portion 6420 and are tightened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame surrounding the fastening holes 6433, the frame. It mainly includes a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covered foundation member 6410.

The ball removal lever 52 includes a grip portion 52a that extends forward so that the player can operate it by sliding it left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a guided rib 52c that is guided by the guide rib 6425, which is a pair of rib-like parts that protrude upward from the upper surface of the closing plate part 52b and extend in the left-right direction. are integrally molded from hard resin material.

The bottom opening 6432 is vertically opposed to the discharge opening 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As mentioned above, when not in operation, the ball removal lever 52 is placed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432, so the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile, so as in this embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300). Even though the configuration in which the lower tray unit 6400 is arranged is adopted, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating.

The details of how the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened will be explained. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (plane side and both left and right sides) excluding the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covered foundation member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball ejecting device 6430 is inserted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar The portion 6431a abuts on the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate part 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted from the outside of the fitting frame part 6434 in the front, back, left and right directions, and the lower end of the L-shaped plate part 6423 is , as described above, contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

In this way, the ball ejecting device 6430 can be positioned on the covered foundation member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejecting device 6430, and after aligning the positions of each component, the components are fastened. Each structure can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 6410 are inserted, and a metal main body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A plurality of fastening parts 6442 protruding from the back side, which are parts to which screws inserted into the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and parts that interfere with the upper left end of the covered foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference part 6443 formed in a dovetail plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. 226 and 227 show the V-shaped design member 6450 in an exploded state from FIGS. 224 and 225.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and whose opening width becomes narrower toward the center of the left and right, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center of the left and right; A plurality of insertion holes 6452 are formed at the lower edge of the main body part 6451 as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning part 6453 is formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body part 6451, and the left and right sides of the main body part 6451 A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 are formed near the end portions and are formed to be able to be screwed into the fastening screws, and a plate shape extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451, and a plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are formed in the left side of the main body part 6451 in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body part 6451 and are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451. It mainly includes a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the locations where a through hole is likely to be formed by a person who commits a fraudulent act in order to insert a fraudulent member into the interior of the pachinko machine 10010. In other words, it is less difficult to make a through hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 than to make a through hole in the V-shaped design member 6450. It is possible to direct the right front cover 10322 to be opened.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the areas that are periodically checked to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that the through hole will be formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, so it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. This can reduce the burden of checking compared to the case where it is necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed with a thin wall and can be bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width (it can be bent and deformed in a vertically collapsible manner). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operating device 10300, vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operating device 10300 is prevented via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. communicated. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexibly deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is caused by the flexure of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

That is, after at least a portion of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 is manipulated by deforming the V-shaped design member 6450, it can be transmitted downstream thereof (for example, to the covered foundation member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, so that the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. In addition, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning part 6453 includes a fastening part 6453L formed on the left side with respect to the left-right center so that a fastening screw can be screwed into it, and a plate-shaped protruding part that projects toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening part 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering foundation member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion of the covering foundation member 6410 from the front side into a recess formed on the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in such a manner that it approaches the covering foundation member 6410 from the back side (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least a portion of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is not visible in the assembled state when viewed from the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, in a state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering foundation member 6410, the fastening screws inserted into at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the V-shaped design member is removed from the covering foundation member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 before disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of man-hours required until the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is provided with a front longitudinal portion 6426c to be described later, through which a fastening screw is inserted, which is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L. The insertion portion 6426c1 is fixed to the insertion portion 6426c1. In addition, the operating device 10300 is arranged in such a manner that the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operating device 10300 and move it from the position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to remove the operating device 10300 and disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R contacts the upper surface of the front longitudinal portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R.

As a result, even if, for example, the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is subjected to a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operating device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d Since these are fitted, the front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction as the operating device 10300 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 6453R, upward displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening parts 6454 are parts into which fastening screws are inserted through a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body part 10014a of the front frame 10014, and the fastening positions thereof are as follows. , on the back side (closer to the metal main body part 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening part 6453L.

The right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and because they have a thin shape that can be bent and deformed themselves, they can transmit displacement downstream by deforming themselves. It also functions as a buffer means (displacement transmission suppressing means) to suppress As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Below, they will be explained in order.

228(a) is a schematic sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) illustrate a cross section in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction. In addition, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have the same thickness, but are designed to vary the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction in accordance with the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6455a, an upper facing part 6455b that is arranged to face the upper plate part of the main body part 6451 in parallel and forms a gap, and an aspect in which the separation width becomes larger toward the back side with respect to the lower plate part of the main body part 6451. The lower facing portions 6455c are arranged to face each other in an inclined manner.

The lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted to the upper facing portion 6455b. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. This can prevent the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6455b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower opposing portion 6455c has a longer distance from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the back side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to be larger), so that the right side reinforcement is performed. The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (abutment) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when the rib 6455 itself is displaced.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement and load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 are transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In this embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged downstream (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322, but since the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, the operation handle 51 is It is possible to reduce the rate at which loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with operating and driving the device 10300 are transmitted to the operating handle 51. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a gaming experience in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling any discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b that is arranged to face the upper plate of the main body 6451 in parallel and forms a gap, and an overhanging portion 6456c that protrudes toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate of the main body 6451. and a lower facing portion 6456d that is arranged parallel to and opposed to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.

The lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted to the upper facing part 6456b. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. This can prevent the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that slopes away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 (downward) toward the back side. As a result, the projecting portion 6456c is formed not as a portion that constantly contacts the lower edge of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that contacts the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 increases to a certain extent. That is, the projecting portion 6456c can function as a fail-safe portion for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the amount of displacement becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the projecting portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front and rear positions where the load transmitted via the left front cover 10321 can be distributed can be increased, so that the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456 come into contact with the rear covered portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covered portion 10014b can be reduced. .

This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the rear covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where the balls are stored and where the player may put his hands) is reduced. This can prevent narrowing.

That is, although the rear covered portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the rear covered portion 10014b. can be suppressed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where the surface constituting the lower tray 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball, causing abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the arrangement spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to handle a larger load. In this embodiment, the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged close together in areas where the weight of the player's hand that touches the balls stored in the upper tray 17 placed on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven between the left and right sides. By arranging them evenly, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in this embodiment, the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are made different, so that different types of loads can be handled. That is, the right side reinforcing rib 6455 forms a sufficient gap between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower opposing portion 6455c to block the transmission of load, thereby preventing the instantaneous load or impact via the operating device 10300. On the other hand, the left side reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, the back It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. In this way, in this embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to be able to cope with load conditions that are likely to cause problems.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. , FIG. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed portion 6414 of the covered foundation member 6410 from side to side. , the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being spaced apart from the recessed portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be explained below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are similar to the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 is pressed from above, and the portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as shapes whose scales have been changed by an amount that can ensure the thickness of the main body portion 6411. Ru. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the horizontal width of the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is disposed closer to the front side than the center of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction, so that the protrusion shape portion The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the recessed portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a downwardly sinking manner, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, but details will be described later.

Here, in the state where the game is possible, the operating device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support 6426, and as the player operates the operating device 10300, the plate-shaped support 6426 can be vertically displaced. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are made of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410. There is a possibility that shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

If shavings are generated around the operating device 10300, for example, the shavings may enter gaps and make it impossible to ensure clearance, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor, causing false detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, generation of shavings can be suppressed or the amount generated can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, when a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction and the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the main body portion 6411 It is possible to eliminate the need for displacement of other parts such as.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the operating device 10300 in the lifting direction and the plate-shaped support part 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member 6450, there is no need to displace other parts such as the main body 6411.

In this way, in this embodiment, the plate-like support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operating device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body part 6411. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that slopes upward as it goes toward. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When storing the front frame 10014 alone, it is generally considered that it is often placed on a concrete or wooden floor with the lower surface of the front frame 10014 in contact with the floor. At this time, it may be preferable for the entire lower surface to be in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoidance of concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt from the floor will adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid getting dirt on it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped part 6413 comes into contact with the floor, a gap will be created between the floor and the lower surface of the main body part 6411. Therefore, the area where the shaped part 6413 comes into contact with the floor and gets dirty is limited to the projected part 6413. can do. Therefore, when the game parlor side installs the front frame 10014 in a state where it can be played, it is only necessary to wipe the dirt on the protruding shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

Further, the protruding portion 6413 also functions as a finger rest portion on which the front frame 10014 is hung when carrying it. Conventionally, the lower plate part was placed at the left and right center of the front frame, so it was easy to hook the lower plate part, lift the front frame, and attach it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower plate 50 is placed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening/closing axis side), so it is difficult to hook the lower plate 50 to lift the front frame 10014 and assemble it. It is said that the structure is

On the other hand, if you hook your hand on the operating handle 51 and lift the front frame 10014, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the base of the operating handle 41, which may damage the operating handle 51, so this is not recommended. is not desirable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a protrusion-shaped portion 6413 that also functions as a finger rest is arranged at the left-right center position so that it is recommended to hook the hand on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 and lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking his/her hand on the protruding shaped portion 6413, lifting the front frame 10014, and pivoting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

By configuring the work procedure to include wiping off dirt before and after placing a finger on the device, it is possible to make the worker aware of the locations where dirt needs to be wiped off in relation to the carrying action. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off dirt can be prevented.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured to be just the right amount of gap depending on the amount of deformation expected in the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. To be more specific, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor becomes larger as it goes toward the front side. This corresponds to the fact that the amount of deformation (deflection) due to load increases.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, even if the protruding shaped portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, it is possible to easily secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor. I can do it. On the other hand, if the protruding shaped portion 6413 is bent and deformed to its limit and there is no gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor, it is possible to make the entire lower surface of the main body 6411 more likely to come into contact with the floor. Therefore, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can support the weight of the front frame 10014.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Further, the deformable amount is made larger toward the front side of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging a senryo box, a clerk at a game store slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape part 6413, but at this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are There may be a collision. If the impact and load from this collision accumulates as fatigue in the structural members, the structural members may be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the deformable amount of the protruding shape portion 6413 increases as it goes toward the front side where it is more likely to collide with the senryo box. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box through deformation (bending deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protrusion shaped portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that it rises toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the senryo box and the main body part 6411 will collide on the left and right sides of the protruding shaped part 6413 when replacing the senryo box. This can reduce the possibility that the bottom surface of the main body section 6411 will be damaged, making it easier to maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. In addition, in FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the other operating device 10300 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are connected to the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b (FIGS. 228(a) and 228(a)) of the V-shaped design member 6450. See b)).

Since the body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape in rear view, and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the body portion 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is reduced. is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a direction component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is directed diagonally upward.

This makes it possible to accommodate not only vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also horizontal displacement. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swing operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component, the downward load applied by the player will be If such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and may also be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operating device 10300 by bending and deforming based on their own curved shapes (they can absorb the horizontal displacement or use their restoring force). Furthermore, since the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center of the left and right sides, the operating device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, the design of the front frame 10014 as seen from the front (see FIG. 207) can be easily maintained.

233(a) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 233(c) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). Note that in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is connected to the lower tray forming member 6420 (in the rear side portion, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed by the installed end (lower end) and the ball ejection device 6430 (flange 6431a). Thereby, the area around the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate part 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted from the outside of the fitting frame part 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front, back, left, and right directions, and is shaped like an L. As described above, the lower end of the plate portion 6423 abuts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). Thereby, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As mentioned above, since the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not in operation, the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile, so as in this embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300). Even though the configuration in which the lower tray unit 6400 is arranged is adopted, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, sufficient bending performance can be given to the recessed portion 6414 near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operating device 10300 is likely to be large, so that when the player operates the operating device 10300 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covered foundation member 6410 that supports the operating device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to a load. This will be explained in detail.

As described above, the operating device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operating modes. It has the role of notifying the operation timing and operation mode through a display device or the like, having the player operate the operating device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swinging operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player performs a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to respond to notifications prompting operations in display effects (notifications such as "Press the button!") or to switch stages. Ru. Therefore, most of the load that occurs due to the operation is the load that occurs when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is the load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215(a)). Since the frequency of occurrence of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load increases.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled to vertically displace the swinging operation member 10310, for example, the swinging operating member 10310 is placed in a downward position. In this state (see FIG. 215(b)), a notification prompting an operation is executed.

In this case, the operating direction is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) which is further inclined in the front-rear direction by an angle θ17y compared to the state in which the swing operating member 10310 is placed in an upward position. A load occurs along the line. Since the notification occurs only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases as it goes toward the front side. It is designed to have high compatibility performance.

In other words, compared to a case where the shape is the same in the front and back directions, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load occurrence in the appropriate place, and the applied load may cause too much deformation or insufficient deformation. This makes it easier to avoid damage.

As described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the load is more frequently generated during operation are both the front side, so the concave shaped portion 6414 becomes wider as it goes toward the front side. , was formed at the deep bottom, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swinging operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, so in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the back side. By forming the deep bottom, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load occurrence in the appropriate place, compared to a case where the shape is common in the front and rear directions, and prevents excessive deformation due to the applied load. This makes it easier to avoid problems such as occurrence of deformation or insufficient deformation resulting in easy breakage.

As shown in FIG. 233(b), which corresponds to the center cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 6426b abuts the main body portion 6411 vertically at a position on the left and right sides of both ends of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the left and right widths. come into contact with

As a result, the rate at which the load from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the recessed portion 6414 can be lowered compared to the case where the hanging plate portion 6426b contacts the upper edge of the recessed portion 6414. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress damage to the recessed portion 6414 due to the load when operating the operating device 10300.

In addition, as a response to the load, not only the deflection of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the deflection of the plate portion from the upper edge of the recessed shape portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is utilized. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support part 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 extends downward from the flat plate-shaped part 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed and the left and right and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped part 6426a. A hanging plate-like part 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape, and a front longitudinal part that is connected to the front side edge of the plane plate-like part 6426a and is formed to be taller than the plane plate-like part 6426a, and is open at the bottom. 6426c, and a fitting part 6426d that extends from the front longitudinal part 6426c to the back side and is fitted with the operating device 10300. Note that in the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 will be referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the horizontal width of the recessed portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed portion 6414. A hanging plate-like part 6426b is formed between the plane plate-like part 6426a and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 (between the top and bottom). That is, the planar plate-like part 6426a does not come into contact with the main body part 6411, but the extending end of the hanging plate-like part 6426b, which is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (see FIG. 225), comes into contact with the main body part 6411. , the position of the planar plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covered foundation member 6410 is determined.

In this way, since the planar plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426b are formed not in a block shape but in a box-shape with an open bottom, the planar plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is considered to be a composition. Therefore, not only the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed in response to the load via the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexibly deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covered foundation member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the recessed shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 Damage can be further prevented.

Although the hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the bottom upper surface of the main body portion 6411, it does not extend into the recessed portion 6414. That is, a space is created between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protrusion shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Furthermore, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that has flowed along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid entering the back. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front longitudinal portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 due to the fitting portion 6426d extending toward the back side, and the lower portion of the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load applied by the player to the operating device 10300 can be distributed not only to the main body part 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be weakened. can.

Further, a space is also created between the front side longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protrusion shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Further, the space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a water drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that has flowed along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid entering the back. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed to be elongated in the lateral direction so as to be able to fit into the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operating device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to a lower surface and a front longitudinal portion 6426c formed on the extending proximal end side.

The reinforcing ribs 6426d1 can suppress vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting part 6426d, so even if a load that displaces the operating device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting part 6426d can withstand it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed above the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load accompanying the player's operation and vibration of the operating member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-shaped support part 6426 via the resin member, and then to the covered foundation member 6410 disposed downstream thereof. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the main body part 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The direction component can be directed to the front side (load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operating device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) may shake, which may affect the flow of the shot ball, or the load may be transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 or the electronic board, causing the board to crack. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the top effect device 6500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In addition, in FIGS. 235 and 236, illustration of the above-described lower tray unit 6400 and operation device 10300 is omitted, and a state in which the upper presentation device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body portion 10014a is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper presentation device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the audio devices 6610 arranged as a pair of left and right, and includes an illumination board 6570 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. , and each component member that acts as an intermediary to deliver the light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the direction of separation from the metal main body portion 10014a is disposed on the back side of the upper presentation device 6500. Thereby, it is possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the top presentation device 6500 to the metal main body portion 10014a (stable fastening and fixation).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500. Note that FIGS. 237 and 238 illustrate a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper presentation device 6500 is disassembled upward.

The upper presentation device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6560 disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion that is formed by dividing a horizontally long ellipse into front and rear parts. 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed vertically near the front edge of the main body plate 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of insertion holes 6512 extending downward from the back side of the main body plate 6511. It mainly includes a plurality of fastening parts 6513, each of which has a female threaded hole formed from the back surface of the extended tip and is configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body part 10014a into the female threaded hole.

The rear side portion of the upper lid member 6510 where the fastening portion 6513 extends is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and other components of the top presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512. That is, by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper cover member 6510, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper presentation device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on its front side. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has a structure in which the acoustic device 6610 corresponds to the metal main body portion 10014a. It can be prevented from coming off.

The upper lid member 6510 has an uneven portion 6514 recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface and extending downward from the lower surface as a decoration over the entire surface. Due to the uneven portion 6514, the force for resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased compared to the case where the upper cover member 6510 of the same thickness is constructed of a plate-like member with a smooth surface. (can be made easier).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500. Note that in FIGS. 239 and 240, illustration of the upper lid member 6510 of the upper presentation device 6500 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are shown disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In this embodiment, the upper direction device 6500 is moved by moving the front units 6520 to 6550 diagonally downward in the front direction (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed and the surface follows) relative to the rear units 6560 to 6580. The details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED, and refracting or transmitting the light, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 have the role of receiving light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED. It has the role of a means and a role of supporting an illumination board on which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241(b) is a front view of the illumination board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 include a partitioning member 6560 that partitions the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate light to the partitioning member 6560. An illumination board 6570 is arranged, and a pair is stacked on the back side of the partition member 6560 and is disposed with a slight gap from the illumination board 6570 in the inner area of the outer shape, and is supported on the surface in the outer part. It mainly includes a back support member 6580.

Note that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illumination board 6570 can be maintained, and it can be supported so that it can be displaced back and forth by the gap between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580. It means that.

The partitioning member 6560 is disposed close to and opposite to the front side of the illumination board 6570, and is configured to divide the light emitted from each of the illumination parts 6574 to 6576 of the illumination board 6570 from the vicinity of the illumination board 6570. Ru. By dividing the area in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, even when the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 differs greatly. It is also possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 disposed to face the illumination board 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed at the left and right center portions of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a center light hole 6562 formed at the lower left and right portions of the opposing plate portion 6561. A plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. , a rectangular cylindrical part 6566 that surrounds the central light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the opposing plate part 6561, and a long cylindrical part that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563 and extends to the front side of the opposing plate part 6561. A plate-like connection that is formed from an extended left and right cylinder part 6567 and a T-shaped plate part when viewed from the front, and connects the opposing plate part 6561, the central cylinder part 6566, and the left and right cylinder parts 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate part 6561. 6568.

The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c projecting from its upper edge toward the rear side in a left and right elongated shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portions 6561b are formed as a left and right pair, and extend from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portions 6561c are formed as a left and right pair and extend from a position opposite to the end of the second flange portion 6561b with the fastening portion 6564 in between to near the left and right ends of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570, and at least the cut is provided on the illumination board 6570. It is constructed in a location where light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, even if light enters from the outside, this location is a location where the light is unlikely to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange part 6561a and the second flange part 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and is purposely designed to prevent the LED from being placed on the illumination board 6570. The locations where no placement is made are defined as cuts. Therefore, since there are no LEDs that cause light leakage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leakage from the cut.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at the location where the fastening portion 6564 is disposed, and the cut is intentionally set at the location where the alternative portion that blocks light is disposed. This is what I did. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light attempting to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking from the cut.

Here, the flange parts 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous part, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange parts 6561a to 6561c cannot be ensured sufficiently, and the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 (Assuming a downward load applied to a member placed in front of the partition member 6560, a load applied by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract it only with the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening part 6564. occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening parts 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illumination board 6570 decreases, which limits the locations where LEDs can be placed. This reduces the degree of freedom in designing the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths that ensure rigidity, the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 can be resisted by the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening parts 6564 can be limited, reducing the number of work steps and improving the degree of freedom in designing the illumination board 6570.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed depending on the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the shape of the upper presentation device 6500 is formed into a semi-elliptical shape whose width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). Generally, the load applied by the player (for example, a hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper presentation device 6500, so the load applied by the player at the left and right center of the upper presentation device 6500 is maximum. It gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

In contrast, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are intentionally made to have different lengths. To be more specific, compared to the horizontal length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the horizontal length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right sides thereof is longer, Furthermore, the third flange portions 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the horizontal length is the shortest at the left and right center portions, and gradually increases as it approaches the left and right ends. As a result, it is possible to generate a counterforce to the load applied to the top effect device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

Thereby, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 can be stably maintained. Note that maintaining the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to preventing the illumination board 6570 from being displaced due to a decrease in the force holding the illumination board 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the direction of separation, but also when deformation in the direction of approaching. This also includes the case where a compressive load is generated on the illumination board 6570 due to displacement or displacement to prevent the illumination board 6570 from being destroyed or deformed.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes bored corresponding to the pattern of LEDs arranged on the illumination board 6570. The center light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes that are slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes that are sized to surround a plurality of LEDs. .

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. As a result, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion having the same diameter and extending toward the front side, and includes an insertion hole 6565a formed at the bottom of the distal end thereof through which a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 from the back side is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540, which will be described later. With this configuration, the process of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed while the rear units 6560 to 6580 are assembled (see FIGS. 239 and 240). can.

The central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 extend until they reach the rear side ends of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 enters the front units 6520 to 6550.

The plate-like joint portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper presentation device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566 The top surface is placed at a slightly higher position than the top end of the. As a result, the plate-like joint portion 6568 takes over the load before the central cylindrical portion 6566, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566, and prevent the central cylindrical portion 6566 from deforming or displacing. This makes it easier to avoid situations where this happens.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylinder portions 6567. As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also counteracted by the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portions that reach the left and right cylinder portions 6567. can do. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-like part, a counter force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like part itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical parts 6567 can be suppressed.

The illumination board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board part 6571 and a fastening part that is bored or cut out in the board part 6571 and into which the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted. An insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 that is bored in the substrate portion 6571 and into which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs arranged at the left and right center portions of the substrate portion 6571 (Fig. It is formed from a first illumination part 6574 formed from a uniform rectangle (shown as a uniform rectangle in FIG. A second lighting section 6575 disposed near the substrate section 6571, a third lighting section 6576 disposed symmetrically along the lower end of the board section 6571, and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Prepare for the Lord.

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each illumination section 6574 to 6576 is formed from a plurality of LEDs that can emit light to the front side along the front-rear direction. They are arranged according to their physical position. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting section 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting section 6576 is located below the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. Thereby, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area divided by the division member 6560. Note that the first illumination section 6574 and the second illumination section 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560, whereas the third illumination section 6576 illuminates the area outside the partitioning member 6560.

Note that the third illumination section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As described later, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 travels diagonally downward by the light receiving member 6558, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 is blocked by the partitioning member 6560. As a result, the third illumination section 6576 and the partitioning member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is designed such that no fastening force is applied to the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illumination board 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed into a vertically elongated oval shape (or a half oval shape) when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve assembly efficiency, which will be described in detail later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that have substantially symmetrical shapes. A flange part 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate part 6581 toward the front side, an upper plate part 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange part 6582 and extending in a plate shape toward the back side, and a front plate. A rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape that is connected to the left and right edges (edges opposite to the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge of the portion 6581 and opens to the back side, and a pair of rear boxes. A lower box part 6585 which is a part of the part 6584 and is formed in a box shape that has a smooth upper surface and is opened downward on the side closer to the rear box part 6584 of the other side, and the lower box part 6585 and the front plate part. An opposing plate part 6586 which is a plate-shaped part connected to 6581 and is disposed opposite to the mating member (back support member 6580), and a cut that vertically penetrates between the opposing plate part 6586 and the lower box part 6585. It mainly includes a cutout portion 6587 which is a cutout.

The front plate part 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports that are made up of pairs of oval ribs capable of supporting the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 and insertion holes through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening part 6564 are inserted. portion 6581a and a through hole formed from a vertically elongated oval shape with a left and right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 front and back. A plurality of positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly drilled in the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584, through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; Similar to the screw insertion part 6581c, a plurality of long positioning holes 6581d are bored along the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box part 6584 and used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550, and It mainly includes a wiring hole 6581e that is bored at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decorative board 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass back and forth.

The inner width of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a in the left-right direction, which constitutes the short axis, is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560, while the outer width of the rib in the left-right direction is larger than that of the illumination board 6570. It is made longer than the left and right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening part 6564 is inserted into the inside of the elliptical rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the illumination board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they slope downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction in which the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the downwardly inclined direction. (See Figure 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illumination board 6570 compared to the case where the openings are made in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are brought closer to the illumination board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portions 6581 are formed in the same size, a wide area for disposing the illumination board 6570 can be secured, and when the illumination board 6570 is formed in the same size, The area in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (load in a hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 includes a plurality of fitting recesses 6583a arranged at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 6513 (see FIG. 238) and recessed so as to be able to fit into the fastening portions 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is open at the upper and rear sides and is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear box part 6584 includes a projecting part 6584a that projects further to the front side than the front plate part 6581, a sound transmitting part 6584b made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the projecting part 6584a, and a right side member. A light receiving section 6584c formed from a light-transmitting member is disposed at the right end of the overhanging section 6584a, and a light receiving section 6584c is disposed at a position closest to the center of the upper end (position close to the front plate section 6581). (See FIG. 207), a pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body portion 10014a are inserted into the insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510. It mainly includes a pair of fastening parts 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

The upper edge of the projecting portion 6584a is formed to follow the shape of the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and its upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission section 6584b is a section through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. This sound transmission section 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving portion 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from a lighting portion 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED disposed at the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and displays it to the player as a light emitting effect. It is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the illumination board 6570. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal variable effect, a reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emitting effect of the illumination unit 10014c is performed when the probability of occurrence is high. This is executed when a performance that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.

The notch 6587 is one side of a hole through which the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is vertically bored on the lower surface of the left and right center portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the vibrating membrane 6611). form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a hole surrounded by the support plate portion 10014d that supports the rear side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as sound directed towards the front side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates, whereas the sound is outputted as sound directed toward the back side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the audio device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612. By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different tones can be generated simultaneously.

244(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLIVb, and FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the audio device 6610 along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. 241. FIG. 246(a) is a partial sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(b) is a partial sectional view. is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb in FIG. 241.

Note that in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illumination board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Thereby, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibrations from the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from vibrating (width of vibration) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), a fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the illumination board 6570 in between. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illumination board 6570. That is, in the illumination board 6570, the fastening insertion portion 6572 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the fastening portion is not fixed to the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580.

Further, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a abut against the back surface of the illumination board 6570, the partitioning member 6560 is separated from the illumination board 6570 in its front and back positions. That is, in this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, so the illumination board 6570 can be displaced (for example, tilted) in the front and rear directions.

Furthermore, the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 is not supported by either the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that allows a gap to be formed below the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support part 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape that can form a gap below the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 244(a)). It will be explained that by forming in this way, the partitioning member 6560 can be easily assembled to the back support member 6580.

As in the past, for example, when the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a are formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening part 6564, the partitioning member 6560 is aligned vertically and horizontally with respect to the back support member 6580. It becomes necessary to assemble the

However, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is disposed in an unfixed state between the division member 6560 and the back support member 6580, when the division member 6560 is assembled, the back support member 6580 of the illumination board 6570 It is also necessary to align the position with respect to the target, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed with

As an example of the assembly order, first, the illumination board 6570 is attached to the division member 6560 so that the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the division member 6560 is inserted into the large diameter insertion part 6573 of the illumination board 6570. At this time, the arrangement of the illumination board 6570 with respect to the partitioning member 6560 does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be placed at any position.

In this embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illumination board 6570, so that when the illumination board 6570 is assembled to the division member 6560, the division member of the illumination board 6570 Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is significantly suppressed.

Next, the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted into the inside of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening part 6564 with respect to the fastening support part 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and may be placed at any position. In other words, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see Figure 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see Figure 242), positioning with a sufficiently long permissible width in the vertical direction), so the fastening part It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved relative to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the fastening part 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support part 6581a are aligned. and screw in the fastening screw (see Fig. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the illumination board 5670 is out of position, the partitioning member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large diameter insertion part 6573 is supported by the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 (see FIG. 244(b)). and the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, which generally makes it difficult to align the illumination board 6570. By forming the fastening insertion part 6572, the large-diameter insertion part 6573, the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), even though it is an assembled mode. , it is possible to improve assembly efficiency. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight, so that the illumination board 5670's misalignment will result in the effects of the light-emitting display during the game lasting for a long time. can be prevented from decreasing.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). The central light hole 6562 has an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in an inverted T-shape (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241) in the left and right center portions, and an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in a roughly gourd shape (approximately a pot shape) on the outside thereof. (arranged at eight locations, see FIG. 241) and direct entry holes 6562b. Note that the direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised toward the front side, and the inner wall is raised toward the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed in an inclined manner so that the opposing distance becomes wider as it goes toward the end.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 can be defined. That is, depending on the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (the angle of inclination of the inner wall, the raised height, etc.), the way the light is shown to the player can be changed.

In this embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised toward the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closing portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

In FIG. 246(a), a screw insertion portion 6581c is illustrated, and in FIG. 246(b), a positioning elongated hole 6581d is illustrated. As described above, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side, and along this inclination direction, the front units 6520 to 6550 are connected to the rear units 6560 to 6581d. 6580 and fastened and fixed.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the illumination board 6570 can be positioned to the extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion part 6581c, so the size of the illumination board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, the size of the rear box part 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged. (See FIGS. 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning elongated hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the cutting direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same extraction direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, and the like. In this embodiment, the shape of the screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d is distorted because the extraction direction is set in the same front-rear direction as the direction in which the fastening support part 6581a and the fitting recessed part 6583a are formed. (The shape changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion part 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening part 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a part that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion part 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the part where the load associated with fastening is applied is thinner toward the center of the hole, so there is no imbalance in the load between the upper edge and the other part. This tends to occur, and there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen depending on the usage conditions and years of use.

In order to prevent fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with larger head diameters may be used, but this will result in higher costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is disposed opposite to each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the shape of a depression ( A retaining plate part 6621 is provided, which is a part of the recessed part and is formed as an upper part of the plate parallel to the plate part in which the screw insertion part 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area between the back support member 6580 and the head of the fastening screw. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw becomes loose, it restricts the further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from falling out. It can be prevented.

The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight distance from the head of the fastening screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, if the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. If sound is to be output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

Further, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back side of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoidance recess 6622 is formed to the extent that contact with the head of a fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a and screwed into the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 243) can be avoided (with a slight gap between the head and the fastening screw). (dimensions that allow for).

This can prevent the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through-hole of the fastening support part 6581a is the same front-back direction as the cutting direction of the resin mold, the wall thickness of the plate part to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a will become loose, but if the fastening screw becomes loose, the same function as the above-mentioned slip-off prevention plate part 6621 will be activated to avoid contact. A recess 6622 can be formed.

That is, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. If sound is to be output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, by being configured to be able to detect the transmission of vibrations caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw, It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loosened.

For example, an arrangement may be made in which an abnormal noise is generated by the transmission of vibrations, or a structure in which vibrations are detected.

As described in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, but is arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. be done. As a result, while the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 in between, the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination board 6570, and the illumination board 6570 is Breaking of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position excluding the presentation portions of the illumination board 6570 (that is, the illumination portions 6574 to 6576), and the proportion of the presentation portion on the surface of the illumination substrate 6570 is For the purpose of ensuring a large area, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

Therefore, there is a problem that the partitioning member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed, and without countermeasures, vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the back support member 6580, and the partitioning member When the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastened parts may become loose, and the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from a different direction. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening locations, fastening directions, and fastening directions of each component of the upper performance device 6500 are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is shown as a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper presentation device 6500 is configured in such a manner that front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of rear units 6560 to 6580, and an upper lid member 6510 supports the front units 6520 to 6550. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In this embodiment, since the top cover member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 are transmitted via the back support member 6580, the top cover member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed to curve with respect to the center of the front and back, the front-to-back distance between the insertion holes 6512 that are formed apart in the front and back is shortened. This generates a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the rear side, and can apply a compressive load to the partition member 6560 in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 can sandwich the partition member 6560 and apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. I can do it.

Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened, if the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced toward the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the force from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 is The applied load is likely to be insufficient, and there is a possibility that the effect of suppressing vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, so that the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 can be prevented from displacing toward the front side. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a sufficient load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 is connected to the rear support member 6580. The vibration transmission direction can be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550, and it is possible to suppress the front and rear fastening points from moving in the front-back direction. Therefore, even when vibrations are transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening points, the illumination board 6570 can be placed close to the acoustic device 6610, where vibration is likely to occur, in an unfixed state, thereby preventing damage to the illumination board 6570. It is possible to suppress vibrations of the partitioning member 6560 due to vibrations being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 that prevents the illumination board 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by more than an allowable amount.

That is, while improving the durability of the illumination board 6570 disposed close to the audio device 6610, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the upper presentation device 6500.

Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to correspond to the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the top cover member 6510 is configured such that the back side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and extends in a thin plate shape from front to back, it is easy to curve and displace in such a manner that the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the back side. It's about things.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is located below the upper lid member 6510, starting from the rear end due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. It can have a curved displacement. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to other members disposed below it.

The direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, so it is along the front-back direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (as it moves toward the front side), the direction of the compressive load is along the front-back direction. It follows a direction that slopes downward toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate part 6547 is a direction that is inclined downwardly toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer to each other.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate sufficient resistance force against compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw can be easily ruptured. can be suppressed.

A fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is used to fasten the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the bottom and back side of the illumination board 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c etc. in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed and is configured to be easily displaced, but the allowable displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be limited by the plate guide unit 6550. That is, even if the illumination board 6570 is displaced, if the amount of displacement becomes excessive, the illumination board 6570 can be prevented from being excessively displaced by being able to come into contact with the plate guide unit 6550.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illumination board 6570 (the side where the audio device 6610 is arranged), displacement of the illumination board 6570 toward the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from coming close to the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction are gathered at the left and right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening parts (screw insertion part 6581c, insertion plate part 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and are not arranged close to each other.

This makes it possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening part on the other fastening part. In other words, even if a fastening part along the front-rear direction becomes loose and displacement occurs in the front-back direction, the affected part can be limited to the fastening part along the front-rear direction, so the downward slope occurs. It can be avoided that a load is applied to the fastening portion along the direction in a direction that is inclined to the fastening direction (along the front-rear direction). Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing a portion that is elongated in the front-rear direction, such as the left-right center side, with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the upper direction device 6500 against a load in the push-down direction.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening part whose fastening direction is along a direction that slopes downward toward the front side is likely to have a lower resistance to a load in the downward direction compared to a fastening part whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance force against the load in the downward direction is reduced by arranging the fastening parts along the direction in which the fastening direction slopes downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction. The arrangement area for the illumination board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be secured while minimizing the influence of this.

FIG. 248 is a sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). Note that the specific location is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 248, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 abuts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, while the front and rear surfaces abut the left and right side parts of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side parts of the back support member 6580, the abutment positions are formed so as not to coincide on the front and rear sides.

With this configuration, the durability of the illumination board 6570 can be improved and the ease with which displacement occurs can be adjusted. These will be explained in order below. First, improvement in the durability of the illumination board 6570 will be described.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 come into contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the same positions on the front and back, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partition When the distance between the abutting portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the thickness of the illumination board 6570, compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570, and if the applied load is large, the electric There is a possibility that the decorative board 6570 may be broken.

Furthermore, even if no compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, causing a load (for example, a load in the compressive direction). may be applied, and there is a risk that the illumination board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the positions where the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 abut on the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 do not match (there are places where they abut at shifted positions). Even if a load is applied to the illumination board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illumination board 6570, but a load that curves the illumination board 6570. Therefore, since the illumination board 6570 can be flexibly deformed, the possibility of cracking of the illumination board 6570 can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the likelihood of displacement of the illumination board 6570 will be described. The illumination board 6570 is inserted with the fastening part 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 to prevent misalignment, but in this embodiment, they are concentrated near the left and right center. (See Figure 243).

In addition, since the illumination board 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illumination board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illumination board 6570 near the left and right center portions of the illumination board 6570. Therefore, even when surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the illumination board 6570, neither the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 nor the fastening part 6564 are arranged, and there is no compressive load from the front and back, so the illumination board Compared to the left and right center portions of 6570, displacement can occur more easily.

Therefore, when surrounding members vibrate due to vibrations of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged as a pair of left and right, the vibration mode of the illumination board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, there is a case where only the sound device 6610 on the right side outputs sound and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and a case where sound is output only from the sound device 6610 on the left side and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. The illumination board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes, including when the left and right audio devices 6610 output sound to vibrate both left and right sides of the illumination board 6570.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be explained. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520-6550. Note that in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustrations of detailed configuration symbols are omitted for easy understanding.

249 and 250 show a light transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the light transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The member 6530, a partitioning unit 6540 that comes into contact with the partitioning member 6560 in the front and back and similarly partitions the light, and a guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the overhanging part 6584a of the back support member 6580 are shown in an exploded state. Ru.

When producing light through the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives light from the first illumination section 6574, the division unit 6540 receives light from the second illumination section 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third illumination section 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be explained in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(a) is the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. 252(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253(b) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550. FIG. 6 is a rear view of unit 6550.

254(a) is a sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 254(b) is a sectional view taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 254(c) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254(c) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b).

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partitioning unit 6540 includes a milky white member 6541 made of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a light transmission unit 6520 that is formed through the milky white member 6541 in the front and back direction at the center thereof. A through hole 6542 formed to allow the rear portion to be inserted therethrough, a pair of fastening portions 6543 that protrude inward from the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A plurality of insertion holes 6544 are drilled through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed can be inserted, and a pair of post-guiding fastening portions into which fastening screws that extend cylindrical toward the back side and pass through insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546 that are opened toward the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and a pair of box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546 that extend downward from the lower edges of the box-shaped light-receiving parts 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions, are formed with insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are formed, and a colorless transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent covering member 6548 that is formed from a transparent resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541.

The front side edge of the compartment unit 6540 is formed into a curved shape that swells toward the front side when viewed from above, similar to the upper lid member 6510, and is formed into a substantially inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and the center is located on the back side when viewed from the side. It is formed from a substantially circular arc shape (see FIG. 254(a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. This fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side, corresponding to the inclination of a contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of an optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. Thereby, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate part 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into surface contact, and the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. I can do it.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole facing toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 is a part of the illumination board 6570 that is disposed opposite to the second illumination section 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)), and has a front bottom back surface and a lower plate upper surface of the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546. , a jagged decoration with short left and right widths is formed. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

This shape allows light incident from the back side to be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a that is open at the top when viewed from the rear, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It mainly includes a protruding rib 6547c that has a semi-elliptic shape and protrudes toward the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated during fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is determined by the thickness of the upper edge of the portion where the load is applied during fastening depending on the direction in which the resin mold is removed (in this embodiment, the front-rear direction). It becomes thinner toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254(b)).

In this case, since load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the rest, there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen if small positional deviations occur repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. be.

In order to prevent fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with larger head diameters may be used, but this will result in higher costs due to the difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to prevent displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, first, the threaded portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced downward (FIGS. 247 and 254). (see (b)).

Second, the upper end of the front side of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage in the front-back direction with the lower end of the back side of the transparent covering member 6548, which is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b. (See Figure 254(b)). Thereby, displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into surface contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

These first to third contact structures can suppress the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540, thereby suppressing the loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a. I can do it.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed into a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a that extends in a plate-like manner toward the back side at the lower edge connection portion of the V-shape, and a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending from the upper edge to the back side. It includes a plurality of locking convex portions 6548b that protrude sideward in a plate shape. The left and right center portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate portion 6548a enters to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving section 6546, a jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-like section 6548a. As a result, even if the center portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be compensated for by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 6548 can be covered in the left and right direction. can be used to emit light uniformly.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the back side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a at a surface position with the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side, similarly to the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546, the cutting direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 will become complicated. In other words, the punching direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while it is tilted upward toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed of the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed of the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 constituting the slope, so that the transparent covering member 6548 The entire area can be visually recognized in a uniform color (white).

As a result, the cutting direction of the mold for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is tilted to the side that interferes in the front and rear drawing directions. While maintaining the shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering inside the partition unit 6540 when viewed from the front), the light emission of the transparent covering member 6548 can be played in a uniform light emitting manner. It can be made visible to the person.

In other words, while the partitioning unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the vertical interval narrows), the back side of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 are adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the light emitting device (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emitting effect with a uniform light emitting pattern.

In this case, it becomes difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the molding die to be in the front-back direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-back direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (direction of upward inclination) as the drawing direction of the mold, the manufacturing process in which resin molding is performed using a mold with the drawing direction in the front-rear direction (one direction) can be achieved. The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured using the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured easily, and the area visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be emitted uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulge toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is made of a colored opaque resin material and has a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a main body resin member 6551 that is guided along the upper surface of the overhang 6584a of the back support member 6580, and a main body resin member 6551 that is formed of a colored opaque resin material. An extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the rear side along the lower edge of the left and right center portions, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure holes 6553 bored at the rear side ends of the extension plate portion 6552. , a plurality of front-side fastening parts 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and facing the insertion plate part 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed; A plurality of back side fastening parts 6555 arranged along the lower edge and to which fastening screws passed through the screw insertion part 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back side support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, and the back side fastening parts 6555 A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 are provided in a rib-like shape and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580, and a plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 are provided in a rib-like manner and are inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580. It mainly includes through-holes 6557 and a pair of light-receiving members 6558 formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed into the plurality of through-holes 6557.

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclined direction that is upwardly inclined toward the back side, or along a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the area facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed as a plurality of small holes (the area is divided into small holes). ). Thereby, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

Further, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width becomes narrower as it approaches the end of the hole and as it goes toward the back side. As a result, the hole can be clogged with the thin wire material, so when the thin wire material is advanced further into the depths after entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking it on a specific member, The movement resistance of the thin wire material can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent acts can be extended, thereby making it possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

The front side fastening part 6554 includes a threaded part 6554a into which a fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of positioning wall parts 6554b formed in the shape of a pair of walls on the left and right sides of the threaded part 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are opposed to each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a part that is guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. a guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b which are formed in a box shape with a bulge on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and an open back side and can be fitted into the through hole 6557; It mainly includes an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the central end portion of the portion 6558a (the end portion on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other).

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the illumination board 6570. The above-described decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, the light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so even if the number of LEDs corresponding to the through hole 6557 is small (1 to 2 in FIG. However, the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (it is possible to reduce the sense of a point light source).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in an attitude that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a position in which the light receiving surface is inclined so that the light traveling direction is along the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is attached to the plate guide unit 6550). ), the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed in the third lighting section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 on the back side of the light-receiving member 6558 is received. When the light beam passes through the member 6558, it is refracted and can be allowed to proceed in a diagonally downward direction toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that the length of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b protruding toward the front side is shorter for those disposed on the left and right outer sides than those disposed on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below.

The upper edge extension portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is disposed opposite to the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape, especially at the extending plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and there is no partition, so alignment with the partition member 6560 is difficult. It's difficult to do. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the area above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 249. In the explanation so far, the portions that receive light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 arranged on the left and right sides have been explained. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. 258(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed from a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front; An opening 6532 that is approximately gourd-shaped (approximately pot-shaped) and is bored in the front-rear direction in the center, and a protruding rib 6533 that is shaped like a rib along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protrudes toward the back side. , a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed therein.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 does not allow light to pass through, the portion inside the outer shape through which light is transmitted is limited to the opening portion 6532. The shape of this opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination section 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed to have a similar shape (enlarged shape) to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination section 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed differently depending on the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is It is possible to make the player viewing the player see a pattern of light that is different from the arrangement pattern of the first illumination section 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visible from the front of the opening 6532 around the position that overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that is spread laterally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination part 6574.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to widen the range of light visible to the player while narrowing the arrangement range of the first illumination unit 6574 that emits light behind it. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first illumination section 6574 (or the illumination board 6570), it is possible to make the light visible over a wide range. Note that the details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is provided at a location where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). ).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed midway in the transparent cylindrical member 6521. a flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup-shape to cover the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless, light-transmitting resin. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) and non-light transmitting resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to be inserted through the side opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523; A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion that can make surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer surface extending toward the front side along the left and right edges and lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension part 6526.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape from front to back, has a curved shape in which the left and right walls are narrowed inward, and has a front and back side with the LED disposed in the first lighting section 6574. A rear contour portion 6521a formed from overlapping contours, a plurality of light-receiving protrusions 6521b protruding from the rear contour portion 6521a toward the rear side at positions facing the LEDs, and an area surrounded by the rear contour portion 6521a. A blocking part 6521c that blocks the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light passing holes 6521d formed in the blocking part 6521c at positions facing the LED, and at least the left and right width of the upper wall and the interval between the left and right walls are toward the front side. It mainly includes a main body cylindrical portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by reducing the distance between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination portion can be attached to the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partitioning member 6560. Light can be input from 6574 LEDs. This makes it easier to cause total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recessed box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the rear box-shaped section 6558b, which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, and then passes through the air until the box-shaped light receiving section 6558b is recessed. 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are made to emit light. Therefore, compared to the light irradiated from the first illumination section 6574, the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 has a lower light intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light. can.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving part 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped part 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed in stages.

The frame-like extending portion 6521f is formed from a similar shape to the rear outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is smaller than that of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the relationship through the main body cylindrical portion 6521e. and become larger.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area in which the LEDs are arranged in the first illumination section 6574, the light illuminates a large area and can be visually recognized by the player.

The extending tip of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is shaped such that each location is spaced approximately the same distance from the bottom back side (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extending end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed. Thereby, the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light-emitting manner.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are large enough to allow insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a planar back side, and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support a fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-back direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted through the bottom. A pair of terminal fastening parts 6523a to which the part 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape part 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (a decorative shape consisting of a protrusion with a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape part 6523b. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shaped portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. This allows the player viewing the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front to see it as if it were surface-emitting light, thereby improving the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 when viewed from the front.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not diffusely reflected. It can be passed to the side. Thereby, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear end having the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and has a concave shape large enough to guide the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The abutting plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are large enough to allow insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The outer frame extension part 6526 is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the flange part 6522 so as to be able to accommodate the flange part 6522, and its extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange part 6522 and the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or longer than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-like portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)), so that the optical transmission unit 6520 The assembly state of the can be maintained stably. Furthermore, the circular screw part of the fastening part 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 is inserted through the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening part 6523a in this order and fastened and fixed, so that the optical transmission unit The assembled state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end face of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical part 6521e and travels forward, and the light enters the front side end of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f. The cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated with the emitted light. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is set short, the player who sees the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can see the light in a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). It can be visually recognized in a light-emitting manner that lights up along the outline line shape. This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emission effect can be performed. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured laterally symmetrically, illustration of the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. 261(d) is a right view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. , FIG. 262(d) is a right view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. Note that in FIG. 262(e), illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the bottom part are inclined so that the left and right widths and the top and bottom widths gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the cutting direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the cutting direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when moving the resin mold on the back side in the drawing direction (backward), but the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a formed on the rear side If it were to have a similar slope, it would interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the back side, so the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-slanted surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when moving the resin mold on the front side in the drawing direction (forward); If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it will interfere with the resin mold when it is moved, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed as a surface along the front-rear direction (a non-inclined surface). (See Figure 263).

Here, in this embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold to be drawn forward and the rear-side resin mold to be drawn to the rear is constituted by the closing part 6521c and the flange part 6522, and one of the front and rear sides has the above-mentioned slope. In the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, the length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction is compared to the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress changes in plate thickness due to changes in the front and rear positions, so that light passing through the thick inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress changes in the forward and backward positions of the movement mode. Therefore, when light is incident inside the wall thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, it becomes easy to repeat the total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Since leakage of light can be suppressed, the player viewing the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from the front can see sufficient light.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when assembling the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 249 and 250), compared to the case where the vertical widths are the same in the front-rear direction, the fastening portion is formed in the guide recessed portion 6524a. 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 263 shows a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the audio device 6610 are arranged in an assembled position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed with a dimension that creates a slight gap when inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and its tip is connected to the opposing plate. It can be inserted up to the 6561 surface position. Thereby, the distance between the first illumination section 6574 and the light receiving protrusion 6521b can be set without being influenced by the thickness of the opposing plate section 6561.

The light-receiving protrusion 6521b is formed into a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the transversal direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be approximately equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination section 6574 disposed opposite to each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, only the light (light at a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling approximately straight from the first illumination part 6574 toward the front side is allowed to enter, and the other light is not allowed to enter. It can be prevented.

The light incident in this way tends to travel toward the front side through the thick interior of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle between the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the direction of the light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the light from weakening before reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

The lengthwise dimension of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the widthwise dimension. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, compared to the case described in the thickness direction of the surface, light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 and having a larger angle from the optical axis. The light can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear contour portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b does not come into contact with the opposing plate portion 6561, but is arranged with a slight interval therebetween. As a result, out of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, the light that enters from the end surface of the rear outer shape section 6521a (light that has a large angle between the optical axis and the direction of travel of the light) is reflected and directed toward the player. It is possible to avoid being seen.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to see only the light that passes through the light-receiving protrusion 6521b and continues within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and to cut out the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder part 6521e.

Light emitted from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 that is not disposed opposite the light receiving protrusion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 260). The light passes through and is irradiated onto a cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are brought into contact with each other from the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light passing through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. 264(a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) is a schematic front view illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that in the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases as it goes toward the front side, the transparent cylindrical member 6521 passes through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (by total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting sections 6574a on the left and right sides) is visually recognized in a shape that looks like an enlarged shape (approximately gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting sections 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, the arrangement of the edge light emitting section 6574a is also supported when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front. The position where the light is displayed emits strong light (lights up like a point light source).

Here, as for the distance between the light sources, the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so if the distance is as it is, the light will be converted into a point. However, the lighting effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the visually recognized strong light emitting units is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so it is necessary to increase the number of LEDs actually arranged. It is difficult to solve this problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting section 6574a is allowed to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light seen at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be made visible when viewed from the front of the optical transmission unit 6520 even in areas where the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs) (the imaginary line in FIG. 264(b) reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the situation in which light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first lighting section 6574 are arranged at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylindrical section 6521e (see FIG. 262(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, so that the light travels below the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f. They overlap in the center left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), even though no LED is arranged at the left and right center of the lower end of the first lighting section 6574, as shown in FIG. 264(b), the optical transmission unit 6520 is When it is inserted, a line of light can be seen at the center of the lower left and right sides.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased while reducing the space in which the first illumination unit 6574 is arranged. It is possible to weaken the visibility and make a clear line-shaped light visible.

Note that when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the thick transparent cylindrical member 6521 is difficult to see. It is said to be difficult to determine where the two intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the lights intersect is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission performance from deteriorating.

Moreover, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was placed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting part 6574a. In other words, it is possible to create the illusion that there are more LED light sources than the actual number of LEDs, so even a small number of LEDs can emit as much light as a large number of LEDs. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance.

The light emitted from the surface light emitting parts 6574b (the four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first illumination part 6574) arranged inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 when viewed from the front is emitted from the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Proceed radially along the line.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting section 6574b is visually recognized as planar light that spreads out as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light emitting section 6574b when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the light is diffusely reflected by being irradiated onto the jagged decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, not only the area where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting part 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f in front view) can be made to shine brightly.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-shaped light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with the diffusely reflected light, it is possible to avoid the boundary from becoming dark. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as changes in the visually recognized impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting situation such as brightness or darkness, or it may be a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

As described above, the partition units 6540 that are visible from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 have a curved shape that swells toward the front when viewed from the front and from the side. Therefore, the light that is visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 left and right and up and down (a direction in which it is diffused with respect to a point on the back side).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving members 6558 disposed on the lower left and right sides of the partitioning unit 6540 have their front edges positioned closer to the back side as they go further left and right, and because of the attitude in which they are attached, the light passing through the light receiving members 6558 is , moves away from the cup-shaped member 6523 horizontally and vertically (in a direction of diffusion with respect to a point on the back side).

This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the light gets larger as it gets closer to the player, compared to the case where the light only travels in the front and back direction, and the light production effect can be improved. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700.

In addition, in FIG. 265, illustration of the upper presentation device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and a direction view from the diagonally right front in a state where the horizontal presentation device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a is shown. , FIG. 266 shows a direction view of the horizontal presentation device 6700 from diagonally forward to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a presentation device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape into half in side view. It is formed from the shape.

Note that the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configurations are the same. Therefore, the right horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail, and the left side horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail. Explanation will be omitted.

In order to visually recognize the front and rear stacking relationship at the upper end portion of FIG. It is configured in such a manner that units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

The connection between the base member 6710 and the metal main body portion 10014a will be explained. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted through the through hole of the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

Note that among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700, there are no constituent members that are fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, except for the base member 6710.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where it is flush with the back end of the base member 6710) has been formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed close to and facing the glass unit 16 in the front and back, as shown in the left unit in FIG. 265 .

With this arrangement, it is easy to create an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be seen as one unit. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700. 267 and 268 illustrate a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710. Covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to base member 6710 in an overlapping manner.

That is, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. The game mainly includes a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710, and a light receiving side unit composed of cover units 6730 to 6760, which receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit and make it visible to the player. . First, the light emitting side unit will be explained.

269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720, FIG. 269(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a right side view of the base member 6710. 269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a top view of the base member 6710. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 taken along the line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf.

As shown in FIGS. 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710 includes a flat support plate portion 6711 disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720 and arranged on the back side of the illumination board 6720, and A frame-shaped protrusion 6712 that protrudes toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape that follows the outer shape of the decorative board 6720, and a positioning protrusion that protrudes from the frame-shaped protrusion 6712 toward the front side. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 formed outside the illumination board 6720 and close to the illumination board 6720 in front view so that fastening screws can be inserted thereinto, and two insertion holes 6736 at the top and bottom of the board 6713. A pair of fastening parts 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a part of the support plate part 6711 (stepped part of the outer frame plate part 6717) on the right side of the frame-like protruding part 6712 (surrounding the gaming area). A plurality of alignment holes 6716 are formed as elongated holes vertically in the area (on the opposite side of the window part and the opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a stepped plate shape is formed from the right edge of the support plate part 6711 to the back side. It mainly includes an outer frame plate part 6717 extending from the left edge of the support plate part 6711 to the rear side in a plate shape.

The protruding tip of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is disposed to face the back surface of the illumination board 6720 near the outer shape thereof, and is in surface contact with the illumination board 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the back side of the illumination board 6720 except for the vicinity of the external portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illumination board 6720.

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the illumination board 6720 is Since the temperature can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the illumination board 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

The positioning protrusion 6713 is a part for aligning the illumination board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into positioning holes 6722 formed at two locations on the illumination board 6720. That is, positioning holes 6722 are bored in the illumination board 6720 at positions corresponding to the positioning protrusions 6713 based on the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269(a)). will be established.

The insertion hole 6714 has a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portions 6744 of the flat plate members 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). This is a through hole formed to be able to be matched and into which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light-receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two fastening portions 6715, upper and lower.

The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the protruding portions 6743, 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 have a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged to face each other on the left and right sides, and are formed into a substantially cup shape that opens on the back side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side part (edge-like part).

Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located in a portion (external portion) that can be touched by the player, and is located in a portion (outer portion) that can be touched by the player, and is (loads generated by this process). As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the thin-walled rear side end, when a load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction), deformation occurs. There is a possibility that the positional displacement with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing locations (fastening locations) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a risk that the number of assembly steps will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the protrusions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, since the inner surface (left side) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is placed close to and opposite to the outer surface (right side) of the frame-shaped protrusion 6712, the flat plate member 6740 is viewed from the player's left side. Even if a load is applied in this direction, the flat plate member 6740 contacts the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 with its surface, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the covering units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, the durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly steps. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can distribute the load by being provided with a concavo-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concave-convex shape is formed in the range of contact with the frame-shaped protrusion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

The outer frame plate part 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body part 10014a and is in surface contact with it, and covers the right side of the metal main body part 10014a. This can prevent the metal main body portion 10014a from being visible to the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed from some of the alignment holes 6716 along the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed with a size that fits with the protrusion 6743 or is arranged opposite to the protrusion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the protruding part 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area in which the protruding part 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), so that the flat plate member 6740 can be prevented from being misaligned with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is disposed opposite to the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a planar shape facing the gaming area side (inside).

The illumination board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 bored at two places in the main body plate portion 6721, and arbitrary holes in the main body plate portion 6721. It mainly includes a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted in a pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held on the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, by inserting the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) into the positioning hole 6722, movement in the left, right, up, and down directions is restricted, and forward and backward movement is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 280). (see), movement is restricted by being caught between them.

Although a similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, the relationship between the LED chip D1 and the area shown by imaginary lines in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge emitting part D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269(a), and a surface emitting part D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare for the Lord. The difference between these light emitting parts D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting part D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting part D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) disposed on the front side of the illumination board 6720 will be explained. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the exploded view of FIGS. 270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a light-transmitting resin inside and allow light to pass therethrough. The light receiving member 6730 is provided with a light receiving member 6730 that can be refracted and covers the illumination board 6720 from the front side, and is configured to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730 with other constituent members.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, 273(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272(a), and FIG. 273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272(b). be.

274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274(b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. be.

Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side, FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272(b), covering units 6730 to 6760 are shown together for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a light-receiving surface portion 6731 that is formed in a flat plate shape with the same outer shape as the illumination board 6720 and is disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720. An inner extending portion 6732 extending toward the back side so as to be bent from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state an outer extending portion 6733 that is bent from the right side edge in FIG. 274 and extends toward the back side; The long rib 6734 (5 locations) is extended in the shape of a long fin from the front of the position where the base end of the long rib 6734 (the side to be combined with the light receiving surface section 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface section 6731 match. A plurality of fins 6735 (five in this embodiment), a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) are inserted; It mainly includes a fitting part 6737 formed of a shape that can fit with the decorative protruding part 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed of elongated protrusions aligned along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters centered at a location facing the surface light emitting part D1b (see enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer circumferential surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light-emitting section D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731). (see FIG. 275(b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). (see FIG. 275(b)).

Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface emitting part D1b is refracted near the axis of the long protrusion, and after traveling toward the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b is further emitted from the large diameter side away from the axis of the long protrusion. By refracting at a certain point and proceeding toward the front side, a wide range of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 can be emitted.

Further, on the front side of the light-receiving surface section 6731, basic shapes that are triangular in front view and bulge toward the front side at the approximate center are formed in a manner that is regularly and densely arranged. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a makes it possible to vary the strength of the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be varied in stages). That is, since the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a causes light to be collected at the center of the recessed portion, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong light emitting manner compared to other parts.

The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending ends thereof come into contact with the illumination board 6720 at the front and rear, and the extending ends of the inner extending portion 6732 extend over the entire upper and lower sides. While it comes into contact with the illumination board 6720, a part of the extending end of the outer extending portion 6733 does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 has a spaced-apart end portion 6733a whose extension length is formed to be as short as the thickness of the illumination board 6720, so that it does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720 but separates from it. In this embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the area between the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat from being trapped.

In addition, when the inner extension portion 6732 comes into contact with the illumination board 6720 over the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension portion 6732. Therefore, the thicker the inner extension portion 6732 is, the more limited the area in which the LED chip D1 is placed is.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illumination board 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. can be placed in Therefore, while ensuring a sufficient plate thickness of the outer extending portion 6733, it is possible to secure the maximum area for disposing the LED chip D1.

The left and right walls of the outer extending portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left wall of the inner extending portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is densely packed with protrusions having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed in such a manner that the concave-convex shape is aligned. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 emits light from a surface (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to see uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 toward the front side passes through the inner extension portion 6732, and the intensity of the light changes from region to region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, light D1m is visible, which is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a and traveling along the long rib 6734, and the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is larger than the light D1p. is also visible as a strong light (the intensity of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each region arranged vertically. Note that the difference in the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the color of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 can be changed in the upper and lower directions. It can be visually recognized by changing the area for each area lined up.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) when the horizontal direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering at the front and back. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are formed in a substantially linear shape when viewed from the back, and a V-shaped rib 6734b that is bent and formed into a substantially V-shape when viewed from the back.

The side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are formed as smooth surfaces. That is, unlike the case where a line-like jagged process is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when light reaches the side surface of the long rib 6734 and passes through it, it does not spread (no surface emission), but only in one direction. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 from emitting light uniformly, so that when the horizontal direction device 6700 is viewed from the left and right, the light emitted from the edge light emitting section D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting section It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light irradiated from D1b is mixed with the visible light.

That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed as a part that is long vertically and can be seen in the left and right directions, the light passing through the long rib 6734 is suppressed from reaching the player's eyes in a surface emitting manner. Therefore, it is possible for a player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right to easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two pairs on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner that they extend in a direction that is inclined toward the vertical center position as they move toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, while the right end portion 6734a2 is spaced apart from the outer extending portion 6733.

Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension 6732, while light passing through the right end 6734a2 can enter the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened, while light emission through the left side end 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a is suppressed. The light that enters the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 is easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, near the left end 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge emitting section D1a is visible, and at a position away from the left end 6734a1 (position between), the light emitted from the surface emitting section D1b is visible. Since the light can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to allow the player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the vertical center position and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both end portions 6734b2 are spaced apart from the outer extending portion 6733. Note that the reason why the bending position and the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged opposite to the bending position.

That is, by shifting the position that receives the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a from the intermediate connecting part 6734b1, the light (main light) emitted linearly from the edge emitting part D1a in the front-rear direction is shifted to the connecting position. Since the incident can be suppressed, the loss of the light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can pass through the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 and directly enter the inner extending part 6732, while the light passing through both end parts 6734b2 can enter the outer extending part 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 can be easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, near the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge emitting portion D1a is visible, and at a position away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (a position in between), the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized. Since the light can be visually recognized by color and brightness, it is possible to allow the player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The fins 6735 are formed so that the thickness decreases from the extended base end toward the distal end side, and include a curved tip fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and a bent tip fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , is mainly provided.

The curved tip fin 6735a has upper and lower inner edges curved, and triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches are densely formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014), thereby forming a light diffusion section. , the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an extending tip that is inclined toward the back side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and has an inclined surface that intersects at the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the inner surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that their extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the curved tip fin 6735a, since the end on the left side is coupled to the light receiving surface section 6731, a large amount of light (main ) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extension portion 6732 side (back side, root side), making it easier to brighten the left side of the light receiving member 6730.

In addition, the elongated rib 6734 and the inner extension portion 6732 are coupled behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, so that light passing inside the elongated rib 6734 can also cause the inner extension. The installation part 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the curved tip fin 6735a joins the light receiving surface portion 6731, light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and light passing through the curved tip fin 6735a can be combined to produce a light emission effect. , it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the formation of the left and right sides of the fins 6735, the manner in which light passes through the sides can be changed. In other words, due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, the light passing through the left side can be seen as uniform light, while the surface emitting effect does not affect the light passing through the right side. The light can be visually recognized as local light. Further, it goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed when the horizontal presentation device 6700 is assembled (FIG. 266), and only two holes are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, if the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is shifted (for example, due to vibration caused by the player's operation or vibration accompanying opening and closing of the front frame 10014), Since the maintenance work to return the horizontal presentation device 6700 to the position shown in FIG.

The fitting part 6737 has an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side and is recessed in the left-right direction, and is used to align and align the light-receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light-receiving member 6730. This is a portion that is formed by fitting, and further includes a single recessed portion 6737a.

In this way, in this embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged while limiting (reducing) the location of the recess 6737a (the location where the fastening portion 6753 is provided) on the inner extension portion 6732 side to one location. , attempts to suppress misalignment and misalignment with constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. This will be explained in detail below.

Here, in the case of fastening and fixing the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal presentation device 6700, since the fastening screws do not transmit light, the more fastening points there are, the more likely shadows will occur. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is formed to be large, the light will be divided at the fastening location, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect will be reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force will be reduced, and there is a possibility that the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be deformed from the base due to the load applied by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the supporting force is maintained by fitting the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a (see FIG. 276) while limiting the fastening location to the recess 6737a. ing.

As a result, the fastening point of the horizontal presentation device 6700 on the side of the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. It is possible to improve the durability of the lateral direction device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points (fastening points).

Further, in this embodiment, the recess 6737a is formed so that light can travel toward the back side. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 275.

FIG. 275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal direction device 6700 taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is disposed on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b that is disposed facing the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recessed portion 6737a. The main body curved portion 6751 is formed to allow light to travel to the back side of the main body curved portion 6751. That is, the illumination board 6720 is formed so that light can travel toward the back side (opposite side of the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening part 6753 is a part where the fastening screw is fastened, and since the fastening screw is likely to be in the shadow, it is considered unsuitable for light-emitting production. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screws up and down, thereby allowing the player to see the light while suppressing the influence of shadows created by the fastening screws. That is, by transmitting light from both sides above and below the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw that is visible to the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is illustrated in an enlarged manner. Of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface part 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed part 6731a. The light is then further refracted and focused. Thereby, the intensity of light emitted visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be increased.

In this way, the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface section 6731 is such that the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed part 6731a becomes longer, centered around the decorative recessed part 6731a where the intensity of light increases by condensing light. It is said to be a mode in which it becomes lower.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed part 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting section D1b is viewed individually. Compared to the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface section 6731, the intensity of the visible light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is emitted from a higher intensity light (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually lowered to a level lower than that of the light seen directly, and the player can visually recognize the light having different intensities through the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open back side is disposed on the front side of the light receiving member 6730. The flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be explained.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and joined together by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an elliptical shape. A mating plate part 6742, which is a flat plate part disposed on a plane parallel to the left side of the plane and connected to the front side edge of the main body plate part 6741 with a step, and a rear side end of the main body plate part 6741. a plurality of protrusions 6743 protruding toward the back side from the main body; a plurality of fastening parts 6744 arranged at positions apart from the protrusions 6743 into which fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side; The plate portion 6741 mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6745 formed in a size that allows fastening screws to be inserted therethrough.

The main body plate portion 6741 is recessed leftward from the left surface, and has a decorative shape that protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recessed surface. , coincides with the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

The unevenness forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper toward the left, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflecting plate. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the part that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that external force can be applied. This can prevent it from cracking or chipping. Furthermore, contact friction when the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760 is slid to be attached to the base member 6710 can be reduced.

Therefore, after the horizontal production device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 may be damaged if a shock is applied from a player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. By making it difficult, not only can durability be improved, but also the assembly of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be facilitated.

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side and a front-rear direction groove portion 6742a bored in the step between the main body plate portion 6741 in the direction along the groove portions 6742a. A hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the longitudinal hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, but details will be described later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. This is the part that is fastened and fixed by the fastening screw that passes through it.

Further, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 when viewed from the front. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is disposed so as to fit into the recesses of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269(a) and 274(b)), so that the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member relative to the flat plate member 6740 The positional shift of 6730 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws that are screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four locations above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, even if the number of fastening parts 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small, the fixing force will not be insufficient. This can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell to the left toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is colorless and transparent and transmits light. A main body curved part 6751 formed from a plastic resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface, and a curved plate part disposed parallel to the right side from the main body curved part 6751 on the front side of the main body curved part 6751. A mating plate portion 6752 connected with a step on the edge and disposed opposite the mating plate portion 6742, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 into which fastening screws can be screwed from the back side, and corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into them at positions where the fastening screws can be inserted; and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 formed at the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction; It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6756 formed at the front edge of the mating plate portion 6752 so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough in the front-rear direction.

The main body curved portion 6751 includes a decorative protrusion 6751a that has a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side and protrudes to the right from the right side in a region including the vertically central fastening portion 6753, and the decorative protrusion 6751a. A front-rear hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion of the main body, a flat division part 6751c dividing the striped shape by a flat surface, and a central flat part 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protrusion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits into the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the longitudinal hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

Thereby, the decorative protruding portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both the function of a decorative portion and the function of a portion for positioning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, even in a configuration in which the fastening portion 6753 is disposed at only one (few) location in the upper and lower center portions as in this embodiment, it is possible to suppress the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat section 6751c, so it can be viewed as a clear light. can be done.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the curved tip fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by a plurality of striped portions defined by the flat section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set to surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the bent tip fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat part 6751d, so it can be viewed as a clear light. can be done.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bent fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set as surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Similar to the mating plate part 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the mating plate part 6752 has a plurality of groove parts 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side, and a step between the main body curved part 6751. A front-rear hole 6752b is formed in the direction along the groove 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the longitudinal hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, but the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is disposed at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in such a manner that it enters the recess of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 269). a) and FIG. 274(b)), it is possible to suppress misalignment of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left and right direction.

On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, when the number of fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening parts 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so the number of places where light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced, and as a result, the light emitting effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a that guide the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. (See Figure 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a are formed such that inner surfaces having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 are arranged opposite to the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). be done. As a result, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal direction device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from moving inadvertently. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide walls 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 which is a flat plate portion shaped to cover the mating plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a main body plate portion 6761 which is bent at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 to cover the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate part 6762 which is a curved plate part shaped to cover the fitting plate part 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate part 6762 that extends to the left rear of the curved plate part 6762 from two positions spaced apart by approximately the same distance vertically from the vertical center position. A connecting extension part 6763 connected at the end, and a plurality of fastening screws arranged on the back surface of the curved plate part 6762 and formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 can be screwed into them. A fastening portion 6764 and a proximal fastening portion that is formed so that a fastening screw, which is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted into the insertion hole 6714 near the upper end of the base member 6710, can be screwed therein. 6765 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of protruding portions 6766 that protrude from the back side end of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is provided in a rib shape that extends toward the left along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from shifting to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and is provided in a rib shape extending toward the right along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a are provided.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a extending rightward in a rib shape extending along a straight line in the longitudinal direction at a position corresponding to the longitudinal hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion that can restrict leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 when the lateral direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 from side to side. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the longitudinal holes 6751b, 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide walls 6755a, 6756a restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right. 6750's movement to the left is restricted. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The proximal fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710 can be screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765. is formed. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765, and the proximal fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the protruding portion 6766 and the proximal end fastening portion 6765 are connected to the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760, which is disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. Misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272(b), and FIG. 280(b) is the CCLXXXb in FIG. 272(b). 280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXXb, and FIG. 6730 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280(a), the longitudinal distance between the elongated rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light irradiated from the edge light emitting part D1a can be made to enter the long rib 6734 without omission, and can be totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281), making it easier to proceed toward the front side. .

In addition, in locations where the elongated ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-back distance between the surface light-emitting portion D1b and the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be greater than or equal to the longitudinal width (shape growth) of the elongated ribs 6734. Therefore, the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be increased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b are divided. It is possible to distinguish the light from the other light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as a clear line-shaped light that is totally reflected inside the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735, or can travel through the long ribs 6734. On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b is seen as a light that brightens a small scale area, but the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b becomes uniform light (pale light) through the light receiving surface part 6731 and the light refracting surface part of the inner extension part 6732. ) is visible.

As a result, compared to the conventional method in which a lens for condensing light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination board 6720 and a dazzling light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment According to the invention, it is possible to make visible light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the illumination board 6720 while making dazzling light (line-like light) visible in a small area. These different lights can easily be controlled to make only one or both visible. Therefore, the degree of freedom in light effects can be improved.

Therefore, for example, even if the same LED chip is used for the edge emitting part D1a and the surface emitting part D1b, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b will be different. By varying the color tone and brightness of the lights, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with a rich gradation (a luminescent effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surfaces of the fins 6735 in the plate thickness direction are such that the right side (outer side of the front frame 10014) is flush with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side (the outer side of the front frame 10014) (inner surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal line of the left side surface does not point directly sideways (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-back direction), but a direction that has a component pointing toward the front side. facing. Thereby, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only directly to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), the elongated rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, so the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the elongated rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. It can be proceeded with. The progression of this light will be explained using a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of a base member 6710, an illumination board 6720, and a light receiving member 6730, schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED becomes smaller as the angle between the surface of the illumination board 6720 and the axis X23 perpendicular to it becomes larger, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the direction in which the light travels, so it will be explained in order below.

Arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end of the long rib 6734, travels through total reflection inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. . The light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even if the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to easily make light of sufficient brightness visible to the player.

Arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (inner side of front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed into a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

The arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. This light is not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734, and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, so it can be seen brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

Arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the joining position of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the length of the fin 6735 in the thickness direction becomes shorter as it goes toward the front side compared to the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014) has Since the jagged recessed portion is formed, the elongated rib 6734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-back direction in the same way, it is not possible to enter the fins 6735 at all of the joining positions between the long ribs 6734 and the light-receiving surface portion 6731, but some (especially the long ribs) In the region (near the left side surface of the fin 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, the light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of arrow L23d includes light that travels toward the back side of the illumination board 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6720 equipped with the LED chip D1 on the front side that emits light to the front side can cause the back side portion of the illumination board 6720 to emit light (at least The light can be allowed to travel to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the back end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed into a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in rear view (see FIG. 276). Thereby, the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a vertically uniform manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect by combining the light emitted toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device disposed on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Note that according to this embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, when the light is incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, but the light indicated by the arrow L23 is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c. When the light is reflected by the light-receiving surface portion 6731, an energy loss corresponding to that of the transmitted light occurs, so when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having approximately the same brightness. In this way, differences in light brightness depending on the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extension portion 6732 can be easily made uniform across the front and rear.

Here, in this embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 disposed on the left side is formed in a shape that is almost bilaterally symmetrical (or similar shape) to the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 on the right side. As a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long ribs 6734 (protrusion on the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is to ensure visibility for players. That is, although it is desired to maintain the presentation effect caused by the light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, the intention is to suppress the light traveling toward the gaming area due to the light traveling to the long ribs 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area, where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the horizontal presentation device 6700 inward (towards the game area) is reduced. The aim is to Thereby, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, making it difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shooting of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the playing area, balls fired right-handed (the strongest firing strength) tend to flow down, and there is little need for players to visually check the ball in order to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls will flow down a narrow area in a short period of time, by shining light on that area and reflecting it on the game balls, the effect of the production using light can be improved. can be easily improved. Therefore, there is no need to weaken the intensity of light on the right side of the gaming area, and as in this embodiment, by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal presentation device 6700 to the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265). , it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Arrow L23e indicates light that is emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is irradiated in a direction with a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732, 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the elongated rib 6734 is very close to the edge emitting portion D1a. Since the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very low to begin with, it can be constructed as a light that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing the light presentation effect from deteriorating.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be explained. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to a recess 6737a formed inside the fitting part 6737 at the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to what was described above with respect to arrows L23c and L23d, a portion of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both walls of the recessed portion 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw is not exposed to light near the recess 6737a. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of the light emitting display may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient positioning (preventing misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting part 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 can be properly aligned. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing positional deviation, and it is possible to reduce the number of locations where the effect of light emitting performance is degraded.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is provided near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. This prevents the area from becoming too dark. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the production effect of the light emission production.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board 6570 is disposed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 on the upper part of the front frame 10014, but in the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, the By arranging the effect device 18800 having the illumination board 18830 below, it is possible to perform the light emitting effect also at the lower part of the front frame 18014. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 differs from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with a production device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and the other configurations are the same, so the production Only the device 18800 will be described, and descriptions of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the presentation device 18800 is a device for producing light emission in which the back side and the top surface side of the front side of the lower tray unit 6400 are connected to the covering base member 6410, It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This presentation device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting presentation changes depending on whether or not the user participates in the operation presentation using the operating device 10300 due to a structural contrivance. Next, the internal structure of the presentation device 18800 will be explained in order to explain the structural improvements.

284(a) is a sectional view of the production device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284(b) is a sectional view of the illumination board 18830 of the production device 18800 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. Note that FIG. 284(b) schematically shows how the illumination board 18830 is supported.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the presentation device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap between a combined base member 18810 connected to the lower plate unit 6400 and the front side of the combined base member 18810. An intermediate fixed member 18820 that is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the combined base member 18810, an illuminated board 18830 arranged in a gap between the combined base member 18810 and the intermediate fixed member 18820, and the illuminated board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 is formed to allow light emitted from the LED chip D1 to travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18850 is attached to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. The main preparation is as follows.

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the illumination board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface corresponds to the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 215) when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in the upward position and in the pre-operation posture. It is formed at an angle of inclination that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged parallel to the front wall surface of the joint base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illumination board 18830. The illumination board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 formed in an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length of the elongated hole 18831 in the vertical direction and the diameter of the fixing part 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) in which the illumination board 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the illumination board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the vertices of a pentagon) and emit light in the normal direction of the surface of the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (from the player's line of sight). It is possible to prevent the effect of the light production from deteriorating even if the direction is away from the light production.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and includes a plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be able to close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. It mainly includes a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 extending from one side to the other.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is formed into a container shape with an open front side, and has a plurality of fixing parts that protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the joint base member 18810 and are fastened and fixed to the joint base member 18810. 18821, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 bored at a position and size capable of receiving an extension plate part 18842 at the bottom of the rear side.

In this embodiment, since the direction in which the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is cut out is set in the left-right direction, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of a pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged on the left and right at the middle position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate part 18842. Thereby, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate portions each having a different width. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed in shapes with different widths at three upper and lower locations.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extending plate portion 18842 begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, but is formed into a curved plate shape that is gently curved. The radius of curvature can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the radius of curvature is set to such an extent that total reflection of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illumination board 18830 continues until it reaches the plate-like portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. Thereby, the light incident on the extending tip (end on the back side) of the extending plate portion 18842 can be made easier to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light production is desired, and can be implemented in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or it may be a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions for light passage.

Note that, as described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and may have a similar shape with a slightly different size. Considering the propagation mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the arrangement of the LED chip D1 when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851. Therefore, in this embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the root of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 when viewed from the front.

The operation of the production device 18800 will be explained. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed, within the permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is This coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

That is, when the operating device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the illumination board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 shifts, making it difficult for light emitted from the LED chip D1 to enter the extended plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extension plate portion 18842, so the through hole 18851 appears dark. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not. On the other hand, in the operating device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operating member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 on the illumination board 18830 is suppressed, and the illumination board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illumination board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the back side end of the extension plate 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate 18842, and then undergoes total reflection. It is formed so that it can move toward the front side.

That is, even when the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is dark and visible) while light is being emitted from the LED chip D1, pressing the swinging operating member 10310 , it becomes possible to make the through hole 18851 brightly visible.

Therefore, when a vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visible darkly, it is possible to determine whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swinging operation member 10310. I can do it. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light when a jackpot occurs or when a game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light.

As a result, the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, so when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's desire to participate can be increased, and the player's desire to actually operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. The user can be induced to operate the swinging operation member 10310.

Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is disposed outside the covered foundation member 6410, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illumination board 18830 may be disposed in such a manner that it penetrates the covering base member 6410 and enters the inside thereof, so that it can come into contact with the operating device 10300.

In this case, the vibration of the operating device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only due to the vibration but also due to the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which a push instruction as a notification effect is generated. If the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp from the front whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, the player can easily miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation on the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may fail early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily many times, causing noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operating device 10300 are formed so as to be divisible left and right, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so as to be divisible back and forth. There is. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 19322 are arranged to surround the swinging operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). Note that the main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 are substantially the same shape as the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and will mainly be described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed to be divisible at a dividing plane that coincides with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 is configured to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swinging operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to vibration impact can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction of vibration Y17a of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening direction is perpendicular to the fastening direction in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to an impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view, and the plate thickness is approximately constant in the inclined portion. The protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in this embodiment are formed with a slight inclination in the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the slopes of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. It is set closer to the top and bottom.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) ( (base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like part 6426b of the plate-like support part 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 comes into contact with the base end (the upper surface of the main body part 6411) of the recessed shape part 16414 and is supported, and the main body part Since a sufficient support thickness in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the main body 6411 can be ensured, deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during operation of the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the slopes of the left and right end portions are changed compared to the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be ensured.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 to be inclined in an inverted V-shape in cross section, the direction in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 deform when receiving an external force is directed toward the left and right center. It can be made easier to direct. As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be lowered compared to a case where the shape can be deformed in both left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 can be damaged at an early stage. This can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 is not required, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment is configured to vibrate due to electrical conduction. The device 21500 is provided, and it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. Note that in FIG. 287, illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and are illustrated as viewed from the back side. .

Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening points is illustrated as an imaginary line, and furthermore, the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The arrangement relationship with respect to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De, which is a redesigned version of the above-described bottom member De, is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operating device 10300. In addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, the bottom member 21De includes a projecting portion De3 extending to the right side.

The projecting portion De3 has both the function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and the function of regulating the displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhang De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The overhang De3 is formed so that the back side thereof is inclined so that the width becomes narrow toward the overhang end, while the front side forms a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gap between the rear surface side of the overhang portion De3 and the metal main body portion 10014a while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang portion De3.

This gap is used to connect the electrical wiring 21513 of the length required when removing the lower pan unit 21400 during maintenance (wire with a length to fill the length of the distance of the lower pan unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a). It is effectively used as an area to be left loose when not being removed (when fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a). This makes it possible to suppress the load that the electrical wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings to be smaller than when the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a cramped manner when the lower pan unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is fitted and supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower tray unit 21400 are overlapped from front to back, but the entire left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 is overlapped. A fastening portion is not formed, and the connection with the lower plate unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively movable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction compared to the case where the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Accordingly, displacement of the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted only from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibrations transmitted to the player who grips the operating handle 51 is not set as a route via the operating handle 51, but is instead a lower tray unit that is in contact with the finger or arm of the player who grips the operating handle 51. The route can be limited to the right side of 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, portions corresponding to the fixing locations of the covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 are shown in correspondence with imaginary lines.

In addition to the structure of the above-mentioned covering foundation member 6410, the covering foundation member 21410 has a plurality of fastening screws (in this embodiment, a pair) formed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411. ) is provided with a fastening portion 21415. Fastening screws that are inserted into insertion portions 21535 that are arranged as a pair of upper and lower parts on the right side of the vibration device 21500 are screwed into the fastening portion 21415 . That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 21410.

In addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, the lower plate forming member 21420 includes a support hole 21428 bored in the front-rear direction in a plate-shaped portion extending upward from the upper surface of the front longitudinal portion 6426c. A fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500, is inserted into the support hole 21428.

In addition to the configuration of the above-mentioned V-shaped design member 6450, the V-shaped design member 21450 is provided in a pillar-like manner to protrude toward the back side as a substitute for the plate-like protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 227), and allows a fastening screw to be screwed into the V-shaped design member 21450. A fastening portion 21457 is formed, and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a plate shape and connects the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, as described above, in the V-shaped design member 21450, the overhanging fastening parts 6454 disposed at the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a via an intermediate member. Therefore, it is structurally more rigid than the covered foundation member 21410, which is formed into a substantially bag-like shape that opens toward the rear side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a mainly at the rear side edge.

That is, the covering foundation member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end on the back side and the left end, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or there are no fastening positions). Even if there is one, it is limited to a small number), and because it is formed into a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the upper front edge of the covering foundation member 21410, the vertical direction (vertical direction) displacement of the covering foundation member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covered foundation member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which, for example, the lower tray 50 is displaced up and down and the balls stored in the lower tray 50 bounce due to the displacement of the covering foundation member 21410.

According to the present embodiment, the covered foundation member 21410, which is more flexible (has a higher degree of freedom of displacement) than the V-shaped design member 21450, is vibrated using the V-shaped design member 21450 that is rigidly configured as a base (reference). Therefore, the right side of the covered foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibration device 21500.

In addition, transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, so that the operation device 10300 may not vibrate due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 may not vibrate. It is possible to avoid vibration caused by the vibration of the device 21500, and from this fact, it can be said that the right side of the covered foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibrating device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed into a long plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting plate portion 21458 and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be ensured. Stress concentration (during pressing) can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship in which it abuts (is pressed) against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the abutment position between the shell-like projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the size is reduced. The deviation tends to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, making it difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission strength.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations occurring, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (no matter which dimension is within the size limit), the shell is By designing the dimension so that the shell-like protrusion 21541 comes into contact with the connecting plate-like part 21458 (if the interval is short, the shell-like protrusion 21541 is deformed to crush it while making contact), the shell-like protrusion 21541 can be stably formed. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact. Therefore, vibrations can be stably received.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact direction of the shell-like projecting part 21541 and the connecting plate-like part 21458 is set to the front-back direction similarly to the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward due to the operation of the operating device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide with respect to the shell-like projecting portion 21541. This makes it possible to avoid transmission of downward displacement. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration device 21500 from being pushed down due to the operation of the operating device 10300.

In addition, in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is installed at a flexible location of the covered foundation member 21410, so it breaks the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and invades the inside (for example, by inserting a thin metal wire into the pachinko machine A10). This is an area that is easily breached in the event of fraudulent activity (intrusion). That is, in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is disposed at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits a fraudulent act.

Therefore, when the covering foundation member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 is simultaneously destroyed or disconnected, and in this case, the conduction of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 is interrupted. By controlling the audio lamp control device 113 to detect this and output an error signal, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

Further, instead of the vibrating device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided, but in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is intentionally provided, so that if no fraudulent activity has occurred, the device will vibrate. It can be used for performances. That is, since the vibration device 21500 can be used for both vibration production and detection of fraudulent activities (it can be configured as a multi-functional device), the installation space for the device can be reduced.

FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device 21500. As illustrated in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 that can generate vibrations by controlling an eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a soft resin material (such as silicone resin). A covering member 21520 is formed from a material that is harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the back side. The cover member 21530 is provided with a cover member 21530 formed in a shape that allows the cover member 21520 to be covered, and a flat opposing plate member 21540 that is disposed opposite to the cover member 21530 with the cover member 21520 interposed therebetween.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the covering cover 21530 includes a plurality of (in this embodiment, two) insertion holes 21532 into which the threaded portions of fastening screws can be inserted, and the opposing plate member 21540 allows the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 21532 to be screwed therein. A plurality of fastening portions 21542 are provided. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 that are to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. be. FIG. 294 shows a perspective view of the covering member 21520 as viewed diagonally from above and in the front direction.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body part 21511 whose shaft part is rotationally controlled by energization, an eccentric weight 21512 which is fixed to the shaft part and whose center of gravity is arranged at a different position from the shaft part and has a fan-like shape when viewed from above, and a lower surface of the main body part 21511. The electrical wiring 21513 extends downward from the bottom surface (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the bottom surface).

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a protrusion extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body 21521. a pair of protrusions 21522 formed as a cylindrical main body 21521; a plate-like protrusion 21523 that protrudes in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21521; It includes a circular protruding portion 21524 that protrudes downward.

The projecting portion 21524 is formed in an oval shape large enough to surround the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electric wiring 21513 when viewed from below, and is recessed on the upper surface side so as to be able to receive the electric wiring 21513.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the projecting portion 21524 has a recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521, and a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a in the vertical direction. It includes a wiring through hole 21524b to be drilled and a pair of preliminary holes 21524c to be bored in the vertical direction at positions opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b with the recessed portion 21524a in between.

With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 can perform the functions of holding the electrical wiring 21513 while preventing it from sagging due to its own weight, bundling the electrical wiring 21513, and guiding the electrical wiring 21513. Thereby, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

Furthermore, since a gap is created between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is possible to prevent the person performing the assembly work from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. . Therefore, compared to the case where a binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble a member for holding the electric wiring 21513.

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228, and its vibration is controlled by a control signal transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even if the electrical wiring 21513 is about to come out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c and pushing the electrical wiring 21513. can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower pan unit 21400 is formed to be removable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker performing maintenance work accidentally removes the lower pan unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. There is a risk of wire breakage due to excessive load. Further, if an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration, there is also a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511, so that the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511 is excessively Displacement can be prevented.

Furthermore, in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, the length of the electrical wiring 21513 to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from breaking during this length. I can do it (I can give myself some leeway). Furthermore, even if a load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513, the electrical wiring 21513 is not applied in the direction of connection between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body 21511, but in the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed part 21524a (i.e., in the direction of the extension part 21524). Since the load is applied along the longitudinal direction), it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be easily reconnected to the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of maintenance work including the process of removing the lower tray unit 21400.

Note that in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed at the same time as the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the cover member 21530. Note that in the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covered cover member 21530 includes a main body 21531 forming a frame whose front side and bottom are open, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed in the front side of the main body 21531 and receives the vibration motor 21510. , a plurality of protrusions 21534 that protrude inwardly from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extend in the front-rear direction; , a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the covering foundation member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) can be inserted.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is located at the center position in the left-right direction. It includes a bearing receiving recess 21533c that connects the receiving recess 21533b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed with an extra length on the right side compared to the left side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. On the other hand, the protruding portion 21534 has an extra length on the right side compared to the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 is approximately left and right with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. placed in symmetrical positions.

As a result, the covering member 21520 is held by the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), while when the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state (vibrating state) Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be accommodated by the deep recess formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b (the recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged vertically in parallel). Thereby, it is possible to prevent overload from being applied to the covered cover member 21530, and the durability of the covered cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the protruding part 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520, which is supported by contacting the protruding part 21534 from side to side, is due to the effects of engagement with the protruding part 21534 and biting. It tends to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), but is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration where the main body 21511 tends to tilt around the lower end when vibration occurs, such as when the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body 21511, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protrusion portion 21534 is formed in a planar plate shape with a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions at the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the protrusion length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side). Since the covering member 21520 is formed in a manner that follows the outer shape of the member 21520, the covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right and from the back side.

In addition, the protruding portion 21534 includes a deep inclined portion 21534a that rises toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b from the nearest protruding portion 21534 below the intermediate lower surface 21531b that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protruding portion 21534 directly above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the rear inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the protrusion 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced toward the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged partially shifted vertically. This makes it easier to avoid loads being applied to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, compared to when the protrusions 21534 are arranged in completely symmetrical positions. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material for the covering member 21520 that is not fragile.

The formation of the lower half of the rear side wall portion of the main body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, as a manner of holding the covering member 21520, the displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the main body 21531, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the main body 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced toward the back side due to excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is regulated by the upper half of the main body 21531, and the lower half is allowed to be displaced. Both can be deformed so as to proceed (flow) to the open area in the lower half of the main body part 21531, and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibration device 21500, which will be described in detail later.

The right side of the plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from below by the protruding ridge 21534 of the covered cover member 21530. Further, while the left side portion is open to the covered cover member 21530, it is supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). As a result, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open portion that can be accessed from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side, so that the lower surface of the covering member 21520 is supported. The lower left rear part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. This open portion functions as a location that ensures contact between the overhang portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The opposing plate member 21540 is a plate-shaped member that is disposed to face the covered cover member 21530 from the open side of the covered cover member 21530, and includes a shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 that is formed to project toward the front side. It includes the above-mentioned fastening part 21542 and a support extension part 21543 extending from the lower left end toward the back side.

The shell-like projecting portion 21541 is thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the projecting tip and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is Even if a load is applied in the pushing direction (backward direction) and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to avoid transmitting a large load to the covering member 21520.

296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, FIG. 296(b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a), and FIG. 297 is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400. 298 is a rear view of the pan unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a).

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are configured in a dimension relationship such that they abut in the front and rear direction, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state). ), the protruding portion De3 slightly bites into the protruding portion 21522 (the protruding portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibrating device 21500 can be moved toward the front side. This can prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position closer to the back side.

FIG. 299(a) is a partial top view schematically showing the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 299(b) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). 300(a) is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 300(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 3 is a partial schematic side view of the lower plate unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb.

299(a) and 299(b), similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is placed at the front limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated, and FIGS. FIG. 300(b) shows a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state and the vibration device 21500 is placed at the limit position on the rear side of vibration displacement. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. 300. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body portion 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibrations are also directly transmitted.

With reference to FIGS. 299 and 300, the transmission mode of vibration of the vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, in the vibrating device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidities. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to occur in a specific part.

Specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibrations will be suppressed too much, while if it is too soft, the vibrations may be damped too much. is fixed to the hard side member, and the soft side member fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 is vibrated about the fixed position as an axis. Thereby, the portion fixed to other parts of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side), and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is brought into contact with the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the vibration An insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 (soft side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is generated by using the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration), and the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side being displaced (rotationally displaced) in the covered foundation member. 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position close to the player's finger holding the operating handle 51.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced toward the back side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the protruding portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protrusion portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the overhang portion De3, so the vibrating device 21500 has more force to return to the front side than when the overhang portion De3 is not formed. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner that rotates backward about the left end portion due to the vibration, the left plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De due to this displacement (Fig. 300 (see (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 receives a rightward load from the bottom member 21De, and the vibrating device 21500 can increase the force of returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is regulated by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between it and the overhang De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, thereby increasing the reaction force received from the overhang De3. I can do it. In addition, since the bottom member 21De including the overhanging portion De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the covering member 21520 is deformed due to displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

Thereby, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang De3 can be increased in a limited manner when the vibration motor 21510 is in the excited state. In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216) produces vibrations, when the vibration device 21500 is de-energized, the vibration device 21500 and the overhang De3 are While it is possible to suppress transmission of vibration to the vibration device 21500 side by keeping the load generated between the two small, in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the By increasing the load, the effect of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the sheathing member 21520 is configured to be sufficiently suppressed (the flexibility of the sheathing member 21520 is fully exhibited), while When the vibrating device 21500 is in an excited state, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the protruding portion 21522, so that the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased.

On the other hand, since the protruding part 21522 is a protruding part formed from a flexible resin material, it is possible to suppress displacement of the protruding part De3 due to the protruding part 21522 being pressed against it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress vibrations from being transmitted to the protruding portion De3, and therefore it is possible to avoid vibrations occurring in the operating device 10300 due to the vibrations of the vibration device 21500.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced toward the back side and then back toward the front side as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the back side compared to the case where the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is not formed. It can increase the momentum of returning to the side.

In this way, the present embodiment is configured to assist the displacement of the vibration device 21500 in both the front and rear directions, so that after the vibration device 21500 is in the excited state, until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player, period can be shortened.

Note that in the above description, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-energized when operating the operation device 10300 or when producing vibrations of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the operation of the operation device 10300 may be performed while the vibration device 21500 is vibrating.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhang De3 due to the operation of the operating device 10300 and the covering member 21520 Since the direction of the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang portion De3 intersects with each other, interaction between the load generated from the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operating device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 break down due to loads being generated by the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 at the same time.

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 301 shows a state in which the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covered cover member 21530, that is, a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right-hand limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

In this embodiment, the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, so that the vibration motor 21510 is configured to be able to be displaced with respect to the covering cover 21530 due to deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Furthermore, as described above, in the vibration device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotational displacement) with the insertion portion 21535 on the left side (see FIG. 290) as a reference (axis of vibration), so the centrifugal displacement The force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced rightward due to the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 (see FIG. 301). The protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of the covering cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape that moves toward the left at the end on the back side (see FIG. 295), so the more the vibration motor 21510 moves to the right, the more vibration When the motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side, the resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases. Thereby, displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-back direction). Since this effect occurs, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

Further, by configuring the vibration to be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting displacement due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment, and also to dissipate the heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 by passing the wiring through the vacant area by omitting the provision of the detection sensor. It can be effectively used as a space for doing things.

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame was mainly explained, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operating unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window 14c will be explained.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit A80, etc. 1)).

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 can be viewed by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board A13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board A13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 302.

On the front of the game board A13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inside position of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board A13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board A13 defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the outer edge member A73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

In addition, in this embodiment, the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened by incorporating a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308) into the outer edge member A73. However, the details will be explained later.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning a prize opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in a normal game, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the first prize opening 64 on a route passing on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning hole 64 without reaching the opening 64 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is to generate a winning number in the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal play.

On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changed, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning hole 640 without reaching the winning hole 640 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game when the probability is changing or when the time is being shortened. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in this general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the decrease in balls during probability change or time saving.

By suppressing the loss of balls, you can obtain the next jackpot before the balls held in the upper tray 17 run out, even if you do not play the game in a firing mode that stops the ball firing at the right time during the probability change (even if you keep hitting it). Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (feeling of fatigue) experienced by the player while playing the game. Therefore, even if the number of revolutions until the next jackpot frequently increases during probability fluctuations (for example, 100 revolutions or more), the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, A part of the ball flowing down the area flows not to the specific winning hole 65a side (left side) but to the general winning hole 63 side (right side) and enters the general winning hole 63a. The prize balls associated with the winning in the general winning hole 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls in the specific winning hole 65a, so the player can pay out the prize balls due to the winning in the special winning hole 63 by the end of the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the expected number of winning balls to the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on the number of winning balls to the general winning hole 63.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can acquire in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning hole 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning hole 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, depending on the location and number of general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel, the number of rounds and counts (specified number of winnings for each round) in the special gaming state are the same for control reasons. Also, the time required for the special game state to end (longer or shorter) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

It should be noted that the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the general winning hole 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole 63 may be displayed, or a combination of them may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 640, so it is difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 without the electric accessory. The player fires the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first winning slot 64, the player has many chances to win the jackpot lottery, and the player wins the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim to become the player.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and balls are required to be hit on the left and right sides depending on the game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be left-right symmetrical (see FIG. 302). In this case, you can aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming for the second winning hole 640 by "hitting left." Therefore, depending on the game status (whether the game is in fixed play, short time play, or regular play), the player can be told how to shoot the ball between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. You can eliminate the need to do so. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710, and the like.

FIG. 303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state where the front frame 14 is opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a diagram. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300. It is a diagram. Note that in FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is shown in an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 will be referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member made of a light-transmitting resin material, which is fitted from the front side into a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13 and fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge of the game board A13. A covering part 86h covered by the ball, a distribution extension part 86a extending from the covering part 86h to the front side so as to be able to distribute balls on the left side, and a distribution extension part 86a extending downward from the upper end to the left A left inclined part 86b extends from the covered part 86h toward the front side, and a right inclined part 86c extends from the covered part 86h to the front side, and has a downwardly inclined shape from the upper end to the right. and a right channel forming wall portion 86d connected to the lower end of the right inclined portion 86c and extending downward from the covering portion 86h to the front side from a position facing the return rubber 69. , a plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e that protrude toward the flow path side (right side) as protrusions spanning the front and rear width of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d, and positions that alternate with the horizontal protrusions 86e. In relation to this, a plurality of front protrusions 86f are provided that protrude from the covering part 86h toward the flow path side (front side) as protrusions spanning the width of the flow path in the area between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. , a separation wall part 86g that extends downward from the lower end of the right flow path forming wall part 86d and is configured to be able to separate the lower right corner of the through hole 13a from other parts.

307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 along the CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb line of FIG. 307(a). .

When the player strongly rotates the operating handle 51 to the right and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the distance between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is such that the ball can flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 mm, and the distance is approximately 16 mm). Since the ball is set to have a length (with a slight gap), the ball flows down while contacting the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

To explain in more detail, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced toward the left and right center of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right channel forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the right, the balls flowing down due to their own weight tend to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal protrusion 86e. In this embodiment, the protruding length of the horizontal protruding portions 86e is designed to be about 2 mm (a little less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere), and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the channel width). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a well-balanced deceleration of the falling balls and prevention of ball clogging.

In addition, in this embodiment, a front protrusion 86f is formed with the same protrusion length (2 mm) as the transverse protrusion 86e at an intermediate position between the plurality of transverse protrusions 86e. This makes it possible to improve the deceleration effect by setting the interval between the protrusions to be half the channel width, while also making it easier to prevent ball clogging.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is installed slightly (about 1 degree) tilted toward the back from a vertical position. Therefore, the covered part 86h is arranged as a sloped wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball flowing down due to its own weight tends to roll down the covered part 86h. With this configuration, the front protrusion 86f that protrudes from the covered portion 86h is smaller than the case where the protrusion is formed from the glass unit 16 side (front side) toward the flow path. A good collision with the ball can be caused. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), in order to make it easier to understand the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is illustrated to be larger than usual (approximately 5 degrees).

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion disposed facing the lottery unit A600, and has the role of closing and separating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is disposed within the area of the through hole 13a. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is disposed, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has a small recess 13b projecting to the right from a substantially circular part that receives the center frame A86, and a small recess 13b extending to the lower right below the small recess 13b. A large protruding recess 13c is formed. In this way, by forming the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c, which serve as the installation area of the lottery unit A600, as recesses connected to the open part that receives the center frame A86 of the through hole 13a, a plurality of independent through holes can be formed. Compared to the case where the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 are arranged in the center frame A86, a larger area can be secured than in the case where the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 are arranged. Note that details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a rear surface formed in a box shape with an open front side and a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

The back case A310 is formed into a rectangular frame shape in front view by forming a rectangular opening A311a in the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the back case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and a second operation unit A700 disposed on the lower side where the arrangement thereof is omitted, respectively, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit A400 is located above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operating unit A700 is located below the opening A311a on the bottom wall A311 of the back case A310. will be placed. Note that FIGS. 305 and 306 illustrate a state in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 are attached to the back case A310.

The back case A310 extends from the front end of the outer wall portion A312 as a flat plate along (for example, arranged parallel to) the back surface of the game board A13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. A support plate portion A313 for support is provided.

The support plate portion A313 is a cylindrical portion that protrudes from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is provided in a shape that allows positioning of the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. A positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and an insertion hole having a size that allows the insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d is provided at a substantially central position of the positioning convex portion A313a (a position that matches the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d). A hole A313b is bored.

That is, by positioning the fastening convex part 13d with the positioning convex part A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening convex part 13d, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed. The overall rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have a shape that follows an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening protrusion 13d, or the support plate portion A313 may be shaped in consideration of workability during assembly. The convex portion may have an oval shape along the direction in which it is formed. Further, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is also made into a shape corresponding to the rectangular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the back case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side. This is the result of a design that takes into account the balance between improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operating unit A300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in this embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for the effect to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in front view, so the movable member is The area where it can be installed will be narrowed. Therefore, if the strength problem can be maintained even if the support plate part A313 is omitted, the restriction on the arrangement range of the movable member can be avoided by omitting the support plate part A313. That's true.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions A313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the back case A310 is related to the range of the area such as the gaming area where the shot ball can be visually recognized by the player. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the fired ball is visually recognized.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the firing device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. introduced, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In a pinball game, the area that is thought to attract the most attention is the area where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61). ) usually receives less attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left, based on the arc convex to the left formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right, based on the arc convex upward, as ranges that the ball cannot reach. It is thought that players' attention to the game will be lower.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member A73 and the surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left of the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light, the back side of the game board A13 cannot be seen from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 or the block-shaped member 74. It is configured as follows.

In this embodiment, the support plate portions A313 are preferentially arranged in these locations where attention is low or in locations where visibility is not possible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate parts A313 are formed, the support plate parts A313 are formed near the corners of the back case A310, avoiding the central part as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole can be reduced by selecting the locations where space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from locations with low visibility (low performance performance). While achieving the effect of securing the ball, it is possible to still secure a wide area within the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a roll along the outer rail 62 and are introduced into the gaming area, the range where the balls do not fall is the lower left, upper left It is easy to ask for the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, which is a part that temporarily absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball and can adjust the manner in which the ball flows down thereafter, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the ball does not flow down.

That is, downstream of the return rubber 69, the falling path of the ball changes depending not only on the relationship with the members forming the outer edge of the gaming area but also on the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. , the placement location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13, which is related to the ball launching performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operating unit A300 can be designed freely, so the design of the operating unit A300 progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13. This is normal, and this allows the internal configuration of the operating unit A300 to be carefully designed. If a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be affected. This will result in design changes to other devices installed in the area, increasing the cost of design changes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the formation of the support plate portion A313 at a position corresponding to the downstream side of the return rubber 69 is omitted. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, the inner space of the back case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313 in the region downstream of the return rubber 69, and sufficient space is secured for arranging the first motion unit A400 for production. In addition, since the path along which the ball flows and the range in which the first movement unit A400 is arranged can be overlapped in front and back, the first movement unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball. can be set.

Further, in this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the rear position of the outer edge member A73 is formed inside (on the left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate part A313 formed on the left side of the back case A310 is formed on the outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest part of the outer wall part A312. That is, the form of the support plate portion A313 (the direction of formation with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is asymmetrical.

This makes it possible to shorten the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 compared to the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13.

The right side outer wall part A312 has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate part A313, and the front edge comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right side outer wall portion A312 comes into line contact with the game board A13.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a cutout A312a that is cut out (formed) toward the back side. This notch A312a is cut out below the upper edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be made to function as a wire through which the wires connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 pass to the outside of the back case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700, compared to the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Note that the necessary components of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a channel for flowing a ball, a board for a light-emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a ball, Examples include other structures. In this embodiment, the discharge path ER through which the winning balls are discharged from the second prize opening 640 of the lottery unit A600 is configured to pass through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (Fig. 317 reference).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily seen by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of the light seen through the game board A13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 depends on the shape of the back case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing light emission.

Note that the shape and length (vertical length) of the cutout portion A312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion A312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right side of the back case A310 is not fastened to the game board A13, so when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13, it is necessary to rely on the rigidity of the operation unit A300. I can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 is provided on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be explained below.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 308 and 309, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board A13 is shown alone, and illustrations of other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is made of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side and has an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from the lower end of the arcuate wall portion 73a. The vertical wall portion 73b includes a vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is made of a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction. The number of man-hours required for assembly to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b includes a plurality of plate-like protruding portions 73b1 that protrude in a plate-like manner toward the back side along the right side portion, and is bent from the front side edge of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction. A cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the joint between the plurality of bent parts 73b2, the arcuate wall part 73a and the inclined wall part 73c, and a cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that is attached to and fastened to the cylindrical protruding part 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4 formed into which a screw can be inserted is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arrangement intervals of the plate-like protruding portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where the plate-like protrusions 73b1 at three locations resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 prevent the metal plate-like member 75 from bending. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed. Excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a main body plate portion 75a which is folded back multiple times in the transverse direction and has no creases in the longitudinal direction, and is bent leftward at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the joint between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. A through hole 75d is provided along with the plate portion in which the through hole 75d is formed, and an insertion hole 75e is formed in a stepped plate portion toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way the main body plate portion 75a is creased. Therefore, by disposing it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a cylindrical protrusion is formed. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

With the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding part 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding part 73b3 of the vertical wall part 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed on the right edge of the front surface so as to be able to receive the plate-like protrusion portions 73b1, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 is received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are provided, which are formed as vertically elongated holes.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled into the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recessed part 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning objects can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily curved in the left-right direction when used alone.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity), so even when the game board A13 and the back case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated, the game board The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening convex portion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c can be placed at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position extremely close to the right end). Thereby, the right side limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c relative to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the opening shape thereof can be made larger.

In this case, when forming a gaming area by using the gaming board A13 with the same vertical and horizontal widths and the center frame A86 with the same opening size, the right end of the gaming area with respect to the gaming board A13 should be set to the right. Since the center frame A86 can be moved in the opposite direction, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows when the game ball is hit to the left (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage hole, etc.).

Furthermore, there is a distribution device (not shown) in which the balls flow down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path of the balls to flow down in the order in which they arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 305). Since a large installation area can be secured, the degree of freedom in designing the distribution device, lottery unit A600, and variable prize winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a and a second prize opening 640, which can be switched between a state where a ball can pass and a state where it cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state. It is an assembly that constitutes a

The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610, which has a second prize opening 640 formed through it, forms a flow path through which the balls flow down to the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. An engaging member A620 that is rotatably supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a, a drive device unit A630 that generates a driving force to operate the engaging member A620, and a drive device unit A630 that is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610. A covering member A650 that defines the falling path of the ball, a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates a region corresponding to the falling path of the ball, and a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610. It is provided with an auxiliary irradiation device A670 that irradiates light to an area where visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and which is different from the falling path of the ball.

The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extending wall portion extending in the form of a wall from the left edge of the main body plate portion A611 toward the front side. A612, a right extending obstacle wall part A613 that extends in a wall shape from a position including the right edge of the main body plate part A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the second prize opening 640 in a rear view on the back side. An extended rectangular frame A614 that extends to A614, a protruding receiving part A615 that protrudes toward the back side above the second prize opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614. The main light emitting holding frame A616 has a frame shape and extends to the back side, and an auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 has a frame shape and extends to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the balls attempting to enter the lottery unit A600 pass through the through gate 67 and flow downstream.

The left-extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion disposed opposite to the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 engage (abut) to ensure rigidity. Thereby, while forming the through hole 13a in a shape large enough to accommodate both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600, it is possible to stably hold the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 in a manner that suppresses positional displacement.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball. That is, the ball flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 is provided with a shaft support hole A614a bored as a part for rotatably supporting the engagement member A620, and the extended end edge thereof can receive the front side end of the drive device unit A630. formed from shapes. That is, the driving device unit A630 is fixed to the extending rectangular frame A614 by fastening the front end of the driving device unit A630 assembled to the extending end of the extending rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the end position of its movement. will be described later.

The main light emitting holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame for the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and has an insertion hole A616a drilled inside thereof into which a fastening screw is inserted. The fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed into the fastening part A652a of the covering member A650, but as described later, the fastening part A652a overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front. formed in position. Thereby, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be seen when viewed from the front, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole A614a of an extended rectangular frame A614, and is configured such that a claw-like portion A622 disposed at a rotating tip engages with an electric accessory 640a. . Thereby, the electric accessory 640a is configured to change its state (open state or closed state) as the posture of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engagement member A620 will be described with reference to FIG. 312.

312(a) is a side view of the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and FIG. 312(b) is a side view of the engaging member A620 as viewed from the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). FIG. 312(c) is a front view of the engaging member A620, and FIG. 312(c) is a sectional view of the engaging member A620 taken along the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b).

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arm portions A621 each consisting of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal to) the rotational axis J1, and a rotating tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 protruding from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis J1, and a rotating base of the rotating arm portion A621. A proximal connecting rod portion A624, which is a rod-shaped portion extending in the radial direction from the end side, and is formed into a U-shape in front view in such a manner that the extended end is curved toward the other side and then joined. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal connecting rod portion A624 from the rotating tip side of the rotating arm portion A621, and are connected after being curved toward the other side at the extending end. A distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front.

The pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged opposite to each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, a flow path for the ball can be formed so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the flow path for the ball formed by the lottery unit A600. be able to.

The proximal connecting rod portion A624 has a main rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a proximal connecting rod portion A624 that protrudes toward the distal connecting rod portion A625 at an intermediate position between the main rod portion A624a. and a protruding restriction portion A624b provided therein. The protruding restriction portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engagement member A620, and the details will be described later.

The distal end connecting rod portion A625 is formed to have a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal connecting rod portion A624 in a rod-like portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1. That is, the surface of the rod-shaped portion A625a facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed into a planar shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface opposite to the rotating arm portion A621 is formed as a rotating tip. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that is inclined in a direction away from the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes to the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotating tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined toward the surface on the side opposite to the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes toward the center in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

This recessed surface A625c is recessed along the slope of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed from the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c is the same, with only the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) being different. Visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed to correspond to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A632 of the drive device unit A630, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive device unit A630. FIG. 313 shows a state in which the engagement member A620 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

The engagement member A620 is assembled to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engagement member A620, deforming it, and then fitting it inside the extending rectangular frame A614 so that the shaft support hole A614a and the protrusion of the engagement member A620 are aligned. This is executed by removing the load and canceling the deformation while aligning with the shaft installation part A623.

That is, after gripping the engaging member A620 with fingers from the rotation axis J1 direction and applying compressive force to deform it to the extent that the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 is shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614, The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by entering the engaging member A620 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In this embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed to be connected by a proximal connecting rod portion A624 and a distal connecting rod portion A625 that are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly can be caused in the proximal connecting rod portion A624 and the distal connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotary arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm parts A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped part but by a pair of rod-shaped parts (the proximal connecting rod part A624 and the distal connecting rod part A625), the load can be released. It is possible to easily avoid misalignment of the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 after the rotation.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped part wider than the rotational base-end side on the rotating tip side, where the load during operation tends to be large among the pair of rod-shaped parts (see Fig. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL When the rotary arm portions A621 are operated by the driving force of the rotary arm portions A621, it is possible to suppress the postures of the rotary arm portions A621 from shifting from each other.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see Figure 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required during assembly can be reduced near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base side. It can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engagement member A620 comes into contact with the lower end of the protruding receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second prize opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that entered the second prize opening 640 is a surface that forms an extended rectangular frame A614 with the engaging member A620, and is arranged opposite to the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The water flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as a slanted surface A614b, and flows into the drive device unit A630.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the balls, the balls can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the downward flow path of the ball from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the downward flow path of the ball can be arranged compactly.

The drive device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box part A631 with an open front side that is connected and fixed to the rear side end of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper part of the main body box part A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction when excited by the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a coil spring A633 that is held on the lower side of the main body box part A631. A detection sensor A634 that detects passage of the ball is provided.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized, the operating member A632 is placed in the front position (see FIG. 314(a)) due to the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized, the biasing force of the coil spring A633 The operating member A632 is driven against the biasing force and placed at the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described with reference to FIG. 314.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), in order to facilitate understanding, only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated, and other structures for holding these members are illustrated. Illustration is omitted.

Further, FIG. 314(a) shows the de-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (the closed state of the electric accessory 640a), and FIG. 314(b) shows the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (the opened state of the electric accessory 640a). state) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is placed at the front side position, the engagement member A620 is placed in a downwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized. When the operating member A632 is placed at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is placed in an upwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support A653 of the covering member A650, and includes an eccentric protrusion 640b that protrudes toward the back side from a position eccentric to the rotation axis. This eccentric protruding portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut vertically with the claw-like portion A622 of the engagement member A620, and as the eccentric protruding portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-like portion A622, The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-like member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-like parts A622 of the engagement member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. It may be constructed from a pair of blade-like members facing each other. In this case, the engagement member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 310 and 311. The covering member A650 is a member that is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a in between, and is a member that is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate part A651 that forms a downward flow path for the ball between the main body plate part A651, a regulating wall part A652 that protrudes in a wall shape toward the back side of the main body plate part A651 and regulates the downward flow of the ball, and a rear surface of the main body plate part A651. It includes a shaft support portion A653 that projects sideward in a columnar manner and rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmittance range A651a in which the back side is easily visible when viewed from the front, and a low transmittance range A651b which has lower light transmittance than the high transmittance range A651a and in which the back side is difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, a seal whose printed surface is designed in such a manner that it constitutes a high transparency range and a low transparency range is pasted on the front side of the main body plate part A651, so that the high transparency range A651a and the low transparency range are affixed. Although the low transmission range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding, or the main body plate portion A651 may be milled to roughen the surface to form a region with low transparency.

In this embodiment, the high-transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly on the right side) of the ball's downward flow path, and the low-transmission range A651b is formed with a regulating wall A652 that restricts the downward flow of the ball. It is formed on the side that faces (mainly the left side). Thereby, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's falling path, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure within the range where the ball does not fall.

The regulating wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which, for example, a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a is screwed for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610. The fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transparent, so it tends to create a shadow when viewed from the front. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A652a is placed outside of the ball's falling path, so that the shadow caused by the fastening screw can be prevented from entering the ball's falling path and giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from detracting from the player's concentration when visually checking the falling state of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffuser plate A661 housed inside the main light emitting holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illumination board A662 on which a light emitting means A663 such as an LED is disposed on the side of the diffuser plate A661, and an illumination board A662. It includes a rear lid part A664 which is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662 and is fastened and fixed to the back end of the main light emitting support frame A616.

The diffuser plate A661 is a plate-like member that has an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both front and rear surfaces, and is a plate-like member that has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both the front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. This extended portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffuser plate A661 from tilting when the diffuser plate A661 is accommodated in the main light emitting holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extended portions A661a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, creating resistance in the direction of returning the tilt, so that the posture of the diffuser plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front side of the illumination board A662 comes into contact with the extended end of the extended portion A661a, thereby preventing the diffusion plate A661 from coming off to the back side. .

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and the outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662. . That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A662 is held between the main light emitting holding frame A616 and the rear lid part A664 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

This makes it possible to stably hold the illumination board A662 by utilizing the rigidity of the main light emitting holding frame A616, even if the rear lid part A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A664 alone is low. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to pull out the diffuser plate A661 from the main light emitting holding frame A616, so mischief can be suppressed by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screws.

Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and tends to cause shadows, but according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 are provided on the back side of the fastening screw, and light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is provided. A diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing is arranged. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made less noticeable.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap with the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the external shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less noticeable can be made more noticeable.

As mentioned above, the main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the downward flow path of the sphere, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated onto the downward flow path of the sphere.In this embodiment, the diffuser plate A661 is The light reaches the downstream path. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without going through the diffuser plate, the light can be made lighter and more expansive. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue in the eyes of the player who is paying attention to the falling path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 includes an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. A rear lid part A673 formed from an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape is provided.

The illumination board A671 is fixed in a holding manner similar to that of the illumination board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A671 is held between the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and the rear lid part A673 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid part A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A673 alone is low, it is possible to stably hold the illumination board A671 using the rigidity of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, the auxiliary irradiation device A670 does not include a diffusion plate on the front side of the illumination board A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Although light is emitted in this manner, in this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is placed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b when viewed from the front, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 has a low transmittance. It passes through the transmission range A651b and is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, so that it is possible to avoid causing excessive fatigue to the eyes of the player who sees the light.

In addition, by maintaining the emitted light intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character is brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

315(a) and 315(b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 along a line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 315(a) shows the de-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(a)), and FIG. 315(b) shows the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-energized state, the lower end of the disc at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the concave surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, in addition to the fact that the disc portion of the operating member A632 has advanced to the front side to the extent that it is placed opposite to the vicinity of the widthwise intermediate position of the concave surface A625c, the concave surface A625c is By making the surface substantially parallel to the surface, the load applied from the engagement member A620 to the operating member A632 becomes a load mainly having a component in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 with the load from the engaging member A620, so that the piano wire can be removed from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire rod such as the like is inserted to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a to change it to the open state.

Here, pachinko machines have traditionally been equipped with a function to output an error notification when fraudulent activity is detected, but by illegally applying a load to the movable accessory 640a that can be seen from the front side, the electromagnetic solenoid If the movable accessory 640 could be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraudulent acts would not be sufficient.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a is connected to the movable accessory 640a via the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged with the engaging member A620 (see FIG. 314(a)), in the configuration of this embodiment where it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, it is difficult to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a. It may also be difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent act that places a load on the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the recessed surface A625c is arranged so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotating tip side of the engagement member A620. Since it is tilted, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. The abutment position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotation tip side), and the tip side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engagement member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the load required to further displace the engagement member A620 can be increased. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to open the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315(a), when the rod-shaped portion A625a is bent and deformed in the thickness direction due to the load received from the operating member A632, the reaction force applied to the operating member A632 is applied in a direction that is tilted upward toward the front side. can be directed to.

Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a load toward the front side, and the operating member A632 can be prevented from retreating rearward due to the load from the bar-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably restrict the rising displacement of the engagement member A620.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disk portion of the operating member A632 and the protruding restriction portion A624b of the engaging member A620 come into contact with each other, so that the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL Before the engagement member A620 collides with the part, further backward rotation movement (movement in the rising direction) of the engagement member A620 is restricted. That is, since the rotation of the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be controlled by the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with other parts.

316(a) is a top view of the operating unit A300, FIG. 316(b) is a side view of the operating unit A300 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 is a top view of the operating unit A300 and the operating unit It is a back view of A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged so as to protrude further to the front side than the front end of the back case A310. When forming the game board A13 from a plywood board while disposing the first operating unit A400 in this way, it is necessary to form depressions and holes on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the base plate A60 of the game board A13 is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and upper surfaces (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operating unit A400 can be easily avoided while configuring the back case A310 to protrude further to the front side than the front end thereof. This allows the first operating unit A400 to be placed closer to the player, thereby improving the effect of the production that makes the first operating unit A400 visible.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate part A313 arranged at the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged inside (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall part A312. As a result, the arrangement of the outer wall part A312 at the left and right center where the support plate part A313 is not arranged is shifted further to the outside (upper side), compared to the case where the support plate part A313 is arranged outside of the outer wall part A312. This allows the upper end position of the back case A310 to be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit A400 (or the second operating unit A700) with respect to the back case A310.

In addition, since the left and right positions where the support plate part A313 on the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged are located outside the gaming area in front view, as described above, the support plate part A313 is located below the outer wall part A312. The influence (disadvantage) on the game can be suppressed by being placed in the area.

As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is not provided on the right side of the back case A310 except at the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied by the support plate part A313 below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall part A312 of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. I can do it.

FIG. 318 is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 taken along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. As shown in FIG. 318, compared to the outer edge extending portion 60a extending along the outer edge toward the back side, the base plate A60 is an area inside the outer edge extending portion 60a and is at least connected to the gaming area. The central projecting portion 60b that projects toward the back side in a region where the front and back partially overlap is formed to have a shorter front-to-back width.

Since the front end surfaces of the base plate A60 are formed on substantially the same plane, the rear end of the central projecting portion 60b is located closer to the front than the rear end of the outer edge extension portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first operating unit A400.

A recessed portion 60c that is recessed toward the front side is formed between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central extension portion 60b, and in the area in which this recessed portion 60c is formed, the base plate A60 is It is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c than in the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central protrusion portion 60b.

A center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap maintained between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained even on the front side of the base plate A60.

The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is used to illuminate the sphere by being irradiated onto the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the degree of energy reduction when the light used for the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13, so it is possible to effectively use weaker light. You can perform an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outward from the inner surface of the outer edge extension portion 60a of the base plate A60 in front view, so that the falling path of the ball is concave. It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping the installation part 60c in the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thereby, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate-like member 75 can be configured integrally and so as to support each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

Further, by utilizing the fact that when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, the light is reflected on the metal, the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased. This light emission with locally increased intensity occurs at a location where the inner end (left end) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b is visible through the outer edge member A73. 73b (see FIG. 308) (the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate-like member 75, the area where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. As a result, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed opposite the vertical wall portion 73b and the area where the flow path is formed above the lottery unit A600.

319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operating unit A300. In addition, in the description of FIG. 319, FIG. 320, FIG. 321, and FIG. It means A400C and A400D. Furthermore, the first operating unit A400 may be used as a representative example of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and second operation units A700 are shown maintaining a retracted state in which they do not protrude to the third symbol display device 81 side, and in FIG. 320, all the first operation units It is illustrated that the operating unit A400 is excited and placed in an extended state protruding toward the third symbol display device 81, while the second operating unit A700 maintains a retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all the first operating units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operating unit A700 is shown in the overhanging state extending toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and in FIG. 322, one The figure shows how the first operating units A400B and A400C of the section are in the retracted state, the other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are formed in a color that stands out to the player in a range defined by a colored (ultramarine in this embodiment) cover member A591. The front cover A410 (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold-plated) and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visible, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side The first operating unit A400 is located closest to the adjacent first operating unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation that spreads from the inside (center) to the outside of the third symbol display device 81, the center of this radiation The player's line of sight can be focused inward on the third symbol display device 81.

Since the side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side is closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. (including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440) is chamfered so as to taper toward the tip side (third symbol display device 81 side). This avoids interference with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

Although there is no limitation on the starting point of chamfering, in this embodiment, a straight line extending along the lateral side of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. The chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where it intersects with the straight line, and the chamfering is started from just before the intersection. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a wide range in which the first displacement members A440 are visible while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440.

As shown in FIG. 319, when the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front and rear so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged in the following position. Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to a posture in which the light-emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 when viewed from the front. In addition, it is possible to increase the visual change while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1; Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, when the first operation unit A400 is in the extended state, the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (the third symbol display device 81 located at a distance from

To explain in detail, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a wide posture in the front and rear so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second displacement member In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490 from the state where it interferes with the movement locus of A490 (the retracted state of the first operating unit A400), it is moved closer to the game board A13 side and placed closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490. (the extended state of the first operating unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 emits light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490, regardless of whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or in the extended state. It is possible to perform a light emission effect. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 is made switchable. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the production unit A710 can move up and down to the center side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the second operation unit A700 includes a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the production unit A710, and executes a light emission production in which light travels in multiple directions by rotating the rotating body A720. This is possible, but details will be discussed later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual drive device, so that each first operation unit A400 can change and maintain the state independently. That is, the combination of the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one first operating unit A400, or it is also possible to execute the state change in different first operating units A400 in order. For example, the state can be changed sequentially from the first operating unit A400 at the lower left in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, or the state can be changed sequentially in both directions from the third first operating unit A400B clockwise from the lower left. It can also be executed. In this way, various effects can be performed using the first operation unit A400.

Further, for example, when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C which is in the retracted state in FIG. 322 is arranged in the extended position and is configured to interfere with the second operation unit A700, In this case, the first operating units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operating unit A700 can be set in a retracted state, and the other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D can be set in an extended state. This makes it possible to increase variations in the combinations of operations (states) between the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700, compared to the case where all the first operating units A400 operate synchronously using the same drive device. can.

FIG. 323 is a front view of operating unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 are illustrated with imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400 is arranged to be able to effectively decorate the gaming area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the area where the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged facing each other and guides the ball (ball launching unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the gaming area, and the outer frame of the gaming area in this section is the inner rail 61. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operating units A400, A400A (second from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (It is not necessary to extend it to the outer rail 62.)

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly the area where the ball hit right flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is located near the outer rail 62 (outer side). will be placed in

Furthermore, the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer frame of the gaming area in the area where the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400D (first one on the lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is possible because in this embodiment, the support plate part A313 is not provided at the right midsection of the back case A310, and the right end of the back case A310 is brought close to the right end of the game board A13. It is what it is.

That is, by forming the internal area of the back case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 when viewed from the front, the first operating unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path is arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for a right-hit ball to flow down (flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302). The first operating unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer end of the front cover A410 is arranged outward (on the right side).

In other words, like in a typical right-handed game machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical), the right-handed channel is made extremely narrower than the left-handed channel, and is placed closer to the right end of the game board A13. In the case where a movable device such as the first operating unit A400 can be arranged right-aligned in the internal area of the back case A310, as in this embodiment, the back side of the gaming area can be It becomes possible to place movable devices on the entire side.

On the other hand, on the left side of the back case A310, a guide section is formed that is sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 when viewed from the front, and the player's line of sight is not concentrated on this guide section. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310 as in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid reducing the degree of decoration of the gaming area. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is optimal to arrange the support plate part A313 on the left side of the back case A310 and omit the support plate part A313 on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the gaming area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in multiple ways in FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged within the gaming area, the patterns and figures that are visible to the player who is paying attention to the gaming area can be visually recognized through the gaming board A13. The front cover A410 can be configured with a plurality of front covers A410.

This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by pasting stickers or the like on which characters or the like are printed on the surface of the game board A13. Furthermore, the area in which the front cover A410 is disposed is configured so that its appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400. Compared to the case where stickers or the like are pasted on the game board A13, variations in the manner in which the game area is decorated can be increased. Note that the details of the change in appearance will be described later.

Furthermore, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see Fig. 305), even if the structure is exposed here or the drive device is placed, it is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly. can.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operating units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between them connects the adjacent first operating units A400. 1 is fastened and fixed to the operation unit A400. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integral structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operating unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operating unit A400. , it is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore, the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-like member 75 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-like member 75 can be improved.

As a result, it is possible to easily design the metal plate member 75 into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIGS. 303 and 304), which is the original function of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of operating unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operating units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 to the front side, and a second operating unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation units A400 are each configured to be operable in a generally common operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are arranged so as to surround a part of the periphery of the internal space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in a direction toward the center of the internal space of the back case A310 (a direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the back case A310). Configured to move with.

Therefore, for example, since the influence exerted by gravity may change in each first movement unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that movement can be realized without relying on gravity, but details will be described later. do. As described above, each of the first operating units A400 has a generally common configuration, so the first operating unit A400 disposed at the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operating units A400 will be explained in detail. Omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operating unit A400 is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front covered by the front cover A410, and includes a main body area A400b where light emitting effects are mainly performed, and the main body area A400b. It is composed of an annexed area A400v that is attached to the end of the area A400b.

The annex area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be visible to the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is placed over the center side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

This annexed area A400v is not intended to be visible to players, but includes configurations that inevitably occur along with the performance performed in the main body area A400b (for example, the drive motor AMT1, the detection sensor A426 that detects the position, wiring and connectors, etc.). By arranging the main body area A400b, it is possible to make maximum use of the main body area A400b for arranging members intended to be visually recognized by the player. That is, since it is possible to avoid encroaching on the main body area A400b by structures that are not intended to be visible to the player, it is possible to arrange large members by making full use of the width of the main body area A400b.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. Note that FIGS. 327 and 328 illustrate a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front unit FU that includes a front cover A410 and a first displacement member A440 that can be displaced in a manner to enter between the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440. It mainly includes a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is formed by a thin plate bent into a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU, and the main body part A411 is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide part A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

With the above-described configuration, the front cover A410 has a function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU from the player while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412, and a function of hiding the first displacement member of the front unit FU. The main function is to guide the displacement of A440.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is stacked on the back side of the central effect part A411a of the main body part A411, and is arranged opposite to the central effect part A411a, and has the shape of the central effect part A411a. A diffuser plate A415 formed of a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape with a corresponding outer shape, and an LED (approximately square chip shape in FIG. An illumination board A416 on which a light emitting means A416a such as (shown in figure) is disposed, and a board fixing plate that is placed opposite to the illumination board A416, fixes the illumination board A416, and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. Mainly equipped with A417.

Hereinafter, the configurations of the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, and how positional shift is suppressed by the configurations will be described.

The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened with fastening screws or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body part A411 and the board fixing plate A417 from the front and back directions, and has an axis corresponding position A415a arranged on the back side facing the light emitting means A416a. A wave pattern is formed by protrusions concentrically spread around the center, and a recessed part A415b is formed inward from the outer edge, and a through hole with a smaller diameter than the light emitting means is formed. It mainly includes a plurality of small diameter holes A415c, and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends toward the back side.

The protrusions forming a wave pattern on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 refract the light irradiated toward the axis-corresponding position A415a, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered on the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed in a shape that advances toward the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (radially outward), but the opposite is not the case. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members, and in this embodiment, the purpose of the recessed portion A415b is to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. is formed.

The narrow diameter portion 415c is located at a position not facing the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 (a position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411) in order to make it difficult to see when viewed from the front, and is located in a columnar shape through which the board fixing plate A417 is inserted. This is a through hole formed at a position corresponding to part A417f, and is used for aligning the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 to enable positioning of the diffusion plate A415 with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d has a protruding length of approximately 4 mm and a width of approximately 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so it can withstand loads that occur during assembly or maintenance (for example, due to interference with other members). The protruding plate portion A415d can be prevented from being bent or broken due to loads caused by collisions, friction, etc., and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusion plate A415 has a wave pattern formed over the entire area on the back side and can perform a light diffusion function over the entire area, but it can be clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 in terms of performance. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416 passes through the first area AC1, so that it can be visually recognized by the player in a strong light emitting manner as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 corresponds to an area formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the board fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the board fixing plate A417, and is a region of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416. The optical axis does not pass through the light emitting means A416a, and the light from the light emitting means A416a reaches the light in a weakened state.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the light emission produced by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, but the details will be described later.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-mentioned light emitting means A416a, a recessed part A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c bored with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter through hole A416c. A plurality of assembly fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which the ends of the wiring are connected, and an electrical wiring FC (main connector) that supplies electricity to the first displacement member A440. The embodiment mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat cable is connected.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visible to the player is likely to be maximum, and in this embodiment, it is preferentially arranged at a position that matches the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front and back direction. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to easily ensure the intensity of the light that is visible to the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar part A417f of the board fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the illumination board A416 can be aligned with the board fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper one of the pair of through holes.

For example, as a maintenance response, remove the main unit A411 and the diffuser plate A415 while the first operating unit A400 is fixed to the back case A310, remove the malfunctioning illumination board A416 from the board fixing plate A417, and restore the normal illumination board. When the work of attaching A416 to the board fixing plate A417 is assumed, the illumination board A416 falls forward due to its own weight before being fastened and fixed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper through hole (the side that is more displaced toward the front due to forward tilting) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed with a fastening screw, so that the front It is possible to successfully return the fallen position to the backward direction by tightening the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the illumination board A416 from being erroneously fixed during fastening and fixing during maintenance.

Note that the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c protruding from the front side of the board fixing plate A417 is inserted into the lower through hole of the assembly fastening part A416d for positioning the illumination board A416 and for positioning the illumination board A416. Equipped with a temporary fastening function. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-hole is hooked on the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c, so that it is possible to suppress the illumination board A416 from falling under its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side and has a first connector A416e1 connected to wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting unit A416a, and a wiring connected to a detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring is connected to a second displacement member A490 disposed in the rear unit BU.

In these connectors A416e, the positions of the mating members to which the wiring is connected are fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating members are movable ( Because of the third connector A416e3), it can be placed at any position. In this embodiment, a position corresponding to the lower end of the illumination board A416 and included in the annex area A400v is set so that interference with other members is unlikely to occur and there is no risk of the player seeing it. It is located.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440, which is a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring, is located in an area on the opposite side of the illumination board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 in between (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate part A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (refer to 335) is shortened, so if the connectors are placed incorrectly, excessive load may be placed on the wiring. There is a risk of giving.

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e in which the wiring direction can be any direction (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the posture of the intermediate connector A416f is changed to the first position in the front unit FU. The direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the displacement member A440, is aligned with the direction in which the electric wiring FC is expandable (the flat cable band extends, can be easily bent, and there is little possibility of disconnection). It is set.

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body part A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the illumination board A416, and a protrusion part on the back side of the main body part A417a to receive the fastening part of the front unit FU. and a plurality of through-holes A417b configured to allow insertion of fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion, a fastening portion into which the fastening screws are screwed, and a plane common to the front end surface of the fastening portion toward the front side. A plurality of board fastening portions A417c are provided, each of which is a set of protruding narrow-diameter columnar portions.

Further, the main body part A417a of the board fixing plate A417 has a plate-shaped deep bottom plate part A417a1 connected to the rear end part of the board fastening part A417c, and is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1, and the front surface thereof is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1. A shallow plate-like portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the distal end surface of the fastening portion.

That is, the back surface of the illumination board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening parts of the plurality of board fastening parts A417c and the shallow plate-like part A417a2.

The board fixing plate A417 has a sharp protruding part A417d extending from the deep bottom plate-like part A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp protruding part A417d at the lower left of the sharp protruding part A417d. The insertion hole A417e is formed in a rectangular shape with the same width.

The sharp protruding part A417d is arranged at the lower left of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross section in such a manner that it leaves an interval approximately equal to the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable, between it and the electrical board A416. It is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (perpendicularly intersects) the direction A416x when viewed from the front. The wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, so the electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is connected to the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d. caught between.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electrical wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d, the portion of the electrical wiring FC that receives displacement due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is transferred to the intermediate connector A416f. It can be shifted from the end position of the electrical wiring FC to be connected to a position sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding part A417d. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC falls off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The board fixing plate A417 includes a plurality of insertion columnar parts A417f that project from the shallow plate part A417a2 in a columnar manner toward the front side at positions corresponding to the large diameter holes A416c, and the shallow plate part A417a2 and the shallow plate part A417a2. A protruding plate portion A415d of the diffuser plate A415 can be received in a plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between A417a2 and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, and a side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side. A plurality of notches A417h formed with a width and a plurality of protruding pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front side edge of the side wall A417a3 formed diagonally on the right side in front view. and.

The insertion columnar part A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416c, and is a large diameter base that extends beyond the thickness of the illumination board A416 and protrudes from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. and a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffuser plate A415.

Thereby, the large-diameter base can align the illumination board A416 and the surface support of the diffuser plate A415 can be performed, and the small-diameter tip can align the diffuser plate A415. That is, the diffuser plate A415 is aligned with its small diameter tip and is supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large diameter base of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With this configuration, even though the diffusion plate A415 is not directly fastened and fixed, it is possible to suppress the posture of the diffusion plate A415 from shifting.

The through hole A417g forms an air passage and has a function of suppressing heat generation of the illumination board A416. In this embodiment, the diffusion plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416, and since the configuration is such that it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g is formed on the back side. is formed. Thereby, heat generation of the illumination board A416 can be suppressed without reducing the production effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages with it in the direction along the side wall A417a3. This allows the diffusion plate A415 to protrude from the board fixing plate A417 even if the small diameter tip of the insertion columnar part A417f breaks due to aging or falls off due to manufacturing defects. It is possible to prevent the plate portion A415d from shifting in the longitudinal direction (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction). Therefore, in the support mode in which the diffuser plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffuser plate A415 from shifting its position.

The protruding piece A417i is formed into a thin plate shape into which the illumination board A416 can be inserted between the protruding piece A417i and the shallow plate-like part A417a2. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the illumination board A416 in a front view, and the protruding piece A417i is arranged downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), even if the illumination board A416 is subjected to a load in the direction of falling forward due to gravity, etc., this protrusion piece A417i will keep the illumination board A416 on the tilted tip side (upper right side). Since it is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and restricts displacement of the illumination board A416 toward the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, the illumination board A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the provision of fastening screws inside the internal space of the operation unit A300. This avoids reducing the light emitting effect (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws) caused by arranging the fastening screws inside the internal space of the movement unit A300, where the player's attention tends to be high. The illumination board A416 can be stably fixed to the board fixing plate A417.

When assembling the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, insert the right side edge of the illumination board A416 diagonally between the shallow plate-like part A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i as far as it will go, and then press the insertion tip. It can be assembled smoothly by pushing the illumination board A416 backwards from the starting point. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

331(a) is a front view of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 331(b) is a front view of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line in FIG. 332(a). It is a sectional view of substrate fixing plate A417.

331(a) and 331(b) illustrate a state in which the illuminated board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the illuminated board A416 inserted into the board fixing plate A417. is shown assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

The illumination board A416 includes chamfered portions A416g and A416h chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body. The manner in which the chamfered portions A416g and A416h are formed corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. In other words, since the length up to the notch A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417, the length of the illumination board A416 Compared to the first chamfered part A416g at the upper end, the second chamfered part A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the illumination board A416.

FIG. 331 shows a state in which the illumination board A416 is displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the board fixing plate A417, compared to the state shown in FIG. 332. The upper limit of the degree of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered part A416g and the upper surface of the board fixing plate A417, and in the state shown in FIG. The edge of the cutout A417h fits into the gap formed by the cutout A417h.

Contrary to the state illustrated in FIG. 331, when displacing the illumination board A416 downward, the length of the space formed between the second chamfer A416h and the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 is set to an upper limit. As shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 can be shifted downward from the state shown in FIG. 332, and in the downwardly shifted state, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the illumination board A416 in this manner, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in positioning the illumination board A416 when inserting the illumination board A416 into the board fixing plate A417. In other words, even if the right side of the illumination board A416 and the right side of the board fixing plate A417 are not in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 can be fixed to the board by allowing slight vertical displacement It can be inserted into plate A417. Thereby, the illumination board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

To change the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 may be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, as can be seen from the fact that the insertion columnar section A417f of the board fixing plate A417 is visible through the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416, the insertion columnar section A417f of the tapered shape (see FIG. 329 By guiding the large-diameter hole 417c by the large-diameter hole 417c, the vertical positional deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected, and the illumination board A416 is brought into the state shown in FIG. 332. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416, so the illumination board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

Note that the protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h in the assembled state (see FIG. 325), and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, the notch A417h has the function of widening the gap when the illumination board A416 is assembled, and after the assembly is completed, the arrangement of the illumination board A416 is maintained by filling the gap. It can have a function.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes to the front side of the illumination board A416 to prevent the illumination board A416 from coming off. Because of the interference, it is possible to prevent the right side of the illumination board A416 from falling off the board fixing plate A417.

By using such a retaining structure to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling off, this embodiment is configured so that the board fastening portion A417c is not disposed near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417. (The installation of fastening screws is omitted). Thereby, it is possible to secure a region for disposing the light emitting means A416a near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is also possible to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of light emission near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When the illumination board A416 becomes defective and during maintenance work to replace the illumination board A416, the illumination board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331(b). You need to tilt it. At this time, since the illumination board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the illumination board A416. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 toward you, the illumination board A416 can be easily connected. It can be tilted with respect to the board fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end disposed opposite to the side wall A417a3) which is the starting point of the attitude change of the illumination board A416, the first connector The illumination board A416 can be efficiently rotated and displaced by the load applied to the wiring connected to A416e1. In other words, the moment of force applied to the illumination board A416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying unnecessary (excessive) load to the illumination board A416 and wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed into a box shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side with a lid. That is, the second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to move forward and backward through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, thereby performing the movable performance of the first movement unit A400.

In this embodiment, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are simply called the front unit FU and the rear unit BU as units that can be disassembled. They do not work independently, but work in conjunction with each other. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400. be. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operating unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. Note that in FIGS. 335 and 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an overview of the configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 includes a support plate formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material as a component of the front unit FU. A first displacement member A440 is formed from a transparent and colorless resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the support plate A420 with a gap in which it can move forward and backward, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate A420. a first displacement member A440 that moves back and forth (sliding displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344) guided by a gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420; A slide link A450, which is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 and is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and the drive motor AMT1 and its It mainly includes a drive gear AMG1 that is fastened and fixed to a drive motor AMT1.

The first operating unit A400 also includes a transmission gear group A460, which constitutes the rear unit BU, and a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and whose constituent members rotate as the drive gear AMG1 rotates. A support box part A470 rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material in the shape of a box with an open front side; A rear plate portion A480 is formed from a resin material, is arranged with a gap on the back side of the support box portion A470, and is fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap (support plate portion) formed on the front side of the support box portion A470. A second displacement member A490 that moves forward and backward (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) in the gap between the plate part A420 and the support box part A470, and a drive motor AMT1 connected to the second displacement member A490. It mainly includes a rack and pinion A510, which is a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits driving force and is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box part A470.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the back side with the plate-like part (the support plate part A420, the bottom of the support box part A470) arranged on the back side sandwiched therebetween. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are disposed, and both the slide link A450 and the second displacement member A490 are disposed in the gap between the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470. will be placed.

That is, the first displacement member A440 on the front side has a configuration in which the displacement members A440, A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are disposed front and rear with the plate-shaped portion sandwiched therebetween, which tends to be bulky in the front and rear. Compared to the case where the slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in independent gaps in the front and rear, the arrangement of the plate member for forming the independent gaps is omitted. Therefore, the longitudinal width occupied by the displacement mechanism portions of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, other performance mechanisms can be placed in the front-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-rear width, thereby improving the performance effect of the first operating unit A400.

Next, each configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes a first displacement member A440 and a second displacement member A490 that have different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different. The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and the remaining configuration required for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be explained later.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first operation unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed through the guide holes as long holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a punch hole A423 provided as a similar long hole to one of the guide holes A422, and a hole A423 extending parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide protrusions A424 protrude toward the front side as protrusions, and a plurality of guide protrusions A424 are recessed along the direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421, and as the recessed end goes toward the front side, the main body plate portion A421 A recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that slopes away from the right side edge of the slide link A425, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position, and a cover of the slide link A450. A shaft support A427 with a circular cross section that can support the shaft support hole A452 and protrudes from the main body plate portion A421 toward the rear side, and a cylindrical shaft support A427 extending from the main body plate portion A421 toward the rear side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 that protrude in a shape.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b that guides the displacement of the guided protrusion A455c of the slide link A450.

The pull-out hole A423 is a through-hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d extends from the front side of the main body plate portion A421 to the coil spring ASP1. to lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is latched (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the direction of contraction (lower left direction).

The guide protrusion A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and details will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor arranged to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but rather detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already placed in the extended position. It is also conceivable that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping may occur despite the fact that the drive motor AMT1 is not stopped. In contrast, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken to avoid overloading the parts related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and to maintain the arrangement of the first displacement member A440. However, the details will be explained later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and is protruded from the transmission gear with a slight gap between its tip. It is arranged opposite to group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 functions to suppress the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the direction of falling off on the shaft side.

Note that in this embodiment, a locking screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, unless the screw loosens or falls off, the screw can prevent the transmission gear A461 from displacing in the direction of falling off on the shaft side. In this way, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical part A428 are configured to prevent the transmission gear A461 from coming off in two stages, so it is possible to ensure that the transmission gear A461 does not come off from the shaft. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The guide plate part A430 has a right side edge parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate part A421, and a plate-shaped main body plate part A431 which is disposed facing each other in a posture along a plane parallel to the plane formed by the main body plate part A421. , a plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 are provided in the back side of the main body plate part A431 in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x; The inclined surface A433 is formed to be inclined toward the front side and is configured to be able to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear cover portion 443), and corresponds to the width of the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420. The guide plate portion A434 is formed in the shape of a long plate along the direction A416x with a width of .

The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion holes A431a on the peripheral edge thereof, into which fastening screws are inserted. The left side edge of the main body plate part A431 is supported by the side wall part A421a raised toward the front side from the left side edge of the main body plate part A421 of the support plate part A420, so the left side of the main body plate part A431 Even though there is only one insertion hole A431a provided at the edge, the guide plate A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate A420.

In addition, in the right edge of the main body plate A431, which is the position through which the first displacement member A440 moves forward and backward, the insertion hole A431a is located at only one location approximately at the center of the vertical width. Compared to the case where the insertion hole A431a is disposed at a biased position, the deviation in the distance between the right edge of the main body plate A431 and the support plate A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge. At the same time, the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 can be improved compared to the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged.

The elongated recess A432 is a recess that guides the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 can be displaced. It is recessed with approximately the same length. That is, the first displacement member A440 is not only guided on the back side by the guide hole A422 of the support plate part A420, but also guided on the front side by the elongated recessed part A432.

The guide plate portion A434 is provided with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged on the right edge side at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable, and between the claw portions A434a. An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap and temporarily fixed. Due to this. One end of the electrical wiring FC that is deflected and displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be set at the position of the claw part A434a, and the position of the electrical wiring FC on the left side of the claw part A434a can be stabilized. .

Therefore, the electric wiring FC made of a flat cable can be maintained close enough to touch the guide plate part A434, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced to the front side of the guide plate part A434. However, when the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 338 is illustrated in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 includes a guided plate portion A441, which is a plate-shaped portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430, and a colored guided plate portion A441. (Gold plated in this embodiment) is formed from a light-opaque resin material, is pivotally supported by the guided plate part A441, and is displaced in conjunction with the guided plate part A441. The interlocking plate part A442, the rear cover part 443 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate part A442 and forms a gap between the interlocking plate part A442, and the rear cover part 443 is formed into a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material. A diffuser plate A444 is disposed opposite to the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and a diffuser plate A444 is disposed opposite to the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442 and has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the diffuser plate A444, and is disposed opposite to the rear lid portion 443. It mainly includes an illuminated board A445.

Here, the interlocking plate part A442, the rear cover part 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the illumination board A445 are fixed as a unit, so these will be explained first. That is, by inserting a plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the interlocking plate part A442 into a plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffusion plate A444, the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned with respect to each other, and the diffusion plate A444 The diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are positioned with respect to each other by inserting a plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the illumination board A445 into a plurality of insertion holes A445a of the illumination board A445.

Then, the fastening screws passing through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid part 443 are fastened and fixed to the plurality of threaded parts A442b of the interlocking plate part A442, thereby creating a diffusion plate between the interlocking plate part A442 and the rear lid part 443. A444 and the illumination board A445 are held in a manner that allows displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pins) to the extent that the positioning pins A442a and A444b do not fall off. Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting fastening screws into the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid part 443 come into contact with the illumination board A445 and press it against the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship where loads occur. This pressing force allows the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 to be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (shown as approximately square chip shapes in FIG. 337) with optical axes directed toward the diffuser plate A444 on the front side.

The diffuser plate A444 has a wave pattern formed from protrusions concentrically spread around an axis-corresponding position A444c arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed on the interlocking plate part. It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

A fitting part A444d is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A444 and projects toward the front side and has a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442.In the assembled state, the fitting part A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. It will be done.

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through the diffuser plate A444 and is emitted from the light emitting means A445b.

The illumination board A445 is provided with a connector A445c disposed on the back side and to which an electric wiring FC made of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442. Thereby, the curved position of the electric wiring FC can be configured on the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the curve can be made gentle.

The rear lid part 443 has a ventilation opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to a connector A445c and a circuit component (not shown, such as a capacitor or a resistor), and a ventilation opening 443c that is provided in a direction A416x with respect to the ventilation opening 416c. A through hole A443d formed therethrough is provided.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c will be placed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed to the back side of the rear lid part 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the illumination board A445 and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d, so that the electric wiring FC can be inserted between the connector A445c and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e It is possible to prevent the wiring FC from being displaced. Note that the through hole A443d also has the role of forming a space for arranging the electric wiring FC, and compared to the case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wiring FC It is possible to reduce the load applied to the

In addition, in this embodiment, the small diameter rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the illumination board A445 side similarly to the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the distance between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e and the illumination board A445 is narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid part 443 to the illumination board A445. In other words, only the protruding rib 443b and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the illumination board A445.

Thereby, even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from coming off from the connector A445c.

Next, the manner of connection between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and the details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 includes a support shaft portion A442d that projects with a circular outer shape, a supported shaft hole A442e that is a circular opening coaxial with the center axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and a center axis of the support shaft portion A442d. The roller member A442f is a resin member rotatably supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 about parallel axes and has a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in a circular shape from the upper end of the main body plate portion A441a, and A shaft support hole A441c is formed in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft part A441b and is bored at the lower end of the main body plate part A441a, and a long straight line extends from the front side of the main body plate part A441a to the front side. A plurality of protruding guide protrusions A441d, a plurality of displacement stopper protrusions A441e protruding toward the front side in an elongated shape extending in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the guide protrusions A441d, An inclined surface A441f that slopes outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position facing the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, and a direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as small diameter grooves along the direction A441h and a recessed part A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate part A441a are fastened to the back side of the main body plate part A441a. A fastening portion A441i that protrudes in a manner in which a screw can be fastened is provided.

The support shaft portion A441b and the supported shaft hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for how to assemble it, after arranging the interlocking plate part A442 so that the pivoted support hole A442e of the interlocking plate part A442 is arranged in the shape of an axis of the support shaft part A441b, the interlocking plate part A442 is fitted along the axis. By moving it relative to the guide plate part A441, the support shaft part A441b can be inserted into the supported hole A442e, and the support shaft part A442d can be inserted into the supported hole A441c, thereby forming a supported state. Note that the supported support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, as well as the supported support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d, are configured with dimensions that allow a slight gap to be formed between them so as to be rotatable.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the interlocking plate part A442 and the guided plate part A441 are configured to be pivoted in the above-described manner, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b, and the screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b. By configuring the diameter of the head portion to be larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off from the guided plate portion A441.

The guide protrusion portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the area of contact with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement stopping protrusion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters into the elongated recess A432 when the first operating unit A400 is assembled (see FIG. 324). Formed with a protruding length.

The formation position of the displacement stop protrusion A441e is designed so that when the guided plate part A441 is placed at the end of displacement, the displacement stop protrusion A441e is placed at the end of the elongated recess A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate part A441 does not stop normally at the end of displacement, the displacement of the guided plate part A441 is regulated by locking the displacement stopping protrusion A441e with the elongated recess A432. be able to.

The inclined surface A441f is a flat surface for receiving and guiding the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the illumination board A445. By forming it at an angle, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. Note that the manner in which the electric wiring FC made of a flat cable is bent will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide protrusion A424 of the support plate part A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424, and has a cross-sectional half-shaped groove from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It has an overhang that extends in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the projecting portions is slightly longer than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A424 can be reduced while suppressing the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends from being deviated from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion provided in order to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the right-hand insertion hole A431a of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, in this embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 is configured to be disposed on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), and is connected to the displacement side elongated hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, by transmitting the driving force to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The slide link A450 includes a long link A451 that is rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420, and an irregularly shaped slide member that is connected to the long link A451 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x. A455.

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and includes a shaft support hole A452 bored with a diameter that allows the shaft support A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a shaft support hole A452 on the long side with respect to the shaft support hole A452. A displacement-side elongated hole A453 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at an end, and a elongated hole-like shape along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side where the displacement-side elongated hole A453 is provided. A transmission-side elongated hole A454 is provided.

The irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed in a concave portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 that is recessed toward the front side of the proximal end surface from which the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420 is protruded, and is connected to the main body plate portion A421 and the elongated link A451. a plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a, and a transmission protrusion portion A455b which is provided in a circular shape and protrudes toward the back side of the main body plate portion A455a and is inserted into the transmission side elongated hole A454 of the long link A451. , a plurality of guided protrusions A455c that protrude in a circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and are inserted into the second guide hole A422b of the support plate portion A420; A spring hanging part A455d that protrudes in a hook shape and is inserted into a hole A423 of the support plate part A420, and the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked) thereon, and is thin enough to enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426. The detection target plate portion A455e is formed in a plate shape, and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 to which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460 is provided.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears that are rotatably supported by the support box part A470, one of which is meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and a pair of transmission gears A461 with which the other gear meshes with the drive gear AMG1. On the other hand, it includes a pin gear A462 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 on the opposite side, and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pin gear A462 in phase.

The pin-equipped gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A463 that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in a circular outer shape, and an arc-shaped transmission protrusion A463 that is centered around the rotation axis of the pin-equipped gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end. It includes an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as a wall portion.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and its growth toward the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, although both the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are portions that similarly transmit load to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456, the locations where the load is generated are different in the front-rear direction. In other words, the location where the load is generated via the transmission protrusion A463 (if the load occurs at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the location where the load is generated via the arcuate wall portion A464. becomes. With the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be explained, so the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be explained below.

339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 339(a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339(b), the illustration of the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC is omitted, and the gear with a pin is shown. Regarding A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are illustrated, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless specifically explained. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c) illustrate a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the retracted position before excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed furthest outward (to the left) and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is made the shortest, so the biasing force is applied from the coil spring ASP1 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pin gear A462, and is located on the extended position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463 from the main body plate portion A455a to the rear surface. A protruding plate portion A456a that protrudes to the side in a plate shape and is arranged opposite to the protruding plate portion A456a with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a. and an insertion gap A456c formed between the protruding plate portion A456a and the opposing placement portion A456b.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the facing portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see Fig. 324), the protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than that of the opposing portion A456b. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b is able to abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction, but does not abut (does not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A464 in the moving direction. That is, the facing portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and a relief part A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed on the open end side. This relief portion A456d allows the transmission protrusion A463 to move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c smoothly (with low resistance).

Although the illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), in the actual assembled state (see FIG. 324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are connected to the drive gear AMG1 and the pin gear A462. and transmits the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 to the pin gear A462.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A440 guided to the first guide hole A422a and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 guided to the second guide hole A422b are connected by a long link A451. . That is, the first displacement member A440 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are respectively displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 which is rotationally displaced around the shaft support A427.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e has entered the detection gap of the detection sensor A426.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 includes a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. Since the arrangement of A442f is restricted between the guide wall part A471b of the support box part A470 and the guide part A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate part A442 moves into the supported hole as the guided plate part A441 slides. It is configured to rotate from A442e as a starting point. An action diagram for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be described.

340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

340(a) to FIG. 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the roller member A442f is at the same position as seen in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339(c), and the guide wall of the support box portion A470 The state in which it is in contact with the bent corner of A471b is illustrated.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 340, it has rotated by the first angle d1 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 340(b)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is tilted by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (by 10 degrees in the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the pin gear A462). It may also be formed as a straight line (tilted). In this case, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the protruding plate part A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive drive resistance is prevented from occurring immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

That is, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate part A456a can be pushed forward vigorously after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0, so that the driving resistance can be reduced. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a 10 degree section can be used as a deceleration section.

341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

341(a) to 341(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 341, it has rotated by the second angle d2 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 341(b)).

342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

342(a) to 342(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 342, it has rotated by the third angle d3 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 342(b)).

Note that in this embodiment, in a state in which the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (A direction parallel to the direction A416x) is configured to be substantially orthogonal, so that the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side elongated hole A453 to the fastening part A441i is set to one side (in this embodiment, the lower side) with respect to the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 It is possible to suppress the rattling of the slide displacement.

343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

343(a) to FIG. 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f changes from the state of FIG. 342(c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 344(c)). ) is shown in a state in which it is disposed approximately at an intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 343, it has rotated by the fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 343(b)).

344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is the first operation along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line of FIG. 319. It is a partial sectional view of unit A400.

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is placed in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state).

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 344, it has rotated by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 344(b)).

When the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction to the direction A416x. Here, since the circular arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimension relationship in which they abut in the direction A416x, even after the transmission protrusion portion A463 is separated from the protruding plate portion A456a, the circular arc wall portion A464 Displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is regulated in a state where it is in contact with the protruding plate portion A456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A456a to the arcuate wall part A464 passes through the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462, the gear with pin A462 can be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A456a. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be regulated with only the driving force required to rotate the gear with pin A462.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a increases over time. It is thought that the frictional force generated will increase. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, so that the transmission This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the state of contact with the protrusion A463 to the state of contact with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456.

By the time the pin-equipped gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 345, the pin-equipped gear A462 has rotated by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) from the initial angle d0 (see FIG. 360). After the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate part A456a and is displaced without contacting other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is regulated from displacement by coming into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464, and is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 344(b) (displacement in the return direction is regulated). ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission target portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission receiving part A456 is a position on the extended position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) is different from the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345. This prevents the shape of the insertion gap A456c from changing even if the pin gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and overloads the transmission protrusion A463 or the irregularly shaped transmission part A456. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 will be affected after an overload occurs.

In the state shown in FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction). Since the odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 due to the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 is avoided.

In this way, the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 can be alleviated by elastic deformation (bending and expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement part A456b while avoiding displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455.

As shown in FIG. 345, the location where the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact is the side wall of the facing arrangement part A456b on the detection plate part A455e side, and the transmission protrusion A463 applies a load to the detection plate part A455e by contacting it. ing. In this embodiment, when an overload occurs on the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to overrotation of the pin gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to break preferentially. In other words, the detected plate portion A455e is more fragile than the transmission protrusion A463.

This makes it possible to avoid destruction of the structure of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 that is related to the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 due to the load caused by overrotation of the pin gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be improved.

If the detected plate part A455e breaks, the detected plate part A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. , it is possible to assume the possibility that over-rotation of the pin gear A462 has occurred, and timely maintenance can be performed.

Note that the design aspect of the detection target plate portion A455e is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, for each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be energized until a slight load is applied, causing fatigue damage due to long-term use. The detection plate portion A455e may be designed to break when a load is accumulated for the same number of contact times as the number of durable operations of a portion where this is likely to occur (for example, the transmission protrusion A463). In this case, in addition to being able to predict the possibility of over-rotation of the gear with pin A462, it is also possible to notify when it is time to replace the transmission protrusion A463, so that maintenance can be performed in a timely manner.

FIG. 346(a) is a sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is a sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a). It is a sectional view of unit A400. 346(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in a retracted position (also referred to as a retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state). ) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), an electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate part A441 and the rear cover part 443.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to come into contact with the electric wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is located at a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440) (drawn toward the side away from the first displacement member A440). It is possible to ensure a distance between the inclined surface A441f and the electric wiring FC.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490, while when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, the electric wiring FC is placed into the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490. Ru. Thereby, the space VE to be described later can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electrical wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means for blocking the view to the electrical wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from being visually recognized when viewed from the front, back, right, and left. Space VE will be explained.

The space VE is in an inclined posture in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, with the side surface visible to the player (the surface where the opening A442c on the interlocking plate part A442 side is formed) facing the third symbol display device 81 side. This is the space behind the building that is created in conjunction with the structure. In this way, the space VE is configured such that the first displacement member A440 is formed into a plate shape, and the first displacement member A440 has an inclined posture that is easy to see to the player in the retracted state where the first displacement member A440 has a wide posture in the front and back direction. It is easily formed by

On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters by displacement, so if the visibility of the second displacement member A490 is considered, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view when viewed from the front. Since the field of view when viewed from the front expands at an angle centering on the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer contour of the space VE be formed so as to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacturing, the outer contour of the space VE (boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed as a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created to improve the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region where the wiring is loosened and arranged. As a result, when the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is placed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the area required for loosening the wiring (in other words, , the area between the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 and the first displacement member A440) can be made unnecessary.

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the electrical wiring FC is placed inward of the rear case A310. While being accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (close to) the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 has the front side of the interlocking plate portion A442 located on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)). In the displacement process up to (see), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly the side portion at the protruding position) protrudes further to the front side than the front limit line FL. This overhang means that during the process of the first displacement member A440 being displaced from the retracted position, the attitude change of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the state in which the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 339(c)). 342(c)), the first displacement member A440 may extend beyond the front limit line FL to the front side, especially on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (left side in FIG. 346).

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440, so the arrangement of the illumination board A416 is made further away from the first displacement member A440 (front side However, in this embodiment, by not forming the illumination board A416 on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (on the left side in FIG. 346), a space for the first displacement member A440 to protrude is created. is formed. In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416 is visually recognized is the area on the illumination board A416. This avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 so as to protrude from the outer edge of the illumination board A416, the distance between the front and back of the arrangement of the illumination board A416 and the first displacement member A440 can be reduced. Although it is narrowed, it is possible to secure a sufficient range in which the light emitting effect by the illumination board A416 can be visually recognized.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operating unit A400 that occur due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effects. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when it is placed in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

347(a), FIG. 347(b), and FIG. 348 are front views of the first operating unit A400. FIG. 347(a) shows a retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 347(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed in the middle of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342). The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the extended state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 347(b) and 348, the shape of the portion of the first displacement member A440 that is hidden by the front cover A410 is illustrated with hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 is disposed on the back side of the front cover A410 to diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416. and a second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is disposed on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 at least in the extended position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffuser plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first area AC1 in front view, since the illumination board A416 is disposed in the first area AC1, The light is blocked by the illumination board A416.

Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffuser plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the illumination board A416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (See FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state with the light irradiated from.

To explain in detail, the modes of the second area AC2 include a mode in which the light emitting device A416a is turned on and a mode in which the light emitting device A445b is turned off, a mode in which the light emitting device A416a is turned off and a mode in which the light emitting device A445b is turned on, and a mode in which the light emitting device A416a and the light emitting device are turned on. The light emitting device A445b is configured to be switchable in at least four modes: a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned on, and a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is made visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 has an edge on the third symbol display device 81 side of the front cover A410 as the through hole A412. A plurality of elongated holes A412a are formed at three locations in a straight line along the section.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged outside the opening A442c. (Do not place them facing each other). Thereby, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be made higher when it is visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a than when it is visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a on both sides.

For example, when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is made visible through the central elongated hole A412a, but is not visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b is visible in a mixed state through the central elongated hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a is visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the mode (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the light emission mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) while the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 is off. . Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 348), as long as the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect on the light emitting performance by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the aspect of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state where it is placed at the overhanging position 440, the elongated hole A412a, which is commonly formed in each of the first operation units A400 at a position closer to the third symbol display device 81, is illuminated. Since the light emission mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

Note that the effect of changing the aspect visually recognized through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, with the first displacement members A440 of the first movement units A400 disposed in a set of five units placed in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is turned on, and at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off. The light emitting means A445b of the displacement member A440 may be turned on in order to emit light in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In this case, by leaving the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained while only the mode of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a is changed sequentially in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. can be executed.

Here, the light emission mode of the other first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be explained. The first operating unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the lower left in front view, the first operating unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left in front view, and the first operating unit A400C is , is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front, and the first operating unit A400D is the fifth unit from the lower left when viewed from the front clockwise. The main differences between the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operating unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the openings corresponding to the openings A442c of the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are illustrated as openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first operating unit A400 for convenience. Attach the sign.

FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400A. Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400A is configured such that the opening WA overlaps the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (it is longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the extended position, the width of the opening WA and both ends change. The area overlapping with the elongated hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a can be changed in conjunction with each other.

FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400B. Note that FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows a state where the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400B is configured such that the opening WB may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WB is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the area where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WB overlap is set to the maximum in the state shown in FIG. 350(a), and the first displacement member It can be configured so that it decreases at one end as A440 is displaced, and then increases again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a can be changed in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction).

FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400C. Note that FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), unlike the first operating unit A400, the first operating unit A400C is configured such that the opening WC may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WC is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is tapered and widened in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a and the opening WC overlap is temporarily decreased and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It can be configured as follows. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a at both ends can be changed in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction).

352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400D. Note that FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A440 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operating unit A400D, unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WD has a branching shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD has a shape that branches near the lower end in such a manner that it widens toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440.

Thereby, the range where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position can be divided. In other words, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from a mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), to a state in which the central long hole A412a divides the light into a plurality of ranges. It is possible to change the mode to emit light (see FIG. 352(b)).

Note that in the first operation unit A400D, a case has been described in which the central elongated hole A412a is divided by the edge of the opening WD, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the entire three elongated holes A412a are targeted and the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided. That is, when the three elongated holes A412a and the opening WD overlap so that uniform light can be seen through the three elongated holes A412a, and when the opening WD overlaps with the central elongated hole A412a of the three elongated holes A412a. By not overlapping with the long holes A412a at both ends but only with the long holes A412a at both ends, the range in which the light can be seen is divided into the central long hole A412a and is configured to be switchable between cases where it is limited to the long holes A412a on both sides. Also good.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The support box portion A470 includes a main body box portion A471 formed in a box shape with an open front and upper right side, and a shaft hole bored in the main body box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472, a shaft support hole A473 drilled to be able to pivotally support the second displacement member A490, a notch A474 formed in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and the notch. A fastening part A475 that is protruded in a columnar shape near the notch part A474 and has a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate part A480 can be screwed therein, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. The pinion supporting section A477 supports a pinion A517 that meshes with a slide rack A511 supported by the rack supporting section A476.

The main body box part A471 has a protruding wall part A471a that protrudes like a wall from the back bottom edge to the back side, and a protruding wall part A471a that protrudes like a wall from the front upper edge to the front side. The guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f in the state (see FIG. 324), and the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the protruding wall portion A471a on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 in between. A wiring guide part A471c is provided.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f comes into contact with the edge of the guide wall portion A471b, and the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in a sliding or rolling manner (Fig. 339 (See Figure 344).

The shape of the wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, can be appropriately corrected, and the details will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, but the details will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions that protrude toward the back side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510, and a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and extending toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Be prepared.

The pinion support part A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate-like) wall-like (plate 477b.

The pin-equipped gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the same-phase member A465 are connected through the shaft hole A472. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the manner in which the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are connected will be described.

FIG. 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465, and FIG. 353(b) is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 on the left side, and the right side is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465. It is a rear perspective view of gear A462 with a pin and phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are shown in a posture in which the sides connected to each other are in the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pin-equipped gear A462 has a plurality of phasing circumferential protrusions A462a that protrude toward the same-phase member A465 from the side facing the same-phase member A465. Be prepared.

The in-phase member A465 has a phase matching diameter protrusion A465a that protrudes from the surface facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and a phasing diameter protrusion A465a that extends from the eccentric position toward the rear side in a circular shape. It includes a protruding transmission protrusion A466, and an arcuate wall part A467 formed as an arcuate wall part with the transmission protrusion A466 as the base end and the axis of rotation of the in-phase member A465 as the center. Compared to the transmission protrusion A466, the arcuate wall portion A467 has a shorter shape growth toward the back side.

The phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be explained. The phase-aligning circumferential protrusion A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by cutting along the axial direction in a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

Further, the phasing radial protrusion A465a is provided with a protrusion that protrudes radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, and the protrusion is It is formed to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By inserting the protrusion into the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected while the same-phase member A465 is in phase with the pin-equipped gear A462, The pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting a fastening gear along the central axis of the pin gear A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a.

Here, in this embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a are not made equal (120 degree intervals in the case of three divisions as in this embodiment), but are made uneven. The pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 are configured to be connected only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b)).

That is, by combining the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a at 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them unequal), the angle at which the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected is determined. Relationships can be limited to one type.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the notch (phase matching diameter protrusion A465a) of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a is formed in three places is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number may be one or two locations, or a plurality of four or more locations, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The rear plate part A480 includes a main body plate part A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening part that is bored in the main body plate part A481 and screwed into a fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer periphery of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for positioning by coming into contact with the outer periphery. and a plurality of protruding plate parts A484 that protrude from the main body plate part A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape that follows the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in plane contact with the rear side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and the protrusion is used for positioning in the left-right direction. Only the mounting plate part A484 functions.

On the other hand, at the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336), the alignment protrusion A483 and the arcuate wall portion A477b abut against each other in multiple directions (up, down, left and right directions). can be aligned. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a large space can be secured near the outer edge by eliminating the positioning portion from near the outer edge. In this embodiment, this secured space is utilized as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), but the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 has its protruding tip disposed close to and facing the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents the wiring from passing through), and the rack pinion A510 The movement range of the slide rack A511 and the outer area are divided. This can prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, but details will be described later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 includes a supported plate A491 formed of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and supported in a supported hole A473 of the support box part A470, and A cover made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, which is formed to have the same internal shape as the external shape of the supported plate A491, is fitted to the supported plate A491 from the front side, and covers the supported plate A491 from the front side. It includes an installation member A492, and an illumination board A493 on which a light emitting part A493a composed of an LED or the like is arranged and accommodated in a pivoted support plate A491 and a covering member A492.

The supported support plate A491 includes a supported protrusion A491a that has a circular outer shape and is inserted into the support hole A473, and a protruding length that is shorter than that of the supported protrusion A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c drilled through which fastening screws can be inserted, and an elongated hole A491d drilled in an elongated rectangular shape along the radial direction of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a. , a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on the insertion hole A491c, and a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side in a slender projecting shape along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. A plurality of narrow protrusions A491f are provided.

When the second displacement member A490 is assembled (see FIGS. 335 and 336), the circular support portion A491e and the narrow protrusion A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A493, and push the illumination board A493 toward the back side. Support from.

In particular, the narrow protrusion A491f is formed at a location where the shape of the housed illumination board A493 is constricted, that is, at a location where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted support plate A491 is recessed inward. It is possible to selectively support the portion where the shape of A493 is constricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress deformation of the illumination board A493 at the constricted portion where the rigidity is likely to decrease due to the shortening of the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the illumination board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported part A493b of the illumination board A493, and includes a plurality of fastening parts A492a into which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes A491c are screwed, and a radial direction on the base side of the fastening parts A492a. A plurality of protruding support portions A492b protruding from and coupled to the plate-shaped portion of the covering member A492, and a thin protrusion A491f of the pivoted support plate A491 are attached to the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. It is provided with a plurality of narrow protrusions A492c projecting toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape.

With the above configuration, the illumination board A493 has its outer peripheral edge supported by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported around the fastening screw by the circular support part A491e and the protruding support part A492b. Thereby, the illumination board A493 can be well fixed to the shaft supported plate A491 and the covering member A492.

Note that the manner in which the illumination board A493 is supported is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed by applying a load to the illumination board A493 along the fastening direction, or there may be a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load (for example, the front and rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c may be fixed to the illumination board A493). It may also be possible to maintain the arrangement of the illumination board A493 without creating a load by forming it with the same dimensional relationship as the thickness of the A493.

The illumination board A493 has a plurality of light emitting parts A493a described above, a plurality of supported parts A493b which are bored or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening part A492a in front and rear view, and are arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which the end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board side connector A493 is fixed in such a position that the wiring extends along the long direction of the elongated hole A491d of the shafted support plate A491. A section extension part A491d1 that extends in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extension part A491d1. A wide protrusion portion A491d2 is formed that protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side with reference to the protrusion portion A491d2.

Based on the section extension part A491d1, a board-side connector A493c is arranged on the visible area side of the third symbol display device 81 (left side in FIG. 355), and on the opposite side, a long wiring is connected to the board-side connector A493c. Passes through hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the section extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493.

Thereby, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring between the board side connector A493c and the compartment extension part A491d1, so that when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the wiring on the circuit board side It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to stand up toward the back side of the shaft-supported plate A491 (in the direction in which the protrusion portion A491d2 is provided). The wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch A474, compared to the case where the wiring HC is arranged close to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the protruding portion A491d2 protrudes at right angles to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, thereby avoiding contact with the wiring HC. The width of the notch A474 can be suppressed. As a result, a large area (area) of the main body box part A471 on the fastening part A475 side can be secured, so that the rigidity of the main body box part A471 can be ensured, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the fastening part A475 can be improved. be able to.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The rack pinion A510 is meshed with a slide rack A511 that is supported so as to be slidable along the direction A416x, and a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is pivotally supported by a pinion shaft A477a of a support box portion A470. The pinion A517 rotates in synchronization with the sliding movement of the pinion A517, and the reinforcing arm part A518 meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, so that the second displacement member A490 is irremovably supported by the support box portion A470. That is, the reinforcing arm A518 is fastened to the pivoted protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotational center position, and is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the side of the rotational tip of the reinforcing arm A518 (see FIG. 355). . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the direction A416x and large enough to allow the support columnar part A476a of the support box part A470 to be inserted therethrough, and a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of a plate along the gear part. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 that protrudes in a plate shape toward the front side at a position apart from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction; It includes an irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 to which the driving force is transmitted from the member A465.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small diameter end portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed to have a larger diameter than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, that displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, in the slide rack A511, the plate-like parts are arranged opposite to the back bottom part of the main body box part A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large diameter part of the support columnar part A476a. It is configured to be able to slide along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap therebetween, and the protruding plate portion A514 is placed opposite to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a slight gap. They are placed facing each other with a gap between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent this displacement from occurring.

Note that there are various reasons why the slide rack A511 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Examples include a case where a player applies an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called knock), a case where a gap is clogged with fine particles, and the meshing resistance becomes excessive, causing an excessive load at the meshing position. Ru.

356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. Note that in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted for ease of understanding, and the irregularly shaped cover is The plate portion of the slide rack A511 is shown broken so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged for easy understanding.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 358) is illustrated in chronological order.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. In this way, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pin gear A462, as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, The pin gear A462 will rotate, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the same-phase member A465, and the transmission protrusion A466 can enter into the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 so that it can move independently (applying a load to the slide rack A511). A non-transmission recess A515a that is recessed in the non-transmission recess A515a and a connection recess A515b having the same depth that is connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a. There is an insertion gap A515c which is a recess of the same depth connected to the connection recess A515b on the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a front side from the slide rack A511 on the retracted position (lower left) side than the transmission protrusion A466. A protruding plate portion A515d that protrudes to the side in a plate shape and constitutes the left side of the insertion gap A515c, and an interval larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466 at the protruding position (upper right) side of the protruding plate portion A515d. A facing portion A515e is provided, which is spaced apart from the protruding plate portion A515d and forms the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the facing portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than that of the opposing portion A515e. It is possible to make contact in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e is able to abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the moving direction, but does not abut (does not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A467 in the moving direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The side surfaces of the protruding plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connection recess A515b has the same function as the relief part A456d of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. Thereby, the transmission protrusion A466 can be smoothly moved forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A515c (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465 is similar to the gear with pin A462 and is connected to the drive motor. The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by drive gear AMG1 and a pair of transmission gears A461, thereby rotating (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, a displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited, the drive gear AMG1 rotates, and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356(a), the drive gear AMG1 is in a state before it rotates, and the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side, and the second displacement member A490 is accordingly placed at the retracted position. The state in which the image is displayed is illustrated.

In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is not in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x), while the arcuate wall part A467 is in contact with the protruding plate part A515d. At A467a, it comes into contact with the protruding plate part A515d from the upper right (extended position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As a result, the displacement of the protruding plate part A515d can be restricted by the arcuate wall part A467, so that the slide rack A511 may be unintentionally displaced by an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state. This can be prevented.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A515d to the arcuate wall part A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, the in-phase member A465 cannot be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the in-phase member A465.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d increases over time. It is thought that the frictional force generated will increase. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by vibration during an earthquake, and a force caused when a player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the coupling recess A515b. By the time the in-phase member A465 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. There is no contact with the portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the projecting plate portion A515d from the upper right (projection position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x) at the contact portion A467a. As shown in FIGS. 356(a) and 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is in the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). There is no displacement. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 356(b), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side, similar to the state shown in FIG. 356(a).

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the insertion gap A515c. By the time it is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 357(a), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protruding plate part A515d. come into contact with

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the part of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate part A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357(a), The restriction by the phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced toward the extended position (upper right side).

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has entered the insertion gap A515c. The in-phase member A465 rotates by the third angle d13 from the initial angle d10 until it is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 357(b). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, thereby slidingly displacing the slide rack A511, and the sliding displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 is extended. The state in which it is placed in the extended position is illustrated.

Before being displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by a fourth angle d14 (rotates one or more revolutions). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, thereby slidingly displacing the slide rack A511, and the sliding displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the part of the transmission protrusion A466 that is farthest from the center of rotation of the same-phase member A465 comes into contact with the opposing arrangement part A515e, so when the same-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 358, the slide rack There is a possibility that A511 may be displaced toward the retracted position (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, in a state where the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, the angle d14 (see FIG. 358) is The configuration is such that rotation of the in-phase member A465 is allowed up to the angle dd1.

That is, since the configuration is such that the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion plate part A515d come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion do not contact each other until the rotation by the allowable angle dd1. Since the installation plate portion A515d is not in contact with the slide rack A515d and no load is transmitted, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the moving range on the extended position side.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control to stop the rotation of the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14, when the in-phase member A465 actually rotates beyond the fourth angle d14; Even if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. can.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not exact (even if there is an error of less than the allowable angle dd1), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. With a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the in-phase member A465 and achieve highly accurate displacement of the second displacement member A490 (the second displacement can be achieved without rapidly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465). member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position).

In addition, by deliberately causing a rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, the excess amount is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the phase member A465 is arranged at the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement part A515e are aligned in the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). By making contact in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be defined in the state shown in FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented), so that the reinforcing arm A518 meshed with the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A518 are fastened and fixed. The second displacement member A490 can be prevented from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 is a sectional view of the rear unit BU taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). In addition, in FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the positioning protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. 359. Note that in the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate. The wiring HC is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables with a round cross section connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. will be placed in

As shown in FIG. 359, the part of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493, and runs along the protrusion part A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, since the protrusion portion A491d2 is formed with a protrusion length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided away from the notch portion A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the wiring HC due to rubbing against the notch A474.

On the other hand, since the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2, it will be guided close to the rear plate part A480, and if no measures are taken, there is a risk that the wiring HC will rub against the rear plate part A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC is suitably inserted between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, thereby suppressing the friction between the wire and the rear plate portion A480. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. To be more specific, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the illumination board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around a winding part A471a1 that is formed so that a cable tie KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the protruding wall part A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening part A475 once, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475 so that even in the slack state (see FIG. 356(a)), the wiring HC is separated from the fastening part A475 in the upper direction (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound with the binding band KB extends). The amount of displacement can be suppressed. Thereby, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is used as the portion around which the wiring HC is wound, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate part A480 to the support box part A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening part A475 through the rear plate part A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is being screwed in.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side where the fastening part A475 protrudes) is facing upward, and after wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475, the rear plate part A480 is attached to the support box part A470. By placing the HC and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening part A475, assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from hanging in the direction of gravity in the main body box part A471, so the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening part A475 is designed to be forced to be assembled in a downward position, it is easier to assemble the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480 by wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475. It can be done.

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the binding band KB is guided (pushed) toward the rear plate portion A480 side. Thereby, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate part A480 at the upper part of the fastening part A475 which is closest to the fastening part A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that no tensile load is applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wiring HC intersects with each other. At this position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that it slides between the already placed wiring HC and the support box part A470.

As a result, a state can be created in which the intermediate portion HCa contacts the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side from the rear plate portion A480 side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate by the protrusion portion A491d2. The degree of proximity to the portion A480 side can be suppressed.

The manner in which the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described. The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box part A470 or the rear plate part A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the entire length of the wiring HC between the cable tie KB and the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 is used to generate a displacement (bending) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) caused by this can be made uniform, it is possible to avoid a large local load on the wiring HC.

The board-side connector A493c is at the retracted position compared to the supported protrusion 491a that functions as the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the extended position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the retracted position, the substrate side is located inside the support plate portion 420 (see FIG. 346(a), right side) that blocks the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490. A connector A493 is provided.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outside the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. In other words, by arranging the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the extended position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring can be maintained while ensuring a large amount of overhang of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to prevent the HC from being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported protrusion A491a. When the board-side connector A493c is placed on one side (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)) with respect to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c between the outward and return trips of the second displacement member A490. This makes it possible to suppress variations in the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, the displacement of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. Therefore, the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and rotated approximately 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c extends is approximately parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is set at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (the amount of deflection) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

To explain the local displacement of the wiring HC in comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the part that was in contact with the upper part of the fastening part A475 and the part that was placed below the fastening part A475 are It is rising slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of penetrating the wires HC cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wiring HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the extended position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load to maintain the posture along the left-right direction is generated, compared to the case where the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357(a)). Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protruding portion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa is not inserted between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment, only when there is a possibility that excessive frictional force will be generated between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the rear plate part A480 and the board side connector A493c, the intermediate part HCa is inserted between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c. The wiring HC is inserted into the rear plate portion A480 so as to have the effect of separating the wiring HC from the rear plate portion A480.

On the other hand, if the possibility of excessive frictional force occurring is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b), by eliminating the front and back overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c, It is possible to prevent unnecessary resistance from occurring in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the extended state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357(b), the local displacement of the wiring HC is as follows: The part has gone down a little, and the part that was located below the fastening part A475 has gone up a little. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is such that it approaches the straight line side connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the extended position (that is, rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide part A471c, thereby changing its position. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed with one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

Specifically, in the extended state of the second displacement member A490, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and touching the lower end of the wiring guide part A471c connects the fastening part A475, which is the path of the wiring HC, and the protruding wall part A471a. It is configured to pass between. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 based on the initial angles d0 and d10. Note that in the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is continuously displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5, and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5. While stopping from d10 to the second angle d12, the displacement continues from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440, and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are determined. An angular range in which no driving force is generated is inserted between the rotation angle range of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 for generating the driving force. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner in which the angle range is set is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, at the same time as the first displacement member A440 is switched from a state in which it continues to be displaced to a stopped state, the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from its stopped state. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the timing of simultaneously displacing the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 does not occur, a single drive motor AMT1 can displace a plurality of members (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490), the load applied to the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load applied from a single member can be kept).

Further, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced, a section in which it is necessary to generate the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is defined. The angle can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, since the member that is displaced is switched at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, the pin-equipped gear A462 By reversing and rotating the same phase member A465, one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490) is stopped while the other member (second displacement member A490 or first displacement member A490) is stopped. A440) can be operated in reverse.

Note that, as described above, the configuration is such that there is no need to add a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the abutting position for regulating the displacement of one member, the members abut (rub) in line contact with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small-sized drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

In addition, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. This also makes it possible to drive the vehicle in such a manner.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the rotation is mechanically restricted when the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 rotate through the sixth angle d6, before they rotate by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). . Therefore, since it does not rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, even if the second displacement member A490 has a configuration (control mode) in which the accuracy of stopping the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low and is likely to over-rotate. can be maintained in the extended position (see Figure 358).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, while allowing the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 to rotate by the allowable angle dd1 beyond the fourth angle d14, they continue to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 and reach the sixth angle d6. When it reaches, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be immediately stopped by mechanical regulation.

This ensures that the second displacement means A490 does not reach the extended position by controlling the stop at an angle (tolerable amount) that slightly exceeds the fourth angle d14 (tolerable amount) for the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being accidentally stopped when the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 becomes large unintentionally. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

Since the arc wall portion A464 is formed with a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position where the first displacement member A440 is restricted (the position of the fifth angle d5) Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where it abuts the first displacement member A440), it is possible to maintain displacement regulation of the first displacement member A440 at the extended position.

Note that the state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to a state in which the detected plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. There is little possibility that the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 will become large unintentionally near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arcuate wall portion A467 has an angle smaller than that of the arcuate wall portion A464 (this embodiment In this case, it is formed at an angle of about 210 degrees). Thereby, the cost of materials necessary for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81, and is located below the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. will be placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operating unit A700 includes an elevating unit A701 that is held by a rectangular plate-like member that is elongated on the left and right sides, and includes an elevating portion A702 configured to be able to move up and down; It is provided with a production unit A710 which can be displaced between a retracted position and an extended position by the raising and lowering operation of A702, and is configured to be operable (capable of production) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports an elongated elevating portion A702 on the left and right sides, and includes a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported around the left and right end portions, and a pair of arm members A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit driving force to the drive motor A704.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, gear teeth are formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotating shaft side, and the gear teeth are fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. A gear transmission mechanism in which gears mesh with each other is exemplified.

In addition, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided that protrudes in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted into the long hole is eccentric, and gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery. A gear link transmission mechanism may also be used in which gear teeth of the body mesh with a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the rotational outer diameter direction end of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to the fact that the shape of the back side of the game board A13, which is disposed opposite to the front side of the second operating unit A700, is left-right asymmetric (see FIG. 306), the drive motor A704 is arranged horizontally. It is considered asymmetrical. That is, by inserting the drive motor A704 into a gap (space) on the back side of the game board A13, the front-back width required for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operating unit A700 is suppressed.

In this way, since it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 to match the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferable.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that demarcates the production range of the production unit A710, a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 arranged below the annular front cover A711 and fastened and fixed to an upper lid part A740 to be described later, In addition, a skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is disposed under the cover A712 and overlapped with the rear side and is fastened and fixed to the elevating part of the elevating unit A701, is shown disassembled and separated to the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed into an annular shape that is substantially the same as the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid part A740, A rotating body A720 is shown rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front, and is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. It is possible to receive light emitted from light emitting means A715a such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of illumination boards A715. Three light emitting units A715a are arranged on each side of the pentagon formed by the illumination board A715 at equal intervals in the side direction.

In addition, in this embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of three LEDs arranged on each side of a pentagon at equal intervals in the side direction, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting unit A715b causes the annular front cover A711 to emit light by irradiating light onto the back side of the annular front cover A711. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, each of the five flat illumination substrates A715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, and the illumination substrate A715 above the rotary body A720 is in a horizontal position, and the illumination substrates on the lower left and right sides The light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the lower end of the illumination board A715 faces the rotation axis, and its optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each illumination board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer part of the rotating body A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotating body A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body A720, so it is possible to perform a dazzling performance. .

In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the rotating body A720 to reflect light, the outer surface of the rotating body A720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, etc.). The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and various other aspects may be used. For example, a reflective colored tape may be attached.

As described above, since the rotating body A720 rotates around the rotating axis that extends in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotating axis is transmitted along the rotating axis of the rotating body A720, regardless of whether or not the rotating body A720 rotates. The same area of the body is irradiated. In this embodiment, the upper part of the rotating body A720 is opened by forming a light passing recess A722a at that location so that light can pass therethrough, but the details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have concave portions A711a and A714a, which constitute a window through which light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes, on opposing edges, and a recessed portion A714a for enclosing the rotation axis of the rotating body A720. It includes semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b that are recessed to have a semicircular cross section.

The inner circumferential surface of the ring, excluding the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a, and the other outer surfaces are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714, so that the light emitted from the same light emitting means A715a can be It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a while performing a dazzling performance.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can be done. In this embodiment, the shape of the window formed by the concave portions A711a and A714a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a, so that the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reduced. It is possible to secure a wide area for reflecting light without damaging it.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712, and lower cover A713 of the production unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members each supported by a plurality of supporting parts A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and includes a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotating member A721, and a second rotating member configured to be rotatable on the outside of the first rotating body 721 and made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material and composed of a pair of members. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and has a pair of shell parts A722 which are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 at the lower part. and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recess formed on the back side of the front shell part A722, and has gear teeth carved on the back side. , is disposed on the back side of the annular gear member A723, is rotatably supported between the pair of shell parts A722, and the gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft part are in contact with the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 that is fitted together.

The pair of shell portions A722 are provided with light passage recesses A722a recessed in the direction away from each other in their upper portions. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passing recess A722a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side than the concave end of the light passing recess A722a. It is arranged in such a manner that

That is, even if you look into the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a when viewed from above, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible when viewed in that direction, so the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723 can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A723 can avoid blocking the light, and the light is directed to the central rotating member A724. can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, illustration of the shell part A722 on the back side is omitted, and for convenience of explanation, the fixed gear SG disposed non-rotatably above the support part A730 is an annular gear. It is shown in mesh with member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be explained. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 disposed inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG changes. Displacement (tooth alignment changes).

In this embodiment, the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, so that relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is ensured by rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotating member A724 meshed with the annular gear member A723 rotates as the annular gear member A723 rotates. The rotational axis of the central rotational member A724 extends in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the vertically extending axis (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotational axis of the first rotational member A721. As the shell portion A722 of the one-rotation member A721 rotates (horizontal rotation on the vertical axis), the central rotation member A724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation on the horizontal axis). Note that the relationship in the rotation direction will be described later.

Since the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 continues to change within the same plane as the shell portion A722 rotates (in synchronization with the rotation angle), the player can rotate the central rotation member A724 at multiple rotation axes in the up, down, left, and right directions. You can make it appear as if it is rotating. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear tooth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the number of teeth of the central rotating member A724 are The absolute value of the rotation angle is synchronized. As a result, during the rotation of the shell portion A722, each time the shell portion A722 assumes a posture in which the ring shape is visible in front view as shown in FIG. 368 (every half rotation), the central rotating member A724 As shown in the figure at 368, the posture is such that the disk portion side faces the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 366 and 367. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members that are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 below the first rotating member A721. The rod-shaped extension part A728a is formed in a rod-shape and extends upward so as to pass through the outside of the rotary member A721 and reach a position overlying the first rotating member A721 from above.

The rod-shaped extension part A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721, and depending on the arrangement, it may hide a part of the first rotating member A721, or it may hide a part of the first rotating member A721. Although it is possible to configure a case in which it is visible (a case in which it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721), details will be described later.

Note that the outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are configured to be slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the annular rear cover A714, so that the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are prevented from coming off while the annular rear cover A714 is installed. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembling) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) that are fastened and fixed to the supporting part A730, and these rotate as the supporting part A730 rotates. do. Next, this support portion A730 will be explained.

FIG. 369(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support part A730 includes a first support part A731 whose main body is formed into a cylindrical shape from a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and a first support part A731 which is colorless and light-transmissive. A second support part A735 whose main body is formed from a transparent resin material into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support part A731, and configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction. A shaft part A751 fixed to a box-shaped part A750, which will be described later, is inserted into the inside of the first support part A731 and second support part A735, and an irregularly shaped shaft is inserted at the tip side of the shaft part A751. It is supported in a non-removable manner by a metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and a fixed gear SG, which are fixed in a non-rotatable manner by fitting with the metal ring C1.

The first support portion A731 includes a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and through which the shaft portion A751 can be inserted, and the main body. A plurality of support plate parts A732 extend in a straight line in both directions from the upper end of the main body part and have through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted. A pair of protruding portions A733.

The protruding portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed to have different widths from each other. Ru. This makes it easier to match the angle between the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support part A731 during fitting, compared to the case where the pair of protruding parts A733 are formed with the same width. can do.

As shown in FIG. 369(b) and FIG. 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a half-cylindrical portion A736 forming the cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the half-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical divided bodies including a plurality of half-support plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The half-cylindrical part A736 includes a recessed fitting part A736a that is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the circular arc at the lower end side part, and a recessed fitting part A736a that is provided in a rectangular shape that projects radially outward from the end of the circular arc. A protruding fitting portion A736b is provided.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is a recess that fits into an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760, which will be described later, and the protrusion fitting portion A736b fits into a notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. It is a protrusion that fits.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b, and the inner wall has a radially outer wall portion of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. By restricting the displacement and fitting the protruding fitting part A736b into the notch part A762c, it is possible to support the divided body constituting the second support part A735 inseparably.

Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they abut in the circumferential direction of rotation with the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft portion A751 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission section for transmitting the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 to the second support section A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from being split and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the half-cylindrical portion in which the half-support plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a can reduce the contact area between the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer surface of the first support portion A731, thereby reducing the generated frictional force.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be generated when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at the location disposed between the half-support plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be tightened compared to the design dimensions. . In contrast, in this embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at a position between the half-support plate portions A737, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 come into contact at a location where sliding friction is likely to occur. The area can be reduced. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the second support part A735 and the first support part A731 can be effectively reduced while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove part A735a.

The half support plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude from one of the divided members. Fastening of the alignment protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c bored in the other divided body as a through hole large enough to allow the alignment protrusion A737b to pass through, and the second rotating member A728, which is bored in the thickness direction. A pair of fastening holes A737d are formed in a size that allows the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) to be inserted therethrough.

The half-support plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which is assembled from the outside in the dividing direction, is fastened to the fastening portion A728b with screws. They are connected to each other by screwing in and fastening and fixing. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the half-support plate part A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is equal to the distance between the pair of divided bodies constituting the second support part A735. They differ from each other. That is, the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a disposed on the divided body disposed on the front side is wider than the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a disposed on the divided body disposed on the rear side.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support part A735. That is, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together only when assembled from the correct direction, and when assembled from the wrong direction, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together. Since the position of the two-rotation member A728 is not aligned with the recessed portion and the assembly cannot be performed, it is possible to notice the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are approximately the same. There is a possibility that a mistake may be made in attempting to assemble two members of one of the sets. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common), both members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support part A735 are one member (of the combination). This makes it possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble the parts (on one side) before inserting the fastening screws.

Before disassembly, the second support part A735 is limited in its radial separation by the cylindrical protrusion part A762b of the upper transmission mechanism A760 (see FIG. 366), so the assembly of the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 is difficult. , is carried out exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction, and as a result of the parallel movement, the protruding part A733 becomes the notch part A772a, the recessed fitting part A736a becomes the inner protruding part A762d (see FIG. 373), and the protruding fitting part The joint portion A736b is fitted into the notch portion A762c, respectively. Here, due to its shape, the second support part A735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support part A731 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape of the mating member to be assembled, the posture when the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 are assembled together is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the second support part A735 may block the view, making it difficult to assemble the first support part A731.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the second support part A735 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the first support part A731 is formed from a light-impermeable resin material. After assembly, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, since the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support part A731 is assembled is arranged to protrude long above the upper lid part A740, the protrusion part A733 of the first support part A731 is fitted. The position to be used is not hidden by the upper lid part A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the posture can be easily adjusted to a suitable position, so that the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, a through hole A741 surrounding the central axis of the support part A730 is bored in the upper lid part A740 which arranges (accommodates) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, between it and the box-shaped part A750. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper lid part A740 and modify the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770, the upper lid part A740 must be removed in order to remove the shaft part A751 fixed to the box-shaped part A750 from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace part A740 upwards with respect to box-shaped part A750.

At this time, if the support part A730 remains assembled, the support plate part A732 and the half-support plate part A737 will interfere and the upper cover part A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support section A730 before disassembling the upper lid section A740. As mentioned above, in order to disassemble the support part A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and since the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, by having a configuration that requires disassembling multiple members in order in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to illegally access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. This makes it easier to prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid part A740 and the box-shaped part A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a direction view looking down from diagonally above, and FIG. 372 shows a direction view looking up from diagonally below (a direction view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid part A740 is provided with a through hole A741 that is vertically bored at the left and right center position, and supports each transmission member of the upper transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped part A750. A shape (a shape such as an uneven shape) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is disposed below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-shape with at least the top side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed in the open position. A shaft part A751 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) fixed to the bottom plate part A750a and extending vertically coaxially with the center axis of the through hole A741 of the upper lid part A740, and the upper surface side of the box-shaped part A750. a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured with a photocoupler system disposed on the box-shaped portion A750; and a second detection sensor consisting of a detection device configured with a photocoupler system disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A753, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body extends to the lower side and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 that rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and various sensors A752, A753 and the drive motor arranged below the bottom plate part A750a. It includes a relay board A754 to which wiring connected to AMT2 etc. is relayed.

373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760, and the lower transmission mechanism A770. 373 and 374, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is vertically separated from the lower transmission mechanism A770. In FIG. 373, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is shown looking down from diagonally above, and in FIG. 374, it is shown diagonally from below. Illustrated in a directional view looking up.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types (sizes) of gears. That is, the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and the small diameter gear PG2. The drive gear AMG2 is meshed with the drive gear AMG2 and a large diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 also includes a large diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large diameter gear LG11, and a small diameter gear meshing with the large diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as drive gear AMG2.

Detection target pieces A763 and A773, which are detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, respectively, are formed in the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1, which are arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side being upstream.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a small-diameter gear is used, but since a large-diameter gear is arranged again on the downstream side, both large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in this case is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. Detection pieces A773 extending in the axial direction from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four locations (90 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. , when the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees from the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor The state returns to the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both A752 and the second detection sensor A753. In this way, in this embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors such as the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is that there is a timing when only one of the detection sensors functions, but the details will be described later. .

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at multiple locations, so for easy understanding, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first. . The lower transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism disposed below the box-shaped portion A750, and is composed of four mutually meshed gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 as described above.

A plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770, and a protrusion A771a that protrudes radially inward is formed in one of the recesses A771. be done. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed to be different from the internal shape of the other recess A771.

The small diameter gear PG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends upward from the upper surface in a cylindrical shape so as to surround the shaft portion A751. A pair of rectangular notches A772a are formed at the upper end of the cylindrical extension portion A772 at symmetrical positions across the shaft portion A751. This notch A772a is a part that fits into the protruding part A733 of the support part, and is formed as notches having mutually different widths in accordance with the manner in which the protruding part A733 is formed.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is disposed below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being pulled out upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes in the vertical direction, so the number of steps required to extract the large-diameter gear LG1 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid inadvertent removal of the large diameter gear LG1.

Further, by partitioning the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper transmission mechanism A760 can be easily avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid transmitting the driving force between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

Next, details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be explained. The upper transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism disposed on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and is composed of four gears LG11, LG12, PG11, and LG13 that mesh with each other as described above.

Driving force is transmitted to the large diameter gear LG11 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by a one-way clutch housed inside, and when it rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the top). It is configured to idle when rotating, and includes a plurality of protrusions A761 that protrude downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a protrusion in the shape of a curved wall that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. It has a straight line shape with minimal overhang. As a result, it is possible to assemble the drive gear AMG2 only in an attitude in which the protruding portion A771a and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 has a through-hole A762a in the center thereof having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical extension part A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2, and a large-diameter cylindrical shape protruding from the upper surface side. a pair of rectangular notches A762c formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft portion A751 at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b; A pair of inner protrusions protrude along a straight line passing through the central axis of the shaft portion A751 and perpendicular to the notch portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft portion A751 in a top view. A762d.

The cylindrical protrusion part A762b is a part that receives the lower end of the second support part A735 (see FIG. 366) and restricts displacement of the second support part A735 in the dividing direction, and includes the notch part A762c and the inner protrusion part A762d. are parts that are configured to fit with the protruding fitting part A736b and the recessed fitting part A736a of the second support part A735, respectively, and to be able to transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 is formed with the pair of detected pieces A763 described above, and the formation of the umbrella part is omitted at the position where the same angle deviation in the same direction from the detected piece A763 is formed, and the umbrella part is formed in the axial direction. and a cylindrical functional part A765 that is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large diameter gear LG13 and configured to be rotatable relative to the large diameter gear LG13.

The cylindrical functional part A765 includes a pair of rotation regulating protrusions A765a that are disposed at symmetrical positions across the rotation axis and supported by a support groove part A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped part A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the large-diameter gear LG13 is housed inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is smaller (slightly) than the standard, torque transmission is maintained and the load between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is maintained. If the load generated between the two is excessive, the torque transmission is cut off.

In this embodiment, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 idles to cut off the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to generate resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions similarly to a resistance member that constantly produces resistance or a member that produces viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760, the torque limiter As a result, the transmission of torque is cut off and the resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation continues for a certain amount of time (after rotating by a certain degree of angle), the state switches to a state where torque transmission is released. Therefore, before the switching occurs, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise when viewed from above is limited to the posture in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap between the first detection sensor A752 (see FIG. 373). By controlling in this manner, the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in top view can be limited to specific gear teeth.

By forming the specific gear tooth to be elongated in the axial direction as the elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the large diameter gear LG13 can be improved.

Note that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detection target piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 rotates to transmit driving force and then stops, it is possible to detect that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idle and the drive force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 is canceled (when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above) ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. In other words, for example, if the one-way clutch's internal structure is damaged and the driving force transmission is not sufficiently cut off (idling), or if the torque limiter's torque generation function is insufficient due to a malfunction, a major When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 will rotate.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detection target piece A763 has been displaced, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. You can use this to discover problems with the one-way clutch or torque limiter.

Note that the above-mentioned mechanism that uses the torque limiter function to compensate for the release of driving force transmission using a one-way clutch is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction, as in this embodiment. be. That is, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members rotating around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

If the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, a structure may be adopted in which the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted is used to suppress movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released. In the embodiment, it is not possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight, and there is a possibility that the driving force may be transmitted even due to a weak load generated when the one-way clutch idles in the releasing direction.

It is also possible to create friction with other members as a structure to suppress displacement due to idle rotation, but in this case, it would be necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the member, which causes another problem. There is a possibility that this may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed to ensure that driving force transmission is canceled upon switching of the driving direction.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750, and the upper layer transmission mechanism It is a front view of A760 and lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

Transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 also rotates.

When the rotation direction of drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch housed inside large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion portion A761 and large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. By doing so, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 remains in the same state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 that is transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 that is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension part A772 rotates, and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b remains in the same state. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see Fig. 362), the first support part A731 (see Fig. 369) that fits into the cylindrical extension part A772 of the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 ) only rotates, and the second support part A735 maintains the same state, so of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728, the first rotation member A721 ( (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 remains as it is.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11, and the protrusion portion A761 and the large-diameter The gear LG11 rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, when drive gear AMG2 rotates, large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, both the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support section A731 and the second support section A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support section A731 and the second support section A735 rotate. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to each other, rotate.

Here, the rotational directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be explained. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, large diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise in top view, and large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise in top view in the opposite direction. Since the second rotating member A728 rotates, the direction of rotation of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view, the small diameter gear PG1 that meshes with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in a top view, and the small diameter gear PG2 that meshes with the small diameter gear PG1 (Fig. 373 (see) rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is clockwise when viewed from the top.

That is, the rotational directions of the first rotational member A721 and the second rotational member A728 are opposite directions with the shaft portion A751 as the rotational axis. As a result, the player can visually perceive that the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change) compared to a case where the rotation directions of the second rotating member A721 and A728 are the same direction. In addition, it is possible to easily perform effects such as making it appear as if the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating independently.

376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c).

In FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is shown in the initial state. The state (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is illustrated.

377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c).

377(a) and 377(b), a state (second state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the first state is illustrated. 377(c) and 377(d), a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the second state is illustrated.

378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c).

378(a) and 378(b), a state (fourth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the third state is illustrated. 378(c) and 378(d), a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the fourth state is illustrated.

379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c).

379(a) and 379(b), a state (sixth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the fifth state is illustrated. 379(c) and 379(d), a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the sixth state is illustrated.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A721 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIGS. 376 to 379, one section (one period) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

In addition, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the side of the shell portion A722 that is visible when viewed from the front will be described as the front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side thereof as the rear shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side of the central rotating member A724 that is viewed from the front will be described as a member front side A724F, and the opposite side will be described as a member rear side A724B.

Note that in FIGS. 376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), 378(a), 378(c), 379(a), and 379(c), , the optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 (see FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIG. 376(b), FIG. 376(d), FIG. d), FIG. 378(b), FIG. 378(d), FIG. 379(b), and FIG. 379(d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes on this virtual plane VS.

Moreover, in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL that schematically indicate the direction of light reflection are illustrated. The arrow HL represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell portion A722 and travels, and the arrow VL represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 travels. It represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels.

As shown in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), in response to the first rotating member A721 making one rotation counterclockwise when viewed from above, The direction of arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from above. That is, in this embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is directed in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 via the central rotating member A724. The rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 can be changed in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

This is difficult to achieve, for example, with a configuration in which the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721.

For example, since the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, when the light emitting means is arranged on the member front A724F or the member back A724B, the normal of the surface The change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the direction is not a change centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (it is a change in the rotation direction having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, compared to the case where a configuration is adopted in which a light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform a light emitting effect, it is possible to perform a more unexpected light emitting effect. For example, because the rotational direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721 are opposite, the player may feel as if the rotational speed is high compared to the actual rotational speed. It can make you feel.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, as the first rotating member A721 rotates, the central rotating member A724 also rotates, but the surface visible to the player is limited to the front surface A724F of the member. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area visible to the player but as an area intended for another purpose, regardless of its appearance (in this embodiment, light A configuration that can more easily achieve the purpose of reflection can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by deliberately exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause light reflection using the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

Note that the aspect of the member surface of the fastening screw can be arbitrarily set. For example, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted black to make it easier to create shadows, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted with a color to reflect that color, or the fastening screw may be equipped with an LED. A light emitting means such as the like may also be attached.

The effect of light irradiated onto the first rotating member A721 will be explained. Note that in the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. As described above, the illumination board A715 including the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light to the first rotating member A721 is arranged to form each side of a pentagon, and is arranged in a direction perpendicular to each side (in a direction that is tilted to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of The illumination board A715 (see FIG. 364) disposed above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the illumination board A715 disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 can be constantly irradiated with light.

Note that the light emitting means A715a has three LEDs arranged horizontally in parallel, and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light passing recess A722a is formed in a long length in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so that the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also It is easy to reach the central rotating member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recess. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the light emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state or fourth state where the front side A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible when viewed from the front, the illumination from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 reaches the central rotating member A724. In the second and sixth states in which the intensity of the light is maximized and the front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is difficult to see when viewed from the front, the center The intensity of light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 when viewed from the front and the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 includes a light emitting means A715a whose optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell part A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721, but the location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.

That is, the shell portion A722 is placed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 376(b)). In FIG. 378(b)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell portion A722 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

The shell portion A722 is curved at the outer peripheral edge in such a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the outside in the radial direction, and includes a connecting portion A722b that connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with an irregularly shaped arch-shaped bridge. Be prepared. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a to the shell part A722 is transmitted through the curve of the outer peripheral edge of the shell part A722 and the arch of the connecting part A722b. By reflecting it on the curvature of the ball, it can be made to advance toward the player.

In addition, when the shell portion A722 is in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected toward the player (reflected along the arrow HL). Since the player is in a tilted position, it is possible to highlight the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visible darkly, and in the state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is made to appear dark. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect of switching to a bright and visible state.

On the other hand, in a state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell part A722, so at least a portion The light reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, a state in which the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724, and a state in which the light does not reach the central rotating member A724 are as follows. It can be switched depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. Thereby, without controlling the light emission mode (for example, blinking mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that makes the light reaching the central rotating member A724 visually appear to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make it appear as if the light is blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times ( (It can be visually recognized as a light emitting effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), Regardless of the magnitude of the speed, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it were stationary, but depending on the speed, the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724 can be varied.

That is, the faster the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 is, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the shell portion A722 allows the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724.

In this embodiment, as illustrated as the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is , when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a), the longitudinal direction is configured to overlap the shell portion A722. In this embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the front side A724F of the member and the back side A724B (for example, in the direction of arrow LR, direction of arrow UD, or direction of arrow FB in FIG. 376(a)). The short direction is defined as the direction connecting the front side A724F of the member and the back side A724B of the member (direction perpendicular to the arrow FB in FIG. 376(b)).

In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has a longitudinal direction that is equal to the thickness of the shell portion A722 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a). It becomes a posture that goes inside (fits in). Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by blocking the light with the shell part A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. It is possible to easily configure a situation in which the central rotating member A724 is not illuminated while the central rotating member A724 is illuminated.

In addition, when rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is determined by its rotational speed. It's the same regardless. Thereby, the brightness of the first rotating member A721 that is visually recognized by the player can be prevented from changing due to a change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to avoid the first rotating member A721 from being visually recognized darkly.

In addition, in this embodiment, by rotating the first rotating member A721 with the light emitting means A715a turned on, the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 can be changed. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the light emitting means A715a to blink while producing the same effect as when the light emitting means A715a itself is blinked. Therefore, the size of the illumination board A715 can be reduced.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a that emits light from above the central rotating member A724, and the light emitting means A715a that emits light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, The rotating member A721 is configured to be illuminated differently. Therefore, by controlling them separately, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect illustrated below.

For example, in the initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)) of the first rotating member A721, the upper part of the central rotating member A724 By controlling the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to turn on or blink, the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are controlled to turn on or blink. It is possible to perform a lighting effect.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are turned off. By controlling it, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the central rotating member A724 is brightly illuminated and the shell portion A722 is darkly visible.

Also, for example, light is emitted from both directions in the left and right directions, but light is emitted from only one direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side). It is possible to perform complex light-emitting effects by utilizing the difference between the light emitted from the light and the case where the light is reflected to the back side. For example, by configuring the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to emit blue light, and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 to emit red light, For a player viewing from the front, a situation in which the player is visible with blue light and a situation in which a mixture of blue light and red light is visible is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. I can do it.

In this case, the period at which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while controlling the light to turn on continuously without blinking the light. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)), and is transmitted to the large diameter gear LG1 disposed on the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90 degree intervals, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) detects the detected pieces A773 (see FIG. 374) every time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and separately determining the accumulated results.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, each time the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753. While adding 1 to the value of the cumulative counter, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor. Each time A753 is detected, the cumulative counter value is decremented by 1.

If the cumulative counter value is 0 or a multiple of 4, it is the initial state, if (0 or a multiple of 4) +1, it is the second state, and if (0 or a multiple of 4) +2, it is the second state. There are 4 states, and if (0 or a multiple of 4) +3, it can be determined that the state is the 6th state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if it is not possible to specify the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2, by determining the value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state and the The first rotating member A721 can be stopped in any of the second state, the fourth state, or the sixth state.

Therefore, it is possible to perform effects such that the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as a presentation means to notify differences in jackpot expectations or to notify time information (for example, the stopping position changes every two hours).

In addition, although this embodiment has described the case where the detection target pieces A773 are formed at four locations at equal intervals, the detection target pieces A773 are not necessarily limited to this. The detection target pieces A773 may be arranged at non-uniform intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

380(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, FIG. 380(b) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and FIG. 380(c) is a front view of the production unit A710. It is a front view of production unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is a top view of production unit A710 as seen in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c).

381(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, FIG. 381(b) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and FIG. 381(c) is a front view of the production unit A710. It is a front view of production unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is a top view of production unit A710 as seen in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c).

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and in FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is as shown in FIG. 380(c) and FIG. 380(d) shows the first state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) show the second state of the first rotating member A721. ), the third state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise in a top view, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, so that the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It rotates in the opposite direction at the same rotation angle as member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) illustrate the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380(c) 380(d) shows the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the initial state, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) 381(c) and 381(d) show a second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the first state. A third state of the second rotating member A728 is illustrated in which the portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.

Note that since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 380(b), FIG. 380(d), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are shown in schematic diagrams (simplified shape diagrams) for ease of understanding. ) is illustrated in imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a), and 381(c), the outline of the illumination board A715 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b), 380(d) ), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, as the second rotating member A728 rotates, the illumination boards A715 (two boards arranged on the left and right sides) are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721. It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

Here, unlike the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721, which is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a light transmitting resin material, so that it is light-transmissive. Rather than blocking the light as it passes through the optical axis, it acts to change the way the light is refracted and the color of the light. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color. (color mixed with blue).

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed into a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotational axis and is bent along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a are arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is configured so that it does not overlap with any of the optical axes of the

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 does not overlap with the second rotating member A728, on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination substrate A715 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the other illumination substrate A715 overlaps with the second rotating member A728. It doesn't overlap. Note that in the states shown in FIGS. 380(b) and 381(b), the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not, the central rotating member A724 It is possible to increase the number of types of light that reaches the target. That is, the manner in which the light that has passed through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724 is divided into the manner in which only the light that reaches from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728, and the manner in which only the light that reaches from the lower left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. The second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. The appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed depending on whether the light emitting unit A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off and the light emitting unit A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned on. That is, it is possible to switch between causing the central rotating member A724 to emit light in a manner in which the color of the second rotating member A728 is mixed or emitting light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps with the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728. The portion of the central rotating member A724 that is caused to emit light in a mixed manner can be switched.

Note that, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the light passage recess A722a when viewed from above. Thereby, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is independent of the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head to A722a.

Therefore, for example, by configuring so that only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are turned off, It can be avoided that the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect with the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 Control is required to turn off the light emitting means A715a at the timing when the light emitting means A715a intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728), but in this embodiment, the light emitting means A715a is placed above the central rotating member A724. Due to the function of the light emitting means A715a, such control can be made unnecessary.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's view in a posture where the front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the presentation function of the central rotating member A724 is reduced. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel toward the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 while the rotating body A720 continues to rotate.

Here, since the rod-shaped extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view is switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) in a state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). .

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state shown in FIG. 381(a) (see FIG. 377(a)), it becomes the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, in a posture in which the second rotating member A728 is arranged before and after the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381(a)), the second rotating member A728 Since A721 is partially hidden, it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is in the direction facing the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). 379 (d ), and the central rotating member A724 is darkly visible to the player.

In other words, while keeping the visible external shape of the second rotating member A728 the same during displacement, the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (the brightness of the central rotating member A724) is changed, and the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a is changed. It can be generated without any change. In this case, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with the level of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the second rotating member A724 in the state shown in FIG. 381(a) When the rotating body A720 stops, it is possible to increase expectations for the subsequent operation mode, and it is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381(a), , the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward attitude to a front-rear attitude. Along with this, the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees. (changes in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the front surface A724F of the member changes in the front-rear direction. Since the central rotary member A724 is oriented toward the center (because there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the front-rear component of the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 becomes close to 0, and the direction of light reflection returns to the vertical direction. .

In this way, in synchronization with rotating the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is transmitted to the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the front-to-back component of light when reflected. As a result, as the rotation time of the first rotating member A721 increases, it becomes easier to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state, so that the first rotating member A721 rotates. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the first rotating member A721 not only at the moment when the first rotating member A721 starts rotating, but also after the rotating member A721 rotates.

Note that in this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 as it is. In this case, since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is colored and easily visible. .

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. The first rotation member A721 can be rotated by rotating the first rotation member A721, and the second rotation member A728 can maintain its posture from the state shown in FIG. 381(a) and only the first rotation member A721 can be rotated. A total of four ways of presenting the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

Note that the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 377(d)), the left channel (game When the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, there is a right side flow path (a flow path configured in the right side area with respect to the center of the left and right width of the game area, mainly the right side flow path). It can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the channel through which the ball is shot.

For example, when the light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 378(d)), the first It can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the operating units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., and when the light is reflected to the right rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379(d)), the third It can be used as light to brightly illuminate the first operating units A400C, A400D, etc. arranged on the right side of the front side of the symbol display device 81. In this way, the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 can be switched in the direction of facing different members, so by switching the direction of the light, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (locations). I can do it.

Further, the second rotating member A728 has a vertical length that can partition the inner area of the annular front cover A711 into left and right sides when viewed from the front (see FIG. 381(a)). As a result, when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, when the production unit A710 is placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inner side of the annular front cover A711 The display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is visible through the area, can be partitioned into left and right parts. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that performs effects through rotational motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , it is possible to perform an effect in which the first rotating member A721 is rotated while the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from above, and the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate in the opposite direction (when the first rotating member A721 In the driving mode (clockwise rotation direction), the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one rotational direction, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides. In the other rotational direction, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the light emitting mode (color, width, etc.).

In this way, by changing the direction of the rotational drive, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 are It depends on the resolution (switchable number) of the rotational speed of the two-rotation member A728.

Naturally, there is a permissible limit to the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the rotation direction. Since the second rotating member A728 is switched between operating and stopping, even if the rotational speed is the same, changing the rotational direction will change the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724. can be made different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 rotate only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotation direction is different (for example, when there is no second rotating member A728, (e.g., when only the rotational direction of the first rotational member A721 changes and the second rotational member A728 maintains its rotation), doubling the change in the visibility of light that reaches the central rotational member A724. Therefore, variations in the appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be explained. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of vertically inverting the member front A724F while maintaining the attitude in which the member front A724F faces the front side.

Therefore, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upper and lower sides of the front side of the member A724F have been reversed and combined. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724, which is formed into a star shape with five corners, is visually recognized as having a star shape with ten corners.

Note that in this embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed to have a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the shape is not limited to this. For example, the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed to have a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape that is a combination of vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front A724F, it appears as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

Also, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either the upper or lower side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and by reversing the shape or figure vertically and combining them, it is configured to evoke a different concept. You may do so.

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangle shape on the front side of the member A724F in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotational axis when viewed from the front above the rotational axis of the central rotational member A724, when the central rotational member A724 is rotated, it becomes an equilateral triangle. By combining the upper and lower parts, a diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized, and above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724, the lower end overlaps the rotation axis when viewed from the front, and the hiragana ``tsu'' is placed on the front of the member A724F. By drawing a character (figure) in advance, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes are combined at the top and bottom, making it possible to visually recognize the character (figure) of the number "3". With this, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

Referring to FIG. 382, an example of production using the second action unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. FIG. 382 shows a state where the production unit A710 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state where the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Ru.

In FIG. 382, the second state (see FIG. 381(a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is illustrated, and the annular front is located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. In the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening), an image displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Thereby, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize it as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

Note that the means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transparent liquid crystal may be disposed on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the rotating state of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed using the transparent liquid crystal, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. An illumination plate may be disposed on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image on the third symbol display device 81 to be visually recognized as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the display means.

When emitting light from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 in this state, the player expects the mode of light production to occur when the second rotating member A728 is in a rotating state, but when the second rotating member A728 is in a stopped state. Since the light effect can be performed in the manner shown in , it is possible to perform a highly unexpected effect.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, but also applies while the production unit A710 moves up and down. For example, the production unit A710 is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be seen through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 in the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while in the extended position, the third symbol display device 81 cannot be seen through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions of (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the upward movement of the production unit A710 toward the extended position, the inner side of the annular front cover A711 (the inner side of the circular opening) on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 ) The display area of the third symbol display device 81 that is visible through the area becomes gradually wider. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display mentioned above in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually recognized, the production unit A710 can be moved upward while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player feel that the second rotating member A728 has started rotating before he or she knows it (the effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

In this case, during the upward movement of the production unit A710, the external shape of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be kept the same, while when emitting light from the light emitting means A715a, the difference between when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player. This makes it possible to perform highly unexpected performances.

Next, the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 383. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, but in the 23rd embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 383 is a top view schematically showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is placed at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be canceled by moving it to the front side position, and the second The way the light reaches the one-rotation member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-back direction, it can be made difficult for the player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to understand that the slide member A2729 is moving.

In other words, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED etc. constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (while leaving) the shape (external shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. (how it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising performance without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

Note that the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, a light-opaque resin material, or a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, but in the 24th embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is provided with a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 that protrude radially outward from the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and have a semicircular cross section. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the arcuate wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In the 24th embodiment, the elongated holes (first elongated hole A422a, second elongated hole A422b, displacement side elongated hole A453, and transmission side elongated hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are By being formed longer than the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is configured to be able to be displaced beyond the displacement end on the extended position side in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed toward the upper right from the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, the elongated link A451 rotates, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the left from the extended position.

Thereby, the configuration can be such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

Note that in FIG. 384, the sizes of the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are shown randomly, but the size is not limited to this. For example, all the protrusions may have the same size, or the external protrusions A3464 may have different sizes. In this case, it is not necessary that they all have different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are formed larger than the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, when the gear with pin A3462 is continuously rotated after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is the same as that of the previous two times. Compared to , the latter two times are smaller. That is, it is possible to produce an effect in which the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the extended position gradually subsides.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so that it becomes smaller as it moves away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arcuate wall portion A464, or vice versa. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

Further, a recessed portion recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the recessed portion is disposed to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 moves downwardly to the left to attach the coil spring SP1 from the state shown in FIG. 384. It can be configured such that the elongated link A451 rotates as the elongated link A451 is pulled back by force, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (toward the retracted position) from the extended position.

Further, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be made different (shifted) in the first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319). As a result, when synchronizing the operation timing of each drive motor AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing), case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied depending on the relationship with the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in a control mode in which each drive motor AMT1 is excited all at once, the displacement (microscopic displacement) timing can be shifted.

For example, the timing when each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and the timing when each second displacement member A490 of each first displacement member A490 is extended While the timing of reaching the extended position (see FIG. 320) is the same, the displacement (micro displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position ) can be adjusted so that they occur sequentially in a clockwise direction starting from the first operating unit A400 located at the lower left in front view.

Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player who is paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Furthermore, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 320), so that the player who visually recognizes the light can It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, an effect suggesting a right-handed hit performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game) can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 displaces the back side of the illumination board A416, but in the 25th embodiment, a decorative member A4550 that is displaced toward the front side of the illumination board A416 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 385(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 disposed so that the front side of the front cover A410 can be displaced, and a side surface of the main body portion A411. A pair of guided parts A4552 are guided to a long hole A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, and these parts are integrated with a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed on the outside of the front cover A410. The connection is fixed.

Since the pair of guided parts A4552 are both inserted through the long hole A4411b, the guided parts A4552 are only allowed to be displaced along the long hole A4411b. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the decorative plate portion A4551. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the elongated hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of protruding portions A4442g that protrude from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can come into contact with the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. Thereby, the decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 come into contact while the first displacement member A4440 is being displaced.

The interlocking plate part A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in attitude during the displacement of the guided plate part A441, and the protruding part A4442g between the guided part A4552 due to this change in attitude. The arrangement of the protruding portion A4442g is set such that it can enter the protruding portion A4442g. Thereby, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both the forward and backward directions, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both the forward and backward directions (both right and left directions in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure the timing to hide the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551. Thereby, light traveling through the through hole A412 can be physically blocked.

Further, unlike the first displacement member A4440 which is hidden behind the front cover A410 in the extended position, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so that it can be seen by the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured to have different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. This can be used as a means to solve the problem that in a hidden overhang position, the player cannot see it in a series of senses, but it is also difficult to create a sense of unity in the light emitting mode.

That is, by configuring the shapes and drawn figures of the decorative plate portions A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 in the same manner, the state in which the first displacement member A4440 is placed in the extended position and hidden by the front cover A410 (Fig. 385 The sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 in (see (b)) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is placed in advance at a similar position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400, and at a position that can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 with the first displacement member A4440 disposed in the extended position. A445b is arranged, and the light emitting means A445b is lit all at once by a plurality of first operation units A4400, with the first displacement member A4440 being hidden as described above, to create a light emission effect with a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the elongated hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the illumination board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging the structure for realizing the displacement of the decorative member A4550.

The movable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the range in which the elongated hole A4411b is formed. That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decorative member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, the number of displaced members can be increased in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front).

Moreover, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a posture change (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front), a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be ensured.

Note that the aspect of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmitting properties, and an LED or the like or an illumination board may be arranged inside. Further, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the light emitted from the illumination board A416 through the through hole can be made visible.

Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 386. In the 22nd embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 rotationally displaces along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, thereby regulating the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the irregularly shaped slide member A455. However, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

386(a) and 386(b) are front views of a displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the end of displacement.

The displacement device A5000 includes a displacement member A5001 that is configured to be slidable along a straight line and biased to the left by a biasing member (such as a coil spring) not shown, and a displacement member A5001 that is displaced along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001. A transmission member A5002 to which driving force is transmitted, a shafted support member A5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and a shaft member A5003 that is rotatably supported from both ends of the shaft support member A5003 to one side in the rotational direction. A thin wall portion A5004 that extends and is connected to each other, a roller member A5005 that is disposed at the end opposite to the end that is supported by the shaft of the supported member A5003, and a guide groove in which the roller member A5005 is guided. A5006 and A5007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 have a first region A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and a second region A5007 that deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first region A5006. configured. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is configured in an arc shape, but the second region A5007 may have any shape that deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, and is not limited to the arc shape.

The operation of displacement device 5000 will be explained. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided through the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the part where it contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin part A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 The leftward displacement of can be regulated.

Further, the outer shape of the thin wall portion A5004 is such that the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is By configuring the displacement member A5001 to remain unchanged in the displacement direction of the transmission member A5003, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-mentioned one section.

In addition, when the thin wall portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, a position where the repulsive force of the thin wall portion A5004 subjected to deformation and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the contact between the supported support member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening part A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening part A475, but in the 27th embodiment, the wiring HC is displaceably supported by the support box part A470. A case will be described in which the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A6560 so as to be relatively displaceable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

387(a), FIG. 387(b), and FIG. 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 387(a) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is placed in the retracted position, FIG. 388 shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is placed in the extended position, and FIG. A state in which the two-displacement member A490 is placed at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position (approximately 45 degree rotation position) is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 or the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate part A480 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end of the wiring guide member A6560, with the support protrusion A6471d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side of the support box part A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so that it cannot fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and includes a main body plate part A6561 that is arranged to face the back surface of the support box part A6470 with a gap between them, and a front view from the lower end of the main body plate part A6561 and the middle part of the body plate part A6560. It includes a plurality of protruding portions A6562 that protrude toward the side (support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, so that a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary load on the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, where the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (rear plate part A480 side) by the protrusion part A491d2 and the binding band KB, the position between them (the position sandwiched in the left-right direction) Since the main body plate part A6561 is arranged in the rear plate part A480, the main body plate part A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate part A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate part A480. Rubbing with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by setting the part where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate part A480 side to a position that overlaps with the main body plate part A6561, the main body plate part A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to make it easier for situations to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be explained. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is placed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the left-right direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large, so that the displacement of the wiring HC is mainly caused. Occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the attitude shown in FIG. 387(a).

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper protrusion A6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the displacement of the board-side connector A493c occurs mainly in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the attitude of the wiring guide member A6560 changes as it is pushed by the wiring HC. In this case, although the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A6560 with a margin, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the lower protrusion A6562. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering (dripping down) into the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 with excessive force.

In this way, by configuring the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound (projection part A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate part A6561) to be changeable, when the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed ( The designed length of the wiring HC can be shortened compared to the part A475 (see FIG. 356(a)).

To explain the policy of changing the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound (protruding part A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate part A6561) from a different perspective, in the displacement from Fig. 387(a) to Fig. 387(b), By displacing the board-side connector A493c in a manner approaching the protruding part A6552 (wiring HC displacing toward the protruding part A6552), the portion of the wiring HC that is wound around the protruding part A6552 is displaced to the side where it becomes loose. On the other hand, in the case of displacement from FIG. 387(b) to FIG. The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be able to be displaced when the state changes between FIG. 387(b) and FIG. 388.

Therefore, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (to the side where the wiring HC is widened). It can be said that the structure is configured such that it can be displaced to the side (to which it is to be displaced). This can prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and can prevent excessive deformation (such as bending or chipping) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560, which is not connected to the second displacement member A490, is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged so that the player can see it in any of the states shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), or 388 (for example, the third By disposing a decorative member that can be extended on the side of the symbol display device 81 (right side in FIG. 387(a)), it is possible to perform an effect using the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 do not completely interlock, and the wiring guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates more than that (the timing of the displacement is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are being displaced independently.

Note that, for convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated in a manner in which it is wound once (a manner in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of protrusions A6562), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the wiring HC may be configured to pass (not be wound) only once between the plurality of protrusions A6562.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the tilting device 310 is pressed downward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial position may be a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the end of pushing, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, it is possible to perform the effect of a "button that cannot be pushed"). can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its operation (the end of the extending operation), due to the dimensions that create a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320, the voice coil motor 352 It is preferable to arrange the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. Thereby, it is possible to suppress generation of impact noise due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the button is in the "button that cannot be pushed" state until after the player presses the tilting device 310. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed from a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, so that the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by driving the disc cam 344 continuously rotating in the forward rotation direction, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched). Thereby, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, while a complicated operation mode in which the raised position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched can be performed.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the terminal end and starting to move upward. In this case, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be made smaller while the tilting device 310 is pressed down repeatedly, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When fixing the housing member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side opposite to the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the convex leg portion 5424 is fixed to the tilting device 310. If the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed by making the portion 5424 pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, it is possible to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 A state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be created by increasing the amount of deformation. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, but also when operating the tilting device 310 at high speed. It is possible to increase the variety of performances.

For example, when a player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying a message such as "Big chance!", it is possible to perform an effect that instructs the player how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner as a condition for transmitting vibrations to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed in a specified manner. It is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the button (tilting device 310) and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed in magnitude with the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with force, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with force.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibrations generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member 5412 is placed in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 can transmit vibrations to the player in a state where it is not operated to make the performance more lively, it also allows the player to see changes in the performance mode (expected This makes it possible to create a premium feeling in which only the player playing the machine can feel the changes in the production mode, excluding other players around him. can.

In addition, as a variation of the effect, there is a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other when the player presses the tilting device 310, and a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other. Although it is desirable to have both a position where the weight member 5412 can be brought into contact with the weight member 5412, this can be achieved by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can occur depending on the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which a frictional force is generated due to the abutment between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 due to the shaft tilting deformation of the disc cam 5344, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344, and is configured in such a manner that it comes into contact when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis. It's okay. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable part, the frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 is ensured to be larger than when the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the board support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as a slope that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front end portion of the support bottom portion 12c supports the lower end surface of the game board 13. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be made lower. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the foul ball passage section 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of back and forth and left and right bends. In this case, it is preferable that a long path be formed in the front and rear directions directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be ejected smoothly. Furthermore, by creating a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage section 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the firing path and the foul ball passage section 145. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface, but the light guide member 540 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 appears dim. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, curved portions and straight extending portions may coexist at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a vertically curved path is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi may be spaced apart from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, the resistance of the sandwiching allows the speaker connection wire 453 to be pulled out in the direction outward of the speaker assembly 450. Even when a load is applied, the speaker connection line 453 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha contacts the inner surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, but the protrusion length beyond that is abutted in the thickness direction. In terms of length, a step may be provided in the middle so that the inner surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, a sufficient area is secured to form a double wall between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be held between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate body part 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate body part 461M in the front-rear direction to the same width as the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T, the width of the intermediate body part 461M, the intermediate body part 461M, and the distal body part 461T can be Alternatively, a large speaker room may be configured.

Further, although the proximal body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or the volumes may be the same. The arrangement of the speakers 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be at the center in the left and right direction, or between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment described above, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, adjacent rib portions Although a case has been described in which they do not overlap in view (the connecting direction and the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491), the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire can be inserted through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts by making it difficult to carry out fraudulent acts in which the tip of the tip enters the gaming area, and by prolonging the time required for such fraudulent acts. Note that examples of suppressing fraudulent acts include suppressing fraudulent acts themselves, and suppressing obtaining fraudulent profits through fraudulent acts (succeeding in fraudulent acts).

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fit device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. can be done. Thereby, the radial sliding movement of the petals 802 and the rotational movement of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or it may be configured to rotate around an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates due to the driving force being transmitted via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the drive side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip of the second presentation member 940, the second presentation member 940 can be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. It's okay. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening/closing regulating part 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulating part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the part of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board support device 600 arranged above the inner frame 12 600 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13, which are arranged opposite to the lower board surface support device 600, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the panel support device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600. In this case, since the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin can reduce the risk of damage due to collision with the metal panel support device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500, from which the light irradiated onto the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540, is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one side of the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between being placed on the front side and the other side being placed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around an axis, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory that projects inward of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one side is placed on the front side and the other side is placed on the front side. Consider switching between when it is placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the movable accessory, the movable accessory disposed opposite to the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory, the moving accessory placed oppositely emits light over a wide area of the opening 565 (wider than the top opening 524). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without changing the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting location of the moving accessory can be changed.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by moving the moving accessory in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light emitting location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes in size and changes so as to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory. At the timing when the right panel unit 500 faces, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, switching to change the location where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is high, the amount of light is large, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is focused. It is diffused (the brightness becomes lower, the amount of light becomes smaller, and the light emitted becomes fainter). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting mode of the light emitting object (liquid crystal or moving accessory) can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal) , by changing the posture so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the back side of the support plate 510), beam-shaped (narrow width) light is directed to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving accessory or liquid crystal. Thereby, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal, while causing only the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal to emit light.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150, 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage sections 9145, 10145, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet metal member may partially break due to the load from the thread Y8 and be so fragile that the broken part will fall, and a detection sensor may be placed at a position where the broken part passes through when it falls. Also good. In this case, due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, a warning is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped in order to detect the cheating at an early stage. The profits gained by those who commit fraudulent acts (losses suffered by gaming machine halls) can be minimized.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by pasting a rubber sheet on the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The motion resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portions of the both side slits 815 that are arranged opposite to the inclined surface 2803T. A recessed portion may be formed. In this case, since the inclined surface 2803T penetrates into the recessed portion, it is possible to improve the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the concave portions 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set as the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is an upwardly sloping direction in all the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is an upwardly sloping direction, so that it is at the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play. It is possible to make it easier for light to travel towards the target. Thereby, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId that are the regions that emit light to the outer lens member 550. may be formed. In this case, the light travels in the direction opposite to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is slanted upward. On the other hand, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is tilted downward. Therefore, for example, by illuminating the balls stored in the upper tray 17 with light, it is possible to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed depending on the arrangement of the operating device 10300.

Moreover, both one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operating device 10300 and one formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, a protruding shape portion 6413 and a recessed shape portion 6414 are provided to accommodate the operating load of the operating device 10300, and a protrusion shape portion is provided to address issues (ease of holding, durability, etc.) with the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so that it can be assembled (replaced). It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player and that produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that produces a light emission effect, or a board box. It may also be something that is not intended to be directly visible to the player, such as.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the shape of a groove extending in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operational load of the operating device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. It's okay.

Moreover, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while reducing the width of the groove, the same effect as when one wide groove is formed in terms of reducing the contact area with the operating device 10300 can be achieved. I can do it. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily need to be along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, when viewed from above.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shaped portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker who carries the front frame 10014. In this case, it becomes possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support part 6426 and the recessed part 6414 (it can be used as a finger rest part), so that the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operating device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load on the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member that generates an elastic urging force (such as a coil spring or a torsion spring), or it may be a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibrations.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor pliability and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor, but various modes are exemplified as the mode of the drive motor. For example, a load may be transmitted from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor to the lever member 10340 by a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that does not rely on the gear mechanism may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the lever member 10340 can idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which a load is applied during operation of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if there are operating parts that do not move on that plane (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally to the left or right), the balance (average) of the operating directions of each operating part The direction that is found (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set as the direction of fastening. You may also set the direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are joined together by fastening, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be combined using an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting by matching shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be set to the left-right direction. In this case, the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be made easier to change due to the generation of vibration of the vibration device 10366, so it is possible to perform an effect that dynamically changes the design around the operating device 10300 when vibration occurs. can. Moreover, the aspect of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct-acting type such as a voice coil motor, a rotary type such as a vibrator, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed from a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover are It is possible to change the appearance of the light seen through the cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that deflection can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity can be changed between the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a increase their rigidity and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened relative to that direction. The difference can be increased.

In this case, for example, by setting the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed along the direction Y17a, the vibrations generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the upward position can cause the left front cover 10321 and the right front While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operating member 10310, the degree of deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

Note that, conversely, the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed may be along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operating member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the swing operating member It is possible to increase the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the vibration device 10310 is placed in the upward position. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operating member 10310, the degree of deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled thereto. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily assembled due to the flexure, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the flexure of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the effect of suppressing displacement due to interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge Rm1 can be exerted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 contacts the plate-shaped support portion 6426 at the top and bottom, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening part into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like protruding part 6453R, and the fastening screw is attached to a plate extending above the plate-like support part 6426 in correspondence with the fastening part. It may be configured to be inserted into an insertion hole formed in the section. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, but also when it is displaced downward, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b that is not fitted with respect to the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although a case has been described in which the film is formed with a possible thickness (dimensional relationship with almost no gaps), it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the gap (the size may be such that a gap is formed between the members during assembly). In this case, if the displacement of the covers 10321, 10322 (displacement of the operating device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, contact (collision) between the covers 10321, 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the flange portion 6582 is formed into a flat plate shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 is formed with a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed with a shape that meshes with that shape, so that they fit into each other when assembled. You can also do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partitioning member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side while the partitioning member 6560 is positioned in the assembled state.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in cross-sectional view. It's not something you can do. For example, only one of the two side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed into a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, when the player visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, the milky-white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind it Although a case has been described in which the lower edge plate portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of areas by making the color tone of the area visible, this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed in advance to have a milky white color.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that slopes downward toward the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening may be performed using a fastening screw whose fastening direction slopes downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set depending on the arrangement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side where displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 as the upper lid member 6510 deforms, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partitioning member 6560 may be configured to be driven so that its longitudinal width can be changed, thereby changing the degree of compressive force that may be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms.

In other words, if the partitioning member 6560 is driven to shorten the front and rear width in such a manner that the back side edge of the partitioning member 6560 is displaced toward the front side, even if the top cover member 6510 is deformed, the separation between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is maintained. A gap can still be generated between them, and compressive force can be made less likely to occur. Since compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the illumination board 6570 is held can be lowered, and therefore, the degree of displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 similarly deforms.

In other words, by controlling the longitudinal width of the partition member 6560, it is possible to change the behavior of the illumination board 6570 in a situation where the top cover member 6510 may deform. It is possible to change the appearance of the irradiated light.

Note that the front-to-back width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (leave a space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580), and the front-to-back width is increased by drive control, so that the partition member 6560 and the back support member The configuration may be such that the situation is changed so that a compressive force may be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the illumination board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the illumination board 6570 may be disposed below the back support member 6580, the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partitioning member 6560 (a member that is apart from the audio device 6610), The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 that is inserted into the partitioning member 6560. In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illumination board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, while the back support member 6580 (and the audio device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 which is arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can also do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, it is possible to separate the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560. It is possible to easily replace the illumination board 6570 that has been removed or to correct the positional deviation.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, vibrations are transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the information has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually recognized from the front side. In this case, it is possible to identify the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws by checking for the presence or absence of shadows, so in a noisy environment, it is easier to detect loosening of fastening screws than when detecting abnormal noises. It can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening direction of the fastening screw is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, but the fastening direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be a mixture of locations that are tilted vertically and horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed in a shape that extends linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curved line, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are made smooth to suppress light from being diffused from the side surfaces, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surfaces. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of light traveling toward the fins 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, you can emphasize the light on the front edge by covering the entire side, or by covering part of the side (for example, using light-shielding tape with holes in a polka dot pattern). Since the light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape can be visually recognized by the player, the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the left horizontal presentation device 6700 of the pachinko machine 10010, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elongated rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light production effect when the fin 6735 is viewed from the front. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (such as a cut) for emitting at least a portion of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 may be formed in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces of the fins 6735 are inclined such that the thickness gradually becomes thinner as the fins 6735 move toward the front side. By configuring the fins 6735 so that they can be repeatedly reached, light may be configured to easily exit from the fins 6735.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is small, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixing may be performed by fitting claws based on the shape relationship or by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be omitted, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being degraded due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 slides due to the vibration of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the audio device 6610 may be placed close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be slid by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operating device 10300 (direction along direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illumination board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the player can cause the illumination board 18830 to slide while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring so that the vibrations of the illumination board 18830 are transmitted to the operating device 10300, the player who touches the operating device 10300 can grasp the vibrations derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in situation advantageous to the player occurs, interest in touching the operating device 10300 can be increased.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is supported in a floating (slidable) manner near the operation device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper presentation device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, it may be floatingly supported by a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending toward the front side from the gap between the left and right pair of audio devices 6610, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the audio device 6610. It may be supported in a floating manner. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, but may be horizontal or diagonal.

In the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line The reference line X19 may be configured to run along the direction of the angle .

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. For example, if multiple vibration directions Y17a or operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibration or operation in the first direction is extremely high, and the frequency of vibrations in the other directions is extremely high. When the frequency of occurrence of operations is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws that fasten and fix the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured to be difficult to transmit to the operating device 10300 side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that vibrations are transmitted to the operating device 10300 to the same extent as vibrations are transmitted to the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 21410. In this case, the vibration device 21500 can vibrate a plurality of objects.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front surface of the projecting portion De3 against which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the front portion of the projecting portion De3 may be formed with a plane that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied to the vibrating device 21500 from the protruding portion De3 (the normal direction of the front surface of the protruding portion De3) is a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, so that the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is A component in a direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, so that in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covered cover member 21530 collide in the front and rear direction, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction 21534 (non-guiding direction that intersects with the guiding direction), the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protruding portion 21534 of the covered cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening portions 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 are fastened together through the support holes 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be made slightly longer so that no fastening force is applied to the support hole 21428. This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate. Since this can be avoided, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the formation of the support plate part A313 is omitted on the side where the notch part A312a is formed in the back case A310, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, it is possible to maintain the rigidity of the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the back case A310 while maintaining the effect of blurring the boundaries of the light that is visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the back case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the back case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be composed of a columnar part extending from the bottom of the back side to the front side (no wall is formed). ) may be configured as follows. In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A700).

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the portion of the right side adjacent to the game board A13 is formed not in a plane but in a line shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) on one side may be lower than that on the other side.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be arranged on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, by forming the metal plate along the inward curved shape of the outer edge member A73, the metal plate has the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300, and the game area. A function of guiding the falling ball can be added. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be disposed in the gap.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front protrusion part A86f that can come into contact with the game ball is provided to protrude from the back side of the game area toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end of the right channel forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 toward the gaming area side may be provided, and a protrusion portion may be provided protruding from the back side of the flange portion to the back side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protruding portion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the speed of the game ball can be efficiently caused.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other, leaving a gap. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the illumination board A416 may be in contact with the protruding piece A417i, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be placed between the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i ) may be interposed so that the load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the illumination board A416. Thereby, the illumination board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operating unit A400 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second area AC2 of the plurality of first operating units A400 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side. Although a case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 is surrounded from above in AC2, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches before and after the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs that emit light to the front side are arranged may be arranged on the guide plate section A430 and the support plate section A420. Thereby, by arranging the first displacement member A440, it is possible to configure the light emitting means to be hidden from the player.

Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this configuration, similar effects can be achieved. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the illumination board A445 is not disposed thereon. For example, one or more through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may be able to pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes depending on the arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position from which the light irradiated to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 (does not cut through the illumination board A416 in front view), but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary that the entire first displacement member A440 enters the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front. It's okay.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board A445 may not be disposed on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging the illumination board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light to the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 can be used. It is possible to make the light passing through the player visible to the player.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case will be described in which the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is regulated by the circular arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the odd-shaped slide member A455. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a case where the arcuate wall portion A464 is not formed, as the transmission protrusion A463 is placed at a position away from the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the gear with pin A462 moves to the position where the arcuate wall portion A464 was supposed to be placed. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to protrude, and the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 may be restricted by coming into contact with the shutter member.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protrusions A455c arranged on the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the plurality of guided protrusions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line that is parallel to the direction A416x, or may be arranged so as to be shifted in a direction intersecting the direction A416x back and forth. In either case, the posture of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the protruding plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with contact with the arcuate wall portion A464), By reducing the angular width of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 regulated by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 can be stretched in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arcuate wall part A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, does it come into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 or with the end of the arcuate wall part A464 on the opposite side from the transmission protrusion A463? depends on the operating mode of the pin gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed (a constant speed or a variable speed) and the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 differently, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position can be adjusted to The case where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the circular arc wall part A464 and the case where it abuts against the transmission protrusion A463 can be made different.

Note that although here it is assumed that the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with at least one of the arcuate wall part A464 or the transmission protrusion A463, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are arranged in a predetermined manner, a fixed wall portion is formed that protrudes from either of them toward the odd-shaped slide member A455 (the odd-shaped transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x. You can leave it there. In this case, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position is determined by two positions: one where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the arcuate wall part A464, and the other where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the transmission protrusion A463. It can be made different depending on the case of contacting the fixed wall part and the case of contacting the fixed wall part.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is disposed outside the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating shaft of the reinforcing arm portion A518 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may be configured to pass through the inside of the tube and reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, it is possible to prevent the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) due to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 via the cylinder.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member made of a flexible material and having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not need to be one, and may be more than one. In this case, even if the wiring HC is pulled excessively and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load on the wiring HC can be alleviated by deforming the flexible member.

Moreover, what supports the wiring HC may be not the fastening part A475 but a mere columnar part (a part not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar part and the rear plate part A480. Alternatively, it may be a binding band that is loosely wrapped around a fixing part separately formed on the main body box part A471, the rear plate part A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed by the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed, but may be configured to be movable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified.

Furthermore, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the extended position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the player's eyes.

In addition, the method of displacing the fastening part A475 may be such that the fastening part A475 is movably supported in a long hole, or the fastening part A475 may be configured to be tiltable using the main body box part A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking part be formed in the rear plate part A480 so as to allow the displacement of the fastening part A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening part A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support walls formed in the shape of walls on both sides of the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is disposed closer to the front than the board-side connector A493c. Although a case has been described in which the third connector A416e3 is connected from the back side, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed facing inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the board by extending it to the side surface of the rear case A310, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480, which is located on the back side of the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the detected plate part A455e is configured to be recessed from the end face of the detected plate part A455e that comes into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing arrangement part A456b, and the rotation angle of the pin gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and then returned to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the driving (excitation) length of the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed between a mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and the arrangement is maintained, and a mode in which the arrangement is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position. After being displaced to the extended position, it can be switched further back to the retracted position.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A715 that irradiates light onto the rotating body A720 is formed from a flat member, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sheet-like substrate made of a flexible material. In this case, it is possible to easily arrange a substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating light onto the rotating body A720 on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotary body A720 is placed at a position where it can be seen by the player at all times, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player cannot see it. In this case, with the rotating body A720 placed in an invisible position, the first rotating member A721 is horizontally rotated about the vertical axis with respect to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped). By starting synchronous rotation in this state and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing rotation, it is possible to draw attention to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 while they are rotating. . This allows the rotation of the rotating body A720 to continue while the rotating body A720 is performing an effect that associates information useful for the player (for example, jackpot expectation level) with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 when stopped. It is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 operate independently, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tiltable forward from the lower end, and the production unit A710 is moved up and down when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the extended position, so that they touch each other. The production unit A710 may be configured to change to a tilted posture by receiving a contact load. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance that changes the attitude of the performance unit A710 by arranging the second displacement member A490. Note that the configuration that allows the presentation unit A710 to be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the elevating section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevating section.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shell portion A722 is made of an opaque material and blocks light irradiated toward the central rotating member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may be configured to have a light-transmissive portion. Thereby, the relationship between the attitude of the first rotating member A721 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the gear member to be meshed may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . Combining a first presentation member in which the rotational axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, and a second presentation member in which the rotational axis of the gear member to be meshed is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. It is possible to perform complex performances.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed closer to the outside of the operating unit A300, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the illumination board A416 into a C-shape concave from the outside to the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operating unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed closer to the inner side of the operating unit A300. It may be formed at a position closer to the outside of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operating unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board is disposed below the rotating body A720, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the illumination board is conducted to the second support part A735. The second rotating member A728 supported by the second rotating member A735 may be reached and the player may visually recognize the second rotating member A728 after the second rotating member A728 is electrically connected. In this case, unlike the second support part A735, the first support part A731 that supports the first rotation member A721 is difficult to transmit light, so the effect is to make the second rotation member A728 shine without making the first rotation member A721 shine. can be executed.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728, which can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a, transmits the light. Therefore, it is difficult to control the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a so that it reaches only the second rotating member A728 and not the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by making the second support part A735 conductive and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform effects that are difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first support part A731 disposed inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting part A735 disposed outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first support part A731 extended to the outside of the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. The extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be performed.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the area of the central rotating member A724 as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a changes due to the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the area of the central rotating member A724 as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a is configured to change when the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture or when a moving body protrudes from inside. Good too.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shell portion A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to move forward and backward between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear movement (sliding movement). Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged in the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotating member A724, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same drive source, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same drive source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be formed of a plate-like member formed to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured to overlap with the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence on the central rotating member A724 due to the attitude of the second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in front view is different, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape that remains the same when viewed from the front when the posture changes by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ directed on the virtual plane VS, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. Moreover, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not need to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-back direction, or the light-emitting unit A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light-emitting unit A715 (not limited to the front-back direction, but also a mixed displacement of front, rear, left, right, top, and The virtual plane VS may also be configured to change depending on the location of the virtual plane VS. In either case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on is changed while suppressing changes in the external shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of contact positions of the pin gear A3462 with respect to the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are arranged in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 with a large diameter, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455, and the position where the external protrusion A3464 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455. It may be configured such that it is shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pin gear A3462 abut against the irregularly shaped slide member A455 at the same position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner end (the opposite side of the detected plate portion A455e) in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction A416x when viewed from the rear). A wall portion perpendicular to the side surface of the portion may extend toward the pin gear A3462 side.

In this case, by arranging the orthogonal wall portions so as not to contact the circular arc wall portion A464 but to contact the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the orthogonal wall portions and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may When in contact, it is possible to generate a load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) on the pin gear A3462 while suppressing displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the transverse direction at the longitudinal end (into an L-shape), the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement The configuration may be such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced in conjunction with. That is, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion extending in the transverse direction of the second guide hole A422b, so that the transmission protrusion A455b moves in a direction intersecting with the direction A416x. , and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451.

In this case, when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion part A455c are engaged in the direction A416x. Displacement of the slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted. Thereby, even after the contact between the protruding plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted.

Note that the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to cause displacement along direction A416x, or may be configured to cause displacement in a direction intersecting direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be rectangular, triangular, semi-elliptical, or any arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured so that it becomes tapered toward the radially outer side (the width does not increase).

Note that this also applies to the case where a recess is formed in place of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it is preferable that the shape tapers toward the radially inward side (the width does not increase).

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetrical. In this case, if the first displacement member A440 is configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed in each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extending tip side of the arcuate wall portion A464 (the side opposite to the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall portion A464) is closer to the extending proximal end side. It may be configured such that the angle with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 is smaller than the side surface (on the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circumference of the arcuate wall portion A464).

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin gear A3462 at a constant speed is from the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position (beyond the extended position). The speed when displacing toward the retracted position side can be increased compared to the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side). That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

Note that when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced beyond the extended position to the side opposite to the retracted position. In the case where a recessed portion is formed in place of the external protrusion A3464, as the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the dimension of the recessed portion, the first displacement member A440 moves toward the retracted position. An example is a case where, after the displacement, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed out from the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and slides, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position.

In addition, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the protrusion dimension. After the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the side opposite to the retracted position, the contact between the outer diameter protrusion A3464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is released, and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides, resulting in a first displacement. For example, when the member A440 is displaced to the extended position (toward the retracted position), and when a recessed portion is formed in place of the external protrusion A3464, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is moved by the dimension of the recessed portion. An example is a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side as the first displacement member A440 is displaced.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be arranged at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may be provided to protrude toward the rear plate portion A480 side. . Further, the main body plate portion A6561 may be configured to have a thin wall (for example, a sheet shape). In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Furthermore, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is formed in an elongated shape, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed into a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be placed between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC over a wide range, increasing the possibility that rubbing can be suppressed by synchronously displacing the wiring HC and the main body plate part A6561. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held movably in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A is configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the projecting portion A6562 due to the load received from the wiring HC. It's okay. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the elongated hole (groove) allows the protruding portion A6562 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that allows rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed depending on the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so that the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 can be changed appropriately. can be moderately reduced.

Further, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path that combines rotation and sliding.

Although a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is reciprocated and rotationally displaced, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one rotation or more.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate part A6561 is disposed on the front side of the support box part A6470, and the support box part A6470 has a long through hole (an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate part A6561) that guides the protruding part A6562. It is also possible to form a configuration in which an elongated hole (along the elongated hole) is bored and the protruding portion A6562 protrudes toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 through the elongated through hole. In this case, compared to the case where the main body plate part A6561 is arranged between the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate part A6561 can be made available. This makes it easier to secure a space for the wiring HC to displace, and also improves the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate part A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480 (can also be constructed as a thick member).

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point for setting the player's pushing direction from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means that is pressed and operated by a player, the operating device has two states: a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is placed in a position where the operating means is more protruding from the player than in the first state. 2 states, and includes an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the near side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being oriented toward the side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the effect is performed in a manner that increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player at the advance position, it becomes easier for the player to operate the operating means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operation means to be highly strong. In this case, there are problems in that the operating means becomes heavier as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the push direction of the operating means is from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can easily perform vertical linear motion. By creating a slippage between the player's hand and the operating means that cannot be fully operated, the force of the push can be released.

Furthermore, given the player's playing posture, when pressing and operating the operating means centering on the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, so the force that the player applies to the operating means is naturally weakened. I can do it.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft located at a back side relative to the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is arranged in a rotary manner, and the operating means is arranged to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state. It is possible to prevent the person from performing an operation of slamming the operating means.

In addition, by placing your hand near the shaft and tilting your hand using that position as a fulcrum, you can easily push the operating means, so you can provide a new method of push-in operation that is less prone to acceleration. , it is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operating means with the palm facing up and down, and then pointing the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating the device by tilting it down, and a method of operating the device by placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft with the palm of the hand facing the operating device, then dropping the palm toward the operating device. be done.

A gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, characterized in that in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is an up-down direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the second state is maintained while ensuring operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent damage caused by a pushing operation in such a state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is capable of automatic operation, and includes a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is generated when the player performs a push operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine acts in a direction in which the game occurs, but does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is generated in the direction opposite to the player's operating direction. can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operations.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when retracting the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, and the drive means operates the operation device through the eccentric portion. It has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means can change the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state, In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to cancel the maintained state is rotated. By using the biasing means, the movement width of the operating device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operating modes by the urging means.

In gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , A gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force was caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since the operating means can be added with a movement mode in which it moves by following the maintenance means, the types of movement modes of the operating means can be increased. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and emits light toward the player, and the second state is better than the first state. However, from a player's viewpoint, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits more light from the player's viewpoint in the second state than in the first state. The irradiation range of the light is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the light, improving the performance effect, and making it difficult to press the operating means without aiming. By adopting this aspect, it is possible to reduce the force required by the player during operation.

In gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Features gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves towards and away from the display means, thereby creating a light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The key point is to keep the repulsion force small during normal times while being able to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the operating device has a first state and a second state in which the range of movement of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state. A game comprising: a first driving means that generates a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and a biasing means that generates a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a second driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation by a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the force to return the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means will be delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means will not be able to follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated hitting operations. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the biasing force weakly, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. By pushing back the operating means using the second driving means, the return can be made faster, allowing the player to enjoy repeated hitting operations.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous stroke determination means for determining whether or not a continuous stroke operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is activated based on the detection value of the continuous stroke determination means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive means based on the detection value of the repeated hit determination means, so that the player is not performing a repeated hitting operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press). The second driving means operates even when the player is performing an operation, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

The gaming machine B2 includes an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is placed at the end position, and an end detecting means for detecting whether the operating means is placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A moving direction determining means, comprising a positional difference detecting means for detecting a positional difference, and a moving direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the terminal end detecting means and the detected value of the positional difference detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of pushing back to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing when the player moves in the away direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being applied to the player's hand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operating means, and the second drive means includes a drive motor that rotates the eccentric weight, and the drive motor is elastically supported by the support frame. and a supporting means, the supporting means having a driving force that increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the terminal position. A gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts the support frame when the operating means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating the drive force separately from the drive force, it is possible to adjust the drive force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. Game machine B6 is characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is utilized. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means supporting the drive motor is moved in a direction away from the support frame (in a direction toward the operating means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near a terminal position of the operating means, the detection sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means a threshold value determination means for determining whether a measured value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, the threshold value determination means The driving force generated by the repulsive means increases when the measured threshold is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold than when the threshold determined by the threshold determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold. Characteristic game machine C1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on the ability of the player to operate the device lightly, the operating resistance will be low and there is a risk that the operating device will be damaged by the player's operation, while if it is supported firmly, the movement of the operating device itself will be reduced. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility of damage to the operating means, there is a problem in that the force required for operation by the player increases, making operating the operating means a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than the threshold value can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repelling means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, , characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

A gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, wherein after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means using spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation using spring elasticity, so even when the operating speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is generated without time delay. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means determines that when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the value measured by the threshold value determination means is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a movable region of an end of the repulsion means opposite to the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means that is opposite to the side that contacts the operating means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Damage to the drive means is prevented by cutting off the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the release means is configured to release the driving force when a load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being placed on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected) and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and while driving in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether it is being driven in the second direction.

Here, if it is determined whether transmission of the driving force can be canceled or not depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when driving the driving means in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. This may cause a large load on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance when operating the operating means to create a performance is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction, or the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

An example of a method for releasing the transmission is to move the clutch in a direction that intersects the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. and engagement teeth that transmit driving force when they are in mesh with each other. A game machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that tapers with respect to the abutment surface in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force on the pressed contact surface in the engaged state. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engagement teeth that taper in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface, the engagement between the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to be separated from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the biasing force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear by separation, but is periodically restored. Thereby, when the player releases his/her hand, the button can begin to operate within a short period of time.

That is, when a button is activated "as an effect" and the player holds the button, one phase of the button's operation will pass. If the button moves from the end of the first phase when the player releases his/her hand in the middle, the period during which the button is stopped will be longer, and the feeling of ``starting to move because the player's load has been relieved'' will be reduced. I can escape.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to create the feeling that the player's load has been lifted and the player has started to move.

A game machine D4, which is any one of the game machines D1 to D3, wherein the engaging surfaces of the transmission means and the release means are formed into sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the distal end of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on that plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means It is possible to suppress movement in the direction toward and away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means is different depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are provided, and the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is as follows. Similarly, gaming machine D6 is characterized in that its operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is the same. Since the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the level of jackpot expectation, the player can be told how to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be watched over.

In addition, this difference in operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the driving means, so if the operating direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation level etc. without having to watch the operation of the operating means. I can do it. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., so it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance. can be made to monitor the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; , a biasing device that biases the operating device in a direction from the first position toward the second position, and an operating device that moves from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing device. terminating means for changeably forming a movement end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; a release load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the operating means, the release load means releasing the engagement, and the termination means at the end of the movement of the operating means; A game machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation means. There is a gaming machine in which the amount of displacement of the extending operation can be changed by a terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of displacement of the extending operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when the lock is released, so the phase of the cam when the lock is released is varied. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation were operated by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. Thereby, the terminating means can serve both as a driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means and as a driving means for moving the release load means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means can be caused to change based on the operation of the transmission means, so by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means, the release load means can be changed by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there are two methods: a method of shifting the rotation period of the cam and the protrusion; Examples include a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are de-synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the load release means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the operation of the load release means causes the load release means and the transmission means to be operated. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is possible to switch whether or not to operate synchronously.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronous operation of the load release means and the transmission means is performed, the synchronous state of the load release means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any members.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotational axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is provided with a rotating second rotating member. A game machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation periods are different, so that the second rotating member is operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means at a phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position. , you can expand the range of your production. For example, it is possible to realize an effect in which the end position is gradually moved away from the first position or an effect in which the end position is gradually brought closer to the first position using the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position that the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. In the gaming machine, the operating means is disposed at the first position, and the gaming machine includes: a vibrating means having a vibrating part that is configured to be movable between When the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, whereas when the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a state where it can come into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is in a contact state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, (See Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, so if the vibration is transmitted immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to detect the operation of the operating means before operating the vibration means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means. In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases his or her hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player and placed in the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating section is made to vibrate continuously, the player can only feel the vibration when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating part is generated before the player presses the button, the vibrating part can be vibrated even before the player releases his/her hand, regardless of the manner of the player's operation. vibrations can be transmitted to people.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is disposed in the separated state so as to overhang an area occupied by the operating means when it is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means changes to the abutting state by being moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The strength of contact between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration in response to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same way without any particular change in the driving mode.

A gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, positioning with respect to the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, thereby preventing the transmission of vibrations, and also suppressing the displacement that occurs in the vibrating means during vibration.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means come into contact. That is, by expanding and contracting the support means, momentum can be gained when the vibrating section moves in a direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a lower deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means than a deforming resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. .

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to finely set the direction in which the supporting means deforms when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating section and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, methods for varying the deformation resistance include a method in which rubber legs are extended along the operating direction of the operating means when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, and a method in which the supporting means surrounds the vibrating means. In the case of a rubber member, the rubber member is manufactured by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and the supporting means is a rail that guides the operating means to move along the operating direction. , a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

A gaming machine F6 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the portion that the vibrating section comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibrations are not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but through a receiving means that is a separate means from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore it is possible to suppress a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Furthermore, since vibrations can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation due to being surprised by the vibrations during the operation.

The receiving means may be, for example, the part of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the game balls are supplied, or the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples include parts that may be touched by hands, and housing parts that partially enclose operating means.

<One-touch installation between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the attachment part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; It is characterized by comprising: a driving means that generates a driving force for driving; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the transmission means includes a deformation part that elastically deforms due to overload. Game machine G1.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There are gaming machines equipped with the above (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player and the driving means generates a driving force to drive the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, the transmitting means There is a problem in that a load is accumulated at the connecting portion between the drive means and the drive means, and there is a risk that these connecting portions will be damaged.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, and the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the driving means and the transmission means, etc. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting part.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a rotatably supported cam member, the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member to the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion allows the transmission device to rotate to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of .

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation section has the roles of a part that elastically deforms the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a part that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified due to the dual use of the functions. For example, separate fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion that is protruded parallel to the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a possibility that the number of members will increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is attached to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is higher than that of the rotational shaft in comparison with a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational shaft and the convex portion. A game machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which the rotation is made about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformable part different for each direction, the state after the deformable part is elastically deformed is better when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. This allows the protruding part of the cam member to be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is intended to move, thereby alleviating the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable part. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion, A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Since they come into contact with each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A game machine G6, which is any one of the game machines G3 to G5, and includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating even though the driving means is in operation, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the two, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the interval between the detection means for detecting the displacement becomes smaller, but the smaller the interval between the detection means, the more complicated and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft. In this way, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a portion of the cam member, without requiring the drive means to be driven for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Ball with thread anti-rattle structure. Game machine H>
In a game machine equipped with a foul ball passageway through which foul balls flowing back toward the firing device among the game balls fired into the gaming area can pass, the foul ball passageway not only allows passing of the falling game balls, but also allows the foul balls to pass through. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is equipped with a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutting blade is installed inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the firing device, and the game ball connected with the thread is driven into the gaming area. There is a gaming machine that has a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the thread is fired, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth, and the tension generated at that time cuts the thread. However, if the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball may not cut the thread completely. The ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of a string is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the string is fired at low firing strength, causing it to flow into the foul ball path and being returned to the player. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the playing area while grasping the one game ball that has been played, the string can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball path to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball and the other game ball are connected by a thread, an external load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the gaming area is connected to the other game ball. There was a problem that there was a risk that the government could manipulate the government and obtain fraudulent profits.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball path, the one-way obstruction means However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backward direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein the foul ball passage includes a bending part that bends a falling path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can rub against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending section is provided with a loading means on the inner corner side of the bend, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down, but applies a load to the object flowing backward.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the load means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. This can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5, which is the gaming machine H3 or H4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the outward movement of the foul ball path of the loading means, so that the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball path is prevented. When a load is applied, the load applied to the member on the thread can be prevented from weakening due to the load means being deformed outward of the foul ball path.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 is equipped with a receiving tray which is a tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door, and a payout which is a part that discharges game balls paid out from a payout device to the receiving tray. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge section is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which the thread guided into the gaming area is used to apply a load to the other game ball, the player intentionally hits the game ball that is being paid out, applies a load, and reduces the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball ejection part, which is the part that ejects the game balls paid out from the pay-out device, is placed in the receiving tray, which is the tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door. , a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the foul ball passage is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act was carried out in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball path was used to apply a load to the other gaming ball. In this case, the threads can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of holding the board surface. Game machine I>
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to accept the gaming means from the one side. The state changing means is capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state to an usable state, the state changing means changing the gaming means from an unusable state to an usable state. A gaming machine I1, characterized in that it includes an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the game board can rotate in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine that is equipped with a fixing means to do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the operating position, so if the game board is not pushed in halfway, it is necessary to push it in again. There is a problem in that it becomes necessary to perform this repetitive work, which may reduce work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the proximity means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is brought into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is only half-hearted, the effect is that the approaching means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force to push the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side in response to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, since the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, it is difficult to remove the gaming means. This has the effect of improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means in response to setting the gaming means in an unusable state. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and it is possible to Since this is carried out in conjunction with making the means unusable, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 is provided with abutting means that receives a load from the gaming device when the state changing means changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so the operation of pressing the gaming means against the state changing means changes the state to the usable state as a series of steps. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means when the other side is approached, and the state changing means is A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the abutting means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 is provided with a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is such that the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is provided with a closing regulating part that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means changes the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains in an unusable state.

<An inverted cup and harness band prevents piano wire from getting rattled. Game machine J>
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is connected to the gaming means. A gaming machine J1 comprising a placement means disposed on a path communicating with the outside, the placement means being configured to be able to suppress entry of objects from the outside at a plurality of locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention section to prevent fraudulent activities such as inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the fraud prevention section is located only at one location, and the effectiveness of fraud prevention is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path where there is a possibility that the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at multiple locations, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effectiveness of

In gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in that the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first location and the second means for suppressing the entry of the member from the outside at the second location. A game machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means has a different method for suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Compared to the case where the number of members is increased, entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

Note that the method of suppressing intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used to prevent entry by blocking a route, or a method may be used to prevent fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

A gaming machine J3 in the gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion regulating part formed in the shape of a cup that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the intruding member from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restriction part in the path from the outside to the gaming means. Features of gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, when an unauthorized person penetrates the access control part due to high heat, it is possible to detect changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (such as disconnection due to heat), thereby preventing external damage. The effect of suppressing the entry of members can be easily produced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the arrangement means includes a dissolving means that guides a member that has entered from the outside to a dissolving area that is far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means guides the member entering from the outside to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree of damage increases, it is possible to prevent members entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a 5-layer decorative board. It also involves fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means that are arranged opposite to each other along a first direction and connected at least one side; and a first means and a second means arranged along the first direction between the first means and the second means. A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means are arranged opposite to each other and connected by at least one side, and the first means and the second means are disposed along the first direction between the first means and the second means. There is a gaming machine that includes a third means (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by existing methods such as adhesion or screw fixing, but when the first means and second means are connected, the load along the first direction is There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged because it is applied to three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set in the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the third means is set in the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in an adjacent third direction and connected by fitting into each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means that are connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to disassembly of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside in the gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed to the outside, it is easy to check the state of the mating parts. be able to. As a result, even if a fraudulent act occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the fraudulent act can be discovered more quickly.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fastening The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any of gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it is provided with a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from being misaligned.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with abutting means that makes surface contact with the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means in a region where they face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, a distance equal to the dimension of the abutting means can be maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. I can do it. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by a load in the opposite direction. I can do it.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction when an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L of utilizing the curved light guiding means. As for points, not achieved>
comprising a light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed from the irradiation direction of the light passing through the interior, and a projection means disposed opposite to the light guiding means and onto which the light passing through the light guiding means is projected; A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave surface of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a light guide plate that uniformly emits light entering from an end face (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, so in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the projection target means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion. The light emission intensity of the projection target means can be changed by changing the projection area.

In the game machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is more difficult to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light that passes through the convex opposing part, the light emitted from the light guiding means is focused on the concave opposing part. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light production.

The gaming machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection means with the light-guiding means in between and projects the light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means Since they are made of materials with substantially the same transparency, by allowing the same light to enter the light guiding means, it is possible to produce a light effect that is visually recognized through the projection means and a light effect that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. can be made different.

<Bass reflex speaker arrangement structure. Game machine M>
a first means and a second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to each other and forming an internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means arranged so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and effects are performed using sounds output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-16088). In such gaming machines, the vibration waves that advance toward the back side of the speaker body are propagated to the left-right center position of the gaming machine, and then are sent out to the outside of the gaming machine, where it is easy to create an effect that allows you to hear bass sounds. However, there was a problem in that the path length of the vibration wave was determined by the horizontal width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the playing machine By canceling the left and right width restrictions, the vibration waves can travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape extending from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, comprising a protruding portion that protrudes from the top, and a tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the interior space to the outside, and the opening is a passage member that is passed between the interior space and the exterior through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, and, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

A gaming machine M4 in the gaming machine M3, wherein the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protrusion and disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, there is a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means arranged below the support fastening means and performing a performance accompanying the game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the presentation means supports the support and fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that the support and fastening means can be supported by weight without compressing the space used for presentation. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop midway. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; In a gaming machine comprising a second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state and a non-following state in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, when at least the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means is displaced in the direction of the expansion and contraction movement of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so the performance is slow and the performance effect is insufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is reduced. , can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-follow-up state. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is a following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means due to the action of the resistance means, and a non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means can also be used. be able to.

A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player as having the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, When the attitude of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means changes accordingly, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from increasing excessively. I can do it.

<Use of shell buttons and punch holes. As for points, not achieved>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and an accommodating means configured to be able to accommodate the first means, the accommodating means is an opening that receives the first means when accommodating the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause malfunction. .

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 is provided with a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. Means can be easily removed to the outside. This can prevent foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support section that supports the first means, and the second opening section is arranged on the opposite side of the support section with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support section.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the accommodation means includes a low water resistant part having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant part.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance part. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings have a shape based on a shape projected in a different direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured with shapes based on the shapes of solid objects in different directions. solid objects can be easily removed through the section.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the solid object partially blocks the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player. can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that a solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object continues to remain. .

<Points regarding improving the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A game machine comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means includes a protrusion-shaped portion protruding from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the glass frame (front frame) in which the operating handle is disposed is removable from the outer frame in which the gaming board is disposed (for example, (See Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the bottom of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, so there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom with your fingers, so there is room for improvement from the perspective of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shaped portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slips from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

Note that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and may be any arrangement that protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be provided so as to protrude in the vertical direction, or it may be provided so as to protrude toward the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that removably supports the first support means, and the protruding shaped portion is arranged so that the first support means is separated from a support position where the second support means is supported. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged as follows.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shaped portion is provided to protrude downward from the lower bottom surface at a supporting position away from a position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied. This makes it easier to hold the first support means. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to the second support means can be facilitated.

Note that the position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, when the first support means is supported at the front side of the second support means, the position may be closer to the front side, or when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end, the position may be closer to the front side. It may be located near the end, or it may be located on the opposite side of the pivot position with respect to the tray that stores the game balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed part recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means supports the recessed part with a gap between it and the recessed part. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is disposed facing the recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first supporting means is a gap formed by the recessed shape, so that the first means It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaving powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to positional displacement. That is, it is possible to prevent powder from accumulating and clogging the movable parts, causing malfunctions, and from accumulating powder at the detection location of the detection device, causing erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed portion is useful not only when not in operation (for example, when opening the glass frame to clear an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). This is effective even when the player is in the middle of the game or in a game waiting state (demonstration screen display state).

A gaming machine P4 in the gaming machine P3, wherein the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the part where the recessed shape part is formed from becoming extremely thin compared to other parts and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, by forming the recessed portion on the back side of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent and deformed in the inner and outer directions, so even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

Note that the load applied to the protruding shaped portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary storage, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when moving the first support means. An example is a load that is applied when something moved by a player or store clerk (such as a senryo box) collides with the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner that it abuts an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inner and outer directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contact means; and an operating section positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P4, it is possible to maintain the effect of the recessed portion while ensuring sufficient support thickness at the overlapping position that supports the abutment means, so that the operation portion can be It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means includes an impact damping means that is formed continuously between the contact means and the operating section and is configured to be able to damp an impact, and the impact damping means is arranged in the recessed shape section. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation section to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping part is increased. In this way, the impact can also be attenuated by deformation (bending) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a block member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the recessed portion includes a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed with a greater degree of recess than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, sufficient space is provided in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared to the first part. By forming the space of the second portion where the load applied by the recess is expected to be small to be small, the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion can be improved while maintaining high durability.

In addition, examples of the degree of recess include the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper the recess) and the width of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider the recess).

In addition, if the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of other parts, the concave shape corresponding to the other parts is The portion may be formed with a large degree of recess.

Further, the concave shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a gaming state such as a predetermined performance state or a specific gaming state). It is also possible to use the size of .

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shaped part is formed below the bottom part of the first supporting means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider as it goes forward. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front part where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is stood alone. Even in a storage method in which the first support means is placed alone on the floor, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without falling down.

Note that what is considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, a gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily independent on its own, and furthermore, the contact portion with the floor is limited to a protruding shaped portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid soiling of parts other than the protruding shaped part.

<Points regarding deformation based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first support means that supports the operation means, and a second support means that supports at least one of the first support means or the operation means, A gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as performance buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, countermeasures against positional deviations occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load when operating the operating means are insufficient. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from this point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in the descending distance, a gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means at the front side portion.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means is lowered excessively, the first support means is deformed, thereby suppressing the generation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (sink) excessively, the manner in which the operating means is supported can be simplified.

Note that the operating direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a downward direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front or back, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Moreover, as the mode of contact from the operating direction, various modes are illustrated in addition to the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operating direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that expands in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operating direction. In this case, the operating direction can be moved closer to the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force becomes larger as it moves closer to the center of the bottom, making it possible to effectively support the operating means. It can be done in a specific manner.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material and is configured to be able to hold a support part that supports the operation means and a game ball, and the first support means is configured to support the operation means through the first support means. A game machine Q2 characterized in that it comprises a game ball holding section connected to the game ball holding section.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding section.

In addition, if the first support means is made of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding part in a floating structure, the vibrations generated when the operating means is operated will directly hold the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls held in the game ball holding part from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, it is possible to prevent abnormal sounds from being generated.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, it may be configured such that vibration transmission is prevented in the first direction, while vibration transmission is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to perform a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, and the first supporting means is arranged so that the farther from the operating section the connection position with the gaming ball holding section is, the closer the first supporting section is to the front surface. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the gaming machine Q3 has the ability to reduce the absolute amount of positional deviation by moving the connection position closer to the back side around the operation unit, which is a position that is prone to misalignment due to operation. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, by arranging the connection position at the front side (closer to the player) at the far end of the operation part, which is a position where the position is difficult to shift due to operation. , it is possible to improve the design.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, a main body supported by the first supporting means, and an operating section and the main body. a connecting portion that connects, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the game machine is configured in such a manner that the connecting portion is surrounded by the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while ensuring a sufficient size of the operating section.

Note that various methods of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may each be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, this may be done by fitting or by fastening.

In addition, in the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at multiple positions along the operating direction of the operating section, the impact generated when the operating section is operated can be distributed and received at multiple fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided bodies can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional shift of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction in a direction that intersects (for example, perpendicularly) with the operating direction of the operating section, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating section and the direction of tightening of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A gaming machine Q5 in the gaming machine Q4, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersects with the operating direction of the operating section.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when operating the operation section, so that the fastening by the fastening means loosens during the operation, and the split body is fixed. can be prevented from being released.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the direction intersecting the operating direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is the direction that intersects a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (e.g. (direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

Also, for example, if the operating direction is along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction that intersects with the operating direction is along a plane that intersects with the predetermined straight line. The following directions are exemplified.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in a direction intersecting a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the split body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being dislocated at the same time at both fastening locations, it is possible to prevent the fastening from loosening.

Note that the fastening locations of the divided bodies may be arranged at locations where the load is concentrated when the operating section is operated. In this case as well, another fastening point will be placed on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, so it is possible to prevent the division body from shifting its position or the fastening from loosening due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating section, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the dividing position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient in the divided position, and when the operating part moves in accordance with the operation of the operating part in the divided position, the operating part Where there is a risk of dust (dust, etc.) being generated due to friction between the dividing body and the dividing body, the detection means is placed away from the division position, which prevents powder (dust, etc.) from being detected by the detection means. can do. Thereby, the occurrence of false detection can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means that interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction when the game is possible, on the side of the divided body that is moving away from the divided body in the dividing direction (proximity and separation direction). A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the positional shift of the operating means with respect to the dividing body in the dividing direction.

The interference means may be formed so that it interferes with the operating means in the assembled state, but does not interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the divided body is made of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during assembly, making it easier to avoid interference with the interference means and maintaining ease of assembly. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be configured so that it does not interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere with each other when viewed in the direction of assembly before fastening (for example, when viewed in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly). In this case, while ensuring ease of assembly, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the divided body when play is possible.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed part that is recessed so as to be able to receive the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first supporting means is received in the receiving recessed part, the first supporting means is Even if the operating means and the first supporting means are displaced, the repulsive force from the receiving recess allows the operating means and the first supporting means to quickly return to their original positions.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle with a center of a radius of curvature disposed on the operating section side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be placed, and in addition, when the player grasps the operating section, it does not feel cramped. It can prevent you from feeling like. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and the operability of the operating section.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a striped portion processed into a striped shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the striped portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the striped portion is different for each region, the first support means has anisotropy in rigidity. can be configured.

Note that the design criteria for the extending direction of the striped portions are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be used to design an extension direction with a high yield, or when the load generated when operating the operating means acts in a different manner in each area, the best way to deal with the load may be determined. The direction may be the direction in which the striped portion extends.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
A game machine comprising a vibrating means and a light emitting means disposed at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be able to emit light, characterized in that the light emitting means has a width capable of being displaced with respect to the vibrating means. Game machine R1.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emitting effects.

To be more specific, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is placed behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving vibrations from the speaker. In the areas where the light is displayed, the light emitting effect cannot be produced and it becomes dark. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the gorgeous presentation can be performed becomes narrower. In the first place, the size of gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, is generally determined by standards, so securing a light emitting area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a range in which it can be displaced with respect to the vibration means, the light emitting means can receive the vibrations of the vibration device, and the light emitting means can be arranged at the vibration generation point of the vibration means. can be approached. As a result, the front area can be brightly viewed regardless of the location where the vibration of the vibration means is generated, so it is possible to improve the light emission performance.

Note that the form of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the device is not limited to a means that can vibrate actively, but may be a means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) in response to an external force load.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. Examples include a diaphragm included in a speaker, an exhaust port from which the back pressure of speaker vibrations found in a bass reflex speaker is discharged, and a path connected from a vibrating part to the exhaust port.

The vibration device may be a vibration device driven by rotation (for example, a vibrator) or a vibration device that generates vibration by linear drive (for example, a voice coil motor).

Note that the mode of close arrangement is not limited in any way, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means, and in that case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or the direction in which the light emitting means is stacked from the left and right ends. It may also be in a direction in which it is inclined.

A gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, and the light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R1, the light emitting board tends to be displaced (vibration, positional shift, etc.) due to the influence of vibrations generated when the vibration means outputs sound. While it is possible to change the display mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibration means that outputs sound. ) can be increased.

Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of a light-emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibrations generated by the vibration means and a light-emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the display mode of the light-emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes a holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the lamination direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means holds the light emitting substrate in the lamination direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of a gaming board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the holding means from being displaced along with the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if no fastening force is applied (for example, the holding means is simply prevented from coming off), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

Furthermore, the expression "non-fixed" does not mean that large displacements are allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting board to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting board can be determined (stable front and back position, allowing small vibrations), and the shape of the light emitting board can be By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and back with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in directions other than the front and rear directions (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of vibrations generated from the vibration means on the light emitting board compared to when the light emitting board is fixed to the holding means in the same way as the vibration means, thereby improving the positional stability of the light emitting board. can be increased.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means; regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, the fixing means moving toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction; Gaming machine R4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the advancing direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the advancing direction is restricted, even if the fixation by the fixing means becomes loose (even if some of the fixing means become loose), the displacement of the fixing means will be less than the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of progress. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R2 to R4, a change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting board is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting board. can be done.

Thereby, by designing the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in different ways, it is possible to produce an excellent effect. For example, a surface emitting means that produces uniform light emission by surface emitting is arranged as the first refracting means that receives and refracts the light irradiated from the first displacement region, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show high brightness light to the player by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). By doing so, it is possible to perform an innovative light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) differs from region to region.

Note that the manner in which displacement is suppressed is not limited at all. For example, the mode of suppression may be determined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or the mode of suppression may be determined by the manner in which the light emitting substrate is held.

For example, in terms of the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the areas located at the same position from each vibration means are such that the influence from one vibration means is canceled out by the influence from the other vibration means. , displacement may be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5 includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing part arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the opposing portion are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing part, the fastening relationship deteriorates further when the fastening screw becomes loose. This can be prevented.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as to what to do after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, if a tightening screw becomes loose, it may be configured to be able to detect the loosening electrically, or an opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibrating device to detect the loosening of the tightening screw. It may be configured so that if the device is vibrated when the device is loosened, an abnormal noise is generated and the user notices the loosening, or the device may be configured so that the loosened portion is repaired through regular maintenance without providing any special notification.

Any one of the game machines R1 to R6 includes a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting board, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deforming in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. A gaming machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is configured in such a manner that it is easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as expanding and contracting, and the favorable and unfavorable effects will change periodically. This is not desirable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that is reduced. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in situations where the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the direction in which the member and the second member face each other is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to vibration by the vibration means, and the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed together can be increased. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the printed circuit board.

Note that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed such that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load generated on the connecting means may be configured to vary in each direction.

Further, the manner in which the load is switched in the direction of pressing against each other is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Features gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical philosophy of the side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the component>
A light emitting means configured to be able to emit light; and a light guiding means configured to be able to guide light; A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide means; and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that LED light enters from the end of a plate-shaped member and exits from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 (see official bulletin). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, wherein the light guide means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, even if the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. It is possible to perform an effect that causes the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine S1 or S2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, the accommodating means supporting the light emitting board and the light guiding means. a supporting means fixed at least at a first position, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is located at a position outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming machine S3 can loosen the fixation at the first position while the shielding means is assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guide means, and maintenance efficiency can be improved.

Note that the mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guiding means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch it but still be able to see it, or it may be constructed so that the player cannot touch or see the light guiding means. You may do so.

In addition, when the first positions are formed at multiple locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the multiple first positions may be located outside the outer shape of the shielding means. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting board is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means is in the shape of a long plate, and the first position is located at the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3, the light guide means is shaped like a long plate and the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, so that the fixation of the first position can be loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guiding means, the positional deviation of the light guiding means can be easily corrected.

Specifically, by compensating for the positional deviation of the light guiding means by deforming the light guiding means in the lateral direction, or by compensating for the slippage caused by applying a strong load, Even if only one end is loosened and the other end remains fixed, the positional shift of the light guiding means can be easily corrected.

Furthermore, in the case of a support mode in which the light-emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light-guiding means, the degree to which the light-emitting substrate is supported by the support means can be weakened as the light-guiding means bends and deforms. Therefore, even without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means, by loosening the fixation at the first position and flexing the light guiding means, the degree of support for the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and in this state, a load is applied to the light emitting substrate. By giving , it is possible to correct the positional shift of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, there is a design basis in which the external shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not shift to the extent that it completely deviates from the irradiation direction. The adjustment range may be just enough to correct the positional deviation in the area (small adjustment range), or based on a design that secures a large adjustment range in advance, the part to be irradiated by the light guide means can be adjusted in the irradiation direction based on the external shape of the light emitting means. The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect that is visually recognized during the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when preparing gaming machines with the same configuration to be able to play games with different playability (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications), it is possible to do so without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part. Since the aspect of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guiding means, the burden (for example, cost) associated with manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited at all. For example, any aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Moreover, the term "edge" is an expression of the intention to avoid being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be placed at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is reduced. A gaming machine S5, characterized in that the displacement prevention part includes a fixing part to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, and misalignment or chipping of the wiring will directly affect the malfunction of the light emitting means. Preferably, the structure is such that misalignment between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

Considering the performance effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means should be able to be easily aligned in case of misalignment with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that misalignment with the light emitting substrate should not occur easily. , it may be better to hold it on the supporting means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, there is a risk that the light guiding means and the shielding means will collide with each other, resulting in poor appearance, so it may be better to hold the light guide means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a part that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the support means serving as the base in consideration of strength. As described above, various support modes were expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the positional shift prevention section, the mutual positioning of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily performed during assembly without directly fixing them. Not only this, but also the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily maintained during the game.

Note that the form of the positional displacement prevention section is not limited at all. For example, the recesses and recesses may have the same shape and can be fitted, the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a shape that remains unchanged along the assembly direction, or the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a convexity that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guiding means includes a main body, a separating extending portion extending from the main body toward a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extending portion. an opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means and having a cross-sectional shape of A game machine S6 characterized in that it is provided with a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total internal reflection light emitting section from entering the parts other than the opposing extension part, so that the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part can be suppressed from entering the part other than the opposing extension part and the part other than the separating extension part and the opposing extension part. It is possible to make a clear boundary between the two and to make it possible to perform an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) with a short boundary.

Note that the manner in which total reflection is performed is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, a combination thereof, etc.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guiding means is formed from a frame shape that forms a covering part covered by the light emitting board and an outer shape of the covering part, and has a similar shape to the outer shape of the light emitting board. A gaming machine S7 comprising: a frame portion provided with a frame portion, wherein the opposing extending portion extends from the covered portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S6, since light can be made to enter the frame from the connection point, the effect of the light emitting production of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension part is By functioning as reinforcing ribs, it is possible to improve the strength of the light guiding means.

According to this, if the frame extends to the rear of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the light emitting direction is illuminated.

In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized in that it is spaced apart.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension part, an end part where light can enter the frame part in the longitudinal direction and an end part where light incidence is restricted are provided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the light emitting effect using the frame can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at a projected position of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separation extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is reduced. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving a sense of discomfort to a player while keeping the values uniform. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical philosophy of top light emitting means. Points for changing the way the light shines depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light; and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, the light-receiving means having a first light-receiving means configured to receive light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first manner; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured such that LED light enters from the edge of a planar member and exits from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in response to a difference in distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, even if the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that causes the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodation means for accommodating the light emitting means, and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodation means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting board. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the gaming machine T3 comprises a dividing means for dividing an area into which the light receiving means is divided, and the light receiving means is configured so that the way the light is illuminated changes depending on the area divided by the dividing means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is placed at the boundary where the way the light receiving means illuminates changes, so the way the light receiving means illuminates can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the game is played. Thereby, even if the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light-emitting production using the light-emitting substrates.

A game machine T4, in the game machine T3, wherein the light emitting board is aligned by the partitioning means supporting the light emitting board from a direction opposing the biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, assembly work can be facilitated by making it easier to align the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light-emitting substrate can be easily aligned during use. It is possible to suppress misalignment between the partitioning means and the partitioning means.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed in correspondence with the shape of the light emitting section disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means includes a through hole that is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partitioning means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion part can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting part disposed on the light emitting board and does not receive the insertion part, and the non-insertion through hole is A gaming machine T6, characterized in that an opening is formed in such a manner that the further away from the light emitting board it is, the opening becomes larger, and the surface thereof is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is made larger compared to the area where the light emitting means is formed. I can do it.

In gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface that intersects with the light-conducting portion, and the cut-out boundary surface is a part of the light-conducting portion. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the gaming machine T8 is arranged at a position where the front-rear surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it moves forward, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting section extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting section is formed in a line shape including the base end of the insertion section. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means is made easier to see as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from point light sources). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<A point consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means that generates a fixing force in a first direction, and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by comprising: second fixing means that generates a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the second direction.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is constructed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front and rear directions (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the shape of the structure is determined by the arrangement of the fixing means, resulting in a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when inserting a fastening screw that is inserted into the fixing means in the front-rear direction, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be placed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. In other words, the area where the fixing means can be placed actually coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, so the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be placed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting board from the back side needs to be made larger than the light emitting board to accommodate the fixing means. This limits the size of the light emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw that fixes the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are inserted along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the player is inserted, it is possible to secure a wider performance area on the side that is visible to the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that its outer surface includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, since the external surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the external surface is about to deform due to external force, there is sufficient resistance. A force can be generated, and deformation of the external surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force is provided at at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are composed of resin molded products and the cutting direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the cutting direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

Note that the structure of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the fixing from loosening, or a loosening regulating means that restricts further loosening when the fixing becomes loose.

The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means includes a reporting means capable of reporting a fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that loosening of the fastening screw can be detected at an early stage.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically reporting such as a detection means such as a sensor, or it may be a structural means that causes a change in appearance. Structural means include, for example, a transmission change means that changes the transmission intensity of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light production change means that blocks light emission from the inside and generates a shadow that can be seen from the outside, An example of this is a vibration notification means that makes contact with a vibrating part of a vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or intensify the vibration to alert the player.

Any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4 includes a third means disposed between the first means and the second means, and the third means is arranged between the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means can generate resistance force in a plurality of directions as component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may have a configuration in which the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, by setting the side where the gap between the first surface and the second surface is wider as the first means side and the side where the distance is narrower as the second means side, while ensuring a wide area that the player can see, the side that is not visible can be The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can interfere with each other when viewed from the front, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the images can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, in any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, wherein the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in pairs with predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, since the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged as a pair with a predetermined interval, the effect of one of the fixing means Deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, loosening of the fixing means can be avoided.

<The rigidity of the game board compensates for the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and a facing means whose edges are arranged opposite to the game board, the facing means has proximal parts arranged close to the game board at the left and right edges. , a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area, and a back case in which a movable unit and the like are disposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, making it difficult to secure enough space for the arrangement of movable units, etc. The problem was that it was difficult.

In particular, in right-handed machines where the game is played with the right hand in a variable probability state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the gaming area, so It was required to secure an internal space in the back case on the back side of the flow path (flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, since the formation of the proximal portion is asymmetrical, the arrangement of the left and right edges of the means facing the game board can be made asymmetrical, so that either the left or right Instead of sacrificing the internal area of the opposing means, it is possible to easily secure the internal area of either the left or the right opposing means. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the means facing the game board can be improved, and sufficient space can be secured for the arrangement of movable units, etc., and the degree of freedom in presentation that can be seen by players through the game board can be improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed play channel) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a moving character, or by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

Note that the manner in which the proximal portion is formed is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, it may be placed away from the game board, or it may be a combination thereof.

Note that the form of the proximal portion is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the connection part (contact part) used for connection with the game board is not formed, or to suppress the area occupied by the connection part (contact part) and then (contact portion) may be arranged.

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction in which the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, or the functional part (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened) disposed in the proximal part may be asymmetrical. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or other direction), or the number of formed fastening parts may be left-right asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement part in which the proximal part is formed at an end on the game board side and is disposed opposite to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximal part is formed in a direction in which the proximal part is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement part. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by having an asymmetrical configuration.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement parts can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. Note that the form in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction on both the left and right sides), or may be formed in a direction that intersects the left and right sides (for example, a perpendicular direction).

Examples of the forming direction include the extending direction (installing direction) in which the plate-like portion is extended, the recessing direction (shaving direction) in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximal portion includes an opposing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board, and an opposing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared to a portion on the left side of the gaming board. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the right side of the gaming board has a larger proportion of the opposing sides than the opposing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the horizontal width occupied by the adjacent portion can be made narrower on the right side of the game board than on the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4, which is any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, and includes a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. Note that the arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts the opposing means), or it may be arranged at a position away from the opposing means (including a position where it abuts the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it comes into contact with at least one of the game board or the facing means).

In gaming machine ZA4, gaming machine ZA5 is characterized in that the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (secure rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member to the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping part that overlaps the outermost surface of the opposing means in front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in designing the interior of the gaming board, so while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength (ensuring rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the opposing means may include a non-contacting portion that does not contact the gaming board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the gaming board side. Characteristic gaming machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contacting part is used as the location for the drive device of the variable winning opening, and the drive device It can be effectively used as a path for wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or as a location for a light emitting device.

In any of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is formed of a resin material, the opposing means includes a presentation means disposed between the game board, and the front end of the presentation means is arranged between the game board and the game board. A gaming machine ZA8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be placed in front of the front end of the opposing means.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the presentation means can also be expanded to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
A game comprising: a light emitting means that irradiates light to a predetermined light emitting area; and a displacement means configured such that a first position that at least partially overlaps with the light emitting area when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of a displacement section. A gaming machine ZB1, wherein the light emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that a light emitting device and a displacement device overlap when viewed from the front (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem in that the light emitting means and the displacement means were only visible individually, and the presentation effect using the overlapping was insufficient. That is, since the displacement means is disposed in front of the light emitting means, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means, resulting in a problem that the presentation effect is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, so that it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (attitude) of the displacement means, the light emission mode of the light emitting means disposed on the displacement means, etc. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and the like. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means, and the like. Examples of the orientation (attitude) of the displacement means include cases where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, cases where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and cases where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

Examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means include a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the side away from the displacement means, lights up, blinks, or turns off. is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case in which the light emission mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player can be improved while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting section is disposed, and a refracting means arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting section, and the substrate A gaming machine ZB3, characterized in that the refraction means includes a first refraction section that is arranged outside the possible area when viewed from the direction, and the refraction means overlaps the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light that is visually recognized through the first refracting section is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting section and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. It can be expressed by

In addition, by narrowing the area in which the substrate is formed, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components, such as a drive device that generates a driving force for the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the light emitting means occupies a small space. Therefore, the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacing means can be suppressed, and the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacing means can be secured to the maximum extent.

Note that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be compared. The comparison may include the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and that are displaced.

In any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. A gaming machine ZB5, characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means that is visually recognized through the possible area is determined by determining at which position in the displacement section the displacement means is arranged. It can be changed by

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the gaming machine ZB6 is characterized in that the possible area is arranged at the center of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be viewed.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner in which the possible areas are arranged is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, they may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is in one place), or they may be circular (arc) surrounding the window.

Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the board is not provided with a fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side. ZB7.

According to the game machine ZB7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and also to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from appearing in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, in the gaming machine ZB7, further comprising a covering means that is covered in such a manner as to cover the space between the possible area and the board when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the possible area and the board is hidden by the covering means, there is no possibility that the visibility of light may deteriorate near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 is provided with a board holding means for holding the board, the board holding means is provided with a gap forming part that forms a gap to facilitate assembly of the board, and the gap forming part is A game machine ZB9 characterized in that it is closed in an assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part facilitates the assembly of the board, and it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and for positioning the other members.

In any of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment can be generated starting from the end on the possible area side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the board cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and cutoff>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means in a predetermined state. A gaming machine comprising a transmission means, wherein the transmission means includes a transmission part that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the drive means, the transmission part transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means. A game machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to suppress displacement when the displacement means is not brought into contact with the portion.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar section, it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar section while maintaining the posture of the displacement member. There was a problem with that.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission section is not in contact with the transmission section, so the transmission section can be used for other effects while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

Note that the mode of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

Note that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or the elastic force of a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) with a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member that functions as a stopper. It may also be in a form where it is done. Furthermore, examples of the suppression possible include a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (regulating) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmitting means includes a forming part formed along a movement locus of the transmitting part, and the forming part is configured such that the transmitting part is non-aligned with respect to the displacing means in the moving direction of the displacing means. A game machine ZC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of contact.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming part and the displacing means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacing means against external forces is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming part extends from the transmitting part along the displacement direction of the transmitting means, and the distance between the forming part and the displacing means is longer than the distance between the transmitting part and the displacing means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, in the opposing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means, a part where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a part where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially separated. You can shift the target.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional section formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and a function part formed on the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. the other side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the formation part, and the other side functional part is formed on the outside of the movement locus of the formation part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC3, the movement direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming part can be set to one side.

In any of gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to move the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. An embodiment may also be adopted in which the ratio of the applied driving force is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

A gaming machine ZC6, characterized in that the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Note that the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced, or it may be configured such that the transmission or cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed. It is also possible to use one that does not displace.

Furthermore, in the case where the timing includes synchronized displacement, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7 characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set to be opposite to each other in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually visible in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means Even if the performance area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective performance can be performed.

Note that the form of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of displacement means laminated in the front and rear may be extended to a common area at different times, or the initial arrangement may be such that the displacement means are laminated in the front and back, but the plurality of movable members pass through a common area during movement. It may be configured.

<By catching up and coming into contact with the load generating part, the stop position is prevented from shifting>
In a gaming machine comprising a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to displace the first displacing means by displacing in a predetermined direction, the second displacing means comprises: The first displacement means includes a load generation section that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the part is configured to be able to separate from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and come into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. ZD1.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the cylinder part moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may deviate from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. Even if the first displacement means is disposed at an unintended position, this can prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction to the predetermined portion with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to give money to players.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generation part moves toward the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the one end in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a drive means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating section is arranged in contact with the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction than the loaded section. A gaming machine ZD3 is characterized by a close contact.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generation section and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if timing accuracy is low, it is possible to easily maintain the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from their terminal positions while abruptly setting the first displacement means and the second displacement means to stop.

In addition, by providing a part that takes measures against the rare occurrence of excessive movement of the second displacement means at a location different from the loaded part that receives the load in each drive force transmission, the loaded part Even if it is deformed, the fail-safe function can be performed without any problem.

A gaming machine ZD4, which is one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, further comprising a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in a predetermined direction by the restriction means, the second displacement means is It can be independently displaced with respect to one displacement means.

Note that the mode of the regulating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that moves in and out and engages in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement means, it may be restricted by gravity or an urging force of an elastic member, or it may be a part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

Any one of gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means is configured to detect that the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZD5, comprising a detected part whose position is detected by a means, and wherein the load generating part comes into contact with the detected part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life span that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, detection failure based on damage to the detection piece can be determined. It is possible to know when to replace the displacement means (maintenance time).

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the loaded section. The gaming machine ZD6 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine ZD6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first displacement means can be operated in a plurality of directions.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the gaming machine ZD7 is characterized in that the loaded section and the predetermined section are arranged at a predetermined distance apart in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, so that the loaded part The area required for arranging the and predetermined portions can be narrowed.

<Technical idea to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of tracking means>
In a game machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area, and a follow-up means that follows the displacement of the displacement means, a prevention that prevents a predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side. A gaming machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of a displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the length of the wiring is set in comparison with the displacement means, which has the advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form temporary fixing parts in various parts of the displacement means to temporarily fix the wiring to prevent relative displacement, and in addition, it is necessary to place the displacement means in a predetermined position while running the wiring through the temporary fixation parts. It usually takes a long time to assemble because it has to be assembled one by one. This poses a problem in that it may lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in design and a decrease in assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZE1, the following means, such as wiring, is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, so that the following means is not damaged by rubbing against the displacement means. Can be suppressed. This eliminates the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing parts on the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the game machine ZE1, the game machine ZE2 is characterized in that the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs as the displacement means is displaced.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in such a manner that it can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacing means changes as the displacing means is displaced. Compared to the case where the position of the following means is fixed with a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the following means can be reduced.

Note that the form of the prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the following means can be wrapped, or a claw-like part which can hold the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar part, for example, the columnar part may be formed as a fastening part used for fastening and fixing members together, or used for positioning when assembling members. It may also be formed as a positioning part.

Further, the form of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it may be a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-shaped performance member that assists in the performance, or it may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates a biasing force to assist the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be supplied to the displacement means in a good manner.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means largely protrudes to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be placed on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is not necessary to construct an escape portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 is characterized in that it includes a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visible to the player. Note that the term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is the edge in a front view.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the gaming machine ZE6 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at the outer edge of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the external shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides a rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is disposed on a straight line passing through the first axis. The gaming machine ZE7 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the gaming machine ZE8 is characterized in that the displacement means includes a guide section that guides the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent friction with the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

Gaming machine ZE9 is characterized in that the guide section extends in a direction perpendicular to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following means is directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in a pulling direction from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the following means. Thereby, the entire following means can balance the load applied from the guide section.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a direction in which it loosens when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, excessive load on the following means is suppressed by absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the following means. can do.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11 is provided with a positioning means in which the following means is arranged between the displacement means and a positioning section for positioning the positioning means, the positioning section being A gaming machine ZE12 characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, it is possible to avoid the positioning section from encroaching on the displacement space of the following means, so that the displacement of the following means is reduced due to the displacement of the displacing means. It is possible to minimize the load caused by

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement part (weak displacement part) and a displacement set larger than that of the first displacement part. a second displacement part (strong displacement part), and the first displacement part is arranged between the second displacement part and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, since it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

Note that the manner of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in multiple directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

A gaming machine ZE14 in the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, wherein the preventing means includes a protruding part that protrudes from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled from above to the arranging means while the arranging means supports the following means which sag due to its own weight, so that the following means and the arranging means can be assembled from above to the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical philosophy that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) with forward and reverse rotation>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the drive means, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means, The drive means is configured to be operable in a first drive mode in which a drive force is generated in a first direction and a second drive mode in which a drive force is generated in a second direction different from the first direction, and the displacement means A gaming machine ZF1 is configured to be able to be displaced in a first displacement mode driven by the first drive mode and a second displacement mode driven by the second drive mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as follows (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means only changes depending on the length of driving the drive device in the forward direction, and the drive direction of the drive device can be switched between forward and reverse. Even if the first displacement means and the second displacement means were to be displaced together. Therefore, there has been a problem in that the degree of improvement in performance effect achieved by employing a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as a drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. It is possible to sufficiently improve the performance effect used.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it includes a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects with the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. It is possible to create a glittering performance that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmitting means, and the transmitting means is configured to suppress the displacement of the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode or the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppressing means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the transmission means is unintentionally displaced when the transmission of driving force is suppressed by the displacement suppressing means, so that the transmission means is displaced in an unintended manner. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than when the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means with an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easily visible to the player.

Note that the form of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, an engagement device that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper device, or a resistance device that generates resistance due to its own weight may be used, or in cases where the resistance due to its own weight is likely to be insufficient (for example, when the displacement of the displacement means In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), it is not possible to suppress the idling motion by the force of gravity. Therefore, for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance is variable depending on the displacement mode may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppressing area is lower than a predetermined speed. , the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 is arranged such that it can be detected.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means. It can be used for both detection.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotationally displaces the first displacement means centering on the first axis, and a second displacement means rotationally displaces the outside of the first displacement means centering on the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, and configured to be able to suppress displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode, so that this suppression is possible. In a state where the second displacement means is placed between the player and the first displacement means and blocks the field of view, there is a case where the second displacement means is placed between the player and the first displacement means and blocks the field of view. It is possible to configure two performance modes in which the second displacement means does not block the second displacement means, and in addition, displacement is also possible in a drive mode in which the displacement of the second displacement means is not suppressed, so the performance by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three displacement modes. be able to.

A gaming machine ZF6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmission means includes a light transmission means formed from a light-transmitting material on a side connected to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmission means facilitates the assembly of the displacement means, and the light emission effect is achieved by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of making it possible.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotates and displaces about a first axis, and a transmission means of the first displacement means that rotates and displaces about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outward from a connection position of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. The featured gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means. This makes it unnecessary to provide a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
a first operating means configured to be operable by a player; a second operating means disposed at a different position from the first operating means and configured to be operable by a player; A gaming machine ZG1 characterized in that it is provided with a load generating means arranged on the second operating means side and configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a plurality of operating devices and a drive device for performing an effect to drive the operating devices (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, which increases the space required to arrange each operating device and tends to limit the number of operating devices that can be arranged. In addition, there are problems in that the cost increases due to the increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, so the load generating means is connected to the first operating means and the second operating means (i.e. , a plurality of operating means). Thereby, the space necessary for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operating means that can be arranged can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the form of the load generation means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that is capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means that generates a load at a predetermined period like a pump, or a means that is composed of an arm member whose posture changes according to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the aspect of the load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or the load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be transmitted in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine ZG2 characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means in the gaming machine ZG1.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG1, it is possible to transmit the load to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a game ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means includes a cover that at least partially covers the first operating means from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3 characterized in that it is disposed in an installation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the hand and fingers of the player who operates the first operating means are sandwiched between the first operating means and the first operating means. In this way, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, the covering means may be placed in a position where the player's fingers can easily pass during the process of movement of the player's fingers, such as bringing the player's finger close to the first operating means and then removing the finger from the first operating means after the operation is completed. (By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from a direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers), it is possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player while the fingers are moving.

Further, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the player's fingers come into contact with a high probability when operating the first operating means, the load on the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

Note that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generation means in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a different position from the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means is interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and is configured to be able to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means. A gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the intensity of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the intensity of vibration transmission to the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG3, it is possible to concentrate load transmission to the first operating means side.

A gaming machine ZG5 in the gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured to be able to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means operate (vibrate) in conjunction with each other due to the load applied to the pachinko machine by a player, etc., when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means It is possible to perform an effect in which the operating means and the second operating means are strongly moved (vibrated).

A gaming machine ZG6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, and is equipped with a holding means that holds the load generating means so as to be displaceable, and the holding means is equipped with a guide section that guides the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by specifying the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent problems such as the displaced member being displaced by the vibration of the load generating means unintentionally colliding with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generation means itself, if the load generation means is guided in the desired direction, the load generation means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

A gaming machine ZG7, characterized in that the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction crossing the direction in which it is guided by the guide section.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. It is possible to displace the load generating means in different manners. Thereby, the performance effect of the load generation means can be improved.

Note that various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may be configured to intersect with the guiding direction of the guide section, or the load generating means may be provided between the holding means and the second holding means. It may also be configured such that a flexible member is interposed therebetween, and the displacement occurs due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means as covering means (P9 policy 2)>
The covering device comprises a frame means having a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be able to vibrate, A game machine ZH1 characterized in that the means includes a permissible part that is allowed to be displaced, and is configured to be able to transmit vibrations of the vibrating means via the permissible part.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a front frame and a vibration means disposed in front of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that vibrations exceeding a predetermined intensity are not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the perspective of vibration production. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed on the covering means and displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibrations can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing vibrations by displacement of the covering means, transmission of vibrations to the frame means side can be suppressed. This makes it possible to increase the permissible vibration intensity of the vibration means.

Note that the form of the permissive portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode that assumes displacement of slides, links, gears, etc., and displacement occurs due to the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or it may be made of a material or structure that is different from other parts. It may be of a flexible configuration and may be displaced when overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the permissible amount of displacement in the horizontal direction. .

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing part is maintained by horizontal displacement, while the player places a hand on the covering means, etc. in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being excessively displaced and causing the player's posture to be disturbed. That is, by keeping the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

A gaming machine ZH3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is constructed in the shape of a bag with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in the shape of an open bag, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite to each other. It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means, which contact each other and transmit vibrations. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the main board, ball passage, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement section disposed on the frame means side, the frame means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section, and the vibration means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section; The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the support portion has a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing vibration transmission to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement part is Compared to a case where the vibration means is hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibration means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to largely displace the covering means on which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering part and a second covering part having lower deformation resistance than the first covering part, and the vibrating means A gaming machine ZH5, characterized in that the game machine ZH5 includes an abutting part that is connected to the first covering part and the second covering part and can locally come into contact with the first covering part.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally abutting the first covered part with high deformation resistance and the abutting part, the abutting position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covered part with respect to the contact position.

Any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5 is provided with a ball firing operating means operated to fire a game ball toward a gaming area, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball firing operating means and the ball firing operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by using a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacing objects>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a light emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and configured to be able to perform a light emitting effect (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no disposed member that can be displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emitting effect because the data capacity was compressed and the board became large for the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement of the displacement means prevents interference with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring this to be possible, the mode of the light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the mode of light emission can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and the size of the board can be reduced by eliminating the need for data for control and the need for a circuit for control. can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

Note that the mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, rotation, linear sliding, or displacement along a predetermined curve may be used. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide coincides with a predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide crosses the predetermined direction. The outer shape can be easily maintained.

Note that the form of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects with the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, or it may be configured such that the member protrudes from the inside and is scaled up or down even if the posture does not change. The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

The form of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around the irradiation target means, or it may be configured to slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiation target means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the manner in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may also be the form.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The form of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed in position or may be configured to be movable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacing means, or the light emitting means and the displacing means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that it slides toward and away from the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means, or it moves around the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means. It may also be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or it may be one that can be switched between lighting and extinguishing.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the gaming machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . Note that, according to this, the irradiation target means may be a displaceable means or a non-displaceable means.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve attention to the irradiated means.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be a slow displacement (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4, which is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, wherein the irradiation means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make different parts illuminated and highlighted by light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the external shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, a gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that, while the direction in which the irradiated means reflects light is the same, at least one of the amount of light or the color of the light is different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, a non-radiator configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated means with light in an irradiation manner such that the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized unnecessarily darkly.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiation means can be placed in a shielding position where it can shield the first irradiation means and the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means. and a second irradiated means configured such that the first irradiated means has an area of the light emitting means when viewed in the optical axis direction compared to a case where the second irradiated means is not disposed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7, characterized in that the second irradiation target means is configured to be smaller when it is placed at the shielding position.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of blocking light can be improved. Note that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light onto the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect with the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8 is provided with a driving means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiation target means and a displacement means disposed around the irradiation target means, and the irradiation target means A game machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface thereof faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position. .

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means ( For example, the switching timing between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

Note that the displacement mode of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis perpendicular to the display surface of the display area.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiation means or the irradiation means has a surface facing the light emitting means, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed toward the player.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light depending on whether the displacement means is placed in the first position or the second position. The difference in the extent to which light travels toward the player can be increased.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to A game characterized in that in any of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, and ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-234152).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in load transmission. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve load transmission.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to technical idea 1 includes a first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement means configured to be able to displace the first displacement means by displacement in a predetermined direction. The second displacement means includes a load generator that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes: , a loaded part receiving a load from the load generating part, wherein the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and moves to a predetermined position different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. It is configured to be able to come into contact with the part.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the load generating section is arranged in the predetermined direction with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. It is configured such that a load can be applied to the predetermined portion from the other side to the one side.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating section is configured to be able to drive the second displacement section. also comes into contact with the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, load transmission can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the displacement mode of the first displacement means when an overload occurs.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, driving force transmission can be improved.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 Game board (gaming means)
14 Front frame (closure means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of the receiving plate)
50 Lower tray (part of the receiving tray, part of the game ball holding part)
51 Operation handle (part of the first operation means, ball firing operation means)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage section (foul ball passage)
159 Opening/closing regulation section (occlusion regulation section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion restriction part, part of elimination means)
180 Movable binding member (part of placement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of the second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of the continuous hit determination means, part of the position difference detection means, part of the movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous stroke determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous stroke discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 Opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connecting pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 Front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
500 Right panel unit (direction means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate part (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib portion (contact means)
540 Light guiding member (third means, light guiding means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Panel support device (state change means)
620 Front rotation claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotation post-claw member (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 Petal (part of second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 Loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulation part (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (support means, part of repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right inclined surface (part of the ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal main body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of the operation means, part of the operation section)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of the connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of game ball holding part)
6411 Main body (permissible part)
6413 Projection shaped part
6414 Recessed shape part
6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcement rib (part of the receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of the connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light passing hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylindrical part (part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange part (pull boundary surface part)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Post-guide fastening part (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Projecting rib (part of suppressing means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppressing means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate part (part of external surface)
6554a Threaded part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Division member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodation means, part of division means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulating means)
6570 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodation means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of the opposing part, part of the suppressing means, part of the notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of opposing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guiding means)
6731 Light receiving surface section (part of second light guiding means, part of main body part, covering part)
6732 Inner extension part (part of frame)
6733 External extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of first light guide means, opposing extension part)
6735 Fin (part of first light guide means, separation extension part)
6736 Through hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of displacement prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illumination board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting section (part of total internal reflection light emitting section)
D23 Streak part
D24 End streaked part (part of the streaked part)
E1 Notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 Inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bending part)
V13, V14 gap
21051 Handle support plate (prescribed member)
21410 Covering foundation member (part of covering means, second covering part)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering part)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generation means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Projection part (part of the arrangement part)
21530 Covering cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 Projection part (part of guide part)
21540 Opposing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 Shell-like overhang (contact part)
De3 Overhang part (support part)
A310 Rear case (opposing means)
A312 External wall part (part of adjacent part, arrangement part, opposite side)
A312a Notch part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposing surface)
A73 Outer edge member (part of suppressing means)
75 Metal plate member (part of suppressing means)
A86 Center frame (part of the window)
A400 1st operation unit (part of production means)
A411 Main body (part of covering means)
A415 Diffusion plate (refraction means)
A416 Illumination board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting part)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 Board fixing plate (board holding means)
A417h Notch part (gap forming part)
A426 Detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 Slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission protrusion (part of prescribed part)
A455e Detection plate part (part of the detection part)
A456a Projection plate part (one side functional part, loaded part)
A456b Opposing arrangement part (other side functional part, part of prescribed part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Gear with pin (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A464 Arc wall part (forming part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box part (part of shielding means)
A475 Fastening part (part of prevention means, protruding part)
A480 Rear lid part (part of arrangement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (positioning part)
A490 Second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Shaft supported protrusion (1st shaft)
A491d2 Projection part (part of guide part)
A511 Slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (non-shielding light emitting means)
A720 Rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell part (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 Second support part (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 Slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A4550 Decorative member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin wall part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 Projection (part of prevention means)
AC1 1st area (part of light emitting area)
AC2 second region (part of light emitting region, first region, first refraction section)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa intermediate part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ optical axis
UL1 upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 Lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 Game board (gaming means)
14 Front frame (closure means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of the receiving plate)
50 Lower tray (part of the receiving tray, part of the game ball holding part)
51 Operation handle (part of the first operation means, ball firing operation means)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage section (foul ball passage)
159 Opening/closing regulation section (occlusion regulation section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion restriction part, part of elimination means)
180 Movable binding member (part of placement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of the second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous stroke determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous stroke discrimination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 Opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connecting pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 Front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protrusion)
500 Right panel unit (direction means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate part (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib portion (contact means)
540 Light guiding member (third means, light guiding means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Panel support device (state change means)
620 Front rotation claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotation post-claw member (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 Petal (part of second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 Loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulation part (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (support means, part of repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right inclined surface (part of the ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal main body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
10310 Swing operation member (part of the operation means, part of the operation section)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of the connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of game ball holding part)
6411 Main body (permissible part)
6413 Projected portion 6414 Recessed portion 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right side reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left side reinforcement rib (part of the receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of the connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protrusion (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light passing hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylindrical part (part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange part (pull boundary surface part)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Post-guide fastening part (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Projecting rib (part of suppressing means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppressing means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate part (part of external surface)
6554a Threaded part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Division member (first member, part of first means, part of accommodation means, part of division means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large diameter cylindrical part (part of regulating means)
6570 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodation means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of the opposing part, part of the suppressing means, part of the notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance recess (part of opposing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illumination board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guiding means)
6731 Light receiving surface section (part of second light guiding means, part of main body part, covering part)
6732 Inner extension part (part of frame)
6733 External extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of first light guide means, opposing extension part)
6735 Fin (part of first light guide means, separation extension part)
6736 Through hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (part of displacement prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illumination board (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting section (part of total internal reflection light emitting section)
D23 Striped portion D24 End striped portion (part of the striped portion)
E1 Notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 Inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bending part)
V13, V14 Gap 21051 Handle support plate (prescribed member)
21410 Covering foundation member (part of covering means, second covering part)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering part)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generation means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Projection part (part of the arrangement part)
21530 Covering cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 Projection part (part of guide part)
21540 Opposing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 Shell-like overhang (contact part)
De3 Overhang part (support part)
A310 Rear case (opposing means)
A312 External wall part (part of adjacent part, arrangement part, opposite side)
A312a Notch part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate part (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposing surface)
A73 Outer edge member (part of suppressing means)
75 Metal plate member (part of suppressing means)
A86 Center frame (part of the window)
A400 1st operation unit (part of production means)
A411 Main body (part of covering means)
A415 Diffusion plate (refraction means)
A416 Illumination board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting part)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 Board fixing plate (board holding means)
A417h Notch part (gap forming part)
A426 Detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 Slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission protrusion (part of prescribed part)
A455e Detection plate part (part of the detection part)
A456a Projection plate part (one side functional part, loaded part)
A456b Opposing arrangement part (other side functional part, part of prescribed part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Gear with pin (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A464 Arc wall part (forming part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box part (part of shielding means)
A475 Fastening part (part of prevention means, protruding part)
A480 Rear lid part (part of arrangement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (positioning part)
A490 Second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Shaft supported protrusion (1st shaft)
A491d2 Projection part (part of guide part)
A511 Slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (non-shielding light emitting means)
A720 Rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell part (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 Second support part (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 Slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generation part)
A4550 Decorative member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin wall part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 Projection (part of prevention means)
AC1 1st area (part of light emitting area)
AC2 second region (part of light emitting region, first region, first refraction section)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa intermediate part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ Optical axis UL1 upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 Lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to displace the first displacing means by displacing in a predetermined direction,
The second displacement means includes a load generation section that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means,
The first displacement means includes a loaded part that receives a load from the load generating part,
The load generating section is configured to be able to separate from the loaded section during displacement along the predetermined direction and come into contact with a predetermined section different from the loaded section of the first displacement means. A gaming machine. The load generating section is capable of applying a load to the predetermined section from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows. comprising a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the load generating section abuts the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction from the loaded section.

Images